Prepress OLH

Apogee
Workflow Software
Reference Guide
2 TRADEMARKS, COPYRIGHT AND EULA
Trademarks, Copyright Agfa and the Agfa rhombus are trademarks of Agfa-Gevaert NV or its affiliates.
and EULA Apogee and Asanti are trademarks of Agfa Offset BV.
Those names and product names not mentioned here are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
For more information about Agfa products, visit www.agfa.com or contact us at the following address:
Agfa Offset BV
Septestraat 27
B-2640 Mortsel, Belgium
Tel: (+)32 3 444 2111
Date of Issue: February 2022

Copyright © 2022 Agfa Offset BV, Belgium
All software and hardware described in this document are subject to change without notice.
Apogee Reference Guide

3
End User License Agreement
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE
This package includes one or more diskette(s), CD-ROM(s), and/or DVD(s) containing copies of APOGEE™
software programs and documentation relating thereto, and an associated dongle.
You should carefully read the following terms and conditions before accepting this License Agreement, and
installing and using this Software (as defined below). This License Agreement ("Agreement") is a legal agreement
between You and Agfa Offset BV, Septestraat 27, B-2640 Mortsel, Belgium ("AGFA"), and describes the terms and
conditions pursuant to which AGFA shall license to You this Software, provided however that in the event a
hardcopy license agreement with respect to the Software is signed by or on behalf of both You and AGFA whose
terms vary from this Agreement, then such signed hardcopy license agreement shall govern Your Use of the
Software. In this License Agreement "You" means, and "Your" refers to, the corporation or other entity that obtains
the Software and enters into this Agreement, including both the reader and any corporate licensee.
BY INSTALLING, COPYING OR OTHERWISE USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ACCEPT, AND AGREE TO BE BOUND
BY, THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE
TERMS, DO NOT INSTALL, COPY OR OTHERWISE USE THE SOFTWARE, AND YOU MAY RETURN THE
SOFTWARE, WITH PROOF OF PAYMENT, FOR A FULL REFUND TO THE PLACE OF PURCHASE WITHIN THIRTY
(30) DAYS OF THE PURCHASE DATE.
You are licensed to use the Software on the following terms and conditions:
2. DEFINITIONS
2.1 "AGFA order form" means the electronic or hard copy order form by which You have ordered the Software.
2.2 "Authorised Users" means the number of users who concurrently may have access to the Software at any
one time, as specified in the AGFA order form that is incorporated and made part of this Agreement by
reference.
2.3 "Confidential Information" means this Agreement, including all of its terms, and all its amendments and
addenda, all Software listings, Documentation, information, data, tests, specifications, trade secrets, object
code and machine-readable copies of the Software, and any other proprietary information supplied to You
by AGFA, or by You to AGFA and clearly marked as "confidential information", including all items defined
as "confidential information" in any other agreement between You and AGFA executed prior to the date of
this Agreement.
2.4 "Designated Output Device" means an Output Device that has been designated by You to be managed by the
Software.
2.5 "Documentation" means any instruction manuals, operating instructions, user manuals, online help,
tutorials and specifications provided by AGFA which describe the use of the Software and which either
accompany the Software or are provided to You at any time.
2.6 "Dongle" means a small hardware device that connects to a computer and acts as an authentication key for
the licensed Software.
2.7 "Effective Date" means the date on which You have accepted to be bound by the terms of this Agreement by
installing, copying or otherwise using the Software.
2.8 "Font Programs" means the digitally encoded, machine readable outline programs for certain typefaces.
2.9 "Modules" means the modules elected by You as being part of the Software, as listed in the AGFA order form
that is incorporated and made part of this Agreement by reference.
2.10 "Output Device" means a device that is capable of outputting logical pages, such as, without limitation, a
platesetter or imagesetter.
2.11 "Processor" means one (1) single processor core that forms part of a desktop computer or server, as the case
may be, on which the Software is installed or executed. For those processors that have multiple execution
cores, each such core shall be considered a distinct Processor.
2.12 "Software" means APOGEE™ computer software program, all or part of which are owned by AGFA or other
parties whereby the license is owned by AGFA ("Other Owners"), consisting of any of the Modules elected
by You, provided and licensed to You pursuant to this Agreement.
2.13 "Storage Device" means the diskette(s), CD-ROM(s), DVD(s) and/ or other device on which AGFA distrib-
utes copies of the Software.

4
2.14 "System" means one or more Processors on which the Software is installed or run, and located at the System
Location. The number of Processors on which You are authorised to install or run the Software is set forth
in the AGFA order form that is incorporated and made part of this Agreement by reference.
2.15 "System Location" means, with respect to the System and any part thereof, the address at which the System,
and any part thereof, is physically located, as identified in the AGFA order form that is incorporated and
made part of this Agreement by reference.
2.16 "Updates" shall mean updates, if any, to the Software as commercially released by AGFA at any given time,
including, but not limited to, updates, small enhancements, additions, modifications, deletions, incorpora-
tion of patches, and/ or error corrections to any previously delivered version of the Software, as designated
in AGFA's sole determination.
2.17 "Upgrades" shall mean a new and enhanced release of the Software as commercially released by AGFA at
any given time and that, when made or added, materially changes its utility, efficiency, functional
capability or application, as designated in AGFA's sole determination.
2.18 "Use" means loading, utilisation, running, storage or display of the Software by Authorised Users on Your
System in connection with a Designated Output Device only, and solely for Your own internal business
operations.
2.19 "Warranty Period" means the period ending ninety (90) days after the Effective Date during which the
Software is covered by AGFA's warranty as set forth in this Agreement, provided however that in no event
the Warranty Period shall exceed a period of one hundred and twenty (120) days after the date You have
purchased the Software.
3. LICENSE AND COPIES

3.1 GRANT OF LICENSE. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, AGFA hereby grants to You a
perpetual, non-exclusive, non-sublicensable and non-transferable limited right and license to (a) Use the
Software on the System, and (b) use the Documentation in connection with the Use of the Software. You
acknowledge that the License Fee paid by You for the Use of Software is determined by the Designated
Output Device. For each Output Device with which You Use the Software different from the Designated
Output Device You will have to purchase a license upgrade for the Software or, with respect to additional
Output Devices in connection with which You Use the Software, one or more additional licensed copies of
the Software. In addition, specific terms and conditions shall apply to the use of Font Programs, as further
set out in the about-box of the Software.
3.2 This license transfers to You neither title nor any proprietary or intellectual property rights to the Software,
Documentation, or any copyrights, patents, or trademarks, embodied or used in connection therewith,
except for the limited rights expressly granted herein. You acknowledge that the Software and any copies
thereof are licensed and not sold, and all right, title and interest in and to the Software are and shall remain
with AGFA and/ or the Other Owners.
3.3 COPIES. During the term of this Agreement, You will be entitled to make a reasonable number of machine-
readable copies of the Software for backup or archival purposes only. You may not copy the Software,
except as permitted by this Agreement. You shall maintain accurate and up-to-date records of the location
of all copies of the Software and inform AGFA in writing of such location(s) upon AGFA's request. All copies
of the Software will be subject to all terms and conditions of this Agreement. Whenever You are permitted
to copy or reproduce all or any part of the Software, all titles, trademark symbols, copyright symbols and
legends, and other proprietary markings must be reproduced.
4. LICENSE RESTRICTIONS
You agree that You are granted a limited right to Use only, and that You will not Yourself, or through any parent,
subsidiary, affiliate, agent or other third party:
(a) lease, license or sub-license the Software or the Documentation;
(b) sell or otherwise transfer the Software or Documentation, unless, subject to Article 9.4, You transfer your
rights under this Agreement to a corporation or other entity and that at the time of transfer You pass the
Software (and any and all copies in Your control) to such corporation or other entity and such corporation
or other entity agrees to be bound by the terms and conditions of this Agreement;
(c) decompile, disassemble, or reverse engineer the Software, in whole or in part;
(d) modify the Software or any part thereof, except to the extent that the Software provides for user-modifiable
components and such modification is necessary to Use the Software;
(e) write or develop any derivative software or any other software program based upon the Software or any
part thereof, or any Confidential Information;

5
(f) use the Software to provide software related services; or

(g) provide, disclose, divulge or make available to, or permit use of the Software by any unauthorized third
party without AGFA's prior written consent.
(h) If the Software is used within a country of the European Community, nothing in this Agreement shall be
construed as restricting or prejudicing any imperative rights available under the European Community
Software Directive, O.J.Eur.Comm. (No.L.122/42, 1991).
5. LICENSE FEE
5.1 LICENSE FEE. You shall pay the license fees for the Software applicable at the time of purchase (the "License
Fee"). All fees hereunder exclude all applicable sales, use, value-added, property and other taxes, including
duties and similar mandatory payments, and You will be responsible for payment of all such.
5.2 NO OFFSET. License Fees due from You under this Agreement may not be withheld or offset by You against
other amounts due to You for any reason.
6. INSTALLATION - UPDATES - UPGRADES - MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT

6.1 You shall be responsible for the installation of the Software on the System, in accordance with the
Documentation.
6.2 As from the Effective Date, You may elect to purchase support and maintenance services in connection with
the Software. In the event such maintenance and support agreement entitles You to Updates and Upgrades
of the Software, if, and as from the date that, any such Update or Upgrade is installed on the System, it shall
be an integral part of the Software. An Upgrade is covered by the warranty pursuant to paragraph 6.1
during a period of ninety (90) days as from the date of installation of the Upgrade, which in no event shall
exceed a period of 120 days after the Upgrade has been shipped by AGFA.
6.3 Notwithstanding the foregoing, AGFA shall have no obligation to offer, or continue to offer, to You the
opportunity to purchase such support and maintenance services with respect to a given release (Updates or
Upgrades) of the Software for a period exceeding two (2) years from the date of such release.
7. LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

7.1 LIMITED WARRANTY. AGFA warrants that during the Warranty Period (a) the Software will perform in
substantial accordance with the Documentation and (b) the Storage Device on which the Software is
distributed will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use. If during the
Warranty Period the Software or the Storage Device on which it is distributed do not perform as warranted,
AGFA at its sole and exclusive option shall use commercially reasonable efforts to correct such non-confor-
mance of the Software or to provide a reasonable workaround, or replace the Storage Device free of charge,
or, if neither of those remedies are commercially practicable, terminate this Agreement and repay to You
the License Fee. The warranty set forth above is made to and for the benefit of You only. The warranty will
apply only if: (a) the Software has been properly installed and used at all times and in accordance with the
Documentation or other instructions for Use, and (b) no modification, alteration or addition has been made
to the Software by persons other than AGFA or AGFA's authorised representative, except as authorised in
writing by AGFA, and (c) the defect, error or problem does not result from any cause within the control of
You. Any supplements or Updates to the Software, including without limitation, any service packs or hot
fixes provided to you after the expiration of the Warranty Period are not covered by any warranty or condi-
tion, express, implied or statutory. AGFA warrants that it possesses all of the right, title, interest and
authority to enter into this Agreement with You. AGFA also warrants that no lawsuit or claim concerning
the Software is currently pending.
7.2 EXCEPT FOR THE ABOVE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTIES, AGFA MAKES NO WARRANTIES, WHETHER
EXPRESS, IMPLIED, OR STATUTORY REGARDING OR RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THE
DOCUMENTATION, OR ANY MATERIALS OR SERVICES FURNISHED OR PROVIDED TO YOU UNDER
THIS AGREEMENT. AGFA SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABI-
LITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE,
DOCUMENTATION AND SAID OTHER MATERIALS AND SERVICES, AND WITH RESPECT TO THE USE
OF ANY OF THE FOREGOING. WITHOUT LIMITING THE GENERALITY OF THE FOREGOING, AGFA DOES
NOT WARRANT THAT OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
OR THAT DATA WILL NOT BE LOST IF FOR ANY REASON OPERATIONS ARE INTERRUPTED.
7.3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL
AGFA BE LIABLE FOR ANY COMMERCIAL LOSS, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF AN OPPORTUNITY, LOSS
OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF DATA, COST OF COVER OR INDIRECT, SPECIAL,
INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT
OF THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE OR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES PERFORMED

6
HEREUNDER, WHETHER ALLEGED AS A BREACH OF CONTRACT OR TORTIOUS CONDUCT,

INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE (BUT NOT GROSS NEGLIGENCE OR FRAUD), EVEN IF AGFA HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN ADDITION, AGFA WILL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY
DAMAGES CAUSED BY DELAY IN DELIVERY OR FURNISHING THE SOFTWARE OR SAID SERVICES.
AGFA'S LIABILITY UNDER THIS AGREEMENT FOR DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL AND/OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, RESTITUTION, WILL
NOT, IN ANY EVENT, EXCEED THE LICENSE FEE PAID BY YOU TO AGFA UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.
7.4 ALLOCATION OF RISK. The provisions of this Section 6 allocate risks under this Agreement between You
and AGFA. You acknowledge and recognise that AGFA's pricing reflects this allocation of risks and limita-
tion of liability accordingly.
8. INDEMNIFICATION
8.1 INFRINGEMENT INDEMNITY. AGFA represents it has no reason to believe that the Software infringes upon
any copyright or any other intellectual property right of any third party. In the event of a claim that the
Software infringes upon, or violates, a third party's copyright AGFA will indemnify and hold You harmless
against any action brought against You based on a claim that the unmodified Software, when used in accor-
dance with this Agreement, infringes a European copyright, patent or other proprietary rights, and AGFA
shall pay all costs, settlements and damages finally awarded, except for consequential damages. However,
AGFA will not be obligated to indemnify or hold You harmless from any such action unless You (i) notify
AGFA in writing of any claim within 10 (ten) business days after You learn of such a claim, (ii) give AGFA
sole control of the defence and settlement thereof, (iii) provide all reasonable assistance in connection with
the defence and settlement thereof, and (iv) have not yet compromised or settled in any way any such
losses, claims or damages for which indemnity is sought. If the Software is finally adjudged to so infringe,
or in AGFA's opinion is likely to become the subject of such a claim, AGFA shall, at its sole option expense,
either (1) apply its best efforts to procure for You the right to continue using the Software, or (2) apply its
best efforts to modify or replace the Software to make it non-infringing, or, if neither (1) or (2) is commer-
cially practicable (3) terminate this Agreement, and repay to You a portion of the License Fee equal to the
amount paid by You less reasonable depreciation. AGFA shall have no liability regarding any infringement
claim arising out of: (i) use of other than a current, unaltered release of the Software; (ii) Use of the
Software in combination with non-AGFA software, data or equipment, if the infringement was caused by
the Use of such combination; (iii) any modification or derivation of the Software not specifically authorised
in writing by AGFA; or (iv) use of third party software.
8.2 EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. The foregoing states the entire liability of AGFA and the exclusive remedy for You
with respect to infringement of any patent, copyright, trade secret or other proprietary right.
9. CONFIDENTIALITY
9.1 CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. Each party acknowledges that the Confidential Information constitutes
valuable trade secrets and each party agrees that it shall use Confidential Information solely in accordance
with the provisions of this Agreement and will not disclose, or permit to be disclosed, the same, directly or
indirectly, to any third party without the other party's prior written consent. Each party agrees to exercise
due care in protecting the Confidential Information from unauthorized use and disclosure. However,
neither party bears any responsibility for safeguarding information that (i) is publicly available, (ii) already
in the other party's possession and not subject to a confidentiality obligation, (iii) obtained by the other
party from third parties without restrictions on disclosure, (iv) independently developed by the other party
without reference to Confidential Information, or (v) required to be disclosed by order of a court or other
governmental entity.
9.2 INJUNCTIVE RELIEF. In the event of actual or threatened breach of the provisions of Section 8.1, the non-
breaching party will have no adequate remedy at law and will be entitled to immediate and injunctive and
other equitable relief, without bond and without the necessity of showing actual money damages.
10. TERM AND TERMINATION

10.1 TERM. This Agreement will take effect on the Effective Date and will remain in force for as long as any
copyright in the Software exist, subject to termination in accordance with Article 9.2
10.2 TERMINATION. This Agreement may be terminated by AGFA upon written notice to You if (i) You fail to
pay any undisputed amount due within thirty (30) days after You have been given written notice of such
non-payment; (ii) You are in material breach of any non-monetary term, condition or provision of Agree-
ment, which breach, if capable of being cured, is not cured within thirty (30) days after You have been given
written notice of such breach; or (iii) AGFA elects to do so in accordance with Article 6.1 or 7.1. Except for
a termination pursuant to Articles 6.1 or 7.1, no such termination will entitle You to a refund of any portion
of the License Fee. You may terminate this Agreement at any time for any reason by submitting written
notice to that effect to AGFA.

7
10.3 EFFECT OF TERMINATION. Upon expiration or termination of this Agreement, You shall promptly
uninstall and return to AGFA the Software, any derivative works, all copies thereof, including computer
memory or storage copies, the associated Dongle, all related Documentation and all copies thereof, and any
other Confidential Information in Your possession. You shall furnish AGFA with a certificate signed by an
executive officer verifying that the same has been done. Termination or Expiration will not affect the provi-
sions regarding the treatment of Confidential Information, provisions relating to the payment of amounts
due, or provisions limiting or disclaiming AGFA's liability, which provisions will survive termination of this
Agreement.
10.4 NON-ASSIGNMENT. Neither this Agreement nor any rights under this Agreement may be assigned or
otherwise transferred by You, in whole or in part, whether voluntary or by operation of law, including by
way of sale of assets, merger or consolidation, without the prior written consent of AGFA, which consent
will not be unreasonably withheld or delayed. Subject to the foregoing, this Agreement will be binding
upon and will inure to the benefit of the parties and their respective successors and assigns.
11. MISCELLANEOUS
11.1 WAIVER. Any waiver of the provisions of this Agreement or of a party's rights or remedies under this Agree-
ment must be in writing to be effective. Failure, neglect, or delay by a party to enforce the provisions of this
Agreement or its rights or remedies at any time, will not be construed and will not be deemed to be a waiver
of such party's rights under this Agreement and will not in any way affect the validity of the whole or any
part of this Agreement or prejudice such party's right to take subsequent action. Except as expressly stated
in this Agreement, no exercise or enforcement by either party of any right or remedy under this Agreement
will preclude the enforcement by such party of any other right or remedy under this Agreement or that such
party is entitled by law to enforce.
11.2 SEVERABILITY. If any provision, or part of any provision, of this Agreement is invalidated by operation of
law or otherwise, that provision or part will to that extent be deemed omitted and the remainder of this
Agreement, or applicable attachment, will remain in full force and effect. In place of any such invalid provi-
sion or part thereof, the parties hereto undertake to agree on a similar but valid provision the effect of which
is as close as possible to that of the invalid provision or part thereof. If the parties fail to agree on such an
amendment, such invalid term, condition or provision will be severed from the remaining terms, conditions
and provisions, which will continue to be valid and enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by law.
11.3 STANDARD TERMS. No terms, provisions or conditions of any purchase order, acknowledgement or other
business form that You may use in connection with the licensing of the Software will have any effect on the
rights, duties or obligations of the parties under, or otherwise modify, this Agreement, regardless of any
failure of AGFA to object to such terms, provisions or conditions.
11.4 RIGHT TO AUDIT. AGFA shall have the right upon its expense to inspect compliance of You with this Agree-
ment, upon a ten (10) working days prior written notice. Such audit shall not be more frequently than once
per year, during normal business hours by an accounting firm designated by AGFA. In the event such audit
should reveal a substantial non-compliance with this Agreement, You shall reimburse AGFA for the full out-
of-pocket costs in respect of any professional charges incurred for such audit or inspection, in addition to
any other right or remedy available to AGFA hereunder.
11.5 AMENDMENTS TO THIS AGREEMENT. This Agreement may not be amended, except by a writing signed
by both parties.
11.6 HEADINGS: Headings to the sections of this Agreement are for convenience only and shall not affect the
interpretation or construction of this Agreement. Use of the singular includes the plural and vice versa.
11.7 AGFA'S PRIOR CONSENT. Unless expressly provided otherwise in this Agreement, any prior consent of
AGFA that is required before You may take an action may be granted or withheld in AGFA's sole and
absolute discretion.
11.8 THIRD PARTY BENEFICIARY. If and insofar parts of the Software are supplied and licensed to AGFA by
Other Owners, such Other Owners are third party beneficiaries of this Agreement and are with respect to
such parts of the Software entitled to enforce directly against You the terms and conditions of this License
Agreement.
11.9 APPLICABLE LAW. This Agreement is made in Belgium and shall be governed by and construed in accor-
dance with the laws of Belgium, excluding its rules for choice of law.
11.10 PUBLIC ANNOUNCEMENTS. You acknowledge that AGFA may desire to use Your name in press releases,
product brochures and financial reports indicating that You are a customer of AGFA, and You agree that
AGFA may use Your name in such a manner.
11.11 ENTIRE AGREEMENT. This Agreement (including any addenda hereto signed by both parties) contains the
entire agreement of the parties with respect to the subject matter of this Agreement and supersedes all
previous communications, representations, understandings and agreements, either oral or written,
between the parties with respect to said subject matter.

8

Contents
End User License Agreement ....................................................................................... 3
About This Reference Guide .......................................................................................... 21
 Intended Audience ........................................................................................................ 22
 What’s New in This Version? ...................................................................................... 23
 Related Documentation .............................................................................................. 25
 Starting and Navigating Help .................................................................................... 26
 Search .......................................................................................................................... 28
 Printing Help ............................................................................................................. 30
 Navigation Overview .............................................................................................. 30
 Conventions ..................................................................................................................... 31
Chapter 1 Welcome to Apogee ............................................................................................... 33
 What is Apogee? ............................................................................................................. 34

 Ticket Editing ................................................................................................................... 37
 Basic Workflow ............................................................................................................... 38
Chapter 2 Basic Concepts .............................................................................................................. 41
 What Are Job Tickets? ................................................................................................... 42

 What Are Hot Tickets? .................................................................................................. 43
 How Are Jobs Created? ................................................................................................. 44
 What Is a Production Plan? ........................................................................................ 45
 What Are Task Processors? ......................................................................................... 46
 What Are Resources? .................................................................................................... 49
 What is a Proof? .............................................................................................................. 51
 What is Versioning? ....................................................................................................... 53
 What are Multi-Part and Multi-Product Jobs? ..................................................... 55
Chapter 3 Getting Started .............................................................................................................. 59
 Starting the Client ......................................................................................................... 60

 Adding/Removing Apogee Systems ................................................................ 61
 The Management Windows ....................................................................................... 63
 The Ticket Editor ............................................................................................................. 65
 Work Area Commands and Indicators .................................................................... 66
 Menus .......................................................................................................................... 66
 Toolbar ......................................................................................................................... 78
 Navigation Bar .......................................................................................................... 79
 Message Indicator ................................................................................................... 79
 Tab Area ...................................................................................................................... 80
9
10
 Viewing Messages ......................................................................................................... 81

 Filtering Messages ................................................................................................. 84
 Critical Messages .................................................................................................... 86
 Viewing Remarks ........................................................................................................... 87
 Preferences ...................................................................................................................... 90
 Customizing Your Work Area .................................................................................... 94
Chapter 4 Previewing Job Results ....................................................................................... 95
 Apogee Soft Previews .................................................................................................. 96

 Raster Preview ................................................................................................................ 97
 Preview Window and Tools ........................................................................................ 98
 Preview Window ...................................................................................................... 99
 Navigator Palette .................................................................................................... 99
 Inks Palette ............................................................................................................... 100
 Rule-ups Palette ...................................................................................................... 101
 Light Table Slider .................................................................................................... 103
 Versions Palette ...................................................................................................... 103
 Tools Palette ............................................................................................................. 105
 Preview Menus ........................................................................................................ 107
 Opening/Closing Pages or Flats for Preview ...................................................... 108
 Browsing your Results ................................................................................................. 110
 Zooming Images ............................................................................................................ 112
 Changing the Default View ........................................................................................ 114
 Measuring Ink Coverage ............................................................................................. 118
 Measuring Screen Angles ........................................................................................... 120
 Measuring Line Frequency ......................................................................................... 121
 Color-Managed Raster Preview ................................................................................ 123
 Depth Tool ........................................................................................................................ 124
 Saturation, Contrast and Channel Adjustments ................................................. 126
 Comparing Results ........................................................................................................ 129
 Approving/Rejecting Jobs .......................................................................................... 131
 Comparing Version-Specific Plates ......................................................................... 134
 View modes ............................................................................................................... 134
 Viewing/Editing Raster Preview Preferences ..................................................... 136
 QuickProof ........................................................................................................................ 137
Chapter 5 Managing Jobs ............................................................................................................... 139
 The Jobs Window ........................................................................................................... 140

 The Output Device List ................................................................................................ 142
 The Job List ...................................................................................................................... 143
 Job Notification Icons ........................................................................................... 150
 Job Status Icons ....................................................................................................... 151
 Job Icons .................................................................................................................... 153
 Flow Icons .................................................................................................................. 155

11
 Job and System Logging ............................................................................................. 161

 Viewing the Administration Tab .............................................................................. 170
 Viewing the Options Tab ............................................................................................ 171
 Viewing the Products Tab .......................................................................................... 172
 Viewing the Plan Tab ................................................................................................... 174
 Production Plan Pane (Jobs Window) ............................................................. 174
 Settings Pane (Jobs Window) ............................................................................. 175
 Viewing the Pages Tab ................................................................................................ 176
 Page Store (Jobs Window) ................................................................................... 176
 Run List (Jobs Window) ........................................................................................ 177
 Page Store / Run List Icons ................................................................................ 178
 Viewing the Results Tab ............................................................................................. 183
 The Activity Pane .................................................................................................... 183
 The Job Layout Pane (Jobs Window) ............................................................... 184
 The Separations Pane (Jobs Window) ............................................................. 193
 Working with Jobs in the Job List ........................................................................... 194
 Selecting Jobs .......................................................................................................... 194
 Holding/Resuming Jobs ....................................................................................... 196
 Continuing Jobs ....................................................................................................... 197
 Making Rush Jobs ................................................................................................... 200
 Restarting Job Processing ................................................................................... 201
 Duplicating Jobs ...................................................................................................... 201
 Creating a New Job from an Existing Job ...................................................... 202
 Deleting Jobs ............................................................................................................ 202
 Deleting a Public Page Store ............................................................................. 205
 Enabling/Disabling Input Channels ................................................................ 205
 Opening the Job and System Logs ................................................................... 206
 Archiving Jobs .......................................................................................................... 207
 Dumping Jobs .......................................................................................................... 209
 Merging Jobs ............................................................................................................ 210
 Working with Jobs in the Pages Tab ...................................................................... 214
 Working with the Page Store ............................................................................. 215
 Working with the Run List ................................................................................... 218
 Create Versions Assistant in the Page Store ................................................ 226
 Versioning Jobs in the Run List ......................................................................... 228
 Multi-part Jobs in the Run List .......................................................................... 232
 Working with Jobs in the Results Tab ................................................................... 234
 Changing Viewing Options ................................................................................. 234
 Re-rendering Results ............................................................................................. 236
 Re-imaging Results ................................................................................................ 237
 Re-exporting Results ............................................................................................. 238
 Remaking InkDrive Files ...................................................................................... 239
 Re-printing Results ................................................................................................ 239
 Viewing Job Results in the Results Tab ......................................................... 240
 Rejecting Results .................................................................................................... 241
 Discarding Results .................................................................................................. 242

12
 Including Results .................................................................................................... 243

 Getting Information on PDF Data ..................................................................... 243
 Versioning Jobs in the Results Tab .................................................................. 249
 Multi-part Jobs in the Results Tab .................................................................... 253
 QuickProofing Pages .................................................................................................... 256
Chapter 6 Managing Hot Tickets ........................................................................................... 259
 The Hot Ticket Manager .............................................................................................. 260

 The Hot Ticket List ......................................................................................................... 261
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Administration Tab ......................................................... 263
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Options Tab ....................................................................... 264
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Products Tab ..................................................................... 265
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Plan Tab ............................................................................. 266
 Production Plan Pane (Hot Tickets) .................................................................. 266
 Settings Pane (Hot Tickets) ................................................................................. 266
 Working with Hot Tickets ........................................................................................... 268
 Fully Automated Imposition ............................................................................... 271
 Wide Format Hot Tickets ............................................................................................ 273
 Collecting Hot Tickets ................................................................................................. 276
Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Tickets ........................................................................ 277
 The Ticket Editor ............................................................................................................ 278

 Using the Administration Tab ................................................................................... 280
 Using the Options Tab ................................................................................................. 284
 Using the Products Tab ............................................................................................... 291
 Adapting a Part’s Page Size ................................................................................ 302
 About Parts and Page Ranges ............................................................................ 305
 Managing Production Sets .................................................................................. 307
 Using the Plan Tab ........................................................................................................ 308
 Production Plan Components Pane ................................................................. 308
 Production Plan Pane (Ticket Editor) ............................................................... 325
 Settings Pane (Ticket Editor) .............................................................................. 326
 Multi-part Jobs in the Plan Tab ......................................................................... 327
 Using the Pages Tab ..................................................................................................... 330
 Products ...................................................................................................................... 330
 The Page Store (Ticket Editor) ............................................................................ 331
 The Run List (Ticket Editor) .................................................................................. 332
 Using the Results Tab .................................................................................................. 333
 The Job Layout Pane (Ticket Editor) ................................................................. 333
 The Separations Pane (Ticket Editor) ............................................................... 334
 Working with Job Tickets and Hot Tickets ........................................................... 335
 Preparing Your Plan ............................................................................................... 335
 What happens in a Processing Flow ................................................................ 336
 Creating or Editing a Ticket ................................................................................ 336

13
 Creating or Editing a Production Plan ............................................................ 339

 Submitting Tickets ................................................................................................. 350
 Opening a Ticket ..................................................................................................... 351
 Saving a Ticket ........................................................................................................ 351
 Creating a Public Page Store ............................................................................. 352
 Inputting Documents ................................................................................................... 354
 Inputting via Hot Folder / JDF Import / Public Page Store .................... 355
 Inputting via PrintSphere .................................................................................... 355
 Inputting via Named Pipe ................................................................................... 356
 Inputting via TCP/IP .............................................................................................. 359
 Interactive Document Content Editing ................................................................. 361
 Checking Out Documents ................................................................................... 361
 Checking In Documents ....................................................................................... 362
 WebApproval Job Tickets ........................................................................................... 363
Chapter 8 Working with Apogee Impose ................................................................... 365
 About Apogee Impose ................................................................................................. 366

 A Product and its Parts ......................................................................................... 366
 Automatic and Interactive Imposition ............................................................ 369
 Auto Impose Window ................................................................................................... 373
 Product View ................................................................................................................... 381
 Assembly Pane ........................................................................................................ 383
 Product Pane ............................................................................................................ 386
 Toolbar ........................................................................................................................ 399
 Arranging Fold Sheets on a Press Sheet ........................................................ 400
 Repeating an Imposition across Press Sheets ............................................. 402
 Renumber Fold Sheets/Book Signatures ....................................................... 404
 Renumber and Reorder Press Sheets .............................................................. 406
 Press Sheet View ........................................................................................................... 409
 View Options ............................................................................................................ 410
 Hovering, Selecting, Navigating ....................................................................... 413
 Measuring the Press Sheet Components ....................................................... 417
 Marks Palette ........................................................................................................... 421
 Press Sheet Toolbar ............................................................................................... 423
 Inspector ........................................................................................................................... 425
 Editing/Resetting with the Inspector ............................................................. 427
 Inspecting Imposition Settings in Product View ........................................ 428
 Inspecting Marks in Sheet View ....................................................................... 439
 Cogwheel Commands in the Inspector .......................................................... 441
 Mark Sets Inspector ...................................................................................................... 443
 Snag List ........................................................................................................................... 445
 Page Previews ................................................................................................................ 447
 Imposition Reports ........................................................................................................ 448
 Menus ................................................................................................................................ 453
 Imposing Multi-Product Jobs .................................................................................... 455

14
 Imposing Digital Products .......................................................................................... 457

 Imposing Multi-Up Products ..................................................................................... 459
 Imposing Web Production Jobs ................................................................................ 461
 Product View (Web Printing) .............................................................................. 461
 Press Sheet View (Web Printing) ...................................................................... 465
 View Options ............................................................................................................ 466
 Imposing Unbound Products ..................................................................................... 468
 Product View of Unbound Products ................................................................. 469
 Copy Count ................................................................................................................ 470
 Understanding Ganging in Apogee Impose .................................................. 471
 Step and Repeat (Manual Imposition) ............................................................ 471
 Positioning Palette ................................................................................................. 472
Chapter 9 Layout Editor .................................................................................................................... 477
 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 478

 Product Panel .................................................................................................................. 482
 Product Previews .................................................................................................... 487
 Layout Panel .................................................................................................................... 491
 Default Product Placement ................................................................................. 492
 Placing Products Interactively ........................................................................... 493
 Working with Frames ............................................................................................ 498
 Copy Count, Cropping, Scaling .......................................................................... 509
 Duplicating Products ............................................................................................. 509
 Step & Repeat .......................................................................................................... 510
 Placing Products with Auto-Layout .................................................................. 511
 View Options Palette ............................................................................................. 513
 Marks Palette ........................................................................................................... 515
 Layout Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 517
 Snag List ..................................................................................................................... 518
 Inspectors ......................................................................................................................... 519
 Job Set-Up Inspector ............................................................................................. 519
 Product Inspector .................................................................................................... 531
 Colors Inspector ...................................................................................................... 532
 Mark Sets Inspector (Sheet Layout mode only) ........................................... 534
 Sheet Inspector ........................................................................................................ 535
 Print Layout Inspector ........................................................................................... 536
 Applying Changes and Submitting a Job .............................................................. 538
 Sheet Layout Templates .............................................................................................. 540
 Working with CAD Layouts ........................................................................................ 547
 QuickProof Products and Sheets ............................................................................. 551
 Resources ......................................................................................................................... 553
 Layout Editor Menus ..................................................................................................... 554

15
Chapter 10 Product Editor ................................................................................................................. 559
 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 560

 Product Inspector .......................................................................................................... 565
 Canvas Extensions and Grommets Inspector ...................................................... 574
 Tiling Inspector .............................................................................................................. 578
 Paths Inspector .............................................................................................................. 584
 Mark Sets Inspector and Mark Inspector .............................................................. 586
 Interactive Tiling ............................................................................................................ 587
 Other Tiling Features .................................................................................................... 595
 Tile Marks Dialog .................................................................................................... 595
 Renumber/Rename Tiles and Assign to Sets .............................................. 598
 Tiling Preferences ................................................................................................... 599
 Presets ............................................................................................................................... 602
 Tiles in the Layout Editor ............................................................................................ 606
 Design and Artwork Products ................................................................................... 608
Chapter 11 Monitoring and Configuring Your System ................................... 609
 System Overview Window ........................................................................................ 610

 Hardware Pane ............................................................................................................... 611
 Task Processor Pane ..................................................................................................... 613
 Managing your Task Processors ........................................................................ 613
 Monitoring your Task Processors ...................................................................... 616
 Grouping Task Processors for Load Balancing ............................................. 624
 Resources Pane .............................................................................................................. 625
 Apogee System Configuration ........................................................................... 625
 Job Housekeeping .................................................................................................. 628
 Logging ....................................................................................................................... 630
 Templates .................................................................................................................. 633
 Page Sizes ................................................................................................................. 640
 Products ..................................................................................................................... 641
 Sheet Sizes ................................................................................................................ 641
 StoreFront .................................................................................................................. 642
 Imposition ................................................................................................................. 642
 Users ............................................................................................................................ 645
 Accounts .................................................................................................................... 649
 JDF Server .................................................................................................................. 650
 Disk Storage .............................................................................................................. 657
 Configuring Your Task Processors .................................................................... 663
 Managing Parameter Sets ................................................................................... 664
 Managing Resources ............................................................................................. 667
Chapter 12 Input Task Processors .......................................................................................... 671
 Hot Folder ......................................................................................................................... 672

16
 JDF Import ........................................................................................................................ 677

 Named Pipe ..................................................................................................................... 680
 Open Connect ................................................................................................................. 682
 PrintSphere Upload ....................................................................................................... 688
 TCP/IP ................................................................................................................................ 689
Chapter 13 Processing Task Processors .......................................................................... 691
 Apogee Preflight ............................................................................................................ 692

 Automate .......................................................................................................................... 695
 Conditional ....................................................................................................................... 698
 Digital Film Proof ........................................................................................................... 701
 Impose ............................................................................................................................... 703
 Normalize ......................................................................................................................... 710
 PDF Render ...................................................................................................................... 720
 Preflight ............................................................................................................................. 748
 Preprocessor .................................................................................................................... 750
 Preview Generator ......................................................................................................... 751
 Raster Compose ............................................................................................................. 752
 Raster Impose ................................................................................................................. 753
 Raster Normalize ........................................................................................................... 754
 Run List .............................................................................................................................. 755
 Using a Run List in a Hot Ticket ........................................................................ 755
 Thumbnail Extractor ...................................................................................................... 765
 TIFF Render ...................................................................................................................... 766
 Versioning ........................................................................................................................ 770
Chapter 14 Output Task Processors ...................................................................................... 781
 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 782

 Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters ........................................................................ 784
 Imagesetter and Platesetter Settings ............................................................. 786
 Proofers ............................................................................................................................. 795
 TIFF/PS Imagesetter ..................................................................................................... 806
 TIFF Platesetter ............................................................................................................... 811
 TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer .................................................................................................... 813
 Display ............................................................................................................................... 821
 Export ................................................................................................................................. 825
 GDI Proofer ....................................................................................................................... 833
 JMF Link ............................................................................................................................ 837
 Platemaker Link ............................................................................................................. 838
 PDF Link ............................................................................................................................ 839
 Public Page Store .......................................................................................................... 840
 Raster Link ........................................................................................................................ 841
 Collect ................................................................................................................................ 842

17
Chapter 15 Print Task Processors ............................................................................................ 845
 Generic Press .................................................................................................................. 846

 Generic SD (Sign and Display Printer) ................................................................... 857
 Generic Digital Press .................................................................................................... 861
Chapter 16 Task Processor Resources ............................................................................... 869
 About Task Processor Resources ............................................................................. 871

 Alignment Pin Sets ....................................................................................................... 872
 Apogee Preflight Action Lists ................................................................................... 873
 Apogee Preflight Profiles ............................................................................................ 876
 Auto Fit Rules ................................................................................................................. 878
 Auto Impose Rules ........................................................................................................ 881
 Binding Options ............................................................................................................. 885
 Boot Resources ............................................................................................................... 890
 Borders .............................................................................................................................. 891
 Borders and Output Sizes .................................................................................... 896
 Working with Borders and Border Marks ....................................................... 897
 Bottling Rules ................................................................................................................. 899
 Calibration Curves ......................................................................................................... 901
 Color Books ...................................................................................................................... 904
 Color Spaces .................................................................................................................... 911
 Content Profiles ............................................................................................................. 912
 Contrast Adjustments .................................................................................................. 913
 Curves Adjustments ...................................................................................................... 915
 Device Link Profiles ...................................................................................................... 917
 Device Print Modes ...................................................................................................... 918
 Device Screens ............................................................................................................... 919
 Finishing Hub .................................................................................................................. 920
 Folding Schemes ........................................................................................................... 925
 Fonts ................................................................................................................................... 935
 Glue Zones ....................................................................................................................... 937
 Halftone Screens ............................................................................................................ 940
 InkTune Sets .................................................................................................................... 947
 Ink Sets ............................................................................................................................. 950
 Ink Tables ......................................................................................................................... 952
 Input Color Conversions ............................................................................................. 953
 Linearization Curves ..................................................................................................... 956
 Workflow Selection ................................................................................................ 957
 Linearization Auto-Select Maps ........................................................................ 958
 Margins ............................................................................................................................. 959
 Mark Engraver ................................................................................................................. 961
 Mark Sets Overview ............................................................................................... 962
 Mark Types ................................................................................................................ 967
 Mark Attributes ........................................................................................................ 969

18
 Mark Position ........................................................................................................... 989

 Mark Conflicts .......................................................................................................... 992
 Mark Repeat .............................................................................................................. 993
 Mark Special ............................................................................................................. 994
 Mark Pens .................................................................................................................. 994
 Mark Layers ............................................................................................................... 996
 About Colors and Depth for Printing Marks .................................................. 997
 Marks .................................................................................................................................. 999
 Media Hub ........................................................................................................................ 1001
 Media ................................................................................................................................. 1006
 Number-up Schemes .................................................................................................... 1010
 Output Color Conversions .......................................................................................... 1015
 Output Sizes .................................................................................................................... 1018
 Pagination Schemes ..................................................................................................... 1023
 Paper Stock ...................................................................................................................... 1026
 PostScript Headers ........................................................................................................ 1030
 Preflight Action Lists .................................................................................................... 1031
 Preflight Profiles ............................................................................................................ 1034
 Press Sheet Layout Rules ........................................................................................... 1035
 Print Modes ...................................................................................................................... 1040
 Profile Link Exceptions ................................................................................................ 1041
 Profiles ............................................................................................................................... 1042
 Quality ............................................................................................................................... 1045
 Sheet Layout Templates .............................................................................................. 1046
 Shingling Rules .............................................................................................................. 1047
 Simulation Curves ......................................................................................................... 1050
 Simulation Settings ............................................................................................... 1050
 SISR Profiles .................................................................................................................... 1052
 Slow Down Wheels ....................................................................................................... 1053
 TextTune ............................................................................................................................ 1055
 WebGrowth Profiles ...................................................................................................... 1056
 Web Production Schemes .......................................................................................... 1060
 XSLT Conversions .......................................................................................................... 1068
 Using Resource Auto-Select Maps .......................................................................... 1069
 Fallback ...................................................................................................................... 1071
Chapter 17 Calibrating Your Output Devices ............................................................ 1073
 What is Calibration? ...................................................................................................... 1074

 Calibration and Linearization Settings .................................................................. 1076
 Curve Editor ..................................................................................................................... 1080
Appendix 18 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................... 1087
 Unexpected Output with Asymmetrical Imposition ......................................... 1088

19
Appendix A System Variables ........................................................................................................ 1095
 Generic Variables .......................................................................................................... 1096

 Mark Engraver Variables ............................................................................................. 1106
Appendix B Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................................. 1115
Appendix C Icons Overview .............................................................................................................. 1131
Appendix D Context Menu Commands .............................................................................. 1159
 Job List Context Menu Commands ......................................................................... 1160

 Job List Filter Context Menu Commands ............................................................. 1161
 Product Editor - Presets .............................................................................................. 1163
 Hot Ticket List Context Menu Commands ........................................................... 1164
 Page Store Context Menu Commands .................................................................. 1165
 Run List Context Menu Commands ........................................................................ 1169
 Job Layout Context Menu Commands ................................................................... 1171
 Separations Context Menu Commands ................................................................. 1174
 System Overview Context Menu Commands ..................................................... 1176
Appendix E Glossary .................................................................................................................................. 1179
Index .......................................................................................................................................... 1193

20

About This Reference Guide
This Reference Guide offers you a complete description of the Apogee Client
interface, and provides procedures and settings to help you work efficiently.
 Intended Audience ................................................................................................ 22

 Apogee Flavors ................................................................................................ 22
 What’s New in This Version? ............................................................................. 23
 Related Documentation ...................................................................................... 25
 Starting and Navigating Help ............................................................................ 26
 Search ................................................................................................................. 28
 Printing Help .................................................................................................... 30
 Navigation Overview ..................................................................................... 30
 Conventions ............................................................................................................. 31
 Keyboard and Mouse .................................................................................... 31
 Choosing Commands .................................................................................... 31
21
22 INTENDED AUDIENCE
Intended Audience
This document is designed for operators and administrators who will use one of
the Apogee Client products to create tickets, manage jobs, and configure and
monitor the Apogee System.
You should be familiar with your front-end workstations, imagesetter, plate-

setter, and PostScript software applications, as well as prepress processing
methods, printing procedures, and network traffic. If this is not the case, please
refer to the relevant user or operator manuals.
The Client software should already been installed, as described in the Apogee
installation documentation.
Apogee Flavors
Prepress
Amfortis
Asecuri
Aziro

23
What’s New in This Version?

Please visit the ApogeeNetwork website and read the release notes for a complete
overview of the new features in this version of Apogee.
This document contains new or updated information on the following topics:
doc. version 12.2.2 (latest):
 New features for wide-format jobs, packaging jobs and security printing
 New features in the “Layout Editor” on page 477
 New design and artwork features in the “Product Editor” on page 559
doc. version 12.0.3:
 “WebGrowth Profiles” on page 1056
 “Automate” on page 695
 “Imposition Reports” on page 448
 Bottling Rules
 “Number-up Schemes” on page 1010
 Create jobs with several products (multi-product feature): see “What are
Multi-Part and Multi-Product Jobs?” on page 55.
 New Merge Assistant: see “Merging Jobs” on page 210.
 New product types (cut & stack, booklet, step & repeat) for digital printing:
see “Imposing Digital Products” on page 457.
 Publish jobs to a web portal: see “Publish to ProductionCenter (WebFlow

service)” on page 283.
 Fully automated, lights-out imposition with Hot Tickets: see “Viewing the
Hot Ticket Products Tab” on page 265.
 The Raster Compare feature: see “Comparing Results” on page 129.
 A new mark for press density bars: see “Density Bar Details” on page 975.

24 WHAT’S NEW IN THIS VERSION?
 A new tool for creating and editing finishing paths in the Product Editor: see
“Paths Inspector” on page 584.
 “Troubleshooting” on page 1087
 Vertical shingling (head/foot) when imposing a product: see “Shingling

Rules” on page 1047
 Product Editor: “Step & Repeat Patterns” on page 570
 Working with images in the “Product Editor” on page 559
 Versioning:
 Press sheet versions – the ability to combine different product versions

(e.g. language versions) on the same press sheet: see “Version Setup
Dialog Box” on page 778.
 Version-specific content in spot colors: see “Color Policy” on page 732
 In Preview: “Multiple product versions” on page 105
 To collate versions: “Keep versions apart” on page 321
 “Renumber Fold Sheets/Book Signatures” on page 404
 “Renumber and Reorder Press Sheets” on page 406
 “What is a PrintSphere Job?” on page 57

25
Related Documentation
The following documents can be referred to for further information:
 Apogee Tutorial: This documentation is available in several languages from

your local Agfa organization or via the ApogeeNetwork website.
 Apogee Installation Guide: This documentation is provided with your

installation.
 Apogee Licensing Guide: This documentation is provided with your

installation.
 Release Notes
 SphereCenter Help: instructions on buying PrintSphere licenses and creating

users
 PrintSphere Help: instructions on using the PrintSphere file-sharing service
 StoreCenter Help: instructions on how to create online stores with the Store-
Front application
 ProductionCenter Help: instructions on how to use the ProductionCenter

module and the WebApproval service
 Please visit the ApogeeNetwork website for additional information.

26 STARTING AND NAVIGATING HELP
Starting and Navigating Help

The online Help is viewed in the standard browser set for your operating system
and uses a responsive design to accommodate a wide range of screen sizes. This
means that some navigation features may be displayed or hidden, depending on
the size of the screen you are viewing this documentation on. For example, the
table of contents may be hidden if you are viewing the documentation on a small
screen. Use the buttons in the top navigation bar to browse through the
documentation.
You can view topics in the online Help by expanding the sections in the Contents
panel and clicking a heading. You can continue to read in sequence by pressing
the Next button in the navigation toolbar.
As you progress, the hierarchy of each specific topic is indicated at the top of the
topic pane in the breadcrumb trail. You can click any one of these levels to go
back to a higher level in the hierarchy.
You can also jump to Related Topics, to additional information within the
documentation set and to internet sites. All these links are highlighted in red. In
these cases you navigate back and forward by clicking the Back and Forward
buttons on the browser tool bar.
 Starting the online Help
 In Apogee, press F1
OR
Choose Help > Apogee Help.
The online Help opens on the first page.
OR
Choose Help > Icons, Keyboard Shortcuts or Variables to jump directly to

one of these sections in the Help.
 To open context-sensitive Help

Context-sensitive Help provides specific information about the window or panel
you are working in.

27
 In Apogee, context-click in a window or a section of a window, or on an icon,

and click Help at the bottom of the context menu.
OR
Choose Help > What’s This? and click in the panel that you require help for.
The Help opens on the relevant page.
 To view and print the icon, shortcut and variable overviews

1 Choose Help > Icons.
A new browser window opens, containing an overview of all icons.
2 Click the Print button in the top right corner.
You can use the printed version of the Icon Overview as a Quick Reference
Card. It is recommended to print the overview on a color printer.
You can use this same procedure to view and print the Keyboard Shortcuts
and Variables overviews.
 Illustrations and Animations

Large images have been reduced in size to display properly in the Help topics.

 Hover over an image and if the cursor changes to a hand you can click the
image to view it full size. Click the X to close the image and return to the Help
topic.
 Expanding topics
Headings with a triangle are collapsed to provide a better overview of the
information.
 Click the heading or the triangle to expand the topic.
Search The Online Help has a search-as-you-type feature for finding information
quickly in the Help topics. The following queries can be made:
 Simple search with a single word: Enter a single word for a list of all topics
that contain that word.
 Advanced search for all words: For example, enter disk space for a list of all
topics that contain disk AND space in the same topic. Try to avoid using
common words such as "a", "the", etc. in your search query.

29
 Advanced search for an exact phrase: For example, enter “disk space” in
quotes for a list of topics that only contain this exact phrase.
1 If the search box is not visible, for example if you are working on a small
screen, click the Search button to go to the Search page.
2 Type a word or phrase in the Search box.
The search results appear as you type and the word or phrase are highlighted
in yellow – also as you type.
3 Click a search result to jump to the topic.
You will see the search term or phrase highlighted in yellow in the topic. You
may need to expand sections of the topic to see the word or phrase you
queried.
Search limitations
 Do not ask questions in the search box, only enter your keywords. Enter "edit
profile" and not "How can I edit my own profile".
 Search is case-insensitive.
 Search queries must be at least 3 characters. For example, searching for "QR"
will not produce any results; you should search for "QR codes".

Printing Help If you want to print information from the Online Help, two options are available:
 Print individual topics
 Click the Print button in the navigation bar or choose File > Print from the
browser menu bar.
 Print the whole document

All the information in the Online Help is also provided in a printer-friendly PDF
document.
1 Click the PDF button in the navigation bar to open a PDF document.
2 Print the whole document or specific sections as required.
This feature is only available if your browser has the Adobe Acrobat plug-in.
NOTE: You may need to set up browser functionality in Adobe Acrobat.
Navigation
Overview
Show/hide the table of contents
Switch on Google Translate: translations are generated on the fly but may not be reliable
Show/hide the search panel
Previous topic
Next topic

31
Print a PDF of the whole document
Print current topic
Displays a section
Displays collapsible (expandable) text or images
Takes you to the title topic of the online Help
Conventions
Keyboard and All key names are shown in capital letters. For example, the Control key is shown
as CTRL.
Mouse
Keys are frequently used in combinations or sequences as shortcut keys. For
example, SHIFT+F3 means that you have to hold down the SHIFT key while
pressing F3.
The following mouse conventions are used:
To... Do this...
Click Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the mouse
button without moving the mouse.
Double-click Point to an item, and then quickly press and release the mouse
button twice.
Context-click on Windows Click the right mouse button.
Drag Point to an item. Press and hold down the mouse button as you
move the mouse to a new location, then release the mouse but-
ton.
Choosing Many of the Apogee Client commands can be selected in several different ways,
as described below. You should choose the method(s) which best suit your way
Commands of working. Throughout this Reference Guide, wherever possible we simply
indicate which Menu item and/or Toolbar button you require.
 Selecting a Menu item using the mouse

32 CONVENTIONS
The Apogee Menubar is available in each of the Client windows, and is

organized according to the commands you will need. In Windows, the menus
or sub-menus change in accordance with the currently selected Apogee
window. Menu items are disabled when they are not applicable, and the
menu item texts reflect the currently selected item.
 Context-clicking an item
A context menu is often a subset of the global Apogee menu items. It contains
only those items that are applicable to the selection. The way you activate a
context menu varies according to the platform you are working on (see
“Conventions” on page 31). For a complete summary of all available context
menus, refer to “Context Menu Commands” on page 1159.
 Clicking a Toolbar button
The Apogee Toolbar also offers a subset of the Menu bar commands. The
Toolbar is defined per window to offer the most frequently used commands.
It may also include disabled tools.
 Entering a Shortcut key combination
Some commands can be selected by entering only a shortcut key combina-

tion. Where available, these items are displayed next to the commands in the
menus.

CHAPTER
1 Welcome to Apogee
This section introduces the Apogee System, and highlights its main innovations
and features. Apogee is the latest generation of Agfa's acclaimed workflow
system for commercial printing. This system allows you to automate and
distribute prepress processes using JDF, PDF and Digital Film in an integrated
all-digital workflow. The system also includes rules-based imposition with the
Apogee Impose module.
 What is Apogee? ..................................................................................................... 34

 The Apogee System ....................................................................................... 34
 The Apogee Client ......................................................................................... 34
 Apogee Product Flavors ............................................................................... 35
 Ticket Editing ........................................................................................................... 37
 Basic Workflow ....................................................................................................... 38
33
34 WHAT IS APOGEE?
What is Apogee?
Apogee is a fully integrated, digital workflow solution that brings together a
wide range of sophisticated, easy-to-use capabilities in a single application.
Apogee uses a client/server architecture, and consists of:
 The Apogee Server, which runs on a dedicated 64 bit Windows Server, and
manages all data and processing functionality.
 An optional Apogee Satellite, which runs on a dedicated 64 bit Windows

Server, and provides additional processing capacity to increase your total
production speed.
 The Apogee Client application, which allows you to access and control the
Apogee Server remotely from any Windows PC or on the network.
The Apogee System The Apogee System handles all resources, processes, and events, and acts as the
centralized database of job and system data. The System provides feedback on
system events and job processes to all Clients that are currently logged in. All
interaction with the Apogee System is performed via the Client application.
Refer to the Installation Guide for detailed system requirements.
The Apogee Client The graphically rich and intuitive Client user interface adopts a highly visual
design approach, using icons to represent elements in the system and in your
workflow. A set of tools and commands allows you to control and interact with
all aspects of job production.

1 WELCOME TO APOGEE 35
The Apogee Client can be installed on any PC system connected to the network.
Using the Client, you can configure, monitor and control the system settings,
and create customized input and processing channels for your jobs. You can also
use the Client to communicate securely with an Apogee Server over a VPN
(Virtual Private Network) connection.
Apogee Product Depending on what you have purchased, your Apogee solution will comprise
one of the following product flavors, possibly enhanced with one or more of the
Flavors available options:
 Apogee Render
 Apogee Control

36 WHAT IS APOGEE?
 Apogee Manage
 Apogee Integrate
 Apogee PlateMaker
 Apogee Proof
 Apogee PDF&Proof
 Apogee PlateMaker LE
 Apogee Bridge
 Apogee InkTune

Ticket Editing
You can choose the type of ticket that best suits your workflow:
 Standard Job Tickets for single jobs.
 Reusable Hot Tickets for repeat jobs.
You can create these tickets yourself, or you can choose from a selection of
ready-made ticket templates which are directly accessible from the Ticket
Editor.
You can edit Job Tickets directly from the jobs you see in the Job List.

38 BASIC WORKFLOW
Basic Workflow
A typical Apogee workflow is as follows:
1 Create Ticket (including input channel)
You start any workflow by creating or editing a Ticket. The Ticket defines an
input channel, and describes exactly how all documents received will be
processed and output by Apogee.
NOTE: You can set up one or more input channels for the same ticket (Hot
Folders, AppleTalk channels, JDF channels, etc.), and output consistently to
a wide range of imagesetters, platesetters, and proofers.
2 Input document(s)
You input your documents to the predefined input channel. Typically, these
documents are PostScript, PDF, EPS, MIME, TIFF or JDF format files. You
either copy these files to a Hot Folder input channel, or print them to a
predefined printer queue (AppleTalk, Named Pipe, etc.). If you are working
in the Layout Editor, you will probably want to input images: PNG, JPG, BMP,
PSD and AI.

Apogee automatically processes any input document or images according to

the parameters specified in the Ticket. The result of this processing is a job.
3 Check job results
You can check your job results either onscreen, or by outputting them to a
Proofer.
4 Approve job for output
If the job results are satisfactory, you can approve them for output to an
output device.

40 BASIC WORKFLOW

CHAPTER
2 Basic Concepts
Apogee introduces a variety of new product-specific terms and concepts. This
section explains the most important and commonly-used terms. More detailed
and practical information is provided in the referenced sections.
 What Are Job Tickets? .......................................................................................... 42

 What Are Hot Tickets? .......................................................................................... 43
 How Are Jobs Created? ......................................................................................... 44
 What Is a Production Plan? ................................................................................ 45
 What Are Task Processors? ................................................................................. 46
 What Are Task Processor Settings? .......................................................... 46
 What Are Task Processor Parameter Sets? ............................................ 46
 What Is a Task Processor Configuration? .............................................. 47
 What Are Actions? .................................................................................................. 48
 What Are Resources? ............................................................................................ 49
 What is a Page Store? ........................................................................................... 49
 What is a Public Page Store? ............................................................................. 50
 What is a Proof? ...................................................................................................... 51
 What is Versioning? ............................................................................................... 53
 A Simple Versioning Example ................................................................... 53
 Multiple Versions on a Press Sheet ........................................................ 54
 What are Multi-Part and Multi-Product Jobs? ............................................. 55
 What is a WebApproval Job? ............................................................................. 55
 What are Apogee Impose Jobs? ........................................................................ 56
 What is Document-Based CMS? ....................................................................... 56
 What is the Layout Editor? .................................................................................. 56
 What is the Product Editor? ................................................................................ 57
 What is a PrintSphere Job? ................................................................................. 57
 What is WebFlow? ................................................................................................. 57
41
42 WHAT ARE JOB TICKETS?
What Are Job Tickets?

A Job Ticket is a file you create using the Job Ticket Editor. A Job Ticket defines
how the pages of a single job are to be assembled, the processing features to be
used (imposition, separation, trapping, overprinting, rasterization, etc.), and
the output device to which the rendered job will be sent.
A Job Ticket is always associated with one or more unique input channels (Hot
Folders, AppleTalk Channels, etc.). When a user sends a document to one of
these input channels, the Apogee System attaches the corresponding Job Ticket
to it. The input document and the Job Ticket are combined to become a single
Job.
When should you use Job Tickets?

You should use Job Tickets in workflows that are subject to lots of changes, or
when you want to process jobs that are made up of several different documents.
These documents can be combined in a single job by dragging the required pages
from the Page Store to your Run List. You need to create and manually submit a
new Job Ticket for every new job.
If you print a weekly magazine, it is recommended that you use standard Job
Tickets. This is because you will probably have to create an imposition for
different document types (advertisements, articles, etc.). The page count and
content will also probably vary from week to week.

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 43
What Are Hot Tickets?

You create Hot Tickets using the Hot Ticket Editor. A Hot Ticket defines how
multiple jobs are to be assembled and processed. Unlike a Job Ticket, which can
create only a single job, a Hot Ticket can create multiple jobs on demand.
When you input a document to a Hot Ticket input channel, the Hot Ticket dupli-
cates its ticket, then creates a job by filling in the pages from the input document,
and automatically submitting it to the Apogee System. A job created from a Hot
Ticket does not therefore require any manual Run List editing.
A Hot Ticket always remains active, and automatically processes any documents
that are input via the associated input channel. Each of these documents
becomes a new job, containing the input document plus a Job Ticket based on
the Hot Ticket settings. However, the original Hot Ticket itself does not become
part of the job, and remains unchanged.
When should you use Hot Tickets?

Hot Tickets automate the job creation process, creating multiple jobs on
demand. If your jobs always have the same parameters, you can use a single Hot
Ticket to create as many jobs as you need.

44 HOW ARE JOBS CREATED?
How Are Jobs Created?

To create a job, you must first create a ticket and select or set up one or more
input channels.
 With Job Tickets, the job is created as soon as you successfully submit the Job
Ticket. At this point, the job becomes visible in the Job List. Initially, the job
only contains the Job Ticket.
 With Hot Tickets, the job is not created until a document has been input
through the associated input channel.
Each document you send through one of the jobs' input channels is processed
and becomes part of the job. The processing results also become part of the job,
together with logging data which indicates exactly how the job has been
processed. A job may therefore comprise:
 a Job Ticket (required)
 the document(s) to be printed
 the intermediate and/or final job results (optional)
 log information

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 45
What Is a Production Plan?

You create and modify Production Plans using the Ticket Editor. A Production
Plan is a series of components (Task Processors and Actions) linked together to
form one or more processing flows. These components can be configured to
define exactly how jobs are to be input, processed, and output.
A Production Plan consists of at least one Main processing flow, but you can
include as many additional flows as you require. Each flow leads to a unique
output device.
To build your Production Plan, you simply drag the components you require to
the Production Plan pane, and connect them to other components. The order
and the types of connections are governed by specific rules. Once all the compo-
nents are in place, you can customize each of them in turn by selecting one of a
series of predefined settings.
The Production Plan pane provides a graphical overview of your Plan, which can
be quickly assembled and modified.

46 WHAT ARE TASK PROCESSORS?
What Are Task Processors?

Task Processors are software components that perform one or more tasks (speci-
fied by the Ticket), such as input via Hot Folder, Normalization, Preflight,
Trapping, Rendering, etc.
A sequence of Task Processors can be linked together to form a Production Plan.
Task Processors are divided into four categories:
 Input Task Processors
 Processing Task Processors
 Output Task Processors
 Print Task Processors
What Are Task Each Task Processor has a default group of settings, which determine how it will
handle incoming data. When you add a Task Processor to your Production Plan,
Processor Settings? you can modify these settings for this particular ticket.
You can also create and save your own customized versions of these settings
files, in which you can modify how the Task Processor will operate. These
customized settings are referred to as Parameter Sets. When you add a Task
Processor to a Production Plan, you can select any Parameter Sets which may be
available.
Some Task Processors are multi-functional and require a large number of

settings. For practical reasons, these settings are grouped according to their
functionality. For example, The Render Task Processor comprises Trapping,
Separation, Processing and Screening, each of these functions having their
respective settings.
What Are Task Each Task Processor is installed with initial settings which are automatically
assigned by Apogee, and cannot be changed or deleted. However, you can define
Processor additional groups of settings based on the initial settings, and save them under
Parameter Sets? different names. These are referred to as Parameter Sets.

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 47
You can create as many Parameter Sets as you need, and manage them from the
System Overview window. To do this, you select a Task Processor, and then click
the Settings icon:
Parameter sets can also be created and managed directly from the Ticket Editor.
When you first access a Task Processor’s settings, you will see only the factory-
default “initial settings”. You should define additional Parameter Sets based on
the initial settings, and set one of them as “default”. In future, whenever you add
this Task Processor to a Production Plan, it will always automatically select the
default Parameter Set that you specified. However, you can still click on the list,
and select any other Parameter Set that may be available.
NOTE: The factory-default “initial settings” cannot be deleted.
For detailed information on the settings of a particular Task Processor, open the
System Overview window and access the Help information. You can do this by
selecting the Task Processor, context-clicking the Settings icon in the Resources
pane, and choosing Help from the context menu.
What Is a Task Each Task Processor has a default configuration that is automatically assigned
by Apogee. If you have Service access rights, you can view and modify these
Processor configurations using the Configuration icon in the System Overview window.
Configuration?
The Configuration icon is the first icon displayed in the Resources pane of the
System Overview window. You can double-click this icon to view or modify the
configuration of the currently selected Task Processor.
If you have Administrator access rights, you can view and modify the configura-
tions of the Generic Devices and Export Task Processor, as well as some settings
for the Press Task Processor. If you do not have any of the necessary access
rights, the Configuration icon is hidden from view.

48 WHAT ARE TASK PROCESSORS?
For detailed information on the configuration of a particular Task Processor,

open the System Overview window and access the Help information. You can do
this by selecting the Task Processor, context-clicking the Configuration icon in
the Resources pane, and choosing Help from the context menu.
What Are Actions?

Actions allow you to precisely control the flow of job data through a Production
Plan, and keep track of your job results at every point in the processing chain.
Once you have built up a valid Production Plan, you can insert Actions between
each step in the Plan. When one of these points is reached during job processing,
an event is triggered. For example, the job results may be archived, or the flow
may be temporarily halted until specific criteria have been met.

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 49
What Are Resources?

Resources are collections of objects (such as fonts, preflight profiles, or calibra-
tion curves) that are required by selected devices or Task Processors. By default,
Apogee provides you with some basic resources for each of the available
Resource categories. However, you can also add your own resources to those
supplied.
You can view the Resource categories by switching to the System Overview
window. Here, the Resource categories displayed depend on the selected Task
Processor.
What is a Page Store?

A Page Store is a repository of pages available for a single job. When you input
documents to Apogee, the document pages are stored in the Page Store associ-
ated with the job input channel you selected.
A Page Store is automatically generated for each job created. You can view the
content of a Page Store by selecting a job in the Job List and then selecting the
Pages tab.
1 Page Store
This type of Page Store is sometimes referred to as a “Private” Page Store, to

differentiate it from a Public Page Store.

50 WHAT ARE RESOURCES?
What is a Public Page Store?
A Public Page Store is a repository of pages available for all jobs. To create a
Public Page Store, you need to create a job based on the Public Page Store job
template. Any documents or pages that are input via the Public Page Store input
channel will then appear in the Pages tab, and will be available for all jobs.
1 Public Page Store
A Public Page Store can be viewed and accessed by all users. You can consider it
as a central repository of documents ready to be processed.

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 51
What is a Proof?
A Proof is a set of job results produced before the final results are output to a
platesetter or imagesetter. This allows you to verify and correct different aspects
of a job before submitting it to press.
In Apogee, we can distinguish several different types of proofs, each with their
own purpose:
 Page Proof: A Page Proof allows you to check the content and color reproduc-
tion of specific pages (color proofs should closely match the expected press
print output). In many cases, you may not want to proof all pages, and you
may not need an imposition scheme. Instead, you may simply want to pack
as many pages onto a flat as possible.
 Imposition Proof: An Imposition Proof allows you to check that the chosen
imposition scheme correctly produces the required result after folding and
cutting. This is most commonly used to check a new imposition scheme.
 Production Proof: A Production Proof allows you to check job content and
page order. This gives you a good idea of how the final result will look, but
may use a different imposition scheme than the final result.
There are three ways of viewing any type of proof:
 Hard Proof: This method outputs the proof to a physical proofing device,
such as a Sherpa proofer.
NOTE: Hard Proofs can also be viewed as Soft Proofs.
 Soft Proof: This method does not physically output the proof to a printer.
Instead, the job data is displayed on-screen. There are two types of Soft
Proof:
 PDF Proof: A PDF Proof allows you to check PDF job results (flats or
pages) on-screen, before the job is rendered. No physical output results
are generated. One or more PDF Proofs can be included in your Produc-
tion Plan. This allows you to view the intermediate job data at different
points in the flow.
 Digital Film Proof: A Digital Film Proof allows you to check the raster job
results (flats or pages) on-screen, after the job has been rendered. No
physical output results are generated. You can view 8-bit contone data,

52 WHAT IS A PROOF?
and zoom in to view the more detailed 1-bit high resolution data (each
raster point is represented by a single display pixel).
 Color-Managed Display Proof: This method displays the job data on-screen in
Raster Preview. However, in this case you have a preview of the rendered
result using color management to convert the press color space to the
monitor color space based on ICC profiles. With a calibrated monitor
environment and correctly configured monitor profile, contract-proofing
quality should be achieved.
You activate the color-managed preview by pressing the color managed

preview button in the toolbar of the preview pane, or selecting its View-menu
equivalent. By default the color managed preview mode is idle.
This is a licensed feature.

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 53
What is Versioning?
The Versioning feature allows you to create jobs which contain several different
versions, typically for some or all of the text (for example, using different
languages or prices), and to choose the optimal set of plates to be made. If, for
example, you want to publish a brochure in six different languages, you can
include the Versioning Task Processor in your Production Plan, and then print
several different language versions of the brochure using a single job. The basic
Production Plan is straightforward, using a Versioning Task Processor instead of
a Run List Task Processor, allowing you to optimize the usage of plates to
produce the versions.
Versioning can also be used in a Production Plan which contains a Main flow and
a Digital Film Proof flow. This set-up is meant to generate accurate proofs of the
different plate versions before assembly and output. This ensures optimal usage
of resources and media.
NOTE: Versioning is an evolution of the Run List. Most of the features and
behavior of the Run List are present in Versioning.
A Simple Suppose you want to print an 8-page brochure in English, French and Dutch.
Since only the text is different, the differences between the three versions are in
Versioning the K plate.The English version (V1)is the reference version, from which the
Example CMY plates are to be generated (and of course the K plate). From the French
(V2) and Dutch (V3) versions, only the K plate is imaged and later mounted on
the press instead of the English K plate.
Therefore, the printer needs to print the CMY plates only once, and then
combine them (during printing) with the 3 different K plates:
 CMY:(common) + K:version1 (English)
 CMY:(common) + K:version2 (French)
 CMY:(common) + K:version3 (Dutch)
So, the run list has two layers:
 The first layer holds pages containing the background graphics. This layer
provides the common graphics for all three language versions.
 The second layer contains the three version-specific variations of the “black-
text” (English, French and Dutch).

54 WHAT IS VERSIONING?
Multiple Versions To fill the press sheets of very large presses, you can place multiple instances of
the same fold sheet or different fold sheets on the same press sheet. For
on a Press Sheet versioning jobs, you can use this feature to put different product versions (e.g. V1
for French and V2 for Dutch) on a single press sheet and reduce the number of
required plates even further. In this case, the system will generate corresponding
press sheet versions (SV1, SV2, etc.). You control the sheet versions in the Version
Setup dialog box which is accessed from the Plates tab of the Versioning task
processor in the production plan. See “Version Setup Dialog Box” on page 778.

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 55
What are Multi-Part and Multi-Product Jobs?

Each Apogee job has at least one print product. A product may consist of one part
or multiple parts which are printed as a single job. In these cases we distinguish
two types of jobs:
 Single-part jobs: A single-part job uses the same settings for the entire job: It
has a single job name, single order number, single production plan with job-
global parameter values, single unstructured run list, single version per
sheet, and the same number of pages per version.
 Multi-part jobs: A multi-part job is more complex and typically comprises a

number of sections (cover, editorial, sports section, etc.) each with different
properties (paper type, color or B&W, binding style, number of colors, etc.).
Additionally, different sheets may be printed on different presses, and so on.
A single Apogee job can also combine several print products with the intention
of optimizing printing operations. For example, you may want to combine the
covers and body parts of multiple products and print them together on a specific
press. These jobs are referred to as multi-product jobs. A multi-product job is
either created from scratch to combine several products in one job or can be the
result of merging existing jobs into a single multi-product merged job.
NOTE: More than one product is not allowed for WebApproval jobs.
Refer to “Using the Products Tab” on page 291 and “Merging Jobs” on page 210
for more information.
What is a WebApproval Job?

WebApproval is a web-based proofing service that gives users (your customers’
staff or your own staff) remote access to jobs for uploading documents,
reviewing proofs, and approving pages.
Refer to the ProductionCenter Help for instructions on how to use the WebAp-
proval service in the ProductionCenter application.
Related topics: • WebApproval Job Tickets on page 363

56 WHAT ARE MULTI-PART AND MULTI-PRODUCT JOBS?
What are Apogee Impose Jobs?

Apogee provides several solutions for imposition jobs. The integrated Apogee
Impose module is an intelligent, rules-based imposition editor for the imposition
of bound and unbound products, on sheet-fed as well as web presses. Apogee
Impose arranges the pages of a job for imposition and places all the required
marks on the press sheet.
Refer to “Working with Apogee Impose” on page 365 for more information.
What is Document-Based CMS?

Document-based color management uses input and output conversion presets to
perform color management conversions on incoming documents. The color
values of the document output intent are converted to values for the actual press
output. The document output intent may be present in the document or you can
choose to tag the input colors of the document using an Apogee preflight action
list.
Refer to the following sections for more information about this feature:
 “Document-Based Color Management settings” on page 739
 “Apogee Preflight Action Lists” on page 873
 “Input Color Conversions” on page 953
 “Output Color Conversions” on page 1015
 “SISR Profiles” on page 1052
What is the Layout Editor?

The Layout Editor is a workspace which has been specially designed to prepare
layout jobs and use effective color management for printing on Sign & Display
devices. It can also be used to create the layout for Unbound Single-Sided
products in regular jobs.
Refer to “Layout Editor” on page 477 for more information about this feature.

2 BASIC CONCEPTS 57
What is the Product Editor?

The Layout Editor includes the Product Editor, a dedicated workspace for
editing the images you upload in the Layout Editor.
Refer to “Product Editor” on page 559.
What is a PrintSphere Job?

A PrintSphere job includes a PrintSphere Upload task processor as input in the
plan. PrintSphere is a cloud service hosted by Agfa that allows easy file transfer
between the different collaborators of a job: customers, designers, remote sites,
etc. For such jobs, you can invite an uploader to upload files for the job at hand,
or collaborators can be assigned to the job when you select the company.
Refer to “Inputting via PrintSphere” on page 355 for more information about
this feature.
What is WebFlow?
The WebFlow service lets you publish jobs to the ProductionCenter web portal
where they can be managed by your internal users.
Refer to “Publish to ProductionCenter (WebFlow service)” on page 283.

58 WHAT ARE MULTI-PART AND MULTI-PRODUCT JOBS?

CHAPTER
3 Getting Started
This section guides you through the main work areas of Apogee. It provides
general information on the user interface and main windows.
 Starting the Client ................................................................................................. 60

 Adding/Removing Apogee Systems ....................................................... 61
 The Management Windows ............................................................................... 63
 The Ticket Editor ..................................................................................................... 65
 Work Area Commands and Indicators ............................................................ 66
 Menus ................................................................................................................. 66
 Toolbar ................................................................................................................ 78
 Navigation Bar ................................................................................................. 79
 Message Indicator .......................................................................................... 79
 Tab Area ............................................................................................................. 80
 Viewing Messages ................................................................................................. 81
 Filtering Messages ......................................................................................... 84
 Critical Messages ........................................................................................... 86
 Viewing Remarks ................................................................................................... 87
 Preferences ............................................................................................................... 90
 Customizing Your Work Area ............................................................................ 94
59
60 STARTING THE CLIENT
Starting the Client

To start the Client, you need to open a session with the Apogee System. A session
is a continuous series of user interactions between the Client application and the
Apogee System. You need to log in to a secured session before running certain
portions of the application. Each successive interaction in the session is tracked
and recorded by Apogee.
 To open a new Apogee session

1 Do one of the following:
 PC users: Choose Start > Programs > Apogee > Apogee Client.
 Double-click the Apogee Client icon on your desktop.
The Apogee Logon dialog box appears.
TIP: PC users can add the 2 Type your user name/password in the appropriate text boxes.
Client icon to the Windows
taskbar to start the Apogee The user name must be a valid Windows account on the Apogee server on
Client even quicker. your network. Add a domain prefix (e.g. domain\username) if the server
name is different. User names cannot be configured in the Apogee Client.

3 GETTING STARTED 61
3 Select your Apogee System from the list.
If you do not know to which system you should connect, ask your Apogee
administrator.
4 Select the ‘Connect to selected system at startup’ check box.
The next time you start the Apogee Client, the Logon dialog box will be
bypassed. You can reset this option in your Preferences. For more informa-
tion, see “Logging On” on page 91.
NOTE: If you have a DNS server, you can connect using the server host name.
This is recommended for complex networks such as multiple networks, VPN,
etc. Click the cogwheel and select the option.
5 Click Log On.
The Apogee Client is started, and a connection is made to the selected Apogee
System. The Jobs Window is then displayed.
 To view network information

You can view network information to troubleshoot network issues when logging
on.
1 Start the client and click the cogwheel in the Logon dialog.
2 Choose View Network Information.
The Network Information dialog is displayed.
3 Enter the server credentials and a client-server connection test is performed.
The information for the selected Apogee System is displayed with warnings
and errors if the connection fails.
4 Click OK to close the Network Information dialog.
Adding/Removing Additional Apogee Systems may be available on your network but may not be
visible. This happens when the Apogee Client and Server applications are not
Apogee Systems installed on the same network segment, but are connected via a router. In order
to access these Apogee Systems, you first need to manually add them to the list
of systems displayed in the Logon dialog box. To do this, you must know the IP
address of the Apogee System you want to add.
 To manually add an Apogee System

1 Start the Client.

62 STARTING THE CLIENT
NOTE: If the Client is already open, choose File > Log Off to access the Logon
dialog box. You will have to close your current System connection.
2 From the Apogee Logon dialog box, click the cogwheel button and choose
Add System.
The Add System dialog box is displayed.
3 Enter the Apogee System IP address or host name, and click Find.
The Client starts to search for the specified system on your network. When it
is found, the system name is displayed in the dialog box.
4 Click Add to add this system to the list,
 To remove an Apogee System

1 Start the Apogee Client.
NOTE: If the Client is already open, choose File > Log Off... to access the Log
on dialog box. You will have to close your current System connection.
2 Select the Apogee System you want to delete from the list, click the cogwheel
button and choose Delete System.
NOTE: You can only remove Systems that were added manually, as described
above.
3 Click OK to confirm this operation.
The selected system is removed from the list.

The Management Windows

The Apogee Client includes three management windows:
 The Jobs Window, for viewing and managing jobs.
 The Hot Tickets Window, for viewing and managing Hot Tickets.
 The System Overview Window, for viewing and configuring the system
components (Task Processors and Resources), managing the Apogee System,
and managing individual Task Processor activities.
You can switch between these three windows using the Navigation Bar, which is
located at the bottom of each window.
The Jobs Window The Jobs Window gives you a complete high-level overview of your workflow. In
a single window, you can see the complete list and status of jobs in the system
and the output devices that are available.
You can track the progress and activity of jobs, and view information about
specific processing parameters. Powerful viewing features let you preview
rasterized jobs. This allows you to check trapped, imposed, and screened
bitmaps before imaging a proof, film, or plate. A Message Board keeps all users
up to date about jobs that require attention.
You can also interact with the displayed information. By context-clicking jobs
you can set priority handling for rush jobs, hold and resume jobs, approve or
reject jobs, resubmit jobs, process quick remakes, or open the Ticket Editor.
The Hot Tickets This is where you monitor, view, and manage the Hot Tickets that are created by
the Apogee System. Unlike Job Tickets, which appear in the Jobs Window
Window together with the jobs they are used to create, Hot Tickets appear only in the Hot
Tickets window.
Hot Tickets comprise only 3 tabs: Administration, Options, and Plan. There are
no Pages or Results tabs.
 There is no Pages tab because Hot Tickets do not require Run Lists to specify
which pages make up the job: The Run List is generated automatically, based
on the number of pages in the input document.
 There is no Results tab because Hot Tickets are never associated with the
results of a single job: Hot Tickets are used to generate multiple jobs.

64 THE MANAGEMENT WINDOWS
Jobs created by Hot Tickets appear in the Jobs List, together with the jobs
created by Job Tickets.
The System The System Overview provides centralized system management, allowing you
to monitor key components and tasks.
Overview Window
Exactly what you will see in the System Overview window depends on your
Access Level, as specified in your Preferences. However, all users can view and
configure workflow and process settings, including input channels, normalizing,
preflighting, screening, trapping, rendering, and output options.
If you have the necessary Access Level, you can also view and configure the
following system elements for optimal performance:
 Global system settings, such as archiving, logging and administration.
 Any available processing resources, including fonts, screens, calibration

curves, imposition profiles, ICC profiles, and more.

The Ticket Editor

Efficient and complete job ticketing capabilities are at the heart of Apogee. You
can import job tickets (via JDF), retrieve them from a ticket database (ticket
templates), or create new ones of your own.
Ticket Editing is an interactive, flexible process that lets you define a complete
Production Plan - including normalizing, preflighting, PDF trapping, imposition,
rendering, and integrated proofing.
Apogee’s Production Plan introduces a multi-flow concept, allowing you to

define several flows (both input and output) in a single Ticket.
You can access the Ticket Editor from any of the Management windows (see
“Creating or Editing a Ticket” on page 336).
There are two types of Tickets: Job Tickets and Hot Tickets. The Ticket Editor
allows you to create and edit both types. However, when you create or edit a Hot
Ticket, you do not need to specify page and result options. This is because:
 Hot Tickets do not require Run Lists to specify which pages make up the job:
The Run List is generated automatically, based on the number of pages in the
input document.
 Hot Tickets are never associated with the results of a single job: Hot Tickets
are used to generate multiple jobs.
The jobs that are created using these Tickets appear in the Jobs List.
Apogee also includes a dedicated module for creating an imposition which is

called Apogee Impose. This module is accessed from the Products tab of the
Ticket Editors. Refer to “Working with Apogee Impose” on page 365 for more
information on the main imposition windows.

66 WORK AREA COMMANDS AND INDICATORS
Work Area Commands and Indicators

The Client contains a number of global tools and indicators that are accessible in
some or all of the main and editing windows.
 Menus
 Toolbar
 Navigation Bar
 Message Indicator
 Tab Area
 Preferences
Menus The Apogee Menubar is available in each of the main Client windows. It includes
the following menus:
 File Menu
 Edit Menu
 Control Menu (Not available in System Overview)
 Processor Menu (Available in System Overview only)
 View Menu (Not available in System Overview)
 View Menu for Raster Preview
 Window Menu
 Help Menu
NOTE: See “Layout Editor Menus” on page 554 for information on the Layout
Editor menus.
Not all items included in these menus are available in every window. The active
menu or sub-menu items vary according to the window you are working in. This
is especially the case for the Apogee Impose module; see “Menus” on page 453.

TIP: Some of the menu options can be accessed more quickly by context-clicking
on jobs in the Job List, and selecting an item from the context menu.
File Menu
This menu provides commands that apply to sessions (logging in and out), and
documents (job tickets and archives).
–
File Menu Item Description

New from Templates Opens the Ticket Template dialog box. When used from the Hot
Tickets window, the Tickets tab is shown and the default Hot Ticket
template is selected. Otherwise, the Jobs tab is shown and the
default Job Ticket Template is selected.
New Default Job/Hot Opens the Ticket Editor with the default Ticket Template selected.
Ticket
New From Selected Opens the Job Ticket Editor with an empty Administration tab but
with the same plan, imposition, etc.
New Wide Format Job/ Opens the Layout Editor.
Hot Ticket
Create StoreFront Hot To create a hot ticket for integration with the web-to-print applica-
Ticket tion.
Open Allows you to select and open a previously saved ticket (*.ajt).
Save Saves the current ticket (Ticket Editor only).
Save As Allows you to save the ticket with a different name (Ticket Editor
only).
Save As Template Allows you to save the ticket as a Ticket Template.
Close Closes the current window.
Upload Document Allows you to add a file or a folder containing files to a job, Hot
Ticket or Public Page Store. When you upload a folder, Apogee
uploads all files and folders in that folder recursively. The uploaded
folder appears as a subfolder in the Page Store.
Submit Job Submits a new Ticket to the Apogee System (Ticket Editor only).
Submit Changes Submits the changes you have made to an existing job (Ticket Edi-
tor only).
Archive Job Allows you to choose a location and file name in order to archive
the selected job.
Import Job Archive Allows you to select and restore a previously saved job archive
(*.arch) or create a new job from a selected archive.

File Menu Item Description

Export • <selected item> From - Exports the item from a selected point in
the flow (Latest, Run List, Normalize, etc.).
Document - Saves a PDF document outside Apogee, where the
document can be edited, and then dragged back into Apogee
(Page Store PDF files only).
• Export Folder - Exports the selected folder.
• Job Dump - Similar to Archive Job, but only accessible by adminis-
trators for troubleshooting purposes (only for jobs, not for Hot
Tickets).
• Export Job Log - Exports the log file for the selected job.
• Export CAD Files: Exports the current original CAD file without any
changes you may have made.
• Export System Log (System Overview only) - Exports the log file for
the selected Apogee System.
• InkDrive - Exports the InkDrive files for the selected job (only
available when the job has InkDrive files).
• Imposition Layout - Exports the Imposition Layout and Marks files
for the selected job (only available when the job has received lay-
out information 'from Input').
• Output Device PPD - Creates a PPD file for the selected output
device.
• Hot Ticket PPD - Creates a PPD file for the selected Hot Ticket.
Open in ProductionCen- Opens the selected job in the ProductionCenter web application.
ter
Check Consistency • Checks Ticket Templates and/or Hot Tickets for changed parame-
ter sets and job resources. Any out-of-date references can be
updated, and are listed in a Consistency report. This option
requires Administrator access level.
Open in Production Dash- Opens the selected job in the Production Dashboard web applica-
board tion
Log on / Log off Allows you to log on to an Apogee System, or to log off from one.
When logging on, the Connect to System dialog box is displayed. If
you are already logged on to an Apogee System, you are asked to
confirm before proceeding. Note that Log on always ignores your
“automatically log on” preference.
Quit / Exit Closes the Apogee Client .
Edit Menu
This menu allows you to find, select, and edit job items. In Windows, you can
also access the Preferences from here.

Edit Menu Item Description

Undo / Can’t Undo Undoes the last Cut, Copy, or Paste operation (only enabled when
editing).
Cut Deletes the selected text, and copies it onto the clipboard.
Copy Copies the selected text onto the clipboard.
Paste Pastes the contents of the clipboard at the selected location.
Delete <selected item> Deletes the current selection.
View Item From Displays the selected item using the default viewer. You cannot edit
the item.
Edit <selected item> Displays the selected item using the default editor, where you can
modify the item.
Edit Imposition Opens the selected item in the main Apogee Impose window.
Duplicate Job Duplicates the selected job.
Create Versions Opens the Create Versions assistant.
Merge Jobs Merges the selected jobs.
Rename Renames the selected item.
Select • All - Selects all items in the current view.
• Even Positions - Selects all even placeholders/pages (Page Store
Only).
• Odd Positions - Selects all odd placeholders/pages (Page Store
Only).
• Empty Positions - Selects all empty placeholders (Page Store
Only).
• Different from Expected - Selects all pages in the Run list which
have a different size from the expected page size specified in the
job.
• Fronts - Selects all front sides when the view is set to “Fronts and
Backs” (Results tab only).
• Backs - Selects all back sides when the view is set to “Fronts and
Backs” (Results tab only).
• Flat - Selects flat (both front and back sides).
• Signature - Selects all sides in the signature when the view is set
to “Fronts and Backs” (Results tab only).
Find • <Page> in Page Store - Allows you to select a page in the Run List
or Page Layout pane, and then find the selected page in the Page
Store.
Adapt Part’s Page Size • Sets the finished trim size of a Product part to match the pages in
the Run List. Pages need to be assigned in the Run List.

Edit Menu Item Description

Page Adjustments • Offset By... - Allows you to adjust the offset of the selected page(s)
or placeholder(s).
• Scale By... - Allows you to adjust the scale of the selected page(s)
or placeholder(s).
• Rotate By... - Allows you to adjust the rotation of the selected
page(s) or placeholder(s).
• Edit / View - Opens the Adjustments dialog box for the selected
page(s)/placeholder(s). If you are not editing the job, the Adjust-
ments dialog box is read-only.
• Clear - Deletes all page adjustments.
Placeholder • Insert... - Allows you to insert or append placeholders.
• Remove... - Removes the selected placeholders from the Run List
(disabled when there are no blank pages in the selection).
• Make Blank - Puts a blank page in the selected placeholder(s).
Reverse Page Order Reverses the page order of selected pages placed in the Run List.
Preferences Opens the Preferences .
Control Menu
This menu allows you to control the processing of jobs, results and Task Proces-
sors. These items are active only after you have selected a job in the Job List. This
menu is not available for the System Overview.
Control Menu Item Description

Rush Job Upgrades the selected job to a Rush job.
Hold <selected item> Suspends all processing of the selected job(s), result(s) or Task Pro-
cessor(s) after the current activity for the items has been allowed to
finish. This option is disabled if all items are already on hold.
Resume <selected item> Resumes processing of the selected job(s), result(s) or Task Proces-
sor(s) This option is disabled if all items are already running.
Continue <selected Continues all or part of a job that has stopped. The job may have
item> stopped because it has reached a hold Action in its Production Plan,
or because it has been aborted, rejected, or in error.
Clear and Rebuild Run Used in Versioning jobs to remove all pages from the Run List, then
List rebuild it using the version names available in the input documents.
Reject <selected item> Rejects the selected item(s). All processing will be stopped for the
rejected item(s).
Stop Plating Stops the plating process (only available for PrintDrive jobs).
Clear Rejected Status Removes the rejected status from a previously rejected job, and
restarts processing.
Discard Prevents specific pages, flats or separations from being printed,
without stopping the rest of the job from being printed. Available
only when the items are waiting on a Hold action or when finished.

Control Menu Item Description

Include Includes discarded items.
Re-render <selected Remakes all the existing job results which follow the selected point
item> in the Production Plan. You may want to re-render a job if you have
changed your resources (new fonts, color books, etc.) or if you want
to remake aborted results, or remake output when no raster data is
available.
Re-image <selected Remakes previously imaged raster data (Digital Film) on your output
item> devices. This feature is available only for flows that have an imaging
output device and finished raster data.
Re-export <selected Re-exports previously exported results (when resources have
item> changed or exported files have to be recreated).
Re-print <selected item> Remakes previously imaged raster data (Digital Film) on a digital
press. This feature is available only for flows that have a digital
press and finished raster data.
Restart Job Processing At Restarts processing the selected items from a point in the flow. Jobs
offer the full list of Task Processors from the main flow: Documents
only offer the Task Processors up to and including the Run List.
Enable Inputs Re-activates all input channels for the selected job(s) or Hot
Ticket(s). By default, input channels are enabled. This option is dis-
abled if all job(s) or Hot Ticket(s) have their inputs enabled.
Disable Inputs De-activates all input channels for the selected job(s) or Hot
Ticket(s). This option is disabled if all job(s) or Hot Ticket(s) have
their inputs disabled. A Ticket cannot produce any jobs while dis-
abled.
Mark as Finished Marks the selected job as finished, aborting all current processing
and removing all outstanding tasks.
Processor Menu
This menu allows you to control the operation of Task Processors (System
Overview only).
Processor Menu Item Description

Start Starts the selected Task Processor(s). This option is disabled if all
Task Processor(s) are active.
Stop Stops the selected Task Processor(s). This option is disabled if all
Task Processor(s) are stopped.
Restart Restarts the selected Task Processor(s).
Put Offline Disables the scheduling of tasks for the selected Output Task Pro-
cessor. This option is disabled if all Output Task Processors are
offline.

Processor Menu Item Description

Put Online Enables the scheduling of tasks for the selected Output Task Pro-
cessor. This option is disabled if all Output Task Processors are
online.
Exposure Test Submits an Exposure Test job for the selected platesetter.
This command is available only for platesetters (e.g. Galileo, Palla-
dio)
Configure Allows you to access the Configuration settings of the selected out-
put device. Administrator access level required,
Resources Allows you to quickly access the resources of the selected Task Pro-
cessor.
Flush Starts printing the collected output for ganging (proofer), or flushes
the drum (imagesetter) and cuts the media.
View Menu
This menu allows you to control what information is displayed and how it is
displayed. This affects the look of the current window, but does not open or close
windows. View Menu items are only active after you have selected the Results
tab in the Jobs Window, or in the Ticket Editor.
View Menu Item Description

Flats Only Displays only the flat outlines in the Job Layout Pane. In this mode,
you cannot select individual pages.
Thumbnails Displays thumbnail images of all pages in the Job Layout pane.
Page Labels Displays/Hides the Page Label column in the Run List.
Run List Indexes Displays/Hides the Run List indexes in the Run List.
Extended Page Adjust- Extends the Adj column in the Run List to display extra icons (up to
ments 4 icons) which indicate specific page adjustments in the job.
Extras Displays checked items from the Show menu.
Highlight Unplaced Highlights against a green background the pages in the Page Store
Pages that have not been placed in the Run List.
Show • Page number - Shows the position of the page in the Run List
(Results tab only).
• Hold States - Shows pages and flats in blue when on hold (Results
tab only).

View Menu Item Description

Scale • Small - Displays small thumbnails (Results tab only).
• Normal - Displays normal thumbnails (Results tab only).
• Large - Displays large thumbnails (Results tab only).
• Fit to Window - Scales the results in the Job Layout pane so that
they fit horizontally within the width of the pane - otherwise a
fixed scaling is used (Results tab only).
In the Run List on the Pages tab, these commands scale the page
labels for versioning jobs.
Columns • Front and Back - Displays two columns of pages/flats, and “front”,
“back” and “signature” labels in the Job Layout pane.
• Fill Width - Displays as many columns of pages/flats as will fit in
the width of the Job Layout pane.
• 1-10 - Displays the pages/flats over the specified number of col-
umns in the Job Layout pane.
Flow • Results tab only. Selects the results from the selected flow for
viewing.
Panes • Devices: Opens or closes the Device pane (Hot Ticket and Job Lists
only).
• Job List: Opens or closes the Job List.
• Flow Activity: Opens or closes the Activity pane (Job list/ Results
tab only).
• Systems: Shows/hides the Hardware pane (System Overview
only).
• Production Sets
• Separations
• Resources: Shows/hides the Resources pane (System Overview
only).
Versions Allows you to view All, Previous or Next versions.
View Menu for Raster Preview

The Raster Preview View menu groups all commands that relate to the Preview
window. Most of these commands are also available as tools and/or keyboard
shortcuts.
Preview Menu Item Description

Zoom In Zooms in on the image in the Preview window. Each time you click
the Zoom In tool, the zoom factor is doubled, until you reach the
maximum zoom-in level (32:1).
Zoom Out Zooms out on the image in the Preview window. Each time you
click the Zoom Out tool, the zoom factor is halved, until you reach
the maximum zoom-out level (1:128).
Size To Fit Selects a zoom level that fits the entire image in the Preview win-
dow.


Actual Pixels Sets the zoom level to 1(each raster pixel is represented by a single
display pixel).
Next Side Displays the next side in the job.
Previous Side Displays the previous side in the job.
First Side Displays the first side in the job.
Last Side Displays the last side in the job.
Turn Sheet Raster Preview always groups results which have 2 sides (front and
back). When viewing results, use this option to toggle the view
(front or back).
Color Managed Displays the raster data using color management to convert the
press color space to the monitor color space, based on ICC profiles.
Light Table Displays blended front/back viewing, allowing you to check the
registration of the front and backs, or view whether you have prob-
lematic ink coverage.
Rule-Ups Displays the rule-ups you specified in the Rule-Ups floating palette.
This allows you to display additional layers of information on top of
the Raster Preview image. These include: Art Box, Trim Box, Crop
Box, Bleed Box, Media Box.
Boxes Allows you to directly toggle on or off any of the following indica-
tors which may be displayed over the raster data:
• Art Box:
• Trim Box:
• Crop Box:
• Bleed Box:
• Media Box:
• Expected Page Size:
• Press Sheet Size:
Press Sheet Displays raster data as if it were a press sheet.
Device Output Displays raster data as it would appear output from an imaging
device.
Transform • Rotate 90 CW: Rotates the current view 90 degrees clockwise.
• Rotate 90 CCW: Rotates the current view 90 degrees counter-
clockwise.
• Flip Horizontal: Flips the current view horizontally.
• Flip Vertical: Flips the current view vertically.
• Invert: Inverts the current view (negative).
Rulers Toggles on or off the Ruler in the Preview window.
Grid Toggles on or off the Grid in the Preview window.

Control Menu for Raster Preview

QuickProof Opens the QuickProof dialog box (only available for 1-bit screened
data for CTP/CTF devices).

Window Menu
This menu allows you to open, rearrange, and switch between the Apogee
windows. You can also hide or show any subsidiary windows, and bring any
currently displayed window to the front. This menu also lists the titles of all open
windows (in order of creation). The currently active window title has a
checkmark.
Window Menu Item Description

Zoom Window Opens or switches to the Preview window (OS X Raster Preview
only).
Minimize Window Minimizes the frontmost window (OS X only).
Bring All to Front Brings all Apogee windows to the front (OS X Raster Preview
only).
Cycle Through Windows OS X only.
New Window Opens a new Jobs or Raster Preview window.
System Overview Opens or switches to the System Overview window.
Hot Tickets Opens or switches to the Hot Tickets window.
Jobs Opens or switches to the last Jobs window.
Message Board Opens or switches to the Message Board.
Go to ProductionCenter Opens the ProductionCenter application in your default internet
browser, for example, to manage WebApproval and PrintSphere
users.
Go to PrintSphere Opens the PrintSphere file-sharing application in your default
internet browser, for example, to manage PrintSphere users.
Go to SphereCenter Opens the SphereCenter application in your default internet
browser, for example, to set up a PrintSphere subscription.
Go to StoreFront Opens the StoreCenter application in your default internet
browser, for example, to create StoreFront online web stores.
Activity for Task Processor Opens an Activity window for the selected Task Processor(s). You
can open multiple Activity windows.
Info for <selected item> Opens an Info window for the selected item(s). You can open
multiple Info windows (PDF documents only).
Info From Opens an Info window on the selected item(s) results. You can
select the latest or any other of the available results.
Remarks Opens the Remarks window, where you can view some or all
comments that were added to this job, as well as the source of
the comments (e.g. the Delano System).
Log for <selected item> Opens a Log window for the selected item(s). You can open mul-
tiple Log windows.

Window Menu Item Description

Problem Report for Opens a Problem Report window for the selected item(s). You
<selected item> can open multiple Problem Report windows (PDF documents
only).
Preflight Report Opens a Preflight Report window for the selected item(s). You
can open multiple Preflight Report windows (PDF documents
only).
Palettes (Raster Preview • Show/Hide Navigator: Opens or closes the Navigator palette.
only) • Show/Hide Inks: Opens or closes the Inks palette.
• Show/Hide Rule-ups: Opens or closes the Rule-ups palette.
• Show/Hide Versions: Opens or closes the Versions palette.
• Show/Hide Tools: Opens or closes the Tools palette.
Help Menu
This menu allows you to access the Help system. In Windows, it also includes
additional application-specific commands.
Help Menu Item Description

About Apogee Displays the splash screen and software version number. Click any-
where in the About box to dismiss it).
Check for Client Updates Checks whether you have the latest version of the Apogee client.
See the Installation Guide for more information on Client Updates.
Apogee Help Opens the first page of the Apogee Reference Guide.
What’s This? Allows you to access context-sensitive help on the selected item.
Icons Displays help information on the Apogee icons.
Keyboard Shortcuts Lists the Apogee keyboard shortcuts.
Variables Lists the Apogee variables.
Apogee Online Launches your web browser to view:
• Apogee Network: the Apogee Network home page
• Apogee Tutorials: practical lessons to help you work with Apogee
• Apogee Forum: an online forum where users of Apogee can post
questions and answers
• Download: links to download various files to help you work with
Apogee.

Help Menu Item Description

Apogee Report • Basic - Uses your browser to display a summarized overview of the
Apogee System.
• Extended - Uses your browser to display a detailed report of the
Apogee System.
Licenses • Load License File... - Allows you to select and open an Apogee
license file. The license file is then sent to the system for evalua-
tion.
• Save Fingerprint File... - Allows you to save an Apogee license file
in a specific location.
Configuration Wizard Launches the configuration wizard.
Toolbar The Toolbar allows you to quickly apply common commands. The buttons
displayed vary from window to window, and are available only after you have
selected a job in the Job List or job results in the Results tab.
Most of these commands can also be accessed from the Control and Edit menus.
Submit job or submit changes to a job.
Delete the selected item.
Edit Ticket.
View <selected item> (Job Ticket Editor only).
Make Blank (page in Run List - Job Ticket Editor only).
Give priority to processing the selected job (Rush job).
Hold job, or put device offline (System Overview).
Resume a job on hold, or put device online (System Overview).
Continue processing <selected item>.
Reject <selected item>.

Reprocess job from first.
Re-image <selected item>.
Enables the selected Hot Ticket (Hot Tickets window only).
Disables the selected Hot Ticket (Hot Tickets window only).
Display information about <selected item>.
Navigation Bar You can switch between the three management windows by clicking in the
Navigation bar, which is located at the bottom of each window.
On the righthand side of the Navigation bar, you will see the Activity Indicator.
This indicator is visually active whenever the Client is busy retrieving data from
the Server.
Message Indicator The Message Indicator flashes when one or more of the jobs or devices needs
attention. You can click the Message Indicator to open the Message Board and
find out what has caused the alarm. The Message Indicator will continue to flash
until you acknowledge the event that caused the alarm.
If all the messages in the Message Board have been acknowledged, the Message
Indicator stops flashing, but maintains a steady red glow. This is turned off when
there are no messages to report.
Even when the Message Indicator is not flashing, you can click it to quickly
access the Message Board.

If the Apogee Client is minimized or hidden, your Operating System’s alert

mechanism will notify you of any messages with a flashing button in the
Taskbar.
Tab Area The Tab Area appears in the Jobs window, and in the Ticket Editor. In the right
of the Tab Area are the tabs you can select to view or edit the selected job
(Administration, Options, Plan, Pages, Results.). These tabs are active only after
you have selected a job in the Job List.
In the left of the Tab Area you will see the name of the selected job.
Job Status Icons in Tab Area (JTE only)
The Tab Area may display additional information when you are working in the
Job Ticket Editor. In some situations, the job name may be followed by a small
icon which indicates the current status of the job:
The job is being viewed by you or by another user (JTE only).
The job is being edited by another user.
You are editing the job.
The selected job was being edited by you or by another user, but the edit session was broken
(Jobs window only). You can remove this icon by opening the job for editing.
For example:
If there are problems with a job you are creating or editing in the Ticket Editor,
you will see the following type of message in the Tab Area:
In this case, you can click the red error icon to access a Problem Report.

Viewing Messages
The Message Board is your troubleshooting tool within Apogee. It provides
information on jobs, devices, or systems which need attention, and gives you a
number of correction options. You can access the Message Board from anywhere
in the Apogee Client. You can also filter it based on a number of different criteria,
and on combinations of criteria.
 To open the Message Board
 Do one of the following:
 Click the Message Indicator in any of the management windows.
 Choose Window > Message Board.
Message Board
The Message Board consists of a Filter pane, Message List, Acknowledge Pane,
and Interaction pane.
 The Filter and Message List work together: The messages displayed are
determined by the filter (if any) you apply.
 The Acknowledge and Interaction panes work together: They display

detailed information on the selected message, and let you decide how the
alert should be handled.
Filter pane
The Filter pane allows you to specify which types of messages are displayed in
the Message Board. For example, you may only want to see critical warnings, or
be notified when user intervention is required. You apply a filter by clicking the
Filter icon, and specifying your filter options.
The Filter pane also indicates how many messages have been generated, and
how many of these messages have been selected, read, and acknowledged.
When a filter has been used, you will see the text:

82 VIEWING MESSAGES
Notice that the Filter icon is colored green when the filter has been applied.
By default, all messages are displayed (i.e. no filter is applied).
For example, if you see the text:
18 new messages, 21 messages displayed
This means there are 21 messages in total, of which 3 have been read and
acknowledged. In this case, no filter is applied.
Message List
The Message List displays the status, date, location, and description of each
message.
Message status One of the following status symbols is displayed:
The Apogee system issued a critical message.
The job has stopped pending user interaction.
The job has generated an error, and has stopped.
The job has generated a warning.
WebApproval message: A message on this job (or results) was received from WebApproval.
The job has generated an information message.
NOTE: These status symbols also appear in the Job List.
Date occurred Displays the time and date at which the message was generated. You can sort the
messages according to date by clicking the arrow in this column header. Each
time you click the arrow, the sort is toggled between ascending and descending
order.
Location Displays the name of the job, device, or system which generated the message. If
this is a job, then the job order number is also displayed in parentheses. You can
sort the messages according to location by clicking the arrow in this column

header. Each time you click the arrow, the sort is toggled alphabetically between
ascending and descending order.
Description Displays an abbreviated version of the message. You can view the full message
by selecting it. You can sort the messages according to description by clicking the
arrow in this column header. Each time you click the arrow, the sort is toggled
alphabetically between ascending and descending order.
Message background color Each message row has a colored background:
Pink: The message has not yet been Acknowledged.
Yellow: This is the currently selected message.
Gray: The message has been Acknowledged.
Acknowledge pane
The Acknowledge pane displays information and the acknowledgement status

of the currently selected message in the Message List.
Message summary Displays the summarized message text from the Message List Description
column.
Reported by Indicates which Task Processor generated the message, and when, in the format
“Reported by <Task Processor> at <time and date>”.
Acknowledgement status Indicates who (if anybody) first acknowledged the message, and when, in the
format “acknowledged by <user> at <time and date>”.
Acknowledgement button Click this button once you have read the message. Any Errors or Warnings that
you acknowledge are removed from the Message List. User Interaction messages
remain in the list until the required action has been taken.
Notification/Interaction pane
Notification message Displays a more detailed version of the message. Some messages are followed by
a suggested course of action, such as:
“There is no location for exporting the system log. The default

C:\Apogee Prepress\SysLog\$DATE.log will be used”
Interactive dialog buttons. Some messages include interactive dialog buttons which allow you to correct the
cause of the error or warning. For example, Retry, Abort Task, Update, Don’t
Update, or Yes/No buttons.

84 VIEWING MESSAGES
The Edit Job button always appears for job notification messages. You can click
this button to edit the job directly, and correct the problem. The Edit Job button
is not available for System messages.
NOTE: If you select more than one message, you will see no specific message
information, only “x messages selected”.
Filtering Messages You can filter the Message Board based on a number of different criteria, and on
combinations of criteria.
 To filter messages in the Message Board
 Click the Filter icon.
The Message Board Filter dialog box is displayed.
Any filters you specify are cumulative. Only the messages which match all the
specified criteria are displayed.

Message Board Filter
You can apply three types of filters. The options you select in each type are
combined to produce a highly customizable filtering mechanism:
 From: Shows only messages generated by the selected module(s).
 Level: Shows only messages of a specific level(s) of importance or urgency.
 Date: Shows only messages from a specific time frame.
Filter
On/Off Activate or deactivate the filter by clicking the Filter On or Off radio button.
Unacknowledged Select this check box to display only the messages which have not yet been
messages only acknowledged.
From
Jobs To filter messages based on a particular operator or job name, select the Jobs
check box, click the associated list box, and choose one of the following:
 Operator name contains: This is the name of an operator as specified in the

Administration tab of one or more tickets. Enter the operator’s name here.
When you apply the filter, all messages which relate to jobs belonging to this
operator will be displayed.
 Job name contains: This is the name of a job as specified in the Administra-
tion tab of a ticket. Enter the job name here. When you apply the filter, all
messages relating to this job will be displayed.
Device Administrator access level only!
To filter messages based on a particular output device, select the Devices check
box, click the associated list box, and choose one of the available output devices
(such as printers, imagesetters, proofers, etc.).
When you apply the filter, all messages which relate to the selected device will
be displayed.
System Administrator access level only!
To filter messages based on those generated by the Apogee System (such as Task
Processors, Apogee Client, etc.), select the System check box.

86 VIEWING MESSAGES
Level
To filter messages by type, select one or more of the Level filtering check boxes.
In Error Filter on jobs which have generated an error.
Warning Filter on jobs which have generated a warning.
User interaction, proofing Filter on jobs which require user intervention or proofing.
Informational Filter on jobs which have generated a message (information only).
Date
To filter messages by date, select the Date filtering check box, and use the three
associated list boxes to choose a specific date or time window.
Apply and OK
Click Apply to save your settings. Click OK to close the Message Board Filter.
TIP: Simply clicking OK will The filter is applied immediately. This is confirmed by the message “(Filter
both apply your changes and Applied)” in the Filter pane.
close the Message Board
Filter.
Critical Messages If the Apogee system detects a situation that jeopardizes the proper functioning
of the system (for example, low disk space), it issues a critical message.
A critical message is a high-priority message that cannot be filtered or acknowl-

edged. Because these messages require immediate action, the client intercepts
them and displays a special alert window. The client also checks the presence of
critical messages at startup.
The Critical System Alert window is a floating window that can be moved but
cannot be closed until the particular problem is resolved. This window does not
prevent interaction with the client, but normal operation may be affected
because of the critical condition of the server (slow response, processing on
hold, etc.). The window lists the critical messages and corresponding
timestamps. It also includes a ‘Review’ button which you can use to open the
Message Board to view only the critical messages.

Viewing Remarks
Apogee jobs are integrated with WebApproval. This means that jobs which
include a Web Proof Action can be viewed and assessed by interested third-
party’s, such as print buyers. These users can add their comments about the job,
and can approve or reject it. This feedback can be viewed in Apogee, where you
can open the Remarks Inspector and view some or all comments that were added
to this job, as well as the source of the comments (e.g. the WebApproval
System).
 To open the remarks inspector

1 Select a job with a WebApproval message.
2 Select Window > Remarks.
The Remarks Inspector is displayed.
3 Click the arrow at the bottom of each remark to view the full text.
NOTE: You can click the “hot spot” of an annotation remark to open the Raster
Preview Client.
4 Click the Include list to filter the displayed remarks as follows:

88 VIEWING REMARKS
 All
 Today
 Last 2 days
 Last 3 days
 One week
 Most recent
A number of icons are associated with each remark.
Monitor Status
The monitor status is up to date and the overall display rating is greater than 90% (Excellent).
The monitor status is up to date and the overall display rating is between 80% and 90%
(Medium).
The monitor status is up to date and the overall display rating is less than 80% (Bad).
There is no monitor status, or it is out of date (Undefined).
Remark Origin
Customer remark (WebApproval jobs only).
Printer remark (WebApproval jobs only).
Remark Type
An annotation remark created in WebApproval. Click the associated (blue -encircled) annota-
tion number to jump directly to the referenced location in Raster Preview.
The job has been approved by the corresponding reviewer (printer, customer).
The job has been rejected by the corresponding reviewer (printer, customer).
A job remark.
A page remark.
Preflight remark
Preflight remark - warning

Preflight remark - error
Internal remark which cannot be seen by the customer
Remark has attachment (customer remarks only)
View file produced after preflight
View report produced by preflight
Additionally, you may see blue-circled number next to the remark text. You
can click this number to jump directly to the referenced location in the job.

90 PREFERENCES
Preferences
Your Preferences are divided into the following categories:
 General
 Logging On
 Viewers
 Imposition Editor
General
Display units Select the unit of measurement that you want Apogee to display and the Preci-
sion of the measurements.
 millimeters
 inches
Notifications Select the check box to hear a sound when critical system messages are
generated.
User Interaction  Enable double-clicking a job to Edit: Select the check box if you want to open
a job in the Job List by double-clicking it. The job will open in the Job Ticket
Editor or the Layout Editor, depending on the type of job.
 Open Layout Editor when imposition is Layout: Select if you always want to
open packaging jobs in the Layout Editor.
 Open Product Editor when double-clicking a product (in stead of Preview):

Select the check box to open the Product Editor when you double-click a
product in the Product panel of the Layout Editor (default). Clear the check
box if you want the product to open in the Raster Preview module and
automatically create a preview.
 Prompt for details when adding artwork files: Select this option if you want
to control how products are named when you select artwork to add products
in the Layout Editor. See “Adding Products from Artwork” on page 483.
Language Lists all the languages in which the user interface is available. The available
languages were selected when the Apogee System was installed.
JDF Sheet Names Show MIS press sheet names when present: Select this option to display JDF sheet
names instead of Apogee names, in the Results tab and main Apogee Impose
windows.

Job Operator The job operator receives notifications that pertain to his/her jobs. This option
determines whether the operator field in a job can be edited at anytime, or
whether it is locked after a job has been submitted.
Lock operator name after submitting the job: The Operator field is locked and
cannot be edited after the job has been submitted. This is the default setting.
Always allow changing the operator name: The Operator field remains editable at
all times. Note that the operator field is always editable if it is empty or when it
contains a ‘JDF’ string, regardless of the preference.
Create color-managed Select the check box to automatically create color-managed previews and calcu-
Previews late final output CMYK values when you add new images to a layout job, in the
Layout Editor. It is recommended to leave this option off unless you always need
color-managed previews in the Layout Editor.
Logging On
The Logging On tab defines your access rights, and allows you to specify how the
Client selects and logs on to an Apogee System.
User name Enter the name supplied to you by your Apogee administrator.
Preferred system Enter the name of the system you want to connect to at startup. You can also
click the Browse button and select a system from the displayed list.
Password Enter the password supplied to you by your Apogee administrator.
Automatically log on at Select this check box if you want to automatically log on to your preferred
startup Apogee System each time the Client is started.
Viewers
There are two viewers: PDF Viewer, for checking PDF job results and Raster
Preview, for checking raster job results.
PDF viewer If you want to be able preview PDF job results in the Pages or Results tabs of the
Jobs window, you must specify where your Acrobat PDF viewing application is
located.
NOTE: Acrobat Reader will always display the first page of the job. To directly
view a specific page within the job, you need to use Acrobat Professional.
system default: Apogee will search for your PDF viewer in your system’s default
installation folder.

92 PREFERENCES
other: If you have installed your PDF viewer in a different location, enter the
pathname here.
Raster Preview These fields allow you to specify the settings that will be used by Raster Preview.
You can temporarily override any of these settings while you are previewing
pages. However, this does not change the default settings.
Gridline every: Sets the default units of measurement of the grid (cms, inches,
mms, picas, pixels, or points), and the distance between the major gridline
divisions.
Subdivisions: The grid displays gridlines for every major and minor division of
the ruler. Major divisions are drawn in solid blue, subdivisions in light blue. This
parameter sets the distance between the gridline subdivisions.
Auto-switch zoom factor: Select the switchover point from low resolution
(contone) viewing to high resolution viewing when previewing a job (4x, 2x, 1,
1/2, 1/4, 1/8).
Display single separation in color: When you view a single separation (a single
separation selected in the Raster preview Inks palette), it is by default displayed
in grayscale. If you select this check box, it is displayed in color. If more than 1
separation is selected in the Raster Preview, these separations are always
displayed in color.
When preview is color You can choose from the following for color-managed previewed results:
managed
Rendering Intent: The following Rendering Intents available, although not all
profiles contain Look Up tables (LUTs) for each of them. In this case often a
duplicate of one Look Up table is used for missing Render Intent LUT. The
Rendering Intent defines the way the source colors are mapped to the destina-
tion space.
 Relative Colorimetric: A colorimetric conversion, tries to maintain the exact

relationship (Smallest Delta E), between in-gamut colors, while out of gamut
colors will be clipped. With Relative Colorimetric RI the white point from
source color space is mapped to the white point of destination, this means
that white stays white. No ink will be placed in white areas.
 Absolute Colorimetric: Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent is similar to

Relative except that here the white point of the 2 profiles is preserved. White
of source color space is simulated with CMYK values from the destination
color space. The consequence is that every white object/area is covered with
certain ink amounts.

Accurate Spot Color Mixing: In this enhanced mode, spot color visualization is
superior to the standard color-managed mode. You can choose from the
following:
 Off
 Max. 2 colors
 Max. 3 colors
Use Press Paper White: Pantone\spot color inks are transparent and appear
differently when printed on different substrates. Normally, you should select
this option when creating a proof which will be used by the printer to print a spot
color on the Press (when the simulated spot color on proof needs to resemble the
final printed result). In this case, the paper white from the press profile is used
in the color calculation.
If this option is not selected, the measured paper white of the color book is used
in the calculation of the spot colors. The option should therefore be deselected
when the simulated spot colors on the proof are compared to the color book
reference prints (with a measurement device, for example).
NOTE: A spectral press profile is required for this option.
Imposition Editor
This tab is used to set your preferences for Apogee Impose.
When closing the Imposi- Choose your preferred behavior for when you close the main Apogee Impose
tion Editor windows.
Assembly View Choose how you want the Product assembly to be viewed in the Assembly pane.
Apogee Impose Client Select ‘Make this an Apogee Impose editing station’ if you want an Apogee
License Impose license to be assigned to this particular user.
Auto Fit Enter the time in seconds to allow Apogee Impose to search for an Auto Fit rule
in automatic imposition mode.
Validation
These validation checks only performed for Apogee Impose jobs.
Product Intent Select the Warn when amount of Kept spot colors doesn’t match the Part’s
spot colors check box to generate warnings when the number of spot colors in
the parts is not equal to the kept spot colors in the Separation operation.

94 CUSTOMIZING YOUR WORK AREA
Apogee Imposition Select the option to allow the job to be submitted with imposition errors. This
means that the press sheets must be inspected before further processing.
 To open your Preferences
 Choose Edit > Preferences.
Customizing Your Work Area

When you start the Apogee Client, the Jobs window is automatically opened.
From here, you can open the other Main windows (Hot Tickets and System
Overview), and arrange all three windows on your desktop.
You can reposition and resize each window, and adjust the panes inside the
windows. Most of these panes can be resized by dragging the pane borders.
Some panes also have an expansion triangle. This is a small triangular icon in the
centre edge of the pane pointing either to the right or left. For example, the Job
List pane in the Jobs window has an expansion triangle on the right edge. You
can close the pane, and open it again by clicking on this expansion triangle.
When you quit the Client, any adjustments you have made to the positions and
sizes of the windows and panes are saved. The next time you start the Client, The
Jobs window will open with these new settings. When you open the other Main
window, these too are restored with the last settings used (position and size).
 To adjust the width of a pane

1 Select a pane, and position the mouse pointer over the one of the borders.
If the pointer changes to a two-headed arrow, you can adjust it.
2 Click and drag the pointer to the left or right, and release the mouse button.

CHAPTER
4 Previewing Job Results

This section describes how you can view and analyze job results. On the basis of
this detailed preview, you can then approve and send the job results directly to
an output device, or reject them.
 Apogee Soft Previews ........................................................................................... 96

 Raster Preview ........................................................................................................ 97
 Post-Preview Options ................................................................................... 97
 Preview Window and Tools ................................................................................ 98
 Preview Window ............................................................................................. 99
 Navigator Palette ........................................................................................... 99
 Inks Palette ................................................................................................... 100
 Rule-ups Palette .......................................................................................... 101
 Light Table Slider ........................................................................................ 103
 Versions Palette ........................................................................................... 103
 Tools Palette ................................................................................................. 105
 Preview Menus ............................................................................................. 107
 Opening/Closing Pages or Flats for Preview ........................................... 108
 Browsing your Results ....................................................................................... 110
 Zooming Images ................................................................................................. 112
 Changing the Default View ............................................................................. 114
 Measuring Ink Coverage .................................................................................. 118
 Measuring Screen Angles ................................................................................ 120
 Measuring Line Frequency .............................................................................. 121
 Color-Managed Raster Preview ..................................................................... 123
 Depth Tool ............................................................................................................. 124
 Saturation, Contrast and Channel Adjustments ...................................... 126
 Comparing Results ............................................................................................. 129
 Approving/Rejecting Jobs ............................................................................... 131
 Comparing Version-Specific Plates .............................................................. 134
 View modes ................................................................................................... 134
 Viewing/Editing Raster Preview Preferences ........................................... 136
 QuickProof ............................................................................................................. 137
95
96 APOGEE SOFT PREVIEWS
Apogee Soft Previews

You can preview your job data at any point in the Production Plan. This “soft
preview” data is not physically output to a printer. Instead, the job data is
displayed on-screen.
There are two types of Preview:
 PDF Preview: The purpose of a PDF Preview is to allow you to check PDF job
results (flats or pages) on-screen, before the job is rendered. No physical
output results are generated. For more information on PDF Preview, see “To
view job results in the Page Store or Run List” on page 215.
 Raster Preview: The purpose of a Raster Preview is to allow you to check

raster job results (flats or pages) on-screen, after the job has been rendered.
No physical output results are generated. Raster Preview is an integrated part
of Apogee, and is described in detail in this section.

4 PREVIEWING JOB RESULTS 97
Raster Preview
Raster Preview allows you to examine rasterized job data. Once Apogee has
rendered one or more jobs, you can select and view the individual job pages by
double-clicking the job results in the Job Layout pane. Apogee creates an exact,
viewable image of the data on your front-end workstation. The requested raster
data is displayed as a series of overlapping separations. You can open and view
pages at different magnifications, and check individual color separations, ink
coverage, and screen angles.
On the basis of this detailed job preview, you can approve and send the job
directly to your output device (platesetter, imagesetter, etc.) or abort the job
before submitting it to output. You can also save the rendered job data to disk.
Preview supports all resolutions, screening modes, and page sizes. You can
simultaneously preview several pages from the same job, and multiple previews
of a single page. Images can be displayed at any zoom factor from 1:128 to 32:1.
You can preview one page of a job which has been rendered, while the following
page is being rendered. Overlap between “rendering/previewing” and
“imaging” is also supported on a page-by-page or flat-by-flat basis.
NOTE: Preview is a “read-only” application: Tools are provided for zooming and
panning the image, and for displaying various types of image information.
However, no changes can be made to the raster data. If errors are found in the
previewed data, the job content must be corrected in the original application,
and then re-submitted.
Post-Preview When you have finished previewing the pages of a job, you can:
Options  Approve the results: You can approve the previewed page, or the entire job,
and send it directly to your output device. Once it has been output, the raster
data is automatically deleted, and will no longer be available for previewing
or imaging.
 Reject the results: You can reject the previewed page, or the entire job.
Rejected items are marked with a red stripe.
 Approve rejected results: You can approve a job or item which is currently
marked as rejected. This item is then treated the same as an approved item.

98 PREVIEW WINDOW AND TOOLS
Preview Window and Tools

When you select and open a page or flat for previewing, the Preview window is
opened on your desktop. This window displays the selected raster data, and
provides a set of tools and options for viewing and measuring the data.
At the bottom of the Preview window is the status bar.
The Preview status bar contains the following tools:
 Zoom slider: You can drag the zoom slider left or right to change the zoom
level. This zooms the image around the center of the Preview window.
 Screen angle measurement results: Displays the results of any screen angle
measurements you perform.
 Width and height measurement results: Displays the width and height of the
box defined by the diagonal you draw with the Measurements tool.
 Screen frequency results: Displays the results of any screen frequency

measurements you perform (only displayed when you zoom in to view the
raster data).
 Light table tool: Displays blended front and back views of your raster data.
This allows you to check the registration of the front and backs, or check if
there are problems with the ink coverage.
 Full screen display button: On the right is a button which switches the
Preview window to full screen (the shortcut key is ‘f”). You can return to
normal view by pressing the Esc key.
You can also display a series of small palettes for the currently active Preview
window:
NOTE: These palettes are  Navigator Palette: Provides a snapshot of the entire page or flat, as a low
hidden when the active resolution continuous tone image. Using this palette, you can focus on the
window is not a raster detail of one area of the selected page or flat. This view can be panned and
Preview window. zoomed over the entire area of the page.
 Inks Palette: Allows you to view the different separations, and measures the
ink coverage within the selected area of the Preview window.

 Rule-ups Palette: Rule-ups are additional layers of information which are

displayed on top of the Raster Preview image. The Rule/ups palette contains
a table which lists the layers you can display.
 Versions Palette: Allows you to display version-specific plates. For more

information, see “What is Versioning?” on page 53.
 The Tools Palette: Provides quick access to common tasks and procedures.
The Preview window and the Navigator and Inks palettes can be resized using
the resize handle in the lower right corner. The location and size of all windows
is remembered between sessions.
You can open several Preview windows, but only one Inks palette. These display
information about the active Preview window. You can close or minimize each
of the smaller palettes individually, or you can hide them all at once.
Preview Window The Preview window displays in detail the area of the image that is currently
selected by the Navigator palette locator. The Preview window displays:
 A Title bar: Shows the name of the job, followed by the page or signature
number and Task Processor name.
 The selected raster data: When you open an item to preview, the selected
raster data (page or flat) is initially shown as a low resolution continuous
tone image. When you zoom in to approximately an 8x zoom factor, the
continuous tone image is replaced with the high resolution raster data. This
allows you to preview traps, halftone dots, etc. The way in which raster data
is by default displayed can be customized, as described in “Preferences” on
page 90.
 Ruler and Grid (optional): Preview windows can display rulers in user-select-
able units of measurement (millimeters, centimeters, inches, pixels, or
picas).
You can open as many Preview windows as your system resources allow. You can
have several Preview windows showing the same raster data at different magni-
fications, or windows showing different raster data.
Navigator Palette The Navigator palette displays a snapshot of the entire page or flats as a low
resolution continuous tone image. This palette can be switched on or off by
selecting Window > Palettes > Show/Hide Navigator.

You can open a Navigator palette for every page that you preview.
The Navigator provides a view of the entire page or flat, at a low magnification:
A red “locator” rectangle in the Navigator palette indicates which part of the
page is enlarged in the Preview window. You can quickly preview different areas
of the page by clicking the mouse pointer inside the locator and dragging it to
another position. You can click outside the locator to center the view area on the
clicked point.
Inks Palette The Inks palette automatically measures the ink coverage within the selected
area of the Preview window. This palette can be switched on or off by selecting
Window > Palettes > Show/Hide Inks.
The Inks palette contains a table which lists the separations in the selected page
or flat.
The table has three columns:

 Visibility control (eye icon): You can click the eye icon to hide the associated
separation. The eye icon then disappears. You can click the same icon to
display the separation again.
 Color well: Click here to open the system color picker, and select the color of
the associated box. For White, Primer or Varnish, you can also set the
transparency.
 Ink: The name of the separation. This may be a CMYK separation, or a spot
color. This can also be White, Primer or Varnish if these are included in the
document.
 Covers %: The ink coverage is expressed as a percentage, and is represented

both numerically and as a color bar. The bar shows the color of the separa-
tion. The ink coverage calculation is accurate to within 3 percent of the actual
ink coverage.
Under the table there is a ‘Show ink coverage’ check box. By default, this option
is unchecked, and Preview does not perform any ink coverage calculations. This
avoids unwanted (and possibly lengthy) calculations each time you preview
raster results. Click the Cursor/Selection or Entire image button to measure the
ink coverage at the cursor point, for a selected area or the entire image.
NOTE: You can press the Alt key and click on a hidden separation to show that
separation, hiding all others.
The Inks palette can be resized using the resize handle in the lower right corner,
and can be switched on or off by selecting Window > Palettes > Show/Hide
Inks.
Rule-ups Palette Rule-ups are additional layers of information which are displayed on top of the
Raster Preview image. The Rule/ups palette contains a table which lists the
layers you can display.
The table has five columns:

 Visibility control (eye icon): You can click the eye icon to hide the associated
layer. The eye icon then disappears. You can click the same icon to display the
layer again.
 Color well: Click here to open the system color picker, and select the color of
the associated box.
 Layer: The name of the layer. This may include any of the following:
 Trim box
 Crop box
 Art box
 Media box
 Bleed box
 Press Sheet
 Expected Page Size
 Line Style: Click the associated dropdown list and select a line style:
 Solid
 Dashed (8-pixel / 6-pixel gap)
 Dotted (1-pixel / 2-pixel gap)
Initially all line styles are Solid.
Under the table there is a ‘Show/Hide Rule-ups’ check box. By default, this
option is unchecked, and Preview does not display any boxes.
NOTE: You can press the Alt key and click on a hidden box to show that box,
hiding all others.
Your last used Rule-ups palette configuration is saved locally (colors, line styles,
rule-ups selection shown). It does not change when you browse through your
results.

Light Table Slider The Light Table slider allows you to display blended front and back views of your
raster data. This allows you to check the registration of the front and backs, or
check if there are problems with the ink coverage.
NOTE: This feature only works on the front and backs of the same signature/
page. You cannot combine sides that belong to different signatures/flats.
You control this feature using the Light Table slider. This slider allows you to
shift the opacity of the results from the front view to the back view. When you
move the slider, a percentage of both sides (front and back) is blended in the
results you are viewing.
NOTE: In Press sheet mode, the side that is in front (front or back) will always be
right reading. Typically, the other side of the Light Table view that shines
through will be wrong reading.
The preview takes longer to build when the Light Table option enabled in the
View menu. The build up of the preview will progressively show all separation
colors from the front and backside. In most cases this means the load time will
double when Light Table is active. Each time you slide the opacity slider the
preview will rebuild.
The Light Table options are disabled if you are viewing one-sided results (pages
with no imposition) or if this feature in not licensed.
Versions Palette The Versions Palette allows you to display version-specific plates in versioning
jobs. The palette lists the available versions in the job, together with their associ-
ated plate sets.
 Show version specific plates only: Select this check box to display only the
plates belonging to the selected version.

 Show version specific plates as: Select this check box to identify version-
specific content using the associated color.
Comparing Versions
Raster Preview provides you with a Compare functionality which allows you to
inspect misalignment issues in versioning jobs by comparing version-specific
plates against each other. The goal is to spot objects that became shifted across
versions, especially when those versions share a set of common plates.
For example, suppose you have a job with three versions, containing a photo-
graph that prints in CMYK. The three versions share the CMY plates, and each
have their own K plate. For the photograph to print correctly in all versions, the
photograph image on the K plate of each version must be aligned precisely with
the common CMY plates. In some cases the shift is small, and is hard to notice
when previewing the version on screen. However, it is very obvious in print.
To quickly and easily spot such shifts, you can keep one version - the master
version - on a light table, and lay the next version on top of it. When looking at
the layered composite, unwanted shifts become immediately obvious. A quick
way to check whether there might be a problem, before comparing the
individual versions, is to layer all versions on top of each other: Common images
should still look OK. If you notice a shift, you can use the comparison technique
to identify the problem version (or versions).
You control the viewing mode by clicking the viewing mode selector in the
Versions palette or by selecting the corresponding menu item
(View > Versions). You can also switch modes by using shortcuts (‘N’ for Normal
mode, ‘A’ for All and ‘C’ for compare).
 Normal: Views each version as printed, one by one. The previous and next
version shortcuts simply switch the version being viewed. By default, you see
all plates that make up the version, but you can view the version-specific
plates only.
 All: Shows all version-specific plates on top of each other. This is done using
the View > All Versions command or the ‘A’ shortcut. If you double-click a
flat from within the Results tab in ‘View All’ mode, Raster Preview also starts
in ‘All’ mode. The plate of the first version is shown is cyan, the other plates
are all shown in magenta. As such, shifted pixels stand out very clearly.
NOTE: This mode only shows the version-specific plates: You cannot switch
this off.
 Compare: Shows the version-specific plates of the master version and a

version, layered on top of each other. The master and version plates appear

in different colors to highlight possible shifts. The previous and next version
shortcut keys switch the top-layered version, keeping the master plate under-
neath. You can also click a version in the palette to make an immediate
selection. When Raster Preview detects a change of master, it switches the
master plate as well.
Icon to indicate the master version.
Multiple product versions

If a press sheet contains more than one product version (a so-called multiple-
versions press sheet), the Versions palette lists the plates for each press sheet
version. The sheet version number (SV1, SV2, etc.) is displayed instead of the
version name.
Tools Palette The Tools palette provides quick access to common tasks and procedures.
Each of these tools is described below.

Marquee tool. Allows you to draw a rectangle in the Preview window by clicking and drag-
ging. The ink values for the selected region are measured and displayed in the Inks palette.
For more information, see “To measure the ink coverage of a selected area” on page 118.
Hand tool. Pans the image, allowing you to view a page that exceeds the size of the Preview
window. With this tool selected, click inside the Preview window and drag the image around.
Zoom tool. Zooms in to the next zoom level in the Preview window. You can zoom out by
holding down the Alt key. Alternatively, you can click and drag to zoom into a specified area.
For more information, see “To zoom in on a point using the Zoom tool” on page 112.
Measure tool. Measures raster angles, and distances between the raster points. You can also
use it to calculate the line ruling of a separation. For more information, see “To measure
screen angles” on page 120.
Next tool: Displays the next side result (e.g. Cover Sig 1 Front > Cover Sig 1 Back > Cover Sig
2 Front > Cover Sig 2 Back etc.). If you hold down the ‘C’ key while clicking the tool, Apogee
displays the next sheet result (e.g. Cover Sig 1 Back > Cover Sig 2 Back > Cover Sig 3 Back).
Previous tool: Displays the previous side result. If you hold down the ‘C’ key while clicking
the tool, Apogee displays the previous sheet result.
Turn Sheet tool. If your results have 2 sides (front and back), Raster Preview can switch
between the two sides. Click this tool (CTRL+T) to toggle the view (front or back). This tool is
disabled if the result only contains one side.
Info tool. Display information about the selected item.
Light Table tool. Displays or hides blended front and back views of your raster data. This fea-
ture only works on the front and backs of the same signature/page.
Rule-Ups tool. Displays or hides additional layers of information on top of the Raster Preview
image. The Rule/ups palette contains a table which lists the layers you can display.
Rotate clockwise tool. Rotates the current view 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate counterclockwise tool. Rotates the current view 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Flip vertical tool. Flips the current view vertically.
Flip horizontal tool. Flips the current view horizontally.
Invert tool. Inverts the current view (negative). For more information, see “To invert an image
(negative)” on page 115.
Color Managed tool. Activates color-managed raster preview. This allows you to preview the
rendered result using color management to convert the press color space to the monitor color
space (based on ICC profiles).
Show/hide a Depth map. See “Depth Tool” on page 124.

Show/Hide rulers tool. Shows/Hides ruler coordinates in the units set in your Preferences.
Show/Hide gridlines tool. Shows/Hides gridlines for every major and minor division of the
ruler. The default setting is specified in your Preferences.
Approve tool. Approves a previewed result. This tool is disabled if no soft preview has been
requested. For more information, see “To approve or reject one or more job items” on
page 131.
Reject tool. Rejects a previewed result. This tool is disabled if no soft preview has been
requested. For more information, see “To approve or reject one or more job items” on
page 131.
Preview Menus All the Preview settings and commands are grouped in the View, Control and
Window menus.

108 OPENING/CLOSING PAGES OR FLATS FOR PREVIEW
Opening/Closing Pages or Flats for Preview

This section describes the different ways that you can open and close pages or
flats in Preview mode.
 To open pages or flats for preview

1 Select the Jobs Window.
2 Look in the Job List, and select a job that has a Soft Proof status icon.
NOTE: Do not select a folder: You need to expand folders in order to select
jobs.
After a few seconds, the job data is retrieved.
3 Select the Results tab.
4 Look in the Job Layout pane.
You will see a graphical thumbnail representation of the selected job pages or
flats.
A successfully rendered page or flat will have solid separation indicators.
5 Double-click one or more page or flat thumbnails that have been successfully
rendered.
The first of the selected items is displayed in Preview mode. The default view
is set to “Fit to window”, and the view settings display a positive, upright,
right-reading image.
When opening pages for preview, the page is initially shown as a low resolution
continuous tone image. When zooming in, if you have the Raster Preview
option, the continuous tone image is replaced with the high resolution raster
data (from approximately 1:8 zoom factor). This allows you to preview traps,
halftone dots, etc. Only the full version of Apogee allows you to preview high
resolution raster data. The Apogee Light version can be upgraded to include the
Raster Preview option.

NOTE: More than one Preview Window can be opened for a particular page, each
with its own zoom factor. You can also open multiple different pages within a
job, but you cannot simultaneously open and view pages from different jobs.
 To open multiple views on a page
In addition to opening multiple pages, you can also open up multiple windows
on the currently selected page to display detailed views on different areas of the
image.
1 Open a page or flat, as described in “To open pages or flats for preview” on
page 108.
2 While your selected page is active, select Window > New Window.
Preview opens a new Preview window for the current page. Each of the
windows you open can display a different part of the page with a different
zoom factor.
NOTE: The maximum number of windows that you can have open at any
given time depends largely on your system’s memory configuration.
However, you can preview only one job at a time.
 To close a preview window

1 Click the mouse inside the Preview window that you want to close.
This makes the window the active window.
2 Select File > Close, or directly click the close button in the Title bar.
3 The selected Preview window is closed.
If this is the only Preview window open, then the Navigator and any other
associated Preview windows that may be open are also closed.

110 BROWSING YOUR RESULTS
Browsing your Results

To view your results you can select multiple results in the Results tab, and
multiple raster preview windows will open. However, once Raster Preview is
launched, it offers an alternative way to browse through your results within a
single raster preview window. This way you can avoid switching back and forth
between the Results tab and Raster Preview.
 To view next and previous results

1 Double-click on a page in the middle of a set of results to launch Raster
Preview.
2 Click the Next and Previous buttons to browse forwards and backwards
through the results from front to back.
Raster Preview displays the next and previous side results (e.g. Cover Sig 1
Front < > Cover Sig 1 Back < > Cover Sig 2 Front < > Cover Sig 2 Back <
> etc.).
3 Hold down the C key while clicking the Next and Previous buttons to browse
forwards and backwards through the results from sheet to sheet.
Raster Preview displays the next and previous sheet results (e.g. Cover Sig 1
Back < > Cover Sig 2 Back < > Cover Sig 3 Back, etc.).
 To view the first and last results

1 To display the first result, press the Home button.
2 To display the last result, press the End button.
NOTE: If a job consists of 10 signatures: Sig 1 Front is the first result and Sig 10
Back is the last result.
 To turn a sheet
If your results have 2 sides (front and back), Raster Preview will always group
these results.
1 Select both the front and back of one and the same sheet and double-click.
A single raster preview window will open.
2 Click the Turn Sheet tool (CTRL+T) to toggle the view (front or back).
Alternatively, you can click the Side Switcher in the Light Table palette.

The Turn Sheet tool is disabled if the result only contains one side.
NOTE: The zoom factor, Navigator view and position and Inks separation
selection remain the same when you turn a sheet

112 ZOOMING IMAGES
Zooming Images
There are a number of different ways to zoom in and out, as described below.
The zoom level is always expressed in powers of 2. The available zoom factors
are: 1:512 (1 screen pixel corresponds to 512 raster data pixels), 1:256, 1:128,
1:64, 1:32, 1:16, 1:8, 1:4, 1:2, 1:1, 2:1, and so on up to 32:1.
NOTE: When opening pages to preview, the page is initially shown as a low
resolution continuous tone image. When zooming in, if you have the Raster
Preview option, the continuous tone image is replaced with the high resolution
raster data allowing for previewing traps, halftone dots, etc. Only the full version
of Apogee will allow for high resolution raster data previewing. Other versions
of Apogee can be upgraded to include the Raster Preview option.
 To zoom the Preview window using the slider or menu option

1 In the Preview status bar, drag the zoom slider to the left to zoom out (up to
1/512), or to the right to zoom in (up to 32X).
To the left of the zoom slider, Raster Preview displays the current zoom
factor. When zooming out, “1/” is displayed, followed by the zoom factor (1/
2, 1/8, 1/128). When zooming in, the zoom factor is displayed, followed by
a “X” (32X, 4X, 1X).
2 You can also select a zoom level from the View menu (View > Zoom In/Out).
This zooms the image around the center of the preview pane. The View menu
also includes the following options:
 Size to Fit. This selects a zoom level that fits the entire image in the
Preview window.
 Actual Pixels. This sets the zoom level to 1(i.e. each raster pixel is repre-
sented by a single display pixel).
 To zoom in on a point using the Zoom tool

1 Click the Zoom tool.
2 Click a point in the Preview window to zoom in on that point in the image.
Preview calculates an appropriate zoom factor to fit the active Preview

window on your screen. Each time you click the Zoom tool, the zoom factor
is doubled, until you reach the maximum zoom-in level (32:1).

 To zoom out on a point using the Zoom tool

2 Click a point in the Preview window while holding down the Alt key.
3 Preview zooms out on that point in the Preview window.
 To zoom in on an area using the Zoom tool

2 Click-and-drag in the Preview window to select a rectangular area of your

choice.
The selected area is re-scaled to fill the current window size. The re-scaling is
performed to the nearest zoom factor to the power of 2.
 To zoom out on an area using the Zoom tool

2 Click-and-drag in the Preview window to select a rectangular area of your

choice while holding down the Alt key.
The selected area is re-scaled to fill the current window size. The re-scaling is
performed to the nearest zoom factor to the power of 2.
NOTE: Each successive zoom operation that you start will interrupt any ongoing
operation. This means that if you start a new operation, such as a zoom in, before
an ongoing operation is completed, then the ongoing operation will be aborted.

114 CHANGING THE DEFAULT VIEW
Changing the Default View

This section explains how to manipulate the images you preview, and how to
customize your viewing options. In addition to panning, rotating, flipping, and
inverting images, you can also display raster data as if it were a press sheet
(positive and gripper edge down), or as if it were output from an imaging device
(with polarity, orientation, and reading set accordingly).
 To pan an image
1 Select the Pan tool.
TIP: You can also pan an 2 Click and hold down the mouse button on a point in the Preview window.
image by dragging the
rectangular locator in the 3 While still holding down the mouse button, pan the image by moving the
Navigator palette. mouse around the Preview window.
The image is updated when you release the mouse button.
 To fit the image size to the screen size

1 Select View > Size To Fit.
This calculates an appropriate zoom factor to make the active Preview

window fit on your screen. Image re-scaling is performed to the nearest zoom
factor to the power of 2.
In this mode, any area that is not covered by the image is shown with a gray
and white checkerboard pattern.
 To rotate an image
1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to rotate.
2 Select View > Raster Display > ,Rotate 90 CW to rotate the image 90° clock-
wise, or View > Raster Display > ,Rotate 90 CCW to rotate the image 90°
counterclockwise. You can also use the Rotate tools:
3 Repeat the procedure to rotate an image through 180°, or 270°.
The thumbnail in the Navigator palette reflects the new orientation. The
Navigator palette does not resize; the thumbnail does. The feed direction and
punch indicators are also rotated.

In “Size to Fit” mode the window size may need to grow to accommodate the
new orientation and to keep the same zoom level. If this is not possible, the zoom
level is adjusted to the “Size to Fit” mode. The window only grows if necessary;
it never shrinks.
NOTE: Rotating an image does not change the raster data, or affect other views.
 To flip an image
1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to flip.
2 Select View > Raster Display > ,Flip Horizontal to flip the image on the
horizontal axis (left-to-right).
3 Select View > Raster Display > ,Flip Vertical to flip the image on the vertical
axis (upside-down). You can also use the Flip tools:
The thumbnail in the Navigator palette reflects the new orientation. The feed
direction and punch indicators are also flipped.
NOTE: Flipping an image does not change the raster data, or affect other views.
 To invert an image (negative)

1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to invert.
2 Select View > Raster Display > ,Invert, or click the Invert tool.
The image is inverted. The thumbnail in the Navigator palette also reflects
the new state.
Inverting an image is useful for previewing negative separations. It trans-

poses the solid areas of an image to transparent, and transparent areas to
solid, and is applied to each of the image separations.
For example, suppose an image is made up of 4 separations; cyan, magenta,

yellow, and black. Each separation is actually made up of only 2 types of
areas - solid areas (black) and transparent areas. When you select Invert,
Preview reverses the display of these areas individually on each separation.
This means that, on the cyan plate, all cyan areas are displayed as trans-
parent, and all transparent areas are displayed as cyan. The same reversal is
applied to the magenta, yellow, and black plates.

116 CHANGING THE DEFAULT VIEW
NOTE: Inverting an image does not change the raster data, or affect other
views.
 To display a full-size image

1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to display.
2 Select View > Actual Pixels.
The image in the currently active Preview window is displayed full size, at the
zoom factor of 1:1 (i.e. one raster data pixel is displayed using 1 screen
pixel).
NOTE: Only the full version of Apogee allows you to preview high resolution
raster data (in order to check traps, halftone dots, etc.). Certain Apogee
versions can be upgraded to include the high resolution Raster Preview
option.
 To display/hide separations
1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to view.
2 Select the Inks palette.
This window allows you to toggle individual separations on or off.
3 Click the eye icon next to one or more of the ink names to toggle the separa-
tions on or off.
You can hold down the Alt key when you click on the eye icon. This hides all
others separations, showing only the one you clicked on. Repeat this action
to bring back all hidden separations. Alt-clicking on a hidden separation
shows that separation, hiding all others.
All combinations of process and spot color separations can be selected.
 To view raster data as a press sheet

2 Select View > ,Press Sheet.
The raster data is displayed as a press sheet (positive and gripper edge
down).
NOTE: This does not change the raster data or your Client Preference settings,
and does not affect any other views.

 To view raster data as output from an imaging device

2 Select View > ,Device Output.
The raster data is displayed as if it were the output of the imaging device
(polarity, orientation, reading, and punch marks are set accordingly). In this
view, the feed direction indicator in the Navigator palette always points up.
NOTE: This does not change the raster data or your Client Preference settings,
and does not affect any other views.
 To show / hide the Ruler

1 Select the Preview window.
2 Select View > ,Rulers, or click the Rulers tool to toggle on or off the Ruler in
the Preview window.
The Ruler is displayed along the edges of the Preview window, starting from
the top left corner. The default unit of measurement is taken from your
Preferences.
When the zoom level is sufficiently high, the ruler has the following marks:
Units Numbered marks Major marks Minor marks
cms Every cm Every 1/2 cm Every mm
inches Every inch Every 1/2 inch Every 1/8 inch
You can display rulers for each of the Preview Windows.
 To show / hide the Grid

1 Select the Preview window.
2 Select View > ,Grid, or click the Grid tool to toggle on or off the Grid in the
Preview window.
Gridlines are displayed for every major and minor division of the Ruler.
Major divisions are drawn in dark blue, subdivisions in light blue.
NOTE: The gridlines do not necessarily match with the ruler divisions.

118 MEASURING INK COVERAGE
Measuring Ink Coverage

The Inks palette indicates the percentage of ink that is used in any given area of
the currently active Preview window. This feature is used in conjunction with
the Marquee tool.
 To measure the ink coverage of a selected area

1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to measure.
2 Make sure the Inks palette is displayed and the Cursor/Selection button is
selected.
3 Select the Marquee tool.
4 Click and drag the mouse to define a rectangular area in the Preview window.
The selected area is displayed with a dotted outline.
The Inks palette displays the ink coverage within the selected area. To
indicate that it is not the global coverage, the total percentage is displayed in
italics. If no area was selected, the ink coverage for the entire active Preview
Window would be displayed, and the total percentage would be displayed in
normal characters.
The ink coverage percentage is displayed for each process color, and any spot
colors. This information is calculated on the basis of the real pixel data, and
is accurate to within around 3%. When zoomed in at 1:1, the information is
accurate to 1%.
NOTE: Calculating ink coverage might take a while. A dash is displayed until
the result has been calculated. When you change the selection, Preview
restarts the calculation; you do not have to wait for the calculation to finish.

5 If you wish, you can select the rectangular area you defined in the Preview
window, and drag it around to measure different areas of the image.
6 Click outside the rectangular area to cancel this selection.
When calculation is off, or in progress, the Covers % displays dashes (-).
NOTE: When the Inks palette is displayed, it is updated every time a new area
is selected in the Preview Window. If an ink is deselected in the Inks palette,
no Cover % for that ink will appear.
 To measure the ink coverage at cursor point

2 Make sure the Inks palette is displayed and the Cursor/Selection button is
selected.
3 Click where you want to measure the ink coverage.
The Inks palette displays the ink coverage within the selected area. To
indicate that it is not the global coverage, the total percentage is displayed in
italics.
 To measure the ink coverage of the whole page/image

1 Select the Preview window which contains the page or image you want to
measure.
2 Make sure the Inks palette is displayed and the Image button is selected.
The Inks palette displays the ink coverage for the entire active Preview
Window. To indicate that it is the global coverage, the percentages are
displayed in normal characters (not in italics).
The ink coverage percentage is displayed for each process color, and any spot
colors. This information is calculated on the basis of the real pixel data, and

120 MEASURING SCREEN ANGLES
is accurate to within around 3%. When zoomed in at 1:1, the information is

accurate to 1%.
NOTE: Calculating ink coverage might take a while. A dash is displayed until
the result has been calculated. When you change the selection, Preview
restarts the calculation; you do not have to wait for the calculation to finish.
When calculation is off, or in progress, the Covers % displays dashes (-). If an

ink is deselected in the Inks palette, no Cover % for that ink will appear.
•
Measuring Screen Angles

This section describes how to measure screen angles. This helps you to avoid
unwanted moiré effects in your final output.
 To measure screen angles

2 Select the Measurement tool.
TIP: You need to select a 3 Click a reference point inside the Preview window and drag the mouse
good pattern to achieve pointer to another position in the window.
useful results.
As you move the mouse, Preview automatically calculates the distance and
angle between the point where the mouse button was pressed and the
current mouse position. Distances are measured in the units you have
specified.
NOTE: If you press the Shift key while dragging the mouse, the direction of
the line you draw will be restricted to a horizontal, vertical, or diagonal
direction.
A line connects the start and end reference points. The distance between the
reference points and the angle of the line are displayed in the status bar.
 The first of these two values indicates the actual distance between the two
points, in the user-specified units.

 The second value indicates the screen angle between the two points,
expressed in degrees.
The angle is measured counter clockwise from the zero angle reference axis
through to the starting point (i.e. the point you started dragging the mouse).
If the value is greater than or equal to 180, the read-out will be decremented
by 180.
To the right of the displayed values in the status bar, you will see some
additional measurements.
 The first of these two values indicates the horizontal distance between the
two points, in the user-specified units.
 The second value indicates the vertical distance between the two points,
in the user-specified units.
NOTE: By default the unit of measurement for the above fields is taken from
your Preferences.
Measuring Line Frequency

This section describes how to measure the line frequency of a separation.
 To measure the line frequency of a separation

1 Select the Preview window which contains the separation you want to
measure.
2 Select the Measurement tool.
3 Zoom the image so that you can see the raster dots.
When you do this, you will see that
4 Select a dot, and drag the mouse pointer along the line of the raster to
another dot.
As you move the mouse, Preview counts the number of dots along the line
and automatically calculates the line frequency. The readout in the Status
bar shows the number of dots found and the resulting frequency. The
frequency is displayed in line per inch (lpi) or lines per cm (lpc), depending
on the units you specified in your Preferences.
122 MEASURING LINE FREQUENCY

Color-Managed Raster Preview

Color-managed raster preview is a preview of the rendered result using color
management to convert the press color space to the monitor color space, based
on ICC profiles. Contract proofing quality can be achieved, provided you have a
calibrated monitor and correctly configured monitor profile.
NOTE: Color-managed raster preview is a licensed feature.
 Activate color-managed raster preview

1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to preview.
2 Click the Color-managed Preview tool to activate the color-managed

preview.
Selecting Color-managed mode will disable the ink display in the Inks
palette.
To activate the enhanced visualization of overlapping spot colors, the

following additional preview license is required:
 accurate spot color mix preview
In this enhanced mode, spot color visualization is superior to the standard

color-managed mode.
You may also see one of the following icons, which indicates the status of the
monitor (see “Viewing Remarks” on page 87).
Monitor Display Rating

(Medium).

124 DEPTH TOOL
Depth Tool
With the Depth tool you can display a depth map of a monochrome, 8-bit file
using indexed colors. Each pixel value (1–254) is mapped to a different color in
a one-to-one relation between pixel value and color depth. The color palette uses
the colors of a rainbow with color value 0 shown as black.
 Activate and show the Depth palette

The tool is only available when the required license is present and the file type
being viewed allows for the tool to be used.
 Choose Window > Palettes > Show Depth to open the Depth palette or
press CTRL+ALT+H. The option is only enabled if a required file type is
being viewed.
OR
 Click the Depth tool in the Tools palette.
 Enabling Depth view
 In the Depth palette, select the View Depth check box or press ALT+H.
The depth map is applied to the image and the state of the Depth tool icon
changes to enabled. Now you can move the cursor over the image and read
the depth on the rainbow bar in the Depth palette.

Depth Palette
View Depth check box Select the check box to show/hide the image using mapped indexed colors.
Rainbow bar The vertical, colored bar represents the full range (1-254) of pixel values. The
top of the bar has the lowest values, with black representing zero. The maximum
pixel value is 254 at the bottom of the bar.
Range sliders The two sliders define the depth range from 1 to 254. Drag the sliders to adjust
the range or click in a slider to type an integer value between 1and 254.
Pointer value As you move the mouse cursor over the image you can see the depth value on the
rainbow bar for the pointer position in question, with the actual values shown
next to the sliding marker.
Pointer position The horizontal and vertical distance between the pointer and the selected refer-
ence point, with arrows depending on the selected reference point.
Reference point The point on the sheet that serves as the reference point for the pointer position.
Click one of the9 reference points to set the reference point.
Related topics: • Mark Pens on page 52

126 SATURATION, CONTRAST AND CHANNEL ADJUSTMENTS
Saturation, Contrast and Channel Adjustments
NOTE: This feature only applies for jobs using the M-Press Task Processor and
only on clients with Windows.
The Adjustments palette has three panels with the following tools to adjust
rendered results:
 Saturation slider: The slider has a range from -100 to +100 with a default
value of 0 as the neutral setting. You can apply an adjustment by selecting the
check box and dragging the slider, clicking in the slider path or entering a
value. The Protect skin tones option lets you disable the saturation adjustment
for skin tones.
 Contrast adjustment curve: This adjustment controls the luminance of the

rendered result which can range from 0% (black) to 100% (white). The plot
area consists of a horizontal In axis and a vertical Out axis, and a diagonal
baseline where the In and Out values are the same. The baseline is black if no
adjustments have been applied and changes to gray once you begin to make
adjustments. Drag any point on the black baseline or curve to make adjust-
ments. You can also choose an adjustment preset by clicking the cogwheel
and selecting a preset you defined in the Contrast Adjustment resource for
this particular device. Make sure the Contrast check box is displayed to see
the effect on the sheet.
 Channel adjustment curves: These curves control the CMYK ink coverage of
the device within a range of 0% (no ink) to 100% (full coverage). The plot
area consists of a horizontal In axis and a vertical Out axis, and a diagonal
baseline where the In and Out values are the same. Choose the channel that
you want to adjust from the drop-down list (Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, Black)
to activate one of the four channel curves. Drag any point on the curve to
make adjustments. You can also choose an adjustment preset by clicking the
cogwheel and selecting a preset you defined in the Curve Adjustment
resource for this particular device. Make sure the Curves check box is
displayed to see the effect on the sheet.

Figure 4.1: Saturation slider, Contrast and Channel Adjustment curves in Raster Preview
You can revert to the initial values by clicking the revert button.
A warning icon is displayed when you make adjustments and these adjustments
cannot be shown in the current preview mode.
Switch to Contone Preview using the zoom level menu to see the effect of the
adjustments on the sheet.

128 SATURATION, CONTRAST AND CHANNEL ADJUSTMENTS

Comparing Results
The Raster Compare feature lets you compare the results of two jobs with each
other. This is particularly useful for security printing applications where you
may need to check extremely small differences in the raster data. The feature can
also be used in regular commercial printing environments to compare the differ-
ence between previously rendered data and the latest result.
You start the Raster Compare using the Compare palette, and you can also use
the Inks palette to compare ink coverage in the two images.
NOTE: You cannot compare with a job archive result.
 Compare the results of two jobs

1 Open the first page or flat you want to use for the comparison.
2 Choose Window > Palettes > Show Compare to open the Compare
palette.
The current image you are viewing is image A of the comparison and the job
name and signature are specified at the top of the palette.
3 Click the browse button on the second line to choose the preview data you
want to compare the current image with (image B or reference image).
4 Select the reference job (image B) in the list on the left; if the list is long, use
the filter.
The available Results for the selected job are listed on the right.
5 Choose the Results you want to compare with and click Open.
A blue progress bar is displayed as the system compares the two images, and
the reference image is now specified on the second line in the palette.

130 COMPARING RESULTS
6 A mask for each image shows the pixels which are only in the respective
image. In the Display panel, moving the slider to the right increases the inten-
sity of these masks and hides the actual image. You can alternate between
both images by clicking A or B. You can change the color of the two masks by
clicking the patch and selecting another color in the picker.
7 In the Inks palette, you can check whether the ink coverage for the two
images is the same (indicated with a green check mark) or not the same
(indicated with a red cross).
8 In the Alignment panel you can enter positive or negatives values (Offset) to
move the reference image (image B) horizontally and/or vertically and align
the images. You can choose a reference point (Origin) to apply the offset.
NOTE: When you’ve finished comparing and close the Preview window, none
of your alignment changes are saved.

Approving/Rejecting Jobs
You can approve or reject any job item which has a Waiting for Soft Approval
status (icon on the left) in the Job List or the Job Layout panes. You can also
approve any soft proof which was previously rejected (icon on the right).
 To approve or reject one or more job items

1 Select the Preview window which contains the image you want to assess.
2 Select and analyze the raster data.
This may be a single page/flat, several pages/flats, or the entire job.
3 If the results are satisfactory, click the Approve tool (left icon): Otherwise,
click the Reject tool (right icon).
NOTE: These icons are disabled if no soft proof has been requested.
4 If you select Approve, the selected results are continued.
If you return to the Jobs window, you will see that these results are no longer
on hold, and the separation indicators have check marks, indicating that they
have been output.
5 If you select Reject, a Reject confirmation dialog box is displayed. Here, if you
wish you can enter some comments about the rejected item, and click Reject
to proceed.
If you return to the Jobs window, you will see that these results are no longer
on hold, and are marked with a red stripe, indicating that they have been
rejected.

132 APPROVING/REJECTING JOBS
6 Click OK.
The selected items are now either approved for output to a physical output
device, or rejected. Any associated Waiting for Approval icons are removed
in both the Job List and Job Layout panes.
When you reject job results, the results are marked as “rejected” in both the
Job List and Job Layout panes. However, the results remain in the system,
and are not deleted until the date/time specified in your Logging options (see
“Logging” on page 630). This gives you a time window during which you can
still approve the rejected results before they are automatically deleted from
the system.
NOTE: You do not have to approve or reject an item before quitting Preview. You
can always approve or reject it later.
 To approve a rejected item (override)

1 Select an item marked as rejected in the Job Layout pane.
2 Click the Approve tool.
A Continue confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3 Click Continue.

This overrides the rejected status. The job item is again put on hold (blue
background), and is now approved for output.
NOTE: Although the rejected item has now been approved, it still retains the
red stripe, indicating that it was once rejected.
4 To output the results, select the job item and click the Approve tool again.
You will see that these results are no longer on hold, and the separation
indicators have check marks, indicating that they have been output.

134 COMPARING VERSION-SPECIFIC PLATES
Comparing Version-Specific Plates

Suppose you have a job with three versions, containing a photograph that prints
in CMYK. The three versions share the CMY plates, and have each their own K
plate. For the photograph to print correctly in all versions, the image on the K
plate of each version must be aligned precisely with the common CMY plates.
The shift may be small and hard to notice when previewing the version on
screen. However, it will become very obvious in print.
To quickly and easily spot such shifts, Raster Preview allows you to inspect
misalignment issues in multi-version jobs by comparing version-specific plates
against each other. The goal is to spot objects that were shifted across versions,
especially when those versions share a set of common plates.
The idea is to keep one version - the master version - on a light table, and to lay
the next version on top of it. When looking at the layered composite, unwanted
shifts become immediately obvious. By switching the top layer, and comparing
it against the same master, you can quickly verify the registration of the different
versions. A quick way to check whether there might be a problem, before
comparing individual versions, is to layer all versions on top of each other;
common images should still look OK. If you notice a shift, you can then use the
comparison technique to identify the problem version (or versions).
For example, suppose you want to compare the K-plate of a Dutch version with
an English one. The misalignment in the text is normal, since the texts are
different. However, any images on the page will be shifted to make room for the
longer Dutch text.
View modes You can control the viewing mode by clicking the viewing mode selector in the
Versions palette, or by selecting View > Versions. You can also switch modes
using the shortcuts: ‘N’ for Normal mode, ‘A’ for All and ‘C’ for compare.
 Normal Mode: Views each version as printed, one by one. The previous and
next version shortcuts simply switch the version being viewed. By default,
you see all plates that make up the version, but you can view the version-
specific plates only.
 All Versions Mode: Shows all version specific plates on top of each other.
View > All Versions or ‘A’ shortcut. If you double click a flat from within the
Results tab in ‘View All’ mode, Raster Preview starts in ‘All’ mode.
The plate of the first version shown is magenta: This is the reference version.
The other plates are all shown in cyan. Shifted pixels therefore stand out very
clearly.

NOTE: This mode only shows version-specific plates: You cannot switch this
off.
 Compare Mode: Shows the version specific plates of the master version and
a version, layered on top of each other. The master and version plates appear
in different colors to highlight possible shifts.
The previous and next version shortcuts keys switch the top-layered version,
keeping the master plate underneath. You can also click a version in the
palette to select it immediately.

136 VIEWING/EDITING RASTER PREVIEW PREFERENCES
Viewing/Editing Raster Preview Preferences

A set of Raster Preview Preferences allow you to specify default viewing settings
(units of measurement, etc.) that will be used each time you launch Raster
Preview.
 To open and edit your Raster Preview Preferences

1 From the Jobs window, choose Edit > Preferences...
2 Select the Viewers tab.
3 Edit the Raster Preview fields, as described in “Preferences” on page 90.

QuickProof
The QuickProof feature is only available for 1-bit screened data for CTP/CTF
devices.
QuickProof allows you to send a full preview or a selected area to a proofing

device.
 QuickProof a preview
1 Open the preview and select the area that you want to proof.
2 Choose Control > QuickProof.
The QuickProof dialog box is displayed where you can select a proofing
device.
3 If you want to proof only the selected area, select the Proof selected area
check box. Otherwise, clear this check box.
4 Click QuickProof.

138 QUICKPROOF

CHAPTER
5 Managing Jobs
This section describes how you can monitor and manage jobs in the Jobs
window.
 The Jobs Window ................................................................................................ 140

 The Output Device List ..................................................................................... 142
 The Job List ............................................................................................................ 143
 Job and System Logging .................................................................................. 161
 Viewing the Administration Tab .................................................................... 170
 Viewing the Options Tab .................................................................................. 171
 Viewing the Products Tab ................................................................................ 172
 Viewing the Plan Tab ......................................................................................... 174
 Viewing the Pages Tab ...................................................................................... 176
 Viewing the Results Tab ................................................................................... 183
 Working with Jobs in the Job List ................................................................. 194
 Working with Jobs in the Pages Tab ............................................................ 214
 Working with Jobs in the Results Tab ......................................................... 234
 QuickProofing Pages .......................................................................................... 256
139
140 THE JOBS WINDOW
The Jobs Window

The main purpose of the Jobs window is to allow you to monitor, view, and
manage the jobs that are created by the Apogee System. Much of the information
you need is displayed as icons in the Job List. This information, together with the
six tabs of selected job details, gives you a full and detailed snapshot of the jobs
in hand.
The main window is divided into 4 panes:
 The Output Device List: On the left side of the window, you see a list of
currently configured output devices, e.g. Export, TIFF Imagesetter, etc.
 The Job List: Next to the Output Device list, you see the Job List. This list
displays the jobs that have been submitted to the Apogee System.
NOTE: Only jobs associated with the device selected in the Output Device List
are displayed.
 Filters: Above the Job List, you can enter filter criteria directly into the Quick
Filter box. Below the Output Device List, you have custom job filters for
filtering the Job List based on a variety of criteria.
 Selected Job details: The pane on the right side of the window displays infor-
mation on the selected job:
 The Administration tab: Contains customer-specific information that can

be used to associate specific processing workflows with particular
customers or job types. See “Viewing the Administration Tab” on
page 170.
 The Options tab: Displays information on how the job is to be handled,

including archiving and notification settings, post-processing channel
settings, etc. See “Viewing the Options Tab” on page 171.
 The Products tab: For multi-part and multi-product jobs, this tab displays
information on how the job is structured, and how each individual section
of the job will be processed. See “Viewing the Products Tab” on page 172.
 The Plan tab: The Plan tab displays the selected job’s Production Plan, and
allows you to view the individual settings of each of the items in the Plan.
See “Viewing the Plan Tab” on page 174.

5 MANAGING JOBS 141
 The Pages tab: Lists the documents that have been input to the Page Store,
and the pages that have been copied from the Page Store and included in
the job’s Run List. See “Viewing the Pages Tab” on page 176.
 The Results tab: Allows you to view the results of the selected job. This tab
displays thumbnails of the Run List pages, and job separations (if any).
See “Viewing the Results Tab” on page 183.
NOTE: The Job Manager provides a read-only view on jobs. For details on
creating or editing jobs, see “Creating and Editing Tickets” on page 277

142 THE OUTPUT DEVICE LIST
The Output Device List

The Output Device List displays all available Output and Print Task Processors.
This pane is identical in both the Jobs Window and the Hot Tickets Window.
When you select an Output or Print Task Processor in the Jobs Window, the Job
List is filtered to display only the jobs that include the selected Task Processor in
their Production Plan.
NOTE: Depending on their software or hardware status, Task Processor icons

may be displayed with different colors or with small icon overlays. For more
information, see “Task Processor Component (Software) Status” on page 617
and “Output Task Processor Hardware Status” on page 616.

5 MANAGING JOBS 143
The Job List

The Job List displays the status of jobs that have been submitted to the Apogee
System. This includes jobs created using Job Tickets, as well as jobs created
dynamically using Hot Tickets.
Job List Layout When you create and submit a job, it appears immediately in the Job List with its
details displayed in columns. You may see a flat list of jobs or groups of jobs in
expandable folders if you choose to group your jobs.
For each job, the Job List displays one or more icons which indicate its current
status, and the type of processing that has been applied in this job. A job
produced by a Hot Ticket is indistinguishable from any other manually
submitted job.
The Job List is divided vertically into the following columns:
 Notification: May display an icon which indicates an error, warning, or

remark.
 Status: May display one or more icons (up to 4) which indicate the current or
recent job states. These icons are sorted from the left according to priority.
You can expand the width of this column to view the lower priority icons.
 Job: Either the name of the job, or an expandable group folder which
contains all the jobs that are grouped by the selected property.
 Order Number: The order number of a job.
 Job Number: A unique ascending number assigned chronologically to each

job.
 Media: The media selected to print the job.
 Flows: Displays one or more icons which correspond to the number and types
of flows specified in the Ticket.
 Create Date: The dates and times when jobs were submitted. The date and
time format adapts automatically to the width of the column.
 Modified Date: The dates and times when jobs were modified. The date and
 Company: The company name of the customer.

144 THE JOB LIST
 Device: The device selected to print the job.
 Milestone: The due date you entered for the planning of the job.
These job details are displayed for each job in their respective column.
The Job List is also divided horizontally into two lists. The upper list displays all
the Private Page Store jobs which have been created: The lower list displays all
the Public Page Store jobs which have been created.
For more information, see “Private and Public Page Stores” on page 177.
Organizing the Job By default, the Job List displays jobs in alphabetical (ascending) order with all
the columns displayed. You can organize how the Job List is displayed as follows.
List
 Sort Job List columns

Job List columns can be sorted according to any of the column headers by
clicking the relevant column header: Click once to sort alphabetically
(ascending); click again (or Shift-click) to sort in reverse alphabetical order
(descending).
The sort column is indicated with a darker header and an arrow indicates the
ascending or descending sort order. You cannot sort on the Flows column.
 Rearrange Job List columns

You can rearrange the columns by dragging the column headers horizontally,
and adjust the width of the columns by dragging the left or right edges of the
column headers.

5 MANAGING JOBS 145
 Show/hide Job List columns

Context-click in any of the column headers to display a menu where you can
show/hide the columns by selecting/clearing the appropriate check box.
 Group jobs in the Job List

You can group jobs by clicking in the column header context-menu and selecting
the Group by option. You can group by:
 Order Number
 Create Date
 Modified Date
 Device
 Media
 Company
For example, selecting Group by Order Number, groups the jobs with the same
order number in an expandable folder. These expandable order number folders
are shown in the Job column and the Order Number column is hidden.
TIP: You can also click the If you double-click a job group in the Job List, the folder is expanded to reveal
expand/collapse buttons to the individual jobs. The job will have no content until you or other users start
open and close job folders. inputting documents via the associated input channel.

146 THE JOB LIST
The # symbol you see on the folders indicates that the jobs in the Job List are
grouped into folders.
Filtering the Job You can customize the layout and content of the Job List to suit your particular
requirements, and to keep track of your jobs more easily. This becomes more
List important as the size of the Job List increases, while you want to keep track of
specific orders and/or jobs.
Apogee filters the Job List based on a combination of all the selected filters.
When you apply the filter, only the jobs which match ALL the selected criteria
will be displayed.
The following three filter types are available above and below the Output Device
list on the left of the Job List:
 Quick filter: a text entry box
 Output Device filters to filter jobs by device (number of matching jobs to the
right of the device name)
 Custom Job filters that allow users to specify custom sets of filter criteria
(number of matching jobs to the right of the filter name)
You can apply the filters individually or combine them. Combining filters of the
same type, e.g. two Output Device filters, displays the sum of the two filters.
Combining filters of different types, e.g. Quick filter + Output Device + Custom
Job filter, only displays the jobs that match all the criteria of the filters.
These filtering features also apply for Hot Tickets in the Hot Ticket List.
NOTE: An Administrator can also filter the Job List by user role to allow specified
users to see only certain jobs. This filtering is not indicated in the Job List. See
“Users” on page 645.

5 MANAGING JOBS 147
Figure 5.2: Job List filters

1 Quick filter 1 5
2 Show All button
2
3 Output device filters
4 Custom job filters
5 Filter panel
NOTE: The Output Devices pane must be set to show to see the Show All button
and the Custom job filters panel. Choose View > Panes > Devices to show/hide
the Output Devices pane.
 Filter the Job or Hot Ticket List using Quick Filter

The Quick Filter can be used to search for text contained anywhere in the order
number, job name or number, media name of jobs or Hot Tickets. The Quick
Filter is always applied in addition to other selected filters.
1 Select the Jobs or Hot Tickets Window.
2 Click inside the Quick Filter text field.
3 Start to enter the text you want to search for.
As you type, the list is dynamically filtered.
For example, if you type the letter ‘j’, the Job List will start filtering for all jobs
with fields that contain the letter ‘j’. If you extend the search text to ‘je’, the
number of matches are further narrowed down accordingly.
4 Click the Clear button on the right of the Quick Filter text field to remove the
Quick filter.

148 THE JOB LIST
 Filter the Job List with one or more custom job filters
2 Click one of the custom job filters under the output device pane.
The Job List now displays only the jobs which correspond to the selected filter
criteria.
The selected Job List Filter icon is colored green to indicate that this partic-
ular filter is active, with an arrow pointing to the number of jobs displayed for
this filter.
In the filter panel in the top right corner of the Job List, you can also see the
total number of jobs displayed in the Job List, with an indication that a filter
is applied.
3 To switch off a job filter, click the filter once.
The Show All indicator is highlighted and all the jobs are displayed if no other
filters are selected.
4 To apply multiple filters, hold the CTRL button and click the filters you want
to combine. Click a selected filter again with the CTRL button pressed to
deselect it. You can combine Custom Job filters with Output Device filters
and Quick filter.

5 MANAGING JOBS 149
Combining filters of the same type, e.g. two Output Device filters, displays
the sum of the two filters. Combining filters of different types, e.g. Quick
filter + Output Device + Custom Job filter, only displays the jobs that match
all the criteria of the filters.
 Create a new custom job filter

The first new custom filter is created as a duplicate of the initial Custom Filter.
Subsequently, you can also duplicate your newly created filters.
1 Hover over the initial Custom Filter and choose Save As in the cogwheel
drop-down list.
2 Enter the new name in the Save As box and click Save.
The new filter is added to the bottom of the list. This is a duplicate of the
initial Custom Filter which always remains at the top of the list.
You may need to scroll through the list with the Up and Down arrows.
3 To move the filter in the list, hover over the filter and choose Move Up/Move
Down in the cogwheel drop-down list. You can also insert a dividing line
under a filter by choosing Insert Divider in the same drop-down list.
You can now edit this newly created filter.

150 THE JOB LIST
 Edit a custom job filter

1 Hover over the filter you want to edit and choose Edit in the cogwheel drop-
down list.
2 Specify your filter options, as described in “Job Filter Settings” on page 157.
3 Click Apply to see the effects of the filter on the number of jobs displayed in
the Job List.
4 Click Save to confirm your changes and close the Job Filter dialog.
 Rename/duplicate/delete a custom job filter
 Hover over the filter name you want to rename/duplicate/delete and choose
the action in the cogwheel drop-down list.
NOTE: You cannot rename/duplicate/delete/move the initial Custom Filter.
 Filter the Job or Hot Ticket List on the selected output device
1 Select the Jobs or Hot Tickets Window.
The number of jobs using a particular output device is shown on the right of
each device name in the Output Device list.
2 Select one of the devices in the Output Device list.
The Jobs/Hot Tickets List now displays only the jobs or tickets which use the
selected output device.
In the filter pane in the top right corner of the Job List, you can see the total
number of jobs or Hot Tickets that use the selected output device.
3 Click another output device or the Show All filter to remove the filter. Hold
the CTRL button and click multiple output devices to display the jobs of all
the selected devices.
Job Notification Apogee displays Job Notification icons in the 1st column of the Job and Hot
Ticket Lists. These icons indicate errors, warnings and remarks, and are sorted
Icons by priority; i.e. when a job has several notifications at the same time, Apogee
displays the highest priority icon.

5 MANAGING JOBS 151
A group of jobs (order number folder in the job list) shows the icon of the job
with the highest priority notification within the group.
NOTE: The Hot Ticket list can only display a limited subset of these Notification
icons.
The icons you may see are as follows (listed in order of priority):
You can click any of these icons to display a detailed Problem Report.
Job Status Icons Apogee displays Job Status icons in the 2nd column of the Job and Hot Ticket
Lists. These icons indicate the current or last activity associated with the corre-
sponding job.
The Status icons are sorted by priority; i.e. when a job has several states at the
same time, Apogee displays the highest priority icon first.
A group of jobs (order number folder in the job list) shows the status icon of the
job with the highest priority status within the group. The exceptions are the
archiving, deleting and finished status icons. The first two are never shown, and
the last is only shown when all jobs in the group are finished.

152 THE JOB LIST
NOTE: The Hot Ticket list can only display a limited subset of these Status icons.
The icons you may see are as follows (listed in order of priority):
The job is being archived or dumped.
The job is being imported from archive.
The job is being deleted.
Apogee is queuing all commands for this job.
The document is being edited (it is ‘checked out’).
The Run List is being edited by another user.
You are editing the Run List.
The job is finished.
The job was broken during editing. You can remove this icon by opening the job for editing.
The job has been manually put on hold.
The job output is waiting for the correct media to be loaded on the output device.
The job is waiting for a Task Processor (none currently available).
A group of results is complete, and is waiting to be printed (blue icon).
The result is waiting for a hard proof.
The result is waiting for a web proof.

5 MANAGING JOBS 153
The job is waiting for a soft proof.
A task has been aborted.
The task has been manually put on hold.
New (unplaced) documents are available in the (Private) Page Store.
The job is waiting for results.
Not all the results of a group are yet available (green icon).
The job is waiting for After Hours processing.
Some results have been rejected by the user.
The layout/imposition is not yet defined.
The job has reached a Milestone: The Run List is not complete. This Milestone was set up in
the Options tab.
The job has reached a Milestone: The job deadline has been reached. This Milestone was set
up in the Options tab.
The job has reached a Milestone: The result is not available in time. This Milestone was set up
using a Milestone Action in the Production Plan.
The job is managed by PlateMaker (ready to plate). The PlateMaker client will take care of fur-
ther plate production.
A job that has been merged
A merged job: The job resulting from the merging of two or more other jobs.
A StoreFront job: The job was generated by StoreFront.
Job Icons Apogee displays Job icons in the Job or Order No columns of the Job List. These
icons indicate the type of job, as well as whether or not the Run List is complete.
With the exception of the Job folder icon, all the basic Job icons may be super-
imposed with one or more additional icon indicators. These provide supplemen-
tary status information, and allow you to make a highly detailed visual
assessment of your jobs by simply looking at the Job List.

154 THE JOB LIST
These icon indicators may be combined, so that up to 4 additional items of infor-

mation may be displayed for any of the Job icons (see “Job Icon Combinations
(Commercial Jobs)” below).
Job group.
Commercial job with incomplete Run List.
Commercial job with complete Run List.
Rush job (Commercial jobs only).
Commercial job with disabled input channel.
Commercial job is scheduled to be archived when it is finished (Options tab).
Commercial job has been archived.
Commercial job is scheduled to be deleted when it is finished (Options tab).
Commercial job has been deleted.
Commercial job is scheduled to be archived and deleted when it is finished (Options tab).
Commercial job has been archived and deleted.
Job group (based on Order Number).
NOTE: Only the Complete Run List icon is displayed in the Hot Tickets List.
Job Icon Combinations (Commercial Jobs)
The following table lists all the possible icon combinations you may see for
Commercial jobs.

5 MANAGING JOBS 155
archiving/ archived/ archiving archived archived

Job status normal deleting deleted
dumping dumped & deleting & deleting & deleted
Incomplete Run List
Incomplete Run List

disabled input
Incomplete Run List
rushed job
Incomplete Run List
disabled input+rushed job
Complete Run List
Complete Run List

disabled input
Complete Run List
rushed job
Complete Run List
disabled input+rushed job
Flow Icons Apogee displays Flow icons in the Job and Hot Ticket Lists. These icons corre-
spond to the number and types of flows specified in the job or ticket:
When you create a Ticket, it appears in the Job/Hot Ticket List, together with
one or more Flow icons in the Flows column.
The Flow icons display:
 the type of flow, indicated by the icon image.
 the status of the flow, indicated by the icon color.
The following icon types are available:

156 THE JOB LIST
Main Output to a high resolution output device.
Main Output to a Sign and Display output device.
Imposition Proof: An optional flow which may be added to the Main Output flow, and is used
for output to an imposition proofing device.
Page Proof: An optional flow which may be added to the Main Output flow, and is used for
output to a page proofing device.
Export: An optional or alternate flow to the Main Output flow, used for exporting job results to
file in PDF or PostScript format.
Public Page Store: An optional or alternate flow to the Main Output flow, used for storing job
results in a Public Page Store.
Display: An optional or alternate flow to the Main Output flow, used to create job results for
high-resolution soft proofing.
Digital Quick Strip (DQS): An alternate mode of operation which supports the PrintDrive DQS
mode of Apogee Series3. In this mode, Apogee creates and renders the flat backgrounds and
pages separately. These are then sent as separate items to PrintDrive. PrintDrive assembles
the pages onto the backgrounds, and then outputs the results as an integral job.
The different flows associated with a job can also be monitored in The Activity
Pane.
Up to three flow icons may be displayed for each job or ticket.
Flow Icon Color Coding
As a general rule throughout the Apogee user interface, you will find that
specific icon background colors are associated with specific conditions.
In the Job List, the background color of each flow icon indicates one of several
states, as follows:

5 MANAGING JOBS 157
A white background color indicates that this flow is idle.
A green background color indicates that this flow is currently active.
A blue background color indicates that this flow is on hold.
A yellow background color indicates that this flow contains tasks which are queued and wait-
ing to be processed.
A white background color with a green checkmark indicates that this flow has finished.
A red background color indicates that this flow has generated an error.
A purple background color indicates that further handling of this flow has been taken over by
the PlateMaker Client (Main flow only). For more details, refer to the PlateMaker Client docu-
mentation.
Job Filter Settings
The Job Filter allows you to filter the jobs displayed in the Job List according to
job status, administration fields, media, or date.
 Display the job filter settings by hovering over the filter name and clicking
Edit in the cogwheel drop-down list.

158 THE JOB LIST
Status
In Page Store To filter on Page Store criteria, select the In Page Store check box, click the
associated list, and choose one of the following options:
 New documents: Displays only jobs that contain new documents that have
not yet been added to the Run List.
 No new documents: Displays only jobs that have no new documents.

Pages To filter on Run List criteria, select the Pages check box, click the associated list,
and choose one of the following options:
 Has All: Display jobs that have a complete Run List.
 Misses Some: Display jobs that have incomplete Run Lists.
For more information, see “The Run List (Ticket Editor)” on page 332.
On Hold To filter on jobs on hold, select the On Hold check box, click the associated list,
 Is: Display jobs that are on hold.
 Is Not: Display the jobs that are not on hold.

In Error To filter on error criteria, select the In Error check box, click the associated list,
 Is: Display jobs that are in error.
 Is Not: Display the jobs that are not in error.

Finished To filter on complete or incomplete jobs, select the Finished check box, click the
associated list, and choose one of the following options:
 Is: Display jobs that are finished.
 Is Not: Display the jobs that are not finished.

Archived To filter on archived job criteria, select the Archived check box, click the associ-
ated list, and choose one of the following options:
 Is: Display jobs that have been archived.
 Is Not: Display the jobs that have not been archived.

Deleted To filter on deleted job criteria, select the Deleted check box, click the associated
list, and choose one of the following options:

5 MANAGING JOBS 159
 Is: Display jobs that are deleted
 Is Not: Display the jobs that are not deleted

Merged To display jobs that have been merged into a merged job, select the check box,
click the associated list, and choose one of the following options:
 Has: Displays jobs that have already been merged
 Has Not: Displays the jobs that have not yet been merged
Merged job To show only merged jobs (i.e. jobs that merge other jobs into a single job),
select the check box, click the associated list, and choose one of the following
options:
 Is: Displays jobs that are merged jobs
 Is Not: Displays the jobs that are not merged jobs

Layout job To filter by jobs set up in the Layout Editor.
Set up by printer/customer Allows you to filter on the status of WebApproval jobs: the job setup is Pending
or Completed by the printer or customer.
Submitted by
Select these check boxes to filter the jobs which have been:
 submitted or not submitted by StoreFront
 enabled or not enabled for WebApproval.
Administration
Use the Administration filter to view jobs based on the criteria specified in the
job’s Administration tab. You can filter on any combination of these fields,
however the Job List will display only the jobs which pass through all of the
filters. The following fields can be used to filter:
 Job Name
 Order Number
 Operator Name
 Company Name
 Operator

160 THE JOB LIST
The following filter parameters can be chosen in the drop-down list:
 Contains/Does not contain
 Starts with/Does not start with
 Ends with/Does not end with
 Equals/Does not equal
 Any/Current User (for Operator Name only)
Media
Allows you to filter on the media used for the job, with the same filter parameters
as for Administration.
Date
Use the Date filter to view jobs that were submitted, modified, finished or due,
before or after a specific date or within a specific time period. If you use the
between argument, the first date to enter is the most recent date.

5 MANAGING JOBS 161
Job and System Logging

Two types of log are available in Apogee:
 The Job Log: For logging events related to jobs.
 The System Log: For logging events related to the Apogee System.
The Job Log
The Job Log is opened when you context-click on a job in the Jobs window, and
select Log for Job from the context menu. The Job Log is used to keep track of
completed jobs. It is also useful for accounting and troubleshooting. You can
specify which job events are logged in the System Overview (see “Logging
Settings” on page 630).
NOTE: The Job Log does not list System events. These are recorded in the System
Log (see “The System Log” on page 164).
The Job Log is automatically exported when the job completes. This allows an
external MIS to pick up the log file and perform any required accounting. One or
more logged items can also be copied as text using the Copy/Paste commands.
However, the Job Log cannot be manually exported.
The Job Log lists all job events which take place within Apogee. This is a plain,
non-interactive event log.

162 JOB AND SYSTEM LOGGING
The Job Log consists of a Filter pane, a chronological list of logged events, and
an additional information pane.
 The Job Log Filter and list of events work together: The events displayed are
 The lower pane displays more detailed information on the selected event.
List of Events
The list of events displays a date, source, event type and description for each
event.
When Displays the time and date at which the event was logged.
From Displays the name of the job which generated the logged message.
Event Displays the type of the event that was logged.
Description Displays an abbreviated version of the generated event. You can view the full
message (in the lower pane) by selecting it.
You can sort the events on any of these Message fields by clicking the arrow in
the column headers. Each time you click the arrow, the sort is toggled between
The Job Log Filter
You access the Job Log filter by clicking on the Filter icon in the Job Log:
Filter
Toggle filtering on or off.
Event Type
Choose one or more event groups for which the filter will be applied.
Life cycle events (created, started, finished): When a job is created, has started or
is finished.

5 MANAGING JOBS 163
Error warning notifications: This includes the error status of Task Processors,
device statuses such as error, online and offline and non-informative notifica-
tions with their reply.
Informative notifications: Important job-related actions such as job editing.
Proofing actions: Events related to the proofing result such as waiting, continue,
approve, reject, resume.
User interactions: Job related events such as resume, rush, edit. Task Processor
related events such as hold, resume, rush. Result related events such as remake.
Media usage: Events related to the use of resources such as film and plate or
proofing media.
Used resources: Events related to Resource selection such as screen types,

profiles, calibration and linearization curves. Events related to Task Processor
parameter sets.
Color Management: Events related to input document color management, press

and proofing output color management and spot colors.
Event Details
Contains: Find a match on a specified text string (in any of the event’s fields). If you type
several words, all words must occur. For example, “preflight red” only shows
events that contain both the words “preflight” and “red”. Leave the field empty
if you do not wish to filter on content. This filter is case insensitive.
Occurred Display only the events that were generated during a specific time period.
You apply the filter by toggling the Filter On, choosing or specifying your
filtering options, and clicking Apply.
When the filter is in use, you will see the following type of message with an
indication of the number of logged events:
NOTE: By default, all events are displayed (i.e. no filter is applied).

The System Log
The System log displays logging information on the selected item in the System
Overview (the Apogee System or a specific Task Processor). The main purpose
of the System log is for troubleshooting. The log can be inspected interactively,
or can be exported. The Apogee System keeps logged events for a specified time
period, after which they are removed. You can also manually clean up the
System log.
System events are events that are not directly related to the processing of jobs
(although they may affect job processing).
The System Log consists of a Filter pane, a chronological list of logged events,
and an additional information pane.
 The Job Log Filter and list of events work together: The events displayed are
 The lower pane displays more detailed information on the selected event.
List of Events
The list of events displays a date, source, event type and description for each
event.
When Displays the time and date at which the event was logged.
From Displays the name of the device or system which generated the logged message.
Event Displays the name of the type of event that was logged.

5 MANAGING JOBS 165
Description Displays an abbreviated version of the generated event. You can view the full
message (in the lower pane) by selecting it.
You can sort the events on any of these Message fields by clicking the arrow in
the column headers. Each time you click the arrow, the sort is toggled between
The System Log Filter
You access the System Log filter by clicking on the Filter icon in the System Log:
Filter
Toggle filtering on or off.
Event Type
Choose one or more event groups for which the filter will be applied.
Major Task Processor events (start, stop): This includes the status such as boot or
shutdown of Task Processors.
Error and warning notifications: This includes the error status of Task Processors,
device statuses such as error, online and offline and non-informative notifica-
tions with their reply.
Informative notifications: Important job-related actions such as job editing.
approve, reject, resume.
User interactions (start, stop, restart): This includes Task Processor statuses such
as start, shutdown, hold or resume.

parameter sets.
Event Details
Contains: Find a match on a specified text string (in any of the event’s fields). If you type
several words, all words must occur. For example, “preflight red” only shows

events that contain both the words “preflight” and “red”. Leave the field empty
if you do not wish to filter on content. This filter is case insensitive.
Occurred Display only the events that were generated during a specific time period.
You apply the filter by toggling the Filter On, choosing or specifying your
filtering options, and clicking Apply.
When the filter is in use, you will see the following type of message with an
indication of the number of logged events:
NOTE: By default, all events are displayed (i.e. no filter is applied).
Problem Report
The Problem Report displays all messages generated by the associated job. It is
similar to the Message Board. The main difference is that the Problem Report
gives an overview of all problems found during ticket editing in the Ticket
Editor, or Run List editing in the Jobs window. The Problem Report is generated
on the local Client, not on the Apogee System.
A Problem Report is opened if you click one of the following status icons which
may appear next to a job in the Job List:

5 MANAGING JOBS 167
NOTE: In the Job List, do not click on the status icon of a collapsed group. You
must first expand the group to reveal the job in error.
It is also opened if you click any of the same status icons which may appear in the
Tab Area of the Ticket Editor:
The Problem Report consists of a Message List, Acknowledge Pane, and Interac-
tion pane.
Message List
The Message List displays the status, date, type, and description of each
message.
Status One of the four job status icons is displayed (see above).
Date occurred Displays the date and time that the problem occurred.
Location Displays the name of the job, device, or system where the message was gener-
ated. If this is a job, then the job order number is also displayed in parentheses.
You can sort the messages according to location by clicking the arrow in this

column header. Each time you click the arrow, the sort is toggled alphabetically
between ascending and descending order.
Description Displays an abbreviated version of the message. You can view the full message
by selecting it. You can sort the messages according to description by clicking the
arrow in this column header. Each time you click the arrow, the sort is toggled
alphabetically between ascending and descending order.
Each message row has a colored background:
Pink: The message has not yet been Acknowledged.
Blue: This is the currently selected message.
Gray: The message has been Acknowledged.
Acknowledge pane
The Acknowledge pane displays information and the acknowledgement status

of the currently selected message in the Message List.
Message summary Displays the summarized message text from the Message List Description
column.
Reported by Indicates which Task Processor generated the message, and when, in the format
“Reported by <Task Processor> on <time and date>”.
Acknowledgement status Indicates who (if anybody) first acknowledged the message, and when, in the
format “acknowledged by <user> at <time and date>”.
Acknowledgement button This button appears if the selected message has not yet been acknowledged.
Click this button once you have read the message. Any Errors or Warnings that
you acknowledge are removed from the Message List. User Interaction messages
remain in the list until the required action has been taken.
Notification/Interaction pane
Notification message Displays a more detailed version of the message. Some messages are followed by
a suggested course of action, such as:
“There is no location for exporting the system log. The default

C:\Apogee Prepress\SysLog\$DATE.log will be used”
Interactive dialog buttons. Some messages include interactive dialog buttons which allow you to correct the
cause of the error or warning. For example, Edit Job or Resume Job.

5 MANAGING JOBS 169
NOTE: If you select more than one message, you will see no specific message
information, only “x messages selected”.

170 VIEWING THE ADMINISTRATION TAB
Viewing the Administration Tab

The Administration tab contains customer-specific information that can be used
to associate specific Production Plans with particular customers or job types.
You can use the order number to group jobs in the Job List.
NOTE: The information displayed is read-only. If you want to change the

information in any of the fields, you first need to context-click the job in the Job
List, and select Edit from the context menu. You can also select the job and click
the Edit button.
For full details on each of the fields, see “Administration Tab Information” on
page 280.

5 MANAGING JOBS 171
Viewing the Options Tab

The Options tab displays information on how the jobs which use this ticket are
to be handled (archiving, notifications, etc.).

the Edit button.
For full details on each of the fields, see “Using the Options Tab” on page 284.

172 VIEWING THE PRODUCTS TAB
Viewing the Products Tab

The Products tab displays information on multi-part jobs and multi-product
jobs. It indicates how the job is structured, and how each individual part of the
job will be processed (colors used, output devices, etc.).
The Products tab is disabled if the selected job is not a multi-part job or a multi-
product job.

the Edit button.
What are Parts? A book may consist of a jacket, a cover and a text block. Often, these different
parts are made of different materials and have to be processed and printed
differently. Parts could also be used to structure a product into content- oriented
sections. In this case, parts do not necessarily require different materials or
processing, but they help structure the job for content delivery and proofing.
Every job contains at least one default product part. This is the only part in a
single-part job. It is a plain part with the name ‘body’, and has continuous page
numbering. The number of pages and page ranges is calculated automatically,
and the part receives extra pages when you increase the total number of pages.
It also receives the pages that you remove from other parts.
What are A production set is a group of plates that are all processed in the same way. For
example, a simple publication may comprise a production set for the cover
Production Sets? printed in color, and another for the body printed in black. Each production set
can have its own individual settings, and can be sent to a different press. This is
done by separating the output plates into sections, and processing each section
differently. However, production sets do not always correspond with the parts of
a product. If a part requires specific processing (color/gray, different paper
type), a corresponding production set will be created. If a part does not require
specific processing, the default production set is used.
Every job contains at least one production set: the default production set, called
Body plates. It is very similar in concept to the default part: in single-part jobs, it
acts as the only production set; in multi-production set jobs, it receives extra
sheets or those that are removed from another set.

5 MANAGING JOBS 173
Production sets describe the results that make up the final product, i.e., the
results of the main flow. As such, they are the direct result of the main imposition
scheme of the job. Auxiliary flows (page or imposition proofs) usually produce
results that are different in layout - their sheets contain a different number of
pages and/or different pages. Therefore, auxiliary flows cannot use production
sets unless their results are derived directly from the main flow, and remain
unchanged.
Production sets provide a different way of partitioning a publication by looking

at how the different publication parts need to be produced, and creating Produc-
tion sets that will process specific parts (e.g. sheets) differently from others.
For simple publications, you can create a production set for every part. For
example, a softcover book with a cover in color and a black&white text block can
be produced with two sets of settings (two production sets); one set for the cover
and one for the text.
However, this simple approach will not work if the text block has a couple of
pages in color (that need different processing). To solve this, you can either
create an extra product part, or you can create an extra production set.
Production sets give the printer the freedom to solve the issue in any way he likes
without impacting the product parts. The printer can put the color pages on a
separate sheet, combine them with black-only pages on a larger sheet, or choose
whatever production method is appropriate. The printer could also combine
signatures of different product parts on the same sheet (provided the different
parts are compatible). In a multi-part job, there is no simple one-to-one relation
between parts and production sets.
The smallest result a production set can produce is a single side of a press sheet
(all color separations for the side). Thus, all sides that are produced by a single
production set have the same production settings.
If auxiliary flows use a different imposition task processor (e.g., to make a 2- up

page proof), the results of this imposition are not part of the production sets.
Apogee Impose brings together sheets with the same press, paper and color
spaces (CMYK, gray) in Production Sets.
For full details on each of the fields, see “Using the Products Tab” on page 291.

174 VIEWING THE PLAN TAB
Viewing the Plan Tab

The Plan tab displays the selected job’s Production Plan, and allows you to view
the individual settings of each of the items in the Plan.

the Edit button.
The Plan tab has two panes:
 Production Plan Pane (Jobs Window)
 Settings Pane (Jobs Window)
Production Plan The Production Plan is a series of components (Task Processors and Actions)
linked together to form one or more processing flows. These components are
Pane (Jobs configured to define exactly how jobs are to be input, processed, and output.
Window)
When you select one of these components, you will see the associated settings
displayed in the lower Settings Pane (Jobs Window).
Below each Task Processor icon, there is a drop-down list from in which you can
view the selected Parameter Set. If no Parameter Set is selected, the Task
Processor uses its initial settings.
Some Task Processors may display a thick blue underscore beneath their Param-
eter Sets drop-down list. This indicates that you are viewing a multi-part job, and
that the associated Task Processor has multiple settings (known as Production
Sets).
The last Task Processor in a flow always displays the Flow Identifier at the end
of the flow. In a single-flow plan, this always indicates a Main Output flow.

the Edit button.

5 MANAGING JOBS 175
Settings Pane (Jobs The Settings pane displays the name of the component (Task Processor or
Action) selected in the Production Plan pane, and its current settings.
Window)
the Edit button.

176 VIEWING THE PAGES TAB
Viewing the Pages Tab

The Pages tab lists the documents that have been input to the selected Page Store
(Private or Public Page Stores), and the pages that have been copied from the
Page Store and included in the job’s Run Lists.
The Pages tab has two panes:
 Page Store (Jobs Window)
 Run List (Jobs Window)
The Pages tab displays any errors encountered with the input documents, but
does not show any processing or hold states. These are displayed in the Results
tab.
The Pages tab is disabled if there is no Run List in the selected job.

the Edit button.
Page Store (Jobs The Page Store lists the documents that have been input to Apogee, and that may
be added to your Run List.
Window)
By default, documents are arranged as folders alphabetically in the Page Store.
The number of pages is shown in parentheses after the document name. If more
than one version of the document has been input, you will see the document
revision number in a separate column.
NOTE: When a document is first input to the Page Store, there is no revision
number. If subsequent revisions of the same document are input, they are
numbered in the ‘Rev’ column in order of arrival (or creation), starting with 1.
Apogee automatically names each document with the name of the input file. If
no name is available, Apogee uses the generic name “Document”, immediately
followed by a sequence number. If you add a document that is already known by
Apogee (e.g. from another job), then the same document name is used.

5 MANAGING JOBS 177
When you expand a document folder, Apogee lists the individual pages in the
selected document. It is from this view that you can select the pages that you
want to include in your Run List.
To organize your files more efficiently, for each input channel you define, you
can create one or more subfolders. For example:
\\$SYSTEMCOMPUTER\HotFolderRoot\$ORDER\Folder1
These will then appear under the main job folder in the Page Store.
Private and Public Page Stores
By default, each job created has it’s own “private” Page Store, which contains the
input documents that are available for this job alone. However, if an Apogee user
creates a Public Page Store, this will be visible in every user’s Page Store, in
addition to their own private input documents.
If there are no Public Page Stores, the Page Store will display only the documents
for the selected job in the Job List.
NOTE: The Page Store always displays the Private Page Store for the selected job,
which contains only the documents for this single job. However, the Page Store
may also display one or more Public Page Stores, which contain the documents
created by any Page Store Task Processors.
Run List (Jobs The Run List displays the pages that have been selected from the Page Store, and
that will be included in your job.
Window)
A page in the Run List shows similar information to the same page in the Page
Store. The page name is the document name as displayed in the Page Store,
followed by the page number. Placeholders and blank pages do not have a name.
The Run List provides the following information about the listed pages:
May display up to four columns of page adjustment icons, indicating that

Adjustments
the positioning of this individual page has been modified (offset).
The size of the placeholder (as specified in the Production Plan) is different
from the size of the page that is placed on it (imposition jobs only).
The page label (selected using View > Page Labels). Page labels are dis-
Lbl
played when the Run List is (automatically) updated with new revisions.
# The page number in the Run List.
Page The name of the page (the same as in the Page Store).

Rev The revision number of this page (if any).

The Signature to which the page belongs (when imposition is included in
Sig
the Plan).
A variety of information may also be displayed in the placard area above the Run
List.
The total number of empty placeholders in the Run List. If you position your cur-
sor over this icon, Apogee displays a Tooltip indicating how many placeholders
are empty, placed and blank.
The number of spot colors used in the job. If you position your cursor over this
icon, Apogee displays a Tooltip indicating the spot color names. If you click this
icon, Apogee displays the separation settings in the Plan tab.
Indicates that the Run List contains pages with different sizes.
NOTE: If you are viewing a versioning or a multi-part job, the layout of the Run
List is considerably different (depending on the specific parameters of the input
documents). For more information, refer to “Versioning Jobs in the Run List” on
page 228 and “Multi-part Jobs in the Run List” on page 232.
If you edit the job, you can add pages or documents to the Run List, move and
delete pages from it, and add blank pages. You can also change the number of
pages in the Run List, although this might invalidate any imposition scheme you
may have selected.
There is only one Run List per job.
Page Store / Run Document/Page Type Icons

List Icons Both the Page Store and the Run List display a variety of icons for different
document/page formats. Each item you see may be any combination of the
following:
 PDF/PostScript data unknown file type
When you input PDF or PostScript files, Apogee recognizes these file formats,
converts them to PDF, and places the PDF results in the Page Store.
If you input a document with a different file format, the file is not converted
and is not placed in the Page Store. Instead, a notification is sent to the
Message Board.
If you select a job which has already been processed by a renderer, you will
see raster data in the Run List.
 a document or a page

5 MANAGING JOBS 179
A page icon looks like a single page: a document icon looks like a stack of
pages. There are 2 types of document icons:
 Documents containing pages (the pages in the icon have a light gray
outline).
 Documents containing page files (the pages in the icon have a solid black
outline).
 a composite or a pre-separated file
 Composite documents or pages are represented by simple page or

document icons.
 Pre-separated document or page icons include a small 4-color bar on the

right.
In addition, each item is in one of the following states:
 OK (colored green)
 In error (colored red)
 In error, and rejected (colored red, with a red stripe)
 On hold (colored blue)
 On hold and rejected (colored blue with a red stripe)
These combinations are summarized in the following table:
Document / Page Type OK Error Error rej Hold Hold rej

PDF / PostScript com-
posite document
PDF / PostScript com-
posite page
PDF / PostScript pre-
separated document
PDF / PostScript pre-
separated page
Raster composite docu-
ment
Raster composite page

Document / Page Type OK Error Error rej Hold Hold rej

Raster pre-separated
document
Raster pre-separated
page
PDF layers
NOTE: The names of placed pages/documents are displayed in gray.
NOTE: Raster data includes TIFF, Copy Dot, or other supported raster data.
PDF Layer Icons

In Versioning jobs, PDF layer icons appear as overlays when you select pages that
have layers in the Page Store. They may also appear in the Run List of a
Versioning job, where they display the same states as their parent pages.
Run List Page Adjustment Icons

The Run List has a dedicated Adjustments column, showing the application of
page adjustments. Apogee offers two ways of showing the page adjustments:
 Simple view: A single icon indicates that page adjustments have been made.
 Extended view: Dedicated icons are displayed for the different adjustments.
Note that you can position your mouse cursor over the Simple view page adjust-
ments icon to display a Tooltip which indicates exactly which page adjustments
have been made.

5 MANAGING JOBS 181
By default, Apogee shows the simple view. However, you can select
View > Extended Page Adjustments to switch to extended view.
Center Offset Scale Rotate

Horizontal
Vertical
Both
Auto-center Auto-center only in simple view
90
180
270
When Auto Center is in effect, the simple view shows the Center page adjust-
ment icon; when you manually apply extra adjustments, the icons shows the
generic page adjustment icon.
The extended adjustment column has a row of 4 icons, indicating the presence
of center, offset, scale and rotation adjustments, respectively. These icons have
a fixed position in the column, making it easier to scan the run list for specific
types of adjustments.
Other Icons
The other icons you will see in the Pages tab include:

a Public Page Store (Page Store only).
an empty placeholder (Run List only).
a blank page (Run List only).
job processing is not yet complete in the Production Plan before the Run List.
unknown document.
the job has generated a warning.
the job has generated an error, and has stopped.
(in Run List status column of normal job). The page has a preflight report. Clicking on the icon
will open the report in your PDF viewer.
(in Run List status column of versioning job). One or more pages in this row have a preflight
report. Clicking on the icon will bring up a menu which contains the titles of the objects to
which the preflight reports are attached. Selecting one of the menu items opens the report in
your PDF viewer.
PDF is certified.
PDF is not certified.
the document is being edited interactively within Apogee using the Check-Out plug-in for
Acrobat.
the document has been edited interactively within Apogee using the Check-Out plug-in for
Acrobat.

5 MANAGING JOBS 183
Viewing the Results Tab

The Results tab allows you to view the results of the selected job. This tab
NOTE: Double-clicking a result opens it in preview mode (see “Previewing Job

Results” on page 95).
This tab is divided into the following panes:
 The Activity Pane
 The Job Layout Pane (Jobs Window)
 The Separations Pane (Jobs Window)
NOTE: If you are viewing a versioning or multi-part job, the layout of the Results
tab is considerably different (depending on the specific parameters of the input
documents). For more information, refer to “Versioning Jobs in the Results Tab”
on page 249 and “Multi-part Jobs in the Results Tab” on page 253.
The Activity Pane This pane allows you to monitor the current processing status of any of the
selected job’s Processing and Output Task Processors.
The Activity pane includes the following:
 Flow selection icons
You will see one or more Flow Identifier icons, corresponding to each flow in
the selected job. When you click on any of these icons, the selected flow is
displayed, and you will see the Task Processors and Actions that are active in
this particular flow. This is the same as clicking the Flow Status icons in the
Job List.

184 VIEWING THE RESULTS TAB
 Selected flow components (active Task Processors and Actions).
You will see the Task Processors and Actions that are active in the selected
flow. If you double-click on any of the Task Processors, you will see the
Activity Window for that particular component.
 Results tab display icons.
 Click the first of these icons to show/hide the Activity pane.
 Click the second of these icons to show/hide the Production Sets table
(Multi-part jobs only).
 Click the third icon to show/hide the Separations pane.
NOTE: Input channel activity is not displayed in the Activity pane. If you want to
check this, switch to the System Overview and double-click the Task Processor
that you want to monitor. Any processing is then displayed in the Activity
window. For more information, see “Monitoring your Task Processors” on
page 616.
The Job Layout This pane displays thumbnails of the Run List pages of the selected job. Status
icons, corner folds, and colored backgrounds provide additional information
Pane (Jobs about the current status and orientation of each of the displayed thumbnails.
Window)
TIP: To improve the speed You can double-click any of the thumbnails to launch the appropriate viewer for
with which job results are this specific page (Acrobat for PDF documents or Raster Preview for TIFF files).
displayed, you can disable If the job has not yet received all required pages, you will see only empty
thumbnail viewing from the placeholders.
View menu.
NOTE: If you are viewing a versioning job, the layout is considerably different
(depending on the specific parameters of the input documents). For more
information, refer to “Versioning Jobs in the Results Tab” on page 249.

5 MANAGING JOBS 185
Page and Flat Thumbnails
You need to enable thumbnails (View > Thumbnails) in order to view a minia-
ture representation of your job pages in the Job Layout pane.
If no imposition has been specified for the selected job, you will see a series of
pages. The current status of each page is indicated by its background color.
A thumbnail view of this page is either not available, or is currently being

retrieved from the Apogee System (green background color).
Page has been processed successfully (no background color).
Page has been processed successfully, and is on hold pending approval

(blue background color).
Page has been processed with errors (red background color).
Page is managed by the PlateMaker Client, and is ready to plate (purple

background color).

Page has been processed successfully, but has been rejected.
Page has been discarded.
An empty page in the Run List (white background with a cross).
A blank page in the Run List (white background).
If an imposition scheme has been specified, you will see a series of flats. As with
pages, the status of each flat is indicated by its background color.

5 MANAGING JOBS 187
Extra Thumbnail Information

The following additional information is available for both pages and flats:
 Action indicator
 Separation indicator
 Proofing data indicator
 Raster data indicator
 Corner fold indicator
 Page number
 Flat label
 Signature
Action Indicator
Each individual page or flat may have one or more Action indicators above it
(corresponding to hold points in the Production Plan). These may be any of the
following:
The job’s Production Plan contains an After Hours Action. When this point is reached, the job
results are held (written to disk) pending the specified time.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Soft Proof Action. When this point is reached, the job
results are held (written to disk) pending approval/rejection of a Digital Film preview by the
user.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Hard Copy Proof Action. When this point is reached, the
job results are held (written to disk) pending approval/ rejection of a hard copy proof by the
user.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Ready for Plating Action. When this point is reached, the
job results are taken over and managed by PlateRunner (ready to plate).
The job’s Production Plan contains a Collect for Output Action. When this point is reached,
the job results are held (written to disk) pending user intervention.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Waiting for Results Action. When this point is reached,
the job results are held until the target flow or required pages are finished.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Discard Action. When this point is reached, the job
results are held until the specified pages have been automatically discarded.

The job’s Production Plan contains a Web Proof Action. When this point is reached, the job
remote user.
Result will be frozen once it has been approved by the remote user.
Result has been frozen because it has been approved by the remote user.
These Action indicators can be in one of three states (as indicated below for the
Soft Proof Action):
Action icon Status
The page or flat has not yet reached this Action.
The page or flat has reached this Action (blue background).
The page or flat has passed this Action (dimmed icon).
When a flat is on hold, the entire flat is colored with a blue background in the
Results tab, as illustrated below:
When a page is on hold, only the page is colored with a blue background:
Any actions that have already been passed in the flow are grayed-out (dimmed),
as follows:

5 MANAGING JOBS 189
Separation Indicator
If a page or flat is made up of a series of separations, this is indicated by four (or

more) small colored icons to the right. If you select the page or flat, the
individual separations are displayed in the Separations pane (see “The Separa-
tions Pane (Jobs Window)” on page 193).
A square icon indicates that the separation is a process color; a round icon
indicates that the separation is a spot color.
The separation indicators provide the following information for each of the
colors.

Square outlined separation indicator:

• A process color separation is expected (it has not yet been rendered). In this example, it is
the magenta separation.
• The background is available for an Apogee DQS job.
Square solid separation indicator: A process color separation has been rendered, and is ready
for output. In this example, it is the magenta separation.
Checked separation indicator: The separation has been rendered, and has been successfully
output. In this example, it is the magenta separation.
Dimmed separation indicator: The separation has been discarded, and will not be output.
Round outlined separation indicator: A spot color separation is expected (it has not yet been
rendered). The outline color is the color of the expected spot color.
Round solid separation indicator: A spot color separation has been rendered, and is ready for
output. The solid color is the spot color.
Checked separation indicator: The spot color separation has been rendered, and has been suc-
cessfully output.
For example, the page below contains 8 separations: the four CMYK process
colors plus four spot colors. All these separations have been rendered (as
indicated by the solid separation indicators) and have been successfully output
(as indicated by the associated checkmarks):
Proofing Data Indicator
Results may display a small, square multi-colored icon to their right. This is the
Proofing Data indicator. It indicates that the page/flat belongs to a proofing
workflow, and is a composite TIFF file (i.e., no separations).
A checkmark indicates that the page/flat has been successfully output.

5 MANAGING JOBS 191
The page/flat belongs to a proofing workflow or a layout job, and is a composite file (i.e., not
a separation). The page/flat has been rendered, and is ready for output.
a separation). The checkmark indicates that it has been successfully printed.
Raster Data Indicator
For DQS and native Apogee DQS (Raster Impose) results, you can choose
View > Show > Page Rendered. Results will then display a square gray-colored
indicator in the lower right corner. This is the Raster Data indicator. It means
that all separations in the page(s) have been fully rendered and are ready for
previewing or output.
Corner Fold Indicator
Small corner folds in a corner of each page indicate a page’s orientation.
The orientation of a page may vary in an imposition layout. The position of the corner fold
tells you where the top of the page is.
The orientation of a page may vary in an imposition layout. The position of the
corner fold tells you where the top of the page is:

Page Number
Page numbers indicate the position of pages in the Run List. If you are viewing a
flat, you will see the position of the pages on the flat.
Flat Label
Below each flat you will see a label, which indicates which side of the signature
you are looking at. You can click this label to quickly select the entire flat. This is
useful if pages cover the entire surface of the flat, making it difficult to select the
flat (and not a page) by clicking directly on it.
Signature
If Front and Back viewing has been enabled, you will see the complete signature
for each page or flat in the job.
NOTE: In this example, the small checkmarks you can see indicates that all
separations have been output.

5 MANAGING JOBS 193
The Separations This pane displays thumbnails of each of the separations for the page or signa-
ture you select in the Job Layout pane. Double-clicking a thumbnail launches the
Pane (Jobs appropriate viewer. For PDF data, this is your PDF Reader; for raster data, this is
Window) Raster Preview.

194 WORKING WITH JOBS IN THE JOB LIST
Working with Jobs in the Job List

The Job List displays information on all jobs that have been submitted to the
Apogee System. From here you can monitor these jobs, and make a variety of
changes to their current status:
 “Selecting Jobs” on page 194
 “Monitoring Jobs” on page 195
 “Holding/Resuming Jobs” on page 196
 “Continuing Jobs” on page 197
 “Making Rush Jobs” on page 200
 “Restarting Job Processing” on page 201
 “Duplicating Jobs” on page 201
 “Deleting Jobs” on page 202
 “Deleting a Public Page Store” on page 205
 “Enabling/Disabling Input Channels” on page 205
 “Opening the Job and System Logs” on page 206
 “Archiving Jobs” on page 207
 “Dumping Jobs” on page 209
 “Merging Jobs” on page 210
Selecting Jobs In the Job List and the Results tab, as in other areas of the Apogee Client, you can
use the following procedures to select and de-select multiple items (jobs, Hot
Tickets, pages, flats, etc.).
NOTE: Jobs may be grouped in job folders as explained in “Organizing the Job
List” on page 144.
 To select a job

5 MANAGING JOBS 195
2 Double-click a job folder in the Job List.
The job folder is expanded to reveal the job contents. These are the
documents that have been input via the input channel(s) associated with this
particular ticket.
3 Select one of the jobs.
The job details are retrieved from the Apogee System and displayed in the
pane on the right. This information is arranged into 5 tabs - Administration,
Options, Plan, Pages, and Results.
TIP: You can also click the expand/collapse buttons to open and close job folders.
 To select or de-select multiple jobs or items

2 Click the first item you want to select in the Job List.
3 While holding down the CTRL key (Windows) or COMMAND key, click each
additional item you want to select.
4 To de-select an item, hold down the CTRL key and then click the item.
5 To extend the selection over a block of contiguous items, click the first item
and then hold down the SHIFT key while clicking the last item you want to
select.
Monitoring Jobs You can quickly check the status of your jobs as follows:
 To monitor a job
2 Expand the folders in the Job List to view your jobs.
A series of icons indicate the current status of each job in the Job List. These
include Job Notification Icons, Job Status Icons, Job Icons, and Flow Icons.
3 To view information on a job’s Run List, select the job and click the Pages tab.
The Run List is displayed in the pane on the right.
4 To view intermediate job results, select the job and click the Results tab.
If any page results are available, they are displayed in the pane on the right.
Otherwise, you will see only empty page holders.

5 To monitor any ongoing processing, expand the Activity pane in the Results
tab.
For more information, see “The Activity Pane” on page 183.
Holding/Resuming When you manually put a job on hold in the Jobs List, you suspend all processing
tasks for the entire job (after the current activity has been allowed to finish). The
Jobs job remains on hold until you resume it.
NOTE: You cannot “continue” a job that is on hold: The Continue command will
be disabled. In this case, you must use the “Resume” command.
 To manually hold a job

2 Context-click a job which has not yet finished processing in the Job List (or
job results in the Job Layout pane), and choose Hold Job from the context
menu.
3 You can also click the Hold button:
The Hold Job dialog box appears. Here you can choose to stop any ongoing
processing, or allow it to finish before the job is put on hold.
4 If you want to stop processing, choose Stop and Hold.
This means that active tasks are stopped and rescheduled. The rescheduled
tasks are then put on hold.
5 If you want to allow any ongoing processing to finish, choose Hold.
This means that all active tasks will be allowed to finish and all queued tasks
will be put on hold.
The Hold icon appears in the Status column to the left of the job. Notice also
that the background color of the associated Job Flow icon changes to blue.
All flats and pages that still need to be processed in the Pages and Results tabs
will also be colored blue. Only results that were finished are not colored blue.
The job’s input channels will continue to receive and deliver documents to
the Page Store, but no further processing will be done on them. This means

5 MANAGING JOBS 197
that although you may see new documents arrive in the Page Store, you
cannot add these document pages to your Run List since they have not yet
been processed by the Normalizer.
NOTE: Manually holding a job from the Jobs Window stops all processing tasks
for the entire job. This is different from including an Action in the job’s
Production Plan, where you can put any individual job item on hold at any time,
whether it is a page, a flat or a separation.
 To resume a job on hold

2 In the Job List, select a job which has been manually put on hold.
The following Status icon is attached to jobs which are on hold:
Additionally, the background color of the associated Job Flow icon will be
blue.
3 Choose Control > Resume Job, or click the Resume button in the Toolbar.
The Hold icon disappears, and the background color of the associated Job
Flow icon changes to green.
Resuming a job does not resume results and/or tasks that are waiting on an
Action, or that are rejected or in error.
NOTE: Resuming a job resumes processing of the entire job which was
manually put on hold. This is different from Continuing an individual job
item (page, flat or separation) which was automatically put on hold by an
Action in the job’s Production Plan.
Continuing Jobs A job may be stopped because it has reached a hold Action in its Production Plan,
or because it has been aborted, rejected, or in error. In all cases, you can continue
all or part of the job manually.
NOTE: You cannot manually continue jobs that are waiting for a Task Processor:
They will be continued automatically when a Task Processor becomes available.

 To continue results which are waiting on an Action

2 In the Job List, select a job which has been stopped by Apogee, and is waiting
for user interaction.
Jobs which have been stopped due to a hold Action will be flagged with one
of the following Status icons:
The job’s Production Plan contains an After Hours Action.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Soft Proof Action.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Hard Copy Proof Action.
The job’s output device is controlled by the PlateMaker Client.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Collect for Output Action.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Waiting for Results Action.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Discard Action.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Web Proof Action.
In the Job Layout pane, you will see thumbnails of all the pages or flats in the
selected job. Above each job item, you will see one or more Action icons.
These correspond to the Actions included in the job’s Production Plan. The
color of each icon indicates the current processing status of the selected page
or flat within the job:
 If the icon is displayed normally, the page/flat has not yet reached this
checkpoint in the Production Plan.
 If the icon has a blue background, the page/flat has reached this check-
point in the Production Plan, and is on hold. In this case, the page/flat
itself is also colored blue. The exception to this are pages with the Collect
for Output Action - these only turn blue when ALL the specified pages are
available.
 If the icon is dimmed (grayed out), the page/flat has already passed this
checkpoint in the Production Plan.

5 MANAGING JOBS 199
4 Select one or more pages or flats which are on hold (blue background).
5 Click Continue.
The selected pages or flats resume processing, the blue color is removed, and
the associated Action icon is dimmed.
NOTE: If you continue a job that is being collected (Collect for Output) but is
not yet complete, only the currently available results will be output: Apogee
will automatically continue to collect the remaining results, but you will need
to select them and again click Continue to output them.
 To continue results which were aborted, rejected, or in error

2 In the Job List, select a job which is flagged with one of the following Notifi-
cation or Status icons:
 aborted
 rejected
 warning
 error
In the Job Layout pane, you will see thumbnails of all the pages or flats in the
selected job.
4 Select one or more pages or flats (with the aborted, rejected, warning or error
status).
5 Click Continue.
A Continue confirmation dialog box is displayed.
6 If you wish, enter a comment explaining why you are continuing to process
this result.
TIP: You can view this comment later by checking the Job Log (Log for Job).

7 Click Continue.
The selected pages or flats resume processing. However:
 In the Job List, the status of jobs with the rejected or warning condition
does not change. Only aborted and error conditions are cleared.
 In the Results tab, the status of results with the rejected, warning or error
condition does not change. Only the aborted condition is cleared.
 To continue multiple results

1 Select a job in the Jobs window which is waiting on an Action, or is rejected,
aborted or in error.
2 Select the Results tab, and choose the first item you want to continue.
3 Extend your selection, as described in “To select or de-select multiple jobs or

items” on page 195. If the items are part of a flat, select the entire flat.
4 Click Continue.
NOTE: You can only continue multiple results provided they are all in the
same waiting state. This button is disabled if one or more items have a
different state, or are not waiting on an Action.
If one or more of the selected items contains rejected, aborted, or error

results, a Continue confirmation dialog box is displayed.
5 If you wish, enter a comment explaining why you are continuing to process
this result.
TIP: To view this comment later, click the Status icon next to the page in the Page
Store or Run List.
6 Click Continue.
Making Rush Jobs You can upgrade any job in the Job List to a “rush” job. This puts the job to the
top of the queue of jobs waiting to be processed by Apogee. A rush job will be
processed as soon as Apogee has finished processing the current job.
 To make a rush job


5 MANAGING JOBS 201
2 In the Job List, select a job.
3 Choose Control > Rush Job, or click the Rush Job button in the Toolbar.
The Job icon changes to a chequered background, indicating that this job will
be given priority over the other jobs in the Job List.
Restarting Job You can remake all the existing job results which follow a selected point in the
Production Plan. You may want to do this if you have changed your resources
Processing (new fonts, color books, etc.), or if you want to remake aborted results or remake
output when no raster data is available.
 To restart job processing

1 Select the Jobs window.
2 In the Job List, select a job and choose Control > Restart Job Processing At.
3 Select the Task Processor from which you want to restart processing.
Apogee starts to re-render the job from the selected point in the Production
Plan.
Duplicating Jobs Apogee allows you to duplicate jobs. This is useful for applications which require
nearly identical jobs (e.g. where only a single separation - usually black - needs
to be changed across different jobs)
When you duplicate a job, Apogee makes an exact copy of the job, ready for
editing. The ‘source’ job is not affected.
 To duplicate a job
2 In the Job List, select a job and choose Edit > Duplicate Job.
Apogee duplicates the job, and opens the duplicate version in the Ticket
Editor. Here, you can make any changes you require (e.g. change the job
name).
Close the Ticket Editor.
The duplicate job is automatically submitted, and appears in the Job List.
•

Creating a New Job You can create a new empty job by using the job ticket of an existing job. The new
job re-uses certain settings from the existing job while others are reset:
from an Existing
Job  Job Name and Order Number are blank
 Operator Name is taken from the existing job
 Print Center, Company and Collaborators are taken from the existing job
 Guest collaborators are removed
 Hot Folder is reset to the settings stored in the selected parameter set
 Content files are removed
 The job has a new job-ID
 The new job has no history
 All other settings are re-used: plan, products, imposition, production sets,
etc.
 To create a new job from an existing job

1 Context-click a job or highlight a job and choose File > New From Selected.
2 The Job Ticket Editor opens with an empty Administration tab and you can
complete the job ticket set up and upload new content files.
Deleting Jobs By default, jobs are not automatically deleted from the system. You must delete
them manually. When you delete a job, all the job’s resources and results are
erased, but the job still remains logged in the system and can still be seen in the
Job List by the Administrator (these jobs have a strike-through). To permanently
remove all traces of a deleted job, the Administrator needs to delete it a second
time from the Job List. Alternatively, he can set up a schedule for automatically
removing deleted jobs from the system.
NOTE: You can also delete a job together with all its logging information in a
single step by purging it, as described below.
 To delete a job from the Job List

2 Select the job that you want to delete in the Job List.

5 MANAGING JOBS 203
3 Choose Edit > Delete Job, or press the Delete key.
You will see the message “The job <jobname> will be deleted. You cannot
undo this”.
4 Click Delete.
NOTE: If you delete a Job The Job is deleted, together with the Job Ticket, and any intermediate job
created from a Hot Ticket, results. Only the job log remains. If you are logged in as an Operator, the job
the Hot Ticket itself is not immediately disappears from the Job List. However, if you are logged in as an
deleted. Administrator, you will still see the job in the Job List: The job has a strike-
through and is grayed out:
To remove a job with a strike-through from the Job List (Administrators

only), you need to select it and delete it a second time.
NOTE: If you delete a Job created from a Hot Ticket, the Hot Ticket itself is not
deleted.
 To view/remove all ‘deleted’ jobs from the Job List
Administrator access level only!
Deleted jobs can still be seen in the Job List by Administrators: They have a
strike-through and are grayed out.
To quickly located all deleted jobs, you can use the Custom Job Filter.
2 Edit the Custom Job Filter by hovering over the Custom Filter button and
clicking Edit in the cogwheel menu to open the filter settings.
3 In the filter settings, select the ‘deleted’ Status check box, and choose ‘Is’ from
the associated list options.
4 Click Apply to activate the filter, then click OK.
5 Select the deleted job(s) that you want to permanently remove in the Job
List.

6 Choose Edit > Delete Job, or press the Delete key.
The selected job(s) are permanently deleted. No trace of them remains on the
system, in the Job List, or in the Job Log.
 To purge a job from the Job List

2 Select the job that you want to purge in the Job List.
3 Hold down the Shift key while pressing the Delete key.
You will see the message “The job <jobname> will be deleted immediately.
You cannot undo this”.
4 Click Delete.
The job is permanently deleted. No trace of the job remains on the system, the
Job List, or the Job Log.
 To automatically clean up deleted jobs
1 Select the System Overview window.
2 Click the Apogee System icon.
A set of icons is displayed in the Resources pane.
3 Double-click the Job Housekeeping icon.
The Job Housekeeping Settings dialog box is displayed.
4 Select a schedule for cleaning up deleted jobs, as described in “Job House-

keeping Settings” on page 629.
5 Click OK.

5 MANAGING JOBS 205
Deleting a Public You can delete a Public Page Store, and all the documents it contains, as
described below.
Page Store
 To delete a public page store

2 In the Job List, select the Public Page Store that you want to delete.
3 Choose Edit > Delete Page Store Job.
4 Click Delete to confirm that you want to delete the selected Public Page
Store.
The Public Page Store, and all the documents it contains, is deleted.
NOTE: This will not affect jobs which are still using documents from this
Public Page Store.
Enabling/Disabling By default, all input channels are enabled when they are first created. However,
you may want to disable them from time to time - to prevent other users input-
Input Channels ting documents, or to improve system performance.
You can enable or disable input channels from the Hot Tickets List (for Hot
Tickets which will be used to create jobs) or from the Jobs List (for jobs which
have already been created).
 To disable an input channel

1 Select a Hot Ticket in the Hot Ticket List, or select a job in the Job List.
2 Choose Control > Disable Inputs.
The inputs for this job are closed. Apogee will no longer accept document
input on this channel. Any documents which are input will be queued up,
pending reactivation of the channel.
You will see that the disabled job or Hot Ticket now has a “disabled input” job
icon:

 To enable an input channel

1 Select a disabled Hot Ticket in the Hot Ticket List, or a disabled job in the Job
List.
Disabled jobs and Hot Tickets Have a “disabled input” job icon:
2 Choose Control > Enable Inputs.
The job icon changes to indicate that the inputs have been successfully
opened.
 To automatically enable or disable an input channel

1 Create a new Job Ticket/Hot Ticket, or context-click a job in the Job List and
select Edit Job from the context menu.
2 Select the Options tab.
3 To disable an input channel, select the ‘Deactivate input when’ check box,
then click open the associated list box and select one of the available options,
as described in “Input Channels” on page 288.
4 To enable an input channel, clear the ‘Deactivate input when’ check box.
Opening the Job The Job and System Logs list all job and system events which take place within
Apogee. They provide information on jobs, devices, or systems which need
and System Logs attention.
 To open the Job Log

2 Context-click on a job in the Job List, and select Log for Job from the context
menu.
Make sure you context-click a job, and not the job folder.
The Job Log is displayed.
NOTE: The largest item you can select is a job. You cannot view the log for several
jobs at once. If you select a flat, the log includes all separations of that flat, but
not the pages that make it up.

5 MANAGING JOBS 207
 To open the System Log

1 Select the System Overview Window.
2 Choose Window > Log for Apogee System.
The System Log is displayed.
Archiving Jobs When a job is processed by Apogee, all the input files, intermediate processing
results, resources, profiles, etc. are by default automatically discarded. If you
want to keep them (or part of them), you must archive them. There are three
different ways of doing this. You can:
 archive jobs manually in the Job List
 include archiving “Actions” in the Jobs Production Plan
 set up an automated job archiving schedule
Apogee Archive Icons in Windows Explorer

When you archive a job, the job is exported from the Apogee environment, and
is stored as a file in the specified archive location (this location is defined in your
Job Housekeeping Settings). You can see these archive files using Windows
Explorer. The icons vary according to the type of job:
Archived Commercial job (.arch)
Archived Public Page Store job (.arch)
What gets Archived?
You can specify your job archiving preferences in the Job Ticket Options. This
allows you to define exactly which parts of the job are archived (marked results,
all available results).
 To archive a job manually from the Job List

2 Select a job in the Job List.
3 Choose File > Archive Job.
The following status icon appears next to the job name while the job is being
archived:

As soon as the job has been successfully archived, the Archiving status icon
disappears (any previous status icon reappears), and the job icon displays a
small “archived” indicator:
The default archive name and location is defined in your Job Housekeeping
Settings. The location must be a shared disk accessible by both Apogee Client
and System (for example: D:\ArchiveRoot\$ORDER\$JOB).
Job archive files are saved with the .arch file extension.
 To import an archived job, create new job from archive

2 Choose File > Import Job Archive.
The Open dialog box appears.
3 Browse to the location where you save your archives.
The default archive name and location is defined in your Job Housekeeping
Settings. The location must be a shared disk accessible by both Apogee Client
and System (for example: D:\ArchiveRoot\$ORDER\$JOB). Job archive
files are saved with the .arch file extension.
4 Select an archive, and click Open.
Now you can choose how you want to import the archive:
 Restore the original job: puts back the original job as it was
 Create a new job : if you select this option you can enter a new Job Name
and Order Number for the new job. All the other information and content
files in the private page store and Run List are the same as the original
archive. Can be used for reprints.
5 Choose of the above options and click OK.
The Importing Archive status icon appears briefly next to the job name while
the archive is being imported:

5 MANAGING JOBS 209
As soon as the archive has been successfully imported, the Importing Archive
status icon disappears (any previous status icon reappears), and the
imported job appears in the Job List.
Apogee validates the imported ticket against the current configuration of the
system. Any ticket errors are reported via the Message Board, and can be
corrected using the Ticket Editor.
 To set up an automated job archiving schedule

1 Select the System Overview window.
2 Click the Apogee System icon.
A set of icons is displayed in the Resources pane.
3 Double-click the Job Housekeeping icon.
The Job Housekeeping dialog box is displayed.
4 Select a schedule for archiving jobs, as described in “Job Housekeeping

Settings” on page 629.
5 Click OK.
Dumping Jobs Dumping a job is similar to archiving a job. However, this function is only avail-
able to administrators, and is used for troubleshooting purposes. Dumping a job
saves the job, together with all its system resources. This information can then
be delivered to your Agfa Service Technician who can use it to reproduce the
problem. You can also make a dump of several jobs.
 To dump a job
2 Select one or more jobs in the Job List.

3 Choose File > Export > Job Dump.
4 In the Save As dialog, choose the location where you want to save the job
dump. The file name is the job number with the .zip extension. You can
change the name of the ZIP file if you want. If you selected more than one job,
each job dump is saved in a separate ZIP file.
The following status icon appears next to the job name while the job is being
dumped:
Make sure the location you chose has sufficient disk space to save the job and
perform the compression.
As soon as the job has been successfully dumped, the dumping status icon
disappears (any previous status icon reappears), and the job icon displays a
small “dumped” indicator:
Merging Jobs Apogee allows you to merge any number of jobs in the Job List into a single
merged job. This is particularly useful for ganging the products of several smaller
jobs into a larger job. You can combine multiple jobs with bound and/or
unbound products into a merged job. Merged jobs are by definition multi-
product jobs. The Apogee Impose module can be used to place the parts of the
different jobs on the press sheets of the merged job.
The Origins of Merged Jobs

The relationship between a merged job and the originating jobs and products is
displayed in the top right corner of the Products tab as a property of the selected
product. For merged jobs, the link indicates the order number and job name of
the original job (originator). For jobs that have been merged, the link indicates
the order number and job name of the merged job. Clicking these links highlights
the job in the Job List.

5 MANAGING JOBS 211
Unsupported Jobs
The following conditions must be met in order to merge jobs:
 A job to be merged must not be a multi-product job, in other words it should

only have one product.
 A job to be merged must not have versions (versioning job).
 A job which has already been merged and a merged job cannot be used as one
of the jobs to be merged.
 It is not possible to merge regular, non-layout jobs with layout jobs.
Otherwise you are free to combine bound and unbound jobs with different
properties (presses, colors, media) and the Merge Assistant helps you collect and
merge suitable jobs.
NOTE: The imposition settings for the individual products are maintained in the
new merged job.
 To merge existing jobs

1 In the Job List, select the jobs you want to merge into a single merged job by
pressing CTRL and clicking the jobs.
You can select job folders or individual jobs within a folder. If you select
folders, all the jobs in the folder are included in your selection for merging.
2 Context-click in the blue, highlighted area and choose Merge Jobs.
The Merge Assistant is displayed.

The selected jobs are listed with their details. Jobs which cannot be merged
(unsupported) are grayed out and the product type is displayed in red in the
Product column.
Unsupported jobs (e.g. multi-product and versioning jobs) can be hidden in

the list by selecting the Hide unsupported jobs check box.d
3 If necessary, fine-tune the list of jobs you want include in the merged job. You
can sort the jobs by column and choose the most appropriate jobs to be
merged by Press, Stock, Media, etc.
You can select multiple jobs in the list and click one of the check boxes to clear
them from the list, or to include them in the merging.
The properties in the columns are also available in the Filter panel on the left.
Either type in the Quick Filter to filter on the Order Name and Job Name, or
choose/combine with any of the other filters. You can save your filter by
choosing Set As Default in the cogwheel menu (top right corner of the Filter
panel). You can revert to this filter at any time by choosing Revert in the
same menu.
A summary of the jobs you are going to merge appears at the end of the table.
If you want the system to delete the jobs to be merged, select the Mark for
deletion after check box and enter the number of days/months before the
jobs are deleted. You also have a Disable inputs check box that allows you to
queue documents that are input for jobs to be merged.
NOTE: If you selected a mix of regular jobs and layout jobs, you will see two
radio buttons (non-layout jobs and layout jobs) forcing you to select either
one of these job types. It is not possible to merge regular, non-layout jobs
with layout jobs.

5 MANAGING JOBS 213
4 In the Resulting merged job panel, you specify the details for the new
merged job:
By default, the first supported job ticket in the Candidate Jobs list is used to
create the new job. If you want to use a different job ticket, click the cogwheel
button and choose another job from the drop-down list.
OR
Click the cogwheel button and select a Ticket Template. The Templates
dialog is displayed and you can choose a job ticket template. Click Select to
return to the Merge Assistant.
5 Enter the Order Number and Job Name for the new, merged job to activate
the Merge Jobs button.
6 Select the Preserve imposition of original jobs check box if you do not want
the Merge Assistant to change the existing impositions.
7 Click Merge Jobs.
If you didn’t clear the Edit merged job with Job Ticket Editor check box, the
Job Ticket Editor opens and you can complete the job set-up, including
imposition with Apogee Impose. If the merged jobs had documents, these
documents are added to the merged job. The Comments box in the Adminis-
tration tab lists the jobs merged to create the merged job.
The Merge Assistant window remains open but the merged jobs are removed
from the list. If you want to close the Merge Assistant after merging, select the
Close Merge Assistant check box before clicking the Merge Jobs button.
8 Submit the new merged job.
The merged job is added to the Job List. The original jobs and the merged job
are indicated with a special status icon:
9 In the Merge Assistant, click Close to finish merging or repeat the merging
procedure to merge another batch of jobs in a second merged job.
•

214 WORKING WITH JOBS IN THE PAGES TAB
Working with Jobs in the Pages Tab

The Pages tab lists the documents that have been input to the selected Page Store
(Private or Public Page Stores), and the pages that have been copied from the
Page Store and included in the job’s Run List. You can add pages from the Page
Store to the Run List, but you cannot change or remove previously placed pages
since this would require a remake of the job. To change or remove previously
placed pages, you must edit the job in the JTE.
 “Working with the Page Store” on page 215
 “Working with the Run List” on page 218
 “Imposition Adjustment” on page 224
 “Create Versions Assistant in the Page Store” on page 226
 “Versioning Jobs in the Run List” on page 228
 “Multi-part Jobs in the Run List” on page 232
NOTE: If you are viewing a versioning job, the layout of the Run List is
considerably different (depending on the specific parameters of the input
page 228.
 To display pages in the Pages tab

2 In the Job List, select a job to which pages or documents have been input.
3 Click the Pages tab.
NOTE: The Pages tab is only available for jobs based on Job Tickets: It is not
available for jobs based on Hot Tickets.
You will see the Page Store on the left and the Run List on the right. Any
documents that have been successfully input are listed in the Page Store. By
default, this list is collapsed.
The Run List displays the number of placeholders in this job. This number is
specified in the Run List Task Processor Settings.

5 MANAGING JOBS 215
4 To view individual pages in the Page Store, click the expand buttons associ-
ated with the input documents.
 To view job results in the Page Store or Run List
NOTE: To open PDF documents, you must have already specified where your PDF
Reader application is located (see “Preferences” on page 90).
3 Select the Pages tab.
4 Context-click a page or document in either the Page Store or the Run List, and
select View Page From.
A sub-menu is displayed, listing the results which are still available at various
stages in your Production plan. For example:
By default, whenever you include a Run List in your Production Plan, a Keep
Results Action is always attached to the preceding Task Processor in the flow.
You will therefore have at least one set of results (the Latest) to choose from.
If any of the earlier Task Processors in the flow have Keep Results Actions
attached to them, you can choose to view these instead.
TIP: This feature is useful if 5 Select the results you want to view.
you want to diagnose errors,
by comparing results from Apogee automatically starts the PDF Reader.
different points in your If you select a document, the viewing application displays the first page of the
Production Plan. selected document. The page or document is opened in read-only mode.
NOTE: You can also simply double-click a page or document to display the last
available result before the Run List Task Processor in your Production Plan.
You can also view results in the Results tab view. The distinction here is that
the Pages tab provides a view on job input results, while the Results tab
provides a view on the output results.
Working with the The Page Store may be either a Private Page Store, which displays only the
documents for a single job, or may include one or more Public Page Stores which
Page Store
display the documents created by all Page Store Out Task Processors. The Page
Store lists the documents that have been input, and that may be added to your
Run List.

 To delete documents from a Page Store

1 Open a job for editing, as described in “To select and edit a Ticket” on
page 338.
2 Click the Pages tab.
3 Select the documents you want to delete from the Page Store.
NOTE: You can only delete documents: You cannot delete individual pages.
4 Choose Edit > Delete Document, or press the Delete key.
Apogee requests your confirmation.
5 Click Delete to delete the document.
6 Submit your changes.
 To delete documents from a Public Page Store

1 Select a Public Page Store from the Jobs List.
2 Select one of the Public Page Store documents in the Pages tab.
3 Choose Edit > Delete Document, or press the Delete key.
Apogee requests your confirmation.
4 Click Delete to remove the document and all its pages.
Any documents that are still being used will be kept until they are no longer
required.
 To export documents from a Page Store


5 MANAGING JOBS 217
4 Select a document in the Page Store (or in a Public Page Store ).
5 Choose File > Export > Export Document From, and select the Task
Processor from which you want to export the document results (e.g, Latest,
Preflight, etc.).
NOTE: You can choose to export from any of the available results at any point
in the flow.
The Export Document dialog box is displayed.
6 Choose a name, location, and file type (pdf), and click Save.
Apogee suspends all processing on the selected item and its results, and saves
the document in the specified Export location. You can now edit the exported
file outside the Apogee Client, using the associated PDF editing application.
 To check out pages or documents in a Page Store

You may want to edit a PDF document which is already in the Page Store.
1 Go to the Page Store and select one or more pages, or one or more documents
(but not a combination of pages and documents).
2 Choose Edit > Check Out and Edit Document, or context-click and choose
this command.
3 After editing, check in the documents or pages using the Apogee plug-in in
Acrobat.
 To copy documents to another job

4 Select one or more documents in the Page Store.
5 Drag the document(s) to another job in the Job List.
You can copy a document, or a folder of documents from one job to another
job, to a Hot Ticket, or to the file system (Finder or Explorer). You can also
copy documents from and to a Public Page Store.
NOTE: You can only copy a complete document.

Working with the The Run List displays the pages that have been selected from the Page Store, and
that will be included in your job. A page in the Run List shows similar informa-
Run List tion to the same page in the Page Store. The page name is the document name
as displayed in the Page Store, followed by the page number. Placeholders and
blank pages do not have a name.
NOTE: If you are working with a versioning job, the layout of the Run List is
page 228.
 To add pages to a Run List

1 Locate the pages in the Page Store, as described in “To display pages in the
Pages tab” on page 214.
2 Select the document and/or pages you want to add.
Pages that are not placed in the Run List have a green background.
For information on selecting several contiguous or non-contiguous pages,

see “To select or de-select multiple jobs or items” on page 195.
3 Drag the documents and/or pages from the Page Store to the desired position
in the Run List.
TIP: Press E to select even The status icon in the Job List indicates that the Run List is being edited:
placeholders and press O to
select odd placeholders
while dragging pages to the While you are editing the Run List, Apogee locks it to prevent other users
Run List. from trying to edit it at the same time.
Pages that are placed in the Run List now have a gray background.
After adding pages to the Run List, you need to submit your changes (see “To
submit a ticket” on page 350). Other Clients will not see the newly added pages
until they have been submitted.
NOTE: If a page is to be added to the Run List, but fails before it reaches the Run
List Task Processor (e.g. in the Normalizer), then it will not appear in the Run
List. Instead, it will be marked as being in error in the Page Store. You will be
alerted of this by a notification.

5 MANAGING JOBS 219
 To select all, even, odd, or empty placeholders

1 Open the Run List, as described in “To display pages in the Pages tab” on
page 214.
2 Context-click on a page in the Run List.
3 From the context menu, choose:
 Select > All: to select all pages in the Run List.
 Select > Even Positions: to select all even numbered pages in the Run
List.
 Select > Odd Positions: to select all odd numbered pages in the Run List.
 Select > Empty Positions: to select all empty placeholders in the Run List.
These options are useful for quickly setting up different page imposition
settings for odd and even pages in a job.
 To move pages around within the Run List

1 Edit a job, and select the Pages tab.
2 Select the page you would like to move in the Run List, drag it to an empty
placeholder, and release the mouse button.
The page is moved to the new position.
You cannot simply drop the page on top of another page, or on a blank page.
If you want to do this, see “To move-replace pages within the Run List” on
page 220.
NOTE: Take care to ensure that any changes you make do not conflict with your
imposition layout.
 To move-insert pages within the Run List

2 Select the page you would like to move-insert and, while holding down the
ALT key, drag it to another position in the Run List, and release the mouse
button.
The page is removed from its original location and inserted at the selected
position in the Run List.

imposition layout.
 To move-replace pages within the Run List

2 Select the page you would like to move and, while holding down the Shift key
, drag it to another position in the Run List, and release the mouse button.
If you drop the page on an empty placeholder, the placeholder is filled. If you
drop the page on top of another page or a blank page, the page is replaced.
The original page position becomes an empty placeholder.
imposition layout.
 To duplicate pages within the Run List

2 Select the page you would like to copy and, while holding down the CTRL
key, drag it to an empty placeholder in the Run List, and release the mouse
button.
The page is duplicated in the new position.
You cannot simply duplicate the page on top of another page, or on a blank
page. If you want to do this, see “To duplicate-replace pages within the Run
imposition layout.
 To duplicate-insert pages within the Run List


5 MANAGING JOBS 221
2 Select the page you would like to duplicate-insert and, while holding down
the ALT-CRTL keys, drag it to another position in the Run List, and release the
mouse button.
A copy of the page is inserted at the selected position in the Run List. The Run
List is automatically extended by the inserted number of pages.
imposition layout.
 To duplicate-replace pages within the Run List

2 Select the page you would like to copy and, while holding down the Shift and
CTRL keys, drag it to another position in the Run List, and release the mouse
button.
If you drop the page on an empty placeholder, the placeholder is filled. If you
drop the page on top of another page or a blank page, the page is replaced.
imposition layout.
 Reverse the order of pages in the Run List

The page order in the Run List can be reversed while dragging them from the
Page Store or by selecting placed pages.
page 214.
2 Select the placed pages that you want to reverse and choose Edit > Reverse
Page Order, or briefly press ‘R’.
OR
3 While dragging the pages on to the Run List, briefly press ‘R’.
The order of the pages is now reversed.

 To insert blank pages in the Run List

page 214.
2 Select the placeholder(s) in the Run List that you want to fill with blank
pages.
3 Context-click on the selection, and choose Placeholder > Make Blank from
the context menu (or click the Make Blank button in the Toolbar).
The empty placeholders are replaced with blank pages.
 To fill all empty placeholders with blank pages

page 214.
If your job contains a series of empty placeholders that are spread out
throughout the Run List, you can fill them all with blank pages in one step.
2 Select all pages in the Run List.
3 Context-click on one of the highlighted pages, and choose

Placeholder > Make Blank from the context menu (or click the Make Blank
button in the Toolbar).
All the empty placeholders are replaced with blank pages.
 To jump to a position in the Run List

page 214.
2 Select the Run List pane.
3 Type the # character, followed by the placeholder position you want to jump
to.
For example, type #33.
4 The selected Run List placeholder position is displayed.
 Add a page comment in the Run List
 Click in the Comments column on the row of a page or placeholder in the Run
List, and type your comment.
The comment is displayed as text in the column or as a balloon icon if the

column width is minimized; hover over the balloon icon to see the comment.

5 MANAGING JOBS 223
After submitting the job, comments are visible for all users who can see the
job in the Job List.
 To adjust page imposition in the Run List

1 Select a job which uses imposition in the Production Plan, and edit it.
2 Open the Run List.
3 To change the layout of a page, do one of the following:
 Context-click the page in the Run List, and choose Page

Adjustment > Offset By...

Adjustment > Scale By...

Adjustment > Rotate By...
4 Make your changes as described in “Imposition Adjustment” on page 224.
Any pages that you modify in this way are flagged in the Run List with the
following icon:
By default, Apogee shows the simple page adjustment view. However, you
can select View > Extended Page Adjustments to switch the view. For more
information, refer to “Run List Page Adjustment Icons” on page 180.
5 Submit the job to save your page adjustments.
You can also access all imposition options in a single dialog box. To do this, you
must first edit the page, and then context-click it and choose Page
Adjustments > Edit from the context menu.

NOTE: The Page Adjustments dialog box displays the cumulative page
adjustments you have made, unlike the individual offset, scaling, and rotating
dialog boxes, which do not indicate any previously applied adjustments.
For example: if you set a 4 mm offset on a certain page and then select Page
Adjustments > Edit, you will see that there is an offset of 4 mm for that page. If
you add a second 4 mm offset for this page and again select Page
Adjustments > Edit, you will see that there is a cumulative offset of 8 mm.
Imposition Adjustment
You can change the imposition of any page in the Run List by context-clicking the
page and choosing Page Adjustments > Edit from the context menu.
NOTE: The adjustments displayed in this dialog box are the cumulative results of
all adjustments you have done on the selected page.
Offset
You can center a page, offset a page from the origin (lower left), or offset a page
from the center.
Center Centers the page in the placeholder along the chosen axis (horizontal or
vertical). The Center check box reflects the current center state; it is selected if
the page was previously centered (regardless of the offset), and deselected if
not.

5 MANAGING JOBS 225
When you change the state of the Center option, the offset command sets the
absolute position instead of adding to the previous one. In other words, the
existing offset is reset, and the values of Center and Offset by are applied instead.
In this case, the dialog box may display a warning: Changing the centering will
reset the previously applied positioning.
NOTE: Changing the Center option on multiple pages, with a mixed Center state,
becomes more complicated: Pages whose Center option will be changed are
given an absolute offset; pages whose Center option will not be changed are
given a relative offset.
Offset by Moves the page along the chosen axis (horizontal or vertical). Positive values
move the page to the right, negative values move the page to the left. The default
value is 0, meaning that no extra offset will take place.
Scale
You can reduce or enlarge the scale of a page within the imposition layout.
Horizontal To scale the page on the horizontal axis, select the Horizontal radio button and
enter a value in the box.
 Positive values scale the image area up by the specified percentage towards
the right of the page.
 Negative values scale the image area down by the specified percentage
towards the left of the page.
 Click the Scaled to fit radio button to scale the horizontal page size up to the
template page size.
Vertical To scale the page on the vertical axis, select the Vertical radio button and enter
a value in the box.
 Positive values scale the image area up by the specified percentage towards
the top of the page.
 Negative values scale the image area down by the specified percentage
towards the bottom of the page.
 Click the Scaled to fit radio button to scale the vertical page size up to the
template page size.
Retain original aspect ratio Select this check box if despite all changes you want the image to keep its
original aspect ratio.

Rotation
To rotate the page, click the Rotation list, and select one of the page rotation
options:
 None
 90°
 180°
 270°
NOTE: If you make any changes, you need to submit the job to save them (see
“Submitting Tickets” on page 350).
Create Versions If you are working with a versioning job you can start the Create Versions assis-
tant in the Page Store. This assistant helps you set up your versioning job based
Assistant in the on the documents available in the Page Store.
Page Store
NOTE: The Create Versions assistant can also be opened in the Versions tab of the
Versioning Task Processor in the production plan.
 Context-click a file, page, PDF layer or folder in the Page Store and choose
Create Versions to open the Create Versions assistant.
Create versions
In this drop-down list you can choose how you want to create your versions.
 From files (n files): a version is created for each file in the Page Store.
 From pages (n pages): a version is created for each page in the Page Store;
each version is named Version 1, Version 2, to Version n.
 From PDF layers (n layers): a version is created for each layer in the
document
 From sub-folders (n folders): a version is created for each folder in the

Page Store

5 MANAGING JOBS 227
 Manually: choose this option if you want to set up your versions from
scratch; enter the number of versions you want in the ‘Number of
versions’ box.
NOTE: Depending on what you selected in the Job Store (a file, page, PDF layer
or folder) one of the first four options is selected automatically. The options
displayed in the drop-down list depend on the structure of the Page Store.
Name convention
In this field you can control the creation of the versions in two ways (all modes
except manual):
 select items that match the name convention and move those that don’t
match from the Versions column to the Ignored Items column
 extract part of the item name for use as the version name
This matching system uses file name templates with wildcard characters and the
following 2 variables:
 <VERSION>: extracts the version base name from the item name
e.g. a name convention Brochure_<VERSION> will create a Version Name
French from a file name Brochure_French
 <VERSIONINDEX>: extracts the version number from the item name
If these variables are not used, the version name is the item name (or part of it)
with an assigned version number.
Versions and Ignored Items

The Versions pane lists all the versions created by the assistant in accordance
with the option chosen in the ‘Create versions’ drop-down list and the filtering
applied with the name convention. If no filtering is applied, a version is made for
every file, page, PDF layer or sub-folder, and the versions will be organized in the
Run List according to this list.
You can rearrange the versions in the list using the buttons on the left and you
can choose to ignore versions in the list by moving them to the Ignore items list
on the right. Items can be moved back to the versions list and the versions are re-
numbered. You can use the Reset button to re-apply the naming convention.
Set up Run List Layers These are some extra options for correctly setting up run list layers. Select this
option to create a run list layer based only on the version.

 Include a column for common content: a run list layer called Common for the
full page range is created
 Limit version-specific content to a range of pages: select this check box if you
want to specify a run list range for the version-specific run list layer. You can
select default page ranges from the drop-down list.
Jump to versioning task Select this check box if you want to continue setting up the Versioning task
processor when done processor when you have finished using the assistant.
Versioning Jobs in If you are working with a versioning job, the layout of the Run List is consider-
ably different.
the Run List
The Run List has one group of columns for each layer added in the Page
Assembly setup (Versioning Task Processor settings). Each column group has
one column for each possible variation of the layer. To make a page for a version,
Apogee combines the contents of one layer variation from each column group.
Each different version combines the content from different layer variations. By
default, you will see all the columns that contribute to all versions.
Overview - All Versions

The example below has two layers: one for background graphics and one for
text. The layer for text has four variations - Default, English, French and
German.
The columns - referred to as Run List Layers (RLLs) - contain all possible varia-
tions which can be used to produce the different page versions. For each page,
you will see an associated page number and signature.

5 MANAGING JOBS 229
Versions
The versions are defined in the job’s Production Plan, allowing you to create jobs
which contain several different versions for some or all of the text (for example,
using different languages as illustrated above).
Run List Layers (RLLs)

The RLLs are defined in the job’s Production Plan, and are used to add extra
dimensions to the specified versions. For example, you can use RLLs to break
down each language version into two parts: The CMY ‘background’ color separa-
tions which are common to all versions, and the black ‘text’ separation which is
different for each version.
In the example above, there are two RLL columns: The first RLL is labeled
‘Background’; the second RLL is labeled ‘Text’.
Version selection list

By clicking the All list at the top right of the Run List, you can display the Version
selection list.
Each version is automatically assigned a specific version number (V1, V2, etc.)
and color code for easy identification. Here, you can select a specific version, in
order to display only the pages that contribute to this version.
These shortcuts are available in the plate set-up tab of the Versioning task
processor in the Plan tab.
To... Press (Windows)

Switch to a next version, or the first one if CTRL + ]
on àll versions'. Does not
wrap around, and does not select àll ver-
sions' if on the last version.
Switch to a previous version, or the last CTRL + [
one if on àll versions'. Does not
sions' if on the first version.
Show all versions. CTRL + \


To select/clear identical plates of all Alt + click a plate
selected version rows.
To set every version in the selected rows Alt + select a specific
to a specific version. version in the Version
list
To set every version in the selected rows Alt + select Own Version
to its own version. at the top of the Version
list
Expand a selection. Shift
Exclude from a selection. CTRL
Clear a selection. CTRL + Shift + A
Apogee makes a version page by combining the contributing pages you see in
one row.
Page and Version Indicators

Each page may contribute to a side in one or more versions. To the left of the
page icon, you will see a small vertical bar called the plate set indicator. This
indicates if the page is contributing to sides for which plates will be made.

5 MANAGING JOBS 231
A full bar indicates that one or more of the side versions to which this page contributes will
have a full set of plates made.
A half full bar indicates that one or more of the side versions to which this page contributes
will have a partial set of plates made.
An empty bar indicates that none of the side versions to which this page contributes will have
any plates made.
In the Page Store, the names and page numbers of placed pages are displayed in
gray: Unplaced page names and numbers are displayed in black. As soon as one
page or even one PDF layer from a document is placed, the document name is
also displayed in gray. A document name displayed in black indicates that none
of its pages are placed.
NOTE: Folders names never indicate placed/unplaced status. They always

appear in black.
Flowing Pages in Versioning jobs

Placing pages for versioning jobs is facilitated by the ability to flow version pages
horizontally in the run list. For example, 20 versioning pages can be dragged
onto a single page in the run list to fill it with different versioning content.
Zooming into the Run List

For versioning jobs you can zoom into the Run List pane and make the labels
wider or narrower.

 Press the CTRL key and use the scroll wheel, or the plus and minus keys to
zoom in and out
OR
Choose View > Scale and select one of the scaling commands.
Multi-part Jobs in If you are working with a multi-part job, the layout of the Run List is considerably
different. In the Run List header you will see the parts filter. This allows you to
the Run List refine the view to the pages of a single part only, and each part is color-coded.
NOTE: You cannot select multiple parts for viewing: Your choice is either all or
one.
NOTE: If there are a lot of If there is only one part (the default part), the parts filter is hidden and there is
parts, the part names are no color-coding: The job therefore looks like a simple job.
abbreviated, or the buttons
may be replaced by a drop- Any inserts that need to be produced by the job do not interrupt the page
down list. numbering of the main content. Inserts have their own page numbering, which
is clearly distinguishable from the main content.

5 MANAGING JOBS 233
Placing Pages in Multi-part jobs
The filtering or sorting of the Run List does not affect the way you place pages in
it. The rule is the same in all cases: pages are placed consecutively, and there
must be sufficient placeholders:
 If the Run List is in normal view mode, you add pages as usual. Multiple pages
are placed on consecutive placeholders, regardless of parts, except those that
have independent numbering.
 If the Run list is filtered on a single part. The positions of the part are treated
as being consecutive. The boundaries of the Run List are set by the number of
pages in the part - you cannot add more pages than there are positions in the
part.

234 WORKING WITH JOBS IN THE RESULTS TAB
Working with Jobs in the Results Tab

The Results tab allows you to preview the results of the selected job, and monitor
any ongoing activity in the job’s Production Plan:
 “Changing Viewing Options” on page 234
 “Re-rendering Results” on page 236
 “Re-imaging Results” on page 237
 “Re-exporting Results” on page 238
 “Remaking InkDrive Files” on page 239
 “Re-printing Results” on page 239
 “Viewing Job Results in the Results Tab” on page 240
 “Rejecting Results” on page 241
 “Discarding Results” on page 242
 “Including Results” on page 243
 “Getting Information on PDF Data” on page 243
 “Info Window (for PDF Files)” on page 246
 “Info Window (for RGB/TIFF or Raster Files)” on page 248
 “Versioning Jobs in the Results Tab” on page 249
 “Multi-part Jobs in the Results Tab” on page 253
Changing Viewing By default, all the available viewing options are selected. However, you can
always disable or re-enable specific viewing options from the Jobs window.
Options
 To show/hide thumbnails

5 MANAGING JOBS 235
4 Choose View > Thumbnails to toggle thumbnails on or off for the results
displayed in the Job Layout pane.
TIP: Results are displayed When thumbnails are turned on, you will see a miniature image of how the
faster when thumbnails are selected results will look when printed. When thumbnails are turned off, you
turned off. will see only a colored background instead of the image.
 To show/hide extra information

4 Choose View > Show, and set your Extra display options by toggling on or off
any of the following:
 Page Number: Shows the position of the page in the Run List.
 Hold States: Shows pages or flats in blue when on hold.
5 Choose View > Extras.
This acts as a “master switch”, to toggle all your selected Extra display
options on or off.
 To select front and back sides

2 In the Job List, select a job which uses imposition in the Production Plan.
4 Choose View > Columns > Front and Back.
All the page signatures are displayed (the front and back of each page or flat).

 To scale the Results view

4 Choose View > Scale, and select one of the following:
 Small: Provides the smallest thumbnail visualization of the selected

results.
 Normal: Provides the standard thumbnail visualization of the selected

results.
 Large: Provides the most detailed thumbnail visualization of the selected

results.
 Fit to Window: All selected thumbnail viewing options are displayed,

scaled within the limits of the Job Layout pane. The results may be small,
but you will not need to scroll to view them all.
 To show/hide separations
2 Select a separated job in the Job List.
4 Select a page or flat in the Job Layout pane.
The individual separations which combine to make up this item are displayed
in the Separations pane. Each separation represents a different color.
NOTE: Separations are not available for composite jobs.
Re-rendering You can re-render individually selected results (non-imposed flats, pages, or
separations). When you do so, only the results of the selected pages or flats are
Results remade - not the entire job.
You may want to re-render results if you have changed your resources (new
fonts, color books, etc.). This is also useful if you want to remake aborted results,
or remake output when the raster data (Digital Film) is no longer available.

5 MANAGING JOBS 237
NOTE: You can also re-render the output when the raster data is still available.
To re-render job results, the job must still have the original input documents (i.e.
Keep Results Action on the input channel).
What is the difference between Re-rendering and Re-imaging results?
When you select Re-render, Apogee will re-render and output the selected job
results. When you select Re-image, Apogee will not render the results again: It
will simply output the existing raster data to the selected output device. Re-
rendering therefore completely regenerates the selected job results, but takes
more time and uses more resources.
 To re-render results
3 In the Job Layout or Separations pane, select a flat, page, or separation that
has already been successfully processed.
4 Choose Control > Re-render <item>.
TIP: This is different from All scheduled and active tasks after the selected point in the flow are aborted,
editing a job, where existing and re-rendering is started. Any archives that were made on the first pass will
results are not affected by be remade, and the old archives deleted.
any changes you make.
 To re-render backgrounds (Apogee DQS)

3 In the Job Layout or Separations pane, select a flat that has already been
successfully processed using Apogee DQS.
4 Choose Control > Re-render backgrounds.
Re-imaging Results Re-imaging is used to remake previously imaged raster data (Digital Film). This
feature is available only for flows that have an imaging output device, and that
have kept the finished raster data using the Keep Results Action.

What is the difference between Re-rendering and Re-imaging results?
When you select Re-render, Apogee will re-render and output the selected job
results. When you select Re-image, Apogee will not render the results again: It
will simply output the existing raster data to the selected output device. Re-
imaging is therefore quicker and uses fewer resources.
 To re-image results
has already been successfully processed, and which has kept the finished
raster data.
4 Choose Control > Re-image, or click the Re-image button in the Toolbar.
The selected items are automatically re-imaged, ignoring any proofing or

After Hours actions. In fact, no manual intervention is required since in most
cases you want to re-image a plate as soon as possible.
If you re-image a job, Apogee re-images only the results of the main flow. If you
want to re-image the results of another flow, you must select those results before
re-imaging.
Re-exporting You may want to re-export previously exported results if resources have
changed, or when exported files have to be recreated.
Results
 To re-export results
has already been successfully exported, and which has kept the finished
raster data.
4 Choose Control > Re-export.
The selected items are re-exported.

5 MANAGING JOBS 239
Remaking InkDrive Apogee allows you to remake InkDrive files for selected flats, pages, or separa-
tions. This may be necessary if the files are accidentally deleted or lost on the
Files press side.
NOTE: The InkDrive license must be available, otherwise this option is disabled.
Also, you can only remake InkDrive files when all selected results have the
InkDrive data available.
 To remake InkDrive files

3 In the Job Layout or Separations pane, context-click a flat, page, or separa-

tion that has already been successfully processed, and which has kept the
finished raster data.
4 Choose Remake InkDrive for <item> from the context menu.
Apogee sends the InkDrive file(s) for the selected results to the assigned
location.
If you selected flats, Apogee creates an InkDrive file per flat; If you selected
separations, an InkDrive file is created per separation. The names of the
created InkDrive files are based on the default file name template that
matches your selection: flats or separations.
NOTE: If you select separations in a multi-version job, Apogee creates

InkDrive files for all selected separations.
Re-printing Results Re-printing is similar to Re-imaging, but is used specifically to print previously
imaged raster data (Digital Film) on a digital press. This feature is available only
for flows that have a digital press, and that have kept the finished raster data
(using the Keep Results Action on the last processing Task Processor).
 To re-print results
has already been successfully processed, and which has kept the finished
raster data.

4 Choose Control > Re-print.
The selected items are re-printed on your digital press.
Viewing Job When you view results in the Results tab view, Apogee provides a view on the
rendered output results. This is different from viewing results in the Pages tab,
Results in the where Apogee provides a view on the job’s input results.
Results Tab
 To view job results in the Results tab
NOTE: To open PDF documents, you must have already specified where your PDF
Reader application is located (see “Preferences” on page 90).
TIP: This feature is useful if 1 Select the Jobs Window.

you want to diagnose errors,
by comparing results from 2 Select a job in the Job List which has some rendered results.
different points in your 3 Select the Results tab.
Production Plan.
4 You can do either of the following:
 Context-click a page or flat in the Job Layout pane, and select View Page/
Flat From.
 Context-click a separation in the Separations pane, and select View

Separation From.
A submenu is displayed, listing the results which are still available at various
stages in your Production plan. Provided you attached a Keep Results Action
to your output device, you can view the latest rendered results. If any of the
earlier Task Processors in the flow have Keep Results Actions attached to
them, you can also choose to view these instead.
5 Select the results you want to view.
Apogee automatically starts the viewing application that supports the

selected document type. This is either:
 A PDF Reader for PDF documents.
 Raster Preview for documents which have already been rendered (Digital
Film).
If you select a document, the viewing application displays the first page of the
selected document. The page or document is opened in read-only mode.

5 MANAGING JOBS 241
NOTE: You can also simply double-click a page or document to display the last
available result in your Production Plan.
Rejecting Results There are two reasons why you would want to reject results:
 The content of the page/flat is wrong (incorrect information or typograph-

ical mistakes).
 The processing is wrong (incorrect screening, traps are too small, etc.). In
this case, you can only reject results that are waiting on an Action that
requires manual intervention (such as proofing or “collect for output”).
In both cases, in order to correct the problem you must re-submit the original
document to the Apogee System.
If you wish, you can later accept rejected results and continue processing using
the Continue command (see “Continuing Jobs” on page 197).
NOTE: Rejected pages are not re-rendered if you later re-render the job.
 To reject results
2 Select either the Pages or the Results tab.
3 Select a document, page, flat or separation.
4 Choose Control > Reject <item>, or click the Reject button in the Toolbar.
The Reject dialog box is displayed.
5 If you wish, add a comment explaining why you are rejecting the results.
This information can later be viewed in the Job Log.

6 Click Reject.
All processing for the selected item is aborted, and the job is marked with a
rejected status icon.
All flats that use the rejected page will be marked as rejected.
NOTE: In a multi-flow Production Plan, you can only reject the processing of a
Main or Export flow, not of a Proofer flow.
 To clear rejected results

2 Select either the Pages or the Results tab.
3 Select the rejected result(s).
4 Choose Control > Clear Rejected Status.
The rejected status is removed, and processing restarts.
Discarding Results You discard results in order to prevent specific documents, pages, flats or separa-
tions from being printed, without stopping the rest of the job from being printed.
You can discard results interactively in the Results tab, or you can add a Discard
Action to your Production Plan.
 To discard results interactively

3 Select a document, page, flat or separation.
4 Choose Control > Discard <item>.
NOTE: You can only discard results that are already output or that are waiting
to be output. You cannot discard input files, or pages in an imposition
workflow.

5 MANAGING JOBS 243
The thumbnail of the selected item is dimmed with diagonal stripes across it
and the separation icons are dimmed and barred (see below left). If you are
discarding a specific separation, only the separation icon is dimmed and
barred in the Job Layout pane (see below right). However, the individual
separation is barred in the Separations pane.
You can perform no further action on discarded results (delete, reject, etc.)
until they are ‘included’ once more in the job.
Including Results You can ‘include’ discarded results in order to remove their discarded status, and
to make the selected results part of the job again. Any status that the results had
before they were discarded is once again taken into account (e.g., on hold, in
error, etc.).
 To include results
3 Select a document, page, flat or separation that has been discarded.
The thumbnail of the selected item is dimmed with diagonal stripes across it.
4 Choose Control > Include <item>.
The thumbnail returns to normal, and the selected item is once more part of
the job.
Getting Information Get Info is a command that displays extensive information about a selected item
(a page, a flat, or a job). The Info window uses an extensible mechanism to
on PDF Data organize and display the attributes of the selected item(s).
 If you select one or more documents in the Page Store (Pages tab), one Info
window is displayed per selected document. Each window describes a single
document and it’s page details.
 If you select one or more pages from a document, a single Info window is
displayed, describing the document and the selected page details.

 If you select one or more pages from the Run List, a single Info window is
displayed, describing the origins of the selected pages and the page details.
 If you select a single flat in the Results tab, a single Info window is displayed,
describing the flat and the details of its pages.
 If you select multiple flats, one Info window is displayed per flat.
 To get info on an item

1 Select one or more items in the Pages tab or the Results tab.
These may be documents, pages, flats, or jobs.
2 Context-click a page or flat in the Job Layout pane, and select Info for
<item> From.
A submenu is displayed, listing the results which are available at various

stages in your Production plan.
TIP: This feature is useful if For example:

you want to view info on
results from different points
in your Production Plan.
3 Select the results you want to view information on.
4 You can also click the Info tool for information on the Latest results.
The Info dialog box is displayed. The content of the dialog box depends on
the selected item(s):
 If you choose to view result information from the Hot Folder or Normalize
Task Processors, you will see information on the PDF results (see “Info
Window (for PDF Files)” on page 246).

5 MANAGING JOBS 245
 If you choose to view result information from the Render Task Processor,
you will see information on the TIFF results (see “Info Window (for RGB/
TIFF or Raster Files)” on page 248).
NOTE: You can get information on a selection containing multiple items, if the
items are of the same type. You cannot select multiple items of different types.
For example, you can get information on several files in the Page Store, but not
on a file and a page.

Info Window (for PDF Files)
The Info window has a number of tabs which provide information on any PDF
item you select.
General
The first section displays the name, title and author of the selected item, as well
as the date it was created and the name of the person who created it.
The second section indicates how the document was received and converted into
an acceptable working format (PDF or TIFF).
Producer The name and version of the Task Processor that converted the document into
an acceptable format (e.g. the Normalizer).
Page Store The path name of the document in the Page Store. You can context-click the field
label or path name to reveal the physical location of the file. The label then
changes to “Location”. If the document is stored as multiple files (e.g. split PDF,
DCS, etc.), only the common part of the file name is shown. context-click again
to display the Page Store location.
Size The physical size of the document on disk.
Nr of Pages The number of independent pages in the document. The word “Split” appears
when the document is stored as a single, independent file per page (this is one of
the Normalize Settings).
NOTE: Apogee displays a status icon if the document has any outstanding
warnings or errors. Clicking the icon opens the job's problem report, filtered to
show the current document's notifications.
The third section details modifications (if any) which may have been made to
the document:
Format The name and version of the document’s format (e.g. Composite, PDF 1.5). This
can either be the format it was converted to, or the original format of the
document if this was already acceptable. Some format details may also be listed
here.
Dimensions
This tab provides detailed information on the width and height of the selected
pages.

5 MANAGING JOBS 247
The first section lists all pages in the document, and a summary of the most
important box dimensions:
Page Indicates the standard page size.
Trim Box Indicates the trimmed page size (the size of the paper in the desktop printer; the
size of the pages after folding/binding and cutting in a production house).
Bleed Box Indicates the bleed area specified in the layout application, or in the PostScript
to PDF converter.
Crop Box Indicates the page size in Acrobat, and is also the default view (when this PDF
file is opened).
The second section displays additional box size information on the page selected
in the first section.
Art Box Used to select an area of the page, such as clipping path, which you can import
into another application.
Media Box Contains all the other boxes, and is always the largest box.
Resources
The resource tab features a page list, resource category list, and a resource list in
the top section, and a Resource Details pane in the lower section.
Page Lists the page(s) selected.
Category Lists all resource categories available for the selected page(s). A number after
the category name shows how many resources of that category exist for the
item(s) selected. If there are no resources for a given category, no number is
shown.
Resource Lists all resources available for the selected page(s) and category, sorted by
category name and resource name or occurrence.
Resource: Displays the name of the resource. Unnamed resources are given a
name by concatenating the resource category and an occurrence number.
Position: Shows the positions in the Run List where each resource appears. It is
empty if the resource is not used in the job.
Attributes: Displays a textual summary of the most important attributes of the

resource.

Selected Resource details The attributes of the selected resource are displayed in the lower section of the
Resources tab.
Refer to “Task Processor Resources” on page 869 for details on the different
resources and their attributes.
Info Window (for RGB/TIFF or Raster Files)
The Info window provides the following information on your RGB/TIFF or raster
results.
Kind Provides the following information about the selected image type:
 Monochrome
 Grey
 RGB
Channels May indicate which color channels are available in the selected image:
 R, G, B
 C, M, Y, K
Physical Dimensions Width and height of the selected item, in the selected display units specified in
your Preferences (mms or inches).
Dimensions Width and height of the selected item, in pixels.
Resolution Width and height of the selected item, in pixels-per-inch.
Rows/Strip Number of rows per strip.
Compression The type of image compression used, if any:
 ASWC
 CCIT
 PackBits
 Group 3 Fax
 Group 3 Fax

5 MANAGING JOBS 249
 JPEG
 LZW
 None
Orientation The orientation of the selected file:
 Up
 Down
 Right
 Left
# Separation number.
Separation Separation name.
Versioning Jobs in If you are working with a versioning job, the layout of the Results tab is consid-
erably different. There are far more signatures (one set per version) than in a
the Results Tab conventional job, so viewing them together is impractical. Apogee therefore
presents an overview of all signatures, from which you can switch to a view of
the signatures of any single version.
The versions are defined in the job’s Production Plan, allowing you to create jobs
which contain several different versions for some or all of the text (for example,
using different languages). Each version is automatically assigned a specific
version number (V1, V2, etc.) and color code for easy identification.

Overview - All Versions

Figure 5.3: Version matrix (single-version press sheets)
In the Results overview, Apogee displays all signatures together in a matrix,

organized by signature number across and by version down. Version titles are
displayed on the left, signature numbers above and plate counts for each version
on the right. If there are too many signatures and/or versions to fit in the display
area, the signatures, titles and plate counts scroll in the manner of a spreadsheet,
while the appropriate titles and plate counts remain visible.
Signature status icons

In each signature area in the matrix, Apogee displays a rectangle for each side of
the signature for which one or more plates will be made according to the plate
setup. Apogee omits sides for which where no plates will be made. The sides are
arranged in front and back pairs where appropriate and with one pair per web
when necessary.
The following version states may be displayed:

5 MANAGING JOBS 251
Full bar at the side of the box: A full set of plates will be made for this side.
Half bar at the side of the box: A partial set of plates will be made for this version.
One or more version pages used by the side is not yet available (empty placeholder).
The background and all version pages used by the side are available, but the render
data for the whole side is not yet complete.
All render data for the side is available, but not all plates have yet been produced.
Finished state: All plates for the side have been produced.
Error state: Processing of this side has been stopped by an error.
On Hold state: Processing of this side is waiting at a hold point.
This side or one of its separations or pages has been rejected.
This side has been discarded and will not be processed further.
If you double-click on a side, the selected results are displayed in Raster Preview
(if the raster data is available).
Version titles
To the left of each row of signatures, Apogee displays a version title next to the
version number. For single-version sheets (i.e. each version is assigned to its
own press sheet), the original product version title is used. If the versioning job
has multiple product versions on a press sheet, the sheet version title is
displayed, for example, PS 1-SV2, and not the product version title. See “Version
Setup Dialog Box” on page 778 for more information on multiple product
versions on a press sheet.

Figure 5.4: Version indication for multiple product versions on a single press sheet (multiple-
version sheets)
The version title indicates the signature status:
 If any side is in error, the version title background is displayed in red.
 If any side is on hold (and none are in error), the version title background is
displayed in blue.
 If all the sides are either ready to be printed, or have already been printed,
then the version name is displayed in bold.
If you double-click a version title, Apogee displays the signatures of the selected
product version or press sheet version.
Signature titles
Above each column of signatures, Apogee displays a signature title (the number
of the signature). The signature title indicates any error or hold states among the
sides in its column in the same way as a version title.
If you double-click on a signature title, Apogee displays the sides in that signa-
ture in Raster Preview.
Plate count summaries

To the right of each row of signatures, Apogee displays a plate count summary.
This indicates the number of plates made so far, and the total to be made.
Clicking on the plate count summary has the same effect as clicking on a version
title.

5 MANAGING JOBS 253
Apogee estimates the number of plates to be made for a version from the infor-
mation you enter in the plate setup.
Version selection list
Open the version selection list to display the results for a particular product
version. The process color plates for the selected version are specified along the
top right edge of the thumbnail using the same color code for the version
indicator.
For press sheets containing multiple product versions (multiple-version sheets),

you will see a sheet version indicator on a gray background.
Multi-part Jobs in If you are working with a multi-part job, the layout of the Results tab is consid-
erably different.
the Results Tab

The Job-Context Selector
Multi-part jobs include a job-context selector in the Activity pane. This allows
you to select the different contexts in the results tab - flows, versions and produc-
tion sets. This also includes a production set selector.
The version and production set controls in the job-context selector have a drop-
down menu that allows you to display a list of versions and production sets.
These lists have an additional All item which shows all results in that level.
The flow control has no list. Instead, it shows the different flows as icons (plus
the name of the flow). Click on an icon to select the flow results you want to
view. You cannot select multiple flows.
To the right of the job-context selector, you will see a textual description of the
number of results (usually plates) in the selected job context and how many of
those are finished. If you select a signature, you will also see the selected item
name and the number of plates that are included.
Production Sets Table
The Results tab also includes a Production Sets table, similar to the one in the
Plan tab. This table lists the names of the production sets, the engines and
presses that are being used, the sheet ranges and plate counts and the part(s)
contained in each. The table also indicates the status per production set (idle,
waiting, error, finished, etc.).
The Production Sets table allows you to filter the results view to the sheets of one
or more production sets, regardless of the number of devices and/or presses that
are used to make it. You can CTRL-click to select multiple items.

5 MANAGING JOBS 255
NOTE: If you continue any of the results, Apogee will continue only what you
have selected, regardless of the grouping of the Collect for Output action.
Display Icons
You can hide the Production Sets table independently from the Activity Pane,
using the buttons in the top right corner of the Results tab.
 Click the first of these icons to show/hide the Activity pane.
 Click the second of these icons to show/hide the Production Sets table.
 Click the third icon to show/hide the Separations pane.
Single-part and Existing Jobs
When you create a single-part job, Apogee creates one part and one production
set (the default part and production set). You can simply ignore the Products
tab, and set up your job as usual. If you upgrade from previous versions of
Apogee, all jobs, Hot Tickets and Ticket Templates have a single part and
production set added. If you wish, you can hide complexity in single-part jobs by
collapsing the views.

256 QUICKPROOFING PAGES
QuickProofing Pages
QuickProofing is a method of proofing one or more documents or pages from a
job without having to edit the Production Plan of the job. You can do this by
selecting the items you want to proof (a document, page, or multiple documents
or pages) and dragging them to a proofer icon in the Output Device panel. You
can use all proofing devices (real and file-based) for QuickProofing, and you can
drag pages/documents from the Page Store, Run List, or Results tab.
You can QuickProof:
 PDF documents and pages.
 Raster documents (representing pages or flats) that are compatible with the
Digital Film Proofer Task Processor (1-bit and 8-bit, composite or pre-
separated).
The resulting QuickProof job is no different from any other, user-created job.
However, the job is automatically deleted after the proof has been generated.
 To QuickProof one or more pages/documents

2 Select a job, and then select the Pages or Results tab.
3 Select the pages or documents you want to QuickProof.
This may be in the Page Store, Run List or Results tab.
4 Drag the selected item(s) to the Output Device pane, and drop them on a
proofing device.
The proofer icon is highlighted if it accepts the page, and the QuickProof
dialog box is displayed.
5 Select the Image and Output parameter sets you want to use, and click the
QuickProof button.

5 MANAGING JOBS 257
The selected items are sent to the proofer. Apogee creates a new QuickProof
job with the same order number as the source job and with normal priority.
You will see the new job appear briefly in the Job List with a green activity
icon. The selected proofer will also turn green, indicating that it is busy
processing the job.
When the proof has been completed, the job is automatically removed from
the Job List. You can then collect your proof from the selected proofing
device.
NOTE: You can only QuickProof PDF and raster documents. You cannot
QuickProof PostScript documents, PDF layers (versioning), separations, or a
mixture of different formats.

258 QUICKPROOFING PAGES

CHAPTER
6 Managing Hot Tickets

This section describes how you manage your Hot Tickets.
 The Hot Ticket Manager ...................................................................................

 The Hot Ticket List ..............................................................................................
260
261
 Hot Ticket List Layout ................................................................................ 261
 Hot Ticket Icons ........................................................................................... 262
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Administration Tab .............................................. 263
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Options Tab ............................................................ 264
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Products Tab .......................................................... 265
 Viewing the Hot Ticket Plan Tab ................................................................... 266
 Production Plan Pane (Hot Tickets) ...................................................... 266
 Settings Pane (Hot Tickets) ..................................................................... 266
 Working with Hot Tickets ................................................................................ 268
 Selecting Hot Tickets ................................................................................. 268
 Duplicating a Hot Ticket ........................................................................... 268
 Deleting a Hot Ticket ................................................................................. 269
 Creating a PPD for a Hot Ticket ............................................................. 269
 Checking Hot Ticket and Ticket Template Consistency ............... 270
 Fully Automated Imposition .................................................................... 271
 Wide Format Hot Tickets .................................................................................. 273
 Collecting Hot Tickets ....................................................................................... 276
259
260 THE HOT TICKET MANAGER
The Hot Ticket Manager

The Hot Ticket Manager can be opened from any of the main windows in the
Apogee Client by clicking Hot Tickets in the Apogee Taskbar. This is where you
will monitor, view, and manage the Hot Tickets that you create.
The main window is divided into 3 panes:
 The Output Device List: On the left side of the window, you will see a list of
currently configured output devices (e.g., Avantra25, Export, etc.).
 The Hot Ticket List: Next to the Output Device List, you will see the Hot
Ticket List. This List displays the status of all Hot Tickets that have been
submitted to the Apogee System. For more information, see “What Are Hot
Tickets?” on page 43.
 Collecting Tickets List: See “Collecting Hot Tickets” on page 276.
 Filters: Above the Hot Ticket List, you can enter filter criteria directly into the
Quick Filter box. Below the Output Device List, you have custom job filters for
filtering the Hot Ticket List based on a variety of criteria.
 Selected Hot Ticket details: The large pane on the right side of the window
displays information on the selected Hot Ticket. This information is arranged
into three tabs:
 The Administration tab (see “Viewing the Hot Ticket Administration Tab”
on page 263).
 The Options tab (see “Viewing the Hot Ticket Options Tab” on page 264)
 The Products tab (see “Viewing the Hot Ticket Products Tab” on
page 265)
 The Plan tab (see “Viewing the Hot Ticket Plan Tab” on page 266)

6 MANAGING HOT TICKETS 261
The Hot Ticket List

The Hot Ticket List displays all the Hot Tickets that have been submitted to the
Apogee System. When you first create and submit a Hot Ticket, it will be
displayed immediately in the Hot Ticket List.
A series of icons indicate the current status of each Hot Ticket in the list. These
include Job Notification Icons, Job Status Icons, Hot Ticket Icons, and Flow
Icons. Note, however, that a Hot Ticket cannot be finished, cannot be put on
hold, and cannot be made into a rush ticket.
Hot Ticket List The Hot Ticket List is divided vertically into the following columns:
Layout  Notification: May display an icon which indicates an error, warning, or
remark.
 Status: May display one or more icons (up to 4) which indicate the current or
recent job states. These icons are sorted from the left according to priority.
You can expand the width of this column to view the lower priority icons.
 Hot Ticket column - Hot Ticket Icons: Displays an icon which indicates the
type of Hot Ticket, as well as the Hot Ticket name.
 Flows: Displays one or more icons which correspond to the number and types
of flows specified in the Ticket.
 Create Date: The dates and times when tickets were submitted. The date and
 Modified Date: The dates and times when tickets were modified. The date
and time format adapts automatically to the width of the column.
 Media: The media selected to print the job.
 Device: The device selected to print the job.
 Milestone: The due date you entered for the planning of the job.
 Company: The company name of the customer.

262 THE HOT TICKET LIST
These details are displayed for each Hot Ticket in their respective column. These
columns can be sorted, rearranged, hidden or grouped just like the Job List. You
can also filter hot tickets. Refer to the following sections:
 “Organizing the Job List” on page 144.
 “Filtering the Job List” on page 146
If you want to see the jobs that have been created using these Hot Tickets, click
Jobs in the Apogee Taskbar to switch to the Job Manager window.
Hot Ticket Icons Apogee displays the following icons in the Hot Ticket column.
Commercial Hot Ticket.
Commercial Hot Ticket with a disabled input channel.
Job that requires set-up by Printer (WebApproval jobs only)
Collecting Hot Tickets (tickets grouped in separate panel)

Viewing the Hot Ticket Administration Tab

to associate specific Production Plans with particular customers or job types.
The Hot Ticket name is displayed in the Hot Ticket List after the Ticket has been
submitted.
The information displayed is read-only. If you want to change the information in

any of the fields, you first need to context-click the Hot Ticket in the Hot Ticket
List, and select Edit from the context menu. You can also select the Hot Ticket
and click the Edit button.
For full details on each of the fields, see “Using the Administration Tab” on
page 280.

264 VIEWING THE HOT TICKET OPTIONS TAB
Viewing the Hot Ticket Options Tab

The Options tab displays information on how jobs are to be handled, including
archiving and notification settings, post-processing channel settings, etc.

For full details on each of the fields, see “Using the Options Tab” on page 284.

Viewing the Hot Ticket Products Tab

The Products tab for Hot Tickets allows you to set up fully automated imposition.
Drop a document onto a Hot Ticket and create a job whose pages are imposed,
while the product name, number of pages and page size can all be taken from the
uploaded document. This is an interesting feature that enables ‘lights-out’
printing of digital products, but fully automated imposition can also be used for
basic commercial offset jobs.
NOTE: A Hot Ticket can only have one product and the command to add products
is disabled.
For more information on the Products tab, see “Using the Products Tab” on
page 291.

266 VIEWING THE HOT TICKET PLAN TAB
Viewing the Hot Ticket Plan Tab

The Plan tab displays the selected Hot Ticket’s Production Plan, and allows you
to view the individual settings of each of the items in the Plan.

any of the fields, you first need to context-click the ticket in the Hot Ticket List,
and select Edit from the context menu. You can also select the ticket and click the
Edit button.
The Plan tab has two panes:
 Production Plan Pane (Hot Tickets)
 Settings Pane (Hot Tickets)
Pane (Hot Tickets) configured to define exactly how jobs are to be input, processed, and output.
When you select one of these components, you will see the associated settings
displayed in the lower Settings Pane (Hot Tickets).
Below the Task Processor icon, there is a drop-down list from in which you can
view the selected Parameter Set. If no Parameter Set is selected, the Task
Processor uses its factory settings.
The last Task Processor in a flow always displays the Flow ID icon at the end of
the flow. By default, this always indicates a Main Output flow.

Settings Pane (Hot The Settings pane displays the settings that were configured for the component
(Task Processor or Action) selected in the Production Plan pane.
Tickets)


268 WORKING WITH HOT TICKETS
Working with Hot Tickets

The main purpose of the Hot Ticket window is to allow you to view, and manage
the Hot Tickets that are created by the Apogee System. Much of the information
you need is displayed as icons in the Hot Tickets List. This information, together
with the four tabs of selected Hot Ticket details, gives you a full and detailed
snapshot of all existing Hot Tickets.
 “Selecting Hot Tickets” on page 268
 “Duplicating a Hot Ticket” on page 268
 “Deleting a Hot Ticket” on page 269
 “Creating a PPD for a Hot Ticket” on page 269
 “Checking Hot Ticket and Ticket Template Consistency” on page 270
Selecting Hot Hot Tickets are listed in the Hot Ticket List in alphabetical order.
Tickets
 To select a Hot Ticket
1 Select the Hot Tickets Window.
2 Click a Hot Ticket in the Hot Ticket List.
The Hot Ticket details are retrieved from the Apogee System and displayed
in the pane on the right. This information is arranged into 3 tabs - Adminis-
tration, Options, and Plan.
You can now edit the ticket as described in “Creating or Editing a Ticket” on
page 336.
 To select multiple Hot Tickets

2 Select the Hot Tickets as described in “To select or de-select multiple jobs or
items” on page 195.
Duplicating a Hot You can create a copy of a Hot Ticket as follows. This command is also available
on the Edit menu or by pressing CTRL+D.
Ticket

 To duplicate a Hot Ticket

2 Context-click the Hot Ticket that you want to duplicate in the Hot Ticket List.
3 Choose Duplicate Ticket.
A new Hot Ticket is created and the Administration tab is displayed.
4 Enter a new name and submit the Hot Ticket.
The duplicate Hot Ticket appears in the Hot Ticket List with the new name.
NOTE: If you do not change the name of the Hot Ticket, it appears greyed-out
in the list for editing at a later stage.
Deleting a Hot You can delete a Hot Ticket as follows.

Ticket
 To delete a Hot Ticket
2 Select the Hot Ticket that you want to delete in the Hot Ticket List.
3 Choose Edit > Delete Hot Ticket, or press the Delete key.
You will see the message “The hot ticket <name> will be deleted. You
cannot undo this”.
4 Click Delete.
The Hot Ticket is deleted from the Hot Ticket List.
NOTE: Only the Hot Ticket is deleted: Any jobs which have been created using
this Hot Ticket remain on the system, and can still be viewed in the Job List when
you switch to the Jobs window.
Creating a PPD for You can create a PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for a Hot Ticket,
containing all job-related information specific for your output environment. A
a Hot Ticket PPD created from a Hot Ticket allows you to select the parameter sets in the PPD.

 To create a PPD for a Hot Ticket

2 Select the Hot Ticket for which you want to create a PPD file.
3 Choose File > Export Hot Ticket PPD.
You can also directly context-click on the Hot Ticket and select Export Hot
Ticket PPD.
The PPD User Options dialog box appears.
4 Specify the necessary Format and Content options as specified in “PPD User
Options” on page 622.
5 Click OK to create the PPD file.
Checking Hot Hot Tickets and Ticket Templates store the names of the parameter sets they use,
and the values in these sets. However, if you later modify the parameter set, the
Ticket and Ticket Hot Ticket/Ticket Template is not automatically updated: It still uses the
Template original parameter set names and values.
Consistency
In many cases, you will need any such changes to be reflected in the Hot Ticket/
Ticket Template. To do this, you need to run a ‘Consistency Check’. This checks
every Ticket Template (both Jobs and Hot Tickets templates) and Hot Tickets -
in that order - for changed job resources. Any out-of-date references are listed in
a Consistency report.
You have the option to simply check if there are any discrepancies (without
making any changes), or to both check and update your Hot Tickets/Ticket
Templates.
NOTE: Consistency checking is only available to users with Administrator or

higher access level, and does not affect existing jobs.
 To check the consistency of a Hot Ticket or Ticket Template

1 From any of the Apogee main menus, choose File > Check Consistency.
The Consistency Check dialog box is displayed. By default, both the Hot
Tickets and Ticket Templates options are selected.
2 Select one or both check boxes, and then click either of the following buttons:

 Verify Only: The selected items are checked and a consistency report is
displayed in a browser window. The report lists any consistencies found
in the selected items.
 Verify and Update: The selected items are checked and a consistency
report is displayed in a browser window. The report lists any consistencies
found in the selected items, and indicates that these items have been
updated.
Fully Automated A Hot Ticket can be set up so that the newly created job takes a number of
product settings from the uploaded document and is imposed based on
Imposition predefined imposition settings. Such a ticket uses the From Input options in the
Products tab.
NOTE: This fully automated imposition can only be used for jobs consisting of one
product. Only one document can be uploaded to the Hot Ticket.
 Create a From Input Hot Ticket

1 Create your Hot Ticket as explained in Creating and Editing Tickets on
page 277.
2 In the Products tab, make sure the following are enabled:
 Product Type > Number of Pages: select the From Input check box.
 Default Part > Page Size: choose <From Input> in the top of the drop-
down list.
The Auto Impose button changes to Set Up Auto Impose.
3 Click the Set Up Auto Impose button and specify the settings in the Auto
Impose window.
4 Click OK.
NOTE: You cannot prepare the actual imposition in this scenario. The
imposition will be created on the fly when you create your job from the Hot
Ticket.
5 The Auto Impose window closes and details of the imposition are displayed
next to the Run Auto Impose check box.
These Auto Impose settings are saved to the Impose resource.

6 Select the Run Auto Impose check box.
7 Save the Hot Ticket.
Jobs created with the Hot Ticket will take the number of pages and the page
size of the uploaded document and use the saved Auto Impose settings for the
imposition. The document file name (without extension) is used as the name
of the product.

Wide Format Hot Tickets

Wide Format Hot Tickets allow you to automate the creation of wide-format
jobs. Files can be dropped in a hot folder or uploaded, and new wide-format jobs
are created and submitted automatically.
For each product or document, the system creates an individual job that takes
the file name as job name and the job name of the hot ticket as order number.
Depending on whether the input is an image file or document, the processing is
as follows:
 Input file is an image: a wide-format job is created for each image and this job
consists of one sheet and one Print Layout.
 Input file is a document: each page is assigned to a sheet in the same wide-
format job; a layout hot ticket can only have one sheet, so additional sheets
are replicated from this one sheet.
There are two options for the placement of the images on the sheet:
 Sheet without frames: the image is placed in the default image placement
position, i.e. in one of the corners of the sheet, aligned with the lay of the
printer.
 Sheet with frames: the image is used to fill all the frames on the sheet; each
frame on this sheet can have a different size, fitting options, etc.
Wide Format Hot Tickets are managed in the Hot Tickets window.
 Create a Wide Format Hot Ticket
NOTE: This option requires a special license.
1 Go to the Hot Tickets window.
2 Choose File > New from Templates and then the Wide Format Hot Tickets
tab.
3 Choose the template you want to use in the list, enter a name for the hot
ticket and choose a Printer.
4 Click Open.
The Layout Editor opens and you can set up the sheet just like you would do
for a regular wide-format job. Leave the sheet empty if you want images to be

274 WIDE FORMAT HOT TICKETS
placed in the default image placement position. Draw frames on the sheet if
you want multiple instances of the same image on the sheet.
NOTE: Only create 1 sheet. Additional sheets will be discarded when you save
the hot ticket.
5 Go to the Media Layout inspector, which is slightly different for hot tickets
than for regular wide-format jobs. In the Layout Products panel, select the
options as required:
 Automatically place images on sheets: select this option if you want your
images to be placed automatically on sheets
 When no frames, place: Single image per sheet or Multiple images per
sheet
 Optimize orientation: If you selected the first option to place images, you
can choose to automatically rotate images so they fit in the frames.
6 Click the Submit Job button to save your hot ticket and choose the Print Files
and Cut Files option you want to use for all the jobs created from the hot
ticket.
7 Click Submit to save your changes.
 Create jobs from a Wide Format Hot Ticket

2 Context-click the hot ticket you want to use in the Hot Ticket list and choose
Upload Document.
3 Browse to the images or documents you want to upload. Multiple images and
documents can be uploaded.
4 Click Open.
The system creates one or more wide-format jobs in the background. Go to

the Jobs window and you will see the new jobs appearing in the Job list. An
individual job is created for each image and/or page in a document. For
example, if you uploaded 20 images, the system creates 20 jobs.
5 Double-click a job to edit and fine-tune in the Layout Editor.
 Make a Wide Format Hot Ticket template

A Wide Format Hot Ticket is always created from a template. You can create
your own templates from an existing Wide Format Hot Ticket.

2 Select the hot ticket you want to save as a template in the Hot Ticket list.
3 Choose File > Save as Template.
4 Choose a template Category and click Save.
The template is added to the list of templates.
NOTE: To delete a template, go to the Templates resource. Read the section

“Monitoring and Configuring Your System” on page 609.

276 COLLECTING HOT TICKETS
Collecting Hot Tickets

A Collecting Hot Ticket is a special kind of Hot Ticket which is used to collect and
arrange images and create wide-format jobs. These Hot Tickets use the Collect
task processor to organize multiple images and multiple pages in a multi-page
file and output imposed sheets. Collecting Hot Tickets typically have a Hot
Folder, Normalize and Collect task processors but may also include the
Automate task processor for even more automation.
Collecting Hot Tickets are displayed in a separate panel in the Hot Tickets List.
Related topics: •
•

CHAPTER
7 Creating and Editing

Tickets
This section describes how you can create and edit Job Tickets and Hot Tickets
using the Ticket Editor.
NOTE: The Layout Editor and not the Ticket Editor is opened when you choose to
create Layout Tickets or Layout Hot Tickets. See “Layout Editor” on page 477.
 The Ticket Editor .................................................................................................. 278

 Using the Administration Tab ......................................................................... 280
 Using the Options Tab ....................................................................................... 284
 Using the Products Tab ..................................................................................... 291
 Using the Plan Tab ............................................................................................. 308
 Using the Pages Tab .......................................................................................... 330
 Using the Results Tab ........................................................................................ 333
 Working with Job Tickets and Hot Tickets ................................................ 335
 Inputting Documents ........................................................................................ 354
 Interactive Document Content Editing ....................................................... 361
 WebApproval Job Tickets ................................................................................. 363
277
278 THE TICKET EDITOR
The Ticket Editor

The Ticket Editor is where you create and edit your Tickets. You can create four
types of Tickets:
 Job Tickets: the definition of a job
 Hot Tickets: automatically creates and submits jobs
 Layout Tickets: job tickets for Sign & Display work
 Layout Hot Tickets: hot tickets for Sign & Display work
NOTE: The Layout Editor and not the Ticket Editor is opened when you
choose to create Layout Tickets or Layout Hot Tickets. See “Layout Editor” on
page 477.
The features of the Ticket Editor are organized in the following tabs. When you
create a Job Ticket, you will see two extra tabs which allow you to specify a Run
List and view intermediate processing results.
 The Administration tab: Uniquely identifies the job, and associates a specific
Production Plan with a particular customer. See “Using the Administration
Tab” on page 280.
 The Options tab: Defines how the jobs which use this ticket are to be handled
(archiving, notifications, deletion options, etc.). See “Using the Options Tab”
on page 284.
 The Products tab: For multi-part jobs and multi-product jobs, this tab allows
you to specify how the job is structured, and how each individual section of
the job will be processed. See “Using the Products Tab” on page 291.
 The Plan tab: Allows you to create, view, or modify a Production Plan. See
“Using the Products Tab” on page 291.
 The Pages tab (Job Tickets only): Displays both the list of pages contained in
the Page Store, and the pages that have been included in the Run List. See
“Using the Pages Tab” on page 330.
 The Results tab (Job Tickets only): Allows you to monitor the current
processing status of the selected job, displays thumbnails of the Run List
pages, and separation information. See “Using the Results Tab” on page 333.
•

7 CREATING AND EDITING TICKETS 279
• Shortcuts: Job Ticket Editor on page 1116

280 USING THE ADMINISTRATION TAB
Using the Administration Tab

to associate specific Production Plans with particular customers or job types. You
can use job names or order numbers to group jobs in the Job List.
For Hot Tickets, you use the Hot Ticket name to group the resulting jobs. For
example, if you enter “poster6” as the Hot Ticket name, all jobs that are created
using this Hot Ticket will be grouped in the Job List under the name “poster6”.
Administration Tab The Administration tab includes the following fields:

Information
Order number
You must enter an order number to identify the job that will be generated by a
Job Ticket. You can enter a number or a name as your Order Number. As soon as
you submit the ticket, the job will appear in the Job List. Initially, the job consists
of only the job parameters, and is represented as a folder. The Order Number is
displayed next to the job folder icon.
The text you enter in the Order Number field may later be used to automatically
sort archived jobs into subfolders. For more information see “When Job is
Finished” on page 287.
NOTE: An Order number is not required for Hot Tickets or Public Page Store jobs.
Job name, Hot Ticket name, or Public Page Store name

You must enter a name to identify the Job, Hot Ticket, or Public Page Store.
 If you are creating a Hot Ticket, the Hot Ticket can be seen only in the Hot
Ticket window.
 If you are creating a Job (based on a Job Ticket), the Job name can be seen in
the Job List after a document has been input. You can see this name when you
expand the associated job folder (which is named according to the job Order
number).
 If you are creating a Public Page Store Job, the Public Page Store will appear,
together with any other Public Page Stores, below the Job List.
The text you enter in this field may later be used to automatically sort archived
jobs into subfolders. For more information see “When Job is Finished” on
page 287.

Operator
The operator is the person responsible for processing the documents associated
with this job. An operator name is automatically entered when you create a job
or when jobs are automatically submitted by Hot Tickets. This name is the same
as your NT logon user name.
If you wish you can manually edit the operator name.
In the Message Board filter, you can filter on operator name in order to see all
the messages for a specific operator (see “Message Board Filter” on page 85).
Description
Any information you may see displayed here is automatically extracted from an
incoming JDF file.
Comments
Enter any special comments that apply to this job. This is a free text entry field
that is not used by Apogee.
Print Center
This option is only visible if you have the relevant license to work with multiple
Print Centers. These are printing companies or other service providers belonging
to the same organization and that can use Apogee independently from each
other. Choose a Print Center from the drop-down list to manage the Customers,
Customer’s staff and Printer’s staff for that particular Print Center.
Customer
In this panel you can provide information about the customer and the collabora-
tors who will work on the job at hand (optional). You can select a known
company from the Company drop-down list. A known company is a customer
which has been defined with all its users and their contact details in the WebAp-
proval (ProductionCenter) or PrintSphere applications. Your own company and
staff are also set up in these applications. See the online help of these applica-
tions for more information. If you do not select a known company and the
Company field is blank, you can fill in the contact details (name, email and
phone no.) of the customer for this job.
Printer’s Staff and Customer’s Staff

After selecting a known company, you are presented a list of Customer’s Staff
and Printer’s Staff that you can designate to collaborate on this job. If you did not
select a company, you only see your own staff. Each collaborator in the

282 USING THE ADMINISTRATION TAB
Customer’s Staff and Printer’s Staff lists can have one or two roles which are
activated by clicking the two icons in the Roles column. The two roles are
Approver and Uploader. Select the Uploader can place files check box if you
want to allow Uploaders to place files in the run list of a WebApproval job. You
can change the role of the default collaborators by clicking these icons.
In addition, collaborators in the Printer’s Staff list can be a candidate Customer

Service Representative (CSR) or a preferred CSR. Clicking the candidate CSR icon
changes the role of the collaborator to preferred CSR and vice versa. More than
one preferred CSR can be assigned to a job.
Add Guest
Use this button to add guests to collaborate on this job. Enter the person’s e-mail
and select the User Roles: Uploader check-box if you want this person to upload
files for the job. Click the Add Guest button to create the guest who is subse-
quently added to the list of Customer’s Staff.
NOTE: Once the job is submitted you can no longer edit the Customer’s Staff and
Printer’s Staff lists.
When you select a company from the Company drop-down list, Apogee looks up
the name in the Accounts resource and the PrintSphere application to see if the
account is active or inactive. This status is indicated at the bottom of the
Customer Contact dialog box.
Approver: This user can approve jobs in the WebApproval application.
Uploader: This user can upload files for this job in the WebApproval application.
Candidate CSR (Customer Service Representative)
Preferred CSR (Customer Service Representative)
WebApproval account is inactive: the account exists but is not enabled.
WebApproval account is active: the account exists and is enabled.
PrintSphere account is inactive: the account exists but is not enabled.
PrintSphere account is active: the account exists and is enabled.

Publish to ProductionCenter (WebFlow service)

A drop-down list next to the Company list lets you control whether a job is
published to the ProductionCenter web portal or not. You have one or more of
the following options, depending on whether you have licenses for the WebFlow
service and/or the WebApproval service:
 Publish: (default) The job will also appear in the list of jobs in Production-
Center, and Printer Company as well as Print Buyer users are able to
upload files and approve pages depending on their role.
 Publish Internally: The job will appear in the list of jobs in Production-
Center but only for Printer Company users.
 Don’t Publish: The job is not published to ProductionCenter (e.g. confi-

dential jobs) even if you have the required license to do so.
 Publish for Upload: The job will appear in the list of jobs in Production-
Center but only for uploading purposes.
 Publish for Approval: The job will appear in the list of jobs in Production-
Center but only for approval purposes.
The text in the Customer Contact fields may later be used to automatically sort
archived jobs into subfolders. For more information see “When Job is Finished”
on page 287.
You can print some or all of the Administration tab information on film or plate.
This process is handled using marks and variables when setting up the imposi-
tion. The variables are prepended with $ characters. These variables correspond
to the various fields in the Administration tab and are used to print the job infor-
mation on your film or plate. For information on the Apogee variables, refer to
System Variables. For more information on imposition, see “Working with
Apogee Impose” on page 365 or refer to the user guide supplied with your third-
party imposition software.
Related topics: • Accounts on page 649

• What is a WebApproval Job? on page 55
• What is WebFlow? on page 57
• What is a PrintSphere Job? on page 57
• System Variables on page 1095
• Working with Apogee Impose on page 365

284 USING THE OPTIONS TAB
Using the Options Tab

The Options tab displays information on how the jobs which use this ticket are
to be handled (archiving, notifications, etc.). This tab offers options that affect
the job as a whole, and which are not related to a specific Task Processor. You
need to set Job Options for Job Tickets, Hot Tickets, and Public Page Store jobs,
although not all options are used in Hot Tickets and Public Page Store jobs.
The Options tab includes the following sections:
 Job Priority
 Job Update Policy
 Milestones (Jobs only)
 Job States
 When Job is Finished (Jobs and Hot Tickets only)
 Input Channels (Jobs only)
 Notifications
 Validation
Job Priority
 High
 Normal
 Low
NOTE: Job priority can also be changed for one or multiple jobs in the Job List.
Job Update Policy
This section provides a method to control the application of job updates that are
sent from an MIS system (when the MIS resubmits a JDF job).

You can overrule the system-wide job update policy on a per-job basis at job
level: There is no different policy per part, production set or operation.
For more information on JDF job updating, refer to “JDF Updating” on page 655.
Follow System Policy
Uses the update policy specified at the MIS site. This allows the MIS to apply JDF
job updates without asking, and without informing the operator that there was
an update.
Apply and Inform
Applies all JDF job updates without asking, but posts a notification after
applying the updates.
Notify
Posts a notification when a JDF job update needs to be applied. The operator can
decide whether to accept or deny the update.
This policy should only be used when the MIS supports asynchronous JMF
commands. Otherwise, the MIS will fail the update when the operator does not
immediately answer the notification.
Apogee returns an error to the MIS upon receiving a synchronous command, and
posts a notification. The notification states that the update was rejected because
of a misconfiguration, and suggests you either change the MIS protocol settings
or use a different update policy. The same message is included in the error reply
sent to the MIS.
Deny and Inform
Denies the JDF job update without asking, and without informing the operator
that the update was denied.
Milestones
You can configure the system to distribute messages to the Message Board (and
optionally to a defined e-mail address) when specific milestones have been
reached in the job assembly and generation process.

NOTE: The Milestones section is not available in Hot Tickets and Public Page
Store jobs.
You can set two such generic milestones for all jobs that are created using this
ticket:
 Run list complete by
 Job finished by
Run list complete by
NOTE: Windows users can Select this check box if you want to set a date and time by which time all the
click the associated Browse documents required for the job have been successfully delivered to the Apogee
button to display the Choose System.
Date/Time dialog box, and
select month, day and time. If you choose this milestone, the associated Notify check box is enabled. You
should select this check box if you want a reminder to be generated, indicating
that the final date for document input is approaching. You then need to specify
the notification period. This can be set to any period of days or hours before the
final input date. When the notification date is reached, a notification is automat-
ically sent to the Message Board (and optionally to a defined e-mail address).
Job finished by
NOTE: Windows users can Select this check box if you want to set a date and time by which time the job
click the associated Browse must be successfully completed.
button to display the Choose
Date/Time dialog box, and When the current date exceeds the due date minus the notification period,
select month, day and time. Apogee flags the job with an appropriate job status icon in the Job List (see “Job
Status Icons” on page 151).
NOTE: You can also configure the system to send around an e-mail notification
when a job has been successfully finished, as described in When Job is Finished,
below.
If you choose this milestone, the associated Notify check box is enabled. You
should select this check box if you want a reminder to be generated, indicating
that the job completion date is approaching. You then need to specify the notifi-
cation period. This can be set to any period of days or hours before the job
completion date. When the notification date is reached, a notification is
automatically sent to the Message Board (and optionally to a defined e-mail
address).

Job States
Disable input channels Choose when you want to disable the input channels:
when
 when Run List is complete
 when Job is finished
Mark job as finished Choose when you want to mark the job as finished:
 when All flows finish (e.g. main and proofing flows)
 when Main Output flow finish (e.g. job is marked finished while the
proofing flow has not yet finished)
When Job is Finished
To optimize disk space and to keep the Job List easily manageable, it is a good
idea to archive and delete jobs that have been successfully created. You can set
the following generic post-completion options for all jobs that are created using
this ticket:
 Notify
 Mark for archive
 Delete
NOTE: The When Job is Finished section is not available in Public Page Store jobs.
Notify
Select this check box if you want a notification to be sent to the Message Board
as soon as the job has been finished. Optionally, an e-mail message can also be
generated, and sent to the operator responsible, or to the address you specify in
the Notifications section, below.
Mark for archive

Archiving exports the specified intermediate job results from Apogee to the
specified output destination (to tape or other archiving media).

Select this check box if you want to automatically archive all jobs that have been
successfully completed when the archiving process runs. Archive makes an
external copy of the job.
For information on specifying an archive location, see “Job Housekeeping

Settings” on page 629. This location must be a shared disk accessible by both
Apogee Client and Server.
Archive Location Displays the location (path name) where the archive has been saved. You can
click the small button at the end of the path name to open the archive location in
Explorer.
Delete
Select this check box if you want to delete all jobs that have been successfully
completed.
Mark for deletion after Select this option if you want to automatically mark for deletion all jobs that
have been successfully completed. You need to specify how long the job should
be kept before it is marked for deletion. This can be set at anything up to 99 days
or hours after the job completion date.
Immediately Select this option to immediately delete all successfully completed jobs.
For information on how jobs are deleted, see “Job Housekeeping Settings” on
page 629.
Input Channels
You can configure a ticket with one or more input channels, such as Hot Folders
or AppleTalk channels. These channels normally remain active all the time.
However, you may want to deactivate an input channel to prevent further
additions to a completed Run List, or to a finished job.
If you want to do this, select the ‘Deactivate input when:’ check box, then click
open the associated list box and select one of the available options:
Deactivate input when Job is finished

All the ticket’s input channels are disabled as soon as the job has been success-
fully completed.

Deactivate input when Run list is complete

All the Job Ticket’s input channels are disabled as soon as the Run List is
complete. This option is not available for Hot Tickets. For more information on
Run Lists, see “Working with Jobs in the Pages Tab” on page 214.
Once the input channel has been deactivated, you can reactivate it by selecting
the job in the Job List pane, and clicking the Enable/Disable tool.
NOTE: The Input Channels section is not available in Hot Tickets and Public Page
Store jobs.
Notifications
This section allows you to send all notifications as e-mails to a specified e-mail
address (this is in addition to the normal use of messages in the Message Board
- see “Message Board” on page 81). The text of the e-mail is a text-only version
of the message. You can enter an e-mail address. No validation is performed.
Validation
Click the Edit Job Validation Rules button to open a dialog where you can set
the severity level of a selected number of validation rules that do not have a fixed
severity level. Most of these validation rules use variables and an explanation of
each rule is given under the list of rules. Validation rules generate messages in
the Problem Report.
 Select the rule in the list and then click the Severity drop-down list to choose
one of the severity levels:
 Ignore: The rule will be ignored.
 Inform: An information message will be generated.
 Warn: A warning message will be generated.
 Fail: An error message will be generated.
 Default: Sets the default severity.

NOTE: When you change the severity level, the system re-runs the validation.
Related topics: • Problem Report on page 166

Using the Products Tab

In the Products tab you will edit the Products, Parts and Production Sets of a job
and impose your jobs using the Imposition Editor or the Layout Editor.
The Products tab is visible but disabled if the job does not include an Impose
Task Processor. It comprises the following sections:
 Products and Parts List
 Product Inspector
 Part Inspector
 Imposition
 Production Sets
Products and Parts List
This panel lists the products and parts of the job with the most important attri-
butes of each product and part in a table. Context-click the table header to select
more or fewer attributes. The products are listed in the order they are created.
The table shows the parts sorted by their first page (first page on top). You can
click a product or part to view and edit all attributes in the inspector on the right.
With a product or part highlighted in the list, you can navigate to a product or
part in the list using the up and down arrows or by typing the first letter of the
name. For example, press “B” to select the next Body part in the list and view its
settings in the inspector.
While working in the product or part inspector, you can jump to the next/
previous product or part in the list by pressing CTRL+ arrow up/down.
The Parts section header displays a warning if there is a mismatch between the
Run List and the page ranges in the parts (in addition to the usual problem report
messages).
Product/Part type icon The following color-coded icons are used in the product and parts list:

292 USING THE PRODUCTS TAB
Bound product
Cover part
Plain part
Insert part
Unbound, flat, single-sided product
Unbound, flat, double-sided product
Unbound, folded, single-sided product
Unbound, folded, double-sided product
Unbound product with different part types
Calendar product
Sign and Display product
Product/Part name: The name of the product or part. For multi-product jobs, the name of the first
product is by default the same as the Job name. You can change the name here
and this is reflected immediately in the Pages tab. If you created multiple
products using the Quick Fill dialog, the product names are the same as the Job
name with incrementing suffixes.
Run List Indexes The Run List positions and the total page count per part.
Run List Pages Same as Run List Indexes if ‘Number pages independently’ is not selected for the
Part; if the product has a cover, one or more of the following 9 panel designators
are used:
 OFC: outside front cover
 OFF: outside front flap
 IFF: inside front flap
 IFC: inside front cover
 IBC: inside back cover

 IBF: inside back flap
 OBF: outside back flap
 OBC: outside back cover
 SPN: outside spine
Page Size The expected page size (width and height). An icon indicates the orientation.
Copy Count (Unbound) The required number of copies for each element placed on a sheet.
Colors The expected process and/or spot colors.
Stock The stock used for the part.
Binding options The name of the selected resource for binding.
Comments Icons representing the presence of comments and a comment URL. Tool-tips on
these icons show the comments and the URL, respectively. Click the URL icon to
open a browser window on the referenced page.
 Add products to a job

1 Click the Add button (+) in the top right corner of the products and parts list,
and choose Add Product.
The Add Product dialog is displayed which displays the same information as
the QuickFill dialog.
2 Enter the details for your new product as described in the Product Inspector.
3 Click Add.
Adding a new product to a job will create an imposition error, and you must
edit the imposition.

 Add parts to a product

1 Highlight the product you want to add a part to in the products and parts list
and click the Add button (+) in the top right corner of the products and parts
list, and choose Add Part.
A new part is added under the product in the list.
2 Edit the settings for the new part in the Part Inspector.
 Duplicate a product
1 Highlight one or more products that you want to copy in the products and
parts list and click the Duplicate button (++) in the top right corner of the
products and parts list.
2 Enter the number of copies you want to make of your selection and click OK.
The products with their respective parts are added to the list.
 Delete a product or part

1 Highlight one or more products or parts that you want to delete in the
products and parts list and click the Delete button (x) in the top right corner
of the products and parts list.
2 Click Yes in the confirmation dialog.
 Navigating Multiple Products in the Products Tab

The following shortcuts apply if you have more than one product in the products
list (multi-product jobs).

Go to the next item in the list CTRL + Down arrow
Go to the previous item in the list CTRL + Up arrow
Go to the next item of the same level in the list CTRL + SHIFT + Down
arrow
Go to the previous item of the same level in the list CTRL + SHIFT + Up
arrow
Go to the next cover part c or C
Go to the next plain or insert part b or B
Related topics: • Working with Apogee Impose on page 365

Product Inspector
Select a product in the product and parts list on the left to display its properties
in this inspector. The Product inspector displays the same settings found in the
Products system resource.
The settings you choose for the Product are inherited by the various Parts of the
Product.
Product
Product Order The order number of the job is used as the default order number for the product.
Here you can enter a dedicated order number for the product. If you leave this
field empty, it automatically reverts to the job order number.
Product Name The name of the selected Product is the same as the job name if the job only
consists of one product. If you created multiple products when completing the
Quick Fill dialog, each product is indicated with the job name and a sequential
suffix. You can change the product name to a value of your choice.
Copy Count The number of copies for each product.
Product Type
Product Type List: Lists all the product presets available in the Products resource for you to choose
from. Click Manage Products at the end of the list to open the Products resource.
No. of Pages The number of pages determines the page range that you can use in the defini-
tion of the parts. This is the same as in the Run List: You can change this value in
both places. Click the Edit button to change the starting position in the Run List.
For Hot Tickets, you can select the From Input check box to set the number of
pages equal to that of the document. Choosing From Input changes the Auto
Impose button to Set Up Auto Impose, and you can only specify the basic
settings but not the actual imposition.
Product Type The type on which the selected Product preset is based. The settings you see in
the inspector depend on the different types:
Bound: for products that require assembly and binding; have one or more Parts
Unbound: for products which are a mixture of flat, folded or step and repeat work
Calendar: for flip and spread products

Bound Products
Binding Options Choose one of the binding options from the drop-down list. The gray arrow
button is a short-cut to the Binding Options resource where you can modify the
binding options specifically for the current job.
Edge The edge for binding: Left, Right, Top or Bottom
Glue Zones Choose one of the Glue Zones resources for creating ink-free zones where glue
can be applied.
Advanced book signature Select this option to use the advanced numbering feature that allows you to
numbering control the numbering of book signatures in the Fold Sheet inspector. See “To
inspect the Fold Sheet” on page 434.
Default Part
Stock and weight Choose a paper stock from the drop-down list. These options are created in the
Paper Stock resource of the Press.
Page Size The page size of the finished product. For Hot Tickets, you can choose <From
Input> at the top of the list. This allows you to set up fully automated imposition
for jobs created from a Hot Ticket. Choosing <From Input> changes the Auto
Impose button to Set Up Auto Impose, and you can only specify the basic
settings but not the actual imposition.
Default Production
Bleed Sets the bleed on all sides to the same value. This can be changed later for
individual Parts, pages and press sheet sides.
Shingling Choose whether you want to apply shingling or not.
None: No shingling is applied
Manual: Set the values for shifting or scaling manually
From a resource: Choose one of the Shingling Rules which has been set up in the
resources
Manage Shingling Rules: A short-cut to the Shingling Rules resource where you
can edit a rule or create new ones
Bottling Choose how you want to apply compensation for page skew by selecting one of
the Bottling Rules. Three modes are possible broadly speaking:
Automatic: page skew compensation is based on page creep

Manual: uses pre-established values in a Bottling Table to compensate page skew

and only when a table is provided in the Web Production Scheme
Semi-automatic: uses a Bottling Table and also takes stock thickness and page
size into account
Mulltiplier: enter a value greater than the default (1) to apply a multiplier to pre-
established bottling values (e.g. for a newer version of a product)
Unbound Products
Selecting Unbound as Product Type switches off the binding options. The parts
become elements which can be placed on the same sheet.
NOTE: The Part Type and Pagination are not inherited by existing parts, only by
new parts you add to the product.
Default Part List of compatible parts. Choose a part type to set as default when adding parts
(elements) to the product.
Edit Imposition in Layout This option is only enabled for Unbound Flat - Singled-Sided. Selecting this
Editor check box allows you to impose elements in the Layout Editor workspace.
Copy Count The number of copies for each element.
Margins Adds extra space around each element, similar to the trim margins in the binding
style of bound products. The extra space may be required for post-press activi-
ties. Select a Margin resource from the drop-down or click the gray arrow icon to
set a custom margin. If you selected the Edit Imposition in Layout Editor check
box, the list contains Finishing Margins.
Calendar Products
Selecting Calendar as Product Type displays special Calendar Style options.
Calendar Style Flip-over: The leaves are flipped over, usually with the spine on top and the back
left blank
Spread: The leaves are not flipped over but turned upward so the bottom leaf is
an extension of the back of the top leaf.
NOTE: When working with multiple products, you can select similar products
and change the settings for all these products simultaneously.

Part Inspector
You can edit the settings of a Part, which are inherited from the Product, by
selecting the part in the list so its settings are displayed in the inspector on the
right. You can revert to some settings of the Product by clicking the gray revert
button on the right.
Part Type
Part Type The type of a part sets the number of pages, the page range and the independent
page numbering attributes. There are three standard types for bound products:
Cover: A cover part contains the first two pages and the last two pages of a publi-
cation, regardless of how many pages the publication contains. There can only
be one cover part in a job: you cannot select this type if another one exists. When
this option is selected, the Number of pages and Run List Positions options are
read-only.
Insert: An insert part has its pages numbered independently from the main
content. The Number pages independently option is automatically selected and
read-only. An insert is part of the product, but has no direct relation with its
content. Inserts can be externally produced, in which case you only need to
know about them if they affect the imposition (e.g., shingling). Otherwise, the
insert needs to be produced by the job, and needs to be an integral part of the job.
Plain: A plain part is freely editable; there are no consequences when selecting a
plain part.
Part Type (for Unbound) An unbound product can have the following part types:
Flat - single-sided: An unfolded leaf printed on one side; sets the page range to a
single page
Flat - double-sided: An unfolded leaf printed on both sides; sets the page range to
two consecutive pages
Folded - single-sided: A leaf consisting of several panels printed on one side; the
number of panels is set by the pagination scheme and the page range corre-
sponds with the number panels
Folded - double-sided: A leaf consisting of several panels printed on both sides;

the number of panels is set by the pagination scheme and the page range is twice
the number of panels

Pagination (for Unbound This drop-down list with pagination schemes is only available for unbound
Folded) folded part types. Choose an existing scheme from the drop-down list. The list is
filtered and only displays the relevant schemes for single or double-sided parts.
The pagination scheme provides a grid for arranging the pages of the part as
panels and may also apply values to modify their size. For example, a panel may
need to be reduced in size for folding as a leaflet. You can go to the pagination
editor by clicking the gray arrow icon and set the precise dimensions for each
panel and customize the grid. See “Pagination Schemes Overview” on
page 1024 for more information.
Part Name A short name that identifies the part.
Part Color This is a visual identifier of the part in the Products tab and main imposition
windows. The initial color depends on the type of part. You will see a number of
alternative colors when you create multiple parts of the same type. You can click
on the initial color to select a different color.
Cover Type You can set the following options for the Cover part type:
Double sided: select the check box for a double-sided cover.
Page Spreads: When you choose this option, the entire outside cover has run list
index 1 and the inner cover has run list index 2.
Panels as separate pages: When you select this option, you can control how the
cover is organized and divided into maximum 9 panels to accommodate a spine
and flaps. You can set the following options:
 Spine: Select this option to activate the drop-down list and choose the
content for the outside spine of the cover:
 PDF Page: a separate PDF must be provided for the spine and a place-
holder is added at the last position of the run list
 Blank: the spine is blank and no placeholder is provided
 Bleed from adjacent Pages: the right and left half of the spine are filled
with bleed from the adjacent pages and no placeholder is added to the run
list
 Bleed from Front page: The spine is filled with the bleed from the front
page
You can specify the width of the spine or select the Automatic check box so
Apogee Impose can calculate the width based on the thickness of the paper.

 Front and Back flaps: Select the check box and specify the width, including
extra width for folds
Copy Count (Unbound) The number of copies of the part.
Run List Indexes This field specifies where the pages of the part should be placed. You can specify
single pages, a set of contiguous pages or a mix. For example, 1-3, 5 is pages 1,2,
3 and 5. This field is read-only for the default Parts, i.e. the first Cover, Body
parts created.
The maximum number of pages for a Cover is 9: the first four pages for the front
cover panels; the last 5 pages for the back cover panels and spine (very last page
in the run list).
NOTE: Apogee ignores spaces in the range specification.
Keep pages on separate By default, pages of different parts can be combined on the same signature; this
signatures option allows you to switch this behavior off.
Number pages Select this check box to number the Run List positions independently of the
independently remainder of the Run List. The first Run List slot for the part is assigned number
1, and so on. The remainder of the Run List is numbered as if the part did not
exist.
The following rules apply for independent parts:
 The page numbering of an independent part starts at 1, regardless of the

position of that part in the Run List.
 The page numbering of an independent part is contiguous.

 Independent part numbering does not affect the numbering of other parts
(independent or otherwise).
 Independent part numbering affects the $RLPAGE variable and is taken into
account when using automatic file placement.
The Parts table displays the page range of an independent part in brackets (e.g.,
[3, 4, 7, 8]). The Run List tab indents pages from independent parts, so they are
easier to identify.
Stock and Size

Page Size The expected trim size of all pages in the part. You can choose from a list of
standard sizes. The size you select sets the Width and Height values. The Page
Size automatically switches to Custom when you edit the Width or Height.
Width, Height The page dimensions in your selected units. The dimensions are set by the
selected Page Size, but can be edited.
Orientation Reflects the orientation of the page dimensions.
Production
Binding options Choose one of the binding options from the drop-down list. The grey arrow
button is a short-cut to the Binding Options resource where you can modify the
binding options specifically for the current job.
Margins (Unbound) Adds extra space around each element, similar to the trim margins in the binding
style of bound products. The extra space may be required for post-press activi-
ties. Select a Margin resource from the drop-down or click the grey arrow button
to set a custom margin.
Bleed Sets the bleed on all sides to the same value. This can be changed later for
individual Parts, pages and sides.
Shingling/Bottling Choose whether you want to apply the shingling/bottling set for the product to
this part, or not; not available for Unbound products.
Colors
Colors The selected color space resource (process colors).
Spot Colors You can specify one or more spot color placeholders or actual spot color names
that you want to include in the selected part. The list displays all colors from all
parts. You should select only the colors required for the part, and leave the
others unchecked. You can add a spot color when needed, remove one when no
longer needed, or change it's name.

The specified colors are added as “manually added colors” to the Keep colors in
the separation settings. Placeholder spot color names are later mapped to the
actual document colors.
The check box in the Match column specifies whether the color is an actual color
name (i.e., whether the document's color must match the given one) or a generic
placeholder.
Comments This is a free form text box for comments. If set by JDF, the field is read-only.
For more information on using these options, refer to “About Parts and Page
Ranges” on page 305.
Adapting a Part’s If you have uploaded and assigned a document to a Part which has a different
page trim size, an icon is displayed in the Run List and Products tab to indicate
Page Size that a different size was expected.
You can choose to adapt the page size of the Part to match the document size.
 To adapt a Part’s page size to match a document

1 Upload a document and assign at least one page to the Part.
If the size does not match, the following icon is displayed in the Run List:
At this stage you can still delete the assigned page.
2 In the Products tab, select the Part you want to adapt. It’s indicated by the
same icon.
3 Choose Edit > Adapt Part’s Page Size and the Page Size of the Part is
modified.
WARNING: This command cannot be undone.

Changing the Part’s Page Size may generate an imposition warning, for
example if the Part no longer fits on the Press Sheet.
Imposition
The Imposition pane provides access to the main Apogee Impose windows and
settings.
Imposition Mode Selector

This drop-down list is only enabled for unbound, flat, single-sided jobs in which
case you can choose either the Imposition Editor or the Layout Editor to prepare
the press sheet.
 Mode selector enabled with Imposition Editor selected:
 Mode selector enabled with Layout Editor selected:
 Mode selector disabled:
Auto Impose button

Opens the Auto Impose window where you define the settings for automatic
imposition.
Set Up Auto Impose (Hot Tickets)

For Hot Tickets, the Set Up Auto Impose button is enabled if the number of
pages or the page size of the product are to be taken from the input. Click this
button to select the Auto Impose settings for the from input ticket. Then click OK
to store the Auto Impose settings and close Auto Impose without actually
creating the imposition. Once the Auto Impose settings have been defined for a
from input ticket, and the imposition prepared in the case of a fixed imposition
ticket, the Run Auto Impose check box is enabled and displays a summary of the

Auto Impose settings. Select this check box to ensure that the jobs created from
the Hot Ticket are imposed. At this stage you can still go back to the settings by
clicking the Set Up Auto Impose button.
Edit Imposition button

Opens the Product View where you can create the imposition interactively – also
referred to as manual imposition. You will create the Assembly, choose the
Folding Schemes, etc.
Edit Imposition with Layout Editor button

Only for Unbound Flat Single-Sided jobs for which this option has been selected
in the Product Editor. Opens the Layout Editor where elements can be arranged.
The button is only enabled if the imposition is set to Undefined.
Press Sheet Layout

A drop-down list with all the available press sheet layouts. Initially, the default
sheet layout as specified for the chosen press is selected (from press). You can
choose a different layout and revert to the default by clicking the revert icon.
Clicking the arrow icon takes you to the Press Sheet Layout editor where you can
modify the binding options specifically for the current job.
Impose TP
Clicking the arrow icon takes you to the Impose parameter set view in the Plan
tab, if it is present in the plan. Otherwise, it only takes you as far as the Plan tab.
Production Sets
The Production Sets table in the Products tab shows the most important attri-
butes of each production set. The parts are sorted by their first sheet (first sheet
on top). You can double-click a production set to see and edit all attributes.
Production Sets Table

Production Set The name of the production set, sheet or side, based on the name of the associ-
ated parts. In a multi-product job, the various part names per set are juxtaposed
with a plus sign to create the name. Apogee uses the same sheet and side names
as in the Results tab. The name is preceded by an icon representing the produc-
tion set, a sheet or a side. Production sets and sheets can be expanded and
collapsed.
Sheet Indexes The sheet indexes of the production set (read only).
Sheets/Sides The sheet sides of the production set (read only).

Parts The name(s) of the originating part(s) that are represented by the sides in the set
(read only).
Press The name of the press that is selected in the Production Plan (read only).
Output Device The name of the output device that is selected in the Production Plan (read
only).
Update Imposition
This button is active if you made changes in the Production Plan. You can subse-
quently update the imposition to reflect these changes.
Update Production Sets

You can use this button to restore the production sets in accordance with new or
deleted parts and the imposition.
About Parts and When you create your Product, or when you modify a JDF job, you can manually
edit and create/merge parts. A number of scenarios are possible whereby the
Page Ranges default Body part plays a special role:
 create a new part: add the pages to the page range and Apogee removes the
added pages from the default part.
 assign pages to a different part: edit the part you want the pages to be part of,
and add those pages to the page range. Apogee removes the added pages
from the default part.
 remove a part: select the part and click the Delete button. The pages of the
part return to the default part.
Keeping count of pages
While defining parts and Run List positions, you may find that the number of
pages does not match the sum of the parts (if the parts overlap). In this case,
Apogee displays a warning, and you cannot submit the job; you must first fix the
ranges.
In a simple job, the default part hides the complexity of parts: Changing the
number of Run List pages simply adds or removes pages at the end of the default
part. In a multi-part job, the default part acts as the body part.
In a `simple' multi-part job, you can have one cover part and the default body
part. Such a setup makes it easy to change the total number of pages without
having to edit the parts: when you increase the number of pages, the default

parts grows and the cover widens; when you decrease the number of pages, the
default part shrinks and the cover narrows.
When you have a product with additional parts, other than a cover, the default
part contains the `left-overs' from the other parts: you specify the pages in the
other parts, and the default parts contains the remaining pages. It is valid to have
zero pages in a part, whether it is the default part or any other.
Keeping track of page ranges
Apogee does not attempt to keep the page ranges valid across the different parts
while you are busy editing the Run List, parts and page ranges. Instead, it relies
on a few basic rules, and checks the ranges when you change them.
 Apogee never adjusts the ranges of custom parts automatically, except those
of the Cover part (if present).
 The Cover part is automatically adjusted to the Run List: Its first two pages
are set to the numbers of the first two Run List positions, and its last two
pages are set to the numbers of the last two Run List positions.
 When you enlarge the Run List, the added pages go in the default part.
 When you shrink the Run List, the `removed' pages are removed from the
default part, insofar they are present. They are never taken from custom
parts.
 When you create a new part, the default range is set to the range of the
default part.
 When you make a part range smaller, the `removed pages' move back to the
default part.
 When you make a part range larger, the àdded pages' are taken from the
default part insofar they are present.
Range Validation
Apogee does not attempt to maintain the ranges across different parts; instead,
it checks whether the entire range, covered by all parts, matches the entire Run
List, with no overlaps. If not, it posts a warning message in the Problem Report
and displays it in the placard above the parts table. Parts with conflicting page
ranges display the range in red text. You must fix page range conflicts manually
before you can submit the job.

Managing
Production Sets
 To manually create a new production set
1 In the Production Sets pane, click the New button.
2 Enter a name for the production set.
3 Enter the range of sheets and sides that this production range covers.
You can specify ranges in the same way as you do for the Discard Action (see
“Discard Settings” on page 311).
4 Click OK.
Apogee creates a new production set, containing the selected sheets (or
sides).
Creating a new production set affects those operations in the production plan
that have different processing per production set. The following rules are
used to assign a parameter set to the new production set:
 If all items in the new production set originate from a single production
set:
The operational parameters for the newly created production set are a
copy of the originating one. As a result, when nothing else is changed, the
job will generate exactly the same output as before.
 If the items in the new production set originate from different production
sets:
The newly created production set takes the parameter set that is associ-
ated with single processing. As a result, when nothing else is changed, the
job might generate different output than before.
 To delete production sets

Apogee does not delete empty production sets automatically. You have to
delete them manually.

308 USING THE PLAN TAB
Using the Plan Tab

The Plan tab allows you to create, view, or modify a Production Plan. This tab
has three panes:
 Production Plan Components Pane
 Production Plan Pane (Ticket Editor)
 Settings Pane (Ticket Editor)
Production Plan This pane gives you access to all the available Task Processors and Actions that
you can include in your Production Plan. This pane is divided into four tabs:
Components Pane
 Input Tab
 Process Tab
 Output Tab
 Actions Tab
Input Tab
Displays all the available Input Task Processors for your plan in the Production
Plan pane. Input Task Processors accept documents or resources from the
“outside world”. They function as input channels for Apogee.
When creating a ticket, you need to include one or more Input Task Processors
in a Production Plan to accept the documents that will be input using the associ-
ated Ticket.
Process Tab
Displays all the available Processing Task Processors for your plan in the Produc-
tion Plan pane. Processing Task Processors execute tasks such as imposition,
preflight, normalization, rendering, separation and trapping on the incoming
documents.
When creating a ticket, you normally need to include several Processing Task
Processors in a Production Plan. Each of these accepts job data from the
preceding Task Processor, processes the data in accordance with a pre-config-

ured setup, and passes the intermediate results on to the next Task Processor in
the flow.
Output Tab
Displays all the available Output and Press Task Processors for your plan in the
Production Plan pane. These Task Processors represent your output devices:
imagesetters, platesetters and proofers. Apart from the physical devices, Apogee
provides additional Task Processors such as Export and Page Store Out.
When creating a ticket, you need to include an Output Task Processor for each
flow in the Production Plan. These accept the final job data from the preceding
Processing Task Processor, and output the job to the specified printer or press.
Actions Tab
Displays all the available Actions for your plan in the Production Plan pane.
Actions allow you to precisely control the flow of job data through the Produc-
tion Plan, and for keeping track of your job results at every point in the
processing chain.
Once you have built up a valid Production Plan, you can insert Actions between
each step in the Plan. When one of these points is reached during job processing,
an event is triggered. For example, the job results may be archived, or the flow
may be temporarily halted until specific criteria have been met.
Two Types of Actions

The available Actions are divided into two categories: Result Actions and Flow
Control Actions.
Result Actions
One or more of these actions can be placed directly above a Task Processor in the
Production Plan pane. Unlike Flow Control Actions, these actions do not inter-
rupt the flow of job data from one Task Processor to the next. They pass the job
data on as normal, but they perform some extra processing, such as archiving the
data or sending out a notification.
The following Result actions are available.

Keep Result
Archive Result
Notify
Milestone
Flow Control Actions
One or more of these actions can be inserted between any two adjacent Task
Processors in the Production Plan pane. These actions interrupt the passing of
job data from one Task Processor to the next. Once the action criteria have been
met, the flow is resumed, and the job data is passed on to the next Task
Processor. A typical Flow Control Action is ‘After Hours’, which interrupts and
holds the processing flow until a specific time has been reached.
The following Flow Control actions are available.
Discard
Web Proof
Soft Proof
Hard Copy Proof
Wait for Results
Collect for Output
After Hours
NOTE: To emphasize the fact that Flow Control actions suspend the Production
flow, you will see a break in the connector leading to the following component
in the Plan.
Discard

This Action may be inserted between two Task Processors in your Production
Plan. Discard is used to prevent specific result from being output, without
stopping the rest of the job from being printed. You can use this Action to proof
only a few pages or flats, instead of having to proof them all in order to finish the
job.
Apogee displays discarded flats, pages or separations by dimming the thumbnail

and name and ‘striping’ the thumbnail.
You can discard one or more results interactively in the Results tab, or by adding
a Discard Action to your Production Plan.
Interactive Discard
The goal is to prevent a result from being output. To do so, select that result in
the Results tab, and select the Discard item menu command. When you discard
a result interactively, the result is immediately marked as `discarded'. All
processing for that result is halted.
NOTE: You cannot discard results when editing a job.
Planned Discard
You can plan to discard results based on their location in the job (Run List
position, at number, part or production set). You might want to do this to
prevent all pages or flats from being proofed: You can then interactively include
the pages or flats you want to have a proof of.
Discard Settings
When you add or select the Discard Settings Action in the Production Plan, you
will see the default Action parameters displayed in the Settings pane. Discard
includes two main switches; one to discard reprocessing, and one to discard or
include a range of results, optionally coupled with a condition on original
version or revision. These switches work independently; however, the repro-
cessing switch always affects all results, regardless of the range or condition
selected in the other switch.
Discard check box

Enables discarding based on ranges and originals/revisions. When enabled,
Apogee looks at the selection in the Discard/Include list box to determine
whether to discard a result or not. When disabled, the Discard/Include list box
is disabled and Apogee does not discard results based on such a condition (i.e.,
it normally includes all results, except when discarded by the reprocessing
condition). By default, this check box is disabled.

Discard/Include list box

Select whether results that match the condition will be discarded or included.
Discard Discards results that match the condition, and includes those that do not.
Include Includes results that match the condition, and discards those that do not.
Results list box

Select this check box to specify a specific set of results that must be discarded or
included. See “Specifying Ranges” on page 313.
All Results Select this option to specify all results, regardless of range. Use this option if you
want to hand-pick results for inclusion.
NOTE: The QuickProof feature might make this option less useful.
Results in range Select this option to specify all results that fall within the specified range.
Results outside of range Select this option to specify results that do not fall within the specified range.
This is the opposite of the previous option. It is convenient if you want to set up
a pair of discard actions: one discarding a specific range and the other one
discarding the others. Both actions can use the same range, but one uses ‘When
in range’ and the other one uses ‘When outside of range’. See “Specifying
Ranges” on page 313.
Parts/Production Sets This option is available only in multi-part jobs. You can select which results to
discard, using the parts or production sets of the job. This is a much more conve-
nient way of specifying ranges: Because the ranges are already specified and
named (in the Parts tab), you can simply select the ones you want to discard.
Condition list box

Select whether to discard or include initial content or changed content.
Always Select this option if you want to always discard (or include) results, regardless
of reprocessing, initial or changed content.
If you select Always when the action is set to Discard, the ‘Always discard results
when reprocessing’ option is selected as well, and the option is disabled. Note
that this leaves you with no set up in which you can discard everything, except
reprocessing. In all other cases, the ‘Always discard results when processing’
option remains enabled.
With initial content Select this option if you want to operate on results that are being created, i.e.,
results which did not already exist.

With changed content Select this option if you want to operate on results that have changed, i.e., the
content of the result to be made has changed. Changed content includes using a
new page revision, moving pages in the Run List and changing the imposition
scheme.
Always discard results when reprocessing check box

When selected, Apogee discards unchanged results that are being reprocessed.
In other words, when reprocessing occurs because of a parameter change or an
explicit Reprocess (menu) command, but where the content of the result itself
has not changed. By default, this check box is selected.
Specifying Ranges
The range field takes allows you to enter a comma-delimited list of sub-ranges.
An empty range field is identical to None. The range field is not case sensitive,
and you can use spaces anywhere to make the range more readable. Apogee
removes all spaces when processing the range data.
Specify a page range: Examples
Ranges for a page proofer flow for a 20-page job

Range Pages that are in range
1-$ All
1,$ 1 and 20
1,2 1 and 2
1-5 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5
1$ 19
3$ 17
15-3$ 15, 16, 17
1-3, 3$-$ 1, 2, 3, 17, 18, 19, 20
1, 2-5, 8, 4$-$ 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20
(empty) None
Ranges for imposition proofer flow (4 signatures, each with front/backside)

Range Flats that are in range
1-$ All
1, $ 1F, 1B, 4F and 4B
1 1F and 1B
1F 1F
1F Same as 1F


1F-3F 1F, 1B, 2F, 2B and 3F
F All fronts
$F 4F
Ranges for imposition proof with 2 webs, 2 signatures with a front/backside

1 1W1F, 1W1B, 1W2F and 1W2B
1,2 1W1F, 1W1B, 1W2F, 1W2B, 2W1F, 2W1B, 2W2F and 2W2B
1W1 1W1F and 1W1B
1W1F 1W1F
1F 1W1F and 1W2F
F All fronts
1-$ All
1W2-2W2F 1W2F, 1W2B, 2W1F, 2W1B and 2W2F
$ 2W1F, 2W1B, 2W2F and 2W2B
1$ 1W1F, 1W1B, 1W2F and 1W2B (referring to the signature
before the last one)
$W1F 2W1F
1$W1F 1W1F (referring to the flat before the specified flat of the
last signature)
$W1 2W1F and 2W1B
Web Proof
In order to remotely proof a result, you must place a Web Proof action in the
Production Plan. This Action may be inserted between two Task Processors in
your Production Plan. Web Proof pauses the processing flow as soon as the
preceding Task Processor has finished its task.
The Web Proof icon is displayed in Job List when one or more results of a job are
on hold pending a Web proof. In this case, the associated Flow Status icon is
colored blue.
NOTE: You cannot put a Web Proof Action on a 'PDF flat' path; i.e., between the
PDF Impose and Render Task Processors.

In the Results tab, the Job Layout pane indicates graphically which results
(pages or flats) are waiting for a Web proof, together with their current status.
The Activity pane indicates where in the Plan the Action was inserted, and which
Task Processors (if any) are currently active.
The local operator can continue a result waiting for approval (e.g. at the request
of the customer when the internet connection is down). This requires a
confirmation.
Web Proof Settings
Results must be continued by local operator as well

When selected, results approved by the remote user must also be approved by
the operator before processing is resumed.
Freeze results when approved/continued

Select this check box to prevent results being reprocessed once the pages have
been approved by the remote user.

Approval ready by
Here you can set a deadline for approving the web proof. All approvers receive a
notification if all the pages have not been approved by the entered date.
Soft Proof
Plan. Soft Proof pauses the processing flow as soon as the preceding Task
Processor has finished its task. This allows you to view the intermediate job
results produced by the preceding Task Processor (also referred to as a “soft
proof”).
The Soft Proof icon is displayed in Job List when one or more results of a job are
on hold pending a soft proof. In this case, the associated Flow Status icon is
colored blue.
(pages or flats) are waiting for a soft proof, together with their current status.
The Activity pane indicates where in the Plan the Action was inserted, and which
Task Processors (if any) are currently active.

You can manually continue processing the job. You do this by context-clicking
the job in the Job List, and selecting Resume from the context menu.
Soft Proof Settings

When you add or select the Soft Proof Action in the Production Plan, you will see
the default Action parameters displayed in the Settings pane. You can modify
these parameters as follows.
Send Notification
Select this check box if you want to distribute notifications when some or all of
the job results are ready. You can then choose one of two options:
Each time a result is ready A notification is delivered each time the Task Processor receives and processes
part of the job.
Only when all results are A single notification is delivered when the Task Processor has received and
ready processed all of the job.
For information an specifying notification recipients, see “Notify” on page 323.
Hard Copy Proof

Plan. Hard Copy Proof pauses the processing unconditionally as soon as the
preceding Task Processor has finished its task. The intermediate job results are
put on hold, pending Approval.
The Hard Copy Proof icon is displayed in the Job List when one or more results
of a job are held for Approval. In this case, the associated Flow Status icon is
colored blue.
The job’s Results tab indicates more precisely which results are waiting for
Approval.
To continue the job, you have to select the job and/or one or more results in the
Jobs Window, and select Approve from the Jobs menu.
Hard Copy Proof Settings

When you add or select the Hard Copy Proof Action in the Production Plan, you
will see the default Action parameters displayed in the Settings pane. You can
modify these parameters as follows:
Send Notification
Select this check box if you want to distribute notifications when some or all of
the job results are ready. You can then choose one of two options:
Each time a result is ready. A notification is delivered each time the Task Processor receives and processes
part of the job.
Only when all results are A single notification is delivered when the Task Processor has received and
ready. processed all of the job.
For information on specifying notification recipients, see “Notify” on page 323.
Wait for Results
The Wait for Results Action tells Apogee to hold the results at the action point
until results from another flow are made (i.e. finished). This action provides the
automated continuation of results in the main flow(s), when results in a
proofing flow have been finished.
The typical use of the Wait for Result Action is to connect proofing flows and
main flows.

Wait for Results Settings

When you add or select the Wait for Results Action in the Production Plan, you
modify these parameters as follows.
Flow to watch
Select the flow that will be watched by the Wait for Results action. The available
options display the names of all flows that can be watched.
Continue results in this flow

Only when the watched Select this option if you want to wait for all results in the watched flow to be
flow is completely finished finished before releasing the results.
When the required pages Select this option if you want to release a waiting result as soon as the corre-
finish in the watched flow sponding results in the watched flow are finished. Apogee will decide which
pages are needed for each watching result, and wait for those pages to finish in
the flow being watched.
Collect for Output
Whenever you add an Output Task Processor to your Production Plan, the
Collect for Output Action is automatically attached to it. This Action holds the
intermediate job results pending receipt of specific groups of job data, as speci-
fied in the Action’s output settings.
In the Results tab, the Job Layout pane indicates graphically which results are
being grouped for output. The Activity pane indicates where in the Plan the
Action was inserted, and which Task Processors (if any) are currently active.
The Collect for Output icon is displayed in the Job List when one or more results
of a job are waiting to be output. In this case, the associated Flow Status icon is
colored blue.
If the job results are only partially complete (i.e., they are still being collected),
the pages/flats in the Results tab turn blue, but the Collect for Output Action
icon does not. This icon turns blue only when all the results have been collected.
To output these results, see “Continuing Jobs” on page 197.

NOTE: You can place a Collect for Output Action at any point in your Production
Plan.
Collect for Output Settings

When you add or select the Collect for Output Action in the Production Plan, you
modify these parameters as follows:
Group and print by

Allows you to specify how the various sections of your job will be arranged and
grouped for printing.
 For a job with imposition, this may be:
 Job: All separations of the job are first grouped together, and then
printed.
 Version: All the versions of the job are grouped and then printed in
sequence.
 Signature: The job will be grouped together as a series of signatures (a

series of press sheets with both front and back print data), and these
signatures will be printed in sequence.
 Web: For newspaper printing (you can have multiple webs, each of which
provides one or more inserts for the completed paper).
 Side: The job will be grouped together into 2 sets - front and back, and the
two sets will be printed in sequence.
 Separation: The job will be grouped together into sets of separations

(CMYK and any spot colors), and each set will be printed in sequence.
 For a job without imposition, this may be:
 Job: All separations of the job are first grouped together, and then
printed.
 Page: The job will be grouped together as a series of pages, and these will
be printed in sequence.
 Separation: The job will be grouped together as 4 sets of process separa-

tions (CMYK), and each set will be printed in sequence.

For example, if you select Separation, Apogee will group together all the Cyan
separations, and will print these first, followed by the Magenta, Yellow, Black,
and spot color separations (i.e., sheet 1 cyan, sheet 2 cyan, sheet 1 magenta,
sheet 2 magenta, etc.). If you select Signature, Apogee will gather the job
together as a sequential series of signatures (i.e., sheet 1 front, sheet 1back,
sheet 2 front, sheet 2 back, etc.)
NOTE: Since most users adopt a specific method of job output for their specific
workflow requirements, it is not likely that you would want to change this
setting very often.
Keep versions apart Select this option to collect the press sheets by product version (e.g. English,
French, German).
Print when
Automatically as soon as a Select this check box if you want Apogee to automatically start printing the
group is complete selected job results when a group is available.
Automatically when all Select this check box if you want Apogee to automatically start printing the
groups are complete selected job results when all groups are available.
Options
Notify when group is ready Select this check box if you want Apogee to send a message as soon as the
for printing selected job results are available.
After Hours
Plan. The After Hours settings suspend the transfer of results from the preceding
Task Processor to the next one in the flow until a predefined date and/or time is
reached.
The After Hours icon is displayed in Job List when one or more results of a job
are on hold pending the specified date/time. In this case, the associated Flow
Status icon is colored blue.
(pages or flats) are waiting for After Hours processing, together with their
current status. The Activity pane indicates where in the Plan the Action was
inserted, and which Task Processors (if any) are currently active.

You can manually continue processing the job. You do this by context-clicking
the job in the Job List, and selecting Resume from the context menu.
After Hours Settings

When you add or select the After Hours Action in the Production Plan, you will
see the default Action parameters displayed in the Settings pane. You can modify
these parameters as follows.
Daily
Select this option if you want to specify a daily time period (e.g. 18.00 until
23:00) during which job results are allowed to pass through to the next Task
Processor.
Daily, between Select the time to start passing results to the next Task Processor.
and Select the time to stop passing results to the next Task Processor.
Keep Result
This Action may be placed above a Task Processor in your Production Plan. Keep
Results passes on the intermediate job results to the next Task Processor in the
flow without interruption. By default, when a Task Processor passes on its
results, it does not retain a copy of them. However, the Keep Result Action
instructs Apogee to keep this Task Processor’s results.
The Keep Result Action is automatically added whenever you add an Input Task
Processor to your Production Plan. This ensures that the intermediate results
(the input documents) are saved and kept on the system. This allows you to run
fast job remakes, without having to find and input the same source documents.
Keep Result is always applied by default to any Task Processor which immedi-
ately precedes a Run List in a Production Plan.
NOTE: The Keep Result Action has no options or settings.
Archive Result

This Action may be placed above a Task Processor in your Production Plan.
Archive Result passes on the job results to the next Task Processor in the flow
without interruption. However, it also marks these intermediate results for
archiving on the Apogee System.
The Archive icon is displayed in the Job List when one or more results of a job are
being archived.
(pages or flats) are archived. The Activity pane indicates where in the Plan the
Action was inserted, and which Task Processor’s (if any) are currently active.
NOTE: The Archive Result Action has no options or settings.
When and where are the Results Archived?
You can specify when and where these results are archived by switching to the
System Overview window, and double-clicking the Apogee System icon in the
Hardware pane, and then double-clicking the Job Housekeeping icon. For more
information, see “Job Housekeeping Settings” on page 629.
Notify
This Action can be placed above a Task Processor in your Production Plan. Notify
passes on the intermediate job results from the associated Task Processor to the
next Task Processor in the flow without interruption. However, one of three
predefined notifications is also generated, indicating how much of the interme-
diate job results are available.
Notify Settings
When you add or select the Notify Action in the Production Plan, you will see the
default Action parameters displayed in the Settings pane. You can modify these
parameters as follows:
When
You can then choose one of three options:
When first result is ready A notification is delivered when the Task Processor produces the first interme-
diate job results.

Each time a result is ready A notification is delivered each time the Task Processor produces intermediate
job results.
Only when all results are A single notification is delivered when the Task Processor produces the final job
ready results.
Send
Select either or both of the following check boxes:
As notification To distribute notifications when some or all of the job results are ready.
As e-mail To distribute e-mails when some or all of the job results are ready. In this case,
you must enter an e-mail address in the adjacent box.
Additional Text
The text that you enter here will appear in the notification that is generated.
Milestone
This Action can be placed above a Task Processor in your Production Plan.
Milestone passes on the intermediate job results from the associated Task
Processor to the next Task Processor in the flow without interruption. However,
a notification is generated if the associated Task Processor does not deliver all
intermediate job results by a predefined date and time.
The Milestone icon is displayed in Job List when a job has generated a Milestone
notification. The job’s Results tab indicates more precisely which results (pages
or flats) are not yet available.
Milestone Settings
When you add or select the Milestone Action in the Production Plan, you will see
the default Action parameters displayed in the Settings pane. You can modify
these parameters as follows:
Notify if all results not ready by:

Date Select the date by which all intermediate job results are required.
Time Select the time of day by which all intermediate job results are required.

Pane (Ticket Editor) configured to define exactly how the job is to be input, processed, and output.
When you select one of the components, you will see the associated settings
displayed below in the Settings Pane (Ticket Editor).
Below each Task Processor icon, there is a drop-down list from which you can
select a group of predefined settings (a Parameter Set). If none is selected, the
Task Processor uses its initial settings.
The last Task Processor in a flow is followed by a Flow Identifier. By default, this
always indicates a Main Output flow. However, you can redefine it as described
in “Creating a Production Plan with Multiple Proofing Flows” on page 345.
Flow Identifier
For each Ticket you create, you define one or more output paths in the Produc-
tion Plan. For example, you may want your jobs to be output both to a proofing
device and to a platesetter. When you set this up in the Plan tab, you can select a
specific flow identifier at the end of each flow in your Production Plan.
The following flow options are available:

Main Output: The default flow for all jobs, used for output to a high resolution output device.
PrinDrive DQS (Digital Quick Strip): An optional or alternate flow to the Main Output flow,
which supports the PrintDrive DQS mode of Apogee Series3.
Display: A flow which is used to output the job results to a monitor for high-resolution soft
proofing.
Automatic: If this option is selected, Apogee will automatically select the most appropriate
icon, based on the content of the flow.
Settings Pane The Settings pane displays the settings for the component (Task Processor or
Action) that is currently selected in the Production Plan pane.
(Ticket Editor)
The settings may be locked, as indicated by the Lock icon which is located in the
top right of the Settings pane.
If you want to edit individual settings, click the Lock icon to toggle off the lock,
and then edit the settings according to your job requirements.
The name of the selected parameter set is displayed in a box at the top of the
Settings pane (“initial” by default). If you make any changes to an “initial”
parameter set, these changes are indicated by an asterisk in front of the “initial”
parameter set name.
You will also see a “Different Processing” check box in the top right of the
Settings pane.

This is used specifically in multi-part jobs to select alternate processing settings

for one or more parts of the job (for example, different color settings for the
cover). If you select this option in a normal job, you will see that the job contains
a single part (a Production Set), called “Body plates”. For more information on
multi-part jobs, refer to “Multi-part Jobs in the Plan Tab” on page 327.
For more information, see “What Are Task Processor Settings?” on page 46. For
details on editing Task Processor Parameter Sets, see “To create, duplicate, edit,
delete, import or export Parameter Sets” on page 664.
For information on individual Task Processor settings, refer to the relevant Task
Processor section. For information on individual Action settings, refer to “Two
Types of Actions” on page 309.
Multi-part Jobs in The Production Plan visually highlights with a thick blue underscore those
operations that have different processing settings defined.
the Plan Tab
TIP: You can only specify When you add a Task Processor to a plan, it has by default the same settings for
different settings for specific the whole job (i.e, it is set to single processing). To specify different settings,
Task Processors. select the Different Processing option in the header of the Settings pane. A
production sets table is then displayed, listing the different production sets,
including ranges and parts, as defined in the Products tab.
NOTE: You cannot manage productions sets from here.
The single processing set is used as the default set for when you create new
production sets. Apogee copies the parameter values used for the single
processing mode to each production set. You can switch back and forth between
the two modes without loosing any edits.

When you create a new production set (in the Products tab), it becomes visible
to all operations that support it (and that have Different Processing selected).
See See “Managing Production Sets” on page 307.
The Parameter Set column displays the selected parameter set(s). You can select
a different parameter set from the drop-down list, or change the name (by
double clicking it).
Press and Output Task Processors feature an extra Device column from which
you can select the device you want to use. By default, the device and parameter
selection is identical for all production sets, and matches the device and param-
eter set that was selected in single processing mode.
NOTE: Since JDF has no names for a set of parameters, Apogee uses generic
names for displaying the parameter set name. This generic name is of the form
JDF Set, optionally followed by space and a number to differentiate different
parameter values for different production sets.
The Parameter Set Drop-down menu
You can change the parameter set in the flow by selecting another from the
Parameter Set drop down list. This assigns the selected parameter set to all
production sets.

Save As
To save the parameter set, select Save As. Apogee prompts for a name, after
which it saves the current values as a parameter set with the given name. Doing
so also sets the current selection to the newly created parameter set.
Manage Parameter Sets
Select this item to open the Parameter Sets Resource overview, with the current
operation selected (Administrator only).
Output
 CtP, CtF and Proofers: If you select Different Settings in the Output opera-
tion, you automatically select them for the Image parameters as well. This is
because the image parameters of a production set must always correspond to
the selected output device. However, you can only switch between devices of
the same class (CtP, CtF or Proofer).
 Press: The parameter view of the Press task processor presents the different
press task processors in the production set table, allowing you to select a
particular one. The Generic Press task processor only offers parameter sets.
The Run List Task Processor
 General settings: The Number of Pages option is shared with the corre-
sponding item in the Products tab: You can change its value in either place.
The effects of changing it is the same as with previous versions of Apogee.
The First page starts at option is not available in multi-part jobs with multiple
parts. Instead, it is set to `1'. It is enabled if the job has a single part.
 Hard copy proofing: Introducing production sets removes the need to have
multiple proofing flows, one for every press flow. When you set the param-
eter set of the press in the proofing flow to (from main), the proofer press
follows the settings from the main press, including the set up for different
processing. If you do not use (from main), you will have to manually specify
the parameters for the different processing.

330 USING THE PAGES TAB
Using the Pages Tab

For each job you select, the Pages tab displays both the list of pages contained in
the Page Store, and the pages that have been included in the Run List.
This tab is subdivided into three panes:
 Products
 The Page Store (Ticket Editor)
 The Run List (Ticket Editor)
The Pages tab is disabled if there is no Run List in the selected job:
If you are creating a new job ticket, the Pages tab remains disabled until you add
a Run List to the Production Plan.
The Pages tab is not available in the Hot Ticket Editor.
Products In this pane you see the same list of products and parts that you see in the
Products tab (see “Products and Parts List” on page 291). Select a product or part
in this list to display the corresponding Run List. Products and parts can also be
selected by clicking the selectors at the top of the Pages tab (Products: on the
left; Parts: on the right). You can show/hide the Products pane by clicking the
show/hide button in the top left corner of the tab.
For versioning jobs, which can only consist of one product, this panel lists the
versions.

1 2 3
1 Show/hide the Products pane

2 Product selectors
3 Part selectors
The Page Store The Page Store may be either a Private Page Store, which displays only the
documents for a single job, or may include one or more Public Page Stores which
(Ticket Editor) display the documents created by all Page Store Out Task Processors.
The Page Store lists the documents that have been input and that may be added
to your Run List.

Apogee automatically names each document with the name of the input file. If
no name is available, Apogee uses the generic name “Document”, immediately
followed by a sequence number. If you add a document that is already known by
Apogee (e.g. from another job), then the same document name is used.
When you expand a document folder, Apogee lists the individual pages in the
selected document. It is from this view that you can select the pages that you
want to include in your job’s Run List.

332 USING THE PAGES TAB
The Run List (Ticket The Run List displays the pages that have been selected from the Page Store, and
that will be included in your job.
Editor)
A page in the Run List shows similar information to the same page in the Page
Store. The page name is the document name as displayed in the Page Store,
followed by the page number. Placeholders and blank pages do not have a name.
The Run List provides the following information about the listed pages:
May display up to four columns of page adjustment icons, indicating that

Adjustments
the positioning of this individual page has been modified (offset).
The size of the placeholder (as specified in the Production Plan) is different
from the size of the page that is placed on it (imposition jobs only).
The page label (selected using View > Page Labels). Page labels are dis-
Lbl
played when the Run List is (automatically) updated with new revisions.
# The page number in the Run List.
Page The name of the page (the same as in the Page Store).
Rev The revision number of this page (if any).
The Signature to which the page belongs (when imposition is included in
Sig
the Plan).
A variety of information may also be displayed in the placard area above the Run
List.
The total number of empty placeholders in the Run List. If you position your cursor
over this icon, Apogee displays a Tooltip indicating how many placeholders are
empty, placed and blank.
The number of spot colors used in the job. If you position your cursor over this icon,
Apogee displays a Tooltip indicating the spot color names. If you click this icon, Apo-
gee displays the separation settings in the Plan tab.
Indicates that the Run List contains pages with different sizes.
NOTE: For a versioning or a multi-part job, the layout of the Run List is
page 228 and “Multi-part Jobs in the Run List” on page 232.
You can add pages or documents to the Run List, move and delete pages from it,
and add blank pages. You can also change the number of pages in the Run List,
although this might invalidate any imposition scheme you may have selected.
Job Tickets require a Run List: They will not work correctly without one. Hot
Tickets can also use Run Lists, but do not require one if no imposition is specified
in the Production Plan.

Using the Results Tab

The Results tab allows you to view the results of the selected job. This tab
NOTE: The Results tab is not available in the Hot Ticket Editor.
This tab is divided into two panes:
 The Job Layout Pane (Ticket Editor)
 The Separations Pane (Ticket Editor)
Above these two panes, you will see a row with the Production Sets selector and
one or more Flow Identifier icons, corresponding to each flow in the selected job.
When you click on any of these icons, you will see the results for this particular
flow.
NOTE: If you are viewing a versioning or multi-part job, the layout of the Results
tab is considerably different (depending on the specific parameters of the input
documents). For more information, refer to “Versioning Jobs in the Results Tab”
on page 249 and “Multi-part Jobs in the Results Tab” on page 253.
The Job Layout Displays thumbnails of the Run List pages of the selected job. Status icons,
corner folds, and colored backgrounds provide additional information about the
Pane (Ticket Editor) current status and orientation of each of the displayed thumbnails.
You can then double-click any of the thumbnails to launch the appropriate
viewer for this specific page. If the job has not yet been successfully processed,
you will see only empty placeholders. Double-clicking a thumbnail launches the
appropriate viewer (Acrobat for PDF documents or Raster Preview for Digital
Film).
You must correctly configure the location of Adobe Acrobat to enable raster
previews. For more information, refer to the Apogee Installation Guide.
NOTE: For a versioning job, the layout is considerably different (depending on

the specific parameters of the input documents). For more information, refer to
“Versioning Jobs in the Results Tab” on page 249.

334 USING THE RESULTS TAB
The Separations Displays thumbnails of each of the separations for the page you select in the Job
Layout pane. Double-clicking a thumbnail launches the Raster Preview viewer.
Pane (Ticket Editor)

Working with Job Tickets and Hot Tickets

The procedures for creating and editing Job and Hot Tickets are similar. For
both, you specify your options in the Administration, Options, and Plan tabs. The
difference is that Job Tickets also include Pages and Results tabs, where you can
define a Run List and imposition layout.
Preparing Your Before starting, it is a good idea to first define the type of Production Plan you
require. This will determine the number and types of input channels and output
Plan devices you will need to configure, the number of flows required, and the
resources and Parameter Sets you will need.
Job or Hot Ticket?

If you are creating a new ticket, the type of ticket you should choose depends on
the number and formats of the documents that you want to process.
Layout Ticket?
Choose a Layout Ticket or Layout Hot Ticket for Sign & Display jobs which are
prepared in the Layout editor.
New Ticket or Template?

Apogee provides you with a series of ready-made ticket templates which can be
used as a starting point for most types of workflow. Wherever possible, you are
advised to start from one of these templates, and adapt it according to your
requirements. When you are more familiar with the Apogee System, you can of
course create new tickets from scratch.
Do You Want one or More Proofing Flows?

If you want to include proofing in your Plan, you will need to add one or more
flows to your main flow. To avoid time-consuming editing later, it is better to
sketch out your proposed Production Plan in advance. Remember that Imposi-
tion and Page Proof flows must be connected to the main flow at specific points,
and must each be configured with their own unique output devices.
Which Components Do You Need in your Plan?

The components you need in your Production Plan depend on the ticket type,
and your prepress requirements. There are some rules, however:
 You always need at least one input component, one processing component,
and one output component.
 A Job Ticket must have a Run List.

336 WORKING WITH JOB TICKETS AND HOT TICKETS
 A Run List is not required for a Hot Ticket. Documents are delivered to an
input channel, and the input channel creates one job per document.
 If you include the Impose component, you will also need to add a Run List
component. You can input multiple documents per job for jobs which require
imposition, since not all the documents of the job have to be delivered at the
same time.
 When you create a flow using either an imagesetter or platesetter output

device, you always need to add a Press Task Processor to the end of the flow.
This is not required when you use Export with Trapping, or proofer output
devices.
Are All Necessary Resources Available?

By default, Apogee associates some standard Resources (fonts, halftones, etc.)
with the available Task Processors. However, you may need to supplement these
with additional resources of your own.
What happens in a The following sequence of events takes place in a typical Production Plan:
Processing Flow  A document is input via an input channel (e.g. Hot Folder).
 The document is processed by the first Task Processor, and the intermediate
job results are passed to the next Task Processor in the flow.
 Intermediate job Results are passed successively from Task Processor to Task
Processor in the Production Plan flow.
 By default, once a Task Processor passes on its results, it does not keep a copy
of them.
 Inserting Actions allows you to control the flow, and to save and view inter-
mediate results.
 The last Task Processor in the flow is a Print, Press, or Export Task Processor
to which the final results are delivered.
Creating or Editing You create a new ticket using the Ticket Editor. The Ticket Editor can be opened
from any of the main windows in the Apogee Client.
a Ticket
To edit an existing Job Ticket, you must first select the associated job in the Job
List. The jobs displayed in the Job List comprise both the job data and the job
ticket (see “What Are Job Tickets?” on page 42).

To edit an existing Hot Ticket (from which several jobs may already have been
created), you must select the ticket from the Hot Tickets list (see “What Are Hot
Tickets?” on page 43).
NOTE: The Layout Editor and not the Ticket Editor is opened when you choose to
create Layout Tickets or Layout Hot Tickets. See “Layout Editor” on page 477.
 To create a new ticket based on a template

1 Choose File > New from Templates. (CTRL-N).
The Templates dialog box is displayed with the Quick Fill panel.
2 Select either the Jobs Tickets or the Layout Tickets tab to create a Job Ticket
or a Layout Ticket. You will also see these tabs if you are creating Hot Tickets.
3 Select a Ticket Category.
The Ticket Templates that are available in this category are displayed in the
Template panel.
4 Select one of the Ticket Templates.
If the creator of this template entered a template description, then this is

displayed in the panel on the right.
If the creator of this template included an Impose Task Processor in the Plan,
the Product and Parts panes are also active.

5 Enter the Administration, Product and Parts details in the Quick Fill panel
and click Open, or click Open directly and enter the details on the tabs as
described below.
The Ticket Editor appears. If you defined a Product and its Parts, the Ticket
opens with the Products tab selected. The Ticket uses the Administration,
Product and Parts details that you entered. Otherwise, the Administration
tab is selected.
6 Complete the Administration tab. For details on each of the fields, see “Using
the Administration Tab” on page 280.
7 Select the Options tab, and define how the jobs which use this ticket are to be
handled (archiving, notifications, etc.). For details on each of the fields, see
“Using the Options Tab” on page 284.
8 Select the Plan tab and create a Production Plan in the Production Plan pane.
See “Creating or Editing a Production Plan” on page 339.
9 Choose File >Submit to submit the Ticket.
For more information, see “Submitting Tickets” on page 350.
 To quickly create a blank ticket

1 From any of the main windows, click CTRL+ALT+N.
A new blank ticket is opened in the Ticket Editor.
2 Edit the ticket, then choose File >Submit to submit it.
 To select and edit a Ticket

2 In the Job List, select the job you want to edit., and click the Edit Ticket
button in the Toolbar.
The job is put on hold and the associated ticket is opened in the Ticket Editor.
3 Edit the ticket using the procedures described in the rest of this chapter (see
“Creating or Editing a Production Plan” on page 339).
Any errors you introduce will generate the following type of message in the
Tab Area:

You can then click the error status icon to access the Problem Report (see
“Problem Report” on page 166).
TIP: Any existing results 4 When you have finished editing the ticket, submit your changes (see
which are not affected by the “Submitting Tickets” on page 350).
changes are kept - unlike the
Re-render command, which Apogee checks the changes, determines what needs to be reprocessed, and
forces the re-rendering of automatically starts reprocessing those results.
results, whether or not they
are required.
Creating or Editing You need to create a Production Plan for both Job and Hot Tickets. You do this
in 5 steps:
a Production Plan
 Adding the First Input Task Processor to Your Production Plan
 Dragging Additional Task Processors to Your Production Plan
 Connecting Task Processors in your Production Plan
 Setting or Changing Task Processor Settings
 Adding Actions to Your Production Plan
Once you have created a basic single-flow Production Plan, you can expand it by
adding extra proofing flows. The following sections explain how to do this, as
well as how to edit and rearrange your Plan:
 Creating a Production Plan with Multiple Proofing Flows
 Deleting a Component from Your Production Plan
Adding the First Input Task Processor to Your Production Plan

When you create a new ticket, there is no Production Plan. You can start building
one by adding the first Task Processor to the Production Plan pane.

 To add the first Task Processor to your Production Plan

1 In the Ticket Editor window, select the Plan tab.
You will see the Production Plan Components pane on the left. This gives you
access to all the available Task Processors and Actions that you can include in
your Production Plan.
2 Select the Input tab in the Production Plan Components pane.
3 Select an Input Task Processor, drag it onto the Production Plan pane, and
drop it anywhere in the left of the pane.
Since this is the first Task Processor in your Plan, you will see that it has a
square gray connector on the right. This is the point at which you can connect
the next Task Processor that you add to this flow. Task Processors use a
number of different types of connectors, as described in “Connecting Task
Processors in your Production Plan” on page 341.
NOTE: A Keep Results action is always added to input Task Processors.
Below the Task Processor, you will see the name of the initial settings file that
the Task Processor will use. If you click this name, you will see a list of all the
available Parameter Sets for this Task Processor. For more information, see
“Setting or Changing Task Processor Settings” on page 342.
Currently, this is the first and only Task Processor in your flow.
NOTE: When you add any component to the Production Plan, the default
component settings are displayed in the Settings pane.
Dragging Additional Task Processors to Your Production Plan

You create a Main prepress flow by linking together a series of Task Processors
in the Production Plan pane.
 To add more Task Processor to your Production Plan

1 Select the Input, Processing, or Output tab in the Production Plan Compo-
nents pane.

The type of Task Processor you can add depends on which Task Processor you
want to connect it to.
2 Click on a Task Processor, and drag it to the right edge of the last Task
Processor in the Production Plan pane.
 If you see a green connection, it means that this is a valid addition to your
Production Plan.
 If you see a red connection, then this combination of Task Processors is

invalid. For more information, see “Connecting Task Processors in your
Production Plan” on page 341.
3 When you have a valid connection, release the mouse button to place the
Task Processor.
4 Continue adding Task Processors to the flow.
Connecting Task Processors in your Production Plan

To build a flow in the Production Plan pane, you need to link together a series of
Task Processors. However, you can only make links between “compatible” Task
Processors.
Each Task Processor has a data-in connector and a data-out connector (Input
Task Processors only have a data-out connector). These connectors indicate the
type of data that can be input to, or output from the Task Processor, and are
displayed graphically as follows:
 Round connectors: These represent PDF or PostScript data.
 A Task Processor with round data-in/data-out connectors (e.g. Impose or

Preflight) can only receive or deliver PDF or PostScript data.
A round connector can only be connected to a square connector, or to

another round connector.
 Arrow connectors: These represent raster data.

 A Task Processor with an arrow data-out connector (e.g. Digital Film

Proof) can only deliver raster data.
An arrow connector can only be connected to a square connector.
 Square connectors: These represent multiple data types (PDF, PostScript,

Raster, other).
 A Task Processor with square data-in/data-out connectors (e.g. PDF

Render, shown above) can receive or deliver any type of data.
A square connector can be connected to any other type of connector.
NOTE: The Run List Task Processor cannot receive PostScript data.
Setting or Changing Task Processor Settings

You customize each Task Processor in the Plan by opening the Task Processor’s
list box and selecting one of the available predefined Parameter Sets.
When you select a Parameter Set, the corresponding settings are displayed in the
Settings pane (below the Production Plan pane). If you wish you can directly
modify any of the displayed settings.
The Task Processor list box also has two other options:
 Save As: Displays a dialog box which allows you to enter a name and save the
current settings as a new parameter set.

 Manage Parameter Sets: Opens the Parameter Sets dialog box, where you
can create, duplicate, edit, delete, import or export parameter sets.
Creating a Production Plan with a Single Main Output Flow

To create a simple Production Plan, you need to build a single Main Output flow
containing an Input, Processing, and Output Task Processor.
 To create a single main output flow

1 Start a new ticket, click the Plan tab, and add an Input Task Processor to the
Production Plan as described in “Adding the First Input Task Processor to
Your Production Plan” on page 339. For example, add a Hot Folder.
2 Add a Processing Task Processor to the Production Plan as described in

“Dragging Additional Task Processors to Your Production Plan” on page 340.
For example, add Render.
3 Add an Output Task Processor to the Production Plan. For example, add TIFF
Imagesetter.
4 In the Production Plan pane, click the Input Hot Folder Task Processor.
5 The default Hot Folder settings are displayed in the Settings pane. By default,
the location of the Hot Folder is specified as:
\\$SYSTEMCOMPUTER\HotFolderRoot\$ORDER\
The default location uses the $ORDER variable. This means a Hot Folder will
be automatically created as a subfolder under the HotFolderRoot, using the
job’s order number as the Hot Folder name.
6 Click the Settings list of each of the remaining Task Processor Operations and
select one of the available Parameter Sets as described in “Setting or
Changing Task Processor Settings” on page 342.
Adding Actions to Your Production Plan

You control the flow of job data through the Production Plan by inserting Actions
at specific points in the flow. Actions can also be used to keep track of your job
results at any point in the flow.
 To add a flow control action


2 Select the Actions tab in the Production Plan Components pane.
To add a Flow Control Action, such as After Hours, you will need to drag and
drop the Action onto the right edge of the Task Processor whose results will
be held, pending the specified time.
3 Click on one of the Flow Control Actions and, holding down the mouse
button, drag it onto the Production Plan pane to the right edge of the selected
Task Processor.
The right edge of the Task Processor is highlighted with a blue bar when the
Action is in the correct position.
4 Release the mouse button to drop the Action into place.
NOTE: You can add up to 4 Flow Control Actions, such as After Hours, interrupt the flow (indicated by
Flow Control Actions, and 4 the break in the flowline). The Action icon is positioned above and to the
Result Actions to any Task right of the selected Task Processor, after the break.
Processor.
5 If you select the Action, you will see the default Action parameters displayed
below in the Settings pane. You can modify these parameters as described in
the topics listed below.
6 If you click the Results tab, you will also see any Flow Control Actions you
have added. Here, the Action icons have a background color to indicate their
current status. For more information, see “Working with Jobs in the Results
Tab” on page 234.
 To add a result action

2 Select the Actions tab in the Production Plan Components pane.
To add a Result Action, such as Archive Result, you will need to drag and
drop the Action directly on top of the Task Processor whose results you want
to archive.

3 Click on one of the four Result Actions and, holding down the mouse button,
drag it onto the selected Task Processor in the Production Plan pane.
The background color of the Task Processor changes to light grey when the
Action is in the correct position.
4 Release the mouse button to drop the Action into place.
NOTE: You can add up to 4 Result Actions, such as Archive Result, do not interrupt the flow. The Action
Flow Control Actions, and 4 icon is positioned above and to the right of the selected Task Processor.
Result Actions to any Task
Processor. If you select the Action, you will see the default Action parameters displayed in
the Settings pane. You can modify these parameters as described in the topics
listed below.
Deleting a Component from Your Production Plan

Proceed as follows to delete a component (Task Processor or Action) from your
Production Plan:
1 Open the Ticket for editing, and select the Plan tab.
2 Select an Action or Task Processor, and do one of the following:
 Press Delete.
 Click the Delete button.
If you delete a Task Processor, a gap appears in the Production Plan. You can
close the gap by dragging one of the broken connectors to the other. You
could also insert and reconnect another Task Processor in the gap.
Creating a Production Plan with Multiple Proofing Flows

When you build a Production Plan, you must always create a Main flow.
However, if you want to include proofing and/or output to additional devices,
you will need to create one or more parallel flows, and link them to your Main
flow.

The following procedures describe, step-by-step, how to create a Production

Plan comprising three flows:
 Main flow
 Imposition Proof flow
 Page Proof flow
NOTE: In each of these procedures, you will need to specify settings for each
component. You will also need to submit the ticket when you have finished.
 To create a main output flow

1 Create a new Ticket, and select the Plan tab.
2 Create a single Main Output flow, adding components in the following

sequence:
Hot Folder - Normalize - Run List - Impose - PDF Render - TIFF Platesetter -
Press
Your flow should look like this:
Notice that a “Collect for Output” Action is automatically inserted between

the PDF Render and TIFF Platesetter Task Processors.
NOTE: When you create a main flow using either an imagesetter or platesetter
output device, you always need to add a Press Task Processor to the end of the
flow. This is not required when you use export or proofer output devices.
A flow always displays a Flow Identifier after the last Task Processor the flow.
By default, this always indicates a Main Output flow. However, you can
redefine this as described in “Creating a Production Plan with Multiple
Proofing Flows” on page 345.
 To add an Imposition Proof flow to your Main flow

When included in a Production Plan, an Imposition Proof flow should branch
from the Main flow after the Impose component. This ensures that the results
from the Main flow and the Imposition flow are identical in layout.
1 Start with the main flow you created in the preceding procedure.

2 Select another PDF Render component from the list of available Processing
components in the Production Plan Components pane and drag-and-drop it
exactly below the first PDF Renderer in your main flow.
3 Click the square connector on the left edge of this second PDF Renderer.
4 Hold down the mouse button, and drag it up to the round connector on the
right side of the Impose component in the Main Output flow.
A connecting line extends between the two components, and is colored

green, indicating that this is a valid connection.
5 Release the mouse button.
You now have the start of a second flow, extending from the first.
6 Add a Proofer output component to the second flow.
7 Add a Press to the end of the second flow.
Notice the Flow Identifier at the end of the second flow: It automatically
indicates that this is an Imposition Proof flow.
8 Click the Flow Identifier to display the name of the flow.
 To add a Page Proof flow

When included in a Production Plan, a Page Proof flow should branch from the
Main flow after the Run List and before the Impose component.

NOTE: You always need a Run List if you want to select individual pages for
proofing.
1 Select a third PDF Render component, drag it the Production Plan Compo-
nents pane, and drop it exactly below the PDF Renderer in your Imposition
Proof flow.
2 Click the square connector on the left edge of this third PDF Renderer.
3 Hold down the mouse button, and drag it up to the round connector on the
right side of the Run List in the Main Output flow.
A connecting line extends between the two components, and is colored

green, indicating that this is a valid connection.
4 Release the mouse button.
5 Add a Proofer output component to the third flow.
6 Add a Press to the end of the third flow.
Notice the Flow Identifier at the end of the third flow: It automatically
indicates that this is a Page Proof flow.
7 Click the Flow Identifier to display the name of the flow:
NOTE: When Page Proofs are printed on a large format proofer, a simple
media saving page layout should be used. To get as many pages on a sheet as
possible, you must switch on the media optimization feature in the output
device.

 To control your Production Plan using Actions
Finally, you need to insert some Actions in your Plan to control the sequence of
events when a document is processed.
 Insert two Hard Copy Proof Actions in the Main flow, one immediately before
the Impose component and one immediately after it.
Your Production Plan should look like this:
You now have a multiple flow Production Plan, which allows you to first
check and approve a page proof, then an imposition proof, and finally to
output your job to an imagesetter.
This works as follows:
 Page Proof: A document is input and the job results are held in the main
flow just before being imposed. However, the results are also passed on to
the Page Proofing flow, where they are rendered and output to a Page
Proofer. The Page Proof allows you to check colors and content.
 Imposition Proof: If you approve the Page Proof, the results which are on
hold at the first point in the main flow are resumed, and the job is
imposed. After this, the job results are again held in the main flow.
However, they are also passed on to the Imposition Proofing flow, where
they are output to an Imposition Proofer. The Imposition Proof allows you
to check the layout of the job.
 Print to Imagesetter: If you approve the Imposition Proof, the results

which are on hold in the main flow are resumed again, and the job is
finally output to an imagesetter.
Exporting Job Results
When you build a Production Plan, you may simply want to export your job
results to file, instead of sending them to an output device. In this case, you need
to add the Export component to the end of your Production Plan flow.

Export allows you to export processed job results to a specific directory in PDF or
PostScript file format. These files can then be used outside the Apogee environ-
ment. For more information, refer to “Export Settings” on page 825.
 To export job results

1 Create a new Ticket, and select the Plan tab.
2 Create a single Main Output flow, adding some basic input and processing
components. For example, you could add the following:
Hot Folder - Normalize - Run List - Impose
3 Select the Output tab in the Production Plan Components pane, and select
the Export component.
4 Drag the component to the Production Plan pane, and add it to the end of
your flow.
Your flow should look like this:
5 Select Export and enter the export settings you require, as described in
“Export Settings” on page 825.
Submitting Tickets When you have completed the information in Using the Administration Tab,
Using the Options Tab, and Using the Plan Tab, you are ready to send your Ticket
to the Apogee System. This process is referred to as submitting a ticket. You may
do this when you create a new Ticket and send it to the Apogee System for the
first time, or when you open an existing Ticket for editing, and send the updated
Ticket to the Apogee System.
NOTE: When you submit a ticket, Apogee automatically reprocesses only the
required results. This is different from using the Re-render command, which re-
renders only the results that follow the selected editing point in the Production
Plan.
 To submit a ticket
 From the Ticket Editor window, choose File > Submit Job.
This process takes a few moments.

If your Production Plan is valid, you will be able to see your ticket either in
the Hot Tickets window (Hot Tickets), or in the Jobs window (Job Tickets).
The name of the ticket will be the same as the Order Number you specified in
the Administration tab.
If your Production Plan is not valid, the Problem Report is displayed,

indicating where the problem is. For more information, see “Problem Report”
on page 166.
Opening a Ticket You can open an existing ticket as follows.
 To open a ticket
1 Choose File > Open. (CTRL+O).
2 Locate the folder where your tickets are stored, select a ticket, and click OK.
Ticket files can be recognized by their .ajt filename extension (e.g. Agfa.ajt).
Saving a Ticket You can save a Ticket to file for future use. When you save a Ticket, the Ticket is
exported from the Apogee environment, and is stored as a file in the specified
save location.
Apogee Ticket Icons in Windows Explorer

You can see the saved Ticket files using your local file system. The icons and file
extensions vary according to the type of Ticket:
Saved Commercial Job Ticket(.ajt)
Saved Commercial Hot Ticket(.aht)
 To save a ticket
1 Create or modify your ticket as described in “Creating or Editing a Ticket” on
page 336.
2 Choose File > Save (CTRL+S) or File > Save As...
3 Browse to your Tickets folder, enter a filename, and click Save.
4 If you have customized the default location of the Tickets folder, open your
Preferences (choose Edit > Preferences...) to check the folder location.

Creating a Public To create a Public Page Store, you must start from a blank Public Page Store
template.
Page Store
 To create a Public Page Store
1 Create a new Job Ticket from a Blank Page Store Job template.
2 In the Administration tab, enter a Public Page Store name.
3 Select the Plan tab, and build your Production Plan, ending with the Page
Store component.
In a Page Store ticket, only the following Task Processors are valid:
 All Input Task Processors
 Normalize
 Preflight
 Page Store
NOTE: The Page Store component can be found in the Output tab, and is only
available when you are creating a job based on a Blank Page Store Job
template.
For example, you can add the following components to your Production
Plan:
Hot Folder - Normalize - Page Store
4 Select Normalize.

5 In the Settings pane, you may need to click the Unlock button so that you can
edit the Normalize settings.
6 Select the PDF Processing tab.
7 Deselect the ‘Convert all Pantone color names to’ check box.
You cannot select the ‘Follow Press’ option, since a Press Task Processor
cannot be used.
8 Submit the job.
The new Page Store will appear in the Public Page Store section of the Jobs
List. You can input documents to it in the same way you input documents to
a standard Job Ticket Hot Folder. These documents will be available to all
users.

354 INPUTTING DOCUMENTS
Inputting Documents
The final step in job creation is inputting the documents that will become your
job data. There are several different ways of doing this, using a variety of input
channel types. These input channels specify the locations or methods which you
will use to print or drag the documents that you want to input to the Apogee
System.
There are two basic types of input channel. You should choose the method(s)
which best suit your hardware platform and working environment:
 File-based input: This type of input is based on dragging files directly to jobs
in the Job List or Hot folders in the Hot Folders list. You can also copy files to
the specific folders associated with the following types of input channels:
 Hot Folder and Open Connect input channels make the input documents
available only to a single job (this is referred to as a Private Page Store ).
 PrintSphere Upload is similar to a Hot Folder input channel but files are
uploaded to a cloud service by the collaborators of a job who are invited
by e-mail.
 Public Page Store channels make all input documents available to all jobs.
 JDF Import channels allow you to input JDF files generated by 3rd-party
applications (such as MIS systems), and convert them to Apogee Job
Tickets.
These types of input channels can be assigned specific polling times.
 Stream-based input: This type of input is based on printing jobs directly from
your front-end applications. For this, you need to define printers associated
with the following types of input channels:
 Named Pipe channels allow you to print jobs to the Apogee System
directly from your Windows front-end applications.
 TCP/IP input channels allow you to send jobs to the Apogee System via
the Internet.
NOTE: By default, any stream-based input channel is spooled (written to

disk). To enable spooling, the Keep Results Action is automatically added to
all Input components.

Inputting via Hot After you have successfully created a ticket and built a Production Plan as
described in “Working with Job Tickets and Hot Tickets” on page 335, you are
Folder / JDF Import ready to start inputting documents.
/ Public Page Store
 To drag a file directly to a Job or Hot Ticket
1 Locate the document(s) that you want to input.
These may be PostScript, EPS, or PDF files. If they are PDF files, then they
must be “high-end” PDF files.
2 Drag your input documents directly to a job in the Job List or to a Hot folder
in the Hot Folders list.
3 If you want to monitor the process, open the Activity window.
For more information, see “Monitoring Jobs” on page 195.
When your documents have been processed, either open or switch to the Jobs
window to view them. For further information, see “The Job List” on page 143.
 To drag a file to an input folder

These may be PostScript, EPS, PDF, or JDF files. If they are PDF files, then
they must be “high-end” PDF files.
2 Locate the folder you associated with this input channel.
The input channel may be a Hot Folder, a JDF Import channel, or a Public
Page Store folder.
TIP: You may want to create 3 Drag your input documents to the folder.
a shortcut to your Hot Folder
on your desktop. Apogee polls all configured input folders, and automatically picks up all
documents that are dropped in any of them.
When your documents have been processed, either open or switch to the Jobs
window to view them. For further information, see “The Job List” on page 143.
Inputting via A PrintSphere job includes the PrintSphere Upload task processor in the Produc-
tion Plan, on its own or with another input task processor. For such jobs, you can
PrintSphere invite an uploader to upload files for the job at hand, or collaborators can be

assigned to the job when you select the company. PrintSphere is a cloud service,
hosted by Agfa Graphics, which allows easy file transfer between the different
collaborators of a job: customers, designers, remote sites, etc. See the
PrintSphere online help and technical documentation for more information.
 Invite uploaders to input files via PrintSphere

This procedure explains how to invite one or more persons to upload files for the
job at hand (i.e. guest mode). These uploaders do not have to be known collab-
orators of a company. The job must have a PrintSphere Upload task processor in
the Production Plan.
1 Context-click the PrintSphere job in the Job List and choose Invite
PrintSphere Uploader.
2 Enter the E-mail address of the person you want to invite. You can enter
multiple e-mail addresses by separating them with a comma. You can also
select a Language for the e-mail. The Subject field is filled in automatically
with the name of the job. The URL is a link to the location where the files can
be uploaded which is generated automatically by the PrintSphere service.
3 Click Send to send the message to the uploader.
The uploader receives an e-mail with the URL where he can upload files for
the current job. Uploaded files appear in the Page Store of this job.
Inputting via To print a job directly from a Windows front-end application, you should use a
Named Pipe input channel. Before you can do this, you must first create a print
Named Pipe queue to the Named Pipe input channel on your Windows Server. You will also
need to share this queue on your network.
NOTE: The Named Pipe print queue is not automatically created when you install
Apogee.
To complete this procedure, you need your printer's PPD and oemsetup.inf files.
 To create a print queue to the Named Pipe input channel

1 Make sure that the Apogee System is running.
2 Open the Control Panel on the machine on which the Apogee System is
running.
3 Select Printers.
4 Double-click Add Printer.

The Add Printer Wizard is started.
5 Click Next.
6 Choose Local Printer, deselect Auto Detect, and click Next.
7 Click Create a New Port.
8 Select Local Port from the Type list, and click Next.
The Port Name dialog box is displayed.
9 Enter the Named Pipe name, preceded by \\.\pipe.
For example: \\.\pipe\Apogee
10 Click the OK button.
The Named Pipe name is defined in the settings of the Named Pipe compo-
nent. The default name is “Apogee“. You should type this string exactly as
shown above, since the text is case-sensitive.
NOTE: The Apogee System must be running before you can create this port.
Otherwise, you will get an “invalid port name” error message.
The Printer Ports dialog is displayed again.
11 Click Close.
The Apogee Named Pipe channel should now appear in the list of ports.
12 Select the Named Pipe channel, and click Next.
A list of printer manufacturers and models is displayed.
13 Click Have Disk.
NOTE: To select your printer manufacturer and model, you need both your
printer's oemsetup.inf file and the printer's PPD file. These files should both
be located in the same folder.
14 Browse to the folder which contains your printer's oemsetup.inf and PPD
files.
15 Select the Oemprint.inf file, and click Open.
16 Click OK.
The following dialog indicates the name of the printer associated with the
selected PPD file.

17 Select the printer, and click Next.
18 Enter a name for your printer.
19 If you want this to be the default printer for your Apogee System, click 'Yes',
and then click Next.
To allow users working on other network workstations to access the printer,

it must be shared on the network.
20 Click 'Shared', enter a Share Name, and click Next.
The Share Name can be the same as the printer name.
21 If you want to print a test page, click 'Yes', and then click Finish.
The Wizard starts to install the necessary printer files.
To create the printer, Windows needs the PSCRIPT.DLL file.
22 Insert your Windows 2003 CD, and browse to the I386 folder.
23 Select the Pscript.dll_ file, and click Open.
24 Click OK.
The Installer finishes, and the new printer appears in the Printer window.
 To input a document using a Named Pipe or TCP/IP channel

1 Start from your front-end application.
2 Select the Named Pipe or TCP/IP printer you created earlier.
3 For a spooled queue, set up the printer with the Apogee.PPD.
NOTE: The Apogee.PPD is copied to the shared Apogee SupportFiles folder

during installation of the Apogee System.
4 In your page layout program, select the Apogee.PPD.
5 Turn Background Spooling on or off (depending on whether or not you set

up spooling for this channel).
6 Ensure that separations and registration are turned off.
8 Print the document(s).

10 When your documents have been processed, either open or switch to the Jobs
window to view them. For further information, see “The Job List” on
page 143.
Inputting via TCP/ To send jobs to the Apogee System via the Internet, you should use a TCP/IP
input channel. Before you can do this, you must first create a print queue to the
IP TCP/IP input channel on your Windows Server. You will need to set up a name
and port number. You will also need to share this queue on your network.
The TCP/IP print queue is not automatically created when you install Apogee.
You need to create it yourself using the Adobe PostScript driver, as described
below.
 To create a print queue to the TCP/IP input channel
You first need to create a TCP/IP port:
1 Choose Start > Settings > Printers.
2 Choose File > Server Properties.
3 Choose the Ports tab, and click Add Port.
4 Double click Standard TCP/IP Port.
5 Click Next.
6 Enter the IP address of your server in the Printer Name or IP Address field.
TIP: If you do not know the IP address of your Apogee Server, choose
Start > Run on the Apogee System, type cmd in the Open field, and click OK.
Then type ipconfig and press Enter.
7 Click Next.
This process may take a while.
8 Choose Custom, and click Settings.
9 Leave the protocol on Raw, enter the port number you specified for Apogee,
and click OK.
10 Click Next.
11 Click Finish.

12 Click Close twice.

Interactive Document Content Editing

There are two ways that you can edit documents which belong to Apogee jobs:
 External Editing: External or Non-Interactive document editing is performed

outside Apogee, typically for major content changes in applications such as
QuarkXpress or InDesign. The document is then re-submitted to the Apogee
system, where a new revision of that document is created. In combination
with Apogee revision handling, this is the safest way of editing documents.
 Interactive Document Content Editing: This type of editing is performed

directly on the document from within Apogee. This is done by double- or
context-clicking an Apogee result to open the document in Acrobat. Using the
Apogee Check-Out/In plug-in for Acrobat, documents can be edited directly
within the Apogee job. This saves time since the document does not have to
be re-submitted. Note that Interactive Document Editing requires full user
attention! Misuse may lead to unexpected results.
Interactive Document Content Editing is used to edit documents before they

reach the Run List in the Production Plan. In this case, a new revision of the
document is created in the Run List. This is typically designed for minor changes
such as small text edits or typos. Since the Page Store is related to the Run List,
you can also edit results that are ‘Run List ready’ (no page processing activity).
NOTE: The Check Out/Check In plug-in must be installed in order to perform

interactive document editing. This is included in the Apogee Trap Spotter plug-
in.
Checking Out When you view a result in Apogee it is opened in your PDF viewer. If you want
to edit the result you need to first ‘check it out’. This is done by selecting the
Documents Apogee Check-Out option in Acrobat.
When you Check Out a document:
 Apogee locks the job. The job will go on hold and all new job processing will
be suspended.
 The job has a status icon which indicates that it is being edited.
 In the Run List / Page Store, you will see the ‘document is being edited’ status
icon next to the job.

362 INTERACTIVE DOCUMENT CONTENT EDITING
 The Edit Job tool in the Apogee toolbar is disabled.
NOTE: Even if you only edit one page of a document, all pages of that document
will receive the ‘document is being edited’ status in the Run List and Page Store.
Checking In After editing, you need to select the Apogee Check-In option to save your
changes in Apogee. This is done by selecting the Apogee Check-In option in
Documents Acrobat.
When you Check In a document:
 Apogee unlocks the job, and the job will resume processing.
 The ‘Edit Job’ status icon is removed.
 A new revision of the document is saved in the Run List / Page Store, and you
will see the ‘document has been edited’ status icon next to the job
 The Edit Job tool in the Apogee toolbar is enabled again.

WebApproval Job Tickets

WebApproval is a web-based proofing service that gives users (your customers’
staff or your own staff) remote access to jobs for uploading documents,
reviewing soft-proofs, and approving pages. A WebApproval job ticket has two
flows: the production flow for printing the job and a display flow to create the
remote soft-proof for the ProductionCenter web portal.
 Create a WebApproval job ticket

1 Create a ticket with a main flow and a flow with the Display task processor.
The Hot Folder in the main flow must have the Web-enabled check box
selected. The main flow typically has a Wait for Results action that holds the
results until the required pages have been approved in ProductionCenter.
2 In the display flow, place a Web Proof action before the Display task
processor.
3 In the Administration tab, select a Company and the staff you want to assign
to the jobs. Also choose one of the Publish options in the drop-down list.
NOTE: Refer to the tutorials for more details on creating basic to complex
WebApproval job tickets.
Related topics: • Using the Administration Tab on page 280

• Hot Folder on page 672
• Web Proof on page 314

364 WEBAPPROVAL JOB TICKETS

CHAPTER
8 Working with Apogee

Impose
This section introduces Apogee Impose, an integrated imposition editor that
enables you to create the imposition for a job within Apogee.
 About Apogee Impose ....................................................................................... 366

 Auto Impose Window ........................................................................................ 373
 Product View ......................................................................................................... 381
 Press Sheet View ................................................................................................. 409
 Inspector ................................................................................................................ 425
 Mark Sets Inspector ........................................................................................... 443
 Snag List ................................................................................................................. 445
 Page Previews ...................................................................................................... 447
 Imposition Reports ............................................................................................. 448
 Menus ...................................................................................................................... 453
 Imposing Multi-Product Jobs ......................................................................... 455
 Imposing Digital Products ............................................................................... 457
 Imposing Multi-Up Products ........................................................................... 459
 Imposing Web Production Jobs ..................................................................... 461
 Imposing Unbound Products .......................................................................... 468
365
366 ABOUT APOGEE IMPOSE
About Apogee Impose

Apogee Impose is a rules-based system for creating imposition jobs quickly and
efficiently with Apogee. Apogee Impose arranges the pages of a job for imposi-
tion and places all the required marks on the press sheet. A job may consist of a
single Product or multiple Products (i.e. a multi-product job).
The Parts and Pages of a Product are assembled automatically, based on a

number of rules which are specific to your production environment. Alterna-
tively, you can create or edit the imposition manually. When the imposition is
ready, Apogee Impose creates the Production Sets required for printing the job.
Marks can be placed manually or automatically based on rules and conditions.
An intuitive graphical interface, also referred to as the Imposition Editor, lets

you inspect and edit the imposition and printing marks of your Product
interactively.
NOTE: Apogee Impose is activated if you choose this option in the Impose
parameter set of your Plan and if you have the required license.
Related topics: • Using the Products Tab on page 291

• Creating or Editing a Ticket on page 336
A Product and its To work with Apogee Impose you must first define a Product and its Parts in the
Products tab. The Products tab is available if you included an Impose Task
Parts Processor in your production plan.
You first need to choose from one of the top level Product types:
 Bound Product: consists of book signatures that need to bound; can be a

single Part or several Parts, e.g. a cover and the body pages; typical examples
are brochures, magazines, catalogs, etc.
 Unbound Product: flats containing unrelated content elements (e.g.

different business cards) or a Product that only needs to be folded (e.g. a
leaflet, gatefolds and other complex folded jobs)
 Calendar: for pages that need calendar-style options such as flipping over
leaves or spreads from top to bottom pages

8 WORKING WITH APOGEE IMPOSE 367
Within these categories you can choose a Product preset from the Product drop-
down list (e.g. a standard publication type) or you can create a Product from
scratch.
Figure 8.5: The Product Inspector
A Product defines a number of settings that are inherited by its Parts, such as the
binding style and paper stock, but these settings can be modified for each Part
individually as you add the Parts to your Product.

Figure 8.6: The Part Inspector
A Product and its Parts can also be defined in the Templates dialog box if you
create your job from a template. You can also choose to create multiple Products
for a job by entering a number in the Quantities panel.
Figure 8.7: Product and Parts in the Templates dialog box
Related topics: • Product Inspector on page 295

• Part Inspector on page 298

Automatic and Apogee Impose provides a choice of automatic mode (Auto Impose) or interac-
tive or manual mode for creating your imposition. You choose Auto Impose if
Interactive your imposition rules have been set in advance for a typical job, and interactive
Imposition if you want to create the imposition manually from scratch.
If your job has been set up correctly with an Impose Task Processor, you will see
the following two buttons in the Imposition pane of the Products tab:
 Auto Impose
 Edit Imposition
Clicking the Auto Impose button for automatic imposition, opens the Auto
Impose editor in the Print & Fold tab, where you can select the Press, Press Sheet
size, and Workstyle for each part type (Cover, Plain, Insert, etc.). By default, all
part types are selected, so you specify the same settings for all parts. You select
the Auto Impose Rule that defines the arrangement of the imposition in the
Rules tab.
Figure 8.8: The Auto Impose Editor (job with multiple Products)
You then review the imposition in the Product View.

Figure 8.9: The Product View after clicking Impose in the Auto Impose editor (job with a
single Product)
Clicking Edit Imposition in the Auto Impose editor takes you directly to the
Product View where you can create your imposition interactively or still choose
to open the Auto Impose editor.
Figure 8.10: The Product View after clicking Edit Imposition to create the imposition
interactively (job with a single Product)

The following sections give an overview of the Auto Impose windows, the two
main views, and the palettes you see once you have defined your Product and
choose to view or edit the imposition:
 “Auto Impose Window” on page 373
 Views:
 “Product View” on page 381
 “Press Sheet View” on page 409
 Palettes:
 “View Options” on page 410
 “Marks Palette” on page 421
 “Inspector” on page 425
 “Mark Sets Inspector” on page 443
 “Snag List” on page 445
 “Positioning Palette” on page 472
 Quick Access to the Product and Press Sheet Views

The following shortcuts provide quick access to the Product View or Press Sheet
View.

Select a job in the Jobs List and jump to the Product View CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
Jump to the Product View while in the Job Ticket Editor CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
View a flat you selected in the Results tab in the Product View CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
View a flat you selected in the Results Preview in the Product View CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
Return to the Job Ticket Editor from the Product View ALT + F4
Close the Product View and submit the Job Ticket CTRL + SHIFT + G
Jump to the Press Sheet View from the Product View, with a Press CTRL + Enter
Sheet selected in the Press Sheet or Press nodes
 Re-use an imposition
You can create a new job with the same imposition you created interactively or
automatically for an existing job.

 Select a job whose imposition you want to re-use in the Job List and choose
File > New From Selected.
The Job Ticket Editor opens with an empty Administration tab for you to fill
in for the new job ticket. The imposition and plan are the same as the selected
job. See “Creating a New Job from an Existing Job” on page 202.

Auto Impose Window

Clicking the Auto Impose button in the Products tab opens the Auto Impose
window where you define the settings for automatic imposition.
This window has the following tabs:
 Print & Fold Tab: In this tab you select a Press and related settings, and the
Folding Scheme set for each part.
 Number-Up tab: In this tab you can select a Number-Up scheme to combine
parts or products on the same Fold Sheet (see “Number-up Schemes” on
page 1010). This tab is disabled and not displayed if a number-up binding
style has been selected for the product in the Binding Options.
 Rules Tab: In this tab you select the Auto Impose Depending on the imposi-
tion type, this tab either refers to the Auto Impose Rules resource (for
Standard Offset), or you specify the settings directly in the tab (for digital
printing modes: Cut & Stack, Booklet, Step & Repeat). The rule apply for all
parts.
This window can also be opened from the Product View to edit your Auto Impose
settings or to switch from manual imposition to Auto Impose.
NOTE: The Auto Impose window has fewer settings for web printing.
Imposition Type Here you can choose the basic mode of the imposition for Bound jobs:

374 AUTO IMPOSE WINDOW
 Standard Offset: The regular imposition mode which is generally used for
offset printing and displays the Folding Scheme Selection panel in the Print
& Fold tab.
 Cut & Stack: The pages on a press sheets of a Cut & Stack imposition are cut
and then put on top of each other to obtain the correct page sequence.
 Booklet: The press sheets form stacks of two-by-two page spreads that can be
folded in the middle and then collected to create a booklet. Book signatures
can be created to allow for the maximum folding thickness.
 Step & Repeat: Pages are duplicated on the press sheet which is cut to create
2 or more products.
The latter three modes are specifically for digital printing but may also be used
for offset printing. For multi-product jobs, the digital printing modes always
keep products apart so you cannot combine parts from multiple digital products
on the same press sheet.
NOTE: Some of these options may be licensed features for Bound jobs. Unbound
jobs are set to Standard Offset as the other options are not applicable.
Related topics: • Imposing Digital Products on page 457
Preserve (Only enabled for Standard Offset) The Preserve options allow you to keep
certain parts of the imposition as is when using Auto Impose:
 Fold Sheets: Preserves the existing fold sheets and the corresponding book
signatures. Folding schemes are selected for the unassigned parts of the
assembly and the rest of the imposition is created. This method can be used
to preserve parts of the assembly and let Apogee Impose split the rest: assign
a fold sheet to only those parts of the assembly you want to preserve, and
then run Auto Impose with this check box selected.
 Assembly: Preserves the current assembly, i.e. the current arrangement and
size of the book signatures. Folding schemes are selected to complete the
imposition. You may have to adjust the assembly if it is too large.
 Already imposed items: Preserves the imposition of parts that have already
been assigned to press sheets. Apogee Impose determines the book signa-
tures, fold sheets and press sheets for unassigned parts.

Print & Fold Tab The table lists all the parts in your product with a summary of the settings.
Clicking a part allows you to edit the settings in the panes below. The list is
updated as you define the settings. Parts with the same settings that can be
printed on the same Press Sheet are grouped and appear together on the same
line. This is also the case for multi-product jobs where parts from different
products can be grouped together if their printing settings are compatible.
Keep single and double- Select the check box if you do not want to group single-sided and double-sided
sided printing parts apart elements for printing on the same Press Sheets.
The panel on the left shows the details of the selected part or the individual parts
of a parts group as defined in the Product and/or Part inspectors. On the right
you have more settings that need to be completed before you can create the
imposition:
Print on Press A drop-down list with the names of your Presses. If you have not chosen a Press
in the Production Plan, this field is blank and you must choose a Press here.
Sheet Size A drop-down list with all available Press Sheet sizes. The last item in the list,
Manage Sheet Sizes, is a shortcut to the Sheet Sizes resource.
The width and height (W x H) of the Press Sheet are displayed under the drop-
down list. You can also edit these fields to create a custom Sheet Size and save
this custom size by choosing Save As in the drop-down list.
NOTE: If you choose a web press, you can only define the width.
Press sheet layout A drop-down list with all the available press sheet layouts. Initially, the default
sheet layout as specified for the chosen press is selected (from press). You can
choose a different layout and revert to the default by clicking the revert icon.
Main workstyle A drop-down list with workstyles:
 Sheetwise: A sheet has different content on front and back sides. The sheets
are turned, keeping the gripper edge at the same side.
 Work And Turn: Both sides have the same content. The sheets are turned,
keeping the gripper edge at the same side.
 Work And Tumble: Both sides have the same content. Sheets are turned in
such a way that the gripper edge is on the opposite side.
 Perfecting: A sheet has different content on front and back sides. Sheets are
turned in such a way that the gripper edge is on the opposite side.
 Single Sided: There is only one side per sheet.

Initially, the default workstyle as specified for the chosen press is selected
(from press). You can specify another workstyle for the job.This chosen
workstyle is used for all Press Sheets of the part, unless an alternative
workstyle is applied by the Auto Impose Rule (see “Auto Impose Rules” on
page 881).
Side lay Initially, the default side lay as specified for the chosen press is selected (from
press). You can specify the Operator or Drive side for the job.
Folding scheme selection (For Standard Offset only) A drop-down list with Folding Scheme sets and
individual Folding Schemes. You can choose a set from which Apogee Impose
will select the most appropriate schemes while taking the selected Auto Impose
Rule into account. Alternatively, you can choose a specific Folding Scheme that
you may prefer for a particular job. Choosing a set displays the available sizes
under the drop-down list.
The default is the set at the top of the list. The last item in the list, Manage
Folding Schemes, is a shortcut to the Folding Schemes resource.
NOTE: There is no option to choose a Folding Scheme as this is not applicable for
Unbound products.
NOTE: For web printing, you need to choose a Web Production Scheme.
Number-Up tab This tab is only displayed if you have not selected a number-up binding style for
the product in the Binding Options. It allows you to create slots on the Fold
Sheets where you can place different book signatures from the same or multiple
products. See “Number-up Schemes” on page 1010 for more information.

Main Number-Up Scheme Select one of the schemes from the list. 1-up (default) means that no special set-
up applies and you cannot combine parts of the same or multiple products.
Combine products Select/clear this check-box if you want/don’t want Auto Impose to combine the
parts of multiple products on the same Fold Sheet. Auto Impose will always try
to combine the parts of multiple products in the same job.
Product/Part - Delivery Selecting a scheme in the Main Number-Up Scheme box lets you inspect how the
products and parts are assigned to the deliveries (A, B, C, etc. and color-coded).
You also see the actual and the requested copy counts separated with a slash and
in blue if these two counts do not correspond. Deliveries are parts that are not
necessarily combined to create the same product.
Scheme Assignment The panel on the right shows the product assembly blocks (#1, #2, #3, etc.), the
actual copy count per delivery and the number of deliveries (A, B, C, etc. and
color-coded) for each assembly block. The assigned scheme is taken from the
Main Number-Up Scheme selected above but you can override it here.
Rules Tab In this tab you choose a predefined resource to impose all the parts of the job.
Different rules can be chosen for Bound and Unbound products.
(Standard Offset)
Bound Products
Auto Impose Rule A drop-down list of rules (see “Auto Impose Rules” on page 881) that control
which Fold Sheets can be used for the job, whether an alternative workstyle is
required and how book signatures are sorted in the assembly. The name is

usually shorthand for the main characteristics of the rule. The specified Auto
Impose rule is for all the parts of the product.
Unbound Products
Imposition Mode Choose how to fill sheets
 Produce requested number of wanted copies: the imposition uses the

copy counts as absolute values and the run length is calculated for each
press sheet in order to obtain the copy count.
 Fill sheet, using copy count as ratio: the sheets are filled with as many
elements as possible using the copy counts of the parts as ratio; the
created press sheets have a run length equal to 1.
NOTE: If you choose the latter imposition mode, it is recommended to

select an auto-fit rule that uses the Fewer sheet layouts strategy, and set the
Allow extra printed material to Whatever it takes.
Auto Fit Rule A drop-down list of rules (see “Auto Fit Rules” on page 878) that control the
arrangement of elements on the Press Sheet and when and how the elements are
rotated. The name of the rule is usually shorthand for the main characteristics of
the rule. Under the rule name you see the auto fit strategy and, depending on the
selected rule, a slider to indicate the number of extra printed copies that you
want to allow in order to reduce the number of Press Sheets (Allow extra printed
material), or a field to enter a percentage of the allowed waste (Keep waste
below).
Rules Tab (Cut & In this tab you specify the rules for imposing the pages on the press sheet so they
can be cut and then stacked in the correct sequence.
Stack)
Figure 8.11: Horizontal stacking order selected for Lowest Folio in top-left corner

Sequence
Lowest Folio Select one of the four corners to set the starting point for the pages in the page
arrangement grid. If the grid has more columns or rows, the stacking order
continues in the same direction.
Stacking Order You can choose from two stacking orders for each Lowest Folio position:
 Horizontally: To cut all columns apart and stack them on top of each
other. Then repeat in the other direction.
 Vertically: To cut all rows apart and stack them on top of each other. Then
repeat in the other direction.
Rotate Pages
You can let Apogee Impose rotate pages automatically to make them fit on the press
sheet, or you can force pages to not rotate, or to rotate 90° clockwise, 90° counter-
clockwise, or 180°.
Split into Book Signatures

Select the Limit number of press sheets for stacking to check box to split large
jobs into smaller signatures so the stacks of sheets can be cut. Enter the
maximum number of sheets to stack.
Gutter for Cutting

Enter a value to create a gutter between pages.
Rules Tab (Booklet) In this tab you specify the rules for a page arrangement using two-by-two page
spreads.
Split into Book Signatures

Select the Limit number of press sheets for stacking to check box to split large
jobs into smaller signatures so the stack of sheets can still be folded. Enter the
maximum number of sheets to stack.

Multiple Page-Spreads
If more than one two-by-two page spreads can be placed on the press sheet, you
have two options for filling the press sheet:
 Cut and Stack: Page spreads are arranged on the press sheet so they can
be cut and stacked ready for finishing.
 Step and Repeat: Each page spread is duplicated and repeated to fill one
press sheet; may result in more press sheets
Sequence (multiple spreads)

This setting is enabled if you choose the Cut and Stack arrangement for multiple
page spreads: See “Rules Tab (Cut & Stack)” on page 378.
Gutter for Cutting

Enter a value to create a gutter between the two-by-two page spreads.
Rules Tab (Step & In this tab you specify the rules for duplicating and repeating pages to fill the
press sheet.
Repeat)
Rotate Pages
You can let Apogee Impose rotate pages automatically to make them fit on the press
sheet, or you can force pages to not rotate, or to rotate 90° clockwise, 90° counter-
clockwise, or 180°.
Gutter for Cutting

Enter a value to create a gutter between the pages.
• Shingling Rules on page 1047

• Auto Impose Rules on page 881
• Sheet Layout Templates on page 1046
• Auto Fit Rules on page 878

Product View
The Product View is the first window to be displayed when you create or edit an
imposition. This view is the same for both interactive and Auto Impose modes.
This view visualizes the Product in a structure consisting of so-called nodes. At

the top in the Assembly pane, you see the book signatures of the Product. In the
Product pane below, you can see how the Product is broken down into Parts and
how the Pages are assigned to Fold Sheets, Press Sheets and Presses.
The Product View is a powerful interface where you can arrange the book signa-
tures in the Assembly, change the settings in each of the nodes, and assign
Folding Schemes and Presses as required.
All changes made in this window are applied immediately and you are not
requested to confirm editing actions.
NOTE: You define the basic structure of the Product, i.e. number of Pages and
Parts, in the Job Ticket Editor and this cannot be modified here.
 The Product View can be opened in the Job Ticket Editor, by clicking the Edit
Imposition or Auto Impose buttons in the Products tab, or from the Impose
settings in the Plan tab.
 The Product View can also be opened directly from the Jobs window by
selecting the job and pressing CTRL+Shift+Enter. This shortcut can also be

382 PRODUCT VIEW
used from various locations in the Job Ticket Editor: the Pages and Results
tabs, and in Raster Preview.
Figure 8.12: Product View window

1 Assembly pane
2 Product pane
3 Toolbar 1
 Highlighting Nodes in the Product Structure
 Click a node or component in the structure to highlight the relationship of

that particular component with other nodes in the structure.
For example, click a Page in the Product node to see where the page is
located, from Part to Printing Plate.

 Inspecting Nodes using the Inspector
 With the Inspector open (CTRL+I), click a node to select it and view the
settings in the Inspector.
You can change settings in the Inspector or by choosing a value in the drop-
down lists in the nodes.
Assembly Pane The Assembly pane shows how the different book signatures (BS), i.e. folded
Fold Sheets, of the product are put together. In this pane you can define and
arrange book signatures to suit production needs.
The Assembly displays the book signatures of a Product (BS1, BS2, etc.)with a
name that corresponds with the respective Fold Sheet (FS1, FS2, etc.). These
names are generated automatically together with the number of pages, and the
start and end page of the book signature. A color code is used to indicate book
signatures of the same Part, e.g. orange for Cover and light yellow for Body
parts. Special color codes are used for certain kinds of jobs, e.g. JDF jobs.
Apogee Impose automatically creates separate book signatures for the different
Parts of a Product.

384 PRODUCT VIEW
4
1 Cover book signature (BS1)
2 Body book signatures (BS1 and BS2
3 Number of pages per book signature
4 Start and end page numbers of the book signature
Assembly Types
There are two main assembly types and a mixed type:
 Nested for saddle-stitched products
 Stacked for perfect-bound products
 Mixed: a combination of nested and stacked products

 Selecting Book Signatures
 Clicking in one or more of the book signatures highlights the pages of the
book signature or book signatures and where these pages are located in the
other parts of the Imposition window.
NOTE: Click in between two adjacent book signatures to select both book
signatures or hold down the CTRL key to select multiple book signatures.
 Hover over two adjacent book signatures to see the number of pages of the
two book signatures.
 Combining Book Signatures
 Click a book signature and drag it onto another book signature of the same
part to combine them.
NOTE: A Folding Scheme needs to be applied to the newly created book

signature.
 Click a book signature and drag it onto a book signature of a different part to
combine them.

386 PRODUCT VIEW
 Splitting Book Signatures

1 Click the Split Assembly button in the Toolbar
OR
press Alt with the cursor in the Assembly pane.
2 Click in the book signature to split as required.
NOTE: A Folding Scheme needs to be applied to the newly created book

signatures.
Product Pane The middle section of the Product View displays the nodes of the Product where
you can see how the Pages are assigned to Fold Sheets, Press Sheets and Presses.
 “Product and Pages” on page 387
 “Parts” on page 390
 “Book Signatures (hidden by default)” on page 390
 “Fold Sheets” on page 390
 “Press Sheet” on page 393
 “Press” on page 397
TIP: If you have many parts For multi-product jobs, all the Products are displayed under each other in the
or products, choose order they were created.
View > Compact View for a
better overview.

1 Product with Pages

2 Parts
3 Book Signatures
4 Fold Sheets
5 Press Sheets
6 Presses with Printing Plates per
Production Set
3
4
5
1
In each node you can see the settings for that particular node and you can also
change these settings if necessary. When using Auto Impose, you may want to
change the settings to fine-tune the imposition created automatically by Apogee.
In manual mode, you will use the nodes more extensively to choose the appro-
priate settings. The same settings can also be inspected and changed using the
Inspector.
Product and Pages
The Product node provides a summary of the Product definition: the name of the
Product, Number of Pages, Type (e.g. bound), Binding (e.g. Nested), and Page
Size (e.g. 210 x 297 mm)
Clicking the grey arrow on the right reveals the spine view of the Pages in their
consecutive order with page numbers. The Parts are indicated in their respective
colors.

388 PRODUCT VIEW

Page Icons
Pages not assigned to signature (grey outline)
Pages assigned to signature (black outline)
Shingling applied (black arrows)
No shingling applied
Bleed (thick grey border on bleed side)
Glue zones (blue strips indicate non-image areas)
No spine (unbound product)
Double-sided part (unbound product - Fold Sheet node)
Node Icons
The initial node definition has been overruled (yellow background if only gutters and/or mar-
gins have changed).
The node contains an error that needs to be resolved.
 Modifying Shingling
If shingling was applied for the Product, you can change this behavior in this
node.

390 PRODUCT VIEW
 Select one or several Pages and drag one side towards the spine to disable
shingling and away from the spine to re-apply shingling.
Parts
A product consists of one or more Parts, e.g. a Cover and a Body part. Each Part
is identified with a name and color, and they are sorted in ascending order of
their lowest page number. The default colors are orange for Cover and yellow for
Body but other colors can be chosen when defining the product.
A Part may consist of several book signatures.
The following information is displayed but cannot be edited:
 Paper stock and weight
 Colors
 Page size
Book Signatures (hidden by default)

The book signatures in your assembly can also be shown as a column of nodes
between the Parts and the Fold Sheet nodes. This is useful f or jobs using
complex number-up schemes. You can show/hide this column by choosing
View > Show/Hide Book Signatures.
Fold Sheets
This node shows the flat fold sheet and the folding scheme used to fold it. In
general, different Fold Sheets are selected for different Parts.

1 Fold Sheet name

2 Folding Scheme 1
3 Blue triangle: top page
4 Fold Sheet
5 Book Signature and number of
pages
6 Spine
2
7 Fold lines
8 Fold Sheet lay 3
9 Folding sequence 4
6
7
8
9
The Fold Sheet node contains the following information:
 Fold Sheet Name: same numbering sequence as the Press Sheets so FS1
corresponds with PS 1, FS2 with PS 2, etc.
 Folding Scheme (drop-down): the selected Folding Scheme is indicated in

the top right corner.
 Fold Sheet with lowest page number (mirrored if this page is on the back)
The Fold Sheets are sorted by the lowest page number you see here.
 Book Signature icon with number of pages in Book Signature
 Spine
 Fold lines
 Top page after folding (blue triangle)
 Fold Sheet Lay (red corner icon)
 Folding Sequence: uses a special notation to indicate how many times and in
which directions the sheet is folded

392 PRODUCT VIEW
 Selecting a Folding Scheme

1 Hover over the Folding Scheme name in the top right corner and click in the
black field to reveal a list of folding schemes.
The list shows all compatible folding schemes, i.e. those that match the
number of pages in the book signature.
2 Choose one of the Folding Schemes.
OR
Choose No Scheme to remove the current scheme.
NOTE: Choosing No Scheme displays an error in the Assembly.
OR
Choose Auto Select to find the best matching scheme.
Changing a Folding Scheme automatically changes the arrangement of the

pages on the Press Sheet.

 Assigning a Fold Sheet to a Press Sheet
 If a Press Sheet is empty, you can drag a Fold Sheet onto the Press Sheet to
assign it to that Press Sheet.
Press Sheet
The Press Sheet nodes represent all the Press Sheets for the product. Each Press
Sheet node displays the front and the back of the Press Sheet that contains one
or more Fold Sheets. In this view you can see how all the pages of the product are
arranged for printing.
Clicking a component within the node highlights the component throughout the
product structure.
1 Press Sheet name 1

2 Workstyle 2
3 Paper stock, weight and size
4 Press Sheet
5 Fold Sheet
6 Lowest page no. (bright yellow) 3
7 Fold Sheet Lay
8 Press Sheet Lay 4
7
8
The Press Sheet node contains the following information:
 Workstyle (drop-down):
 Sheetwise: A sheet has different content on front and back sides. The
sheets are turned, keeping the gripper edge at the same side.
 Work And Turn: Both sides have the same content. The sheets are turned,

394 PRODUCT VIEW
 Work And Tumble: Both sides have the same content. Sheets are turned
in such a way that the gripper edge is on the opposite side.
 Perfecting: A sheet has different content on front and back sides. Sheets
are turned in such a way that the gripper edge is on the opposite side.
 Single Sided: There is only one side per sheet.
 Web production schemes for web presses
 Press Sheet Lay: green icon which is lighter for the Back
 Press Sheet Sides: the Front and Back of the Book Signature; only one side for
Work & Turn and Work & Tumble, or single-sided.
Work & Turn Press Sheet Sheetwise Press Sheet

Front = Back with Front and Back
 Fold Sheet Front and Back with page numbers
1 Front
2 Back
 Fold Sheet Lay: red icon which is lighter for the Back
 Paper Stock (drop-down): as set for the Product or Part
 Paper Weight (drop-down): as set for the Product or Part
 Press Sheet Size (drop-down): as chosen in the Auto Impose window

NOTE: When performing interactive imposition (Edit Imposition), none of the

above settings are specified. The missing settings are indicated in red and need
to be chosen interactively.
 Selecting a Workstyle
1 Hover over the Workstyle name in the top right corner and click in the black
field to reveal a list of workstyles.
NOTE: The default workstyle is Sheetwise.
 Selecting Stock Type
 Hover over the Stock Type name in the bottom left corner and click in the
black field to reveal a list of compatible stocks.

396 PRODUCT VIEW
 Selecting Stock Weight
 Hover over the Stock Weight name in the bottom left corner and click in the
black field to reveal a list of available weights for the selected stock.
 Selecting the Press Sheet Size

1 Hover over the Sheet Size in the bottom right corner and click in the black
field to reveal a list of available weights for the selected stock.
2 Choose a pre-set Sheet Size from the list.
OR
Choose Auto Select to select the smallest available sheet size for the fold
sheets.
OR

Choose New to enter a new Sheet Size.
 Opening the Press Sheet View
 Double-click in the Press Sheet node to open the Press Sheet View and
examine the sheet in more detail.
Press
The Press nodes on the right in the Product View represent the available presses.
Each Press node displays the Press Sheets assigned to a particular press and the
plates necessary to print the Front and the Back in the required process or spot
colors. All of these book signatures belong to the same Production Set.
Clicking a component within the node highlights the component throughout the
product structure.
1 Press name
2 Production Set 1
3 Paper stock, weight and size 2

4 Work & Turn Press Sheet 3
5 Sheetwise Press Sheet (Front) 4
6 Sheetwise Press Sheet (Back)
7 Plates
8 Press Sheet name
5
The Press node contains the following information:
 Press name
 Press Parameter Set
 Press Sheet information: stock, weight, size, workstyle
 Press Sheet name (PS1, PS2, etc.) with an indication of the plates for Front
and Back (if applicable), process colors and spot colors

398 PRODUCT VIEW
Arranging Press Sheets on a Press

 Assigning a Press Sheet to a Press
 In the Press Sheet node, drag a Press Sheet side or the entire node onto a
Press.
 Deleting a Press Sheet from a Press
 Click the Press Sheet (e.g. PS 1) and drag it out of the Press node.
OR
 Click the Press Sheet and press the Delete key.
Editing Press Settings

 Selecting a Press Parameter Set
1 Hover over the Press Parameter Set in the top right corner and click in the
black field to reveal a list of Parameter Sets.
Parameter Sets for the selected Press are displayed.
2 Choose a Parameter Set or click Manage Parameter Sets to create a new set.
NOTE: Only compatible Parameter Sets are shown in the list.

 Opening the Press Sheet View
 Select a Sheet in the Press node and click the Press Sheet View button in the
toolbar at the bottom, to open the Press Sheet View and examine the sheet in
more detail.
Example: Cover with Work

& Turn workstyle and
Body parts with Sheetwise
workstyle assigned to the
same press.
Example: Cover and Body

parts assigned to different
presses.
Example: A page selected

in the Product node
highlights the separations
for that particular page.
Toolbar The Toolbar at the bottom of the Product View provides quick access to common
tasks and commands. These commands are also available on the main menu or
by using shortcuts.

400 PRODUCT VIEW
NOTE: The availability of the tools and buttons on the Toolbar depends on the
node you select.
Each of these tools is described below.
Press Sheet View button. Select a Press Sheet or Press Sheet side in the Press Sheet or Press
nodes and click this button to open the Press Sheet View and view the selected Press Sheet
side.
Selection tool. Use this tool to select a component or area and display its properties. This is
the default tool.
Split Assembly tool. Use this tool to split blocks in the Assembly.
Repeat tool. Use this tool to repeat selected components.
Auto Impose button. Click this button to perform the Auto Impose task, for example after rear-
ranging nodes or changing the properties of a Fold Sheet, Press Sheet or Press.
Rotate counterclockwise tool (only if Fold Sheet is selected). Rotates selected Fold Sheets 90
degrees counterclockwise on the Press Sheet.
Rotate clockwise tool (only if Fold Sheet is selected). Rotates selected Fold Sheets 90 degrees
clockwise on the Press Sheet.
Flip Over tool (only if Fold Sheet is selected). Flips the front and back of the selected Fold
Sheet on the Press Sheet.
Shows/Hides the Inspector window
Shows/Hides the Mark Sets Inspector window.
Shows/Hide the Positioning palette
Submit button. Submits the job with the edited imposition.
Close button. In the imposition windows, saves your changes and closes the imposition win-
dow. Behavior is set in the Preferences.
Arranging Fold Apogee Impose enables you to drag and drop Fold Sheets onto a Press Sheet so
you can rearrange the imposition interactively.
Sheets on a Press
Sheet

 Assigning a Fold Sheet to a Press Sheet

1 If a Press Sheet is empty, drag the Fold Sheet onto the front of a Press Sheet
and the front of the Fold Sheet will be assigned to the front of the Press Sheet
and the back of the Fold Sheet to the back of the Press Sheet.
Dragging the Fold Sheet to the back of a Press Sheet flips the front of the Fold
Sheet to the back of the Press Sheet.
2 While dragging, press the spacebar to rotate the Fold Sheet counterclockwise
in increments of 90 degrees.
 Rotating a Fold Sheet on a Press Sheet

1 Select the Fold Sheet you want to rotate by clicking it on the Press Sheet.
2 Drag the Fold Sheet until you see a dark blue insertion line.
3 With the Fold Sheet still selected, press the spacebar to rotate the Fold Sheet
counterclockwise in increments of 90 degrees.
NOTE: The blue plus sign must be visible in order to rotate.
 Deleting a Fold Sheet from a Press Sheet
 Click the front or back of a Fold Sheet and drag it out of the Press Sheet node
or press Delete.
 Adding multiple Fold Sheets to a Press Sheet

1 Drag your first Fold Sheet onto the Press Sheet.
The Press Sheet Layout Rule determines the position of the first Fold Sheet,
e.g. Bottom Center.

402 PRODUCT VIEW
2 Drag your second Fold Sheet onto the Press Sheet.
The blue insertion bar is displayed to indicate the proposed position and
orientation of the Fold Sheet. The bar is grey to indicate the position on the
Back.
3 Drop the Fold Sheet where you want it on the Press Sheet, or with the Fold
Sheet still selected, press the spacebar to rotate the Fold Sheet counterclock-
wise in increments of 90 degrees.
Repeating an If you have prepared the imposition and assigned a press for one Press Sheet,
you can re-use the same arrangement for other Press Sheets. This is referred to
Imposition across as repeating an imposed Press Sheet and it can be useful when performing a
Press Sheets manual imposition. Apogee Impose copies the following settings from the refer-
ence Press Sheet to the target Press Sheet:
 Press Sheet size
 Workstyle
 Press Sheet layout and manual edits

 Press assignment
 Manual edits to Fold Sheet placements, gutters and margins
 Manually placed marks
 To repeat an imposition
1 Prepare your first Press Sheet; in manual mode this may involve the placing
of several Fold Sheets on a single Press Sheet.
2 Click the Press Sheet to select it and choose Edit > Repeat Imposition.
The Repeat Imposed Press Sheet dialog is displayed with the selected Press
Sheet in the top drop-down list as reference imposition.
3 In the second drop-down list, choose the Press Sheet you want to copy the
imposition to.
If you selected a reference Press Sheet to start the procedure, you have three
options:
 Selected item: the selected imposition will be used to copy the imposition
to; if you choose this option, choose a different Press Sheet from the first
list to copy from
 Part name: the imposition is re-used for all book signatures of that part
 Compatible parts: the imposition is re-used for all book signatures that
are compatible with the reference Press Sheet
NOTE: If you didn’t select a reference imposition, you can only choose from
the last two options.
4 Click Repeat.
All the settings of the reference imposition are copied to the other Press
Sheets.

404 PRODUCT VIEW
Renumber Fold By default, fold sheets follow the same consecutive numbering as their respec-
tive book signatures, and BS 1, BS 2, BS 3, etc. corresponds with FS 1, FS 2, FS 3,
Sheets/Book etc. In certain production cases, e.g. the book signatures of a bound job at hand
Signatures need to be combined with signatures from another job, you may want to take
control of signature numbering to avoid confusion when finishing or to make
sure the collation marks are correct. The Advanced book signature numbering
option lets you renumber fold sheets.
 Renumber fold sheet/book signatures

1 Go to the product editor and select the Advanced book signature
numbering option.
Selecting this option enables the numbering feature in the Fold Sheet
inspector.
2 Click OK and edit the imposition.
3 Open the Inspector and select the fold sheet from which you want to change
the numbering.
In the Signature numbering panel, you see that the numbering is set to
Automatic as default.
4 Clear the Automatic check box to enable the following settings:
 Nesting level: Choose a nesting level from (Outer) 1 to 10 as required for

the numbering. This generates a numbering notation with dot-separated
levels. The digit after the last dot increments. This is only possible for a
mixed assembly and not for a nested assembly, which only has one level.
If the fold sheet is a cover, the nesting level is set to 0 (Cover) and the list
is disabled.

 Start numbering at: Enter a number that you want to start the numbering
with. For level 1, this start number increments. For level 2 to 10, the
number after the last dot increments. This option is disabled if the fold
sheet is a cover.
The selected fold sheet is renumbered and all the subsequent fold sheets are
renumbered automatically. You can see the new numbers in the header of the
book signature and fold sheet nodes, and in the middle of the fold sheet. For
example, if your job has four book signatures and you set the second signa-
ture to FS 10, the third and fourth signatures will be renumbered as FS 11
and FS 12. These subsequent fold sheets have their numbering set to
Automatic.
The blue arrow icon (overrule) on the node where the renumbering starts,
indicates that the numbering has been changed manually. You can interrupt
the renumbering by clearing the Automatic check box and setting a new start
number.
Figure 8.13: Fold sheets renumbered, starting from FS 2 which is renumbered to FS 10

406 PRODUCT VIEW
Effect on Collation Marks and Variables

The new fold sheet numbers are also the signature index numbers, and these are
used for the collation marks. This means you can control collation mark
numbering and avoid confusion. Collation marks are only generated for fold
sheets of Level 1, and not for covers or nested fold sheets in a mixed assembly.
The $fold_sheet.number variable uses the new fold sheet numbers.
Renumber and By default, the numbering of press sheets follows the numbering of book signa-
tures and fold sheets, and FS 1, FS 2, FS 3, etc. correspond with PS 1, PS 2, PS 3,
Reorder Press etc. In certain production conditions, e.g. when arranging fold sheets on large
Sheets press sheets and for partial jobs, you may want to change the numbering and/or
order of press sheets.
 Renumber press sheets

You can renumber press sheets without changing their order.
1 In Product View, open the Inspector and select the press sheet from which
you want to change the numbering.
In the Numbering panel, you see that the numbering is set to Automatic as
default.
2 In the Start numbering at box, enter a number that you want to start the
numbering with.
The selected press sheet is renumbered and all the subsequent sheets are
renumbered automatically. You can see the new numbers in the header of the
press sheet nodes and in the press node. For example, if your job has six press
sheets and you set the first sheet to PS 20, the subsequent sheets are renum-
bered PS 21, PS 22, PS 23, PS 24 and PS 25. An asterisk (*) on the first sheet
indicates that the numbering has been changed manually. The subsequent
sheets have their numbering set to Automatic.You can interrupt the renum-
bering by clearing the Automatic check box and setting a new start number.
 Reorder press sheets

You can reorder press sheets by changing the order of the nodes in the product
and this automatically adjusts the numbering. You can move several nodes
simultaneously.

 In Product View, select the node of the press sheet you want to move and drag
it up or down to the desired location. A blue line indicates where you can
drop the node in its new position. You can also select multiple press sheets
nodes (press CTRL) and move them together.
The press sheet is renumbered to respect the new order of the sheets, and the
subsequent press sheets are renumbered accordingly. An asterisk (*) in all
the node headers indicates that the order of the press sheets has been
changed manually.
Figure 8.14: Press sheets renumbered, starting from PS 20, and then reordered.
Effect on Variables
The $sheet.name and $sheet.number variables use the new press sheet
numbers. The $sheet.index variable follows the order as shown in the product
view.

408 PRODUCT VIEW
 Tools in Product View

Switch to the Select Tool ALT + A
Switch to Split Assembly Tool ALT + S
Temporarily switch to the Split Assembly Tool Hold ALT
Split into multiple blocks (with Split Assembly Tool selected) Hold CTRL
Switch to the Split Assembly Tool and split an assembly in multiple Hold ALT + CTRL
blocks
Splits a stacked signature horizontally, splitting off inserted child Hold + SHIFT
nodes.
Repeat the selected Fold Sheet (Repeat tool) CTRL + ALT + S
Flip a Fold Sheet (must be selected on a Press Sheet) CTRL + ALT + F
Rotate a Fold Sheet clockwise (must be selected on a Press Sheet) CTRL + ALT + T
Rotate a Fold Sheet counterclockwise (must be selected on a Press CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +
Sheet) T
Repeat the layout of an imposed Press Sheet to other Sheets CTRL + ALT + R
Hide Assembly pane CTRL + ALT + 1
Hide Fold Sheets CTRL + ALT + 2
Hide Part/Fold Sheet details CTRL + ALT + 3
Show/Hide Positioning Palette CTRL + |

Press Sheet View

In the Product View you can choose to view a Press Sheet in more detail. A
number of tools and palettes allow you to inspect the Press Sheet and Pages and
add or edit marks.
If a job already has content assigned to some or all of the Pages, this content can
be displayed in the Press Sheet View by choosing View > Show Page Preview.
 Double-click a Press Sheet in the Press Sheet node, or select a Press Sheet in
the Press Sheet node and click the Press Sheet View in the bottom left corner,
or choose View > Show Sheet View.
Figure 8.15: Press Sheet View

1 Press Sheet
2 View Options
3 Toolbar
4 Marks Palette
1
Besides the detailed arrangement and marks of the Press Sheet, this view has
three dedicated palettes and a toolbar:
 View Options Palette
 Marks Palette
 Positioning Palette (mainly used for unbound jobs)

410 PRESS SHEET VIEW
 Press Sheet Toolbar
NOTE: The Inspector and Mark Sets Inspector can also be used in the Product
View.
View Options The Press Sheet view opens with a single Press Sheet displayed. By default, you
will see the Front or Back of the Press Sheet depending on which side you
selected. You can also view the reverse side of the Press Sheet with the Light
Table tool.
1 Text Mark 1 2
2 File Mark
3 Press Sheet Box
4 Press Sheet Margin
5 Fold Sheet Box 3
6 Page Box 4
7 Page Bleed
8 Fold Sheet Gutter
5
9 Gripper
10 Fold Sheet Lay
11 Press Sheet Lay
12 Overfold
12
6
7
11 10 9 8
The View Options palette in the Press Sheet View is used to show and hide the
various rule-ups. For example, this allows you to inspect overlapping rule-ups.

The rule-ups are divided into the following categories:
 Press Sheet Rule-Ups
 Box: the bounding box around the Press Sheet
 Lay: triangle icon indicating lay of the Press Sheet
 Fold Sheet Block: the area enclosing all Fold Sheets
 Gaps: the space between Fold Sheets/elements
 Margins
 Gripper: the Gripper area of the Press Sheet as set for the Press
 W&T: Work and Turn
 Fold Sheet Rule-Ups
 Box: the bounding box around the Fold Sheet
 Name: FS1, FS2, etc. in the middle of the Fold Sheet

 Lay: triangle icon indicating lay of the Fold Sheet
 Overfold: extra area for finishing machines
 Gutters: the no-content area
 Page
 Box: the bounding box around the Page; Name: the Page numbers
 Name: the page numbers
 Bleed: shows the bleed area on the Page
 Mark Box: the bounding box around the Text Mark and File Mark
 Previews: shows the content of marks (e.g. colorbars) and high resolution
page thumbnails
 Measurements: shows fixed measurements of the Press Sheet and its compo-
nents, the margins and the gutter; does not affect custom measurements
 Hidden Marks: marks that will not be printed due to conflicts; displayed in a
red, hatched box
 View Options Sets drop-down list: choose, create, rename or delete prefer-
ence sets for the View Options
 To show/hide rule-ups and hidden marks

1 Click the Show/hide View Options button in the Toolbar or choose
Window > View Options to show the View palette.
2 Click the individual or group eye icons to show or hide the various rule-ups
and marks.
3 Click the colored boxes to open a color editor where you can change the color
of the rule-ups and measurements.
4 Click in the drop-down list at the bottom of the View Options palette to
choose, create, rename or delete preference sets for the View Options.

Hovering, To inspect the different components (Pages, Fold Sheets, Marks, etc.) on the
Press Sheet, you can hover over these components to highlight the area and
Selecting, tooltips with settings. Most components can be selected by clicking and then
Navigating inspected with the Inspector.
NOTE: The Selection tool must be selected for this mode.
 Inspecting by hovering
 With the Selection tool selected, hover over a component to highlight the
area of the component.
The component or area is highlighted with a thick line.
 Inspecting with tooltips
 With the Selection tool selected, click a component and hold the mouse
button until its settings are displayed.
The component or area is highlighted and details are displayed in a tooltip.
 example: face trim

 example: text mark
 Selecting a Page
 With the Selection tool selected, click in a Page.
The Page is indicated in blue.

 Selecting a Fold Sheet
 With the Selection tool selected, click along the edge of the Fold Sheet area
and click the Fold Sheet name (e.g. FS1 on PS1) in the tooltip list.
The Fold Sheet is indicated in blue.
 Selecting a Press Sheet
 With the Selection tool selected, click in the Press Sheet area outside the Fold
Sheet.
The Press Sheet is indicated in blue.

 Inspecting and editing with the Inspector
With the Inspector open you can select a component or area and change its
settings.
1 Open the Inspector and click in a component, for example a mark.
The settings for the mark are displayed.
2 Change the settings as required.
These settings are applied immediately to the Press Sheet you are modifying.
 Zooming and Navigating in Press Sheet View

Additional tools in the toolbar at the bottom of the Press Sheet View are used to
navigate the Press Sheet and inspect the content more closely. These tools are
similar to the tools used in Raster Preview. Refer to the Icons Over view for more
information about these tools.
 Selecting layers in Press Sheet View
The Press Sheet View consists of layers to enable the selection of obscured or
overlapping items.
1 Click in a component and hold the mouse button until a tooltip appears.

The tooltip shows a list of the layers and the components on these layers, with
the topmost layer at the top of the list and the bottommost layer at the
bottom.
2 Click the component in this list to select it.
Related topics: • Mark Pens on page 994
Measuring the Apogee Impose can display a large number of fixed measurements on the Press
Sheet, or you can choose to define your own measurements with the Measure-
Press Sheet ment tool.
Components
Fixed Measurements
Fixed measurements of the Press Sheet and its components, the margins, gutters
and the gripper are available at all times for all Press Sheets.
 Choose View > Show Measurements to display all the fixed measurements.
OR

Open the View Options palette, expand the Measurements item and choose
the measurements you want to see:
 Dimensions: Page, Fold Sheet and Press Sheet sizes
 Shingling: the amount and direction of shingling effects
 Fold Sheet Block: distance to the edge of the Press Sheet
 Fold Sheets: distance to the edge of the Press Sheet
 Gutters: distance between trim edges of Pages within the same Fold Sheet
 Outside Margins: distance from outside trim edges of the Page to the edge
of the Press Sheet
 Gripper
NOTE: Use the shortcut CTRL+SHIFT+R to switch measurements on and off.
Custom Measurements
The Measurements tool lets you make detailed measurements on the Press Sheet
and determine the distance between components on the sheet. Several measure-
ments can be made and remain visible simultaneously, even when you switch
back to another tool. These measurements are updated according to any
changes made to the components.

When you have finished measuring, you can clear all the measurements from the
Press Sheet View. Measurements are also removed if you close the Press Sheet
View.
NOTE: Show/Hide Measurements in the View Options palette or when chosen

from the View menu does not affect custom measurements.
Each component has 9 reference hot spots: 8 around the edges and 1 in the
middle. These are indicated with a blue dot. Measuring between hot spots
provides two-dimensional measurements where applicable.
Two methods exist for measuring:
 Single-clicking 2 reference points
 Double-clicking a component
 To measure the distance between reference points

1 Click the Measurement button in the Toolbar.
The cursor displays a number 1.
2 Hover over the component you want to start your measurement from, for
example a Page, Mark or Rule-up, and click to fix the first reference point.
NOTE: Press Esc to cancel a reference point.
3 Click a second time to fix the second reference point.

 To display the measurements of a component

2 Double-click a component, for example a color bar.
If applicable, the width and height of the component are displayed

automatically.
 To measure between two hot spots (two-dimensional)

2 Hover over the component you want to start your measurement from, for
example a Page, Mark or Rule-up, but locate a hot spot (blue dot) before
clicking to fix the first reference point.
3 Click another hot spot to define the second reference point.
You now have two measurements between your reference points.

Marks Palette The Marks palette in the Press Sheet View is used to place marks manually on the
Page, Fold Sheet or Press Sheet. In other words these marks do not depend on
conditions and they can be placed relative to any possible object on the page or
sheet.
The palette contains the following marks categories:
 Page Marks: e.g. Page Crop
 Fold Sheet Marks (bound jobs)/Element Marks (unbound jobs): e.g. Fold
Line, Cut, Collation
 Press Sheet Marks:e.g. Registration marks
The various mark types in these categories are managed in the Mark Engraver
Resource of the Impose Task Processor. Refer to “Mark Engraver” on page 961
and “Mark Types” on page 967 for more information about the different types of
marks and their settings.
CAUTION: Marks placed manually may be positioned at unexpected locations

and on other sheets than the sheet you are working on.
Related topics: • Mark Engraver on page 961

• Mark Types on page 967
 To place a mark manually

1 Click the Marks button in the Toolbar or choose Window > Marks Palette to
show the Marks palette.
The Marks palette is displayed.

2 Hover over the icons to see what kind of marks are available.
3 Drag the required mark onto the Press Sheet.
The Marks Inspector appears with default settings for the selected mark.
 To add a mark to a Mark Set

Once a mark has been added to a page or sheet, it can be included in a Mark Set.
1 In the Marks Inspector, click the cogwheel in the bottom left corner.
2 Choose an existing Mark Set or choose New to create a new Mark Set for your
manually placed marks.

 To move/copy a mark
The following marks can be moved and/or copied:
 File
 Rectangle
 Circle
 Line
 Text
1 Select the mark you want to move, drag it to the desired location and release
the mouse button.
2 To duplicate the mark, press CTRL.
A + sign is displayed.
The original mark reappears at the original location and a copy is created
when you release the mouse button.
NOTE: Marks can only be moved and copied one by one.
Press Sheet Toolbar The tools in the Press Sheet View are similar to those of the main Imposition
window and the Raster Preview window. The following tools are dedicated to
the Press Sheet View only:
Product View button. Return to Product View from Press Sheet View.
the default tool.
Single Instance Selection tool. Use this pointer tool to select a single instance of marks
which are placed at various locations on the Press Sheet, or part of a compound mark.
View Options Palette button: shows/hides the View Options Palette

Marks Palette button: shows/hides the Marks Palette
Go to previous Press Sheet or web
Go to next Press Sheet or web
Turn Sheet button. In the Press Sheet View, click to view the other side of a Press Sheet.
Measurements. Use this tool to make measurements on the Press Sheet.
Clear Measurements (only activated if the sheet has measurements). Click to remove all mea-
surements displayed on the Press Sheet.
Submit button. In the Press Sheet View, closes the window and submits the job without
returning to the Product View.
 Tools in Press Sheet View

Switch to the Zoom Tool ALT + Z
Switch to Measurement Tool ALT + M
Switch to the Pan Tool ALT + H
Clear any measurements from a Press Sheet CTRL + ALT + M
Switch Light Table mode on and off CTRL + L
Temporarily switch to the Measurement Tool Hold ALT
Temporarily switch to the Pan Tool Hold space bar
To turn the Press Sheet: flip front to back (Turn Press Sheet tool) CTRL + T
Zoom into Press Sheet CTRL +
OR
CTRL + mouse wheel
Zoom out of Press Sheet CTRL -
OR
CTRL + mouse wheel
Zoom to fit Press Sheet in window CTRL + 0 (zero)
Show/Hide View Options in Press Sheet View CTRL + E
Go to next sheet (Sheet View) CTRL + right arrow
Go to previous sheet (Sheet View) CTRL + left arrow
Close the selected gaps (Sheet View) CTRL+.
Copy a mark CTRL+ drag

Inspector
In the Product View and Press Sheet View, you can use the Inspector to check
and edit the settings of the various imposition components (Pages, Fold Sheets,
Press Sheets, Marks, etc.).
You can also use the Inspector to verify in which nodes a particular component
can be found or to make selections by component.
Figure 8.16: Displaying settings and highlighting components in Product View
In the Press Sheet View you can use the Inspector to locate marks on a Press
Sheet.
Figure 8.17: Highlighting the location of a mark in Press Sheet View

426 INSPECTOR
 To view the Inspector, click in a node or a component (Page, Fold Sheet,

Press Sheet, Mark, etc.), and then click the Inspector button in the toolbar
OR
Press CTRL+I.
1
2
5
6
1 Selection panel
2 Selection button
3 Settings
4 Resource settings button
5 Reset (revert) button
6 cogwheel menu
The Inspector consists of the following panels:
 Selection panel with selection button: identifies the current selection (on
the left) and provides a way to expand the selection by choosing a crite-
rion from the drop-down list (on the right).
 Settings: lists all the settings of the selected component in a single panel
or on several tabs if many settings exist, e.g. for marks. You can edit these
settings. Some settings have an extra button to open the resource settings
in a separate window.
 cogwheel: displays a list of relevant commands.

Editing/Resetting The Inspector displays two kinds of settings for nodes and their imposition
components:
with the Inspector
 Settings inherited from a parent component: for example Page Stock is inher-
ited from Product by Part, Pages, Fold Sheet and Press Sheet. These can be
reset with the Reset button.
 Component-specific settings: for example Folding Scheme of a Fold Sheet. If

you change one of these, you can revert by choosing Undo (CTRL+Z).
Choosing an option from a drop-down list (e.g. a Folding Scheme) will apply this
option immediately to the selected component.
Entering values in edit boxes are confirmed when you click outside the box or
press Enter.
When you change the settings in the Inspector they are applied immediately in
the Imposition windows but they are only updated in the Job Ticket Editor when
you close the Imposition windows. This means the settings in the Inspector may
differ from those in the Job Ticket Editor if you switch between these windows
while editing.
With the Resource Settings button you can jump to specific resources, e.g.
Binding Options and Press Sheet Layout rules. These changes apply only to the
Product you are working on and do not affect the configuration.
Editing the settings may create a conflict. This is indicated with a red outline
around the node and an error icon.
Clicking the red error icon displays the Snag List that lists the errors.
For the marks in the Press Sheet View, the Inspector displays settings which are
specific for the selected mark (usually on several tabs). These settings are not
inherited from the Product.

428 INSPECTOR
Inspecting In Product View you can inspect and edit the settings of the imposition nodes
and the components in the nodes.
Imposition Settings
in Product View For the Product, Part and Page, the Inspector shows the settings defined in the
Products tab of the Job Ticket Editor. The Product and Part editors are used to
define these settings in the Products tab. In the Inspector you can choose to
change these generic settings for individual components.
For the other nodes, the Inspector shows the setting defined in the Auto Impose
editor (automatic imposition mode) or the settings you chose for the imposition
in manual imposition mode.
Some components are displayed in more than one node, e.g. the Fold Sheet in
the Fold Sheet node and the Assembly node. In this case the Inspector shows the
same information in each of these nodes.
Related topics: • Product Inspector on page 295

• Part Inspector on page 298
• Press Sheet Layout Rules Overview on page 1036
• Binding Options Overview on page 886
 To inspect the Product
 Click the Product node to display the settings for the Product.
The settings for the Product are displayed.

You can modify the following resources or settings for the product:
 Stock
 Page Size
 Bleed
 Binding Options Overview
 Glue Zones Overview
 Press Sheet Layout Rules Overview
 Shingling Rules
 Bottling Rules
 To inspect the Page

You can inspect a page and change the page size so it has a different size than the
other pages in the part.

430 INSPECTOR
 Click a Page in the Product node to display the settings for the Page.
The settings for the Page are displayed.
You can override the following settings for the selected page:
 Page Size
 Bleed
 Glue Zones Overview (Knock out, shift, scale)
 Shingling Rules

 To inspect the Part
 Click a Part node to display the settings for the Part.
The settings for the Part are displayed.

432 INSPECTOR
 To inspect the Part
 Click a Part node to display the settings for the Part.
The settings for the Part are displayed.

 To inspect the Book Signature
TIP: You can show/hide the  Click a Book Signature node to display the settings for the Book Signature.
Book Signatures column by
choosing View > Show/Hide
Book Signatures.
The settings for the Book Signature are displayed.
Click the arrow in the Pages section to see which Part the signature belongs
to and click the Placed On arrow to see on which Folding Sheet the signature
has been placed.

434 INSPECTOR
 To inspect the Fold Sheet
 Click the Fold Sheet, or the Fold Sheet node or the Assembly node to
display the settings for the Fold Sheet.
The settings for the Fold Sheet are displayed.
NOTE: The Signature numbering panel is displayed in the inspector if you

enabled the Advanced book signature numbering option in the Product
editor. See “Renumber Fold Sheets/Book Signatures” on page 404.

 To inspect the Fold Sheet Side
 Click the Fold SheetSide in the Press Sheet node to display the settings for
the Fold Sheet Side.
The settings for the Fold Sheet Side are displayed.
 To inspect the Press Sheet
 Click a Press Sheet node or a PS in the Press node to display the settings for
the Press Sheet.
The settings for the Press Sheet are displayed.

436 INSPECTOR
NOTE: In the Numbering panel you can control how press sheets are numbered.
See “Renumber and Reorder Press Sheets” on page 406.
 To inspect the Press Sheet Side
 Click a Press Sheet Front or Back in the Press node to display the settings
for the Press Sheet Side.
The settings for the Press Sheet Side are displayed.

 To inspect similar components (Expand Selection)

An arrow in the selection panel of the Inspector indicates that a drop-down list
is available for expanding the selection based on the settings of the selected
component.
1 Click in a node, or a component (Pages, Fold Sheets, Press Sheets, Marks,

etc.) with the Inspector open.
The settings window appears (e.g. for a Fold Sheet).
2 Click in the drop-down list in the top right corner

438 INSPECTOR
3 Choose an option, e.g.Same folding scheme.
All components with the same folding scheme are indicated with a blue
outline.
4 Click the grey arrow in the top left corner to highlight these components.
 Opening Binding Options from the Inspector

A grey selection button in the Inspector of certain nodes (for example: Product)
provides a shortcut to additional setting.
1 Click the Product node with the Inspector open.
2 Click the resource settings button next to Binding Options to open the
Binding Options.

 Opening Press Sheet Layout Rules from the Inspector

A grey selection arrow in the Inspector of certain nodes (for example: Product)
provides a shortcut to additional setting.
1 Click the Product node with the Inspector open.
2 Click the grey arrow next to Sheet Layout Rules to edit these rules.
Inspecting Marks in Most of the imposition components (Pages, Fold Sheet and Press Sheets) can be
inspected and edited in the Sheet View, however, you will generally use the
Sheet View Sheet View to inspect marks.

440 INSPECTOR
The settings displayed in the Inspector are similar to those you find in the Mark
Engraver resource.
 Selecting Marks with the Inspector (Expand Selection)

1 In the Press Sheet View, click in a Mark with the Inspector open.
The settings window appears (e.g. for a File Mark).
2 Click in the drop-down list in the top right corner
3 Choose an option, e.g.Same appearance.
The selected marks are indicated with a blue outline.
4 Click the grey arrow in the top left corner to highlight these components.
This can be done for all mark types.
 Finding how a mark was placed

1 In the Press Sheet View, click in a Mark with the Inspector open.
The settings window appears (e.g. for a Page Crop mark) and in the bottom
right corner you can see how the mark was placed.

2 Click the grey button.
The Mark Engraver opens and the Mark Set that placed the mark is
highlighted.
Cogwheel The cogwheel in the bottom left corner of the Inspector lists a number of
commands that are relevant for the selected imposition node or component.
Commands in the
Inspector
The following commands are displayed depending on the selected node or

components:

442 INSPECTOR
 Imposition components in Product and Sheet View

Command Action
Reset Resets selection
Reset All Resets all production settings
Auto Impose Opens the Auto Impose dialog box
View Opens the Press Sheet View
Reset (Fold Sheets) Resets the layout of the Fold Sheets according to the Press Sheet
Layout Rules
Reset Position Resets the orientation and flip state to 0° and not flipped
 Marks in Sheet View

Command Action
Reset Resets selection
Reset All Resets all production settings
Add to Mark Sets Adds the selection to a Mark Set
Open in Mark Engraver Opens the selected Mark in the Mark Engraver
Manage Mark Sets Opens the Mark Engraver (from Mark Sets Inspector)

Mark Sets Inspector

The Mark Sets Inspector is available in the Product View and the Press Sheet
View. This inspector lists all the Mark Sets by category and in the same order as
they appear in the Mark Engraver. Only information relevant for the current
selection is shown.
 The Mark Set Inspector is opened by clicking the Mark Sets Inspector button
in the toolbar.
The Mark Sets Inspector is displayed.
NOTE: A Mark Set in red means the Mark Set is not available.
Depending on the current selection, the Mark Sets Inspector may contain
information on some or all of the following Mark Set categories:
 Page Mark Sets
 Fold Sheet Mark Sets
 Press Sheet Mark Sets
The Remove Manual Marks button can be used to delete any marks that you
placed manually.
The cogwheel provides a shortcut to the Mark Engraver.

444 MARK SETS INSPECTOR

Snag List
The Snag List is available in the Product View and the Press Sheet View and lists
conflicts and problems to be checked.
 The Snag List is opened by clicking a problem in a node, by clicking the error
icon in the bottom right corner of the Product View or Press Sheet View, or by
clicking CTRL+R.
The Snag List contains the following information:
 Left column - top pane: summary of all validation items with 2 entries: one
for All and a second for the selected node or component.
 Left column - bottom pane: items to be checked, sorted by severity with

errors at the top and OK at the bottom.
 Right column: the list of issues per category with button to jump to the
problem in the Product View of the Sheet View.
 To locate an imposition conflict

1 Click an error icon in a node in the Product View or Press Sheet View.
The Snag List opens and the total number of issues for the selected node are
indicated.
2 In the bottom pane of the left column, select a category.

446 SNAG LIST
3 In the right column, click the grey arrow to highlight the issue in the Product
View of the Press Sheet View.
Marks are highlighted in the Press Sheet View.
Problems related to a node are highlighted in the Product View.
NOTE: The view you are in may switch, depending on the type of issue you
jump to.
4 Resolve the error by changing the settings for the mark or the node.

Page Previews
If pages have been assigned to the Run List, you can view thumbnail previews in
Product View as well as Press Sheet View. The job with placed pages does not
have to be submitted for you to see the thumbnails.
NOTE: In the Normalizer, select the Create Low Resolution Previews option to
obtain page previews with a higher resolution in the Press Sheet View.
 To see page previews in Product View
 Choose View > Show Page Preview to preview thumbnails of the pages
already placed in the Run List.
 To see page previews in Press Sheet View
 Choose View > Show Page Preview to preview thumbnails of the pages
already placed in the Run List
OR
Select Page Previews in the View Options palette.
NOTE: Use the shortcut CTRL+SHIFT+T to switch thumbnails on and off while
working in Product or Press Sheet View.
Related topics: • Low Resolution Previews on page 718

448 IMPOSITION REPORTS
Imposition Reports
Imposition Reports can be created from the Job List or from any of the Apogee
Impose windows. An Imposition Report includes a mock-up of a Press Sheet
imposition and the details of the job. This information is exported as a PDF file
and saved to a specified location. The report can be created interactively if
needed for the job at hand or you can set it up to be generated automatically each
time a job is processed. The mock-up includes the main rule-ups, fixed measure-
ments (not custom measurements), lays, colorbars and gripper. The job details
may include a variety of the parameters you can find in Product inspector such
as paper stock, press sheet size, folding scheme, etc. A report is created for each
flow in the plan. The presets for these reports are created in the Imposition
Reports editor.
 Generate an Imposition Report interactively

This procedure is for generating an Imposition Report interactively for a selected
job which has been imposed.
1 In Product View or Press Sheet View, choose Imposition > Export Imposition
Report.
OR
In the Job List, context-click the job and choose Export Imposition Report.
2 In the dialog box, choose an Imposition Report preset from the drop-down
list. Two presets are provided by default: one for a mock-up and one for a
mock-up and job details.
3 Click the Export and Open button.
A report is created for all the press sheets and according to the Imposition
Report preset you chose, for example with or without page previews. The
PDF opens in your PDF reader application. The PDF is saved in the location
specified in your preset.
You can create a bespoke Imposition Report for your job by clicking Manage
Imposition Reports at the bottom of the drop-down list.
 Generate Imposition Reports automatically

You can set up your Job Ticket or Hot Ticket so that an Imposition Report is
created automatically each time the job is processed. This is done in the Impose
component of the Production Plan where Apogee Impose must be selected for
the imposition.
1 Go to the Impose component in the Production Plan of your Job Ticket or Hot
Ticket. If you have multiple flows, repeat this procedure for each flow.

2 Unlock the settings and choose an Imposition Report preset from the drop-
down list.
3 Select the Export automatically check-box and lock the settings.
4 Make sure your imposition is ready and set the View options in Press Sheet
view. If necessary, create a View options preset that can be referenced in the
Imposition Report preset. Any changes you make to the View options are not
shown in the mock-up if they are not saved as a View options preset.
5 Submit the Job Ticket.
An Imposition Report will be generated and saved in the location specified in

the preset when you process the job. The PDF does not open automatically
and you need to browse to the output location to open it.
 Create an Imposition Report preset

Imposition Report presets are created in the Imposition Report editor.
1 In Product View or Press Sheet View, choose Imposition > Export Imposition
Report.
OR
In the Job List, context-click the job and choose Export Imposition Report.
OR
Go to the settings panel of the Impose component in the Production Plan of

your Job Ticket or Hot Ticket.
2 From the Imposition Reports drop-down list, choose Manage Imposition

Reports to open the Imposition Reports editor.
3 Create a preset like you would for other resources.
Related topics:
 Imposition Reports Editor

This dialog box is for creating presets that need to be selected if you want to
generate an Imposition Report. You can specify if you want a section with the
details of the job, a section with a mock-up, or both sections.

Contents
Include Job Details Select to include information about the job:
 General information: Order no., Job name, Customer name and contact,
comments
 Products and Parts: A table lists the product (or multiple products) and its
parts with the settings as used for the job (Fold Sheet, Pages, Scheme,
Size, Stock, Press)
 Press Sheets: A table lists the press sheets of the job with their settings
(workstyle, colors, size, stock, press, run length)

Include Press Sheet Mock- Select to include previews of the Press Sheets which by default will be full-size
up and use the Standard View Options; you can control this with the following
options:
Type Full-size press sheets: the Front and Back sides of all the Press Sheets are
produced at full-size and per page of the PDF
Scaled press sheets: The Front and Back sides of each Press Sheet are scaled so
they can be shown on a single page of the PDF
View Options Select one of the presets for the View Options from the drop-down list; this
determines which components will be shown in the mock-up; for example the
page previews (page content), rule-ups, measurements, etc. Note that any
incidental changes to View Options that you may have made in Press Sheet view
will not be shown in the mock-up. It is recommended to set up the View Options
you want for your report in Press Sheet view and then save these View Options
as a preset that can be picked up here.

Page number Select to use the Run List indexes instead of the page labels.
JDF sheet names Select to use the JDF names for the Press Sheets, if applicable.
Page size Select the page size of the Imposition Report PDF for the job details section and
the mock-up if the scaled press sheets option is chosen.
Units Choose mm or inches for the units used in the report.
Decimal separator Choose decimal point or comma for the units used in the report.
Result Delivery
On this tab you can specify the Export Directory and the File Name for the report
using the usual variables or by browsing to a location. In the Conflict Handling
section you can choose to replace existing files (reports) or keep existing files
and add a sequence number (_1, _2, etc.) to the file name each time a report is
generated.
Related topics: • Generic Variables on page 1120

Menus
The following menus are available in the main imposition window. Some
commands are only active in the specified view (Product View or Press Sheet
View), while others only for certain Product types (bound, unbound, calendar).
Imposition Menu
Menu Item To...
Auto Impose Open the Auto Impose window (Product View)
Close Save your imposition changes and close the Imposition window
Submit Changes Close the Product View and submit the Job Ticket
Export Imposition Report Open the Imposition Report dialog to create a PDF of the imposition
Edit Menu
Commands on the Edit menu affect the imposition.
Menu Item To...

Select All (Product View) Select all components of the same category: Select all Parts, Fold
Sheets, Press Sheets
Select All Marks (Press Select all marks on the Press Sheet
Sheet View)
Expand Selection Expand your selection based on a setting of the selected compo-
nent; the relevant settings appear in a drop-down list
Repeat Imposition (Prod- Display a dialog box where you can choose to copy the imposition
uct View) of a Press Sheet to other Press Sheets
Reapply All Mark Sets Re-apply marks to their automatic settings, removing manual edits
Flip Front/Back (Fold Flip the selected Fold Sheet on the Press Sheet
Sheet in Product View)
Rotate (Fold Sheet in Rotate the selected Fold Sheet on the Press Sheet 90° clockwise,
Product View) 90° counterclockwise or 180° clockwise
Close Gap Close the selected gap (Sheet View)
Calculate Zones for Slow- Forces the system to search for a suitable layout with slow-down
Down Wheels wheels, without time-out.
View Menu
Commands on the View menu can be used to show and hide components but do
not affect the imposition.

454 MENUS
Menu Item To...

Show/Hide Run List switch between absolute run list index and page numbering per part
Indexes
Show Selection show the selection when it is not visible on the screen
Show/Hide Assembly show/hide the assembly at the top of the Product View
Pane
Show/Hide Book Signa- show/hide the Book Signature nodes in a column next to the Fold
tures Sheet nodes
Show/Hide Fold Sheets show/hide the Fold Sheet nodes in the Product View
Show/Hide Part/Fold expand/collapse the Part and Fold Sheet nodes in the Product View
Sheet Details
Show Press Sheet open the Press Sheet View of a selected Press Sheet
Show Product View return to the Product View of the open Press Sheet
Show/Hide Page Pre- display page thumbnails if pages have been assigned in the Run List
views
Show/Hide Page Mea- display all standard measurements for components on the Press
surements Sheet
Compact View only show the labels of the nodes and make the view more compact
Show/Hide Sheet View open a selected Press Sheet in Press Sheet view
Window Menu
Commands on the Window menu can be used to activate or switch off palettes
and inspector windows.

Imposing Multi-Product Jobs

A single Apogee job can combine several print products with the intention of
optimizing printing operations, and these jobs are referred to as multi-product
jobs. A multi-product job is either created from scratch to combine several
products in one job (i.e. a planned multi-product job) or can be the result of
merging existing jobs (i.e.a merged job). You can combine bound with unbound
products, and products with different attributes. You can preserve existing
impositions and combine them with new impositions using the interactive and/
or automatic modes of Apogee Impose.
NOTE: More than one product is not allowed for WebApproval jobs.
Figure 8.18: Multi-products in Product View (Compact View)
Planned Multi- The basic structure of a planned multi-product job has to be created by the
operator in Apogee or submitted to the system using JDF. Use the Add Product
Product Jobs command in the Products tab of the Job Ticket Editor to add multiple products
to a job you are creating. You can also use the Add Product command to create
and add new products to an existing job. Apogee Impose can subsequently be
used to deal with the imposition details – just like single-product jobs.

456 IMPOSING MULTI-PRODUCT JOBS
Related topics: • Using the Products Tab on page 291
Merged Jobs You may want to bring together smaller jobs that already exist and combine the
individual products of these jobs into a multi-product job. All merged jobs are
multi-product jobs. You cannot merge jobs that have versions or already have
more than one product, but you can merge jobs whose products have several
parts.
NOTE: Merging Layout jobs produces a merged job with a single product, and
consequently you cannot preserve the imposition of the original jobs.
Related topics: • Merging Jobs on page 210

Imposing Digital Products

In this documentation, a digital product refers to a product printed on a digital
printer or press, except Sign and Display products. Apogee Impose provides the
following imposition types that can be selected when using the Auto Impose
feature for digital products:
Cut & Stack The pages on a press sheets of a Cut & Stack imposition are cut and then put on
top of each other to obtain the correct page sequence.
Figure 8.19: 16-page double-sided product with Cut & Stack imposition (right) compared with
a nested imposition (left)
Booklet The press sheets form stacks of two-by-two page spreads that can be folded in
the middle and then collected to create a booklet. Book signatures can be created
to allow for the maximum folding thickness.
Figure 8.20: 16-page double-sided product with Booklet imposition and 2 book signatures
(right) compared with a nested imposition for 1 book signature (left)
Step & Repeat Pages are duplicated on the press sheet which is cut to create 2 or more products.

458 IMPOSING DIGITAL PRODUCTS
Figure 8.21: 8-page double-sided product with Step & Repeat imposition to create 2 identical
products (right) compared with a Cut & Stack imposition (left)
The imposition type is also indicated in the Fold Sheet node in the Product View.
Related topics: • Imposition Type on page 373

Imposing Multi-Up Products

With a Multi-Up product you can combine two or more book signatures on a
single Fold Sheet. After printing, folding and binding, the bound block is cut in
two or more products. Apogee Impose automates the n-up arrangement and
optimizes the filling of the Press Sheet. The different types of marks and mark
variables are placed logically according to the number of products.
A Multi-Up product is set up in the Product editor when defining the product by
choosing a Binding Options resource that has a Number-up binding selected,
typically 2-Up or 3-Up. Fitting the Fold Sheet horizontally and vertically to the
Press Sheet is set in the Press Sheet Layout Rules.
Multi-Up is ideal for small products that will be printed on large printing presses
to reduce press run lengths. Multi-Up is also used for the Come and Go binding
style that puts different book signatures on the same Fold and Press Sheets to
reduce the number of plates required to print a job.
2-up 2-up Come & Go 3-up 3-up Come & Go
Viewing a Multi-Up The Fold Sheet and Press Sheet nodes in regular Multi-Up jobs have 2 or 3
identical book signatures which are displayed in different shades in the main
Product imposition windows.
1 Pages of book signatures

highlighted in different shades
2 Number of pages per book 1
signature
In the Fold Sheet node you can see the actual number of pages in the book signa-
ture. For example 2 x 8 means the book signature has 8 pages which will be
printed twice on the same sheet. Apogee Impose selects a Folding Scheme for 8
pages and not for 16 pages even though the Fold Sheet has 16 pages to be placed.

460 IMPOSING MULTI-UP PRODUCTS
Figure 8.22: A regular 2-up job
NOTE: If you decide to choose a Folding Scheme in the Auto Impose window,
remember that it must match the number of pages in the book signature and not
the number of cells on the Fold Sheet.
A Come and Go job puts 2 different book signatures on the same Fold Sheet and
Press Sheet. In other words, there is no one-to-one relationship between the
book signatures and the Fold and Press Sheets. The redundant Fold and Press
Sheets are greyed out. Selecting a book signature node in the assembly
highlights corresponding pages on the Fold Sheet and Press Sheet.
Figure 8.23: A Come and Go 2-up job with redundant sheets greyed out
Related topics: • Binding Options Overview on page 886

• Press Sheet Layout Rules Overview on page 1036

Imposing Web Production Jobs

Web production jobs are jobs which have a web press in the production plan and
are printed on a roll of paper instead of sheets. A web press uses a web produc-
tion scheme, similar to a folding scheme for sheet-fed presses, to arrange the
pages of the job on the web. A web production scheme can be set up to produce
several deliveries and accommodate ribbons if required. A web press can have
multiple webs and a job on such a press is referred to as a multi-web job.
The following are prerequisites for creating a web production job:
 Set up a web press in the Press resource: See “Generic Press” on page 846 for
more information.
 Create a Web Production Scheme resource for the web press: See “Web
Production Schemes” on page 1060 for more information.
 Define press sheet sizes for the web press: See “Sheet Sizes” on page 641 for
more information.
Web production introduces a series of specific naming conventions for webs,

deliveries, etc. and these naming conventions that you see in theApogee Impose
module also trickle through to the other tabs of the Job Ticket Editor.
Product View (Web The Product View for a web production job is similar to the view of a sheet-fed
bound product. The main difference with a sheet-fed job is that the press and its
Printing) web production schemes define the page arrangement and not the folding
scheme.

462 IMPOSING WEB PRODUCTION JOBS
Figure 8.24: 32 pages on a single web, with filled slots for 2 deliveries (A and B)
The Workstyle list in the Press Sheet node includes the web production schemes.
If the Press Sheet is already assigned to a press, the Workstyle list only shows the
web production schemes for that particular press. These schemes are organized
by categories if applicable.
Selecting a Web Production Scheme displays the slots on the bottom and top of
the sheet, and for the different color-coded deliveries with the number of pages
for each deliverable.
Figure 8.25: Press Sheet node with empty slots for 2 deliveries
The Fold Sheet nodes can be dragged onto the slots if the numbers of pages
match.

Figure 8.26: Multi-web Press node with the sheets of 2 webs on the same Press Sheet
Selecting a scheme also sets the sheet size. Apogee Impose takes the best avail-
able Sheet Size width and retrieves the height for that specific press. A web press
prints on a roll of paper and the height of the press sheet depends on the press
cut-off.
If a scheme has more than one web, the press sheet for each web is displayed in
a single press sheet node and each web is indicated with W1, W2, W3, etc.
Multiple webs are displayed as one virtual press sheet in the Press node.
Figure 8.27: 32 pages as 1 delivery on 2 webs (W1 and W2), on 1 virtual press sheet
Note that the Fold Sheet node does not have a folding scheme. It only provides a
color-coded indication of the deliveries (A, B, C, etc.). Deliveries are also
indicated in the Assembly node when you select them in the Press Sheet node.

Figure 8.28: Multi-web Press Sheet node with 1 of 2 deliveries selected (blue outline)
 To create a web production job with Auto Impose

1 Create a job for a bound product like you would for a sheet-fed job.
2 Enter the number of pages and define the parts.
3 In the Products tab, choose a Press Sheet Layout and click the Auto Impose
button to open the Auto Impose window.
4 Choose a web press from the drop-down list.
When a web press is selected, some of the panels change and you can only
select a Sheet Size and a Web Production Scheme. The Workstyle and
Folding Scheme fields are no longer available.
5 Select a Sheet Size from the drop-down list. The list is filtered and only sizes
for the web press are shown.
Only the width is defined as the height depends on the cut-off length of the
web press
6 Select a web production scheme from the drop-down list. Schemes may be
organized in categories.
The description of the scheme is displayed under the scheme name. Check
that the scheme is suitable for the job: number of pages, number of deliveries,
etc.
7 Repeat for each part.
8 Click Impose.
The Product View is displayed with press sheets assigned to the web press
and the fold sheets assigned to a deliverable on the press sheet.
 To create a web production job in manual mode

1 Create a job for a bound product like you would for a sheet-fed job.

2 Enter the number of pages and define the parts.
3 In the Products tab, choose a Press Sheet Layout and click the Edit Imposition
button to open the Product View.
4 Drag the Press Sheet node onto a web press.
NOTE: To change the press once it has been assigned, drag the Press Sheet off
the node of the assigned press and then drag the Press Sheet node onto the
new press.
5 In the Press Sheet node, select a Web Production Scheme from the Workstyle
drop-down list.
The list is filtered and only displays web production schemes for the selected
press. Schemes may be organized in categories.
NOTE: If you click in the Workstyle list before assigning the press sheet to a
web press, you will also see the workstyles for sheet-fed presses. These sheet-
fed workstyles cannot be applied for web production.
6 Select a Sheet Size from the drop-down list.
The list is filtered and only sizes for the web press are shown. Only the width
is defined as the height depends on the cut-off length of the web press
7 Drag the Fold Sheet nodes onto the color-coded deliveries on the Press Sheet
node. The number of pages of the Fold Sheet node must correspond with the
pages for the deliveries.
8 Repeat for each Fold Sheet node.
9 Click Submit to save the imposition.
Press Sheet View The Press Sheet view of a web production job displays the web production
scheme which contains the deliveries. The press sheets for multiple webs are
(Web Printing) displayed separately and you can navigate to the different multi-web press
sheets using the Next/Previous buttons.

1 Web number (W1, W2, etc.)

2 Delivery rule-up 1
3 Web production scheme rule-up
4 Next/Previous buttons to other
webs
5 Delivery name (A, B, C, etc.)
2
3
View Options The View Options palette in the Press Sheet View is used to show and hide the
various rule-ups. For example, this allows you to inspect overlapping rule-ups.
The following rule-ups are specifically for web press sheets and only visible for
web production jobs. See “View Options” on page 410 for more information on
the generic rule-ups.
 Press Sheet Rule-Ups
 Box: the bounding box around the Press Sheet
 Web Production Scheme: the area enclosing all deliveries
 Margins
NOTE: Web press sheets do not have a lay, gaps or a gripper.
 Delivery Rule-Ups
 Box: the bounding box around the Delivery

 Name: A, B, C, etc. in the middle of the Delivery
 Overfold: extra area for finishing machines
 Gutters: the no-content area
NOTE: Web press deliveries do not have a lay.

468 IMPOSING UNBOUND PRODUCTS
Imposing Unbound Products

The Unbound product type is chosen for work that does not require binding and
assembly. This product type is generally for independent pages that are printed
on their own or together with independent pages from other projects, commonly
referred to as ganging jobs.
The independent pages or elements of an Unbound product can be defined

similar to the Parts of a Bound product. For example, elements can have
different sizes and you can create as many elements as you need for a job.
In automatic mode, Apogee Impose maximizes the use of the available Press
Sheet size by grouping as many elements as possible on a single Press Sheet and
repeating elements. The Auto Fit rules provide the settings for this. Apogee
Impose also calculates the number of pages required in the Run List by making
the sum of all the elements in the Product.
Apogee Impose also has powerful tools and features for editing the imposition
and placing elements on the Press Sheet in interactive mode. For example, the
Step & Repeat tool can be used to repeat one or more elements on a Press Sheet.
The Unbound Folded product type uses pagination schemes to arrange pages
arbitrarily on panels of varying dimensions. This product type is ideal for z-folds,
gatefolds and other complex folded jobs.
Figure 8.29: Apogee Impose places 5 different-sized elements on a single Press Sheet

Figure 8.30: Elements (Parts) are repeated on a Press Sheet to maximize sheet usage
For complex positioning of elements you can switch to manual positioning mode
and override the Press Sheet Layout and Auto Fit rules for a selected Press Sheet.
Product View of The structure of an Unbound Product as shown in the Product View is similar to
that of a Bound Product, with the following differences:
Unbound Products
 no spine view: the Product consists of a number of loose Parts; double-sided
Parts have their front and back pages next to each other
 each Part has its own color so it can be identified easily on the Press Sheet
 the Part node shows the Part type, name and copy count
 the Fold Sheet node indicates the size of the page and the page icon is scaled
to compare with other pages

1 Product with Elements

2 Elements (Part node) indicating
actual and requested copy count
3 Elements (Fold Sheet node) with
size indication
4 Press Sheet with ganged elements
5
5 Presses with Printing Plates per 4
Production Set
1
2 3
Copy Count When ganging different elements on a single press sheet, Apogee Impose calcu-
lates and displays the copy count for each element in the Part node. Each
element can have a different requested copy count and this is taken into account
to calculate the press run length.
1 Actual copy count in blue (over-run)

2 Requested copy count
3 Actual copy count in red (under-run)
The calculated press run length is displayed in the Press Sheet node.

1 Calculated press run length
Understanding Unbound products can be used to combine elements from different projects to
maximize the available space on a Press Sheet. Each element can be set up using
Ganging in Apogee the Part editor.
Impose
The elements are combined by Apogee Impose based on the following selection
criteria:
 printing colors
 paper stock and weight
 keep on separate Press Sheet option per Part
 single or double-sided
In the Auto Impose window you see the elements combined in Parts and you can
fine-tune the settings before letting Apogee Impose create the imposition.
Step and Repeat With at least one element placed on a Press Sheet, you can use the Step & Repeat
tool to fill part or all of the Press Sheet with the element.
(Manual
Imposition)
 To use the Step & Repeat tool
1 Drag the element, e.g. a business card, that you want to repeat onto the Press
Sheet.

2 Click the Step & Repeat button in the toolbar.
3 Click the element and hover over the element until blue arrows appear along
the sides of the element.
4 Choose a side and drag to repeat the element in the direction that you want.
The number of duplicates is displayed.
To expand diagonally, hover over a corner until you see two arrows and drag.
NOTE: Press the ALT key while dragging to suppress specified margins and
bleed between elements.
Positioning Palette For the complex positioning of elements in mainly unbound products, you can
switch to manual positioning in the Product View and use the Positioning
palette.
In this mode, Apogee Impose snaps dragged elements to align with other
elements when they are close to these other elements and you can suppress
margins and bleed if you want.
NOTE: If you do not switch to manual positioning mode, Apogee Impose

continues to apply its rules as you reposition the elements on the Press Sheet.
 To switch to manual positioning mode

1 Click the Press Sheet node you want to apply manual positioning to.

2 In the Inspector, select the arrange elements manually check box in the
Press Sheet Layout pane.
OR
Click the Positioning button in the toolbar to open the Positioning palette
and select the arrange elements manually check box at the top of the
palette.
The manual positioning icon is displayed in the title bar of Press Sheet node.
You can now override the selected Press Sheet Layout rule and position the
elements individually or in groups on the Press Sheet.
 Positioning elements with the Positioning palette

The Positioning palette is used to arrange elements on the Press Sheet.
Depending on whether you have one or more elements selected, the Positioning
palette activates relevant tools.
1 Click the Positioning Palette button in the toolbar...
... to open the Positioning palette and select the arrange elements
manually check box at the top of the palette.
2 Select one element.
You can now either position the element by filling in a Horizontal and
Vertical position (1)or you can choose one of the Align in Sheet options (2)
to align along the top, left, right, bottom, center of the Press Sheet. If you

select the Align to margins check box, the reference edges are the sheet
margins as set in the Press Sheet Layout rule.
3 While positioning and aligning the elements you can click the Margin or
Trim buttons (3) to choose a reference: either the page trim box or the box
extended with the page trim margins. You can toggle between these two
references by holding down the ALT key.
4 Select two or more elements.
You can now Group the elements (4) and align the group in the sheet (top,
left, right, bottom, center) (2), or align the selected elements with each other
(5).
You can also change the reference here for aligning by holding down the ALT
key (3).
You can also use the Set Gaps tools (6) to distribute selected elements verti-
cally, horizontally, or both, so that the gaps between the elements are the
same. If the gap size is not specified (Distribute), the outermost elements
keep their positions and the elements in between move; if a gap size is speci-
fied (fixed), the left most or bottommost elements remain in position and the
others move.
 Manual positioning by dragging elements

1 Drag elements from the Flat nodes to the Press Sheet or use the Step & Repeat
tool to copy elements already on the sheet.
2 Select one or more elements using conventional Windows key combinations.
3 Drag the element or group to the desired position.

Apogee Impose snaps the element or group to align with the Press Sheet
margins, edge or gripper or with the edge of other elements, highlighting the
edges as you drag. You can also snap to the trim box by holding down the ALT
key.
The following color code is used for this highlighting:

Snap element to... highlight
Edge of other element solid cyan
Gripper solid magenta
Press Sheet Margin dashed magenta
Press Sheet Edge dashed cyan
NOTE: An error icon appears if the positioning has created a conflict. Open the
Snag List for details.
 Reverting to the Press Sheet Layout rule from manual positioning

You can always revert to automatic positioning by the Press Sheet layout rule. If
the manual arrangement contains overlapping elements, these elements are
rearranged so there is no overlapping and they can be cut.
 Clear the arrange elements manually check box in the Inspector or

Positioning palette.
Apogee Impose applies the Press Sheet Layout rule set for the product.

Elements positioned manually Reverted to Centre Centre rule
NOTE: The layout may be different than the initial layout after reverting.

CHAPTER
9 Layout Editor
The Layout Editor is a dedicated workspace for setting up wide-format jobs,
which are printed on Sign & Display printing devices, packaging jobs and any flat
jobs that require an intricate layout.
 Overview ................................................................................................................. 478

 Product Panel ....................................................................................................... 482
 Layout Panel ......................................................................................................... 491
 Inspectors .............................................................................................................. 519
 Applying Changes and Submitting a Job ................................................... 538
 Sheet Layout Templates ................................................................................... 540
 Working with CAD Layouts ............................................................................. 547
 QuickProof Products and Sheets ................................................................... 551
 Resources ............................................................................................................... 553
 Layout Editor Menus .......................................................................................... 554
477
478 OVERVIEW
Overview
The Layout Editor is used to create wide-format jobs for printing on Sign &
Display devices. These jobs open immediately in the Layout Editor from where
they are set up and submitted. In addition, the Layout Editor can also be used to
prepare the imposition of other unbound flat jobs that require an intricate
arrangement of products on the sheet, such as packaging jobs. The latter jobs can
be opened in the Layout Editor using the Imposition Mode selector in the
Products tab.
NOTE: The Layout Editor workspace does not display all the tabs and inspectors
as described in the following sections when it is used for packaging jobs or
regular prepress jobs.
Related topics: • Imposition Mode Selector on page 303
Layout Editor The Layout Editor has two modes when working with wide-format jobs:
Modes  Sheet Layout mode: for uploading, placing and arranging products on sheets
 Print Layout mode: for organizing sheets on the print layout, i.e. the printer
bed or belt of wide-format printers
The products you want to print are first placed on one or more sheets in Sheet
Layout mode, and these sheets are placed on print layouts that you can see if you
switch to Print Layout mode. The print layout represents the printer bed (flat-
bed devices) or the printer belt (roll-fed devices), which can accommodate
multiple sheets and has the dimensions of the chosen device. A print layout is
created automatically for each sheet that you prepare in Sheet Layout mode,
with the sheet positioned by default in the printer’s home position. You only
need to switch to Print Layout mode if you want to inspect how the sheet is
arranged on the print layout, or if you need to combine multiple sheets on one
or more print layouts.
The workspace is similar in both modes, except for a few tools and inspectors
that are only relevant in the respective modes. To switch between Sheet Layout
mode and Print Layout mode, click the Sheets or Print Layouts tabs respectively
above the Products panel. You can also edit a placed sheet by double-clicking it
on the print layout.
NOTE: Print Layout mode is only available for jobs using wide-format printers,
i.e. wide format jobs.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 479
Open and Close the The Layout Editor is opened when you create or edit a wide-format job or a
packaging job. Alternatively, you can open the Layout Editor from the Jobs
Layout Editor window:
 Choose File > New Wide Format Job.
The Layout Editor opens and a new wide-format job is created using the
default template.
OR
 Drop an image or document on a supported output device, or context-click a

device and choose New Wide Format Job.
default template for the device.
OR
 Select a job in the Job List and click the Edit Job icon in the Jobs window
toolbar or choose Edit Job in the context menu.
default template.
To exit the Layout Editor, submit the job and choose Delete Job (new job), or
Discard (existing job). See “Applying Changes and Submitting a Job” on
Related topics: • Creating Templates for Wide Format Jobs on page 639
• Templates on page 633
• The Jobs Window on page 140.

480 OVERVIEW
Figure 9.31: Sheet Layout mode with different products placed on a sheet
1 Product panel
2 Mode buttons and Sheet tabs
3 Sheet panel
4 Inspectors
5 Edit in Job Editor, Submit and Apply Changes buttons

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 481
Figure 9.32: Print Layout mode with different sheets placed on a print layout
1 Sheet panel
2 Mode buttons and Layout tabs
3 Print Layout panel
4 Inspectors
5 Submit and Apply Changes buttons

482 PRODUCT PANEL
Product Panel
The Product panel displays thumbnails of the products that you upload and want
to place on the sheet for printing.
You can upload artwork files (images and documents) and CAD files to create
products.
NOTE: Many of the features in the Product panel only apply for the Sheet Layout
mode. Remember that you have a Sheet Panel that contains all your sheets when
working in Print Layout mode.
Adding Products Use the following methods to add products to the Product panel:
 Drag and drop one or more products onto the Product panel.
 Drag and drop one or more products onto a sheet.
 Drag and drop one or more products onto a printing device in the Jobs list.
 Click the + button in the top right corner of the Product panel and select one
or more files from the location of your choice.
 Choose File > Add Products and select one or more products from the
location of your choice.
If you add a product with the same file name, you are prompted to cancel,
update or just add the new product:
 Update: Adds the file as a revision of the previous one. This replaces all
placed products of the existing file with the new one.
 Just Add: Adds the file to the job as a new file with the same file name but
with a copy suffix.
 Cancel: Cancels the action.
Thumbnails of the uploaded products are displayed in the Product panel.
Product Processing Status

While an uploaded product is being processed, you will see a product icon with
a green background. When the processing is finished, you see a thumbnail with
the file name and physical dimensions of the product.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 483
Adding Products from Artwork

When choosing artwork files to add products to the Product panel, you can
change the default information and provide additional information.
NOTE: This needs to be selected in your Preferences. See “General” on page 90.
Organizing Click the cogwheel to display a menu for organizing and filtering the products
you see in this panel.
Products

484 PRODUCT PANEL
1
2
3
6
7
8
1 Cogwheel menu
2 Add products button
3 Number of products displayed according to the chosen filter
4 Product status icons
5 Instances of a product on all the sheets of a job
6 Product details: file name and physical dimensions
7 Product preview status
8 Errors and warnings
The following commands are available on the cogwheel menu:
 Show/hide:
 Show All: shows all the products you have uploaded to the Product panel
 Show Placed: shows the products you have placed on any of the layouts
 Show Placed on Current Print Layout: shows the products you have
placed on the selected layout
 Show Not Placed: shows the products you have not yet placed on any of
the layouts
 Sort:

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 485
 by File Name
 by Type
 Thumbnails:
 Small
 Large
 Fit to Largest: the widest thumbnail fits the width of the Product panel
and all the other thumbnails are scaled with the same scale factor
 Fit Each: all thumbnails are scaled so they fit the width of the Product
panel
 Product Details: show/hides the file name and dimension under the
thumbnails
Managing/Editing In the Product panel, context-click a product to display the following commands
for this product:
Products
 Get Info: displays the Info dialog box with information about the original
product file organized in the General, Dimensions and Resources tabs; the
Resources tab lists the fonts, products and spot colors used in the original
product
 Show Preflight Report: opens a PDF with a preflight report for the selected
product, if available
 Export Original File: exports the original file to a location of your choice
 Delete Product: deletes the selected products from the Product panel, not
from your disk
 Duplicate Product(s): see “Duplicating Products” on page 509
 Convert to single-sided product(s): creates 2 single-sided products from a

double-sided product (front/back) with the artwork assigned to the respec-
tive sides
 Convert to double-sided product(s): combines 2 products (or multiple pairs

of products selected in the Product panel) into double-sided products

486 PRODUCT PANEL
 Set back to be same as front: sets the artwork of the back of one or multiple
selected products to be the same as the front
 Set back to mirror front: sets the artwork of the back of one or multiple
selected products to be a mirrored image of the front
 Set back to blank: sets the back of one or multiple selected products to be
blank
 Turn over: turns over the product(s) contained in one or multiple frames
 Add artwork: opens the file explorer to select artwork to add to an empty
product
 Check Out and Edit Document: Opens images and documents in Acrobat
from where they can be checked in after editing.
 Edit with Preview: opens the product in Preview; this feature is useful for
soft-proofing images which are color managed; you can perform color adjust-
ments and contrast curve adjustment; see “Previewing Job Results” on
page 95 for more information on working with Preview.
 Open in Product Editor: opens the selected product in the Product Editor
 Collapse Tiles: see “Expand or collapse a tiled image” on page 606
 Expand Tiles: see “Fitting Options dialog box” on page 502.
 Fitting: Opens the Fitting Options dialog box where you can set the cropping;
see “Fitting Options dialog box” on page 502.
 Revert Product Size: Reverts the size of the original product back to the size
it initially had when you added it to the Product panel.
 Auto-Layout Product: Opens the Auto Layout dialog box; see “Placing
Products with Auto-Layout” on page 511.
 Locate Product on Sheet: Highlights all the instances of a product/sheet on

the current or first available sheet/print layout.
 Proof Product: opens the QuickProof dialog to proof the selected products:
see “QuickProof Products and Sheets” on page 551.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 487
Product Status Icons
A cut path is present in the image or a path has been assigned as cut path.
The image is being edited.
Indicates that full-gamut color management is applied.
Indicates a preflight report has been generated for the image.
Image preview has been generated (gray) or is being processed (green).
Color adjustments (saturation, contrast, curves) have been made in Preview.
Inspecting You can use the Product inspector to inspect one or more products in the Product
panel before placing them on a layout. See “Product Inspector” on page 531 for
Products more information.
You can also use some of the tools in the positioning toolbar for a product
selected in the Product panel: size, scale, mirror and rotate the product. See
“Positioning and resizing products with the positioning toolbar” on page 496.
Changes you make to the original in the Product panel do not affect products
that are already placed on the sheet and vice versa.
Product Previews When you upload products to the Product panel, Apogee does not process
product previews automatically by default.
NOTE: You can change the default behavior and let the system create previews
automatically when you add products to the Product panel. See “Preferences” on
page 90.
When products are added to the Product panel, the Create Previews button
appears in the bottom right corner of the Layout Editor. Click this button when
you are ready to create the previews.
Products with a preview are indicated in the Product panel with a magnifying
glass icon. This icon is grey if the preview has been generated and green while
the preview is being processed.

488 PRODUCT PANEL
 Create product previews

If automatic product previews is not selected in your Apogee client Preferences,
you can create previews as required as you work in the Layout Editor.
 Context-click one or more products in the Product panel and choose Edit with
Preview.
This creates a color-managed preview of the selected products and opens the
preview immediately in the Raster Preview module when the processing is
finished. The magnifier status icon in the Product panel changes from green
to gray to indicate the previews are ready.
OR
 Click the Create Previews button in the bottom right corner to create product
previews of all the products in the Product panel.
Previews of all the products in the Product panel are generated in the
background. The magnifier status icon is gray when the previews are ready.
The previews can be opened immediately in the Raster Preview module.
OR
 Double-click a product in the Product panel.
You can change the default behavior so the Raster Preview module is opened
and previews are created instead of opening the Product Editor. See “Prefer-
ences” on page 90.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 489
If you change settings that modify the preview (for example, choose a
different printer), the Create Preview button re-appears and you can choose
whether you want to update the previews or not. See also “Applying Changes
and Submitting a Job” on page 538.
 Previewing white and special colors

The Raster Preview module has special features for previewing white ink and
other special colors such as varnish and primer.
1 In the Raster Preview module, make sure the Inks palette is shown.
2 In the Ink table, ALT-click the eye icon next to the white ink.
The white ink is drawn in grayscale with 100% white drawn as 100% black.
The other inks are hidden.
3 ALT-click the eye icon again to show all the colors.
Alternatively, you can choose to show white in a different color, as a mask.
1 Click the color patch for the white ink and in the Viewing Options dialog box,
choose As Mask.
2 Choose a color and an opacity with the slider.
3 Click OK.
The white layer is drawn in the selected color and opacity on top of the other
layers.
Related topics: • Previewing Job Results on page 95
File Types The following file types can be processed:
 Image file types: TIFF, JPEG, PNG, BMP
 Adobe PhotoShop (PSD) and Illustrator (AI)
 PDF, PS, EPS
All file types are converted to an internal PDF file format in the background, but
they keep their original name and file extension.
NOTE: If you upload a PDF document that consists of several pages, each page is
displayed in the Product panel as an individual product. The page no. is suffixed
to the file name.

490 PRODUCT PANEL
 Placing and arranging products on a sheet
NOTE: Some of these shortcuts can also be used for placing sheets on printer
layouts.
To Drag the product and

Place one or more products at the cursor position without ganging Hold SHIFT and
them. release
Switch between snapping to margins (magenta snap guides) and snap- Press ALT
ping to edges (blue snap guides).
Restrain movement horizontally and vertically. Hold SHIFT
Cancel the product placement. Press ESC
Rotate one or more products 90° counterclockwise, while moving Press space bar once
them
Copy a selected product. Press CTRL + C
Paste a copied product. Press CTRL + V
Center a product on the current sheet or on a new sheet if the current Press C
one is not empty. Multiple selected products are centered on individual
sheets.
Center a product on the current sheet even if it is not empty. Multiple Press SHIFT + C
selected products are centered on individual sheets.
Duplicate one or more selected products according to the copy count Press N
and gang the products on the current and new sheets.
Duplicate one or more selected products according to the copy count Press SHIFT + N
and gang the products on the current and new sheets but starting at
the cursor position.
Duplicate one or more selected products according to the copy count Press N + C
and center the products on the current sheet if empty and on new
sheets.
Duplicate the selected product and fill the current sheet if empty. Fill Press F
one sheet for each product if multiple products are selected.
Duplicate a selected product and gang the products with existing prod- Press SHIFT + F
ucts on the current sheet to fill the sheet. Selecting multiple products
fills multiple sheets.
Duplicate the selected product and fill and center on the current sheet Press F + C
if empty. Fill one sheet for each product if multiple products are
selected.
Rotate the selected product or products clockwise. Press R
Rotate the selected product or products counterclockwise. Press SHIFT + R
Mirror the selected product or products clockwise. Press M
Mirror the selected product or products counterclockwise. Press SHIFT + M

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 491
Layout Panel
NOTE: Most of the features in the Layout Panel apply for both the Sheet Layout
mode as well as the Print Layout mode. Remember that you work with sheets on
a print layout when in Print Layout mode.
The sheet layout panel consists of one or more sheet tabs where products are
placed, positioning tools to position the products on the sheet, and palettes for
inspecting the sheet in more detail.
Figure 9.33: The layout panel (Sheet Layout mode)
1 Positioning toolbar
2 Sheet with placed products
3 View Options palette
4 Marks palette
5 Layout toolbar

492 LAYOUT PANEL
 Add a Sheet
 Click the + button next to the Sheet 1 tab.
OR
Drag a product onto the + button
OR
Choose Sheet > New Empty Sheet.
NOTE: If sheet media is used, layouts are added automatically to

accommodate products that you add to an existing layout that does not have
sufficient space for the product.
 Delete a Sheet
 Context-click the Sheet tab you want to delete and choose Delete Current
Sheet.
OR
Select the Sheet Layout and choose Sheet > Delete Current Sheet.
Default Product Products are placed on the sheet by dragging and dropping. They are arranged
automatically in a logical sequence. This initial placement of products is referred
Placement to as the default product placement or ganging.
 Select one or more products in the Product panel and drag them onto the
sheet.
The first product is placed against the sheet lay, which is an indication of the
leading edge of the printer. For Anapurna printing devices, this is the bottom
right corner of the sheet; for Jeti printing devices, this is the bottom left
corner of the sheet.
Subsequent products are ganged adjacent to the placed products, row by

row. When the sheet is filled, a new sheet is added automatically.
Products are placed on the sheet at their native size and they are enclosed in
a blue frame.
The resolution of a product is checked when you place it on a sheet. If the resolu-
tion is too low, a warning icon appears in the Product panel. Click this warning
icon to open the Snag List. See “Snag List” on page 518.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 493
If you want to print several instances of the same product and you have set the
copy count, you can fill the sheets while dragging the products onto the sheet.
 Select one or more products in the Product panel and press “n” or “N” while
dragging them onto the sheet to duplicate the products in accordance with
the copy count.
The sheet is filled with the products in accordance with the copy count.
Additional sheets are created if necessary to accommodate the copy count. If
multiple products were selected, the sheets are first filled with the first
product in the Product panel and then with the second product, and so on,
until the copy count for all the products is obtained.
NOTE: The default placement of sheets on the print layout can be specified in the
Media Layout tab. See “Media Layout” on page 524.
Placing Products The default product placement can be modified extensively.

Interactively
 Moving Products
 To move one or more products on the sheet, select them with the selection
tool and drag them randomly on the sheet.
You can also restrain the dragging to a horizontal and vertical movement by
pressing SHIFT as you drag. Snap guides can be activated to help you align
products or bounding boxes with each other and with the edge of the sheet. See
“Snapping to Margins or Edges” on page 494.

494 LAYOUT PANEL
Figure 9.34: Snap guides to align products on a sheet
 Centering Products
 Press “c” or “C” to move one or more selected products to the centre of the
sheet.
If you select multiple products, the group of products is centred. Selecting

multiple product consecutively will superimpose the products on top of each
other.
 Snapping to Margins or Edges
 Choose View > Guides > Snap to Margins or Snap to Edges to display
magenta or cyan snap guides as you move products on the layout.
With either of these options selected, you can switch between snapping to the
finishing margins of a product or snapping to its edges by holding down the ALT
key. See “Product Inspector” on page 531 for information on setting finishing
margins for products.
The following color codes are used for the snap guides:
Snapping snap guide color

Finishing margin of the product to the margin of another solid magenta
product or to the edge of the sheet
Finishing margin of the product to the margin of the sheet dashed magenta
Edge of the product to the edge of another product or to solid cyan
the edge of the sheet
Edge of the product to the margin of the sheet dashed cyan

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 495
Figure 9.35: Snapping to product finishing margins (magenta snap guides)
 Grouping products
 You can select multiple products using conventional Windows key combina-
tions. Multiple, selected products are enclosed in a blue bounding box. To
keep these products together, choose Arrange > Group.
The bounding box changes to black. The group of products can be moved on
the layout interactively by dragging or with the positioning tools.
 Rotating products
 While placing or moving one or more products on the sheet, press the SPACE
bar once to rotate the product 90° counterclockwise, twice for 180° counter-
clockwise, etc.
OR
Select a placed product and press the SPACE bar or use the rotation tool in
the positioning toolbar.
 Restoring the default placement
 After moving products interactively, you may want to restore the default
placement of one or more products. Select the product you want to reset and
choose Layout > Rearrange Frames.
The selected products are ganged according to the default placement.
 Copy products to another sheet

1 Select one or more products on the active sheet and press CTRL+C to copy
them
2 Go to another sheet and press CTRL+V to paste the copied products on this
sheet.

496 LAYOUT PANEL
 Removing Products
 To remove one or more products from the sheet, select them with the selec-
tion tool and press the Delete button, or press CTRL+X.
The product or products are removed from the active sheet.
Removed products are not deleted from the Product panel and can be placed
again on the same or a different sheet.
 Shortcuts for overriding the default product placement
 Use the following keyboard shortcuts to override the default placement of

the products when dragging them onto the sheet or moving them once they
are placed on the sheet:
layouts.
To Drag the product and

Place one or more products without ganging them Hold SHIFT and
release
ping to edges (blue snap guides)
Restrain movement horizontally and vertically Hold SHIFT
Cancel the product placement Press ESC
Rotate one or more products 90° counterclockwise, while moving Press space bar once
them
Copy a selected product. Press CTRL + C
Paste a copied product. Press CTRL + V
Move a selected product to the center of the sheet. Press C or c
Duplicate a selected product to accommodate the copy count. Press N or n
Rotate the selected product or products clockwise Press R
Rotate the selected product or products counterclockwise Press SHIFT + R
Mirror the selected product or products clockwise Press M
Mirror the selected product or products counterclockwise Press SHIFT + M
 Positioning and resizing products with the positioning toolbar

The positioning toolbar provides tools for arranging and resizing products on
the sheet interactively.
Select one or more products on the sheet to activate the tools.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 497
1 Horizontal and vertical coordinates relative to the chosen reference point

2 Set size with aspect ratio lock; set Auto-fit option
3 Rotate/mirror one or more products on the sheet
4 Align in sheet
5 Align multiple products with each other
6 Set the gaps horizontally or vertically
7 Group/ungroup multiple products
Depending on whether you have one or more products selected, the positioning
toolbar activates the relevant tools.
1 Select one product.
You can now either position the product by filling in a Horizontal and
Vertical position (1)or you can choose one of the Align in Sheet options (4)
to align along the top, left, right, bottom, center of the layout. If you select the
Align to margins check box, the reference edges are the layout margins as set
in the finishing inspector.
Select a rotation angle in the Rotation drop-down box (3) to rotate the
selected product, or click the horizontal or vertical Mirror buttons (3) to
mirror the product along its horizontal or vertical axis.
2 Select two or more products.
You can now Group the products (7) and align the group in the sheet (top,
left, right, bottom, center) (4), or align the selected products with each other
(5).
You can also use the Set Gaps tools (6) to distribute selected products verti-
cally, horizontally, or both, so that the gaps between the elements are the
same. If the gap size is not specified (Distribute), the outermost elements
keep their positions and the elements in between move; if a gap size is speci-
fied (fixed), the left most or bottommost elements remain in position and the
others move.
3 Select one or more products.
With the Size tool (2) you can set the size of the product frame. See
“Inspecting Frames” on page 500 to read how you can fill a resized frame
with the product. If you selected multiple products (i.e. product frames), all
the products in the bounding box are modified accordingly.

498 LAYOUT PANEL
Figure 9.36: A product which is copied, mirrored and snapped to product edges (cyan snap
guides)
 Using alignment pins

When placing sheets on a print layout, you can use alignment pins for certain
printing devices to ensure the sheet aligns with the media.
1 In Print Layout mode, go to the Media Layout inspector.
2 In the Horizontally drop-down list, select the Alignment Pin Set that you
want to use, at the bottom of the list.
3 In the second drop-down list, select the pin configuration you want to use.
See “Alignment Pin Sets” on page 872 for creating alignment pin sets.
The alignment pins are shown on the print layout and you can now position
your sheets against these pins with the snap feature.
Working with A product placed on a sheet is always enclosed in a frame and most actions you
perform in the Layout Editor actually affect the frame, not the product. For
Frames placed products, the Auto-fit check box is selected by default in the Positioning
toolbar to ensure that the product fits the frame. You can clear the Auto-fit check
box if you want to manipulate the frame independently from the product, for
example to crop the product disproportionately. The parts of the product that
are outside the frame are not printed, except for the bleed.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 499
Figure 9.37: A placed product with its frame highlighted for resizing
4
1 Product resize handle
2 Frame
3 Product icon
4 Product origin (indicates rotation/mirroring)
The frame and the product can be resized independently of each other, for
example to crop a product.
Figure 9.38: A placed product, selected and enlarged beyond its own frame
A product is selected within its frame by clicking the product icon. The cursor
state changes when you do this, as follows:
Product frame is selected.
Product is selected.

500 LAYOUT PANEL
NOTE: Context-clicking a product within a frame provides access to the product-

specific commands. See “Managing/Editing Products” on page 485.
Empty frames are frames without a product, which are the result of either
deleting the product from the frame of a placed product or drawing a new frame
on the sheet.
Figure 9.39: An empty frame
Empty frames can be arranged on a sheet interactively just like placed products,
using the Positioning toolbar and commands such as Step and Repeat, Dupli-
cate, etc., and snap guides for aligning. You can also set fitting options to control
how products must fit in empty frames. Frames also give you more flexibility
when creating sheet templates. There is no Auto-Layout feature for empty
frames.
NOTE: Empty frames are saved with a job but they are not processed as content
when you submit the job. So you will not see frame boxes, etc. in the output.
Related topics: • Sheet Layout Templates on page 540

• Fitting Options dialog box on page 502
 Inspecting Frames
The following commands can be performed by context-clicking a frame:
 Delete Frame: Removes the frame and its product from the sheet.
 Clear Frame: Deletes the product from the frame.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 501
 Duplicate Frame on Sheet: See “Duplicating Products” on page 509.
 Step and Repeat: See “Step & Repeat” on page 510.
 Group/Ungroup: Groups or ungroups the selected frames.
 Fitting: This sub-menu provides the following options:
 Fit Product in Frame Proportionally: Resizes the product proportionally

to fit within the frame.
 Fill Frame With Product Proportionally: Scales the product proportion-

ally to fill the entire frame.
 Fit Frame to Product: Resizes the frame to fit the product.
 Fill Frame With Product: Scales the product to fill the entire frame, but
not proportionally.
 Center Product: Centers the product, in its current size, in the frame.
 Reset Fitting: Sets the fitting options of the frame to those of the original
product in the Product panel.
 Fitting Options: see “Inspecting Frames” on page 500.
 Size Frame to Sheet: Fills the sheet with the product; this may change the
proportions.
 Revert Frame: Reverts the frame and product to the size of the original
product.
 Scale for Bleed: Extends the product beyond the frame to accommodate the
specified bleed.
 Rearrange Frame: Re-positions the frame to the default placement on the

sheet and applies modified inspector settings.
 Assign Content ID: Assigns a content ID to the selected frame or all frames if
none is selected. The frames must be filled.
 Clear Content ID: Clears the content IDs of the selected frames or all frames
if none are selected.

502 LAYOUT PANEL
Fitting Options dialog box

The Fitting Options dialog box gives you more detailed control for fitting a
product within the frame.
 With one or more product frames selected on the sheet, choose

Arrange > Fitting > Fitting Options to open the Fitting Options dialog box.
OR
 Right-click a frame and choose Fitting > Fitting Options.
OR
 Context-click a product in the Product panel and choose Fitting > Fitting
Options.
NOTE: You can only set the crop values for products in the Product panel.
Cropping
The values that you want to apply to products in the frame. If the product fits in
the frame exactly, the four values are zero, for example when you drag a product
onto a sheet. Positive values crop the product by shifting the product outside the
frame. Negative values create more space, a border, between the product and
the frame. Values in blue mean the Auto-fit settings have introduced extra
cropping.
Fitting
Here you specify the Auto-fit settings for fitting the product inside the frame.
Auto-fit Product to Frame Select this check box to choose a Scale and Orientation for fitting the product
automatically in the frame. The check box is selected by default for placed
products (i.e. products that you dragged on the sheet).
Scale The following options are available to scale the product when Auto-fit is
selected:
 Fit Product to Frame: scales the product so it fits completely in the frame
which is not necessarily filled.
 Fill Frame with Product: scales the product so it fills the frame and crops
the product if necessary.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 503
 Fill Product to Frame Width: scales the product so its width fits that of the
frame.
 Fill Product to Frame Height: scales the product so its height fits that of
the frame.
Maintain proportions Keeps the width and height scale factors the same when scaling.
Orientation/Rotate for Rotates the product to match the aspect ratio of the frame when Auto-fit is
better fit selected.
Align Sets the alignment of the product in the frame.
Reset Button Resets the product to fill the frame.
Related topics: • Sheet Layout Templates on page 540
 Adding frames to a Sheet

1 On the sheet where you want to draw a new frame, select the Frame tool on
the toolbar at the bottom of the Layout Editor.
2 On the sheet, click, drag and release the mouse to draw the frame.
A frame has an outline and two diagonals from corner to corner. The color
depends on your View Options settings.
3 With the Frame tool still selected, you can draw additional frames on the
sheet.

504 LAYOUT PANEL
Figure 9.40: Unnamed frames inside the product block, on a sheet
The product block expands accordingly as you add more frames.
4 To position your frames, click the Selection tool in the toolbar and now you
can select the frames.
The outline is thicker and has resizing handles.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 505
5 Use the Positioning toolbar to arrange the frames just like you would do with
products.
The same snap guides are available to help you align frames with edges and
margins.
Related topics: • Placing Products Interactively on page 493
 Rearrange frames
The Rearrange command reverts the placed products on a sheet to the default
placement. Depending on the printing device, the products are ganged from left
to right or right to left on the sheet. You cannot rearrange locked sheets.
1 Select the products or frames that you want to rearrange on the sheet.
2 Choose Layout > Rearrange Frames.

506 LAYOUT PANEL
The selected products or frames revert to the default placement. Some

products may be placed on a new sheet if the current sheet cannot accommo-
date the rearranged products.
If no products or frames are selected, then everything on the sheet is

rearranged.
Naming frames (content IDs)

Frames that you draw on a sheet are initially so-called unnamed frames. Frames
created by dragging products on the sheet are also unnamed. It is possible to
assign content IDs ([A[, [B], [C], etc.) to frames for automation purposes, and
these frames are called named frames.
Named frames allow you to use the same product in multiple frames by simply
dragging the product once onto the sheet. Each product is placed in the position
and with the size, frame rotation, and fitting options specified for the different
frames.
NOTE: Content IDs do not work across multiple sheets. For example, placing a
product in a frame with Content ID [A] on Sheet 1 does not fill frames with the
same ID on Sheet 2.
Named frames are extremely useful when creating sheet layout templates.
Related topics: • “Sheet Layout Templates” on page 540
 Naming empty frames (interactively)

Empty frames on a sheet can only be named manually because they have no
content.
1 Draw the frame on the sheet with the Frame tool.
2 Switch to the Selection tool and select one or more frames.
3 In the Product Inspector, enter an ID in the Content ID box.
4 Click outside the ID box, and the ID is displayed in the center of the frame.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 507
If you selected multiple frames, the same ID is assigned to each frame.
You can edit the content ID as long as no products are placed on the sheet.
 Naming filled frames

If a sheet contains at least one product, you cannot use the Product Inspector to
assign content IDs interactively. You would have to clear all the frames first.
However, there are two methods for naming filled frames automatically: by
saving the sheet layout as a template (see “Sheet Layout Templates” on
page 540), or by using the Assign Content IDs command. This command lets you
assign IDs to filled frames without clearing all the products from the sheet.
1 Select the products you want to name on the sheet.
2 Choose Layout > Assign Content IDs.
The selected products are assigned unique IDs and instances of the same
product have the same unique ID. If you didn’t select any products, then all
the frames with products on the sheet are assigned IDs, and empty frames are
not assigned IDs.

508 LAYOUT PANEL
The content ID is displayed under the product name if this is set to show in the
View Options.
The content IDs are also displayed under the thumbnail of the original
product in the Product panel.
In this example you can see that the product has been assigned to 4 frames
with content ID [A].
NOTE: The same product can also be assigned to frames with different IDs, for
example, [A,A,B,C,D,D].
3 You can repeat the Assign Content IDs command if you drag more products
on the sheet. New, unique IDs will be assigned and this is also the case if you
add the same original product.
4 You can clear the IDs of selected products or all the IDs by choosing
Layout > Clear Content IDs.
NOTE: If all of your frames have IDs, it’s not possible to re-assign IDs, for example
when you have deleted a product from the sheet.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 509
Copy Count, You can use the Product inspector to prepare products before placing them on
the sheet. See “Product Inspector” on page 531 for more information.
Cropping, Scaling
 With one or more products selected in the Product panel, select the Product
inspector and set the Copies, Size, Bleed and Finishing operations as desired.
Drag the products onto the sheet.
The selected products are placed on the sheet and modified accordingly.
Duplicating The Duplicate feature allows you to either create a copy of one or more products
that you select in the Product panel, or duplicate and/or fill a sheet with one or
Products more products that you have selected on the sheet.
 Select one product in the Product panel and choose Edit > Duplicate
Product.
OR
Context-click a product and choose Duplicate.
A copy of the selected product is added to the Product panel and the Copy
suffix is appended to the file name of the duplicated product.
 Select one or more products or empty frames that have been placed on a
sheet and choose Edit > Duplicate Frames on Sheet.
OR
Context-click a product and choose Duplicate Frames on Sheet.
You can enter the number of copies you want to make on the sheet, or let
Apogee fill the sheet.

510 LAYOUT PANEL
Step & Repeat Figure 9.41: A product which is stepped and repeated to fill the entire grid of a sheet
 Select a product which has been placed on the layout and choose Edit > Step
and Repeat to display the Step and Repeat dialog box.
OR
Context-click a placed product and choose Step & Repeat
Step and Repeat Dialog Box
Grid
The maximum number of horizontal rows and vertical columns for placing
copies are indicated in gray but you can also set the number of rows and
columns. A message is displayed if these maximum values are exceeded.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 511
Horizontal Enter the number of copies you want to repeat horizontally. Click the revert
button to reset the value to the maximum.
Vertical Enter the number of copies you want to repeat vertically. Click the revert button
to reset the value to the maximum.
Copies Enter the number of copies to fill the layout as required; the number of copies
should not exceed the number of horizontal rows multiplied by the number of
vertical columns; a message is displayed if you exceed this maximum.
Fill entire grid Choose this option to fill the grid you defined. The number of copies is entered
automatically (horizontal rows x vertical columns).
Fill Direction If you choose the option to enter the number of copies yourself, you can also
choose how the grid is filled: horizontal rows first or vertical columns first.
The total number of copies is indicated in gray in the bottom right corner of the
dialog box.
Gaps
Horizontal Enter a value for the horizontal gaps between repeated products.
Vertical Enter a value for the vertical gaps between repeated products.
Placing Products The Auto-Layout feature places and arranges all the selected products automat-
ically on the sheet according to the chosen layout strategy. The products are
with Auto-Layout placed on all the sheets of the job, including locked sheets.
CAUTION: Products already placed on sheets are cleared, even if the sheet is
locked.
Select one or more products in the Product panel and open the Auto-Layout
dialog box as follows:
 Choose Sheet > Auto-Layout Products
OR
Context-click the selected products and choose Sheet > Auto-Layout

Products.

512 LAYOUT PANEL
NOTE: If no products are selected, Apogee auto-layouts all the products in the
Product panel.
Auto-Layout Dialog Box
Size
Media size By default, the size of the media as defined in the job set-up. Choose a size from
the drop-down list or enter a custom size. You cannot change this if you have
already placed products on a sheet.
Images
Copy Count Here you can set the number of copies you want to print of each placed product.
Apogee calculates the number of sheets that need to be printed to obtain the
entered copy count. See “Sheet Inspector” on page 535.
Layout
Here you specify the layout strategy.
Type Selecting a layout type shows options which are specific to each type.
True-Shape Nesting: to nest products more intricately based on the cutting path
of each product.
Rectangular Nesting: to nest products in an intricate layout that may not be

suitable for guillotine cutting.
Guillotine Cuts: to nest products in a sheet that is suitable for guillotine cutting.
Rotation It’s possible that more products can be arranged on the sheet by allowing Apogee
to rotate them. Choose one of the following:
None: The orientation is left as shown in the Product panel.
Any angle: Products are rotated at any angle.
90 or 270 degrees: Changes the orientation of rotated products.
0 or 180 degrees: Keeps the orientation of the rotated products.
Optimize for Choose whether you want the fitting strategy to reduce waste or reduce the
number of sheets.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 513
Allow Overrun % Allows you to set a percentage for the number of extra copy counts to achieve the
chosen fitting strategy.
Auto-stop Apogee stops searching for the best arrangement once the specified waste level
is obtained (default is 50%).
Finishing Margins
In this panel you can change the default finishing margins, i.e. the spacing
between products and the edges of the sheet, as defined in the job set-up. See
“Finishing” on page 525.
Auto-Layout Progress
This dialog box is displayed when you click the Auto-Layout button and it shows
the progress of the auto-layout process. If the layout is complex and the system
requires a lot of time to arrange the products, you can click the Use button to
accept the Best solution so far. Otherwise, wait until the process is complete
and the Auto-Layout Progress dialog box closes. The longer you wait, the better
the proposed sheet.
Progress The diagram shows the total number of layouts found so far.
Best solution so far The proposed number of sheets and the total run length to accommodate the
fitting strategy and your copy count as best as possible.
Elapsed time The elapsed processing time to search for possible layouts.
View Options The View Options palette is used to show and hide the various components on
the layout. The list of available options you see in the palette depends on the
Palette layout mode you are working in – Sheet Layout or Print Layout.
NOTE: Hiding content or marks with the View Options palette does not mean
they will not be printed.
The following elements can be shown/hidden:
 Preview
 Images: the content of the products placed on the sheet
 Marks: the cutting marks selected for finishing, or other marks
 Sheets: the content of the sheets placed on the print layout

514 LAYOUT PANEL
 Sheet
 Lay: triangle icon indicating the lay of the sheet
 Image block: the bounding box enclosing all the products
 Margins: the margin around the sheet as set in the Finishing inspector
 Background: the area of the sheet where no products are placed
 Ink zone: the area on the print layout where printing will effectively occur
(similar to the product bleed zone)
 Image
 Name: the file name of the product
 Content ID: the frame ID
 Size: the product size
 Image scale: the scaling factor used on the original product to obtain the
product size
 Bleed zone

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 515
 Frame box: the bounding box around the individual product
 Origin: gray and white icon with letter F indicating the original orienta-
tion of the product
 Contours: path that sets the contours around a product, for example for
cutting
 Printer
 Lay: the lay of the print layout that indicates the leading edge of the layout
and the home position of the printer shuttle.
 Background: representation of the surface of the printer bed or belt and

more specifically the area where no printer sheets are placed
 Marks
 Marks: the bounding box of the marks
 Hidden Marks: marks that will not be printed due to conflicts; displayed
in a red, hatched box
In the View Options drop-down list you can select, create, rename or delete
preference sets for the View Options.
 To show/hide content, rule-ups and marks

1 Click the Show/hide View Options button in the toolbar or choose
Window > View Options to show the View Options palette.
2 Click the individual or group eye icons to show or hide the various rule-ups
and marks.
3 Click the colored boxes to open a color editor where you can change the color
of the rule-ups and measurements.
4 Click in the drop-down list at the bottom of the View Options palette to
choose, create, rename or delete preference sets for the View Options.
Marks Palette The Marks palette is used to place marks on a product or sheet interactively. In
other words, these marks do not depend on the conditions of a Mark Set and they
can be placed relative to any possible object on the product or sheet.
The palette contains the following marks categories:

516 LAYOUT PANEL
 Image: e.g. Text, Line, Grommet, Crop
 Sheet: e.g. Text, Line, File
The various mark types in these categories are managed in the Mark Engraver
Resource of the Impose Task Processor. Refer to “Mark Engraver” on page 961
and “Mark Types” on page 967 for more information about the different types of
marks and their settings.
CAUTION: Marks placed interactively may be positioned at unexpected locations

and on other sheets than the sheet you are working on.
 To place a mark interactively

1 Click the Marks button in the Toolbar or choose Window > Show Marks
Palette to show the Marks palette.
The Marks palette is displayed.
2 Hover over the icons to see what kind of marks are available.
3 Drag the required mark onto the Press Sheet and release the mouse button at
the location where you want to place the mark.
NOTE: It is not possible to move the mark once you have dragged it to a certain
position.
If you select the Mark Inspector, you can see the default settings for the
selected mark. See “Mark Inspector” on page 535.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 517
NOTE: Double-clicking a mark in the Marks palette also places the mark on
the Press Sheet.
Layout Toolbar Some of the tools described here may only be available in the Product Editor.
You can also use shortcuts to activate the tools and these shortcuts are case-
insensitive and some only require a single key. For example, type Z or z to
activate the Zoom tool and then type A or a to return to the Selection tool.
Shortcuts
Selection tool: To select a component or area and display its properties. This is A
the default tool.
Single Instance Selection tool: To select a single instance of marks which are D
placed at various locations, or part of a compound mark. In the Paths inspector:
selects a path and its anchor points.
Pan tool: To pan layouts in the Layout Editor. H
Zoom tool: To zoom into a specific area of a layout. Z
Frame tool: To draw empty frames on a sheet. F
CTRL
View Options palette button: Shows/hides the View Options palette.
SHIFT+E
CTRL+M
Marks palette button: Shows/hides the Marks palette.
CTRL
(Licensed feature) Presets: To open the Presets dialog box.
SHIFT+P
Crop image: Activates the crop mode to crop an image (Image inspector in the K
Product Editor).
Split tool: Activates the Split tool to split an image into tiles (Tiling inspector in K
the Product Editor).
Pen tool: Activates the Pen for drawing free-form paths on an image and add- P
ing/deleting points of existing paths (Paths inspector in the Product Editor).
Ellipse Path tool: Activates the Ellipse Path tool to draw ellipse and circle paths L
on an image (Paths inspector in the Product Editor).

518 LAYOUT PANEL
Rectangle Path tool: Activates the Rectangle Path tool to draw rectangle paths R
Zoom slider with Zoom to fit and Zoom to maximum buttons, and drop-down CTRL +/-
list with zoom presets
Snag List The Snag List shows conflicts (errors and warnings) relating to the products in
the Product panel or the placement of products on the sheet. These conflicts
should be checked before submitting a job.
 The Snag List is opened by clicking a yellow warning icon or a red error icon
The Snag List contains the following information:
 Left column - top pane: summary of all conflicts.
 Left column - bottom pane: conflict categories sorted by severity with

errors at the top and OK at the bottom.
 Right column: conflicts of the selected category; some conflicts can be

clicked to open a detailed report.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 519
Inspectors
NOTE: Some of the inspectors may not be visible with your license.
NOTE: Most of the inspectors are available for both the Sheet Layout mode as
well as the Print Layout mode, except where indicated otherwise.
The panel on the right of the Layout Editor consists of a number of tabs and sub-
tabs which are referred to as inspectors.
1 Job Set-Up Inspector

2 Product Inspector
3 Colors Inspector
4 Mark Sets Inspector (Sheet Layout mode only)
5 Sheet Inspector/Print Layout Inspector
Job Set-Up In the Job Set-Up tab, you define the job settings for all the sheets of a job.
Inspector  Click the open book icon to display the Job Set-Up.
This tab consists of the following inspector panels:
 Job Set-Up
 Media Layout
 Finishing
 Color Management

520 INSPECTORS
 Preflight
 Job Identification
1 Printing Set-Up
2 Media Layout
3 Finishing
4 Color Management
5 Preflight
6 Job Identification
Job Set-Up
In the Job Set-Up inspector, you choose the media, printing quality and printing
device for your job.
Printer
In this panel you select the printing device.
Device A list of the printing devices which are available in your printing environment.
The device you used for the last submitted job is displayed when you create a
new job.
Media
In the Media panel you choose the media you want to print the job on and set its
size.
Media This drop-down list displays all the available media, i.e. media for which
Calibrated Printing Modes exist. See “Media Hub” on page 1001. The media you
used for the last submitted job is displayed when you create a new job.
Roll Media Select this check box if you want to use roll media. This disables the Height
setting for the Size of the media as this is defined by the printing device, and
filters the sizes you see in the Size drop-down list. When you add products to a
layout, the height increases accordingly.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 521
Size A drop-down list with all available sheet sizes. The last item in the list, Manage
Sheet Sizes, is a shortcut to the Sheet Sizes resource. The width and height (W x
H) of the sheet are displayed under the drop-down list. You can also edit these
fields to create a custom sheet size and save this custom size by choosing Save As
in the drop-down list. When you change the size, the preview in the Layout
Editor zooms the new size to fit the available preview area. See “Sheet Sizes” on
page 641.
NOTE: Only one size can be set for the different sheets of a job.
NOTE: Choose a size which is smaller than the maximum size for the printing
device to combine multiple sheets on a single print layout.
Thickness The thickness of the media. The default unit is micron; context-click in the box
to change the unit: micron, mil, mm, inch.
Grain Choose No Grain, Short Grain or Long Grain.
Quality Select a quality level to suit the visual quality you expect from the printed result,
depending on the selected printer (e.g. Standard or High Quality). Quality levels
have corresponding Calibrated Printing Modes. See “Media Hub” on page 1001.
Workstyle Select a workstyle for the selected printer (e.g. Turn or Tumble).
Application
In the Application panel you choose how you want to handle printing with
special colors: white ink, varnish and primer. The data for printing the special
color can be generated by the printing device (on Printer) or by the system
(Apogee). If you let Apogee do this, you can also set the opacity or have the ink
choked or spread.
White Click the triangle to expand the panel. Select the check box if you are printing
with white and choose the method:
 Fill (on Printer): The printing device fills the area of the product block (with
bleed) with a solid layer of the special color.
 Mask (on Printer): The printing device prints dots under the color dots; non-
ink zones in the product receive no ink. The density of the ink depends on the
density of the color dots.
 Fill Entire Image (Apogee): Apogee fills the area of the product with the
special color at a constant opacity. You can select the opacity.

522 INSPECTORS
 Solid Pixel Mask (Apogee): Apogee prints with a constant opacity under the
dots inside the bleed path (or cut path/frame) of the product. Only areas with
data are printed.
 Solid Image Mask (Apogee): Apogee prints with a constant opacity under the
product which is defined by scanning for color dots at the edges of the bleed
path (or cut path/frame).
 Variable Pixel Mask (Apogee): Apogee prints within the bleed path (or cut
path/frame). The density of the mask depends on the lightness of the product
and the given opacity. This option disables the Choke/Spread and Opacity
options.
 From Image (Apogee): The content of the product (usually a spot color)
determines where to print and the density. The Opacity value scales the
opacity values in the content file.
Opacity The opacity of the special color. An opacity of 100% corresponds with the White
density set in the CPM.
Apply Choke/Spread Choke and spread are deactivated by default.
Choke/Spread/Amount To change the direction and amount of choke or spread.
If one of the white printing modes is selected, you can also set how the white ink
is applied:
 Pre-white: White is to be printed underneath the product. You first print

the white on the media, then the product on top of the white. The most
common application is to flood a non-white medium so the product can
be printed on a white background.
 Post-white: White is to be printed on top of the product. You first print the
product on the media, then print the white on top of the product. The
most common application is to print a product on clear (transparent)
material, where the white serves as the white background.
 Sandwich white: White is to be printed between a first and second print

of the same product.
Spot color names can be mapped to white ink in the Colors inspector. See
“Colors Inspector” on page 532.
Print primer Click the triangle to expand the panel. This panel is only visible if the printing
device has a primer ink in its inkset. The settings are similar to the settings for
white ink. Primer is printed before other layers.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 523
Print varnish Click the triangle to expand the panel. This panel is only visible if the printing
device has a varnish ink in its inkset. The settings are similar to the settings for
white ink. Varnish is printed after other layers.
Calibrated Printing Mode

A list of calibrated printing modes (CPM) filtered by printing device, so you only
see the modes which can be used with the specified device. Selecting a mode that
has a different quality setting than what you specified in the Quality list, changes
the Quality setting accordingly. See “Media Hub” on page 1001 for more infor-
mation about calibrated printing modes.
The following warnings in red are possible for this option:
 [Multiple]: multiple modes are suitable for the selected combination of

printing device and quality, and the most suitable modes are displayed at the
top of the list. Choose a mode.
 [No suitable CPMs]: no suitable modes exist for the selected combination of
printing device and quality. Choose a mode and the quality and media will
change accordingly.
Printer Parameters button This button is displayed when a printer and CPM are selected. Click the button
to open the Printer Parameters for the selected printer:
 Print Mode Parameters
 Media Parameters
You can set and change the parameters specifically for the current job.
The gray asterisk icon next to the button turns red if the printer operator
changed the printer settings on the machine. You can clear these changes made
by the operator by clicking Clear All On-Printer Changed Values.
NOTE: Only for printers that support Apogee printer parameters.
Media Deformation
Click the triangle to expand the panel. Select this check box to compensate for
the stretching or shrinking of the media during printing and finishing. You must
enter the percentage of stretching or shrinking and the system scales the product
to compensate.
X (Shuttle) Enter the percentage that the media stretches/shrinks in the shuttle direction.
Y (Feed) Enter the percentage that the media stretches/shrinks in the feed direction.

524 INSPECTORS
Media Layout
In this inspector you can modify the default placement of sheets (also referred to
as ganging) on the print layout.
Any changes you make in this inspector do not affect the arrangement of sheets
that are already ganged on the print layout. However, you can apply new
settings to placed sheets with the rearrange or remake commands.
It is possible to specify different setting while working on the same print layout,
and these new settings apply for subsequent sheets you place on the print layout.
The ganging behavior is the result of combining the following horizontal and
vertical settings:
Horizontally
Align to nearest stop You can specify a distance for horizontal stops starting from the print layout lay,
and a minimum width for the gap between sheets; the edge of the sheets are
placed at the nearest stop while respecting the minimum gap.
Fixed step distance You can specify a distance for horizontal steps starting from the print layout lay,
and place the edge of the sheets at a fixed distance from each other.
Gap between sheets Allows you to specify a gap between layout sheets that are ganged horizontally.
Single sheet per print Forces a new print layout to be created for each sheet you drag onto a print
layout layout. For example, if you drag 5 sheets onto a print layout, 5 new print layouts
are created for each individual sheet.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 525
Alignment Pin Sets At the bottom of this list, you will see the available alignment pin sets. Selecting
an alignment pin set will display a second drop-down list with the pin configura-
tions for the selected set. See “Alignment Pin Sets” on page 872.
Vertically
Align to nearest stop You can specify a distance for vertical stops starting from the print layout lay,
and a minimum width for the gap between sheets; the edge of the sheets are
placed at the nearest stop while respecting the minimum gap.
Fixed step distance You can specify a distance for vertical steps starting from the print layout lay,
and place the edge of the sheets at a fixed distance from each other.
Gap between sheets Allows you to specify a gap between layout sheets that are ganged vertically.
Single row Forces a new print layout to be created when the horizontal space is used.
 Rearrange and remake the print layout

The following commands are available on the cogwheel menu and Print Layout
file menu:
 Rearrange Sheets: Applies the current settings in the inspector to the

current layout.
 Rearrange All Sheets in Job: Applies the current settings in the inspector
to all layouts.
 Remake All Print Layouts: Deletes all layouts and remakes the layouts
according to the inspector settings.
Finishing
In this inspector you can choose your cutting device, set margins and generate a
cutting file for a digital cutting/routing device if required. See also “Finishing
Hub” on page 920 for more information about finishing.
Cutter
The drop-down list includes the cutting device brands (Fotoba, Zünd, etc.)
installed with your resources. Depending on the type of cutter, Apogee either
draws the necessary cutting marks on the sheet, creates a cutting file with the
cutting path, or both.

526 INSPECTORS
Finishing Margins
Margins are indicated with magenta snap guides when you drag a product next
to others products.
 Click the gray arrow button to open the Finishing Margins dialog box and set
a custom value for margins on all sides or selected sides of all the products,
or choose a preset from the drop-down list. The presets are created in the
Finishing Hub. See “Finishing Hub” on page 920 for more information.
NOTE: Changing the margins value does not reposition products already
placed on the sheet.
Cutting Files
Mirror cutting files Select to mirror the entire layout in the cutting file, for example if the media will
be cut on the back side of the sheet.
Generate Cutting File Click this button to generate a cutting file which is used to route certain cutting
(button) devices. A 1-page PDF document is created for each sheet and contains registra-
tion marks and cutting lines or a cutting path, but not the actual content.
The cutting files are saved immediately in the FinishingRoot folder in your
system directory – before you actually submit the job. When you submit the job,
you can choose to send the cutting file to the cutter.
Subsequent cutting files that you may create for a job are saved with an incre-
mental suffix.
NOTE: A cutting file is only generated for devices that require a separate file for
registration and routing. For example, the Fotoba cutting lines are printed on the
sheet so a cutting file with extra cutting marks is not necessary.
The buttons are disabled if no cutting device is selected.
Bleed/Mask
Amount The bleed, i.e. content that goes beyond the trim size, is the same for all products
as inherited from the job ticket. You can set a different bleed that you want to
render for the selected product here. Leave the link icon closed to set the same
bleed on all sides or open the link icon if you want to enter specific values for
Left, Right, Top or Bottom.
Content From the drop-list you can specify when bleed is created by the system or taken
from the bleed area available in the image file. These options are mainly relevant

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 527
for images which have a bleed area present in the image file. Only the first and
the last options are relevant if the image has no bleed area.
None: Sets the maximum bleed to 0 even if bleed is provided in the image file.
The bleed box coincides with the canvas extension box or the product size.
From image, fixed size: The system uses the bleed in the image file for the
maximum bleed you specified or only what is available if the bleed in the image
is less than the specified bleed.
From image, create if needed: The system uses the bleed in the image file if it is
equal or greater than the specified maximum bleed; if the image bleed is less
than the specified bleed, the system creates the bleed and does not use the image
bleed.
Always create bleed: The system creates the maximum bleed, effectively
replacing any bleed in the image file.
Default Bleed Overlap If products are placed too close to each other on the sheet, the available area for
Handling bleed is distributed (split) evenly between the products. This is the default
behavior with the Automatically split bleed overlaps check-box enabled.
NOTE: This default bleed overlap handling can be overridden whereby you
choose which product will have its bleed run over the other product. See “Fix
Bleed Overlaps” on page 549.
Color Management
Select one of the color management options to control how your products are
rendered. This option is especially important for controlling the output of
different kinds of products.
Full gamut Converts all input color values directly to the color space of the printing device,
skipping the output intent of the product.
Simulate Allows you to choose a standard output intent or use the output intent of the
product. The Simulation drop-down list displays the available output intents.
Decide per document This mode uses Full gamut when it’s safe to do so, and switches to Simulate when
it’s not safe.
No CMS No color management is applied.

528 INSPECTORS
 Click the pencil icon to open the Input Tagging dialog box and edit the action
list.
In this dialog box you can control how input color values are converted to
produce the actual output with the default action list. If you change any of the
settings, the action list is indicated with an asterisk in the inspector. Click the
Revert arrow icon if you want to restore the values to those of the action list.
Preflight
Check product resolution Select this check box to check the resolution of placed products, taking into
account the scaling and the expected quality. Warnings will be displayed when
necessary.
Preflight Choose a Preflight parameter set from the drop-down list to display Action lists
and select/clear the action check boxes as required. Type in the search box to
filter the Action List. Choose Manage Preflight Parameter Sets to edit or create
parameter sets. See “Apogee Preflight Action Lists” on page 873. Click the arrow
icon next to an action list to edit the action list for the current job. An asterisk
indicates that the action list has been modified.
Job Identification
Name The order name identifies your job in the Job List. If you do not enter a name
here, the job appears in the Job List as Untitled if no products have been
uploaded for the job, or the name of the first file in your products list is re-used
for the job name.
Order number An order number is optional but can be useful to group jobs that are assigned the
same number in the Job List.
Remarks Enter any special comments that apply to this job.
PrintSphere
Select the Allow uploading via PrintSphere check box to enable remote users to
upload files for a job via the PrintSphere service. If you choose a known company
in the Customer panel, the Assign button is enabled so you can designate collab-
orators. Alternatively, you can specify occasional guest users in the Job List by
context-clicking a job and choosing Invite PrintSphere Uploader.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 529
Print Center
This option is only visible if you have the relevant license to work with multiple
Print Centers. These are printing companies or other service providers belonging
to the same organization and that can use Apogee independently from each
other. Choose a Print Center from the drop-down list to manage the Customers,
Customer’s staff and Printer’s staff for that particular Print Center.
Customer
In this panel you can provide information about the customer and the collabora-
tors who will work on the job at hand (optional). You can select a known
company from the Company drop-down list. A known company is a customer
which has been defined with all its users and their contact details in the WebAp-
proval (ProductionCenter) or PrintSphere applications. Your own company and
staff are also set up in these applications. See the online help of these applica-
tions for more information. If you do not select a known company and the
Company field is blank, you can fill in the contact details (name, email and
phone no.) of the customer for this job.
Printer’s Staff and Customer’s Staff

After selecting a known company, you are presented a list of Customer’s Staff
and Printer’s Staff that you can designate to collaborate on this job. If you did not
select a company, you only see your own staff. Each collaborator in the
Customer’s Staff and Printer’s Staff lists can have one or two roles which are
activated by clicking the two icons in the Roles column. The two roles are
Approver and Uploader. Select the Uploader can place files check box if you
want to allow Uploaders to place files in the run list of a WebApproval job. You
can change the role of the default collaborators by clicking these icons.
In addition, collaborators in the Printer’s Staff list can be a candidate Customer

Service Representative (CSR) or a preferred CSR. Clicking the candidate CSR icon
changes the role of the collaborator to preferred CSR and vice versa. More than
one preferred CSR can be assigned to a job.
Add Guest
Use this button to add guests to collaborate on this job. Enter the person’s e-mail
and select the User Roles: Uploader check-box if you want this person to upload
files for the job. Click the Add Guest button to create the guest who is subse-
quently added to the list of Customer’s Staff.
NOTE: Once the job is submitted you can no longer edit the Customer’s Staff and
Printer’s Staff lists.

530 INSPECTORS
When you select a company from the Company drop-down list, Apogee looks up
the name in the Accounts resource and the PrintSphere application to see if the
account is active or inactive. This status is indicated at the bottom of the
Customer Contact dialog box.
Approver: This user can approve jobs in the WebApproval application.
Uploader: This user can upload files for this job in the WebApproval application.
Milestone
This optional information can help you keep track of jobs. Selecting the check
box activates the Due Date drop-down list with the following options:
 Today
 Tomorrow
 End of week
 Beginning of next week
You can fine-tune the date by clicking the calendar icon, and also change the
default time.
NOTE: Setting a due date does not affect the actual processing of a job by the
Apogee system.
When Job Finishes

Archive Select this check box to automatically archive this job when it has been success-
fully completed. The archive location is set during installation.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 531
Delete Select this check box to automatically delete this job when it has been success-
fully completed. You have the following options:
 After 1 day (default value)
 Immediately
 Save, Save As and Delete Job Set-Up
 Click the black triangle to open a menu where you can save and delete a job
set-up.
Job set-ups that you already saved appear at the top of the menu and can be
applied to the current job.
Product Inspector The Product inspector displays the specifications of products selected in the
Product panel or on a layout, and allows you to modify them.
 Click the product icon to display the product inspector.
NOTE: Modifications made in the inspector do not affect products already

placed on a layout.
Content ID The frame content ID which is only active when a product or frame is selected on
a sheet. If the frame contains a product, you cannot edit this box because the
sheet is locked. In this case you will see the locked frame icon next to the box.
Copies Enter the total number of copies of the selected product that you want to print,
i.e. the number of copies on all the layouts multiplied by the run length.
NOTE: This is not the number of products on the current sheet.
Size The dimensions of the original product. If the product has been edited in the
Product Editor, the most recent product size (with crop and scale) is specified
instead of the original product size.
Output resolution The output resolution and scale factor are visible if the product has been placed
on a sheet.

532 INSPECTORS
Edit product button Opens a product selected in the list of products in the Product Editor.
Fitting options Click the gray arrow next to the file name to open the Fitting Options where you
can modify the cropping and fitting settings for a product selected on the sheet.
Bleed The amount of bleed around the trim/cut path. Enter one value for all sides or
click the link icon to enter values for bleed along the four sides as desired.
Finishing A list of finishing operations that apply for the product. The table shows how
Content Elements of the product (spot colors) are mapped to operations. Click
the Add button to add operations, or click the cogwheel to open a menu where
you can add, edit, delete, reapply finishing operations and open the Finishing
Hub. See “Finishing Hub” on page 920 for more information.
Clip to contour Select this check box in the Finishing panel to crop and clip the product to the
contour instead of to the frame. Leave unchecked if you do not want to clip to
contours. The default behavior can be changed in the Contour Preferences in the
cogwheel menu (Set ‘Clip to Contour’ on new products). If the product has a
finishing operation path and this option is selected, the cut path icon is displayed
next to the product in the Product panel.
Frame size The dimensions of the frame, product and canvas extensions as specified in the
Product Editor.
Product operations A summary of the product edits made in the Product Editor: canvas extensions,
grommets and tiling.
Colors Inspector The Colors inspector displays the color settings for all the colors used in the job.
 Click the color book icon to display the colors inspector.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 533
Colors
The colors in the Colors list are initially, i.e. before products are uploaded, the
colors defined for the printing device – generally CMYK and White, Primer and
Varnish for certain devices. Additional colors (e.g. spot colors) appear in the list
as you upload products.
Additional colors can be mapped to output colors by choosing the color in the
list, clicking the Print as check box and choosing a color from the drop-down list,
or a new Color from Color Books.
The list may also contain one or more finishing colors which means that a spot
color in the product has been identified for use as a finishing operation. See
“Finishing Hub” on page 920 for more information about finishing operations,
and the “Product Inspector” on page 531 to see how spot colors are mapped to
finishing operations.
Colors inspector icons
The color will be printed/output (‘Print as’ check box selected).
The color will not be printed/output (‘Print as’ check box not selected).
The color is a process color or will be printed as a process color.
The color is a spot color, varnish or white.
The color is mapped to a color from a color book.
The color is taken from the application.
The color is mapped to a finishing operation.
The color is mapped to a custom color.
The color is mapped automatically as defined for the colors of the device.
The color is mapped to and depends on another color in the list.
Emulate Overprint
Specifies whether converted colors will emulate overprint or not. Always on.
Always off. Automatic. Emulate Overprint emulates the overprint behavior of

534 INSPECTORS
colors whose color policy has been changed, for example when spot colors are
printed with process colors. Changing the policy may require reprocessing.
Color Definitions
This section specifies how and from where Apogee will retrieve its color defini-
tions. You have three search options:
Search books only Apogee searches the specified books. The job will fail if the color is not found in
the any of the selected books.
Search books first, use Same as above, but now Apogee will also use the application values if the color
application values if not is not found in the books.
found
Use application values Apogee uses the application values, unless the application does not supply the
when supplied, else search values. Apogee will then search the books.
books
NOTE: When this option is selected, the application might find a color in a
different color space. In this case, there is a color space conflict.
Books Clicking the Books button displays the book selection window. The table shows
all the available books that can be searched.
You can select or clear the check box next to the book’s name to either include
the book in or exclude it from the search. You can also change the search order
by using the up and down arrows or by dragging and dropping.
Trapping
Choose a trapping parameter set from the drop-down list or click the arrow to
specify custom settings. See “PDF Render - Trap Settings” on page 721.
Mark Sets NOTE: The Mark Sets tab controls marks for the selected sheet and/or selected
products, not for the entire job.
Inspector (Sheet
Layout mode only)
 Click the marks icon to display the marks sets inspector.
This tab consists of the following inspector panels:
 Mark Sets
 Mark Inspector

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 535
Mark Sets
In the Mark Sets tab you can choose to place Image marks or Sheet marks on the
selected products or current sheet.
Image Marks for selected products

Select the check boxes to place sets of marks on the selected product.
 for example, apply grommet marks along the sides of all the products on a
sheet
 for example, place text marks on all the products on a sheet
Sheet marks for all layouts in job

Select the check boxes to place sets of marks on the selected sheet.
 for example, apply grommet marks along the sides of a sheet
 for example, apply cutting marks for different cutting devices and override
the Finishing inspector
Select the Apply changes to all products/layouts in job if you want the
selected marks to appear throughout the job.
Mark Inspector
This tab shows the details of the selected mark. You can edit the settings for the
selected mark. See “Mark Engraver” on page 961 for more information about the
different types of marks and their settings.
Click the cogwheel and select Manage Mark Sets to open the Mark Engraver. See
“Mark Engraver” on page 961 for more information. The cogwheel also has a
command to switch off all the mark sets.
Sheet Inspector  Click the layout icon to display the layout inspector.
Sheet
Sheet number and lock A sheet can be locked or unlocked as indicated by the black lock icon. Click the
status lock to change its status.

536 INSPECTORS
Copy Count The total number of sheets to be printed to accommodate the requested copy
count of products.
Media, Thickness, Size As chosen in the job set-up. The height is not shown for roll media.
Image Area The width and height of the product box, i.e. the area to effectively be printed.
This area on the sheet is shown in a small diagram with the distance to the edges
of the sheet. This is meant to give you an idea of the position of the print area on
the sheet:
 positive distance: the print area is inside the sheet
 0: the area is exactly on the edge of the sheet
 negative distance: the area is outside the sheet
If all the values are positive, the print area is yellow; if one of the values is
negative, the area is magenta.
Finishing Operations
Operation The operations selected for the job, e.g. Crease, Through Cut.
Print Layout
Inspector
Print Layout
Run Length The number of times the print layout needs to be printed to obtain the copy
count of products:
 By default: equal to the sheet copy count because a single print layout is
initially created for every sheet
 multiple identical sheets on a print layout: the copy count divided by the
number of sheets on the print layout

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 537
 different sheets on a print layout: the sum of the run length for each
individual sheet
Media, Thickness, Size As chosen in the job set-up. The height is not shown for roll media.
Print Area The area to effectively be printed. This area is shown in a small diagram with the
distance to the edges of the print layout. This is meant to give you an idea of the
position of the print area on the printer bed:
 yellow: the print area is inside the printer bed
 magenta: the print area is on the edge or outside the printer bed and at
least one sheet will be printer borderless
Start Printing The coordinates of the corner of the printing area that is closest to the home
position.
End Printing The coordinates of the corner containing the last pixel to be printed diagonally
opposite to the starting point
Media
Sheet list A table which lists all the sheets on the print layout, with their position along the
horizontal and vertical axes of the print layout (relative to the printer, and their
size. The same color code is used for the position. The green border indicates the
lay.

538 APPLYING CHANGES AND SUBMITTING A JOB
Applying Changes and Submitting a Job
Applying Changes If you change settings that modify the color rendering of the products (e.g.
preflight, calibrated printing mode), the Apply Changes button appears in the
amber status box in the bottom right corner. You can choose whether you want
to apply your changes or not because this may take considerable time and inter-
fere with your work.
NOTE: Applying changes does not create new previews of products already
added. See “Product Previews” on page 487.
Submitting a Job After placing your products on the sheet, reviewing the print layout, and
completing the job set-up, you can submit the job by clicking the Submit Job
button in the bottom right corner. Submitting a job also creates previews if you
chose not to generate previews while preparing the job.
The Submit Job dialog box is displayed where you can choose the following
options:
Print Files
Hold The job appears in the Jobs list but no files are processed.
Make and Hold The files for the printing device are processed but not sent to the printing device.
Make and Send to the The files for the printing device are processed and sent to the printing device.
Printer
Cutter Files
Hold The cutting files are not sent to the cutting device.
Make and Send to the The cutting files are processed and sent to the cutting device.
Printer
Submit button
Click the Submit button to confirm your changes to the job. The Layout Editor
closes and the actions you selected for the print files and cutter files are
executed. The job is updated in the Jobs list.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 539
Discard/Delete Job button

If the job has not yet been submitted you will see the Delete Job button. Clicking
this button will delete the job. If the job has already been submitted and you
were making additional changes to the job, you will see the Discard button.
Clicking this button closes the Layout Editor without saving your changes to the
job.
Cancel button
Click the Cancel button to return to the Layout Editor without confirming your
changes.
DQS Indicator The DQS indicator is visible in the bottom right corner if DQS, or Digital Quick
Strip, is enabled. The indicator informs whether DQS is active and at what level
(product or sheet). Hover over the indicator to see the status tooltip.
The DQS feature is enabled automatically if duplicate content is found in the job.
If the same product is placed multiple times, it is quicker to render it once and
then compose the raster data.
 Click the DQS indicator to open the DQS menu and select a level to override
the automatic application of DQS:
Image DQS (green) This level of DQS renders the product once.
Sheet DQS (yellow) This level creates and renders a Print Layout as a collection of Sheet Layouts.
DQS not possible (white) DQS is enabled but not beneficial.
No DQS (red bar) DQS is switched off although it is available.
Automatic The system has determined that DQS should be enabled.
NOTE: The printer may also have a DQS option.

540 SHEET LAYOUT TEMPLATES
Sheet Layout Templates

Sheet layout templates help you apply a standard sheet layout to several sheets
in the same job or to the sheets of different jobs. A template consists of empty
frames that are used as placeholders for arranging products on the sheet.
A template applies the following settings to the current sheet:
 Sheet size (media size)
 All the settings of the individual frames, such as positioning, rotation, fitting
options
 Image marks applied manually
 The frame content ID: Templates with named frames, i.e. frames with
content IDs, can further automate product placement. For example, the same
product can be assigned to multiple frames with the same content IDs.
Related topics: • Working with Frames on page 498

• Naming frames (content IDs) on page 506
• Layout Panel on page 491
• Placing Products Interactively on page 493
 Create a template from an existing sheet with placed products

You can create a sheet layout template by saving a sheet that you prepared for a
particular job. This will probably be a layout with placed products. Saving as a
template removes the products and creates a layout with just the frames.
1 Go to the sheet that you want to save as a template and select the Sheet Size.
Make sure all the settings for the individual frames are fine-tuned.
2 Choose Sheet > Save Sheet Layout Template.
3 In the dialog box, enter the following information:
 Save as: type a descriptive name for the template
 Assign Content IDs: Select this check box to name the frames on your
template. If the frames of your layout contain products, each frame is
assigned a unique content ID but frames that contain the same product
are assigned the same ID.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 541
NOTE: If the layout contains a combination of named and unnamed

frames, the IDs of the named frames are used for the named frames and
the unnamed frames are not assigned an ID.
4 Click Save.
The dialog box closes and you can continue working in the Layout Editor. If
you want to check that your template has been saved, follow the procedure
to apply a template and you will see your new template in the list of
templates. If you want to check that your template has the desired frames and
content IDs, apply the template to a new layout sheet.
NOTE: Your sheet must have at least one product or frame, otherwise the
template is not saved and will not appear in the list of templates.
Figure 9.42: A sheet with placed products saved as a template with content IDs
 Apply a Sheet Layout Template
CAUTION: Applying a sheet layout template erases all the placed products and
frames from the current sheet. In other words, the template is applied to the
sheet, not to its content.
1 On the current sheet or a new sheet, choose Sheet > Apply Sheet Layout
Template.

The left panel of the dialog box lists all the available templates, so it may be
empty if you’re just starting. The size of the sheet and the number of frames
on the sheet is specified for each template.
The right panel shows further details about the frames on the selected
template:
 Content ID: only specified for the named frames; here you can see the
effect of saving a template with the Assign Content IDs option selected.
Some frames may have the same ID which means that a product placed on
one of these frames will be repeated in all the frames with the same ID.
 Size: size of each frame; frames with the same ID can have different sizes.
 Count
2 Select the template you want to use and click Apply or double-click it.
3 The sheet now has the size as specified in the template and all the frames are
empty, except for product marks that you may have added.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 543
1 Empty frames with Content IDs

2 Lock icon in sheet tab
3 Button to unlock/lock a sheet in the Product Inspector
4 Image marks
4 The lock icon next to the Sheet tab label indicates that the sheet is locked
which means that you cannot change the layout without unlocking it.
5 Now you can start placing products on the layout and submit your job.

6 If you want the same layout for another sheet in the same job or another job,
you can apply the template again.
 Create a sheet layout template from scratch

You can create a sheet layout template from a sheet with empty frames. This
involves drawing and naming frames, and setting their Fitting Options.
1 Go the sheet that you want to save or add a new sheet and select the Sheet
Size.
2 Draw your frames on the sheet with the Frame tool.
3 Depending on the automation effects that you want to achieve with the
template, you can fine-tune the individual frames on the layout, for example:
 Name the frames, assign the content IDs of your choice to the frames. You
do this interactively by entering IDs for each frame in the Product
Inspector. If you want the same product to be used in different frames,
enter the same ID for these frames.
 Fitting options: Activate the Auto-fit option and set the fitting settings to
control how products will fit in the frame. For example, if you want to
place a single product in frames with different sizes and orientation,
choose the settings to fit the product in the frames.
4 When you have finished your layout, choose Sheet > Save Sheet Layout
Template.
5 In the dialog box, enter the following information:
 Save as: type a descriptive name for the template
 Assign Content IDs: This option is grayed out because there are no filled
frames on the sheet.
6 Click Save.
The dialog box closes and you can continue working in the Layout Editor. If
you want to check that your template has been saved, follow the procedure
to apply a template and you will see your new template in the list of
templates. If you want to check that your template has the desired frames and
content IDs, apply the template to a new layout sheet.
NOTE: If the layout contains a combination of named and unnamed frames,

the IDs of the named frames are used for the named frames and the unnamed
frames are not assigned an ID.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 545
 Edit/Rename a sheet layout template

1 Apply the template to a sheet.
2 Edit the sheet and save it with a different name or the same name.
Saving with the same name overwrites the existing template.
 Delete a sheet layout template

1 In the Layout Editor, choose Sheet > Apply Sheet Layout Template.
2 Select the template you want to delete in the list of templates, and press the
Delete key.
 Locking/Unlocking a Sheet
When a sheet is locked, you cannot modify the number of frames on the sheet,
the position of frames, or the size of the frames. It is possible to change the
Fitting Options and the Content IDs.
Sheets created from a template are locked by default as indicated by the lock
icon in the Sheet tab label.
1 On the sheet that you want to lock/unlock, go to the Sheet Inspector.
2 Click the lock icon the lock/unlock the sheet.

 Importing/exporting templates
Templates can be imported and exported through the resources in the System
Overview.
Related topics: • Resources on page 553

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 547
Working with CAD Layouts
Import CAD Files  The Import CAD dialog is opened when you choose File > Place CAD Layout
in the Layout Editor.
Wizard
This dialog consists of 3 panels:
Preview Panel
The Preview panel on the left shows a preview of how the Layout Editor inter-
prets the CAD file, with the lines and empty products shown or hidden as
specified in the controls on the right.
Lines and Elements Controls

Flip CAD Layout Select to mirror the layout horizontally (left/right).
CAD Units Shows the measurement units as defined in the CAD file: drop-down list is
disabled; if the file does not specify units, the list is enabled and you can choose
a different unit than the default defined in the Apogee Preferences.
Line Mapping A drop-down list with the CAD Line Input Maps resources available for the type
of CAD file and appearing in the order as they are listed in this resource. Click the
pencil icon if you want to open this resource. See “CAD Line Input Maps” on
Line Mapping Table The table lists the line types which were detected in the CAD file. They are
mapped to operations according to the selected Line Input Maps resource and

548 WORKING WITH CAD LAYOUTS
numbered according to their order in the resource. If a line cannot be mapped it

is grayed out. All mapped lines are imported by default. Select/deselect a line in
the Type column if you want it to include or exclude it. In the Operation column
you can change the operation specified by the resource to any of the operations
in the drop-down list. Remapping the operation sets the Line Mapping drop-
down list to <Custom>. Lines that were not mapped automatically by the
resource are set to <Unknown>.
Elements Tables This table lists all the elements found in the CAD file, typically one or more
products which are repeated in the layout and other non-repeating elements.
The CAD file is analyzed during the import to recognize contour-defining lines
that are mapped to stations, i.e. placeholder instances of one or more products,
or background lines that may be needed for the proofing layer (indicated as
*MAIN*). In the Elements column you can choose to show/hide a product or
other element. The number of instances of the product or element on the sheet
is also indicated. The Targets column specifies how the elements will be
imported:
 station: placeholders for empty products to which artwork can be added

later; see “Mark Engraver” on page 961 and “Place Station Numbers” on
page 550 for information on station marks.
 proofing only: elements useful for proofing the sheet that do not repre-
sent empty products
You can change the Target by selecting a different target in the drop-down list.
Fix Select one of the options in the list and the CAD file will be analyzed to solve
common issues in designs:
 Combined designs
 Nested cut lines
 Common knife lines
For the first two options you can override the default maximum distance
for recognizing nearby endpoints by selecting the Connect nearby
endpoints check box and entering a value higher than the default 0.8
Points.
Action and Products

Create sheet from CAD A new sheet will be created with the sheet dimensions and arrangement of
elements as specified in the CAD file.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 549
Place Product Block on Select this option to choose your own sheet size and change the element
sheet positions. A new sheet is created. Select the sheet size from the drop-down list:
current sheet size or a standard size in the list; here you can also select the size
defined in the CAD file. If you want the CAD to be added to the current sheet,
deselect the New Sheet check-box.
Create empty products Select this option to create an empty product for every element that is imported
as a station and to link those products to the station on the sheet.
Place Layout Button

Clicking this button will import the CAD file and place the layout on the current
sheet or create a new sheet with the placed layout.
Fix Bleed Overlaps The Layout Editor by default splits the bleed area between products in the
middle if the products are located too close to each other. In some cases you may
want to override this behavior, e.g. the bleed of product A needs to be printed
inside the flap of product B. This is done with the Fix Overlaps feature.
 Choose Sheet > Fix Bleed Overlaps to open the Fix Overlaps dialog.
The dialog shows the total number of times products overlap and the number of
occurrences for each product overlap. You can cycle through the overlaps and
choose whether A must overlap B, split A and B (no overlap), or B overlaps A.
Choosing one of these options will fix all the occurrences of the overlap, and the
wizard takes you to the next overlap. Click the Split Unhandled button if you
want to apply the second option (no overlap) to all the overlaps. Click the Reset

550 WORKING WITH CAD LAYOUTS
button to start all over again. Open the cogwheel menu to continue fixing
overlaps on other sheets (other side, next sheet, previous sheet).
Place Station Station numbers are sequence numbers that identify the stations (frames) on a
sheet. They can be used to identify, after cutting, where a product was originally
Numbers positioned on a sheet. The numbers appear in station number marks on the
content (see “Station Number Mark Details” on page 987). Station numbers can
be imported with a CAD file, defined in a template or set manually in the Product
Editor (see “Mark Sets Inspector and Mark Inspector” on page 586).
Station Numbers Dialog

This dialog allows you to specify a sequence for numbering stations and what the
number consists of.
 Go to the sheet you want to number and choose Sheet > Station Numbers to
open the Station Numbers dialog.
Sequence Click in the first icon to specify in which corner of the sheet the sequence will
start. The other four icons will change accordingly. Click one of these four icons
to specify the sequence horizontally and vertically and whether the numbering
starts at the beginning of a row or column.
Start at Enter the number of the first station if you want it to be higher than 1.
Text You can choose from several variables to generate the station numbers. You can
combine the sequence number with the row and/or column number.
Apply to all sheets Renumbers all sheets in the job.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 551
QuickProof Products and Sheets
With the QuickProof feature you can send a product or a sheet immediately to a
proofer from within the Layout Editor. The system creates a job in the
background to print to the proofer and this job is deleted automatically after the
job has been printed successfully.
A product proof includes all the product settings as set in the Layout Editor and
Product Editor: bleed, scaling, mirroring, canvas extensions, etc. However, if a
product has been tiled, you can only proof the master product, not the individual
tiles.If you want to proof tiles, place them on a layout sheet first.
A layout sheet proof takes into account how the product is placed on the sheet
and as such, the proof of a placed product can be different than the proof of the
original product as a result of fitting and resizing for example.
 Proof a product
 In the Product panel (list of products) of the Layout Editor, context-click the
product you want to proof, and choose Proof Product.
OR
Choose File > Proof Product.
The QuickProof dialog box is displayed.
 Proof a layout sheet
 In the Sheets panel (list of layout sheets) of the Layout Editor, context-click
the sheet you want to proof, and choose Proof Sheet.
OR
Choose File > Proof Sheet.
The QuickProof dialog box is displayed.
QuickProof Dialog Box

These setting are remembered for the job.
Finishing Operations Select the check box to print each finishing operation with a 1-point solid line in
the color that is associated with the color of the finishing operation in the

552 QUICKPROOF PRODUCTS AND SHEETS
selected cutter. When no cutter is selected, or when the finishing operation is not
available in that cutter, the finishing operation is not printed. The finishing
operations are printed on top of everything else, in the order as defined by the
finishing operations.
White/Varnish Select the check box to print these special inks using the specified color and
opacity. These special colors are always printed on top of the other content.
Proofer Choose a proofer from the drop-down list. You can only print the proof on a
proofer.
Image Select the parameter set to be used. Use a line appearance set to output the CAD
operations.
Output Select the parameter set to be used.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 553
Resources
Resources are the settings used in the background to process jobs.
In the Layout Editor, you can open some of the Apogee resources by choosing
Window > Resources and selecting a resource, or via the inspectors.
See the following sections:
 for task processor resources:
 “Media Hub” on page 1001
 “Finishing Hub” on page 920
 “Mark Engraver” on page 961
 “Color Books” on page 904
 “Alignment Pin Sets” on page 872
 for system resources:
 “Sheet Sizes” on page 641
 “Sheet Layout Templates” on page 540
Administrator access level only!All Apogee resources can be opened in System

Overview, either as system resources or task processor resources.

554 LAYOUT EDITOR MENUS
Layout Editor Menus
Main Menus The following menus are available on the top menu bar in the Layout Editor
window.
File Menu
Menu Item Description
Add Products Opens a file browser to select and upload content files.
Add Products from CAD Opens a file browser to select a CAD file; the products in the CAD
file are added to the Products list.
Add Products from When one or more frames are selected on the sheet, creates prod-
Frames ucts with the dimensions of the selected frames and adds them to
the Products list.
Place CAD Layout Opens a file browser to select a CAD file that you can place with its
empty products on the sheet.
Get Info Displays the Info dialog box with information about the original
product file organized in the General, Dimensions and Resources
tabs.
Show Preflight Report Opens a PDF with a preflight report for the selected product – if
available.
Export Original File/Nor- Exports the original file or a normalized PDF to a location of your
malized PDF choice.
Proof Products Sends selected products to a proofer. See “QuickProof Products and
Sheets” on page 551.
Proof Sheet Sends the selected sheet to a proofer. See “QuickProof Products and
Sheets” on page 551.
Save as Template Saves the current job as a Wide Format Ticket template
Open in Production Dash- Opens your standard browser with the job in Production Dashboard.
board
Submit Opens the Submit Job dialog box. See “Applying Changes and Sub-
mitting a Job” on page 538.
Edit Menu
Undo/Redo Undoes/Redoes the last operation.
Cut, Copy, Paste Cuts, Copies, Pastes the current selection.
Delete Product Deletes the selected product from the Products list.
Delete Frame Deletes the current frame.
Clear Frame Deletes the product from a frame.
Duplicate Product Makes a copy of the product in the Product panel.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 555

Duplicate Frame on Opens the Duplicate dialog box for duplicating the selected frame
Sheet or frames on the sheet. See “Duplicating Products” on page 509.
Step and Repeat Opens the Step and Repeat dialog box – if one or more placed prod-
ucts are selected. See “Step & Repeat” on page 510.
Select All Selects all products in the Product panel, or all products on a
selected layout.
Select None Deselects all products in the Product panel, or all products on a
selected layout.
Select All Odd-Num- Selects all products in the Product panel, or all products on a
bered/Even-Numbered selected layout.
Products
Check Out and Edit Doc- Opens products and documents in Acrobat from where they can be
ument checked in after editing.
Edit with Preview Opens the selected product in Preview. See “Previewing Job
Results” on page 95.
Open in Product Editor Opens the selected product in the Product Editor. See “Product Edi-
tor” on page 559.
Edit Sheet With a sheet selected on a print layout in Print Layout mode,
switches to the selected sheet in Sheet Layout mode.
Arrange Menu
Group/Ungroup Groups/ungroups the products selected on a layout.
Fitting Options for fitting the product and frame, and to open the Fitting
Options dialog box. See “Inspecting Frames” on page 500.
Size Frame to Sheet Fills the sheet with the selected product frame which can be empty
or filled.
Revert Frame Reverts a filled frame to the size of the original product.
Scale for Bleed Scales the product outside the frame to allow for the specified
bleed content.
Revert Product Size Reverts the size of the original product back to the size it initially
had when you added it to the Product panel.
Sheet Menu
Auto-Layout Product Opens the Auto-Layout dialog box. See “Placing Products with Auto-
Layout” on page 511.
New Empty Sheet Creates a new, empty sheet for the job.
Duplicate Sheet Creates a new sheet and duplicates the content.


Create Back Side Creates a new sheet and print layout for the back of the current
sheet; the new sheet and print layout appear on the next tab and
are numbered accordingly.
Delete Current Sheet Deletes the current sheet.
Delete Sheets Opens a dialog box where you can choose to delete empty sheets or
all sheets.
Rearrange Frames Rearranges the selected frames to their automatic placement.
Rearrange All Frames in Rearranges all the frames to their automatic placement on all the
Job sheets.
Reapply All Mark Sets in Removes all marks and reapplies the marks set rules.
Job
Apply Sheet Layout Tem- Opens a dialog box with the saved sheet layout templates which
plate can be applied to the current sheet.
Save Sheet Layout Tem- Opens a dialog box to save the current sheet as a sheet layout tem-
plate plate.
Assign Content IDs Assigns content IDs to the selected frames or all frames if none are
selected. The frame must contain a product.
Clear Content IDs Clears the content IDs of the selected frames or all frames if none
are selected.
Lock/Unlock Sheet Locks/unlocks the sheet to disable/enable editing.
Station Numbers Opens the Station Numbers dialog with settings for the numbering
sequence. See “Place Station Numbers” on page 550.
Fix Bleed Overlaps Opens the Fix Bleed Overlaps dialog. See “Fix Bleed Overlaps” on
page 549.
Print Layout Menu

New Empty Print Layout Creates a new, empty print layout for the job.
Duplicate Print Layout Creates a new Print Layout and duplicates the content.
Delete Current Print Lay- Deletes the current Print Layout.
out
Delete Print Layouts Opens a dialog box where you can choose to delete empty Print
Layouts or all layouts.
Rearrange Sheets Rearranges the selected sheets to their automatic placement.
Rearrange All Sheets in Rearranges all the sheets to their automatic placement on all the
Job Print Layouts.
Remake all Print Layouts Repositions all sheets in accordance with modified sheet layout set-
tings.

9 LAYOUT EDITOR 557
View Menu
Zoom In/Out Increases/decreases the zoom factor for viewing the layout.
Zoom to Fit Fits the layout to the area between the Product panel and the
inspectors.
Expand/Collapse Tiles Reveals/hides the tiles of a selected tiled product.
Guides • Don’t snap: no colored guides are displayed and products are not
snapped to align with adjacent products on the sheet.
• Snap to margins: (default) magenta snap guides are displayed
when positioning products on the sheet, to help you align with
the margins of the products.
• Snap to edges: cyan snap guides are displayed when positioning
products on the sheet, to help you align with the edges of the
products.
• Snap: guides are displayed when dragging sheets on the Print Lay-
out.
Print Layout Editor Orien- • Leading edge as on printer: Shows the Print Layout with the lead-
tation ing edge at the top or bottom, depending on the orientation of the
printer.
• Leading edge always on bottom of window: Shows the Print Lay-
out with the leading edge at the bottom, regardless of the orienta-
tion of the printer.
Sheet Layout Editor Ori- • Follow Print Layout Editor orientation: Shows the Sheet Layout in
entation the same orientation as the Print Layout Editor.
• Leading edge always on bottom/top of window: Shows the Sheet
Layout with the leading edge at the bottom, regardless of the ori-
entation of the printer or that of the Print Layout Editor.
Window Menu
System Overview Opens or switches to the System Overview window.
Jobs Opens or switches to the last Jobs window.
Hot Tickets Opens or switches to the Hot Tickets window.
Resources • “Media Hub” on page 1001
• “Finishing Hub” on page 920
• “Mark Engraver” on page 961
• “Color Books” on page 904
• “Sheet Sizes” on page 641
• “Sheet Layout Templates” on page 540
• “Alignment Pin Sets” on page 872
Show View Options Shows/hides the View Options palette.
Show Snag List Shows/hides the Snag List.


Panels • Show/Hide Inspector: shows/hides the panel on the right with
inspectors
• Show/Hide Product Panel: shows/hides the panel on the left with
products
Inspector • “Job Set-Up Inspector” on page 519
• “Product Inspector” on page 531
• “Colors Inspector” on page 532
• “Mark Sets Inspector (Sheet Layout mode only)” on page 534
• “Sheet Inspector” on page 535
Go to ProductionCenter Opens the ProductionCenter application in your internet browser.
Context Menus The following menus are available by context-clicking in the various panels or
objects in the Layout Editor.
Sheet Layout Mode - Product in the Product Panel
See “Managing/Editing Products” on page 485.
Sheet Layout Mode - Product on a Sheet
See “Inspecting Frames” on page 500.
Print Layout Mode - Sheet in the Sheets Panel

Context Menu Item Description
Delete Sheet Deletes the selected sheet from the Sheets panel and removes it
from the Print Layout.
Duplicate Sheet Creates a copy of the sheet in the Sheets panel and creates a new
Print Layout that contains the new sheet.
Edit Sheet Opens the selected sheet in Sheet Layout mode.
Locate Sheet on Print Highlights the sheet on the current Print Layout.
Layout
Print Layout Mode - Sheet on a Print Layout

Delete Sheet Deletes the selected sheet from the Print Layout.
Duplicate Sheet on Print Creates one or more copies of the sheet and places them on the
Layout current Print Layout or creates new Print Layouts if sufficient space
is not available.
Edit Sheet Opens the selected sheet in Sheet Layout mode.
Rearrange Sheet Rearranges the selected sheets to their automatic placement.

CHAPTER
10 Product Editor
This section describes the Product Editor, a dedicated workspace for editing the
products you upload in the Layout Editor. The Product Editor includes compre-
hensive features for tiling and contour paths.
 Overview ................................................................................................................. 560

 Product Inspector ................................................................................................ 565
 Canvas Extensions and Grommets Inspector ........................................... 574
 Tiling Inspector .................................................................................................... 578
 Paths Inspector .................................................................................................... 584
 Mark Sets Inspector and Mark Inspector ................................................... 586
 Interactive Tiling ................................................................................................. 587
 Other Tiling Features ......................................................................................... 595
 Tile Marks Dialog ........................................................................................ 595
 Renumber/Rename Tiles and Assign to Sets ................................... 598
 Tiling Preferences ....................................................................................... 599
 Presets ..................................................................................................................... 602
 Tiles in the Layout Editor ................................................................................. 606
 Design and Artwork Products ......................................................................... 608
559
560 OVERVIEW
Overview
The Product Editor is a module of the Layout Editor that opens when you open a
product that has been added to the list of products in the Product panel.
 To open the Product Editor from the Layout Editor window:
Double-click a product or one of the tiles of a tiled image in the Product panel
OR
Context-click a product in the Product panel and choose Open in Product

Editor
OR
When a product is selected in the Product panel, click the Edit product
button in the Frame/Product inspector.
Figure 10.43: A product open in the Product Editor
1 Positioning tools and snapping drop-down

2 Product pane
3 Inspectors
4 Editing toolbar
5 View Options palette

10 PRODUCT EDITOR 561
Inspectors The panel on the right consists of a number of tabs, which are referred to as
inspectors, where the actual editing is performed.
1 Product Inspector for basic edits to the product (size, bleed, etc.)
2 Canvas Extensions and Grommets Inspector
3 Tiling Inspector to tile a large image into smaller tiles
4 Paths Inspector where you can edit existing contour paths or create new ones
5 Mark Sets Inspector and Mark Inspector
The following sections discuss each inspector separately and how the various
settings affect the image being edited. Note, however, that changes you make in
one inspector may also affect what you specified in another inspector and vice
versa. For example, you can specify bleed in the Image inspector, create canvas
extensions and grommets in the second inspector, and then tile the resulting
product into smaller tiles in the Tiling inspector. The tiling is applied to the
entire product including the extensions, while the bleed you specified in the
Image inspector is applied to the individual tiles created in the Tiling inspector.
View Options Open the View Options palette to choose the various boxes and non-printed
information that you want to see while working in the Product Editor.
Palette
NOTE: Hiding content or marks with the View Options palette does not mean
they will not be printed.

562 OVERVIEW
 Click the View Options button in the toolbar to show/hide the View Options
palette.
The following components can be shown/hidden:
 Product
 Trim box: the original trim box of the image
 Product Size: the box indicating the size of the product to be printed
 Frame: the box around the image that includes canvas extensions but not
the bleed
 Bleed box: the box around the image that includes the bleed area, and the
canvas extensions if applicable
 Contours: the path around an image for finishing operations, for example
for cutting

 Design: an outline based on a CAD file for example.
 Extra
 Canvas Extensions: the box around the canvas extensions
 Grommets: the marks representing the grommets to be printed as content

with the image
 Motif: the cells that contain the motif of a step & repeat pattern
 Tiles
 Number: the sequence number of the tiles
 Visible size: the box indicating the visible size of the tiles
 Total size: the box indicating the visible size plus overlapping edges and
bleed
 Overlap: the overlapping edges of tiles as required for the tiling

arrangement
 No-ink: the no-ink zone on the tile overlap
 Anchor: the black arrow icon indicating the anchor corner that depends
on the montage sequence
 Preview
 Image: the actual content of the image you are editing
In the View Options drop-down list you can select, create, rename or delete
preference sets for the View Options.
Related topics: • View Options Palette on page 513
Toolbars The toolbar in the bottom left corner basically has the same tools as in the Layout
Editor, except for specific tools (Crop, Split, Paths) which are available in the
Product Editor when the various inspectors are selected.
Related topics: • Layout Toolbar on page 517

564 OVERVIEW
When using the Tiling inspector you will also see a positioning toolbar at the top
of the product editing panel which is activated when you select a tile. See
“Positioning Toolbar” on page 593.
Applying Changes When you’ve finished editing a product you must click the Apply button in the
bottom right corner to save your edits. So although you can see the changes you
make as you work on the product, they are only final when you save them with
the Apply button. You can click the Cancel button if you do not want to save your
edits and keep the product as it was. Click the Apply to All button if you want to
apply the edits to all the products in the job and overrule any previous edits
made to these products.
NOTE: Saved edits are also applied to products already placed on sheets.

Product Inspector
The product is initially the same size as the original image. The product
inspector is where you can crop the original image, change the product size and
specify how the image fits in the product, and specify the bleed.
 Click the tab to display the Product inspector where you can expand and
collapse the various panels.
Product
Name The name set by the Layout Editor when you create a product from a file or dupli-
cate a product. You can also set a different color to represent the product in
various views by clicking the color patch.
Order Number Field to specify an order number of your choice.
Product Code Field to specify a product code of your choice.
Copies Enter the total number of copies of the selected image that you want to print, i.e.
the number of copies on all the layouts multiplied by the run length.
NOTE: This is not the number of images on the current sheet.
Grain Select a grain from the drop-down list for the media you will be printing on:
 None: No specific requirements regarding the substrate grain
 Horizontal: the product grain must run horizontally through the product
 Vertical: the product grain must run vertically through the product
Size
At the top you see the Product Size and this is followed by a table with details of
how this size is calculated, starting from the size of the image (Artwork Size) and
after the cropping and scaling specified in the panels below is applied. A black
asterisk is displayed when the size is different from the native size of the image,
i.e. with scaling, fitting, image operations, etc. applied. The asterisk is blue if
fitting is applied.

566 PRODUCT INSPECTOR
Sources
This panel specifies the files used for the design and the artwork of the
product.These file names may include the page number if the source file has
several pages. Clicking the drop-downs reveals a menu for selecting a different
design or artwork.
Design The first drop-down list in this panel specifies the file used for the design of the
product; this can be a PDF file or a CAD file and is followed by an asterisk if the
design has been changed.
Artwork The F and the B drop-downs specify the artwork file used for the front and the
back of the product, respectively. A warning icon is displayed if the artwork
cannot be aligned with the design automatically.
Crop
You can crop the image by specifying a single value for all four sides with the link
icon closed, or by entering values for each side with the link icon open. These
cropping values are applied to the original image dimensions, so before other
modification such as fitting and bleed are applied. If you scale the image, you
can select the Show scaled crop values check box and then enter values that
relate to the scaled size.
NOTE: You can also use the Cropping tool to crop your image: see “Cropping
an image” on page 573.
Step & Repeat (make Select this check box to step and repeat an image and create a pattern that can
pattern) subsequently be placed on the layout sheet. See “Step & Repeat Patterns” on
page 570.
Product Size
Size Here you can specify the size that you want for the finished product. When you
open an image in the Product Editor the first time, the product size is equal to the
image size. The product size is the same as the frame in the Layout Editor. Leave
the link icon closed if you want to keep the aspect ratio of the original image. You
can change the orientation of the product by clicking the swap dimensions
button to the right of the size fields.
 Use image size: The product size is identical to the image size and this size
can be scaled by entering a percentage.
 Standard size from the list: Choose a size from the drop-down list and the
scaling factors for the length and height are displayed to the left of the dimen-
sions. You can edit the dimensions.

 Custom: Lets you specify the length and width in your preferred size units.
Fitting Options If you chose a size in the list or defined a specific product size you can also set the
fitting options. Otherwise the image fits in the product box.
 Orientation: Selecting the Rotate for better fit check box rotates the image so
the long edge of the product size aligns with the long side of the image.
 Scaling: Select how you want to scale the image to fit in the product:
 None: no scaling is applied to fit the image to the product; it takes up as

much space as required to accommodate its original size
 Fill with image: scales the image so it fills the product and crops the image
if necessary.
 Fit image: scales the image so it fits completely in the product which is not
necessarily filled.
 Fit image to width: scales the image so its width fits that of the product.
 Fit image to height: scales the image so its height fits that of the product.
Maintain proportions Keeps the width and height scale factors the same when scaling. This means that
some parts of the image may be clipped.
Alignment Choose a position (top left, top center, top right, etc.) for the cropped, scaled or
rotated image inside the product size.
Total frame size The product size + canvas extensions
When you apply your changes, the image appears in the images list of the Layout
Editor with the new product size. If you edit the image again, you can start from
the original image size. Any changes you make do not affect images which are
already placed on sheets.
Bleed/Mask
Bleed can be taken from the image file or created by the system. Specifying bleed
does not affect the product size or crop.

Figure 10.44: Mirrored image content added as bleed (between black and red boxes)
Bleed types From the drop-list you can specify when bleed is created by the system or taken
from the bleed area available in the image file. These options are mainly relevant
for images which have a bleed area present in the image file. Only the first and
the last options are relevant if the image has no bleed area.
 None: Sets the maximum bleed to 0 even if bleed is provided in the image file.
The bleed box coincides with the canvas extension box or the product size.
 From image, fixed size: The system uses the bleed in the image file for the
maximum bleed you specified or only what is available if the bleed in the
image is less than the specified bleed.
 From image, disable if none: The system uses the bleed in the image file for
the maximum bleed or less if the bleed in this file is less. No bleed is created
if the image file has no bleed.
 From image, create if needed: The system uses the bleed in the image file if it
is equal or greater than the specified maximum bleed; if the image bleed is
less than the specified bleed, the system creates the bleed and does not use
the image bleed.
 Always create bleed: The system creates the maximum bleed, effectively
replacing any bleed in the image file.
Maximum bleed Specify the size of the bleed area you want around the image or canvas exten-
sion. Bleed is created around the canvas extension if this is present, not around
the image. Enter one value for all sides or open the link icon to enter values for
bleed along the four sides as desired. Press Enter to apply the values.

Bleed Generator
By default, the system mirrors the content along the edges of the image to create
the specified bleed if no bleed area is provided in the image file. You can fine-
tune or change this behavior by clicking the pencil icon next to the bleed types to
open the Bleed Generator dialog box.
Method This is how the system will create the bleed content from the image content:
 Mirror edge content: The bleed area is filled by mirroring the content
within the bleed range along the edges of the product box.
 Scale entire content: The entire image is scaled proportionally to fill the
bleed area.
Inset The bleed content is created, starting from the specified inset inside the product
box and on top of the existing content. This is useful if the image content does
not extend to the product box.
Preserve existing bleed Select the Options check box to preserve the bleed content in the image file
underneath the bleed created by the system.

Step & Repeat Patterns

Select the Step & Repeat (make patterns) check box at the top of the Image
Inspector to step and repeat an image (i.e. the motif) and create a seamless
pattern that can subsequently be placed on the layout sheet. This feature offers
advanced options to vary the pattern which are not possible when using Step &
Repeat to repeat an image directly on a sheet in the Layout Editor. Applications
include wallpaper, curtains, flooring, etc.
Figure 10.45: Horizontal and vertical cells of a step & repeat pattern
Product Size
Size Here you can choose how you want the size of the finished product to be
determined:
 Manual: Select this option to enter the product size; the initial size is the
image size.
 From Pattern (default): The dimension boxes are disabled and the
product size accommodates the pattern you create, including its gaps,
scaling, etc.
 Minimal Repeat: The number of repeats and corresponding product size

are calculated for making a minimum repeating pattern.
Cogwheel Open the cogwheel to match the product size with the size of the media.
Choosing this option steps and repeats the motif so a pattern is created that fits
the media size. This also enables the dimension boxes and sets them to Manual.
You have two options:

 From Media: Copies the dimensions of the currently selected media into
the dimension boxes and creates a pattern that covers the entire media
using the image as motif.
 From Media with Margins: Does the same as From Media but uses the
dimensions of the media minus the finishing margins.
Horizontally and Vertically

In the Horizontally and Vertically panels you can fine-tune the horizontal rows
and vertical columns of the pattern grid.
Repeat Enter the number of times you want to repeat the motif horizontally/vertically –
if the Auto check box is not selected. If the check box is selected, the number of
repeats is calculated for you, for example if you are using one of the From Media
options.
Brick/Drop Brick sets an offset to shift the cells of alternating rows to the right, and Drop sets
an offset to move alternating columns down. You can specify this offset in several
ways: as a fraction of the motif, as a percentage of the motif, or as an absolute
value in mm or inches. Click the drop-down list to display preset fractions and
percentages, and options that allow you to enter your own absolute value,
percentage or fraction.
1 Preset fractions for offsetting motifs in rows/columns

2 Preset percentages
3 Options to set your own fraction or percentage
Mirror Steps You can choose to mirror alternate stepped motifs horizontally, vertically or
both. This is possible for rows as well as columns, or both.
Fitting Here you select how the generated pattern must be fitted on the specified
product size:

 Omit partial: The content of the last partial cells of the rows/columns is
deleted from the pattern design.
 Clip partial: The content of the last cells of the rows/columns is clipped to
coincide with the pattern size. This is the default if you specify the product
size with From Media.
 Fit scale: Select this option to scale the repeated motif so it fits in all the
cells.
 Fit gaps: Select this option to add gaps so the entire repeated motif fits in
all the cells.
Scale Set a percentage if you want to scale the cells and the motif horizontally/
vertically.
Gap/overlap A positive value creates a gap between the cells and a negative value makes them
overlap. Click the drop-down list to display preset fractions and percentages,
and options that allow you to enter your own absolute value, percentage or
fraction (same as Brick/Drop). Select the Between images only check box if don’t
want a gap/overlap at the beginning and end of the rows/columns.
Overlap Order Two buttons let you control how the repeated motifs overlap each other. The
default order is that the motifs on the right/top overlap the adjacent motifs on
the left/bottom.
Figure 10.46: Motifs on the right overlapping adjacent motifs (default)
Global
Settings in the Global panel apply to the whole pattern.
First Cell Here you can rotate (90°, 180°, 270°) and/or mirror the image to modify the
initial motif. The F symbol indicates the combined effect of the rotation and
mirroring.
Skip Steps Enter a value (n) to leave every n+1 cell empty (no motif).

Offset Enter a value to shift the entire pattern horizontally or vertically. Click the drop-
down list to display preset fractions and percentages, and options that allow you
to enter your own absolute value, percentage or fraction (same as Brick/Drop).
Rotate and Mirror (Positioning Tools)

Use the Rotate drop-down list (0, 90°, 180° or 270°) to rotate and the Vertical or
Horizontal Mirror buttons to mirror the image and its product box. The F symbol
next to the buttons indicates the combined effect of the rotation and mirroring.
You only see the effect of rotating and mirroring when you place the image on a
sheet in the Layout Editor where you can also perform the same rotating and
mirroring actions. See “Positioning and resizing products with the positioning
toolbar” on page 496. The fact that you have rotated or mirrored the image is
indicated with a green F icon in the top left corner of the image.
 Cropping an image
You can crop an image by entering values in the Crop panel of the inspector or
interactively on the image using the Crop tool.
1 Open the image you want to crop and click the Crop Image tool in the bottom
toolbar.
A crop box appears on the image which you can resize to define the crop. You
will also see a Crop and Revert button in the toolbar.
2 When you’ve finished cropping the image, click Crop to save your changes
and crop the image. Us the Revert button to go back to the previous status.

574 CANVAS EXTENSIONS AND GROMMETS INSPECTOR
Canvas Extensions and Grommets Inspector

With canvas extensions you can add extra material to one or multiple edges of
the image to create flaps. Grommets can be positioned in these extensions or in
a product without extensions.
Figure 10.47: Mirrored image content added as extensions and bleed, corners not filled
• Canvas extension between the black product box (image) and yellow extension box
• Bleed between the yellow extension box and red bleed box
 Click the tab to display the Canvas Extensions and Grommets inspector.
Canvas Extensions
You can specify the size of canvas extension and whether they are filled with
content created by the system or left empty. Any bleed you specified in the image
inspector is added to these extensions.
Select the Canvas Extensions check box to enable the settings:
Size Specify the size that you want the canvas to extend beyond the product size.
Enter one value for all sides or open the link icon to enter different values for the
four sides as desired. Press Enter to apply the values.

Fill Corners This check box has to be cleared to create open flaps; when selected, corners
with adjacent flaps are filled.
Content Here you can choose how the system will create content to fill the extensions:
 Scale image: The image is scaled proportionately so it fills the product

size plus the canvas extensions plus the bleed areas
 Mirror image: The extensions are filled by mirroring the content within
the extension range along the edges of the product box, optionally,
starting from a specified inset inside the product box and on top of the
existing content. This is useful if the image content does not extend to the
product box. The bleed is a continuation of this mirrored content.
 Image bleed: The extensions are filled with the bleed present in the image
file or the generated bleed that runs into the extensions. If you cropped
the image, the cropped parts are used.
 Color: Fills the extensions with a solid color (CMYK or RGB) that you can
choose with the color picker. Open the color picker by clicking the patch
next to the Content drop-down list when this option is selected.
 No ink: Leaves the extensions and bleed areas empty.
No-ink zone Enter a value for an area along the edges of the flaps where no ink is allowed.
Entering a value here automatically disables any bleed settings.
Print line marks You can use Print Line Marks to draw and print lines and create a printed box
around the image and its extensions – without using mark sets. You can set the
line thickness, color (open the color picker), and style (solid, dashed or dotted).
The lines are centered on the extension borders.
NOTE: To see the line marks, apply the settings and place the image on a sheet.
 On product size: The lines are printed along the edges between the image
and the extensions.
 On extensions: The lines create a closed box around the edges of the
extensions.
 Only on edges with extensions: The lines are only printed on the edges of
the canvas that actually have extensions so the box may not be closed.

576 CANVAS EXTENSIONS AND GROMMETS INSPECTOR
Grommets
Figure 10.48: Grommets (circles with cross) in the extensions
Grommets are holes for reinforced eyelets which are generally placed along the
edges of a product. Marks can be drawn on the product to indicate where these
holes are to be made. These settings let you choose where the marks are drawn
and what they will look like.
Position Click in the check boxes to position the grommet marks along the top, bottom,
left or right edges.
Type Four types of grommet marks are available:
 Solid circle
 Circle
 Circle with cross
 Cross
The marks can be drawn as an outline by selecting the Draw outlined check
box.
Diameter The diameter of the circle.
Line thickness The thickness of all the mark lines.

Line length The length of the 2 lines of the cross.
Color The color of all the grommets. Click the variable button, and select one or more
colors to change the color of the cutting lines:
See “To print tile marks” on page 595 for more information on using colors to
print marks.
Draw in You can choose to place the grommet marks in the image or the extensions, and
specify the horizontal and vertical distance from either the outer edge of the
image or the extensions. Close the link icon and re-enter a value if you want to
use the same value for the horizontal and vertical distances.
Max. distance between Enter the maximum distance between adjacent marks – horizontally and verti-
marks cally. Close the link icon and re-enter a value if you want to use the same value
for the horizontal and vertical distances. In the Mark Reference drop-down list
you can choose from where the distance is calculated: the center of the mark or
its circumference.

578 TILING INSPECTOR
Tiling Inspector
Use the Tiling inspector to divide a master image into parts, i.e. tiles, that can be
printed independently of each other. After applying tiling, the tiles appear in the
Product panel of the Layout Editor as individual images which can be placed on
sheets for printing. The printed tiles are subsequently mounted to recreate the
original master image.
The master image may have canvas extensions, and tiling is then applied to the
total image area that consists of the image and the flaps.
Overlaps and non-content gaps

In most cases, the individual tiles will need to have overlaps on one or more sides
so they can be assembled on top of each other – for example, the various panels
of a billboard. These overlaps are added to the visible size of the tiles. The total
size of a tile is the visible size plus the overlap and bleed. However, in some cases,
overlapping is not necessary or possible – for example if thicker materials are
used. Other applications may require that gaps are created in the content
between the tiles.
 Click the tiling icon to display the Tiling inspector.

Figure 10.49: Tiling inspector
Tiling check box

Selecting the tiling check box enables the tiling settings in the inspector where
you can set the parameters to let the system create tiles automatically. The check
box is also selected and the inspector activated if you are creating your tiles
manually. See “Interactive Tiling” on page 587.
NOTE: Clearing the Tiling check box will delete all interactive tiling actions you
performed on the image.
Tiling menu
Click the cogwheel to reveal a menu with the following commands:

Re-apply tiling set-up Resets the tiling arrangement according to the settings in the tiling inspector,
undoing any interactive tiling actions.
Preferences Opens the Tiling Preferences dialog box with the settings for creating the
montage instructions. See “Tiling Preferences” on page 599.
Tiles
At the top of the Tiles panel you can specify how you want to create your tiles:
the number of columns and rows and whether you want the tiles to have the
same visible size or the same total size. Alternatively, you can specify the desired
dimensions for the tiles – again based on either the visible or total size – and the
system will use these dimensions to split the image. In this case, the last row and
column will probably have tiles with different sizes to accommodate the
remaining content of the image.
Tile for current media Select this check box to let the system tile your image so it fits on the sheet or roll
media currently being used. For example, a large image can be split into 3 tiles
so it can be printed on the media. Selecting this option clears any manual
settings you made.
No. To start tiling, enter the number of columns in the box with the horizontal arrow
and the number of rows in the box with the vertical arrow.
Total Size/Visible Size You can choose the total or visible size by clicking the black triangles to display
the drop-down list:
 Visible size: the area of the tile that will be visible after mounting
 Total size: the visible size plus overlaps
Last The width of the last column and the height of the last row; only filled if you
specify a desired size for the tiles.
Tiling arrangement
A tiling arrangement can be chosen depending on whether you need overlap-
ping tiles, non-image gaps between tiles, or extensions to recreate the master
image from the tiles:

Overlaps
Select the Overlaps arrangement if you need overlapping tiles. Enter a

horizontal and vertical size for the overlaps. The overlaps are areas with dupli-
cate image content so the tiles can be mounted on top of each other. Enter a non-
ink zone if you want part of the overlap to remain blank so the overlapping
materials adhere better to each other.
Gaps
Select the Gaps arrangement if you need content gaps between the tiles. The
content gaps are not printed. Self-adhesive tiles for window panes are a typical
application of gaps. Enter the gap size, for example the width of your window
frame, and half of this size is deducted from adjacent tile edges to create the full
gap. Enter extension sizes to create extra material with content to cater for size
variations. Extensions are added to the sides opposite to the tile anchor, except
along the outer edges of the image.

Symmetrical
Similar to the Gaps arrangement but with extensions on all sides. Select the Add
to outer edges check box to add extensions to the tiles along the outer edges of
the image.
Montage Sequence
Here you specify the order for mounting the printed tiles, how the tiles are
numbered, and on which edges the overlaps or gaps are located. This is done by
combining the First Tile and Proceed buttons that provide a total of 16
combinations.
First Tile Select the corner where you want to start the numbering of the tiles: top left, top
right, bottom left, and bottom right. The sequence numbering starts with the tile
that is to be mounted first and the anchor symbol moves to the respective corner
of each tile. The tile overlaps, gaps or extensions are created accordingly.
Proceed The logic of the sequence numbering is controlled by four buttons in the drop-
down list. These let you choose the horizontal and vertical direction in the grid.
The default sequence is with the first tile in the top left corner. The numbering

then proceeds horizontally along the first row (left to right) and then on the
following row in the same direction (left to right). Depending on the selected
first tile, the following combinations are possible:
NOTE: The drop-down list only shows the four sequences that are possible with
the selected first tile.
Actual Total Sizes The Smallest and Largest total tile widths (horizontal arrow) and tile heights
(including bleed) (vertical arrow) – not necessarily the same two tiles.
Various
Print tile marks Prints tile-specific marks on the tiles. See “Tile Marks Dialog” on page 595.
Export montage Select the check box if you want the system to automatically create a PDF
instructions document with instructions for mounting the tiles when you submit the job.
Click the Export and Open button without or with the check box selected to see
the PDF with instructions immediately. See “Montage Instructions” on
page 600.
Related topics: • Interactive Tiling on page 587

• Split Tool Shortcuts on page 1126
• Positioning Toolbar Shortcuts on page 1126
• Layout Toolbar on page 517

584 PATHS INSPECTOR
Paths Inspector
You can use the Paths inspector to view and edit an existing path and its anchor
points or to create a path from scratch. Paths are generally used as contours for
finishing operations (cutting, creasing, etc.) and play an important role in true-
shape nesting of products on a sheet. Paths take the bleed that you set for the
image but this is only visible in the Image inspector.
 Click the tab to display the Paths inspector.
The Paths panel lists the paths present in the image. An image always has at least
one path, namely the frame. Paths can be added using the paths tools in the
toolbar or you can auto-generate a path if the image is suitable with the Trace
feature.
 Add a closed path (ellipse or rectangle)

1 Open the image that you want to add a path to and go to the Paths inspector.
2 Select the Ellipse tool or the Rectangle tool in the bottom toolbar and draw
the path like you would place an object on top of the image:
 Click and drag to draw the ellipse or rectangle. Press the CTRL key to
draw circles or squares.
 To move the path on the image, select the object with one of the pointer
tools. You can adjust the width and height of the path’s bounding box in
the Positioning Toolbar in the top left corner.
 Context-click an object to choose an Offset or Inset value that enlarges or

shrinks the closed path.
NOTE: You can select the anchor points of a closed path with the white pointer
(Path Selection tool) and modify the object.
3 Click Apply or Apply to All to save your changes.
 Add a free-form path with the pen tool

1 Open the image that you want to add a path to and go to the Paths inspector.
2 Select the Pen tool and click where you want to start drawing your path:

 Click and release to set an anchor point and draw straight lines.
 Click again in an anchor point to display direction handles and draw a

curved line.
 Command-click to stop drawing the path.
 Auto-generate a path
1 Open the image that you want to generate a path for and go to the Paths
inspector.
2 Click the Trace button to open the Trace Content dialog.
3 Use the Edge Contrast slider to set the contrast used to define the path an
click OK.
4 In the Paths list, select the auto-generated path you just created to display it
in the Product pane. You can rename the path, choose a finishing operation
and change the path color.
 Delete a path
 In the Paths list, context-click the path you want to delete, and choose
Remove Path.
OR
In the Product pane, select the path with one of the pointer tools and press
Delete.
Related topics: • Placing Products with Auto-Layout on page 511

• Finishing Operations on page 536
• Finishing on page 532
• Clip to contour on page 532
• Positioning Toolbar Shortcuts on page 1126
• Layout Toolbar on page 517

586 MARK SETS INSPECTOR AND MARK INSPECTOR
Mark Sets Inspector and Mark Inspector

 Click the tab to display a combined tab with the Mark Sets Inspector and the
Mark Inspector.
You then see two tabs.
The first tab is the Mark Sets Inspector that you can use to apply sets of
product marks to all the products in the job (first section) or to apply sets of
Press Sheet Marks to all the press sheets in the job (second section). Select
the check marks to add marks. Click the cogwheels to switch off the Mark Sets
or remove manual marks.
The second tab shows the details of a selected mark or a mark you just placed
using the Marks palette. You can edit the settings for the selected mark.

• Place Station Numbers on page 550

Interactive Tiling
Automatic tiling uses the settings in the Tiling inspector to create a grid where
most of the tiles have the same size. However, you can use interactive tools to
create a non-grid tiling arrangement from scratch or to modify the rows or
columns of an existing arrangement.
Interactive tiling is indicated with a blue asterisk in the Tiling inspector header:
The following tools are available for interactive tiling:
 Split Tool (Manual Tiling)
 Selection Tool
 Omit Tiles
 Merge Tiles
 Horizontal and Vertical Splitting
 Positioning Toolbar
Split Tool (Manual You can use the Split tool to create tiles from a master image in free-style
manner. The Split tool is visible in the tiling toolbar in the bottom left corner
Tiling) when you are in the Tiling inspector tab.
1 Open the image you want to tile in the Product Editor and go to the Tiling
inspector tab.
2 Click the Split tool in the toolbar, or press K, to activate the tool. Now you
start to tile an untiled image from scratch or to fine-tune an existing tiling
arrangement.

588 INTERACTIVE TILING
3 Hover over the image to start tiling.
If you are tiling an untiled image, the Tiling check box at the top of the Tiling
inspector tab is activated from the moment you create your first tile. If you
want overlaps, gaps or extensions, you need to specify them before you start
splitting.
NOTE: Changing the basic tiling settings in the inspector will undo interactive
edits. Changing overlap size preserves interactive edits.
The Split cursor (large cross) appears with a magenta line parallel to the
shortest side of the image, and the width of the split tiles on either side of the
split line.
4 Move the split line to the desired position and click to confirm the splitting.
You can change the splitting orientation (from parallel with the shortest side
to parallel with the longest tile) by pressing and releasing the space bar or
TAB key.
The orientation of the split line changes automatically if you move into a tile
whose shortest side or longest side has a different orientation.

You can extend the splitting in one tile across all the tiles of an image by
holding down the SHIFT key.
 Split Tool Shortcuts

Activate the Split tool by pressing K with the Tiling inspector selected. To control
the splitting of tiles selected with the Split tool, use the following shortcuts.
To Press
Change the splitting orientation (the magenta splitting line) Space bar or TAB key
once
Extend the splitting action across all tiles Hold SHIFT
Repeat the split. CTRL
Cancel the image splitting ESC
Selection Tool If you created tiles interactively with the Split tool or automatically with the
inspector, you can fine-tune them further with the selection tool. In this mode
you can select tiles and change their size, merge the tiles, etc.
NOTE: You cannot create new split lines in this mode.
1 Select the Selection tool in the bottom toolbar.
2 Hover over the split lines to display the tile dimensions on either side of the
line, and the resize arrow.
3 Click and drag a split line to edit the tile size.

Use standard shortcuts to select multiple tiles. Hold SHIFT to resize all the
selected tiles.
Omit Tiles You may decide that a particular tile in your tiling scheme does not have to be
printed.
 Select the tile you want to omit with the Selection tool and clear the Print
check box in the Positioning toolbar or press the Delete key.
The tile in question is grayed out which means it will not be created. The tile
numbering and the total number of tiles is modified accordingly. When you
apply the changes, this tile is not added to the Product panel in the Layout
Editor.
NOTE: You can revert the delete tile action by selecting the Print check box
again, even after you applied the changes.
Merge Tiles Adjacent tiles can be merged along their common split line to create a new,
merged tile. Settings for overlaps, gaps and extensions are applied to the newly
created tile.
You can use the Merge Tiles command in the Positioning toolbar to merge
selected tiles or drag the split line of a tile to append adjacent tiles.

1 Select two or more tiles you want to merge with the Selection tool.
2 When the selected tiles form a rectangle, the system activates the Merge Tiles
button in the Positioning toolbar.
3 Click the Merge Tiles button to merge the selected tiles.
OR
1 In Selection tool mode, hover over the common split line between the tiles
you want to merge and drag the line to the opposite edge of the tile you want
to append.
The split line snaps to the edge of the first tile.
2 Release the mouse button and the merged tile is created
The tile numbering and the total number of tiles is modified accordingly.
3 Now you can drag the split line to the edge of the following tile if you want to
merge multiple tiles.
When you apply the changes, the merged tiles appear as a single tile in the
Product panel in the Layout Editor.
NOTE: You cannot revert to the original tiles once you have applied the
changes.
Horizontal and Manual tiling with the Split tool is not ideal if you want equal splits across one or
more tiles, or if you want to control overlaps, gaps and extensions. In these cases
Vertical Splitting it is recommended to use the Split Tile buttons in the Positioning toolbar.
1 Select the tile you want to split with the Selection tool. If you want to apply
the same splitting to multiple tiles, select multiple tiles.
2 Click either the Horizontal or Vertical Split Tile button in the Positioning
toolbar or press CTRL+U, or context-click and choose Split Tiles.
The Split Tile dialog box is displayed.

The Equal size panel is enabled by default with the cursor in the horizontal
or vertical Number box. This depends on whether you clicked the Horizontal
or Vertical Split Tile button. The Equal size panel is similar to the Tiles
settings in the inspector (see “Tiles” on page 580) and you can enter the
number of horizontal columns and/or vertical rows to create a grid of tiles
which all have the same size. Alternatively, you can enter a size and all
columns and/or rows will have this size, except the last.
You can choose the Arbitrary sizes option button if you want to specify
multiple horizontal and/or vertical sizes for some or all the tiles. Enter a size
in the first horizontal and/or vertical box. This will be the size for the tile
starting from the anchor corner. Continue with values for up to 5 tiles. You
can use and asterisk if you want the system to split the remaining distance
into equal tiles. For example, 100,200,*,400,*, splits a total distance of
1000 into tiles of 100, 200,150,400,150.
You can select the Advanced option if you want to enter more sizes. You can
use spaces or commas to separate the dimensions.
In the Overlaps/Extension/Gaps section you can choose how these settings

are applied to the split tiles:

 From Tiling Set-up: the inspector settings are applied
 Same as selected tile: relevant if multiple tiles are selected for splitting;
the new tile inherits the settings of the parent tile
 None: no overlaps or gaps are applied
3 Click Split to confirm your splitting settings.
Positioning Toolbar The Positioning toolbar at the top of the Product Editor lets you inspect and edit
each individual tile in the tiling scheme. Entering values in the boxes for Width,
Height, Overlap, Gap and Extensions will override the values you see in the
Tiling inspector and may also affect tiles which are arranged adjacent to the
selected tiles. The measurement boxes you see in the toolbar depend on the
tiling arrangement used to create the tiling scheme.
You also have tools for rotating and mirroring tiles when placed on the sheet,
tools for splitting and merging tiles, and the Print check box that can be cleared
if you want to omit a tile. The pencil icon opens the Assign to Set dialog that can
be used to specify custom tile names for multiple sets of tiles.
Select one or more tiles to activate the tools.
1 Width and height of the tile (value is “mixed” if multiple tiles are selected)
2 Anchor direction
3 Overlap size or Extension/No-ink zone on the Left, and Top edges of the tile
4 Overlap size or Extension/No-ink zone on the Right, and Bottom edges of the tile
5 Gap size on the Left, Right, Top and Bottom edges of the tile
6 Rotation and mirror tools
7 Horizontal and vertical Split tools and Merge tool
8 Assign to Set button
 Positioning Toolbar Shortcuts

To control the Positioning toolbar when a tile is selected with Selection tool:

To
Open the Split Tile dialog box CTRL + U
Mirror the tile vertically when placed on a sheet SHIFT + M
Mirror the tile horizontally when placed on a sheet M
Rotate the tile clockwise in steps of 90° SHIFT + R
Rotate the tile anticlockwise in steps of 90° R
Merge the selected tiles CTRL+ G
Place the cursor in the first Overlap box of the Positioning toolbar O
Place the cursor in the first Gap box of the Positioning toolbar G
Jump to next box in the Positioning toolbar TAB
Related topics: • Tiling Inspector on page 578

• Rotate and Mirror (Positioning Tools) on page 573
• Horizontal and Vertical Splitting on page 591
• Merge Tiles on page 590
• Omit Tiles on page 590

Other Tiling Features

This section discusses some extra tiling features:
 How to print tile marks: see “Tile Marks Dialog” on page 595
 “Renumber/Rename Tiles and Assign to Sets” on page 598
 How to create a PDF with montage instructions: see “Tiling Preferences”

on page 599
Tile Marks Dialog You can print tile-specific marks on the tiles to help the person assembling the
tiles arrange the tiles correctly. Two tile marks are possible: the tile name, which
is text that typically includes the sequence number, and overlap line marks for
aligning adjacent tiles. Select the check boxes to include the name and/or lines.
Figure 10.50: An example of tile marks (lines) as shown when a tile is placed on a sheet in the
Layout Editor
NOTE: Tile marks are only visible in the Layout Editor and when the image is
placed on a sheet.
 To print tile marks

1 You enable tile marks by selecting the Print tile marks check box in the
Various panel at the bottom of the Tiling inspector.

596 OTHER TILING FEATURES
2 Click the Edit button (pencil) to open the Tile Marks dialog box where you
can specify the content and the appearance of the marks.
Tile name
Text Any combination of static text and variables can be entered in the box for the
name which will typically include the sequence numbers.
For example: Tile no. $image.tile_number/$image.total_tiles resolves
to Tile no. n/total. Valid variables appear in a drop-down list as you type in
the box.
Font The typeface and point size for printing the text mark.
Color Click the associated variable button, and select one or more options to determine
on which plate(s) the text mark will be printed:
 Registration (all plates). When this option is selected, you will see an
asterisk (*).
 Process colors (CMYK)
 Darkest color
 Special colors
 Spot colors
Outline Adds a 1-point white line in knockout around the type so it stands out better with
certain content.
Position Here you can specify where the tile name is printed on the tile by choosing one
of the buttons:
 Centered in overlap: the default position which places the tile name in the
center of the overlap or extension. For the tiles with no overlap, for example
the last tiles, you can choose to omit the text, otherwise the tile name is
printed in the visible area. You can change the default behavior as follows:
 Prefer horizontal overlap (default): if possible, the text is printed in the

horizontal overlap or extension
 Prefer vertical overlap: if possible, the text is printed in the vertical

overlap or extension

 In horizontal overlap only: forces the system to place the text in the
horizontal overlap
 In vertical overlap only: forces the system to place the text in the vertical
overlap
If the tiling scheme has no overlaps or extensions specified, the system prints
the tile name along the horizontal edge of the tile, and possibly in the visible
area.
 Manual: Select this button if you want more control for placing the tile name
mark. Specify the horizontal (left, center, right) and vertical (bottom, center,
top) alignment relative to the corners of the total size, the horizontal and
vertical offset, and rotation of the text (0, 90, 180 or 270°).
Overlap (alignment lines)

The overlap marks are dashed, black and white lines that mark the border
between the visible part of the tile and the overlap or extension. Tiles will have
two, one or zero lines depending on their position in the montage, with small
dashes for vertical lines and large dashes for horizontal lines.
Position The position of the line relative to the edges of the tiles:
 At overlap/extension: against the bordering line of the overlap/extension
 Centered in overlap/extension:
Length This option controls the length of the dashed line:
 Print in bleed only: This default setting prints a line in the bleed area only
so it’s the smallest of the marks.
 Print into overlap: The line is printed in the bleed area and extends into
the overlap or extensions.
 Print across entire size: The dashed line is printed along the entire length
of the edges that have overlaps.
Thickness Enter the thickness of the dashed lines in points (pts).
Run into image area Enabled for the first two Length options: the length that the dashed line may
extend into the image area.
Print tile line marks

You can print an outline along the edges of each tile:

 On Total Size: the tile including overlaps/extension
 On Bleed: the total size plus bleed
You can set the thickness, color and style of the line marks. Click the arrow
icons to select a solid, dashed or dotted line.
Renumber/ You can create multiple sets of tiles and identify the sets by renumbering/
renaming the tiles. This number is also picked up by the $image.tile_number
Rename Tiles and variable which can be used to form the tile name.
Assign to Sets
1 Open the image and define the tiles.
2 Select the tiles you want to put in the first set, for example the Left tiles.
3 Click the pencil icon in the top toolbar with positioning tools to open the
Assign to Set dialog.
4 Enter the Set Name, e.g. Left; you can also change the First Number in Set to
renumber tiles starting from a different number than the default.
5 Click OK and then repeat to create a second set, for example the Right tiles.

Tiling Preferences This dialog box shows the settings for creating a PDF file with the montage
instructions for the tiling arrangement at hand.
Figure 10.51: A PDF document with montage instructions

 Open the cogwheel menu in the top right corner of the tiling inspector to
open Tiling Preferences.
Montage Instructions
Montage instructions explain how the tiling arrangement is organized so the
tiles can be assembled to recreate the original image. The instructions mention
the order and job reference and give a short summary of the tiling set-up
(product size, number of tiles, etc.).
Page size Choose a size and orientation for the PDF you will export.
Include You can choose to include a:
 List of tiles: A table with a list of all the tiles and the dimensions of the
individual tiles with their overlaps and gaps.
 Montage overview: A diagram of the tiling arrangement as shown in the

Product Editor. You can select a View Options preset to specify what will
be printed exactly in the diagram.
File name Enter a file name with or without variables from the drop-down list or use the
default name with variables ($DOCUMENTBASENAME_MI$TIME).
Export directory Enter a location for saving the file with or without variables from the drop-down
list.
Conflict handling Indicate how you want subsequent export files to be handled.
 Export a PDF with montage instructions

1 Open the tiled image in the Product Editor and go to the Tiling inspector tab.
2 If necessary, open the cogwheel menu and choose Tiling Preferences if you
want to change the document set-up.
3 In the Various panel, select the Export montage instructions check box if
you want the PDF to be created automatically when you submit the job.
OR
Click the Export and Open button to see the PDF immediately.

A PDF document with montage information and a tiling diagram is saved in

the location specified in the Tiling Preferences and then opened in your
default reader.

602 PRESETS
Presets
Presets let you apply the settings you define for a particular image to other
images of the same job or other jobs.
 In the Layout Editor or the Product Editor, open the Presets tool by clicking
the Presets button in the toolbar.
The Presets dialog is displayed with a list of job presets and image presets on
the left which are organized in folders. The list is initially empty. If you select
an existing preset or create a new one you will see an overview of the settings
that can be included in a preset in the panel on the right:
These are the settings that you would normally have to specify in the image
inspectors for a new image. To save time, you can include all or some of the
settings in a preset which can subsequently be used for new images.
Presets toolbar The + button to add a new preset; the cogwheel menu button and a gray triangle
to open/close the settings panel.
Cogwheel menu The following commands are available; the commands are also available by
context-clicking the preset in the list:
 Apply: Applies the selected image preset to the open image

 Apply to New Images: The preset is applied to all images you add to the
job. This option can be used to add image processing automation to
Layout ticket templates (see “Creating Templates for Wide Format Jobs”
on page 639).
 Edit Preset: Unlocks the presets so you can edit them; in this edit mode
you can clear or select the settings check boxes and update the preset to
match the settings of the current image; any changes you make to a preset
in edit mode are saved automatically
 Rename Preset: Lets you edit the name of the selected preset
 Edit Description: Places the cursor in the Description box of the selected
preset
 New Folder: Creates a new folder where you can put new presets
 New Job Preset: Creates a new job preset
 Duplicate Preset: Duplicates the selected preset
 Delete Preset: Deletes the selected preset
 Import Preset: Opens a file browser where you can select a preset for
importing
 Export Preset: Opens a file browser where you can select a preset for
exporting
NOTE: You can only add an image preset using the + button in the toolbar.
Preset filter Enter a value in the box to search for a preset in the list; click the X button to
show all presets.
Presets list In this list you can create folders for Image presets; the first folder is the default
folder and the only folder for all Job presets; image presets can be listed at the top
level or one level lower in folders. Selecting an image preset displays the Image
Settings of the preset in the panel on the right.
Image Settings Theses settings in the panel on the right are only displayed if you have selected
an image preset in the list. The check boxes refer to the settings you can specify
for an image in the Product Editor inspectors, plus the Image Mark Sets and
Color Adjustments. Color Adjustments refer to changes you made in the Preview
application, i.e. saturation, contrast, curves.

604 PRESETS
Include None/Include All Buttons are enabled in edit mode. Use them to select all or none of the check
boxes and include or omit the settings as specified for the current image in the
selected preset.
Update Changed Button enabled in edit mode. Click to update the selected preset to match any
changes made to the settings of the current image and which are included in
your preset.
 Create image presets

1 Open the image whose settings you want to save as a preset in the Product
Editor. This can be an image with bleed, canvas extensions and grommets,
tiling, a step & repeat pattern, etc. as specified in the inspectors.
2 Open the Presets tool.
3 Click the + button (Add Preset) in the Presets toolbar.
The presets are unlocked and a new image preset appears in the list at the
highest level. If you want to create the preset in a folder, select the folder
before clicking the + button.
4 Enter a name for your new image preset.
In the Image Settings panel on the right, select the check boxes for the
settings you want to include in the preset. You can also use the Include All or
Include None buttons.
5 Enter a short description for the preset in the Description panel under the list.
6 Click the Update Changed button to confirm your preset.
7 Close the Presets tool.
8 Apply the Preset to a new image to test your preset.
 Apply image presets

You can apply an image preset in the Product Editor or in the Layout Editor. An
existing preset can also be applied in a Layout Hot Ticket.
1 In the Product Editor, open the image to which you want to apply a preset.
3 Select a preset and check the Image Settings in the panel on the right.

4 Open the cogwheel menu and choose Apply to apply the settings to the
image.
The image settings (bleed, canvas extensions, tiling scheme, etc.) are applied
to the image.
OR
1 In the Layout Editor, select the image you want to apply the preset to in the
Product panel.
3 Select a preset and check the Image Settings in the right panel.
4 Open the cogwheel menu and choose Apply to apply the settings to the
image.
The settings are applied to the image without opening the Product Editor.
You will see the result of tiling immediately in the Product panel and when
you place the image on a sheet.
NOTE: If an image has already been edited in the Product Editor, the preset
replaces these existing setting and adds settings which are not yet specified
for the image.
 Update a preset
1 Open the image which has the required settings in the Product Editor.
3 Select the preset you want to update and unlock the settings or choose Edit
Preset on the cogwheel menu.
4 You can make further changes with the inspectors if you want and/or select
or clear the check boxes in the Image Settings panel.
5 Click the Update Changed button to include the changes in the preset.
6 Apply the Preset to a new image to test your preset.

606 TILES IN THE LAYOUT EDITOR
Tiles in the Layout Editor

The tiles of a tiled image appear as individual images in the Product panel of the
Layout Editor. They form a group of images enclosed in a light blue box together
with the master image. Tiles can be placed on sheets just like other images by
dragging and dropping, or using the Auto Layout feature. Selecting the master
images automatically selects all the tiles and places them on the sheet.
1
2
1 Instances of an image on all the sheets of a job

2 Tile number: e.g. 6/15: tile number 6 of a total of 15 tiles
3 Position in the montage scheme: R2C1: Row 2; Column 1
4 Tile size
 Expand or collapse a tiled image

1 To expand a tiled image and see the individual tiles in the Product panel,
context-click the tiled image and choose Expand Tiles.
2 To collapse the tiles of a tiled image, context-click a tile or the master image
and choose Collapse Tiles, or double-click the master image.

Figure 10.52: Tiles expanded in the Product panel of the Layout Editor

608 DESIGN AND ARTWORK PRODUCTS
Design and Artwork Products

So-called packaging products generally combine a design and artwork: the
contours of the design are filled with the artwork. The product design is defined
by spot colors in a PDF file or the design paths in a CAD file. The artwork image
can be aligned manually or snapped to a path in the design.
 Snap artwork to the product design

1 Click the artwork to reveal the known paths (spot colors) in the artwork.
The known paths appear in the Snap using drop-down list above the Product
pane.
2 Choose a spot color and the Product Editor will attempt to align the paths of
the selected color with the contour of the design.
If the artwork cannot be aligned with the design, its position does not change
and a warning icon is displayed above the drop-down and in the Sources
panel of the Product Inspector.
 Edit design paths

You can use the Path Editor inspector to edit the paths of a product design – not
the paths in the artwork. Go to the Path Inspector for this.
Related topics: • Working with CAD Layouts on page 547

• Paths Inspector on page 584

CHAPTER
11 Monitoring and
Configuring Your System
This section describes how you can monitor and configure the Apogee System
from the System Overview window.
 System Overview Window ............................................................................. 610

 Hardware Pane ..................................................................................................... 611
 Hardware System Scaleability ................................................................ 611
 Activity Monitoring ..................................................................................... 612
 Task Processor Pane .......................................................................................... 613
 Managing your Task Processors ............................................................. 613
 Monitoring your Task Processors .......................................................... 616
 Grouping Task Processors for Load Balancing .................................. 624
 Resources Pane ................................................................................................... 625
 Apogee System Configuration ................................................................ 625
 Job Housekeeping ....................................................................................... 628
 Logging ........................................................................................................... 630
 Templates ....................................................................................................... 633
 Working with Template Categories ...................................................... 634
 Working with Ticket Templates ............................................................. 635
 Page Sizes ...................................................................................................... 640
 Products .......................................................................................................... 641
 Sheet Sizes .................................................................................................... 641
 StoreFront ....................................................................................................... 642
 Imposition ...................................................................................................... 642
 Users ................................................................................................................. 645
 Accounts ......................................................................................................... 649
 JDF Server ...................................................................................................... 650
 Disk Storage .................................................................................................. 657
 Configuring Your Task Processors ......................................................... 663
 Managing Parameter Sets ........................................................................ 664
 Managing Resources .................................................................................. 667
609
610 SYSTEM OVERVIEW WINDOW
System Overview Window

The System Overview is one of the three main windows of the Apogee Client. It
provides an overview of the overall configuration of your Apogee System and the
Hardware System(s) running the system.
The System Overview is divided into 3 panes:
 Hardware Pane
 Task Processor Pane
 Resources Pane
Use this window primarily for:
 Configuring the Task Processors
 Creating and editing Parameter Sets for the Task Processors.
 Monitoring Task Processor activities
NOTE: Task Processor configuration is for service engineers only. However, the
Press can be configured by an administrator.

11 MONITORING AND CONFIGURING YOUR SYSTEM 611
Hardware Pane
This pane displays the Apogee System icon and one or more Hardware System
icons.
 The Apogee System stands for the entire software system running on one or
more Hardware Systems. When you click the Apogee System icon, you will
see all of the Task Processors available for the entire Apogee System. In the
Resources pane, you will see icons for Apogee System Configuration, Job
Housekeeping, Logging, Templates, Accounts, etc.
 Next to the System icon, Apogee displays the Hardware System(s) running
the Apogee software. There is always at least one Hardware System icon
which corresponds to the main Windows 2003/2008 server on which the
Apogee System was installed. If, during installation, the Apogee System
processes were distributed over additional “satellite” hardware systems, you
will see the corresponding Hardware System icons (see “Hardware System
Scaleability” on page 611).
Hardware System To provide faster and more efficient use of tasks and resources, your Apogee
System processes may be distributed over 2 or more physical hardware systems.
Scaleability In this case, you will see additional “satellite” Hardware System icons in the
Hardware pane, each one corresponding to a physical system. One of the
Hardware Systems is highlighted in bold: This is the main Hardware System,
which is running the “core” Apogee System software.
If you select one of these icons, you will see the Task Processors that are available
on the selected Hardware System. All the other Task Processors will appear
faded out. By selecting each of the Hardware Systems in turn, you can see which
Task Processors are installed on which systems.
Similarly, if you select a Task Processor, you will see to which Hardware System
it belongs: The other Hardware Systems will appear faded out.
You may also see that some Task Processors (such as Normalize and Render) are
duplicated on two or more Hardware Systems. This can reduce the processing
burden on a single Hardware System, and greatly increase the speed with which
jobs are handled by the Apogee System.

612 HARDWARE PANE
For information on setting up Satellite servers, refer to the Apogee Installation

Guide.
Activity Monitoring Your Apogee System can run certain maintenance tasks, such as Job House-
keeping, in the background. These tasks may slow down the processing of jobs.
This kind of activity is indicated with a green border around the main or satellite
icons in the hardware pane and implies that processing speed may be affected.
 Double-click a hardware icon to open the Activity Monitor dialog and display
a list of current tasks and components.

Task Processor Pane

This pane displays all of the available Task Processors for the selected hardware
system. You can also check the Task Processors’s activity by double-clicking its
icon.
The Task Processors are divided into four categories:
 Input Task Processors
 Processing Task Processors
 Output Task Processors
 Print Task Processors
Managing your This section explains how you can manage your Task Processors from the
System Overview window. You can start, stop and restart any Task Processor.
Task Processors Stopping a Task Processor (if you are not planning to use it) will improve system
performance, since Apogee will then require fewer system resources. Output
Task Processors need to be restarted if you change the configuration of the
associated output device.
Additionally, Task Processors associated with physical output devices can be put
online and offline. You can also create a PostScript Printer Description file (PPD)
containing all job-related information specific for your output environment.
TIP: In Apogee, you can create PPD files for different PS Printer Drivers for
Macintosh as well as PC. You can further specify some content-related options.
See also “Monitoring your Task Processors” on page 616.
 To start a Task Processor

1 In the System Overview, locate the inactive Task Processor.
When a Task Processor is inactive, the icon will have static horizontal stripes
running through it.
2 Context-click the Task Processor, and select Start from the context menu.

614 TASK PROCESSOR PANE
 To stop a Task Processor

1 In the System Overview, locate the active Task Processor.
2 Context-click the Task Processor, and select Stop from the context menu.
The Task Processor will stop after a few moments. When the Task Processor
has stopped, the icon will have static horizontal stripes running through it.
You can re-activate it by context-clicking it and selecting Start from the

context menu.
 To restart a Task Processor

1 In the System Overview, locate the active Task Processor.
2 Context-click the Task Processor, and select Restart from the context menu.
While the Task Processor is restarting, the icon will have moving horizontal
stripes running through it.
 To put an Output Task Processor offline

1 In the System Overview, locate the active Output Task Processor.
2 Context-click the Task Processor, and select Put Offline from the context
menu.
The Task Processor is colored blue to indicate that it is offline.
 To put an Output Task Processor online

1 In the System Overview, locate the offline Output Task Processor.
Offline Task Processors are colored blue.

2 Context-click the Task Processor, and select Put Online from the context
menu.
The Task Processor comes back online, and the blue shading is removed from
the icon.
 To create a PPD file for an Output Device

1 In the System Overview Window, select the output device for which you want
to create a PPD file.
2 Choose File > Export Output Device PPD. You can also directly context-click
on the Output Device and select Export Output Device PPD from the context
menu.
The PPD User Options dialog box appears.
3 Specify the necessary Format and Content options as specified in “PPD User
Options” on page 622.
4 Click OK to create the PPD file.
 To print an exposure test page for platesetters
When you first start to use your platesetters, you should submit an Exposure Test
job to check the output and to select the engine’s best exposure settings. You
should continue periodically to submit Exposure Test jobs to make sure that the
engine is still producing good quality output.
NOTE: This option is currently supported only for the Galileo and XCalibur
platesetters.
1 Select the System Overview.
2 Select your platesetter.
3 Double-click the Linearization Curves icon in the Resources pane.
The Linearization Curves overview appears. In the upper pane, you see all of
the available Linearization Curves for the selected platesetter.
4 Click the Exposure... button (only available for Galileo and XCalibur
platesetters).
The Exposure Parameters dialog box is displayed. The name of the selected
engine is displayed in the title bar of the dialog box.

You will see a list of resolutions at which you can print an exposure test. For
each resolution, you will see default frequency and exposure settings. If you
wish, you can change these default settings.
5 To change the frequency and exposure settings:
 Select a resolution, and click the Edit button:
The Resolution Test Settings dialog box is displayed.
 Click the Frequency list, and select one of the available frequencies.
 Enter an Exposure setting.
 Click OK to return to the Exposure Test dialog box.
6 Use the check boxes in the Print column to select one or more of the available
resolution settings.
7 Click the Print button.
The Exposure Test dialog box is closed, and test pages are printed out on the
engine at the selected resolutions. The print date is automatically added to
the test pages.
In the Job List, all exposure tests are grouped under the same order number
called “Exposure Test”. The job name of the test file to be printed is called
“<device name> Exposure Test”.
Monitoring your The current status of a Task Processor is indicated by the appearance of the Task
Processor icon. The icon may be adapted with a series of different colors and
Task Processors overlays which indicate the hardware or component status of the Task
Processor.
Output Task Processor Hardware Status

The hardware status is the status reported by the physical output engine.
When a physical output device is not idle (i.e. able to communicate and process
jobs), it will be in one of the following states:

Paused: The output engine is able to communicate, but cannot process any tasks. A user
interaction has taken place on the device itself to trigger this status.
Disconnected: The output engine's cable has been unplugged.
Warning: The hardware engine requires attention (e.g. ink low), but can still receive tasks.
This platesetter is managed by the PlateMaker Client. The yellow ‘sun’ patch indicates that
the device is in attended state (i.e. A user is logged in to the PlateMaker Client).
This platesetter is managed by the PlateMaker Client. The gray ‘moon’ patch indicates that
the device is in unattended state (i.e. no one is logged in to the PlateMaker Client).
Error: The hardware engine requires attention - it cannot continue to receive and process
tasks until the problem has been resolved (e.g. no ink).
In each of the above cases, the relevant status icon will appear as an overlay on
the Output Task Processor.
NOTE: The hardware status is not the same as the component status. For
example, the component status may be online and ready while the physical
hardware engine is actually disconnected or paused.
Task Processor Component (Software) Status

This reflects the status of the connection between the Apogee System and the
Apogee Task Processor component. As such this is a software setting which has
no relation to the actual physical status of the associated output device.
NOTE: The component status is not the same as the hardware status. For
example, the component status may be online and ready while the physical
hardware engine is actually disconnected or paused.
The Task Processor component status is indicated visually as described below.

The Task Processor is ready, and is currently idle.
The Task Processor turns green when it is processing a task. For example, the
Avantra Task Processor is busy processing a separation.
The Task Processor turns red if a processing error occurs. In this case an error
notification is sent to the Message Board, explaining the nature of the error.
The Task Processor turns blue if it is offline.
When the Task Processor has been stopped (inactive), the icon will have hori-
zontal stripes running through it. You can re-activate it by context-clicking on
the icon and selecting Start from the context menu.
The Task Processor is starting up (moving horizontal stripes).
The Task Processor is locked, because you do not have a license to use it.
A purple arrow is attached to the Task Processor icon if:

• You have a remote license. This means that this Task Processor is not
licensed to execute tasks: These tasks are processed remotely on another
Apogee System. However, you can use this Task Processor to specify the set-
tings in the Production Plan.
• A remote proofer is installed (as specified in the installer). The remote proofer
is combined with the Remote Proofer Controller Task Processor.
These status indicators can also be seen in the Output Device List, in the Job and
Hot Ticket Managers.
Activity Window
The Activity window consists of two panes and a toolbar:
 In the upper pane, you can see the selected Task Processor icon, and a brief
summary of the Task Processor’s activity. This indicates how many tasks are
being processed or are waiting to be processed, and the number of errors.
The status of the Task Processor is indicated by the color of the icon. For more

information on icon color codings see “Task Processor Component

(Software) Status” on page 617.
You can see which tasks are currently being processed by the selected Task
Processor. The progress of the activity is shown by a progress indicator. If
more Task Processors of the same type are installed on the Apogee System
(e.g., two Normalizers or two Renderers), then you will see the activity for all
Task Processors of this type.
NOTE: If you are viewing the activity of an output Task Processor with
ganging enabled (such as a Sherpa proofer), you will also see a Flush button.
If you click this button, Apogee will stop collecting input (ganging) and start
printing the available pages (see “To flush job results” on page 622). Apogee
will also indicate which type of media is currently loaded.
 In the lower pane, you can see the tasks that are waiting to be processed. This
information is displayed in three columns:
 Status icon: Indicates the current status of the task (waiting for media,
waiting for a soft proof, etc.). For a description of all these icons, see “Job
Status Icons” on page 151.
 Job: Lists the jobs, and the individual tasks within each job.
 Destination/Media: Indicates to which output device the job will be sent.

If you are monitoring the activity of an output device, this column will
display the type and size of the media that is being used.
By default, the tasks are sorted according to status. You can sort the list
according to job name or job status, in ascending or descending order, by
clicking the appropriate column title. You can also re-order the tasks by
dragging and dropping.
 On the left side of the window, you can see the Activity Toolbar.

Activity Toolbar
The Activity toolbar includes the following buttons that allow you to manage the
activity of the selected Task Processor:
Continue processing a selected result that is on hold.
Put the selected activity on hold.
NOTE: The buttons you actually see depend on the current status of the task you
are viewing.
 To check Task Processor activity

1 In the System Overview, locate the active Task Processor. It has changed
color or is surrounded by a colored glow.
2 Double-click the Task Processor icon.
The Task Processor’s Activity window appears, where you can monitor the
activity of Task Processors. The Activity window shows:
 The jobs that are currently being processed
 The jobs that are waiting to be processed

 Any errors that have occurred
 To abort a task
1 In the System Overview, locate an active Task Processor.
An active Task Processor will have changed color, or is surrounded by a

colored glow.
The Task Processor’s Activity window appears.
In the middle pane, you can see which jobs are currently being processed.
The progress of the activity is shown by a progress indicator.
3 To abort the current task, click the Abort button to the right of the progress
bar:
The selected task is immediately aborted.
 To hold a task
1 In the System Overview, locate the Task Processor which has scheduled the
task you want to put on hold.
The Task Processor’s Activity window appears.
3 Select the task you want to hold.
4 Click the Hold button.
The selected task is put on hold. You will see the following status icon next to
the task name:
 To resume a task that is on hold

1 In the System Overview, locate the Task Processor with a task on hold.
The Task Processor’s Activity window appears. Any tasks on hold will have
the following status icon next to the task name:

3 Select the task on hold.
4 Click the Continue button.
The selected task resumes processing.
 To flush job results

1 In the System Overview, locate an active output Task Processor.
NOTE: This must be a Proofer device.
An active output Task Processor will have changed color, or is surrounded by

a colored glow.
The Task Processor’s Activity window appears. If you are viewing the activity
of an output Task Processor with ganging enabled (such as a Sherpa proofer),
you will see a Flush button.
3 Click Flush.
The selected Task Processor stops it’s current activity, and is forced to
immediately output it’s collected results.
PPD User Options
This dialog box contains the different user options for PPD Format and Content.
PPD Printer Name

Here, you can change the name of the printer in the PPD file.
PPD Format
In the Format tab, you can specify the PS Printer Driver for which you want to
create the PPD file.
Create Windows PPD Files  Adobe PS Printer Driver (PS)
 Microsoft Driver NT (NT)

 Microsoft Driver 2000 (20)
 Microsoft Driver XP (XP)
 Microsoft Driver 2003 (23)

Create Mac PPD Files  Apple LaserWriter/Adobe PS Printer 8.3.X (83)
 Apple LaserWriter 8.4/Adobe PS Printer 8.5 (85)
 Apple LaserWriter/Adobe PS Printer 8.6 (86)
 OSX (10)
Append driver identifica- Select this check box to add the 2-digit printer driver ID (PS, NT, etc.) to the end
tion to file names of the PPD files names.
Keep filename short Select this check box to ensure that the name of the printer does not exceed the
maximum number of characters allowed by Windows.
Use Japanese character Select this check box to enable Japanese character encoding.
encoding
PPD Content
In the Content tab, you can specify some content-related options for the PPD file
by selecting the required check boxes.
Halftones Select this check box to include halftone information in the PPD.
Page Sizes Select the type of page size you want to use:
 Standard page sizes
 Output sizes defined for device
 Both
NOTE: Due to a limitation of the PPD file size, only 58 screens will be visible in
front end applications.
Parameter Sets <output If you would like to use any of the default parameter sets of the output compo-
device> Flow nents specified in the Hot Ticket Production Plan, select the associated check
box. By default, all the check boxes are selected (e.g. - for a TIFF Imagesetter
flow - Normalize, Run List, Impose. Trap, Separate, Render, etc.).

NOTE: This option is only available when creating a PPD for a Hot Ticket.
Related topics: • To create a PPD file for an Output Device on page 615
• Creating a PPD for a Hot Ticket on page 269
Grouping Task If you have several task processors of the same type, you can group these task
processors and subsequently use this group in your production plans. Apogee
Processors for Load automatically chooses the task processor which is available and the most
Balancing suitable for the job, effectively balancing the load applied to these task
processors.
 To group Task Processors

You need at least 2 identical task processors to create a group.
1 In the System Overview, context-click one of the identical task processors

and choose New Group.
The Edit User Group is displayed.
2 Enter a Group Name. You can change this name later if you want.
3 Select the check boxes for the additional Task Processors that you want to
add to the group.
4 Click OK.
The new Task Processor group is displayed with the group icon.
You can now use this group in your production plans.
 To delete/edit a Task Processor group

1 In the System Overview, context-click the Task Processor group you want to
delete or edit.
The Edit User Group is displayed.
2 Choose Delete Group to ungroup the Task Processors and delete the group
OR
3 Choose Edit group to add or remove Task Processors in the group.
4 Click OK.

Resources Pane
The Resources pane displays the resources that are available for the currently
selected System or Task Processor:
 If the Apogee System is selected in the Hardware pane, in the Resources pane
you will see the Configuration, Job Housekeeping, Logging, and Templates
icons. If you have additional options installed, you may also see the Accounts,
JDF Server, and JDF Stripping icons.
 If a Hardware or “Satellite” System is selected in the Hardware pane, you will

see the Disk Storage icon in the Resources pane.
 If a Task Processor is selected, you will see the available Resources for the
selected Task Processor in the Resources pane. These will always include a
Parameter Sets icon, which allows you to create predefined Task Processor
settings.
NOTE: Most of these resources are intended for administrators, and are hidden
to operators.
Apogee System
Configuration
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Configu-
ration icon in the Resources pane.
By double-clicking the Configuration icon, you can access the Apogee System
settings. These settings allow you to specify an e-mail address to which all
system-related messages will be sent.
System Configuration Settings

Double-click the Configuration icon when the Apogee System is selected to
access the Apogee System configuration settings.

626 RESOURCES PANE
Administrator
This tab allows you to specify an e-mail address to which all system-related
notifications will be sent (e.g. “insufficient disk space”).
E-mail messages to Select this check box to enable the e-mail service, and enter an e-mail address in
the box on the right.
Announcement to users Enter text that you want to display as a service message each time a user logs on
to the ProductionCenter application. You can specify a message for internal
users and another for web users.
Mail Server
Sender Name: Specifies the name associated with your e-mail address. When you send
messages, this name appears in the From box of your outgoing messages.
Email address: Specifies the e-mail address that people should use when sending
mail to you at this account. The e-mail address must be in the format
name@company: For example, johndoe@agfa.com.
Mail Server Outgoing mail (SMTP) server: Specifies your SMTP server for outgoing messages.
You can get this information from your internet service provider or LAN
administrator.
Requires secure connection: Specifies whether to use the SSL (Secure Sockets
Layer) security protocol when connecting to this server. The administrator or
internet service provider for the server will indicate if the SSL requirement
exists.
Override default SMTP port: Allows you to specify an SMTP port that will be used
instead of the default SMTP port.
Database Maintenance
This tab allows you to control how Apogee maintains its own database.
Backup You can instruct Apogee to write backups of its system database to a backup disk
or shared volume. This allows you to restore the database in case the main
system fails. The Backup tab controls whether Apogee backs up the system
database, and how and when it does it.
Schedule Full backup: Backs up and optimizes the databases. Full backups are a
costly operation, and you should therefore limit the frequency (the default is
once a day) and run it when production activity is minimal (default at 04:00).
The minimum period for a full backup is once per day.

The Schedule group shows the dates of the last full and incremental backups.
Backup Now: Press this button to perform a full database backup using the saved
configuration (i.e. the configuration stored on the server). You can do this at any
time, regardless of automatic backup schedules. This button is disabled when
there is no backup destination, or when Apogee is currently backing up the
database.
Include ProcessResourceDisk in Full Backup: Backs up system process resources

(in the event of a system crash).
Schedule Incremental backup: Incremental backups are relatively fast, so you

should run them more frequently (the default is every 30 minutes). You may
want to run the incremental backup more frequently (e.g. every 10 minutes) on
very busy systems.
NOTE: You cannot run incremental backups without a full backup schedule.
Backup to: Apogee writes a copy of the backup data to the location (local disk or
shared volume) you define or to the PrintSphere cloud server. If it cannot write
to that location, Apogee notifies you and disables the schedules.
Scratch disk: This is a local disk that Apogee uses during the backup process. You
can select any disk that is local to the core server, and that is not being used as a
backup destination.
Previous backup sets: You can keep a number of full backup sets instead of
keeping only the latest. This allows you to roll back the state of the system
beyond the most recent backup. If you choose to keep only the last one, Apogee
deletes the previous backup set (or sets) after successfully doing a full backup. If
you choose to keep the last ‘n’ sets, Apogee leaves the most recent backups and
purges the older one(s). Any changes to this option come into effect the next
time a full backup is made.
 Delete: Deletes the previous backup set after successfully writing the new
one. Note that this deletes all previous backup sets (in case you switched
from ‘Keep last’ to ‘Delete’).
 Keep last: Keeps the specified number of previous backup sets. Note that the
total number of backup sets is number specified plus one (the current one).
Make sure you have sufficient disk storage!
Optimize The Apogee system database needs periodical maintenance to keep running at
optimum speed. Some of these maintenance tasks lock the database during a
longer period of time, during which no processing or user interaction with the

628 RESOURCES PANE
system is possible. You should therefore schedule these tasks during a period of
low production activity.
There are two types of optimization: a full optimization and a quick one. A full
database optimization is the most extensive one. It completely rebuilds all
database index tables. A quick optimization also rebuilds the index tables, but in
smaller chunks. It does not lock the complete database, and therefore the impact
on the system is barely noticeable. It can be run quite frequently, even in full
production.
Schedule Optimize at: specify the time of day at which the optimization runs. You
cannot switch off optimization because it is critical to the functioning of the
system.
Optimize Now: Click the Optimize Now button to perform an automatic database
optimization. You can do this at any time.
Do Quick Optimization when fragmentation exceeds: Specify a fragmentation

percentage above which a quick optimization should be run.
Do Full Optimization when fragmentation exceeds: Specify a fragmentation

percentage above which a full optimization should be run.
ProductionCenter
ProductionCenter URL The URL of the printer’s ProductionCenter portal.
All Printer Company users Select this check box to allow users with the View Only role to see jobs in the
can see all jobs WebApproval service.
Job Housekeeping
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Job
Housekeeping icon in the Resources pane.
By double-clicking the Job Housekeeping icon, you can access the housekeeping
options for archiving and deleting jobs. These tasks are performed on a daily or
weekly basis, and cannot be switched off. You can specify, however, the exact
time at which the archiving is carried out.

Whether a job will be archived or not, can be set in the Archive after finish option
in the Options tab of the Ticket Editor. During the archiving, Apogee examines
each job and archives the eligible ones.
NOTE: Preferably, you should schedule housekeeping activities at night, so that

they do not interfere with your processing tasks.
Job Housekeeping Settings
Double-click the Job Housekeeping icon to access the Housekeeping settings for
a selected System.
Run Job List maintenance
Choose when Apogee runs the maintenance tasks by selecting the appropriate
options from the lists:
Every: Specify how frequently Job List maintenance should be performed. This may be
every day, or on a specific day of the week.
at: Specify the time of day when the Job List maintenance can start. You can either
enter a time, or use the up and down arrows to select one.
Do Maintenance Now... Click this button to run all job maintenance tasks without waiting for the sched-
uled time. Note, however, that deleted jobs will only be cleaned up if you have
set the ‘Keep deleted jobs...’ option to 0.
1- Archive jobs
Save job archive as Specify the directory in which job archives and dumps are saved. You need to
specify the exact path name and use variables to guarantee an unique file name.
You can also use the browse button next to the field to browse for the required
location. This location must be a shared disk accessible by both Apogee Client
and Server. For more information on variables, refer to System Variables.
Include Job Log Check this option to also archive the Job Log (selected by default).
When older archive exists Select what to do if the job was archived previously:
Create new archive: Create a new archive and leave the old one untouched.
Update existing archive: Update the existing archive.

630 RESOURCES PANE
Post-process archive with Select to run a custom external script after the archive has been written. You
must provide the full path name to the script.
Options Specify any optional extra arguments that should be passed to the script.
2 - Delete jobs
When you run the Job List maintenance, Apogee automatically deletes all
finished jobs that are marked for deletion, and that have exceeded their “keep”
period, as specified in the Options tab of the Job Ticket (see “When Job is
Finished” on page 287). However, although it deletes all of the job’s documents,
processing results, and processing parameters, it does not delete the job descrip-
tion and log entry. The job is only completely removed using the options in
“Clean up deleted jobs”.
3 - Clean up deleted jobs

Keep deleted jobs for at Specify how long you want to keep deleted jobs by typing a number in the field
least and selecting the time unit (hours, days, weeks) in the list next to it.
If you do not want to keep deleted jobs, enter 0.
Restore Defaults Click the Restore Defaults button to restore all settings to their factory defaults.
Logging
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Logging
icon in the Resources pane.
By double-clicking the Logging icon, you can access the settings related to the
Logging activity of Apogee. These allow you to control different aspects of the
logging such as the logging schedule, export directory for log files or the items to
be logged.
Logging Settings
Select the Apogee System, and double-click the Logging icon to access the
Logging settings.

System Log
This tab allows you to specify which events should be logged and when they
should be removed from the system.
Events to log Select the appropriate check box to include the required events in the log:
User interactions (start, stop, restart, put online, put offline): This includes Task
Processor statuses such as start, shutdown, hold or resume.
Errors & warnings: This includes the error status of Task Processors, device
statuses such as error, online and offline and non-informative notifications with
their reply.
Informative messages: Important job-related actions such as job editing.
Major Task Processor events (start, stop): This includes statuses such as boot or
shutdown of Task Processors.
Housekeeping tasks: This refers to cleanup tasks such as archiving or deleting.
Log Clean up Choose a schedule for cleaning up the system log:
Every: Specify how frequently the clean up should be performed. This may be
every day, or a specific day of the week.
at: Specify the time at which the cleanup can start. You can either type the time
or use the up and down arrows to choose it.
Clean Up Now: Click this button the clean up the System Log immediately,
without waiting for the scheduled time. This opens the Clean System Log dialog
box. Here you can have all the events instantly removed regardless of their age,
or have them first exported and removed afterwards.
Keep log of system events for at least: Specify the period during which a System
event is kept in the log. Once it has exceeded this limit, Apogee will remove the
event during the daily cleanup. The minimum period is 1 day.
Specify the period by typing the number in the field and selecting the time unit
(days, weeks) in the field next to it. You can use the up and down arrows to select
the time unit.

632 RESOURCES PANE
Export events before deletion: Select this check box if you want Apogee to export
a copy of the events. This way, you can guarantee that no events will be lost or
will appear twice. If you do not select this check box, Apogee will keep all the
events, until you clean it manually or switch the option back on.
Export to: Enter the path and filename to be used for exporting the System log.
Apogee exports the log after discarding the system events. You can also use the
Browse button next to the field to locate the required directory.
There are three possibilities when exporting:
 If the log file already exists, Apogee will try to append the events to the file.
 If it cannot append the events, it will create a new file with a sequence
number.
 If there is no existing file, Apogee will create a completely new file.
Job Log
This tab allows you to specify which job events should be logged and when they
should be removed from the system.
Events to log Select the appropriate check box to include the required events in the log:
Media usage: Events related to the use of resources such as film and plate or
proofing media.

parameter sets.
Color Management: Events related to input document color management, press

and proofing output color management and spot colors.
reject.
User interactions: Job related events such as resume, rush, edit. Task Processor
related events such as hold, resume, rush. Result related events such as remake.
Errors & warnings: Non-informative notifications and their replies.
Informative messages: Important job-related actions such as job editing.

Parameter updates by Task Processor: when a Task Processor changes the job
settings.
Task Life cycle events (created, started, finished): When a job is created, has
started or is finished.
Export job log Export the job log when a job finishes: Select this check box if you want Apogee to
export the job log. This will happen shortly after the job has finished and not
during the daily cleanup.
If you remake a job after it has finished, Apogee will append the new events to
the existing exported log. If the log has been removed, it will create a new one.
Export as: Enter the path and filename to be used for exporting the Job log. You
can also use the Browse button next to the field to locate the required directory.
There are three possibilities when exporting:
 If the log file already exists, Apogee will try to append the events to the file.
 If it cannot append the events, it will create a new file with a sequence
number.
 If there is no existing file, Apogee will create a completely new file.

Restore Defaults Click the Restore Defaults button to restore all settings to their factory defaults.
Templates
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the
Templates icon in the Resources pane.
By double-clicking the Templates icon, you can access the Templates dialog box,
which allows you to create, edit and manage the different types of templates
(Job Tickets, Hot Tickets, Layout Tickets and Layout Hot Tickets). From here,
you can edit an existing template and save it with a different name. This is very
useful when you regularly need to create tickets for similar jobs. You can start
from an existing template and make any necessary changes without having to
create a completely new ticket from scratch. You can also create new templates
from the Ticket Editor using the File > Save as Template command.

634 RESOURCES PANE
For more information on creating Tickets, see “Creating and Editing Tickets” on
page 277. You can save the Ticket Templates in Template Folders. In this way,
you can for instance group Ticket Templates that you use for a specific customer
or print job.
Related topics: • Checking Hot Ticket and Ticket Template Consistency on page 270
Working with Template Categories are folders in which you can save your newly created Ticket
Templates. You can group your Ticket Templates in different Template catego-
Template ries for specific types of jobs.
Categories
 To manage your template categories

1 In the System Overview, select the Apogee System icon in the Hardware
pane.
2 Double-click the Ticket Templates Resources icon in the Resources pane.
The Templates dialog box appears.
3 Select either the Job Tickets tab or the Hot Tickets tab depending on for
which type of Ticket Template you want to create or edit a Template
Category.
4 In the Category list, do one of the following:
 Click the New button to create a new Template category, type the name
of the new category and click OK.
 Select a Template category and click the Edit button to edit it. Rename the
Template category and click OK.
 Select the Template category that you want to delete and press Delete or
click the Delete button. Click ‘Yes’ to confirm the deletion.

5 Close the Ticket Templates dialog box.
Related topics: • Working with Ticket Templates on page 635
Working with In the Ticket Templates Resources category, you can edit, delete or set a Ticket
Template as default.
Ticket Templates
 To manage your Ticket Templates

1 In the System Overview, select the Apogee System icon in the Hardware
pane.
2 Double-click the Templates Resources icon in the Resources pane.
The Templates dialog box appears.
3 Select either the Job Tickets tab or the Hot Tickets tab depending on which
type of Ticket Template you want to edit.
4 To select the Ticket Template that you want to edit, delete or set as default,
do one of the following:
 Select the Ticket Template category in the Category list and select the
Ticket Template that you want to edit.
 Select All in the Category list to view all of the Ticket Templates and select
the Ticket Template that you want to edit.
 Click the Edit button to edit the Template in the Ticket Editor. Choose
File > Save as Template and specify in which folder you want to save the
Template. You can also save it under a new name. Click Save to save it.

636 RESOURCES PANE
 Click the Default button to set the Template as default. It will appear in
bold in the Ticket Template list.
 Delete the Template by pressing Delete or clicking the Delete button.

Confirm the deletion.
6 Close the Ticket Template dialog box.
 To export a Ticket Template

You may want to export a template for use by another Apogee System, or in
order to have a temporary backup file.
NOTE: You can only import/export all ticket templates for a specific category.
1 In the Templates dialog box, select a template from the list and click the
Export button.
2 Locate the folder to which you want to export the template, and click OK.
The template is exported as a MIME format file (*.mime).
 To import a Ticket Template

1 In the Templates dialog box, click the Import button.
2 Locate the folder which contains the template you want to import.
This will be a template that was previously exported. This file will be in MIME
format (*.mime).
3 Click Open.
The imported template is displayed in the list.
Related topics: • Checking Hot Ticket and Ticket Template Consistency on page 270

Creating WebApproval and StoreFront Templates

If your system is set up to use the WebApproval service, the ProductionCenter
application and/or the StoreFront application, you can prepare special
templates to create jobs for these workflows.
These templates are indicated with special icons in the Template list of the
Templates resource and the Templates dialog when creating a new job.
1
2
3
1 A template to create WebApproval jobs

2 A template to create Self-Service jobs in the ProductionCenter application
3 A template to create jobs automatically from data downloaded via the StoreFront application
 Create a ticket template for WebApproval jobs

WebApproval jobs allow remote users to upload files and/or approve the pages
of the job.
1 Create, set up and submit a new WebApproval job
OR
Select an existing WebApproval job in the Job List.
NOTE: WebApproval jobs have a web-enabled Hot Folder and a Web Proof
action in the plan.
2 Choose File > Save As Template.
3 Choose a Category and enter a Name and Description.
Optionally, you can make the ticket available for StoreFront.
4 Click Save.
When you choose File > New from Templates you will see the new template
has been added to the list and it is indicated with the WebApproval icon.

638 RESOURCES PANE
The icons are also visible in the Template list of the Templates resource.
 Create a ticket template for ProductionCenter (Self-Service) jobs

An Apogee job can be created in the ProductionCenter web portal application.
These so-called Self-Service jobs are created from ticket templates that you
prepare in Apogee.
1 Create a ticket template for a WebApproval job as described above.
NOTE: WebApproval jobs have a web-enabled Hot Folder and a Web Proof
action in the plan.
2 When you save the template, select the Make available to

ProductionCenter check box and choose one of the following options:
 Visible to all customers: All your companies (customers) will see and be
able to use the template when they start a new job in ProductionCenter.
 Visible to <selected company>: Only the specified company will be able

to use the template.
has been added to the list and it is indicated with two icons: the WebApproval
icon and the Apogee icon.
The icons are also visible in the Template list of the Templates resource.
 Create a StoreFront ticket template

A special job ticket template is required to create a job from the data downloaded
automatically from the StoreFront application. Read the StoreFront Help for
more information.
1 Create, set up and submit a new job
OR
Select an existing job in the Job List.
2 Choose File > Save As Template.

3 In the Templates dialog, select the Make available to StoreFront check box.
4 Choose a Category and enter a Name and Description.
5 Click Save.
has been added to the list and it is indicated with the StoreFront icon.
The icon is also visible in the Template list of the Templates resource.
NOTE: The StoreFront template can also be used for other jobs.
Creating Templates for Wide Format Jobs

When creating a template from a layout job, you have extra options to set the
template as default for devices and for new jobs. Image processing automation
can be achieved using presets (see “Presets” on page 602).
 Create a ticket template for Wide Format jobs

1 Create and set up a Wide Format job.
OR
Select an existing Wide Format job in the Job List.
2 Choose Save As Template from the File menu or the context menu.
3 Enter a name for the template in the Name box and choose a category.
You can select the following options:
 Use as default template for device: the new template will be used when
creating wide-format jobs starting from a particular device (context-
clicking a S&D device in the Jobs window or dropping files on the device).
 Use as default template for new jobs: the new template will be used when
using the New Wide Format Job command on the File menu or context
menu.

640 RESOURCES PANE
 Make available to StoreFront: Select this check box if you want to use this
ticket template to process orders in the StoreFront application. The ticket
template will appear in the Default Ticket Template drop-down list.
and the following check box:
 Include all frames, sheet and print layouts: all these settings, including
named frames, will be applied to the new Wide Format job.
4 Click Save.
Page Sizes
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Page
Sizes icon in the Resources pane. By double-clicking this icon, you can access the
Page Sizes settings. This allows you to specify page size resources for use in
Multi-part jobs (as a property of a part).
Page Sizes Settings
Name
The name with which this particular page size is known. If you leave it empty,
the page size is shown using the dimensions (w x h).
Page Size
The width and height of the page (cannot be blank or 0).
You can specify units by entering them explicitly. Apogee defaults to the
standard units (mm) if you do not provide them.
You can create, edit or delete Page Sizes using the supplied buttons.

Products
The Products resource displays an overview of the Product presets which are
available in the Product Inspector in the Products tab of the Job Ticket Editor.
Refer to “Product Inspector” on page 295 for a description of the settings and
Working with Apogee Impose on page 365.
Sheet Sizes
The Sheet Sizes resource allows you to specify Press Sheet sizes for use with
Apogee Impose, as a property of a Press Sheet.
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Sheet
Sizes icon in the Resources pane. By double-clicking this icon, you can access the
Sheet Sizes settings.
Sheet Sizes Settings
Name
The name with which this particular sheet size is known. If you leave it empty,
the sheet size has no name so you must name it.
Sheet Size
The width and height of the page. For web production, leave the height blank or
zero and these sizes will be picked up for web presses.
You can specify units by entering them explicitly. Apogee defaults to the
standard units (mm) if you do not provide them.
You can create, edit or delete Sheet Sizes in the usual way.

642 RESOURCES PANE
StoreFront
The StoreFront resource allows you to set up the connection between Apogee
and StoreFront. Apogee polls the StoreFront server for new orders, downloads
the order items and automatically creates jobs for further processing. For more
information on StoreFront, refer to the application’s Online Help.
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Store-
Front icon in the Resources pane. By double-clicking this icon, you can access the
StoreFront settings.
StoreFront Settings
Enable StoreFront Polling

Select this check box to activate the StoreFront service and let Apogee poll the
StoreFront server. This option must be selected to edit the settings.
Connection
URL The default URL is www.apogeestorefront.com. This may need to be modified,
for example, depending on your location.
User Name/Password Enter your user name and password for the StoreFront server.
Download Poll Time Set how often you want to check for new order items on the StoreFront server.
The minimum polling time is every 15 minutes.
Imposition
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Imposi-
tion icon in the Resources pane. By double-clicking the Imposition icon, you can
access the Imposition settings. This allows you to specify some general and “split
for proof” settings

Imposition Settings
General
Template path Defines the location containing the Imposition templates.
Marks path Defines the location of the folder containing the Imposition marks.
Extra PJTF Marks path Defines the location of a folder containing extra PJTF files.
Marks Select which marks to print, and how to print them.
Print crop marks for bleed bounds: Print crop marks at the bounds of the bleed
area.
Print side center marks: Print center marks for each side.
Print punch mark: Print a punch mark.
Print fold marks with white knockout: Print fold marks with a white knock-out.
This makes the marks more visible when the underlying content is dark.
Print crop marks with white knockout: Print crop with a white knock-out.
Move crop marks when shingling: Move the crop marks together with the pages
when using shingling. When you deselect it, the crop marks keep their original
position, as if no shingling was applied.
NOTE: This option also affects the moving of crop marks for bleed bounds.
Print crop and fold marks: These options determines in which layer Apogee prints
crop and fold marks.
 On top: The crop and fold marks appear on top of everything, including pages
and those marks that are set to “Bring to front”.
 On top of pages, below “Bring to front” marks: The crop and fold marks
appear on top of everything, excluding those marks that are set to “Bring to
front”. The crop and fold marks appear on top of the pages (most likely the
bleed area), but they can be covered by important marks such as a color bar.
In order to be effective, you should set only important marks to “Bring to
front”.

644 RESOURCES PANE
 Below pages: Crop and fold marks appear below pages and marks. Select this
option if you want pages and their bleed area to cover the crop and fold
marks.
Text mark font Set the default font for text marks.
Default line width Set the default line width for marks.
Clip marks outside sheet Sets the distance outside the press sheet to clip marks.
Interpret $SIDE as Defines how Apogee replaces the $SIDE variable, found as marks on imposition
templates
Front & Back: Select this option for the Apogee convention: Front for front sides,
Back for back sides.
A, B, C, D: Select this option for the traditional imposition replacement (A, B,

and so on). This system assigns a unique identifier to each side, even on multi-
web presses.
Split for proof
Split for Proof disassembles the main imposition layout and reassembles it so the
product can be proofed on a small (e.g. an A3) laser printer, maintaining the
reader order of pages and the layout of the marks of the main imposition
scheme. Split for Proof re-arranges the product as a set of 2-up saddle-stitch
sheets. This arrangement allows for easy gathering and folding, with no cutting
needed. Alternatively, you can have a 1-up arrangement.
Limit number of sheets for You can opt to limit the number of sheets that you need to fold together. The
folding bigger the stack, the harder it is to fold. This option limits the number of sheets
in a stack to the specified amount, making the folding easier. Note that this
modifies the page arrangement: You need to stack and fold the correct number
of sheets, otherwise the pages will not be in the correct reader order.
NOTE: This option is only applicable when you use 2-up Split for Proof.
Limit mark-zone around You can limit the page area to be proofed to the page itself and a zone that
pages contains the marks (except for the spine in case of 2-up). The area is thus the
pages trim box expanded with the specified amount. If you switch it off, the
boundaries of the page area are determined only by the output size.
This option is especially useful for preventing pages from being scaled down too
much when using an imposition with large sheet or plate margins.

Users
The Users resource is where users are granted rights to Apogee. When a user logs
on, the roles assigned to the user in this resource are automatically activated.
Select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane to see the Users icon in the
Resources pane. Double-click the Users icon to open the resource where you can
create users and set their roles with detailed privileges.
User Settings
User list
Administrators can add and delete users in this list. Select a user in the list to see
personal details and the assigned roles in the details pane under this list. One or
more roles can be assigned and these are also indicated with a green check mark
in the Role list. Assigning more than one role to a user allows further flexibility
for user management. The names of the users in the Users column corresponds
with the login names for your organization.

646 RESOURCES PANE
Figure 11.53: User details
NOTE: A role indicated in red in the details pane means that the role was deleted
while it was still assigned to a user.
Role list
Each role is a collection of privileges which are displayed in the Privileges tab.
Several default roles are provided and these appear in the list in italics. These
default roles each have a set of predefined privileges which are relevant for these
specific roles. If necessary, these roles can be duplicated and the privileges fine-
tuned, or new roles can be created from scratch.
The default roles are the following:
Asanti/Prepress Operator You have access to the main job commands (except Edit Imposition) and to
selected Task Processor resources.
Asanti/Prepress In addition to most job commands, you also have access to administration and
Administrator system privileges; you can create and edit Task Processor Parameter Sets and
ticket templates, and view and manage resources
Imposition Operator You can only edit imposition jobs.

Imposition Administrator In addition to the Imposition Operator privileges, you can access the Imposition
Task Processor Parameter Sets and manage its resources
Plate Operator You can perform certain platemaking commands such as making and remaking
output. Only the Jobs window is visible.
View Only A user with this role can only view the selected windows of the Apogee client and
is not able to perform commands.
Clicking a role in the Role list highlights the users with this role in the User list
with a green check mark.
Privileges tab
Selecting a role in the Role list displays a breakdown of privileges in the Privi-
leges tab. Privileges are grouped in the following categories:
Job Operations Commands you can perform on tickets.
Prepress Administration Commands for managing Task Processors and licensing
System Resources Commands for managing system resources.
Task Processor Resources A list of all the Task Processors.
Client Display Options Use these options to show/hide specified windows or resources in the Apogee
client.
Expand a category to display the privileges.
Edit Filter button Opens the Job Filter where you can fine-tune the privileges even further by
specifying a filter to show/hide certain jobs in the Job List for the selected role.
For example: user John has the role of Prepress Operator Plant A and can only
see jobs whose Job Name contains ‘Plant A’. User Bill has the role of Prepress
Operator Plant B and can only see jobs whose Job Name contains ‘Plant B’. See
“Filtering the Job List” on page 146. This filter is set for a role so it can be re-used
for all users with this role.
Delete Filter button To delete a filter you may have set on a role.

648 RESOURCES PANE
Figure 11.54: Privileges for a typical Administrator role
Figure 11.55: Privileges for a typical Operator role
The listed privileges refer to the ability to perform tasks or access resources in
Apogee. Privileges can be selected individually within a category or at the
category level. If all the privileges are selected within a category, the check mark
is black, otherwise it’s gray.

User tab
This tab is also used in combination with the Role list. Select a role in the Role
list to see which users have been assigned this role.
Figure 11.56: Users displayed in the User list and User tab for a selected role
Accounts
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the Accounts
icon in the Resources pane. This resource provides an overview of the companies
and user accounts which are specified in the WebApproval and PrintSphere
applications.
Apogee needs a license to enable WebApproval and PrintSphere. Without these

licenses, none of the dedicated resources, channels and actions are available.
Double-click the icon to access the Accounts Overview.

650 RESOURCES PANE
Company A list of all the companies with accounts. The list contains one printer company
(default name: The Printer Company) and all your customers, i.e. print buyer
companies.
Users The details of all the users with user accounts in the selected company.
Related topics: • Web Proof on page 314

• Customer on page 281
• Job Settings on page 650
JDF Server
If you select the Apogee System in the Hardware pane, you will see the JDF
Server icon in the Resources pane.
By double-clicking the JDF Server icon, you can access the JDF Server settings.
These allow you to specify how Apogee builds the production plan for jobs
submitted by the JDFServer or JDF Import, and how Apogee communicates with
external systems used to input JDF files.
NOTE: JDF is a licensed feature.
Job Settings
The JDF Server dialog box comprises four tabs which allow you to specify how
Apogee builds the production plan for jobs submitted by the JDFServer or JDF
Import, and how Apogee communicates with external systems used to input JDF
files.
Job Administration
Milestones When a milestone is present in the JDF, Apogee sets the appropriate ‘milestone’
time in the job’s Options tab, and sets the notification to be sent some time before
the specified milestone occurs.
Notify before: Specify the notification time.

Product Definition You have the option to match the JDF job with a Product whose name matches
the value of @ProductTypeDetails or select a preferred preset for the different
assembly types. Choose a preset Product from the drop-down lists for the
different assembly types. If you clear both check boxes, the Default Product you
choose in this drop-down list is used.
Apogee Impose Choose a Press Sheet Layout rule from this drop-down list for JDF jobs.
Sheet Prefixes Choose whether you want to use sheet prefixes of Production Sets in multi-part
jobs or not at all.
Planless Submission
This tab defines how Apogee builds the production plan for jobs submitted by
the JDFServer or JDF Import. Apogee uses these settings as defaults when it
receives a ‘planless’ job description or an incomplete plan, such as submitted by
a Hot Ticket with only a JDF Input.
Production Plan: Build Apogee will check the incoming JDF/JMF for processes/grayboxes, and will use
dynamically this information to dynamically create the production plan for jobs.
Output device: Select a high-resolution output device from the list. If high-
resolution output is requested in the JDF but no specific device is specified, then
this high-resolution output device will be used.
Imposition proofer: Select any proofer other than the TIFF Proofer. If proofing is
requested in the JDF but no specific proofer is specified, then this proofer will be
used.
Proofer data by: Select how the page proofer receives its data:
 Separate Render: Apogee splits the imposition proof flow into two flows
before the main Renderer, and uses a separate Renderer to drive the proofer.
 Digital Film Proof: Apogee splits the imposition proof flow into two flows
after the main Renderer, and inserts a Digital Film Proofer to drive the
proofer.
Page Proofer: Select a proofing device for page proofing from a list of all available
proofers.
Press: Select a press from the list of available presses. If you select a Generic
Press, you can also select a Press Parameter Set.
JMF Input Choose a JDF Import parameter set that contains the prepress expansion from
the drop-down list.

652 RESOURCES PANE
Action Points Select the actions you need in the job’s Production Plan. By default, no actions
are added, except ‘Collect for Output’ before the main device. Note that the
‘Collect for Output’ action before the main device is set to collect by Job, and the
one before the proofing device is set to collect by Page. None of the actions are
set to Notify. The ‘Collect for Output’ action before the proofer flow is set to hold
the results; you cannot select to continue them automatically.
 Add ‘Soft Proof’ before Impose Main Flow
 Add ‘Soft Proof’ before each Render TP
 Add ‘Hard Copy Proof’ before Render Main Flow
 Add ‘Keep Results’ on Render Main Flow
 Add ‘Collect for Output’ before Main Device
 Automatically start printing
 Add ‘Collect for Output’ before Proofing Device

Put job on hold If this check box is selected, the (not-intent) job stays on hold at the input
channel until you continue it.
Put intent job on hold If this check box is selected, the intent job stays on hold at the input channel until
you continue it.
Production Plan: Use Ticket Apogee will use a ticket template to create the job. You can select a hot ticket
Template template for regular jobs or for so-called layout jobs. See “Working with Hot
Tickets” on page 268 and “Wide Format Hot Tickets” on page 559.
Product Integration
These options allow you to specify how Apogee communicates with external
systems and applications, such as an MIS system.
JDF Attribute Mapping The structure of a JDF job depends largely on the MIS vendor and the way a site
uses it. To support the different structures, Apogee can map its attributes to the
different parts in the JDF. This is especially important for administrative attri-
butes. The mapping between JDF and Apogee attributes is stored in a JDF
Attribute Map resource.
Base Attribute Map: Defines the common attribute mappings used by most
vendors.

Edit Maps: opens the JDF Attribute Maps overview window. You can add, dupli-
cate, edit and delete JDF Attribute Maps using the corresponding buttons. You
can also import and export maps.
Mis URL Only required for integration with StoreFront. Enter the URL where the MIS
expects to receive JMF messages.
Apogee WebApproval Use Collaborators from MIS or WebApproval: This option specifies that Apogee
should honor the list of collaborators as listed in the JDF job or ignore that list
and use the list of collaborators set up in the WebApproval application.
Apogee Webserver Port: The port number of the Apogee Web server. Note that this does not set the
port number. Apogee simply needs this number to pass on to external systems
that need to connect to the web server. The default port number is 80.
Input Pre-process: “This option allows you to pre-process every file found in the Hot
Folder before it is handled by the JDF Input Task Processor. Pre-processing input
files is mainly used to ‘fix’ JDF files, and helps to integrate JDF products from
different vendors.
Run script on incoming JDF: Specify the full path to the script you wish to execute.
At runtime, the script is started with two or more arguments.
Optional arguments: Enter optional runtime arguments. Separate multiple

arguments with spaces. If you need to specify an argument with a space in it, you
must enclose that argument in single or double quotes, or you need to replace
the space with a backslash. You can use Apogee variables as arguments. The JDF
Input Task Processor substitutes each variable before passing it to the script. To
avoid problems with spaces, JDF Input encloses each substituted string in
double quotes.
Remove content files on external servers: This option determines whether or not
Apogee removes externally referenced content files, and is deselected by
default. This option only applies to files located in a Public Page Store or on a
disk that is not being watched by a Hot Folder. It does not apply to files located
on a WebServer or in a Hot Folder, Files in a Hot Folder are always removed
when they are moved into a job: Files referenced by other methods are never
removed.
Extract thumbnails from PDF: JDF Server can extract the thumbnails of a PDF for
viewing in the Results tab (when available). This option is available for all JDF
jobs, regardless of how they were input (i.e. JDF Import or via JMF). This
reduces the processing load, since the Normalizer does not have to create the
thumbnails (which is slower than simply extracting them).

654 RESOURCES PANE
Output Include all partitions in resource messages: By default, all redundant information
is removed from resource messages. Select the check box to include this
information.
Post-process Run script on output JMF: Applies a post-processing script on outgoing messages
towards MIS or Press. This can be used as a workaround to adapt messages if
MIS has issues with it.
Run script on output JDF: Applies a post-processing script on outgoing JDF. This
can be used as a workaround to adapt a JDF if the receiver has issues with it.
NOTE: Note that digital presses have their own script configuration
Output Accounting Report when output is made: Enables JMF reporting of the results that are
produced.
Edit Cost Types: Click this button to tailor the reporting to your requirements.
This displays the Cost Types dialog box where you can create, edit or delete a
number of cost types. These allow you to track the number of plates that are
being made, both for keeping the stock inventory up to date and to perform post-
calculations
 Reason Text: A textual short description of the reason for the remake. This is
what the operator will see.
 Cost Type: Whether the remake has to be charged to the customer or not.
 Work Type: Why the plate is being remade:
 Original: First output of a plate (included in the order).
 Alteration: Remake because content has changed.
 Rework: Remake of the original plate (no changes in content,

processing). For example, if the plate was scratched.
Job Finishing Events This section deals with the information that is exchanged between Apogee and
the MIS system when a job nears its end of life. It specifies when Apogee should
archive and delete a job, and when Apogee should report that a job is finished.
NOTE: You must respect the logical order of the events and actions.
Report ‘ReturnQueueEntry’ when: Determines when Apogee sends the Return-

QueueEntry (RQE) event, signaling to the MIS that it has completed the job.

 Apogee finishes the job: Send RQE when the job finishes (i.e. when the
finished marks appears in front of the job).
 Apogee archives the job: Send RQE when Apogee has archived the job - but
only when the job is finished. Note that this does place any restrictions on the
event that triggers the archiving process.
 Apogee deletes the job: Send RQE when Apogee has deleted the job. Note
that this does place any restrictions on the event that triggers the deletion
process.
 MIS sends PrePress Completed: Send RQE when the MIS sends a PrePress-
Completed event.
 MIS sends Press Completed: Send RQE when MIS sends a PressCompleted
event.
 MIS sends PostPress Completed: Send RQE when the MIS sends a PostPress-
Completed event.
 MIS sends Job Completed Successfully: Send RQE when the MIS sends a
JobCompletedSuccessfully event.
Archive when: Select when to start the archival process:
 Honor job’s ‘Finish’ options: Apogee archives the job according to the respec-
tive options set in the job’s Option tab.
 When MIS sends <...> Completed: Apogee archives the job upon receiving a
specified milestone event: PrePressCompleted, PressCompleted, PostPress-
Completed, JobCompletedSuccessfully.
Delete when: Select when to start the deletion process:
 Honor job’s ‘Finish’ options: Apogee deletes the job according to the respec-
tive options set in the job’s Option tab.
 When MIS sends <...> Completed: Apogee deletes the job upon receiving a
specified Milestone event: PrePressCompleted, PressCompleted, PostPress-
Completed, JobCompletedSuccessfully.
JDF Updating
A number of options control when a JDF job update is granted or denied. These
options include unnotified acceptance or denial, or notified update.

656 RESOURCES PANE
There are a number of conditions that allow different update policies according
to the current stage of the job.
As long as Run List is empty The Run List is currently empty. Default is Allow.
As soon as Run List There is at least one page placed, but no output has been made. Default is Allow.
contains a page
A result, other than main The job has produced at least one proof (or any other output other than from the
has been output main flow). Default is Notify.
A main result has been The job has produced at least one result from a main flow. Default is Deny and
output inform
When job was edited The job was edited by the operator. This is not an actual phase of the job; it is a
state that the job can be in, regardless of which stage it is in. Default is Allow.
Apogee determines the stage of a job by inspecting it when receiving a JDF

update; it does not maintain a history. Internal result states are cleared when a
result (or job) is reprocessed, or when a page leading to a result is removed from
the Run List.
The available policies for each of these stages are as follows:
 Allow: Allows the MIS to apply JDF job updates without asking, and without
informing the operator that there was an update.
 Apply and Inform: Applies all JDF job updates without asking, but posts a
notification after applying the updates.
 Notify: Posts a notification when a JDF job update needs to be applied. The
operator can then decide whether to accept or deny the update.
This policy should only be used when the MIS supports asynchronous JMF
commands. Otherwise, the MIS will fail the update when the operator does
not immediately answer the notification.
Apogee returns an error to the MIS upon receiving a synchronous command,

and posts a notification. The notification states that the update was rejected
because of a misconfiguration, and suggests you either change the MIS
protocol settings or use a different update policy. The same message is
included in the error reply sent to the MIS.
 Deny: Denies the JDF job update without asking, and without informing the
operator that the update was denied.

 Deny and Inform: Denies the JDF job update without asking, but posts a
notification informing the operator that the update was denied.
Disk Storage
The Disk Storage icon is displayed in the Resources pane when you select a
Hardware or “Satellite” System in the Hardware pane. You can double-click this
icon to display the Disk Storage settings. This dialog box lists all of the available
disks or partitions on the selected Hardware System.
Each Hardware System has a Disk Storage resource, comprising two parts:
 Storage Sets: To configure the Storage Sets
 Disk Monitor: To monitor disk usage
What are Storage Sets?
A storage set is a collection of one or more disks or shared volumes that are kept
synchronized. When the Apogee System writes a file to a storage set, the file is
copied to all disks or volumes which belong to that set. This provides system
redundancy: If any disk or volume in a set fails, the Apogee System notifies you
and disables the failed disk/volume. This disk/volume will not be used again
until you enable it. When you do this, the disk is again synchronized with the
other disks/volumes in the set. Whenever Apogee needs a file, it searches
through every enabled disk in the set until one returns the required file.
Normally, the first disk will return the file, so there is very little impact on
performance.
If you add a disk or volume to a storage set, it is immediately synchronized with

the other disks/volumes in the set.
Each storage set you define can handle only one of the following data types:
 Temporary data
 System files and resources
 PDF and Postscript files

658 RESOURCES PANE
 Raster files
You can define multiple storage sets to handle the same type of data. This
increases the total disk capacity, and allows Apogee to alternately write data to
each of the storage sets in turn (for example, writing C, M, Y, K separations to
different sets).
Related topics: • Storage Set Editor on page 661
Disk Storage Settings
The Disk Storage dialog box comprises two tabs which allow you to configure
storage sets and monitor disk usage.
Storage Sets
This tab shows all storage sets, the disks or volumes in each set, and the kind of
files it can receive. You can add, edit and delete storage sets using the buttons
below the list (see “To create a new storage set” on page 661).
Storage Set The name of the disk or volume which contains the storage set.
Sys A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store system data only.
Temp A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store temporary or scratch data only.
PDF A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store PDF data only.
Raster A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store raster data only.
New button Click this button to create a new Storage Set, as described in “To create a new
storage set” on page 661.
Edit button Click this button to access the Storage Set Editor, where you can view or modify
the setup of the selected storage set.
Delete button Click this button to delete the selected Storage Set. Note that you cannot delete
a Storage Set unless there is an alternative Storage Set available to take over the
storage of each type of data held in the Storage Set.

Disk Monitor
This tab monitors the disk usage for all local disks and shared volumes.
Disk or Shared Volume Lists the disks or shared volumes you are using.
Capacity Displays the formatted capacity of the disk.
Sys A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store system data.
Temp A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store temporary or scratch data.
PDF A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store PDF data.
Raster A check mark in this column indicates that the corresponding disk or volume is
used to store raster data.
SQL Indicates on which disk the database is installed.
Amount Used Indicates the amount of disk space (capacity) used by Apogee. For each disk, a
bar displays the used amount in a solid color. For disks that are used for other
purposes, the color is slightly faded out.
The bar of the largest disk fills the column width. The other bars are scaled
proportionally.
The color of the bar changes when the used amount exceeds a certain limit:
 Green: There is sufficient storage space left.
 Orange: The warning level has been reached.
 Red: The critical level has been exceeded.
NOTE: The warning and critical levels are shown on the bar by two small
markers. The first marker is the warning level: the second marker is the critical
level.
Free The Free column shows the free disk capacity in absolute numbers and
percentages.
Status Indicates the status of the disk or shared volume.

660 RESOURCES PANE
Edit button Click this button to access the Watermarks Editor, where you can specify free
disk space warning and critical levels.
Enable button Select a Disk or Shared Volume, and click the Enable button to allow this disk or
volume to be used by Apogee.
Related topics: • Watermarks Editor on page 660

• Storage Set Editor on page 661
• To create a new storage set on page 661
Watermarks Editor
The Watermarks editor allows you to specify free disk space warning and critical
levels for the selected Disk or Shared Volume.
Notify when free space is This is the warning level of the free disk space. The warning level is indicated by
less than the first of the two small marks on the Amount Used bar.
Specify the warning level below which Apogee will notify the user and/or
administrator.
Do not use when free space This is the critical level of the free disk space. The critical level is indicated by the
is less than second of the two small marks on the Amount Used bar (see above).
Specify the critical level below which the Hardware System becomes unusable.
In that case, Apogee will notify the user and/or administrator.
NOTE: When the free disk space is not sufficient to write the data (especially
raster files), Apogee will store the data on another Hardware System. The
performance may suffer, but the processing will at least continue. Apogee will
notify the user in the event of a switch of Hardware System.
Related topics: • Disk Storage on page 657

• Storage Set Editor on page 661
• To create a new storage set on page 661

Storage Set Editor

This dialog box allows you to view or modify the setup of the selected storage set.
You can add and edit storage sets using the buttons below the list (see “To create
a new storage set” on page 661).
Files to store
Select the necessary check boxes to indicate which data can be stored on the
disk.
Apogee system data and This data is essential to keep Apogee active. The data also includes resources
resources such as fonts, halftone screens or calibration curves.
Apogee temporary data Various system components and Task Processors need this data to be able to
write during their processing tasks.
PDF and Postscript files These are the files generated by the Normalizer and stored in the Page Store.
Raster files These are the high-resolution raster files that need to be sent to the output
devices. Generally, you store these files on any Hardware System that hosts the
Render Task Processor.
CAUTION: Once Apogee has some data stored on the disk, you can no longer clear
the check box corresponding to this data type. The check box will be activated
only when there is no longer any Apogee data left on the disk.
If you clear the check box while Apogee is writing to the disk, you will get a
warning dialog box telling you that the check box has been selected again.
Related topics: • Disk Storage on page 657

• Disk Storage Settings on page 658
 To create a new storage set

1 From the Disk Storage dialog box, select the Storage Sets tab
2 Double-click a storage set entry, or select it and click the Edit button.

662 RESOURCES PANE
This opens the Storage Set Editor.
You will also see a set of check boxes at the top of the dialog box, and a set of
buttons at the bottom of the dialog box.
3 Click the New button.
A Select Disk dialog box is displayed.
4 Select a local disk or enter a UNC shared volume name, and click OK.
The dialog box is closed. The new storage set appears in the list.
 To edit a storage set

3 Select the local disk or shared volume, and click the Edit button.
A Select Disk dialog box is displayed.
4 Select a different local disk or enter a UNC shared volume name, and click
OK.
The dialog box is closed. The updated storage set appears in the list.
5 Select the file types you want to store on the storage set by clicking the appro-
priate check boxes.
6 Click Enable, and then click OK.
The Storage Set Editor is closed. Your new settings are displayed in the Disk
Storage dialog box.

 To delete a storage set

3 Check that an alternate storage set is available to take over storage of the data
from the set you are going to delete.
4 Select a storage set, and click the Delete button.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
5 Click OK to confirm deletion.
NOTE: You cannot delete a storage set unless there is an alternate storage set
available to take over the storage of each type of data.
Configuring Your By double-clicking the configuration icon in the Resources pane for each
selected Task Processor, you can access and edit the Configuration settings. For
Task Processors most Task Processors, this is only possible at service level.
Service access level only!
 To work with Configurations

1 From the Apogee Navigation Bar, select System Overview.
2 Select the Task Processor for which you want to access the Configuration.
The Resources associated with the Task Processor appear in the Resources
pane.
3 Double-click the Configuration icon in the Resources pane.

664 RESOURCES PANE
The Configuration dialog box appears.
4 Select the settings of your choice and/or enter any required information.
5 Click OK to close the Configuration dialog box.
The settings are immediately active.
Managing Parameter Sets are predefined Task Processor settings that you can use when
creating a Production Plan in the Ticket Editor. You can access and manage your
Parameter Sets Parameter Sets from the System Overview by selecting a Task Processor, and
then double-clicking the Parameter Sets icon in the Resources pane.
You can also create or edit Parameter Sets from the Settings pane in the Plan tab.
For more information, see “Settings Pane (Ticket Editor)” on page 326.
 To create, duplicate, edit, delete, import or export Parameter Sets
1 From the System Overview, select the Task Processor whose Parameter Sets
you want to work with.
The Resources associated with the Task Processor appear in the Resources
pane.
2 Double-click the Parameter Sets icon in the Resources pane.
The Parameter Sets dialog box appears.
At the top of this dialog box, you will see one or more icons. These icons
represent the operations of the selected Task Processor. For most Task
Processors, there is a single operation. However, some Task Processors (such
as Render or any Output Task Processor) have two or more operations. Each
operation has it’s own individual Parameter Set(s).
Below this, you will see a list of available Parameter Sets for the selected Task
Processor operation. Here, you will see at least an “initial” Parameter Set, as
well as any additional Parameter Sets that may have been created.

You will also see a set of icons at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can use these icons to create, duplicate, edit, set as default, delete,
import or export Parameter Sets for the selected Task Processor.
To create a new Parameter Set
1 In the Parameter Sets dialog box, select one of the Task Processor opera-
tion icons.
If there is only one operation, then this is selected by default.
A new untitled dialog box is displayed
3 Enter a unique name for the new Parameter Set, and select your settings.
For detailed information about these settings, refer to the description of

the selected Task Processor.
4 Click OK to save your settings.
The dialog box is closed. The new Parameter Set appears in the list.
To duplicate a Parameter Set
1 In the Parameter Sets dialog box, select a Parameter Set and click the
Duplicate button:
A copy of the Parameter Set is added to the list. The new Parameter Set
takes the name of the original Parameter Set, appended with the word
copy.
To edit a Parameter Set
1 In the Parameter Sets dialog box, select a Parameter Set and double-click
it or click the Edit button:
2 Make any changes you require, and click OK to save your settings.

666 RESOURCES PANE
To set a default Parameter Set
1 In the Parameter Sets dialog box, select a Parameter Set from the list and
click the Default button:
The default Parameter Set is highlighted in bold.
To delete a Parameter Set
Press Delete or click the Delete button:
2 Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
NOTE: For every Task Processor, there are predefined initial settings. You
cannot delete these.
To import a Parameter Set
1 In the Parameter Sets dialog box, click the Import button.
2 Locate the folder which contains the Parameter Set you want to import.
This will be a Parameter Set that was previously exported. This file will be
in MIME format (*.mime).
3 Click Open.
The imported Parameter Set is displayed in the list.
To export a Parameter Set

You may want to export a Parameter Set for use by another Apogee System, or
in order to have a temporary backup file.
click the Export button.

2 Locate the folder to which you want to export the Parameter Set, and click
OK.
The Parameter Set is exported as a MIME format file (*.mime).
Managing For each Task Processor displayed in the System Overview window, you can
access the associated Resource categories by selecting the Task Processor icon.
Resources Any Resource categories associated with the selected Task Processor are then
displayed in the Resources Pane. For information on individual Resources, see
“Task Processor Resources” on page 869.
 To create, duplicate, edit, delete, import or export Resources
You can manage your Resources in a number of ways. These procedures are
similar for most Resource categories.
1 From the System Overview window, select (single-click) the Task Processor
whose Resources you want to work with.
The Resource categories associated with the Task Processor appear in the
Resources pane.
2 Double-click the Resource category of your choice.
The Resources that are available in this category are displayed in a new
Resource category dialog box.
You will also see a set of icons at the bottom of the dialog box.
You can use these icons to create, duplicate, edit, set as default, delete,
import or export Resources within the selected Resource category.
NOTE: The icons and actions that are available vary from resource to
resource.
 To create a new Resource
1 In the selected Resource category dialog box, click the New button:
A new untitled Resource dialog box is displayed
2 Enter a name for the new Resource, and specify the Resource settings.

668 RESOURCES PANE
The Resource dialog box is closed. The new resource appears in the list of
Resources in the Resource category dialog box.
 To duplicate a Resource
1 In the selected Resource category dialog box, click the Duplicate button:
A copy of the Resource is added to the list. The new Resource takes the
name of the original Resource, appended with the word copy.
 To edit a Resource
1 In the selected Resource category dialog box, select a Resource from the
list and click the Edit button:
2 Make any changes you require, and click OK to save your settings.
The Resource dialog box is closed.
 To set a default Resource
list and click the Default button:
The default Resource is highlighted in bold.
 To delete a Resource
list and Press Delete or click the Delete button:
Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
NOTE: You cannot delete the standard system resources.

 To import a new Resource to a Resource category
1 In the selected Resource category dialog box, click the Import from file
button:
An Open file dialog box is displayed. In the files of type list, the relevant
file suffix for the type of file you want to import is selected (e.g. *.mime
for color books).
2 Browse to the location of the Resource you want to import, select the
Resource file, and click Open.
The Resource is imported, and is displayed in the list of Resources.
If the imported Resource is a “dedicated” Resource (such as a Press

Profile), you will see the following icon next to the Resource in the list:
NOTE: Dedicated Resources are linked uniquely to a specific device: They

are not shared between other devices of the same type. Some Resources
are always shared between similar Task Processors, and others are always
dedicated.
 To export a Resource
You may want to export a Resource for use by another Apogee System, or in
order to have a temporary backup file.
list and click the Export button.
2 Locate the folder to which you want to export the Resource, and click OK.
The Resource is exported as a MIME format file (*.mime).

670 RESOURCES PANE

CHAPTER
12 Input Task Processors

Input Task Processors act as input channels through which you input your
documents for processing by Apogee.
When you add an Input Task Processor to your Production Plan, a Keep Results
action is automatically attached to the Task Processor. For more information, see
“Keep Result” on page 322.
 Hot Folder .............................................................................................................. 672

 JDF Import ............................................................................................................. 677
 Named Pipe ........................................................................................................... 680
 Open Connect ...................................................................................................... 682
 PrintSphere Upload ............................................................................................ 688
 TCP/IP ..................................................................................................................... 689
NOTE: Unlike the Processing, Output, and Print Task Processors, no resources are
associated with the Input Task Processors.
671
672 HOT FOLDER
Hot Folder
The Hot Folder Task Processor is an input channel where you can drop the file
that you want to process. You can input any of the following file types:
 Documents:
 PostScript
 PDF
 Images:
 See “File Types” on page 489
Once the processing starts, the input file is deleted from the Hot Folder.
Each Hot Folder is associated with a unique hot folder root. During installation,
you will have to specify the location of the hot folder root on the Hardware
System.
NOTE: When you are creating your Production Plan, a Keep Results action is
automatically added to the Input Task Processor. For more information, see
Hot Folder Settings
You can access these settings:
 When creating Parameter Sets (see “Managing Parameter Sets” on

page 664). Here, you will see a ‘Lock in Production Plan’ check box (selected
by default). If this check box is selected, the settings will be initially locked in
the Settings pane. If this check box is deselected, the settings can be edited in
the Settings pane.
 In the Settings pane, in the Plan tab of the Job Manager and the Ticket Editor.
The settings may be initially locked, as indicated by the Lock icon. If you edit
the job, you can unlock them as described in “Settings Pane (Ticket Editor)”
on page 326.

12 INPUT TASK PROCESSORS 673
Name
The name of the Parameter Set as it will appear in the Production Plan. When
you create a Parameter Set, you should specify a Parameter Set name. You can
always change this name later by editing the job, choosing the Parameter Set
from the Task Processor in the Plan tab, and unlocking the settings in the
Settings pane.
Hot Folder
Click the Browse button to locate the Hot Folder in which you want to input your
document. You can also use variables in this field to automatically create
subfolders inside the HotFolderRoot (e.g., referring to the name and order
number of the job).
By default, the following string is already included in this field.
\\$SYSTEMCOMPUTER\HotFolderRoot\$ORDER\
NOTE: Each Hot Folder must have a unique name. The name should use ASCII
characters, with a minimum of one and a maximum of 31 characters.
Variable button
Click the Variable button to insert variables. A drop-down list appears listing the
variables that you can insert. For more information on variables, refer to System
Variables.
Data Format
Defines the expected format of the input files, and allows the Task Processor to
correctly process it. The valid data formats are:
 PostScript, PDF or bitmap images
 DCS PostScript
 PPML-VDX (variable data format)
 PDF-VT (variable and transactional printing format)

674 HOT FOLDER
 XPS
Polling time
This option defines a polling time for this type of input channel.
Grouping
This option defines how single input files will be treated.
Always create new job Apogee treats every input file as a single job.
Add to existing job if found Input files with a specific filename are grouped into a single job. You can set up
a filename template to specify what parts of the filename are taken into account,
as described below.
Close job’s document input This option tells Apogee to automatically close document input for the resulting
when nothing received for job after a specified period of time during which no documents were received.
<n> seconds This allows the job to finish when all processing is completed.
NOTE: You can also close the document input manually.
Flats/Pages
If a Hot Ticket has no Imposition Task Processor, then to support duplex
proofing and proper InkDrive generation, Apogee needs to be told the type of
input it is receiving.
Input represents This section determines whether the input represents pages or flats. The choice
not only sets the display mode of the Results tab and defines the terminology of
message and log events, but it also influences the other format-dependent
options.
Pages: 'Apogee treats every page in the input file as a page in the publication.
This usually means they need to be imposed before printing.
When you select ‘Pages’, nothing extra is done, and the remainder of the section
is disabled.
Flats: 'Apogee treats every page in the input file as a flat (single side of a sheet).
Usually, they need no further imposition.
Workstyle: These options are only enabled if you select Flats. You can then
choose the orientation of the two sides of the sheet.

 From filename: Extracts the workstyle from the filename (or directory struc-
ture). The filename template must contain <WORKSTYLE>.
Sides: These options are only enabled if you select Flats. You can then choose:
 Alternate Front/Back: Every new input file is assigned the 'next flat': 1F, 1B,
2F, 2B, etc. The filename template cannot contain <SIGNATURE> or
<SIDE>.
 From filename: Extracts the flat identifier from the filename (or directory
structure). The filename template must contain both <SIGNATURE> and
<SIDE>.
Filename Conventions
Filename template This option allows you to retrieve the job name, order number and imposition
details from the filename of the document. To do this, you need to use the
relevant variables, variable separators and wild cards to compose the filename
template.
The first set of variables retrieves the order number <ORDER> and job name
<JOB>, respectively. If you omit the order number or job name from the file
name template, Apogee will use the Hot Ticket name or document file name,
respectively. The default file name template is <JOB>.
The second set of variables retrieves the imposition work style <WORKSTYLE>
and signature information <SIGNATURE> and <SIDE>.
Filename conventions for This field is only displayed when you select ‘From filename’ for Workstyle. Here,
<WORKSTYLE> you can define which strings should be recognized as the Workstyle type.
Apogee tries to match the position of <WORKSTYLE> in the filename template
with any of the specified strings, and identifies the input as the associated
workstyle when it matches a string.

676 HOT FOLDER
Filename conventions for This field is only displayed when you select ‘From filename’ for Side. Here, you
<SIDE> define which strings in the filename define the side (front or back). You can
enter multiple strings, separated by commas, for each side. Apogee tries to
match the position of <SIDE> in the filename template with any of the specified
strings, and identifies the input as font or back when it matches a string. If there
is no match, Apogee treats the input as a front.
NOTE: These fields are completely ignored if the filename template does not
contain <SIDE>.
Created Job
Job’s Hot Folder Here you can specify a different location for the hot folder when the job is
created than the default $ORDER_$JOB. See for an explanation of the variables
you can use to specify this folder. Select the Enable Job’s Hot Folder to enable
this input channel for the job
Backup
Select this check box to have a backup file of every incoming file copied to the
specified folder. The directory structure in hot folder is replicated to this backup
folder. If a file with the same name already exists, a suffix is added. The user
must manage this backup folder.
PDF Certify Check

Verify Certification If you select this check box, you can choose a Preflight profile against which you
can certify the incoming PDF. Apogee flags all failed PDF files with a notification,
and you will see the failed certification icon in the Run List.
NOTE: Postscript files always fail certification.
This option is only enabled for Postscript, PDF or bitmap.
Web
This panel is for creating so-called WebApproval jobs that allow remote users to
upload files and/or approve the pages of the job.
Web Enabled Select this check box so users can work remotely using the WebApproval service.

JDF Import
The JDF Import Task Processor is an input channel hot folder where you can
drop a JDF file that you want to process.
NOTE: Apogee also supports When the JDF Input Task Processor finds a JDF file (or MIME file containing a
JMF (JDF Message JDF part), it creates a job. The content files for the created job are referenced by
Framework). the JDF. The JDF Input Task Processor ignores PostScript or PDF files in its Hot
Folder (unless they are referenced by the JDF).
The Production Plan of the created job will be specified by the incoming JDF file.
You should therefore leave the Hot Ticket's Production Plan empty, except for
the JDF Import Task Processor.
JDF Import Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name

678 JDF IMPORT
Settings pane.
Hot Folder
Click the Browse button to locate the Hot Folder in which you want to input your
job content. You can also use variables in this field to automatically create
subfolders inside the HotFolderRoot (e.g., referring to the name and order
number of the job).
By default, the following string is already included in this field (for the JDF
Import Task Processor):
\\$SYSTEMCOMPUTER\JDFImportRoot\$ORDER\
For more information on variables, refer to System Variables.
Pre-process
This option allows you to pre-process every file found in the Hot Folder before it
is handled by the JDF Import Task Processor. Pre-processing input files is mainly
used to ‘fix’ JDF files, and helps to integrate JDF products from different vendors.
Run script on incoming JDF

Specify the full path to the script you wish to execute. At runtime, the script is
started with two or more arguments.
StoreFrontExport
This option allows you to export data related to the StoreFront application. A
data file is generated for each ordered item.
Optional arguments
Enter optional runtime arguments. Separate multiple arguments with spaces. If
you need to specify an argument with a space in it, you must enclose that
argument in single or double quotes, or you need to replace the space with a
backslash. You can use Apogee variables as arguments. The JDF Import Task
Processor substitutes each variable before passing it to the script. To avoid
problems with spaces, JDF Import encloses each substituted string in double
quotes.
Script has access to If this option is selected, a console window is created each time a script is
console or tracing window executed. The script tracing is displayed in the console window.

Content files
Remove content files on This option determines whether or not Apogee removes externally referenced
external servers content files, and is deselected by default. This option only applies to files
located in a Public Page Store or on a disk that is not being watched by a Hot
Folder. It does not apply to files located on a WebServer or in a Hot Folder, Files
in a Hot Folder are always removed when they are moved into a job: Files refer-
enced by other methods are never removed.
Order number and job name
 Set by JDF
 Use Hot Ticket name and document’s filename
Job’s Hot Folder

This field is only enabled when the ‘Enable Job’s Hot Folder’ check box is
selected. Click the Browse button to locate the Hot Folder you want to use. You
can also use variables in this field to automatically create a subfolder inside the
HotFolderRoot. For example:
\\$SYSTEMCOMPUTER\HotFolderRoot\$TICKETNAME\
Enable Job’s Hot Folder

Apogee always inserts a Hot Folder in the created job's plan, allowing you to add
additional content files or revisions. You can enable it by selecting the 'Enable
Hotfolder' option. This is identical to the PS/PDF Hot Folder option.
Pre-process Documents
These settings are only used if the incoming JDF contains a PrePressPreparation
graybox (regardless of the preprocess document settings in the JDF Import
channel). They define how Apogee expands the JDF PrePressPreparation
graybox.
Normalize Normalizes each incoming document (using the selected parameter set).
Preflight Choose the position to always add the Preflighter (before or after the Run List)
and the type (Apogee Preflight or Preflight), and select a parameter set from the
respective drop-down lists. If you choose after the Run List you can also add a
second Preflighter after the Run List, again using the selected parameter set.

680 NAMED PIPE
Named Pipe
This is the standard input channel for Windows-based workstations. Through

the Windows server, Named Pipe allows you to send jobs to the Windows
spooler from either a Windows or a Macintosh front-end system. The spooler
temporarily saves the data in order to release your front-end workstation for
other activities.
Named Pipe Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.

Pipe Name
Type the name of the Pipe that you want to use. By default, the $TICKETNAME
variable is already included in this field.
Variable button
Click the Variable button to insert variables. A drop-down list appears listing the
variables that you can insert. For more information on variables, refer to
“System Variables” on page 1095.
Spooled Printing
Enable or disable spooled printing. The spooler temporarily saves the input data
to disk to release the front-end workstation. By default, this option is not
selected.
NOTE: The Spooled Printing option is only available when there is no Keep
Results action on the Named Pipe component in the Production Plan.
Honor Apogee Hot Ticket PPD settings (Hot Tickets only)
When this option is selected, Apogee will use the parameter set that is specified
in the PPD section of the incoming document.

682 OPEN CONNECT
Open Connect
The Open Connect Task Processor is a specific type of Hot Folder input channel
which you can use to input raster data (TIFF) and DCS files. Open Connect
recognizes different workflows, and the different file conventions of TIFF and
Raster files that are input, and processes them accordingly.
Depending on the workflow, an input file might be a single separation, it might

contain all separations, or it could be a composite file. It might represent a page
(to be imposed), or a single side of a flat. The type of file may be indicated in the
filename. Open Connect can interpret information contained in the filename in
order to determine how the file should be processed. Once this processing starts,
the input file is deleted from the Hot Folder.
Each Hot Folder is associated with a unique Hot Folder root. During installation,
you need to specify the location of the Hot Folder root on the Hardware System.
Open Connect Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Most Open Connect settings describe the structure and the meaning of the input
files. Consequently, a single instance of a Open Connect Hot Folder in a plan can
accept files from a single workflow only.

Name
Settings pane.
Hot Folder
This option is identical to that of the Hot Folder Task Processor: It allows you to
enter or select a Hot Folder name.
Data Format
Defines the expected format of the input files, and allows the Task Processor to
correctly process it. Note that the available formats depend on the license.
Formats that require an extra license are shown in italics:
 TIFF: 1-bit or 8-bit TIFF; RGB, CMYK or Grey color space; pre-separated or
composite.
 DCS: DCS-1 (multiple file) and DCS-2 (single/multiple file).
 Barco TIFF: Barco TIFF (1-bit)
 Harlequin TIFF: Harlequin TIFF (1-bit)
 Agfa PDFRIP TIFF: TIFF files created by the PDF RIP
Polling time
Defines a polling time for this input channel.
Combining Files
Deliver combined files after Defines the amount of time (in seconds) that Apogee will wait for the next file,
receiving nothing for <n> after receiving a file. After this period has expired, Apogee treats the group of
seconds previously received files as complete, and delivers them as a group. This feature
is used to group separations into pages (or flats), and to group pages (or flats)
into a job.
Automatically close job’s If you select this option, Apogee closes document input for the receiving job. This
document input after last allows the job to finish properly.
page

684 OPEN CONNECT
Tag Input
By default Apogee uses and interprets the file tags (this option is deselected).
However, if you select the Tag Input check box, you can ‘tag’ the input by telling
the system how the input should be treated. Basically, these Tag settings are a
limited set of the Image settings from an Output Task Processor.
Reading Right/Wrong
Polarity Positive/Negative
Rotate 0, 90, 180, 270
Flats/Pages
This section determines whether the input represents pages or flats. The choice
not only sets the display mode of the Results tab and defines the terminology of
message and log events, but it also influences the other format-dependent
options.
Input represents Pages: Each input file (or set of files) is a single page. The Production Plan can
have a Run List and an Imposition Task Processor to assemble the pages into
flats. The pages can be placed in the Run List manually or automatically.
Flats: Each input file (or set of files) is a side of a flat. The Production Plan should
not have a Run List or Imposition Task Processor, although it is not forbidden.
The results tab displays flats. Note that you cannot select the pages on the flats.
Workstyle: These options are only enabled if you select Flats. You can then
choose the orientation of the two sides of the sheet.
 From filename: Extracts the workstyle from the filename (or directory struc-
ture). The filename template must contain <WORKSTYLE>.

Sides: These options are only enabled if you select Flats. You can then choose:
 Alternate Front/Back: Every new input file is assigned the 'next flat': 1F, 1B,
2F, 2B, etc. The filename template cannot contain <SIGNATURE> or
<SIDE>.
 From filename: Extracts the flat identifier from the filename (or directory
structure). The filename template must contain both <SIGNATURE> and
<SIDE>.
Filename Conventions
Use Script Select this check box to execute scripts (e.g. for file renaming). The text field
indicates the location of the selected script. Use the Browse button to select your
script.
Filename template Describes the folder structure and the file name conventions that are expected.
The list offers a number of presets which may vary, depending on the selected
format. For example:
 <JOB>
 <JOB>\<DOCPAGE>\<SEPARATION>
 <JOB>\<SIGNATURE>\<SIDE>\<SEPARATION>
 <JOB>\<SIGNATURE>\<WEB>\<SIDE>\<SEPARATION>
 <JOB>\<WORKSTYLE>\<SIGNATURE>\<WEB>\<SIDE>\<SEPARATI
ON>
Filename convention Filename conventions for <SIDE>: These fields define which strings in the
strings filename define the side (front or back). You can enter multiple strings,
separated by commas, for each side. Apogee tries to match the position of
<SIDE> in the filename template with any of the specified strings, and identi-
fies the input as font or back when it matches a string. If there is no match,
Apogee treats the input as a front.
NOTE: These fields are completely ignored if the filename template does not
contain <SIDE>.
Filename conventions for <SEPARATION>: These fields define which strings

should be recognized as process colors. Apogee tries to match the position of
<SEPARATION> in the filename template with any of the specified strings, and
identifies the input as the associated process color when it matches a string. If
there is no match, Apogee assumes it is a spot color.

686 OPEN CONNECT
NOTE: All string matches, for both <SIDE> and <SEPARATION>, are case
insensitive.
Separations (combining and delivering)

This section is only required for input formats that deliver separations as
separate files. It describes when Apogee considers all separations of a page or
flat to be available at the input, and consequently, when it can deliver this page
or flat to the resulting job (where it appears in the Page Store).
This is important especially when the page or flat has to be proofed; it is not
important when they only have to be printed on an imagesetter or platesetter:
the different separations can be printed independently.
NOTE: This is independent of the ‘Collect for output’ action.
The client will correctly show all separations of a page or flat, regardless of the
order of input. However, a proof cannot be made until all separations are
present. Also, when the Open Connect has to deliver PDF, it needs to known the
separations for each page or flat.
Open Connect will combine and deliver separations after the specified
combining time has elapsed, or when receiving:
First separation of next The current page is considered to be complete when an input file is found that
flat/page contains a separation for a different page or flat (as indicated by it’s file name).
This option is displayed when you select the TIFF Data Format (see above).
Same separation The current page is considered to be complete when a new file for a previously
received separation arrives, and the page or flat name is not encoded in the
filename (e.g. cyan.tif, magenta.tif, etc.). This option is displayed when you
select the TIFF Data Format (see above).
<n> separations of the The current page is considered to be complete when the specified number of
same flat/page separations are available. This option is displayed when you select the TIFF Data
Format (see above).
Polarity Defines the polarity of the input (Positive or Negative). This option is only
displayed when you select the DCS Data Format (see above).
Recombine mode This option is only displayed when you select the Harlequin TIFF Data Format
(see above).
Recombine mode is ON (check box selected): Each TIFF file is named according to
the following file naming convention:

(page_number)(job_name)(color).tif’
For example, ‘2MyJobM00.tif’ means the Magenta Separation of Page 2 of

“MyJob”
Recombine mode is ON (check box deselected): Each TIFF file is named according
to the following file naming convention:
(separation_number)(job_name)(color).tif’
For example, ‘2MyJobM00.tif’ means the second sequential separation of

“MyJob” whose color is Magenta.

688 PRINTSPHERE UPLOAD
PrintSphere Upload
The PrintSphere Upload Task Processor is required as an input channel to create

a PrintSphere job. This input channel works similar to a regular Hot Folder but
it is provided as part of the PrintSphere service. PrintSphere is a cloud service
hosted by Agfa that allows easy file transfer between the different collaborators
of a job: customers, designers, remote sites, etc. You can invite uploaders to
upload files for a specific job or assign PrintSphere collaborators to companies.
Refer to the PrintSphere Help and technical documentation for more
information.
In order to use this channel, the following is necessary:
 A remote user must have a PrintSphere Account, and the account should be
enabled (and not expired).
 The PrintSphere Upload Task Processor must be included in the Production

Plan.
PrintSphere See “Hot Folder Settings” on page 672. The User Folder field is the folder where
files uploaded by the PrintSphere user are input. The Resolved field specifies the
Settings absolute location of this folder.

TCP/IP
TCP/IP stands for Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. It is a

communications language that is used to enable different computers to
exchange data over a network. The TCP/IP Task Processor acts as the TCP/IP
input channel.
A typical example would be someone inputting a document over a third party

OPI server.
TCP/IP Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name

690 TCP/IP
Settings pane.
Port Number
Type a unique Port number that you want to use for the TCPIP input channel.
Choose from a range between 1024 and 65535. Use only an even port number
(e.g. 4000, 4002, 4004), not an odd one. This is because odd port numbers are
used to return data. By default, Port 4000 is used.
Spooled Printing
Enable or disable spooled printing. The spooler temporarily saves the input data
to disk to release the front-end workstation. By default, this option is not
selected.
NOTE: The Spooled Printing option is only available when there is no Keep
Results action on the TCP/IP component in the Production Plan.
Honor Apogee Hot Ticket PPD settings (Hot Tickets only)
When this option is selected, Apogee will use the parameter set that is specified
in the PPD section of the incoming document.

CHAPTER
13 Processing Task
Processors
Processing Task Processors execute tasks on incoming documents, such as
imposition, preflight, normalization, rendering, separation and trapping.
 Apogee Preflight ................................................................................................. 692

 Automate ............................................................................................................... 695
 Conditional ............................................................................................................ 698
 Digital Film Proof ................................................................................................ 701
 Impose .................................................................................................................... 703
 Normalize ............................................................................................................... 710
 PDF Render ............................................................................................................ 720
 Preflight .................................................................................................................. 748
 Preprocessor ......................................................................................................... 750
 Preview Generator .............................................................................................. 751
 Raster Compose ................................................................................................... 752
 Raster Impose ....................................................................................................... 753
 Raster Normalize ................................................................................................. 754
 Run List ................................................................................................................... 755
 Using a Run List in a Hot Ticket ............................................................ 755
 Thumbnail Extractor ........................................................................................... 765
 TIFF Render ............................................................................................................ 766
 Versioning .............................................................................................................. 770
NOTE: A number of System Resources are associated with some of these Task
Processors. For more information, see “Task Processor Resources” on page 869.
691
692 APOGEE PREFLIGHT
Apogee Preflight
Apogee Preflight is a proprietary preflighting engine developed by Agfa

Graphics. The Apogee Preflight Task Processor checks incoming PDFs against
criteria called Action Lists and notifies the users in the event of issues. A series of
action lists are provided by default and some action lists can be duplicated and
customized. Extensive messaging and reporting is also provided as part of
Apogee Preflight.
Associated Resources
When you select the Apogee Preflight Task Processor in the System Overview,
the following associated resource categories are displayed in the Resources
pane:
 Apogee Preflight Action Lists
 Apogee Preflight Profiles
 Content Profiles
 Contrast Adjustments
 Profiles
 Profile Link Exceptions
 Input Color Conversions
 Output Color Conversions
 SISR Profiles
Apogee Preflight Settings
When you input PDF files, they are saved in the Page Store. To be sure that the
PDFs do not generate errors when they are output, you can run an optional
Apogee Preflight check.

13 PROCESSING TASK PROCESSORS 693

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.
Action Lists
The preflight process allows you to automatically edit the PDF, flag issues or
perform color management tagging based on a set of rules, called Action Lists.
Category In this list you can select the action lists by category. The column on the right
indicates how many action lists are selected out of the total number of available
action list.
State The State list is used in combination with Category list to filter action lists
displayed in the Action List pane. You have 3 options:
 Any: displays all action lists of the selected category
 On: displays the active action lists in the selected category
 Off: displays action lists which are not active in the selected category
Action List The Action List pane displays the action lists as selected in the Category and
State lists. Each action list name has a short description to clarify the checking
criteria. To activate or deactivate specific preflight checks, select or clear one or
more of the available Action List check boxes.
You can filter the list of action lists by typing keywords in the Search box at the
top of the list.

694 APOGEE PREFLIGHT
The categories and action lists are managed in the Apogee Preflight Action Lists
resource. For more information, see “Apogee Preflight Action Lists Overview” on
page 873.
Job Profile
Select one of the built-in profiles from the drop-down list. Job profiles provide
information about the job and these criteria are used to fine-tune the preflight
check. A short description of what the profile does is displayed when you choose
a profile in the list. For example, choose ‘Soft Proof on Content’ and you will see
the short description ‘Optimizes the PDF document for content printing’.
Clicking Manage Profiles at the end of the list opens the Apogee Preflight Profiles
resource where you can see more information about the different job profiles.
See “Apogee Preflight Profiles” on page 876.
Errors and Notifications

Here you can choose to trigger notifications if an Apogee Preflight warning or
error is generated and/or a fix is applied by Apogee Preflight.
When Preflight has Select this option to receive a notification when a warning is generated.
warnings
When Preflight applies Select this option to receive a notification when a fix is applied.
fixes
When Preflight has errors You have two options in the drop-down list:
 Warn (processing continues)
 Fail result (processing stops)
Report to WebApproval
Select this option to have a Preflight Report sent to the Customer via Remarks in
the WebApproval application.
Refuse document place- If you want jobs with errors and/or warnings to be refused, select one of the
ment when Preflight has options in the drop-down list.
errors
Automatically reject pages Select this option if you want a page with errors to be rejected automatically.
with Preflight errors
•

Automate
Automate uses conditions, variables and scripts to automate the processing of a

job. For example in a multi-flow job, to direct certain pages of a document to a
dedicated flow in the Production Plan.
When you select the Automate Task Processor in the System Overview, the
following associated resource categories are displayed in the Resources pane:
 Apogee Preflight Action Lists
 Apogee Preflight Profiles
 Automate variables
 Extend Scripts
 XSLT conversions
NOTE: The Automate TP cannot be used after an Impose TP or after a Render TP.
Automate Settings
Automate uses a series of if/then conditions (cases) to test and direct a page,
document or job to the next action, to output or to continue the case. When you
create a new Automate parameter set from scratch, the list of cases on the left is
empty and you will click the Add button to add one or more cases to the list. Then
you can specify the conditions for each case in the two panels on the right.
Test and direct

Here you choose whether you want the condition to apply to a page, a document
or the job. This parameter is set for all the cases in the list and must also be
supported by the position of this TP in the Plan.

696 AUTOMATE
Cases
The cases panel on the left lists the series of conditions that are executed consec-
utively according to the list. You can add, duplicate, delete and change the order
of cases in the list. Select the Submit notification with test results if you want
to track the cases and be notified if a case fails.
If
In the If panel on the right you can set one or more criteria for the case. First
specify how strict the condition for the case is:
 When all criteria are met
 When some criteria are met
 When no criteria are met
Then add your criteria to the list by clicking the Add button. You can duplicate,
delete and change the order of criteria in the list.
Variable Click in the cell to see a list of all the available variables and choose a variable.
Start typing in the cell to search for a particular variable. The variables you see
here come from various sources that you can set up.
Test Click in this cell to see the Test criteria (e.g. equals, does not equal) and choose
one. The criteria depend on the selected variable. A test can also be a regular
expression.
Value Click in this cell to see the Value to be met by the criteria (e.g. Error, OK,
Warning) and choose one. The criteria depend on the selected test.
Then
In the Then panel on the right you specify the action to be followed if the criteria
are met:
 Send to output: sends the result being tested to the output specified in the
drop-down list; the output is a flow in your Production Plan

 Fail: stops the testing and generates an error
 Continue with case: continues testing with the case specified in the drop-
down list
 Continue with the next: continues testing with the next case in the list
The respective icons appear in the Cases list.

698 CONDITIONAL
Conditional
The Conditional Task Processor allows you to automatically process PDF files
differently based on:
 The result of an Enfocus PitStop Preflight Action:
There are 4 types of Preflight Actions: Selections, Changes, Checks and

Informs. The Preflight Action that you can use with the Conditional Task
Processor must be a Check Action type. A Check Action type can generate a
warning or error report. The Conditional Task Processor will decide which
flow should continue processing a document based on the created Preflight
Action Report.
 The result of an Enfocus PitStop Preflight Profile:
A Preflight Profile can generate a warning or an error report. The Conditional

Task Processor will decide which flow has to continue processing a document
based on the created Preflight Profile Report.
NOTE: The Conditional Task Processor will not actually perform the fixes
indicated in the Preflight Profile.
When you select the Conditional Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Preflight Profiles
 Preflight Action Lists
Conditional Decision Settings
This dialog box allows you to configure the Conditional settings.


the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.
Test
Preflight Actions The Conditional Task Processor will process PDF files based on the result of the
specified Enfocus PitStop Preflight Action.
Preflight Profile The Conditional Task Processor will process PDF files based on the result of the
specified Enfocus PitStop Preflight Profile.
Direct
You have two options:
Entire document The condition is applicable for all the pages of the document. If one of the pages
does not match the condition, the complete document will fail.
Individual pages The condition is applied on a page-by-page basis. Only the pages of the
document that do not match the condition will fail, the other pages of the
document will pass. This setting will process slower.
Direct to top when
The content of this field depends on your Test selection (see above). You may
have selected Preflight Actions or Preflight Profiles.

700 CONDITIONAL
Preflight Actions
If you have selected Preflight Actions, you have three options:
no actions fail The documents or pages are sent to the upper flow when the test condition
succeeds.
any action fails The document or pages are sent to the upper flow when at least one of the
selected actions fails the condition.
all actions fail The document or pages are sent to the upper flow only when all the selected
actions fail the condition.
Action List Select the actions you want to test.
Preflight Profiles
If you have selected Preflight Profiles, you have two options:
Profile Select the Preflight Profile you want to test.
Action Select the condition you want to check:
 Has no errors
 Has no errors or warnings
 Has errors
 Has errors or warnings

Digital Film Proof
The Digital Film Proof Task Processor prepares 'Digital Film' (raster data) for
proofing. This Task Processor accepts raster data, performs screening and Dot
for Dot proofing, and outputs the results to a proofer.
Digital Film Proof can be installed on a separate hardware system, and can be
used to take over the screening role of the Render Task Processor, thereby
balancing the workload.
No resources are associated with a Digital Film Proof Task Processor.
Digital Film Proof Screen Proofer Settings
This dialog box allows you to configure the Digital Film Proof settings.

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.

702 DIGITAL FILM PROOF
Dot for Dot Proofing
The Digital Film Proof Task Processor may have an additional option: “Dot for
Dot” proofing (requires a license). Select this check box if you want to produce
better quality proofs.
Dot for Dot proofing simulates the dots on the proof as they would appear on the
press. Consequently, you can only use Dot for Dot when the Digital Film Proofer
shares the Render Task Processor with a high resolution CTF/CTP output
devices (i.e. when it receives high-resolution raster data).
Digital Overlay
Select this check box to print the separations separately (instead of printing the
composite color results), or to make arbitrary combinations. Deselect Digital
Overlay to print all separations combined on a single sheet (this is the default
setting).
All separately Prints all plates on different sheets.
Process colors separately, Prints all process colors on separate sheets, and combines all spot colors on an
all spot colors combined extra sheet.
Print in color Print each sheet using the corresponding color. Deselect to print all in Black.
NOTE: Combined spot colors are always printed in color.
Remove Plate and Press Border
Select this check box to remove plate and press borders from the Main flow for
the Proofing flow.

Impose
The Impose Task Processors allow you to predefine the final layout of the job.
Apogee offers you a series of ready-made imposition templates, or you can
design your own template.
There are two types of Impose Task Processors:
 Impose
 Raster Impose
The Impose Task Processor is used for PDF job assembly. The Raster Impose is
used for raster job assembly.
 Mark Engraver
 Folding Schemes
 Pagination Schemes
 Web Production Schemes
 Press Sheet Layout Rules Overview
 Shingling Rules
 Binding Options Overview
 Auto Impose Rules
 Sheet Layout Templates
 Margins
 Glue Zones Overview
 Marks

704 IMPOSE
Impose Settings
This dialog box allows you to specify how imposition will be applied in the
currently selected Parameter Set. This is also where you can select the Apogee
Impose module to perform your imposition.

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.
Imposition Selection
Undefined: Allows you to defer the selection of an imposition layout, and still
submit a job.
From input: Select this option if you want to import an entire JDF file, more
precisely the pages and the imposition data. The rest of the imposition settings
are not required and are therefore not displayed. This mode is only available
when you process JFD files as input (i.e. when you have a JDF Input Task
Processor). This option should be disabled when you do not have a JDF Input
Task Processor. With From input, Apogee uses the layout information (including
marks) from the incoming JDF file.
From file: Select this option if you want to import only the imposition data from
an external Apogee layout file (PJTF, JT, or JDF). This selection will activate a
File Selection pane and a Sheet Adjustment pane. In the File Selection pane, you
locate the file that you want to import with the Browse button. In the Sheet

Adjustment pane, only the Press sheet scaling option is activated. See “Sheet
Adjustment” below for more information on this option.
From template: Select this option if you have installed Imposition Template
Manager with Apogee. In this case, the Signature Selection panel is enabled, and
your imposition settings will be taken from the selected imposition template.
Apogee Impose: Select this option if you want to use the integrated Apogee
Impose module to create the imposition for a job. See “Working with Apogee
Impose” on page 365 for more information. For Hot Tickets, the Run Auto
Impose check box can be selected to ensure jobs created from the Hot Ticket are
imposed using the Auto Impose settings.
Create backgrounds only This check box is only visible if you have a DQS license. It is hidden if you have
no license. This option is used in parallel with your PrintDrive mode of opera-
tion: It should be checked when you select DQS PrintDrive mode, or cleared
when you select Normal PrintDrive mode.
Border
If you have a JDF Stripping license, Apogee allows you to select an imposition
border, which can place various marks around each page, section or sheet.
Borders are only supported for JDF input.
NOTE: This panel is displayed only when you choose ‘From input’ as your
Imposition selection.
File Selection
Locate the PJTF, JT or JDF file that you want to import with the Browse button.
Apogee will use the selected file to do the imposition. The Results tab shows the
flat mockup. Apogee only uses the layout description and marks from a JDF file.
If the file contains placed pages, they will be ignored (if you need the content
from a JDF file, you should use the dedicated JDF input Task Processor).
This allows you to make Press sheet scaling and bottling adjustments (horizontal
and/or vertical scaling percentages), in order to scale your output if your press
sheet is too large or too small.
NOTE: This panel is displayed only when you choose ‘From file’ as your
Imposition selection.

706 IMPOSE
Signature Selection
This panel is displayed only when you choose ‘From template’ as your Imposition
selection. The imposition settings will be taken from the selected imposition
template. These settings are referred to as “signatures”. You can select signa-
tures automatically or manually:
Automatically from Select this button if you want to select a template from the Available signatures
<template> panel, select a template and choose Auto Select. Apogee will automatically
select the signatures from that template to cover the number of pages. The
selected template is displayed in bold in the Available Signatures column.
NOTE: If you change the number of pages, the imposition Task Processor will
have to rebuild the list of selected signatures. The list remains empty as long as
the number of pages is unknown.
Manually Select this button if you want to select the signature manually. You can select the
required signature in the Available Signatures column and drag and drop it in
the Selected Signatures column. You can also use the Add button.
Binding Style Select the appropriate binding style from the drop-down list. The list of Avail-
able Signatures will be filtered accordingly.
Refresh All If you change the templates in the imposition template folders, the list of Avail-
able Signatures is not dynamically updated. You therefore need to click the
Refresh All button to update the list for the selected Binding style.
NOTE: Since a refresh may take some time, Apogee displays the animated
“chasing arrows” busy indicator next to the button.
Available Signatures Displays a hierarchical list of template folders, filtered according to the selected
binding style. Each folder may contain one or more subfolders containing at
least one template with the selected binding style. You can expand these folders
to select templates and signatures contained within these templates.
Folder
Templates
Signatures

You can drag and drop the required signatures from the Available Signatures
column to the Selected Signatures column if you selected the Manual option.
You can also select the signatures and click the Add button.
When you select a signature in either the Available Signatures or Selected Signa-
tures columns, information about the Press Sheet and signature size is displayed
below the list of signatures.
Selected Signatures Displays (in the table on the right) the signatures you have selected.
Multiple sections: The Pages column on the right displays multiple page counts
for signatures that have multiple sections. When you add such a signature, the
different sections are added consecutively to the Selected Signatures table. You
can change the order of each section separately, and can see at a glance which
book signatures are part of a multiple-section signature: these rows have a
section number. When you select one of these rows, Apogee displays a “linked”
icon for the other sections from that same signature:
Indicates that this section is part of a multiple-section signature.
You can click the Section column to select all linked sections.
First Page: By default, Apogee places the job pages consecutively onto the signa-
tures, in the order as they appear in the signature list. The first page of each
signature is therefore automatically determined by the number of pages that
were placed on to the signatures that precede it.
However, for Perfect Bound templates you can override the first page of any
signature by double-clicking the value in the ‘1st’ column, and entering a new
value (you can also context-click). The number of the first page must be equal to
or higher than the first page of the Run List. There is no upper limit for a first
page; Apogee simply indicates the number of missing pages if you specify a value
that is too high for the current Run List setup.
Manually adjusted first pages are displayed in bold: They are fixed, and do not
change if you edit the signatures.
NOTE: The Run List must be big enough to accommodate all positions in the
signature list.
You can reset a manually adjusted first page by editing it and leaving the number
empty, or by context-clicking it and selecting Reset First Page from the context
menu.

708 IMPOSE
Rearranging Selected You can use the Up and Down buttons below the Selected Signatures table to
Signatures rearrange the signatures. You can also drag and drop them.
Deleting Selected Select one or more signatures, and click the Remove button to delete them.
Signatures
Page Position Adjustment
These settings allow you to adjust pages that are positioned inconsistently or
incorrectly. You can apply horizontal and vertical offsets for odd and even pages.
 If you enter a positive number in the Horizontal field, the image area moves
right on the page. If you enter a positive number in the Vertical field, the
image area moves up on the page.
 If you enter a negative number in these fields, the image area moves left
horizontally and down vertically on the page.
Sheet Adjustment
Shingling In the Shingling (Creep) panel, enter your inner and outer offsets. If you enter a
positive number in the Inner and Outer fields, the image area moves toward the
binding edge of the page. If you enter a negative number in these fields, the
image area moves away from the binding edge of the page.
Press sheet scaling These settings allow you to scale your output if your press sheet is too large or
too small. You can enter a horizontal and/or vertical scaling percentage.
Bleed margin default You can specify a bleed margin (the amount that an image or color extends to the
trimmed edge of the printed page). You should use this when you have created
templates with “default” bleed margins.
NOTE: The units of measurement displayed in this window are determined in

your Preferences (see “General” on page 90).
In Apogee Imposition, the default bleed amount is 0.125 inch (3.175 mm), and
is applied to all four sides of the pages. You can adjust the bleed amount to be
smaller than the amount set in the source file. The new bleed amount applies
only to the imposed job on which you are currently working.
The original bleed amount must be set in the source file. The bleed margins that
you set are the final margins that will be printed around the trim size of the page.

NOTE: You can make single page adjustments by modifying the individual page
in the Run List. For more information, see “To adjust page imposition in the Run

710 NORMALIZE
Normalize
The Normalize Task Processor converts PostScript or EPS files to standardized or

“normalized” PDF files. This process generates a PDF file that is suitable for
reliable high-end prepress production.
In order to make sure the normalized PDF is valid, you can preflight it. For more
information on preflighting, see “Preflight” on page 748.
When you select the Normalize Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Fonts
Normalize Settings
These settings allow you to specify how the Normalize Task Processor processes
all incoming data, and customize the way in which the Normalize Task Processor
produces PDF files in the selected flow. The Normalizer settings are grouped into
five tabs.

the Settings pane.
on page 326.

Name
Settings pane.
PDF Generation
The PDF Generation Settings only affect incoming PostScript.
General Compatibility: You can choose between Acrobat 4.0 (PDF 1.3), Acrobat 5.0 (PDF
1.4), Acrobat 6.0 (PDF 1.5), Acrobat 7.0 (PDF 1.6), and Acrobat 8.0 (PDF 1.7).
Acrobat 4.0 is selected by default.
Binding style: The binding option affects how the pages are arranged side by side
so that it will match the reading direction (left to right or right to left) of text in
the document. You can choose either Left or Right. Right Edge binding is useful
for viewing Arabic or Hebrew text or vertical Japanese text. By default, the
binding is set to Left Edge.
Resolution: Enter the resolution at which you want to generate PDF files. The
default setting is 1200 dpi, which is suitable for most jobs.
NOTE: This is the internal Normalize resolution, and is not related to the output
resolution of your device.
Use output resolution: Select this check box if you want to use the resolution of
the output device. In this case, the Resolution field is disabled.
Pages Default page size: Specify the width and height that the Normalize Task
Processor should use by default when no page size is specified in the incoming
job. These values are used only when the document has no page size setting, or
when the page size exceeds the allowed size.
Bleed amount : This is the amount that an image or color extends to the trimmed
edge of the printed page.
NOTE: You cannot specify a bleed amount that is greater than the bleed specified
in the incoming PostScript files.
Search for ‘BoundingBox’: Select this check box to search the incoming document
for a specific page size.

712 NORMALIZE
Fallback: Specify the default page size (width and height) if no Bounding Box
information can be extracted from the document.
Images
The Images Settings only affect incoming PostScript.
Image Downsampling If you want to generate smaller PDF file sizes, you can set the Normalize Task
Processor to downsample any images it encounters.
NOTE: Excessive downsampling reduces quality.
A separate check box is provided for Monochrome images, Grayscale images,

and Color images. To enable downsampling for a particular image type, select
the corresponding Downsampling check box, and choose one of the downsam-
pling methods from the list:
Average downsampling: This is the fastest downsampling method.
Subsampling: This is the intermediate downsampling method that produces

good results.
Bicubic downsampling: This is the slowest downsampling method, which

produces the best quality.
For each of the selected downsampling methods, enter your required target
image resolution (dpi) in the ‘to’ box provided.
For each of the three image types, you can also specify image downsampling
thresholds. By default, these values are set 150% of your selected target image
resolution. For example, if you set your compression options to downsample
color images to 300 dpi, then by default this downsampling will be applied to all
color images that are 450 dpi or higher.
In the ‘above’ box, you can change this default for images above the dpi
threshold to any value you require.
Image Compression The goal of image compression is to reduce the size of the PDF in order to
improve performance.
To enable image compression for a particular image type, select the corre-
sponding check box, and choose one of the image quality options from the list.
CCITT Groups 3 and 4 compression: These are lossless compression methods

which are good for most monochrome images.

ZIP compression : This is also a lossless compression method.
JPEG compression: These options compress images with a minimum amount of

information (quality) loss. JPEG compression produces smaller files than ZIP
compression.
Run Length: This is also a lossless compression method for images with large
areas of solid black or white.
These options activate automatic image compression. The greater the compres-
sion the smaller the resulting file size. The image compression uses the best
compression algorithm according to the specific image type. Although some of
the original image quality is lost, even the lower image quality options will
produce reasonable image quality.
Select the 'Compress text and line art' check box if you also want to compress the
rest of the data in your input documents.
Application Settings
The Application Settings only affect incoming PostScript. These settings are
typically used with documents from high-end documentation and graphics
applications, such as Adobe Illustrator and Adobe PageMaker. For more infor-
mation, see the documentation that came with the application.
General Preserve UCR and Black generation: Retains UCR (Under Color Removal) and
Black Generation settings if they exist in the PostScript file. Black Generation
calculates the amount of black to be used when trying to reproduce a particular
color. Under Color Removal (UCR) reduces the amount of cyan, magenta, and
yellow components to compensate for the amount of black that was added by the
black generation. Because it uses less ink, UCR is generally used for newsprint
and uncoated stock.
Preserve Halftone information: Retains any halftone information in files.
For more in-depth information, see “Understanding Normalize Settings” on

page 718.
CAUTION: If you select this option, the halftone information cannot later be
replaced by settings in the JTE.
Transfer functions in composite PostScript: The following options are only appli-
cable for composite PostScript. For pre-separated PostScript, the value is always
‘Apply’:

714 NORMALIZE
 Preserve: Retains the transfer functions traditionally used to compensate for

dot gain or dot loss (that may occur when an image is transferred to film).
This option is especially recommended for pre-separated files when using
spot colors.
 Remove: Removes transfer functions.
 Apply: Applies a transfer function.
CAUTION: If you select ‘Preserve’, no transfer resource from the Render Task
Processor can be used. However, Halftone-linked Transfer Resources can be
concatenated in the Render Task Processor using a special boot resource.
PostScript Color PostScript Color Management allows you to define the behavior of PostScript,
Management EPS or PDF images and objects which may or may not have a Color Space Array
(CSA) embedded.
See also PostScript Color Management in “PDF Render - Render Settings” on

page 739.
TIP: What is CSA? A Color Space Array (CSA), is the PostScript profile for a
color. The CSA has the information to translate the color data from the origin
space to the XYZ space. It is either inserted into the PostScript print stream when
the image is printed or is resident in an EPS image. No other graphic format
supports CSA. Colors referred to as CSA are known as device-independent, or
CIEBased colors.
Honor application PostScript color management: Select this option if you want to
use the Color Management settings of your application. This option disables the
Color Management settings.
Apply fixed PostScript color management: In this section you can overwrite appli-
cation profiles, CIE based color spaces and render intents.
 Attach Profiles: Select the appropriate check box for each object. You can
choose between:
 Images/objects
 Line Art objects
Once you have selected the check box, the corresponding drop-down list will
be activated. Here, you can select the Profile you want to attach from the
drop-down lists. You can choose from the following Profiles:

Objects Profiles for Images/objects Profiles for Line Art

RGB objects • DeviceRGB • DeviceRGB
• DefaultRGB • DefaultRGB
CMYK objects • DeviceCMYK • DeviceCMYK
• DefaultCMYK • DefaultCMYK
Gray objects • DeviceGray • DeviceGray
• DefaultGray • DefaultGray
 Color Spaces: You have three options:
 Treat CIEBasedA objects as gray objects
 Treat CIEBasedDEFG objects as CMYK objects
 Treat CIEBasedDEF objects as RGB objects
A CSA is embedded in an image when you select “PS Colormanagement”

while saving an EPS file in PhotoShop. There are three possibilities:
 A Gray CSA results in a CIEBasedA entry.
 A CMYK CSA results in a CIEBasedDEFG entry in the PS file.
 An RGB CSA results in a CIEBasedRGB entry for a monitor profile. It

results in a CIEBasedDEF entry for a scanner profile or an extended
monitor profile (feature of Colortune 4.0).
You are advised to use a CSA in RGB images, but not to use CSAs in CMYK or
Gray images.
 Rendering Intent: You can overwrite render intents, and specify exactly how
they should be overwritten. For more information on render intents, refer to
“Rendering Intent” on page 803.
 Overrule rendering intent for RGB images with:
Choose one of the following: Perceptual, Relative Colorimetric, Satura-

tion or Absolute Colorimetric.
 Overrule rendering intent for CMYK images with:

 Overrule rendering intent for LAB images with:

716 NORMALIZE

Overprint Honor application overprint: Select this option if you want to use the Overprint
Settings of your application. This option disables the Force Knockout and Force
Overprint settings.
Apply fixed overprint: Select this option if you want to overwrite the Overprint
Settings of your application. This option enables the Force Knockout and Force
Overwrite settings.
 Force Knockout: This option detects all “White objects” set to overprint, and
changes them to knockout. Alternatively, you can change all overprint
objects to knockout.
 Force Overprint: Choose your black overprint options by selecting the avail-
able check boxes. You can overprint any combination of black objects (lines,
fills, and text). In the case of overprinting text, a point size limit can be set,
above which no overprinting of the characters is forced. Setting this value
high will cause all black text to be overprinted.
PDF Processing
The PDF Processing Settings affect both incoming PostScript and PDF.
File Format Select this option if you want to create PDF files in ASCII text format. This is
useful if you want to send a file via email, although it increases file size.
Fonts You can configure the Normalize Task Processor to produce PDFs, even if
documents are input with missing fonts, and the font is not available as an
Apogee font resource. The Normalizer will then substitute any missing fonts
with the substitution font that you specify.
Missing fonts: There are a number of ways you can deal with missing fonts:
 Notify: The Normalizer stops processing the document, and places a ‘User
Interaction’ notification on it.
 Ignore (only for PDF input): The Normalizer continues processing the
document, but places a ‘Warning’ notification on it.
 Substitute with: The Normalizer continues processing the document, but

replaces the missing font with the selected substitution font, and places a
‘Warning’ notification on the document.

NOTE: If you input a document that uses font substitution, you cannot correct the
font afterwards.
Subset all embedded fonts below: Select this check box to embed only a subset of
the fonts, and specify a threshold percentage. If the threshold is 90, for example,
and less than 90% of the characters are used, the Normalize Task Processor
embeds only those characters. By default, this option is disabled.
NOTE: If you select this option, Apogee will create smaller PDF files. However,
you will also limit the amount of editing that will be possible later, since not all
the relevant font information will be available.
PANTONE conversion Convert all PANTONE color names to: This option allows you to change the name
extension (such as CVC or CVU) according to the medium type:
 Coated
 Uncoated
 Matte: Only for use with Pantone 2000 colors. If you choose Matte, the suffix
will be changed to 'M'.
 ‘CV’
 Follow paper type
NOTE: These settings are not available for multi-part jobs and PDF Render.
Use Pantone 2000 color names: This option allows you to convert the old Pantone
name extensions to the Pantone 2000 extensions.
Recognize ‘PANTONE nnn’ as PANTONE color name: Apogee will interpret any
color name beginning with a “P” as a Pantone color name.
NOTE: To use PDF to its full advantage, a composite workflow is required,

allowing last minute decision making as to where and how the PDF should be
processed. However, some users need support for legacy workflows, where files
come in pre-separated (e.g. DCS files such as CopyDot and HexaChrome, or
other pre-separated PostScript files). For this reason, the Normalizer always
converts (re-combines) incoming pre-separated PostScript to composite.
Page Thumbnails Page Thumbnails are low-resolution images that Apogee uses to show thumb-
nails of a page in the Results tab. These thumbnails are not those that are

718 NORMALIZE
embedded in the PDF file (and that you can see in a PDF viewer such as Acrobat):
They are TIFF images that are stored inside Apogee. You should use the Export
Task Processor to produce PDF files with embedded thumbnails.
Create thumbnails: Only when there are no document thumbnails present: The
Normalizer uses the document's thumbnails as page thumbnails if they are
present. It builds thumbnails for those pages that have no thumbnail. Note that
the page thumbnails may not be built if there are problems generating a proper
PDF file (from a PostScript file). This is the default setting.
Create thumbnails: Never, but use the document's thumbnails if present: The
Normalizer uses the document's thumbnails as page thumbnails. Documents
that have no thumbnails will have no page thumbnails, and are displayed with a
generic icon in the Results tab. You should select this option if you want
maximum performance and do not require thumbnails in the Results tab. This is
also useful for fast processing of large documents, where page thumbnails are
not important (e.g. a text-only book). For optimal performance, you can also
enable the HotFolder's thumbnail extraction.
Create thumbnails: Always, ignoring the document's thumbnails: The Normalizer

always builds page thumbnails for every file it successfully delivers, even if the
incoming file already contains thumbnails. The thumbnails may not be gener-
ated if there are problems generating a proper PDF file (from a PostScript file).
Since this will slow down the Normalizer, you should use this option only if you
know that the embedded thumbnails of the received PDF files are of bad quality.
Low Resolution Previews These are preview thumbnails used for viewing page content in Apogee Impose.
They have a higher resolution than the page thumbnails displayed in the Results
tab.
Create Low Resolution Previews: Select this option to create page preview thumb-
nails for Apogee Impose. See “Page Previews” on page 447 for more
information.
For more in-depth information, see “Understanding Normalize Settings” on

page 718.
Understanding Normalize Settings
This part contains more in-depth information on a number of settings of the

Normalize Task Processor.
Conversion Limitation from Separations into Composite
This feature has the following limitations:

 Recombine only works when pre-separated PostScript is sent to the

Normalize Task Processor.
 Ensure that CCITT Group 4 is chosen for Monochrome in the Image Handling
options (for CopyDot support).
 This option will only work with fully DSC-compliant PostScript.
 Since the decision to separate was already made in the authoring application,
it is not possible to change the spot color behavior of the resulting PDFs. You
will only be able to choose “keep as spot” or “map to other spot”.
 Adobe Acrobat or Acrobat Reader will not correctly view the resulting PDF.
Since recombine is a process where separations are placed in one file using
the overprint mode, only the last separation in the file (usually black) will be
viewed. To obtain a correct preview of CMYK files in Acrobat 5.0.5 or higher,
you have to enable overprint preview in the View menu of Acrobat.
 You cannot change the overprint behavior, or perform Trapping (in the
Render Task Processor) on these recombined separations.
Transfer Functions
Dot gain occurs when the ink dots that make up a printed image are larger (for
example, due to spreading on paper) than in the halftone screen. Dot loss occurs
when the dots print smaller.
For example, a file that is intended for output on a particular imagesetter may
contain transfer functions that compensate for the dot gain associated with that
printer. Transfer functions are specific to an output device, and are typically
loaded and managed on the Render Task Processor. If however, the input file
contains transfer curves, you may want to preserve this information.
Halftone Information
Halftone information consists of dots that control how much ink is deposited by
halftone devices at a specific location on the paper. Varying the dot size and
density creates the illusion of variations of gray or continuous color. For a CMYK
image, four halftone screens are used: one for each ink used in the printing
process. In traditional print production, a halftone is produced by placing a
halftone screen between a piece of film and the image and then exposing the
film. Electronic equivalents, such as in Adobe Photoshop, let users specify the
halftone screen attributes before producing the film or paper output. As with
transfer functions, halftone information is intended for use with a particular
output device.

720 PDF RENDER
PDF Render
PDF Render accepts only PDF data and allows you to perform color management
before outputting the re-screened raster data to an imagesetter, platesetter or
proofer.
PDF Render performs trapping, separation, rendering and screening of the data.
Each of these processes have their individual settings. You can view these
settings either when creating Parameter Sets, or from the Settings pane in the
Plan tab of the Job Manager and the Ticket Editor.
 In the Trapping process, overlaps between adjacent colors are created to

account for press misregistration, paper stretch or other variables.
 In the Separation process, a composite job is separated into different colors.

On a press, each separated color has its own printing plate, each one printed
in a different angle, producing the final printed color image. In traditional
prepress, color images are separated into four layers corresponding to the
four process colors (CMYK) used in process printing: cyan, magenta, yellow
and black. For more information on these settings, see “PDF Render - Separa-
tion Settings” on page 731.
 In the Rendering process, you can specify your settings for Color Manage-
ment and Overprint.
 In the Screening process, continuous tone files are converted into halftone
dots. This means that the image is converted into a number of dots in the
predefined separation colors. You can enhance the quality of the image by
adjusting the dpi (dots per inch) and the lpi (lines per inch), also called ‘line
frequency’. Every line consists of a number of dots. For more information on
these settings, see “PDF Render - Screen Settings” on page 743.
When you select the PDF Render Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Fonts

 Profile Link Exceptions
 Input Color Conversions
 Output Color Conversions
PDF Render - Trap Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.
Honor application trap zone and ink settings
Disables full-page Trapping. When selected, this option overrides the Global
Trap options, described below. Apogee will then implement any Trapping and
Ink settings which have been made in the original application (if the application
allows it). If there are no application Trapping settings, then the job will be
processed without trapping.
Apply application trap zones
The Trapping settings of the original application will be applied. You can still
specify the Ink settings in the Apogee Trapping settings.

722 PDF RENDER
You can still select Apply Additional Global Trap Zone, if there are no global trap
zones defined in the PS or PDF file.
NOTE: Application Trap Zones will always overrule the Apogee Trapping settings
if both options are selected.
Apply additional global trap zones
Enables full-page Trapping. The Trapping settings of the original application

will be ignored. The Global Trap settings will be used instead.
Trap Width Normal: Determines the width to be applied to the trapping elements. For quality
offset printing, this value should normally be equivalent to a width of 0.5 - to - 2
lines. For a 150 lpi job, this would be a value between 0.24 pts and 0.96 pts
(0.084 mm and 0.336 mm). The higher the quality of the printed output, the
smaller the trap should be.
Black: Determines the width to be applied to black trapping elements.
Trap Appearance Trap style: The Trap Style option specifies how the traps are created in a point
where three or more images with trapped colors, intersect each other. You have
the following options:
 Split: This option will avoid the dark areas. This style is recommended for
offset printing.
 Overlap: This option will leave the object shapes more intact. This style is
recommended for packaging.

Trap corner shape: The Trap Corner Shape setting provides three options for the
outside spread style of the trap corner:
 Triangle
 Square
 Round
Trap Images Image boundaries: This value specifies the position, relative to the image border,
where a trap will be placed:

724 PDF RENDER
 Center: Places the trap half on the image and half on the object when both
have to be trapped to each other. This option applies to image-to-object
trapping and image-to-image trapping. Image-to-image trapping, however,
only supports the boundaries “Center” and “Normal”.
 Normal: Applies the general trapping rules, and places the trap in accordance
with the neutral densities of the image pixels. This option should be rarely
used, since the color information in the image might be different for each
single pixel, which may produce a “jagged” result.
 Spread: Places the trap on the vector information only. This option is useful
for images that are placed on a dark background, such as a black keyline. If
text is placed on the image, then this option helps to preserve the integrity of
the text.
 Choke: Places the trap on the image only. This option is useful for images that
are placed on a light background.
1-bit images: This option should be checked when you want to trap 1-bit TIFFs
(with transparent background). The trap will be created between the image and
the background, according to the standard trap rules. When an Image mask
abuts an image, a trap will be created according to the Inks setting.
You can clear this option if you want to improve trapping performance. In partic-
ular, you should not use this option when working with copy-dot files or very
complex image masks.
Within images: This option enables the creation of traps within images. In most
cases, you should avoid trapping within images. It may be only really necessary
when dealing with screendumps or very high contrast artwork which is created
without anti-aliasing in an image processing system. However, if you use this
option, it should only be applied to the specific area (defined by trap zones)
which contains the image, and not to the document as a whole.
NOTE: For standard operations, you are advised not to use this option.
Image to image: This trapping option is useful when one of the abutting images
has a dominant color that is mostly absent from the other image, or simply when
you want to produce traps consistently along all image edges.
The Image to Image traps are placed to the Center. If Spread or Choke is selected
or if Image Boundaries are off, Center will be applied.
Only if Trap Image Boundaries is set to Normal, will the Image to Image traps
also be set to Normal.

Thresholds Sliding traps color limit: Slides a trap gently from the lighter area to the darker
area whenever the difference in “darkness” between the two areas is less than a
specified percentage (0-100%). When the Sliding Trap Color Limit is set to
100%, no sliding to center will occur, and the general trapping rules will be
applied.
Relative color step limit: Traps are used in areas of varied color whenever the
relative percentage of difference between two adjoining colors exceeds a
predefined limit. The Relative color step limit option allows you to specify this
percentage of difference. The lower the value, the more traps will be created.
The default relative color step limit is 200%.
Trap color density reduction: Allows you to reduce the darkness of a trap. This
value is specified as a percentage (0-100%). This produces a trap that is “lighter”
than would normally be used. The higher the color density reduction you
specify, the lighter the trap. At 100%, the trap will have the same neutral density
as the darkest color.
For more in-depth information, see “Understanding Trap Settings” on page 728.
Black Trapping Allows you to define which color has to be handled as black. There are two
editable parameters:
Color tint value at least: Trapping can be configured to handle other dark or
almost-black colors in the same way that it handles 100% black colors.
Color density at least: Any ink at or higher than the specified color density
threshold value will be treated as black.
For more in-depth information, see “Understanding Trap Settings” on page 728.
Inks
Click the Inks button to access the Ink Settings for the PDF Render Task Proces-
sors. In the Inks dialog box, you can view or edit the order in which all process
and spot colors will be trapped. You can also view or edit the density and
colorant type of each color.
Trapping Order
This table shows the order in which the colors will be trapped. You can use the
Up and Down arrows to change the trapping order. The table also shows the
corresponding density and the colorant type.

726 PDF RENDER
Determine trap order You can choose to have Apogee manage the trapping order by selecting this
automatically check box. Apogee will order the colors as follows:
 Based on the colorant type: Transparent, Normal, Opaque, Opaque Ignore
 Based on neutral densities: Lower values are selected first.
 Equal colorant types and neutral densities will be ordered alphabetically.
Chosen Ink Name

Density You can either specify the density manually, or have it automatically retrieved
according to look-up rules. For this, you need to select the Automatic check box.
If the density cannot be retrieved from the application or the books, AND you
have selected the “Use application values, calculate if not supplied” Ink Densities
lookup option, it will be calculated according to the CMYK values of the spot
color.
NOTE: If the CMYK values cannot be retrieved, you will receive a warning.
Colorant type You can also select the type of ink you would like to use from this list. Your
options are:
Normal: Normal is the default for all colors. Normal trapping rules will be
applied.
Transparent: If you are using varnish inks, this option ensures that these inks will
never be trapped. Underlying colors will however be trapped.
Opaque: If you are using heavy, non-transparent inks, this option will prevent
the trapping of underlying colors, but will allow trapping along the ink’s edges.
OpaqueIgnore: If you are using heavy, non-transparent inks, this option will
prevent the trapping of underlying colors and along the ink’s edges. This option
is required when using inks which react unpredictably with other inks (e.g.
metallic inks).
Definition This field displays how the color was found.
If the color is... You will see the message...

Entered manually <no message>
Found in the specified book <color book name> book
Supplied by the application Application
Found in the specified ink set (from the Press <ink set name> ink set
Task Processor) - only for process colors

Occurs in The table shows on which pages the selected color is used (Run List position,
document name and page number).
Ink Densities
Specify how and from where Apogee will retrieve its color definitions. You have
three search options:
Search books Apogee searches the specified books. The job will fail if the color is not found in
any of the selected books.
Use application values Apogee will use the application color values.
Use application values, Apogee uses the application values. If the application does not supply the values.
calculate if not supplied Apogee will calculate them.
Books Double-clicking the Books button displays the book selection window. The table
shows all of the available books that can be searched. You can select or clear the
check box next to the book’s name to either include the book in or exclude it from
the search. You can also change the search order by using the up and down
arrows or by dragging and dropping.
NOTE: The books are shared between the Trap and Separation settings. If you
enable a book in the Separation settings, it will also be enabled in the Trap
settings, and vice versa.

728 PDF RENDER
Understanding Trap Settings
This section provides more detailed information on the following options intro-
duced in PDF Render - Trap Settings.
 Using a Sliding Traps Color Limit
 Using a Relative Color Step Limit
 Using Trap Color Density Reduction
 How Black Trapping Works
Using a Sliding Traps Color Limit
As a general rule in trapping, a trap in the “lighter” color should always spread
into the “darker” color. However, if the color in one of the lighter area changes
gradually (e.g., a blend or a vignette), then the trap will “jump” into the darker
area, creating a visible jagged edge as illustrated below left.
Jagged Trap (100%) and Slanting Trap (70%)
You can fix this type of problem by specifying a Sliding Traps Color Limit. This
allows a trap to slide gently from the lighter area to the darker area whenever the
difference in “darkness” between the two areas is less than a specified
percentage (0-100%).

In the example (above right), if you set the Sliding Trap Color Limit to 70%, the
trap line will start to gradually slide into the darker area whenever the difference
is less than 70%. This gives a gradual and barely perceptible slant of the trap line
into the darker area, and avoids the abrupt and jagged jump.
Using a Relative Color Step Limit
Suppose you had 2 adjoining colors - Color A and Color B - with the following
CMYK attributes:
CMYK COLOR A COLOR B ABS DIFF REL DIFF

Cyan 35% 5% 30% 30/5 = 600%
Magenta 5% 40% 35% 35/5 = 700%
Yellow 16% 20% 4% 4/16 = 25%
Black 8% 5% 3% 3/5 = 60%
The relative difference is equal to the absolute difference divided by the smallest
component of the two colors.
If you specify a Relative Color Step Limit of 10%, then a trap will be needed
between these 2 colors. This is because there is a relative difference of more than
10% in at least 2 of the component colors (Cyan and Magenta) and this in
opposite directions.
NOTE: You need also an absolute difference of at least 5%.
Using Trap Color Density Reduction
When a trap is created between 2 colors, the trap will adopt the highest color
value for each of the CMYK elements available in the 2 adjoining colors. The
resulting color is always darker than the two original colors, which produces a
dark gray to black trap. However, you can reduce the darkness of the trap by
setting a Trap Color Density Reduction value.

730 PDF RENDER
Normal Trap Density (left) and 100% Trap Color Density Reduction (right)
How Black Trapping Works

There are three Black Trapping rules that are applied whenever black is
involved:
 The Black Trapping sets a percentage of deviation from the normal trap
whenever black is involved in the creation of a trap. This is because registra-
tion problems are more visible whenever black (or a very dark color) is
involved. Traditionally, therefore, the width of a trap to a black area is made
wider than a standard trap. A good default setting to use here is 200%.
 Auto-choke is always active. In cases involving a rich black (solid black with
one or more support colors) that shares a common edge with white, a reverse
trap will be created.
 Always spread under black.
However, when is black really black? To define which color has to be handled as
black, you must specify minimum values for Color Tint and Color Density. Both
of these values are required for a color to be considered as black.
Color Tint Setting a minimum color tint value is useful in specific situations. For example,
if you are printing on newspaper quality or with polyester or other so-called
lower quality plates, you may not use the full range of color tints (0-100%).
Instead, you may limit color tints digitally between 4-96%. In this case, there will
be no 100% black in the digital document. However, if you set the Color Tint
Value to 96%, the Trapping module will treat black at 96% as it would treat
black at 100%.
Color Density Setting a minimum color density is useful when you have dark spot colors that
you want to be handled the same as black.

without auto-choke with auto-choke
misregistration
on press
no misregistration
on press
How Black Trapping Works
Basic Trapping Terms

Spread A spread traps a light colored foreground object to a dark background. The
darker of two adjacent colors defines the visible edge of the object. Therefore,
spreading the lighter color slightly into the darker color maintains the visual
edge.
Choke A choke traps a light colored background to a dark foreground object.
PDF Render - Separation Settings
This dialog box allows you to view or edit the Separate settings of the Render
Task Processor. This process separates composite jobs into different colors. Each
separated color has its own printing plate. Each plate is printed at a different
angle, to produce the final printed color image.

732 PDF RENDER

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.
Color Policy
In this section, you can specify which colors are to be printed and which colors
are to be converted.
Application decides If you select the Application decides check box, the application specifies whether
to keep or convert a color. Apogee displays the colors according to the specifica-
tions of the application. The other options are disabled except for Color
Definitions. In this case, you can make no changes to the separation output and
order in the Image settings (see “Image Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and
Platesetters)” on page 786).
CAUTION: This option is only available for Hot Tickets.
Colors are only displayed from pages in the Run List. If you remove a page from
the Run List, its colors will no longer be displayed.
If you clear the Application decides check box, Apogee keeps the current
settings. You can then change these settings as required. If you reselect the check
box, Apogee restores the application settings completely: All previous settings
are lost, as well as any manually-added colors. In this case, Apogee will ask for a
confirmation.
Keep This column lists the process colors and the colors that will be kept as spot colors.
The names of the process colors are the generic color labels as defined in the
color space associated with the selected ink set in the Press Task Processor. The
process colors are listed first, followed by the spot colors, sorted alphabetically.

CAUTION: This option cannot be used with composite PostScript documents.
You can add, edit and delete colors. For more information, see “To add or edit a
spot color” on page 738 or “To delete a spot color” on page 739.
NOTE: The ink names specified by the ink set are not displayed.
Convert to Process This column lists the colors that are to be printed as process colors. The CMYK
values are displayed next to the color. The colors are sorted alphabetically.
You can use the Right/Left arrows to move colors from one column to the other
if necessary.
NOTE: The process colors are not shown if there is no Press Task Processor in the
Production Plan (in this case, the CMYK colors are displayed in the Separation
settings). The table is updated as soon as you insert the Press Task Processor.
The process colors are also not shown when you are editing a Parameter Set, as
they cannot be part of a Parameter Set.
A small icon appears before each color:
The color definition was found in the Apogee Color Books.
The Emulate Overprint option is always on.
The Emulate Overprint option is always off.
The Emulate Overprint option is selected automatically.
The color contains version-specific content.
The color does not contain version-specific content.
The color was found in the job.
The color was manually entered.
The color was manually entered and was found in the job.
The color is directly linked to the selected color

734 PDF RENDER
The color is indirectly linked to the selected color.
The color was found in the border or the imposition template.
The color was manually entered, with marks.
Mapped color name as defined by the Pantone mapping settings.
Special color: varnish.
Special color: die line.
Special color: other.
NOTE: All colors that are linked to have the same color policy (process colors are
always in the Keep list). However, the colors that link to them may be in either
the Keep or Convert lists.
Colors not yet listed above In this drop-down list, you can specify how Apogee handles spot colors that are
not specified in either of the two lists. You have three options:
Keep: Apogee will use them as separation colors. The job outputs additional
plates for the spot colors.
Convert to Process: Apogee will convert them to the process colors.
Notify: Apogee sends a message to the Message Board and holds the job
processing if a new spot color is found. Apogee automatically puts the newly
found spot colors in the Convert to Process table and marks them as Policy
undecided by a red in-job indicator and by putting the text in red and italics.
You can then either keep the color in the Convert to Process table or move it to
the Keep table.
 To keep it in the Convert to Process, context-click the color and select

Convert.
 To move it to the Keep table, use the arrows between the two tables. When
you move the color to the Keep table, Apogee automatically accepts the color.
You can also context-click the color, and select Keep.
CAUTION: You cannot submit a job as long as there are non-accepted colors.

You can map a color to another by dragging it unto a specific color (or context-
clicking). Practically, this means that if you map red to green, red will be
replaced with green. However, you can only have one mapping level. For more
information, refer to “Understanding Separation Settings” on page 737.
Emulate Overprint policy Always on. Always off. Automatic. Emulate Overprint emulates the overprint
behavior of colors whose color policy has been changed, for example when spot
colors are printed with process colors. Changing the policy may require
reprocessing.
Map spot colors from Controls the automatic mapping of the generic spot colors names used for marks
marks/templates to and in templates to actual spot colors. This is selected by default but can be
content spot colors disabled if required, for example for some security printing applications.
<Color>
This section displays information about the color that is selected in the Color
Policy section. The name of this section is the name of the selected color.
Press color values These fields display the CMYK values for the selected color in the Press color
space. The CMYK displayed and the Definition specifies how the value was
found.
If the color is... CMYK displayed Definition

Entered manually User CMYK
Found in book Calculated CMYK if profile Lab<Lab values> from “<book
selected, empty if no profile name>” book
Found in book with exception Exception CMYK if profile Output profile exception for
defined selected, empty if no profile “<output profile>” in “<book
name>” book
Supplied by application Application CMYK Application
Not found Empty <Not Found>
Emulate Overprint Always on. Always off. Automatic. Emulate Overprint emulates the overprint
behavior of colors whose color policy has been changed, for example when spot
colors are printed with process colors. You will see the Emulate Overprint icon
next to the separation name. Based on the input file and the required color
behavior, Apogee will select Emulate Overprint by default. Manual override of
the setting is not always allowed.
Versioning The Has version-specific content check box is selected to indicate that the color
is version-specific. This is indicated with the “v” icon next to the color in the
Color Policy. Works with the R4V action list.

736 PDF RENDER
Occurs in The table shows on which pages the selected color is used (Run List position,
document name and page number). When the color is part of a Null device
object, the table also shows the linked colors.
Color Definitions
This section specifies how and from where Apogee will retrieve its color defini-
tions. You have three search options:
Search books only Apogee searches the specified books. The job will fail if the color is not found in
the any of the selected books.
Search books first, use Same as above, but now Apogee will also use the application values if the color
application values if not is not found in the books.
found
Use application values Apogee uses the application values, unless the application does not supply the
when supplied, else search values. Apogee will then search the books.
books
Books Clicking the Books button displays the book selection window. The table shows
all of the available books that can be searched.
You can select or clear the check box next to the book’s name to either include
the book in or exclude it from the search. You can also change the search order
by using the up and down arrows or by dragging and dropping.

NOTE: The books are shared between the Trap and Separation settings. If you
enable a book in the Separation settings, it will also be enabled in the Trap
settings, and vice versa.
PANTONE Mapping
Map all PANTONE color This option allows you to change the name extension (such as CVC or CVU)
names to according to the medium type:
 Coated
 Uncoated
 Matte: Only for use with Pantone 2000 colors. If you choose Matte, the suffix
will be changed to 'M'.
 ‘CV’
 Follow paper type

Use Pantone 2000 color This option allows you to convert the old Pantone name extensions to the
names Pantone 2000 extensions.
Recognize ‘PANTONE nnn’ Apogee will interpret any color name beginning with a “P” as a Pantone color
as PANTONE color name name.
Understanding Separation Settings
This section provides you with in-depth information on the Separation settings.
Mapping colors
You can map a color to another by dragging it to the color. You can only do this
up to one mapping level. Mapped colors appear indented below the color they
are mapped to.
NOTE: Mapping colors with a If you have a list of four colors and you drag color 2 to color 1 the result would
pre-separated document is be as follows:
only possible if you have a
Normalizer in the flow.

738 PDF RENDER
If you drag color 3 to color 1 or color 2, the result would be:
CAUTION: When you move a color to the other table, you will also move any
colors that are mapped and linked to that specific color.
CMYK Conflict
If you select Use application values, Apogee might detect different CMYK values
for the same color. In that case, a message will be sent to the Message Board.
The conflicting color is shown in red italics with a red in-job indicator. The
conflicting CMYK values are displayed in the Occurs in window in the Definition
column. You can only resolve the conflict by clearing the Automatic check box,
and entering the desired CMYK values.
A color policy conflict is displayed in red: A CMYK conflict is displayed in blue.
 To add or edit a spot color

1 Do one of the following to add or edit a spot color.
 Click the Add button underneath the column to add a spot color.
 Select the spot color and click the Edit button to edit it.
The Add or Edit Color window appears.
2 Click the Browse button to look for the spot color.
The Select Ink window appears.

3 Select the Ink Book in the left column, then the Color of your choice in the
right column and click OK.
4 Click OK in the Add Color window.
The newly added spot color appears in the list or the spot color has been
edited.
 To delete a spot color

1 Select the spot color that you want to delete.
2 Click the Delete button underneath the column.
3 The spot color has been deleted.
NOTE: Make sure you delete the right spot color as there is no confirmation
window.
PDF Render - Render Settings
This dialog box allows you to view or edit the Render settings of the PDF Render
Task Processor. These settings define how color management is applied to the
incoming data.
The settings you see in this dialog depend on the Color Management mode you
select at the top of the dialog. In the Mode drop-down list, you choose one of the
following modes:
 Document Based
 Honor application (7.x compatible)
 Custom (7.x compatible)
Document-Based Color Management settings

This mode uses input and output conversion presets for color management.

740 PDF RENDER
Input Conversion This drop-down list displays all the available input conversion presets. You can
click the gray arrow to open the editor to consult or edit the settings. See “Input
Color Conversions Overview” on page 953 for more information.
Output Conversion This drop-down list displays all the available output conversion presets. You can
click the gray arrow to open the editor to consult or edit the settings. See “Output
Color Conversions Overview” on page 1015 for more information.
Honor Application (7.x compatible) Color Management settings

In this mode, color management is based on settings in the incoming document
and all other presets are disabled. This mode also ignores Document Output
Intent and conversions depend directly on input profiles and press output
profiles.
Click the grey arrow to open the editor to consult or edit the settings.
The following settings can also be applied in this mode:
 Generic Settings
They are explained below.
Custom (7.x compatible) Color Management settings - RGB, Gray,

CMYK tabs
In this mode, all color management settings in the incoming document are not
honored and you can apply certain ICC Profiles to color spaces. Conversions
depend directly on input profiles and press output profiles as explained here.
You can attach Profiles for the following objects:
 Images
 Line Art
For each of these objects, you have a tab corresponding to the Color Space (RGB,
Gray, CMYK, Spot, Document). Once you have selected one of these tabs, you
can then choose to attach either a Profile or a Link to the Color Space. The corre-
sponding drop-down list is then activated, and you can select the profile or link
you want to attach from the list.
The following settings can also be applied in this mode:
 Generic Settings
They are explained below.

Images and Line Art You can set either a device link profile or a profile for tagged and untagged
settings objects. If there is an output intent in the PDF document (tagged), you can
choose to use the document profile as tagged profile.
Untagged (No Profile attached): Provides the following options:
 Use Default Profile
 Use Device Link Profile
 Don’t Convert.
Tagged (Profile attached): Provides the following options:
 Use Tagged Profile
 Treat as Untagged
Default ICC Profile: Lists all Content Profiles, according to the selected color
space.
Rendering intent: You can overwrite render intents, and specify exactly how they
should be overwritten. For more information on render intents, refer to
“Rendering Intent” on page 803. Choose one of the following: From Input, Same
as Document, Perceptual, Relative Colorimetric or Saturation.
Black Point Compensation: This option may be available depending on source

profile, destination profile and rendering intent.
Device Link Profile: The profiles shown in the list should include all the available
device link profiles of which the source color space corresponds to the color
space of the tab, and the destination color space is the same as that of the desti-
nation profile.
Profile Link Exceptions: Lists all Profile Link Exceptions. This option is only avail-
able in the CMYK tab.
Custom (7.x compatible) Color Management settings - Spot tab

Conversion from Applica- Color Space of Application Values: Provides the following options:
tion Values
 Don’t convert
 Treat as CMYK input: The line-art settings from the CMYK tab will be applied
to the spot colors.
Conversion from Books Accurate spot color mixing: You can choose off, or maximum 2, 3 or 4 colors.

742 PDF RENDER
Use Document Profile’s Paper White: If this option is selected, the paper white of
the document profile is used in the color calculation. If this option is not selected,
the paper white of the color book is used in the calculation of the spot colors.
Custom (7.x compatible) Color Management settings - Document tab

Document Profile The Document Profile is the ICC profile specified in the document.
Untagged (No Profile attached): Provides the following options:
 Use Destination Profile
 Generic CMYK
 All CMYK Content Profiles
Tagged (Profile attached): Provides the following options:
 Use Tagged Profile
 Treat as Untagged
Document Rendering Rendering Intent: Choose one of the following: Perceptual, Relative Colorimetric
Intent or Saturation.
Generic Settings
Advanced CMM Recent developments in the Color Management engine offer ‘Advanced CMM’,
which provides a better way of bringing (smarter) colors into gamut. However,
this comes at a small cost: it is a little slower.
Advanced Overprint Preserves the Adobe overprint behavior during CMYK to CMYK conversions
Handling
Overprint Settings
Honor application settings If the Honor Application Settings check box is selected, all overprint settings will
be taken from the information in the incoming document. In this case, the Force
Knockout and Overprint settings are not displayed. If this check box is cleared,
the Task Processor settings are displayed and enabled, and will overrule all
overprint settings in the incoming document.
Force Overprint This section is only displayed when the Overprint Honor application settings
check box is deselected. Here, you can choose your black overprint options by
selecting the available check boxes.

You can overprint any combination of black objects (lines, fills, and text). In the
case of overprinting text, a point size limit can be set, above which no
overprinting of the characters is forced. Setting this value high will cause all
black text to be overprinted.
Missing Fonts
Select the ‘Substitute missing fonts with’ check box if you want Apogee to
replace them with one of the available fonts in the associated drop-down list.
PDF Render - Screen Settings
This dialog box allows you to view or edit the Screen settings of the PDF Render
Task Processor. The Screening process converts continuous tone images into
halftone dots.

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Select automatically from press

Select this check box to use an appropriate Parameter Set which is linked to the
selected press using keywords. See “Parameter Set Lookup” on page 847. The
settings are locked.
Name
Settings pane.

744 PDF RENDER
Single or Separate Settings

You can use a single group of settings for all content (both objects and images),
or you can separately specify the settings for objects and images.
Use separate settings for When this check box is selected, Objects and Images tabs are displayed, and you
objects and images can define separate screen settings (Screen Type, Frequency, and Dot Shape) for
objects and for images.
Use single settings for all When this check box is selected, a single Screen tab is displayed, and you can use
content a single group of settings (Screen Type, Frequency, and Dot Shape) for all
content (objects and images).
Seamless Printing
When this check box is selected, the Seamless settings tab is displayed. This
allows you to specify your options for seamless printing. Seamless printing is
used in packaging jobs for printing a repetitive design, as in wallpaper or gift
wrapping paper. These are usually printed in flexo.
NOTE: The Seamless Printing option is only available if you have a license. It is
hidden if you do not have one.
Seamless
Join Select the edges that will be joined together on the sleeve.
Horizontal edges: The horizontal edges of the page will be prepared for seamless
joining. The rendered image can be imaged directly on the sleeve.
Vertical edges: The vertical edges of the page will be prepared for seamless
joining. The rendered image will have to be rotated 90 degrees before imaging
on the sleeve.
Screen The Screen list box contains a filtered list of halftone screens (references) that
can be selected by the job’s current screen settings. The entries appear in the
same way as they appear in the Used Screen column of the Ruling Maps
overview. You should select the screen to be used to render the content that runs
across the seam.
The list does not include references to Adobe Accurate or Rational Tangent
screens as these are not supported. Hence, you might encounter a situation in
which the list is empty. In that case, the JTE will post an error notification, and
you will not be able to submit the job.

NOTE: You should always check the Seamless tab when you change a screen
selection in any of the other tabs; the changes might invalidate the selected
screen reference.
The simplest case is if you have selected a single fixed screen for all content. In
this case, the list contains that single screen (reference) only. If you have two
fixed screens, one for objects and another for images, the list contains these two
screens. If you have selected a ruling map, the list contains all screens that can
be selected by that ruling map using the output device’s resolution.
Screen
If the Fixed Screen option is selected, the Task Processor settings are enabled,
and will overrule all screen settings in the incoming document.
Screen Type Choose one of the available screening settings:
Agfa Balanced Screening (ABS): A PostScript-based conventional, halftone

screening system that uses supercell techniques and pre-calculated, balanced
screen sets to deliver high quality color reproduction. ABS-screened halftones
feature clear-centered rosettes for smooth tonal gradations and tints, and
flawless skin tones free of moiré patterns.
Adobe Accurate: This screening method provides a close approximation to the

standard screen angles for color separations (0, 15, 45 and 75 degrees) and
frequencies.
Error Diffusion: This is common screening technique which involves the

spreading of the quantization error over the different dots. This technique is
used for Proofers.
Rational Tangent: This is standard PostScript screening technology implemented

by Adobe. Standard screening is the oldest of the four screening methods and
produces a lower output quality than either Agfa Balanced Screening or Adobe
Accurate Screening.
Frequency Choose one of the available line frequencies (lines-per-inch) from the Frequency
box.
Dot shape Choose either an Elliptical or Round dot shape.
Honor Application
If the Honor Application check box is selected, all screen settings will be taken
from the information in the incoming document. In this case, the Screen Type,
Frequency, and Dot shape options will be different, and you will be able to select

746 PDF RENDER
a Ruling Map. The Ruling Map is used to map screen settings in the incoming
document to predefined screen settings in Apogee. For more information on
Ruling Maps, see “Ruling Maps” on page 940.
If this check box is cleared, the standard Screen Type, Frequency, and Dot shape
options will overrule all screen settings in the incoming document.
Screen Type: Choose one of the available screen settings (Ruling Map, Adobe Accurate,
Rational Tangent) from the Screen Type box drop-down list.
When you select Ruling Map, you can specify which Ruling Map to be used in the
drop-down list next to the Screen Type drop-down list.
Frequency This is linked to the selected Screen Type.
NOTE: If a Ruling Map is selected and the frequency is not found, frequency 0 will
be used. If this frequency is not available, the job will fail.
Dot shape Choose one of the following:
 Application
 Ruling Map
 Elliptical
 Round
NOTE: The available screening settings will change in accordance with the
selected output device.
Separation Angles
In the Separation Angles panel, you will see a list of the process and spot color
plates in your job. You will also see a list of angles adjacent to the plates. The
default angles are as follows:
 Cyan: 15°
 Magenta: 75°
 Yellow: 0°
 Black: 45°

Depending on the selected screen parameters, your angle settings will either be
honored, or will be redirected to the closest available angle.
NOTE: The Black plate angle (45°) is also used for any spot color plates.
Tagged Screening Elements which are tagged will follow the Honor Application settings.

748 PREFLIGHT
Preflight
The Preflight Task Processor checks that incoming PDFs meet your require-
ments. You can change the document properties with an Action list based on the
predefined preflight profile.
When you select the Preflight Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Preflight Action Lists
Preflight Settings
When you input PDF files, they are saved in the Page Store. To be sure that the
PDFs do not generate errors when they are output, you can run an optional
Preflight check.

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name

Settings pane.
Preflight Warnings Produce Notifications

If this check box is selected, any Preflight warning which is generated will also
trigger a notification.
Actions
The preflight process allows you to automatically edit the PDF, based on a set of
rules, called “Actions”.
Use Action Lists To activate or deactivate specific preflight checks in your profiles, select the Use
Action Lists check box, and select or clear one or more of the available Actions.
For more information on the default Action Lists, see “Preflight Action Lists
Overview” on page 1031.
Job Profiles
Use Job Profile Select the ‘Use Job Profile’ check box, and select one of the built-in profiles from
the drop-down list.

750 PREPROCESSOR
Preprocessor
The Preprocessor Task Processor is used in the background for Sign & Display
jobs and no settings need to be specified.

Preview Generator
The Preview Generator task processor is a rendering processor which is similar

to the PDF Render task processor but with limited resolution for previews. This
task processor is used in the background for Sign & Display jobs and no settings
need to be specified.

752 RASTER COMPOSE
Raster Compose

Raster Impose

754 RASTER NORMALIZE
Raster Normalize
The Raster Normalize Task Processor converts raster data to TIFF format, and is
specifically designed for Production Plans which include the Open Connect
input Task Processor.
NOTE: Open Connect requires a Raster Normalize Task Processor.
No settings or resources are associated with Raster Normalize.

Run List
The Run List Task Processor determines which pages of a job are going to be
processed. If you insert a Run List in your Production Plan, a list of placeholders
will appear next to the Page Store in the Pages tab. Every Job Ticket needs a Run
List whereas a Hot Ticket can contain one, but it is not necessary (see “Using a
Run List in a Hot Ticket” on page 755).
You have to drag the pages you want to process to the placeholders of your
choice. You can select one or several pages, either keeping or modifying their
original order. You can select the document itself and drag it to a placeholder of
your choice. The pages will then be inserted into the subsequent placeholders,
preserving the original order.
Not all of the placeholders need to contain PDF-pages. A placeholder can be

empty, or can contain a blank page.
CAUTION: When you drag a document to the Run List, you have to make sure that
there are enough placeholders available. For instance, if a document contains 28
pages, the Run List has to contain 28 placeholders. You can modify the number
of available placeholders in the Run List Settings.
No resources are associated with a Run List.
Using a Run List in a You do not need a Run List in a Hot Ticket unless:
Hot Ticket  You want to be able to change pages in the jobs that are created.
 You want to use imposition.
Additionally, in a Hot Ticket a Run List does not have manual or automatic page
placement options: Instead, the pages are always placed automatically.
The number of pages in the Run List will vary depending on whether or not you
specified an expected number of pages, and whether or not there is an Impose
Task Processor in the Production Plan.
The different possibilities are as follows:

756 RUN LIST
 No Impose Task Processor in Production Plan + unspecified number of pages

in the Run List: No options are required - the number of pages of the
incoming document will be automatically used.
 No Impose Task Processor in Production Plan + specified number of pages in

the Run List: The job will fail if the actual number of pages in the document
does not match the specified number of pages in the Run List.
 Impose Task Processor in Production Plan + unspecified number of pages in

the Run List: If there is an Impose Task Processor in the Plan, you cannot
specify a number of pages: The page count is taken automatically from the
Impose Task Processor. No options are required here. However, you can
choose to accept documents with a different number of pages. You can also
automatically center all pages, as described in “Run List Settings” on
page 756.
Run List Settings
The Run List consists of basic settings and automatic page placement rules.

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
When you create a Parameter Set, you should specify a Parameter Set name. You
can always change this name later by editing the job, choosing the Parameter Set
Settings pane.
Basic Settings
You can specify the number of available placeholders, the page number of the
first page, and the page placement options.

Number of pages The number of pages determines the size of the Run List (i.e., the number of
pages in the job). More precisely, this is the number of available placeholders for
the pages that you want to process.
First page starts at The page number of the first page in the Run List. In most cases, this is ‘1’.
You could for instance change the page number of the first page when you only
have to print a subset of a magazine or a book.
NOTE: This option only affects the page numbers in the Run List and the page
placement rules. It does not affect how the pages are handled by the Imposition
Task Processor. The first page position is always treated as page 1 in the
imposition engine, no matter what the number is.
Multi-part jobs do not support this option. In multi-part jobs, the Run List always
starts at 1, and is read-only.
Place pages in run list There are two ways to place the document’s pages in the Run List:
Manually: You can place the pages in the Run List by drag & drop.
Automatically by file name: You can have Apogee place the page automatically
using document naming conventions. Once you select this option, the Automatic
Page Placement pane appears. For more information see “Automatic Page Place-
ment” below.
Automatically by page label: Apogee places the page automatically according to

the page labels.
Automatically appending all pages: All the pages are placed automatically and
placeholders are appended to accommodate all the pages.
NOTE: Automatic page placement will not work for pages coming from the Public
Page Store.
NOTE: A document cannot be placed in the Run List if the Run List position is
already occupied by a document with a different name.
Center pages with page This option is only available in jobs or Hot Tickets which include an Imposition
adjustments Task Processor in the Production Plan.
If you select this option, the job/Hot Ticket will automatically add Page Imposi-
tion Adjustments (PIA) to every Run List page of each job it creates. These

758 RUN LIST
automatic imposition adjustments are limited to page centering only, and

cannot be distinguished from manual adjustments. If you wish, you can edit or
remove them.
This option is hidden in normal jobs (though you can still use the Page Imposi-
tion Adjustment commands), and in jobs with no imposition (since centering
only makes sense with imposition).
NOTE: You should use the center option in the output device Image operation to
center a page on the output size.
Revisions
These options determine how Apogee will deal with documents that are input
with the same name as documents that are already in the Page Store. These are
often newer versions (revisions) of the same document.
When the run list already Update the run list: Replaces the previous version in the Run List by the newer
contains a previous one, and starts reprocessing. This option is available for both automatic and
revision manual page placement. The Page Store and Run List display a revision number
after each document. The initial document has no revision number. Later
revisions are numbered in order of arrival (or creation), starting with [1].
Do not update the run list: The previous version in the Run List is not automati-
cally replaced: However, you can replace it manually.
Notify: The previous version in the Run List is not automatically replaced:
Instead Apogee sends a notification allowing you to decide what to do. All
processing on results that use pages from the previous revision of the document
are put on hold until you respond to the notification.
When the run list does not Do not notify: Apogee does nothing.
contain a previous revision
Notify: Apogee sends a notification informing you that a new revision has
arrived.
When you receive a new revision notification, you can choose to update the Run
List to use the new document(s), ignore it and keep the previous one(s), or open
the job for editing. This last option allows you to inspect the document and selec-
tively replace pages. For more information, refer to “Message Board” on
page 81.

Automatic Page Placement
NOTE: These settings are only displayed when you choose to place pages in the
Run List automatically. They do not apply to Hot Tickets (since the Run List is
configured to match the number of pages and their order from the incoming
document).
Automatic Page Placement This is where you can specify page placement rules. These rules are displayed in
Rules the Automatic Page Placement table in the order that they are executed. You can
change the order of the rules by the using the up and down arrows, or by
dragging a rule up and down.
Apogee starts with the top rule. if no match is found, it proceeds with the
following rule until a match is found. If Apogee:
 finds a match, it places the pages in the required placeholders.
 does not find a match, it sends a message to the Message Board.
In the Ignore Case check box, you specify whether the rules distinguish between
lower case and upper case. If it is checked, no difference will be made between
lower case and upper case.
NOTE: These rules only apply for automatic page placement. You are always
notified if a document cannot be placed by any of the rules.
If a new document would Update the run list: Replaces the previous version in the Run List by the newer
occupy a run list position one, and starts reprocessing. This option is available for both automatic and
already occupied by a manual page placement. The Page Store and Run List display a revision number
document with a different after each document. The initial document has no revision number. Later
name revisions are numbered in order of arrival (or creation), starting with [1].
Update the run list only when pages are not approved in WebApproval: Does the
same as the previous option if the pages have not yet been approved in the
WebApproval application. Pages are not replaced if they have already been
approved.
Do not update the run list: The previous version in the Run List is not automati-
cally replaced: However, you can replace it manually.
Notify: The previous version in the Run List is not automatically replaced:
processing on results that use pages from the previous revision of the document
are put on hold until you respond to the notification.

760 RUN LIST
 To create rules
 In the Ticket Editor, select the Run List in your Production Plan.
 In the System Overview, access the Parameter Sets dialog box for the Run
List Task Processor and create or edit the Parameter Set in which you
want to create placement rules.
2 Select Automatically in the pages placement section of the Run List pane.
The Automatic Page Placement pane appears.
3 Click the New button to create a new placement rule.
The Placement Rule window appears.
4 Click the Variable button to insert variables.
A drop-down list appears listing the variables that you can insert.
For more information the use of variables, see “Defining the Page Placement
Rules” on page 761.
5 Insert the required variables.
6 Click OK to save the placement rule.
The placement rule appears in the Automatic Page Placement table.
7 In the Parameter Set: Click OK to save the Parameter Set.
8 Close the Parameter Sets dialog box.
 To delete rules
List Task Processor and select the Parameter Set in which you want to
delete placement rules and click the Edit button.
2 Select the placement rule that you want to delete in the Automatic Page
Placement table and click the Delete button:

The placement rule is deleted.
3 In the Parameter Set: Click OK to save the Parameter Set.
 To edit rules
List Task Processor and select the Parameter Set in which you want to edit
a placement rule and click the Edit button
2 Select the placement rule that you want to edit and click the Edit button.
The Placement Rule dialog box appears.
3 Make the required changes and click OK to save the placement rule.
For more information on the use of variables, see “Defining the Page Place-
ment Rules” on page 761.
4 In the Parameter Set, click OK to save the Parameter Set.
Defining the Page Placement Rules
Page placement rules can be defined using wildcards, page number and
document page placeholders, multiple positions, and variables.
Wildcards
A wildcard is a kind of ‘joker’ card, which you can insert in the document name
when defining the placement rule. It ignores the part of the document name
where you have inserted the wildcard.

762 RUN LIST
There are two types of wildcards:
Wildcard Meaning
? Matches any single character,
* Matches any string of one or more characters or no charac-
ter at all.
If you precede the wildcards by a “\”, the characters have their literal meaning.
The following examples will clarify the use of wildcards:
Rule Matches No match

A?B ACB AB
AAB ABC
ABB
AB? ABC AB
ABL ABCD
AB* AB AAB
ABC CAB
ABCCCCC
ABCDFHG23
*AB AB ABC
CAB
DGH235AAB
A*B AB ABC
AFB CAB
AAAAghB
AGHTD4516B
AGFA-H?-*N AGFA-H1-aa2N AGFA-H-Nb2
AGFA-H6-OO5N AGFA-H555-1N
AGFA-H0-002aN
AB\* AB* AB
ABC
Page Number Placeholders
Every placement rule has to contain a placeholder reference. There are the
following types of placeholder references:
 <RLPAGE>: This matches a string of digits of any size.
 <RLPAGE@m>: This matches a string of digits of any size, offset from the
first page by <m> page positions (you must replace ‘m’ by an offset number).
 <RLPAGE:n>: This matches a string of exactly n digits.

 <RLPAGE:n@m>: This matches a string of exactly n digits, offset from the

first page by <m> page positions (you must replace ‘m’ by an offset number).
Placeholder references are placed between the angular brackets - < and >.
NOTE: The <RLPAGE@m> offsets specify an offset that it added to the page
number; the combined sum gives the final Run List position. This allows you to
divide the Run List into different sections each using a different starting position.
It is not possible to read an offset from the file name.
The following examples clarify the use of these placeholder references:
Rule Matches Placeholder No match

ABC -<RLPAGE> ABC-1 1 ABC-P1
ABC-01 1 ABC-0,1
ABC-12345 12345
ABC-<RLPAGE:3> ABC-001 1 ABC-01
ABC-123 123 ABC-P1
A??C-<RLPAGE:2> ABCC-02 2 ABC-1
A2DC-25 25 ABBCD-P02
Multiple Positions
In some rare cases, a page needs to be placed in several positions in the Run List.
To do this, you need to specify two or more <RLPAGE> placeholders in the rule.
However, make sure that the filename matches all placeholders, and that the
number of pages in the document is less than the gap between two successive
run list positions (e.g. a 10-page document cannot be positioned on position 1
and 5).
For example:
Rule Matches Matches

<RLPAGE:2><RLPAGE:2> 6401 1 and 64
0203 2 and 3
1513 13 and 15
Variables
A placement rule can also include one more variables. These variables refer to
certain job attributes such as job name or customer name.

764 RUN LIST
Variable Refers to... in the Administration Tab

$JOB The Job name field
$CUSTOMER The Customer name field
$ORDER The Order number field
$OPERATOR The Operator field
Variables can have a width modifier, through which the variable is replaced with
the exact given amount of characters. If the document name does not corre-
spond to the amount of characters, there are two possibilities:
 If the content is longer than the specified amount, Apogee truncates it.
 If the content is shorter, Apogee pads the document name with “?”.
See “General Examples” below for examples of the width modifier.
NOTE: The variable content cannot contain wildcards, placeholders or other

variables, except for the “?” for padding the document name.
General examples For a job that has the following attributes:
 Job name: AB1234
 Order number: 0106G
 Customer: AGFA
Rule Document name Position
$ORDER-P<RLPAGE:2> 0106G-P01 1
$CUSTOMER*ORDER-?*-<RLPAGE:3> AGFA0106G-A3-004 4
$CUSTOMER??-<RLPAGE:3>?? AGFA5A-102AB 102
$CUSTOMER:3-<RLPAGE:3> AGF-023 23
$CUSTOMER:6-<RLPAGE:3> AGFABE-023 23

Thumbnail Extractor
The Thumbnail Extractor task processor creates thumbnails for bitmap files.
This task process is used in the background for Sign & Display work and no
settings need to be specified.

766 TIFF RENDER
TIFF Render
The TIFF Render Task Processor prepares TIFF or Digital Film for imaging on an
imagesetter or platesetter. TIFF Render provides the equivalent functionality of
the PDF/PS input flow in the Render Task Processor. TIFF Render accepts 1-bit
or 8-bit raster data (TIFF or Digital Film) and outputs the re- screened raster data
on an imagesetter, platesetter or proofer.
TIFF Render performs preparation, separation, and screening of the raster data.
Each of these processes have their individual settings. You can view these
settings either when creating Parameter Sets, or from the Settings pane in the
Plan tab of the Job Manager and the Ticket Editor.
 In the Prepare process, the job’s resolution can be adapted in accordance with
the output device, and the 8-bit raster data can be resampled using one of the
supplied color management profiles (CieLab, Generic, CMYK, etc.). For more
information on these settings, see “TIFF Render Prepare Settings” on
page 767.
 In the Separation process, a composite job is separated into different colors.

On a press, each separated color has its own printing plate, each one printed
in a different angle, producing the final printed color image. In traditional
prepress, color images are separated into four layers corresponding to the
four process colors (CMYK) used in process printing: cyan, magenta, yellow
and black. For more information on these settings, see “PDF Render - Separa-
tion Settings” on page 731.
 In the Screening process, continuous tone files are converted into halftone
dots. This means that the image is converted into a number of dots in the
predefined separation colors. You can enhance the quality of the image by
adjusting the dpi (dots per inch) and the lpi (lines per inch), also called ‘line
frequency’. Every line consists of a number of dots. For more information on
these settings, see “PDF Render - Screen Settings” on page 743.
When you select the TIFF Render Task Processor in the System Overview, the

What is the difference between Render and TIFF Render Task Processors?
Whereas the Render Task Processor accepts PostScript or PDF input data (i.e.,
pre-rendered job data), the TIFF Render Task Processor accepts only raster input
data. (i.e., rendered job data). For more information, see “PDF Render” on
page 720.
TIFF Render Prepare Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Settings pane.
These settings handle both 1-bit and 8-bit data. The settings for these data
formats should be adapted according to the output device you are using.
1-bit
1-bit settings only apply when re-sampling is to be used. If the TIFF Render Task
Processor is used to drive a proofer only, these settings are ignored.
NOTE: Color management is not applied to 1-bit data.
Notify when resampling Select this check box if you want Apogee to send you a notification whenever it
needs to resample the data (i.e. when the input and output resolutions do not
match). The notification allows you to resample the data, or to edit the job. You
can also provide new input using the matching resolution.

768 TIFF RENDER
For 1-bit to 1-bit resampling, only 2540 to 2400 or 120 to 1200 is supported. A
notification is displayed if this option is enabled. 3 to 8, 8 to 3 and 8 to 8 resam-
pling is performed silently for any resolution.
8-bit
8-bit input is always resampled to match the resolution of the output device.
However, here you can specify the resampling algorithm.
Resample Select one of the supplied resampling algorithms.
RGB, CMYK, Gray From input, with fallback: Takes the color profile from the input data if it has one.
If not, it assumes the specified one.
Overrule with / Use: Uses the specified profile, regardless of the input.
Rendering intent From input, with fallback: Takes the Rendering Intent from the input data if it has
one. If not, it assumes the specified one (default setting):
 Absolute Colorimetric
 Relative Colorimetric
 Perceptual
 Saturation
Overrule with / Use: Uses the specified Rendering Intent, regardless of the input.
TIFF Render Separation Settings
The TIFF Render Separation settings are identical to the Render Separation
settings. See “PDF Render - Separation Settings” on page 731.
TIFF Render Screen Settings

The TIFF Render Screen Proofer settings are identical to the Render Screen
settings. See “PDF Render - Screen Settings” on page 743.

770 VERSIONING
Versioning
The Versioning feature allows you to create jobs which contain several different
versions, typically for some or all of the text (for example, using different
languages or prices), and to choose the optimal set of plates to be made. If, for
example, you want to publish a brochure in six different languages, you can
include the Versioning Task Processor in your Production Plan, and then print
several different language versions of the brochure using a single job. The basic
Production Plan is straightforward, using a Versioning Task Processor instead of
a Run List Task Processor, allowing you to optimize the usage of plates to
produce the versions.
For example, your Production Plan could be as follows:
Hot Folder - Normalize - Versioning - Impose - Render - TIFF Imagesetter - Press
No resources are associated with the Versioning Task Processor.
NOTE: The Versioning Task Processor is not available for Hot Tickets.
•
Versioning Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.

Settings pane.
The Versioning Task Processor settings are divided into four tabs:
 Run List: Allows you to specify how pages are input into the Run List.
 Versions: Allows you to define one or more versions within the job; includes
the Create Versions assistant.
 Page Assembly: This is where you specify how Apogee should combine the
different documents and specified layers within the job.
 Plates: This is where you specify the optimal sets of plates that you want to
output.
Name
Settings pane.
Run List
Here, you can specify the number of pages and number of the first page, and the
page placement/adjustment and revision options.
Number of pages The number of pages determines the size of the Run List (i.e., the number of
pages in the job). More precisely, this is the number of available placeholders for
the pages that you want to process.
First page starts at The page number of the first page in the Run List. In most cases, this is ‘1’.
You could for instance change the page number of the first page when you only
have to print a subset of a magazine or a book.
NOTE: This option only affects the page numbers in the Run List and the page
placement rules. It does not affect how the pages are handled by the Imposition
Task Processor. The first page position is always treated as page 1 in the
imposition engine, no matter what the number is.

772 VERSIONING
Page Adjustments Center pages with page adjustments: If you select this option, the job will
automatically add Page Imposition Adjustments (PIA) to every Run List page of
each job it creates. You can edit any resulting page adjustments individually.
For a summary of the page adjustment icons, refer to “Page Store / Run List
Icons” on page 178.
NOTE: You should use the center option in the output device Image operation to
center a page on the output size.
Automatic Page Placement These settings are only displayed when you choose to place pages in the Run List
automatically. Versioning jobs always have a fixed number of pages.
Place pages automatically: If you choose this option Apogee will check
documents as they arrive in the Page Store, and will attempt to place them in the
Run List according to the file and layer name information you provide in the
Page Assembly tab.
NOTE: Automatic page placement will not work for pages coming from a Public
Page Store.
NOTE: A document cannot be placed in the Run List if the Run List position is
already occupied by a document with a different name.
Position Conflict: If a new document would occupy a run list position already
occupied by a document with a different name:
 Update the run list: Replaces the previous version in the Run List by the
newer one, and starts reprocessing. This option is available for both
automatic and manual page placement. The Page Store and Run List display
a revision number after each document. The initial document has no revision
number. Later revisions are numbered in order of arrival (or creation),
starting with [1].
 Do not update the run list: The previous version in the Run List is not
automatically replaced: However, you can replace it manually.
 Notify: The previous version in the Run List is not automatically replaced:
processing on results that use pages from the previous revision of the
document are put on hold until you respond to the notification.

Revisions These options determine how Apogee will deal with documents that are input
with the same name as documents that are already in the Page Store. These are
often newer versions (revisions) of the same document.
When the run list already contains a previous revision:
 Update the run list: Replaces the previous version in the Run List by the
newer one, and starts reprocessing. This option is available for both
automatic and manual page placement. The Page Store and Run List display
a revision number after each document. The initial document has no revision
number. Later revisions are numbered in order of arrival (or creation),
starting with [1].
 Do not update the run list: The previous version in the Run List is not
automatically replaced: However, you can replace it manually.
 Notify: The previous version in the Run List is not automatically replaced:
processing on results that use pages from the previous revision of the
document are put on hold until you respond to the notification.
When the run list does not contain a previous revision:
 Do not notify: Apogee does nothing.
 Notify: Apogee sends a notification informing you that a new revision has
arrived. When you receive a new revision notification, you can choose to
update the Run List to use the new document(s), ignore it and keep the
previous one(s), or open the job for editing. This last option allows you to
inspect the document and selectively replace pages. For more information,
refer to “Message Board” on page 81.
Versions
This is where you specify the different output variations a job will produce by
means of a versions table. You populate this table with versions (rows), the
version elements on which they depend (columns), and the version element
variations (cells) which are used to help select the right content combination for
each version.
# Each version is automatically assigned a specific version number (V1, V2, etc.)
and color code for easy identification.
Version You can enter a name for each version you create (e.g. French, German, Italian).
These names must be unique. Each version has its own set of pages and output.
A versioning job must always have at least one version.

774 VERSIONING
Version Element You can add one or more version “elements” to add extra dimensions to your
versioning job. Typically you would do this if you wanted to add extra categories
for your incoming documents (to be able to include or exclude specific subsets
of data in each version.
Version Management A group of buttons is provided to manage your versions:

buttons
Add: Click this button to add a new version. New versions are automatically
assigned different colors and version numbers. You can rename them as
required.
Duplicate: Click this button to duplicate the selected version. The duplicated
version is automatically assigned a different color and version number, and you
can rename it as required. The Elements values are also copied.
Delete: Click this button to delete the selected version. You are asked to confirm
this action, since deleting a version will also delete any associated Plates data.
Move up / Move down: Click this button to reposition the selected version within
the Versions list.
Auto-fill: Click this cogwheel to automatically fill the version table either with
the names of the PDF layers or the names of the documents in the Page Store.
There are 2 options:
 Auto-fill with PDF layers
 Auto-fill with directory names
NOTE: This does not remove existing entries, nor change them. It only adds
entries for those PDF layers or folder names that are not yet present in the table.
If you have an existing setup and you want to start afresh, you should first delete
the existing entries.
Create Versions button When using the Versioning Task Processor in a production plan, you can click
this button to open the Create Versions assistant. You can also use the Create
Versions assistant when working in the Pages tab. See “Create Versions Assistant
in the Page Store” on page 226.
Version Element Manage- These work the same as the Version Management buttons.
ment buttons

Page Assembly
This is where you specify the layers that Apogee should use to assemble version
pages together with name-matching rules to help populate the layout.
For each version, Apogee must produce a run of version pages. While the content
of a version page is specific to its version, it will likely have elements in common
with pages from other versions. Unlike in a conventional job where pages are
delivered to the job ready-made in their final form, Apogee will combine
separate ingredients to make version pages for you, such that common and
version specific elements can be taken from a variety of sources.
The Page Assembly tab allows you to specify how many items of content are to
be combined, by means of page assembly layers, each of which can hold a page
or a PDF layer from a page. When the content in each assembly layer has become
known and available, Apogee will combine the layers in order into a single
version page, that is, with the first layer rearmost and the last layer foremost.
Name The name of the Run List Layer. Each layer is equivalent to one or more columns
in the Run List.
Range The range of pages in the Run List to which the current layer is applied. By
default, this is all pages (1-$). You can specify ranges in the same way as you do
for the Discard Action (see “Discard Settings” on page 311).
Depends on Choose the version elements that a layer depends on. A layer that does not
depend on any version elements will produce one column in the Run List, and its
contents will be assembled into all versions. A layer that depends on one version
element will produce one column per variation used in the versions table.
PDF Layers The naming convention for the PDF layer.
Layers buttons A group of buttons is provided to manage your layers:
Add: Click this button to add a new layer and default range.
Duplicate: Click this button to duplicate the selected layer.
Delete: Click this button to delete the selected layer. You are asked to confirm
this action, since deleting a layer will also delete any positioned Run List files.
Move up / Move down: Click this button to reposition the selected layer within
the list.
Layer Name: Enter or change the layer name.

776 VERSIONING
Depends on: Apogee displays one check box for each version element column in
the version table. By checking one of these boxes, you are declaring that the layer
will vary according to the variations in the corresponding column in the versions
table. The Run List column corresponding to this layer will in turn be split into a
group of columns - one for each variation that you see in the versions table for
the version elements you selected.
Run List Range: Enter the range of pages in the Run List to which the current layer should
be applied. You can use variables in this field (e.g. 1-$)
File Selection Allows you to enter a pattern to match files by name.
Variable button: allows you to include version elements and system variables in
your patterns. Include a version element in your pattern if you have already
checked ‘Depends On’ for that element. Apogee will then direct matched files to
be used in the appropriate layer variation.
<RLPAGE> position Absolute in Run List: Specifies an absolute position in the Run
List with reference to the specified range.
<RLPAGE> position Relative to RL Page: Specifies a relative position in the Run

List with reference to the specified range.
Content Selection PDF Layers: Allows you to specify a pattern to match PDF layers by name. Include
a version element in your pattern to pick the PDF layer and place that matches
the particular variation used by a version.
Plates
This is where you can define and fine-tune your output - the plate set.
Plate-sharing is a well established procedure when producing multiple versions

of output. Significant savings are made by keeping plates on the press that do not
differ between two consecutive versions of output, as well as providing the
certainty that the reused plates are already proofed.
In the Plates tab you can declare which plates will be used to produce which
versions. Apogee then knows which image data to combine to give you accurate
proofs of each version. This is something that is not possible when using conven-
tional jobs to produce versions. Furthermore, you can adjust the plate setup in
response to any problems arising during processing, such as plates that are held
up by problem pages.
By default, Apogee prints the first version in full CMYK, and the remaining
versions print in K only.

Version Selection list Each version is automatically assigned a specific version number (V1, V2, etc.)
and color code for easy identification. Here, you can select a specific version, in
order to display only the plates that contribute to this version. You can also select
all versions.
Plates cogwheel Group Plates check box: This option allows you to ungroup the plates. By default
the C, M and Y plates are grouped together for easy management, but there may
be situations where you want different settings (e.g., cyan + black). When
selected, each plate is allocated its own on/off button and version selector. Note
that grouping always keeps the K plate separate and groups the remainder of the
process colors as a single set, regardless of the color model. Spot colors always
have their own individual setup.
Edit Press Sheet Versions: Opens the Version Setup dialog box. See “Version
Setup Dialog Box” on page 778.
Signature table Signature: Indicates the signature number.
Version: Indicates the Version number and name.
Front: Indicates the front side of the signature.
Back: Indicates the back side of the signature.
All Click this button to select all plates (CMY and K) for printing.
K Only Click this button to select only the black (K) plates for printing.
None Click this button to deselect all plates for printing.
Restore to Default Click this button to restore the default settings for printing (i.e. first version
prints in full CMYK, and the remaining versions print in K only).
Plate Count Indicates the number of plates that will be printed for each version.
Plate colors
Dark gray-colored plates: These plates will be output for printing.
White-colored plates: These plates will not be output, but they can be used for
soft proofing.
Spot colors
You will see a separate column for each kept spot color used in the job.

778 VERSIONING
Version Setup Dialog Box
The Version Setup dialog box enables you to control how multiple product
versions are arranged on a press sheet to create a mix of versions across the avail-
able press sheets.
 The Version Setup dialog box is opened by clicking the Edit Press Sheet
Versions command in the cogwheel menu in the Plates tab of the Versioning
task processor (production plan in edit mode).
1 2 3
1 Sheet versions with calculated run length

2 Version slots
3 Product versions with requested copy counts
Press Sheets The list of press sheets for the job with the name of the press sheet and the
number of press sheet versions for this press sheet indicated on the right.
Press Sheet Versions The list of sheet versions for the selected press sheet. Initially the list is empty.
Sheet versions (SV1, SV2, etc.) are added by clicking the Add button at the
bottom of the list. Each sheet version has a number of slots that is equal to the
number of fold sheets (or web deliverables) available on the press sheet. Product
versions are assigned to the sheet versions by selecting a product version in the
drop-down list or by dragging versions from the Versions column onto the slots
on the press sheet. Drag a version onto a filled slot to replace the assigned
version. The calculated run length is displayed under the sheet version indicator.

Versions The list of all the available product versions, color-coded with a version number
(V1, V2, V3, etc.), the version name (e.g. English, French, German) and the
requested/actual copy count for each product version. Product versions need to
be assigned to sheet versions and the following color scheme is used to indicate
the status of the copy count:
 black: product version is assigned and requested copy count reached
 red: product version is not yet assigned
 blue: the actual copy count exceeds the requested copy count
Search box Case-insensitive search feature to filter the sheet versions list by assigned
product versions.
Filter on selection Select this check box to filter the sheet versions list by the product version
selected in the Version list.
Cogwheel menu Auto-Assign All: Creates a mix of versions for all press sheets that respects the
requested copy counts with the lowest possible total run length.
Assign All in Order: Fills all the available folding sheets (or web deliverable slots)
with subsequent versions.
Reset All (single-version sheets): Creates a version mix with each version
assigned to its own single-version press sheet (default versioning behavior).
Clear Selected: Clears the version slots of the selected press sheet versions.
Clear All: Clears all version slots on all press sheet versions on all press sheets.

780 VERSIONING

CHAPTER
14 Output Task Processors

The Output Task Processors represent your output devices: imagesetters, plate-
setters and proofers. Apogee provides Task Processors for physical Agfa output
devices, as well as for Generic devices. You can also export your output to file in
PDF or PostScript format.
 Introduction .......................................................................................................... 782

 Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters ............................................................. 784
 Imagesetter and Platesetter Settings .................................................. 786
 Proofers ................................................................................................................... 795
 TIFF/PS Imagesetter .......................................................................................... 806
 TIFF Platesetter .................................................................................................... 811
 TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer ......................................................................................... 813
 Display .................................................................................................................... 821
 Export ....................................................................................................................... 825
 GDI Proofer ............................................................................................................ 833
 JMF Link .................................................................................................................. 837
 Platemaker Link ................................................................................................... 838
 PDF Link ................................................................................................................. 839
 Public Page Store ................................................................................................ 840
 Raster Link ............................................................................................................. 841
 Collect ..................................................................................................................... 842
NOTE: A number of System Resources are associated with each Task Processor.
For more information, see “Task Processor Resources” on page 869.
781
782 INTRODUCTION
Introduction
There are two basic types of Output Task Processors:
 Task Processors for physical output devices. Jobs which include these Task
Processors produce real physical output on the selected devices. These
output devices include imagesetters, platesetters and proofers.
 Task Processors for generic output devices. Generic output Task Processors
process files that can be imaged on third-party physical devices. However,
they are not directly connected to these devices. The following types of
generic output devices may be available:
 TIFF Imagesetter: Provides an imagesetter engine emulation in TIFF

format.
 TIFF Platesetter: Provides a platesetter engine emulation in TIFF format.
 TIFF Proofer: Provides a proofer device emulation in TIFF format.
 PS Imagesetter: Provides a raster file in Adobe’s PostScript format.
 PS Proofer (PS): Provides a proof file in Adobe’s PostScript format.
 PDF Proofer: Provides a proof file in Adobe’s PDF format.
NOTE: Generic output The PS Imagesetter and PS Proofer both output a rendered TIFF file with a
devices can be used for PostScript wrapper. This file can be sent to any device which supports PostScript
testing or demo purposes. input. The output can be done via a Windows spooler, via TCP/IP or to file. The
They can for instance PDF Proofer outputs a rendered TIFF file with a PDF wrapper. This file can be
emulate the timing of a opened in Acrobat as a soft proof.
physical device without
producing real output files. In addition to the above, there is also:
 The Export Task Processor which allows you to output your jobs to file in
either PDF or PostScript format.
 The Public Page Store component (available only when you create a ticket
based on a Public Page Store template). You can use this to create a central
repository of input documents available to all jobs.
 The Remote Proofer Controller (RPC) Task Processor, which provides a low-
cost proofing solution for customers working off-site.
 A series of Link Task Processors, which allow you to output jobs to specific
digital presses.

14 OUTPUT TASK PROCESSORS 783
 The Display Task processor allows you to perform high-fidelity soft-proofing

of rendered results.

784 AGFA IMAGESETTERS AND PLATESETTERS
Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters

Apogee provides a Task Processor for each imagesetter and platesetter. The
settings for each of those are grouped in two sets: Image Settings and Output
Settings. They can be accessed by double-clicking the Parameter Sets icon for the
selected Task Processor in the Resources pane of the System Overview window.
For more information on the settings, see “Imagesetter and Platesetter Settings”
on page 786.
Apogee supports the following Agfa imagesetters and platesetters:
 Imagesetters:
Accuset 800, Accuset 1000, Accuset 1000W, Accuset 1500,
Accuset 1500W, Accuset 1500 Plus
(use the standard AccuSet 1500 Task Processor for the latter).
Avantra 20, Avantra 25, Avantra 25E, Avantra 25S, Avantra 25XT,
Avantra 30, Avantra 30E, Avantra 30S (use the standard Avantra 30 Task Pro-
cessor for the latter),
Avantra 36, Avantra 36S, Avantra 44, Avantra 44E, Avantra 44S, Avantra 44XT.
Avanxis IV (SCSI)
Avanxis IV PIF.
Avanxis VIII, Avanxis XVIII (China only).

(use the standard Avanxis VIII for the latter: There is a configuration setting to
switch to the XVIII version).
Phoenix 2000,
Phoenix 2250,
Phoenix News (Media Profile modes are not supported).
NOTE: “Fill entire drum” ganging is not possible: Apogee only supports “Fill
entire row”.
 Platesetters:

Acento E, Acento LF,

Acento S,
Acento II (PIF).
Avalon LF, Avalon LF VIOLET (use standard Avalon LF Task Processor),

Avalon VLF (50, 60, 70, 80 and 83),
Avalon N4
Avalon N16-50-E, N16-50-S, N16-50-XT,
Avalon N24-50-S/SD, N24-50-XT, N24-70-SD*, N24-70-XT,
Avalon N36-50-S/SD, N36-50-XT, N36-70-SD*, N36-70-XT,
Avalon N8-10-E, N8-10-S, N8-20-E, N8-20-S, N8-20-Sr, N8-50-E, N8-50-S, N8-
50-XT, N8-70-XT.
Galileo Classic, Galileo S, Galileo Talant,
Galileo Thermal, Galileo ThermalS,
Galileo VS, Galileo VS4, Galileo VXT.
Palladio, Palladio E, Palladio 30 and 30 M (Manual) should all use the standard
Palladio Task Processor (SCSI),
Palladio II (PIF),
Avalon V4.
XCalibur 45, XCalibur E, XCalibur E Elite, XCalibur LE, XCalibur S, XCalibur S
Elite, XCalibur XT, XCalibur XT Elite, XCalibur XXT (should all use the standard
X45 Task Processor).
XCalibur VLF 50, XCalibur VLF 60, XCalibur VLF 70, XCalibur VLF 80 (all avail-
able in E, S, XT, and XXT versions).
Supported Third-party Platesetters
The following third-party platesetters are supported by Apogee:
 Trendsetter
NOTE: When you are creating your Production Plan, a Collect for Output action
is automatically added to the Output Task Processor. For more information, see
“Collect for Output” on page 319.
When you select a physical Agfa output device Task Processor in the System
Overview, the following associated resource categories are displayed in the
Resources pane:
 Media
 Halftone Screens

 Linearization Curves
 Output Sizes
 Borders
 Marks
Imagesetter and The settings are very similar for all of the imagesetters and platesetters.
However, some settings may slightly differ depending on the installed features
Platesetter on your output device.
Settings
The settings of imagesetters and platesetters are grouped in two groups:
 Image Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters)
 Output Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters)
 To access the image or output settings

1 In the System Overview window, select the required Task Processor and
double-click the Parameter Set icon in the Resources pane.
The Parameter Sets dialog box appears where you can see the icons for the
Image Settings and the Output Settings.
2 Select one of them.
3 The Parameter Sets dialog box will at least list the initial settings and any
additional Parameter Sets that have been created.
4 Double-click the Parameter Set that you want to edit or select it and click the
Edit button.
Image Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters)


the Settings pane.
on page 326.

Name
Settings pane.
Separation Output and Order
Specify which separations should be output, and in which order. The initial sort
order places the process colors on top, in the same order as specified by the job’s
color space. Spot colors come after the process colors, sorted alphabetically. You
can reorder the separation order with the Up and Down arrows or by dragging
and dropping.
These check boxes are only accessible when the ‘Application Decides’ check box
is deselected in the Separation settings (Hot Tickets only). If ‘Application
Decides’ is selected, you can make no changes to the separation output and
order: This is then controlled by the settings of the input document (as gener-
ated by a front end application, such as Quark).
NOTE: Process colors are not listed if there is no Press Task Processor in the
Production Plan or if you are editing a Parameter Set.
Do not output empty Select this check box, if you do not want Apogee to output empty separations
separations (i.e., separations which do not contain any information: there can always be
separations with only imposition marks). This option is not available for proofer
devices or M-Press.
Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed.

Collated This option is not available for digital printers.
Image
Reading and Polarity You need to set the Reading and the Polarity yourself because Apogee does not
know what media is used for the print job. The preview icon on the right dynam-
ically reflects the chosen state.
Reading: Determines the mirror setting of the image to be output:
 Right Reading
 Wrong Reading
Polarity: Select the required polarity:
 Positive
 Negative
NOTE: The Polarity options are only available for imagesetters.
Orientation You can select one of the four standard orientations (0, 90, 180, 270). You can
also select the Optimized option to have Apogee select a specific orientation to
avoid as much medium waste as possible. If you selected the “Select Automati-
cally” check box, the Orientation is automatically set to “From Output Size”, and
you will need to specify horizontal and vertical positioning.
Border You can select a predefined border from the drop-down list as defined in the
Border Resource category for the imagesetter or platesetter. Select None if you
do not want to have a border at all.
You can enter text as a comment in the Slug Lines section. If the selected border
contains the comment marks, the text will be printed. If not, it will be ignored.
Output Size You can select a predefined output size. You either do this manually or have
Apogee do it for you according to the page or sheet size and the border.
If you choose to do it manually, select one of the available output sizes, or select
<Manual from input> or <Manual from media> from the drop-down list.
Manual from input: The output size is calculated from the page/sheet size and
selected border in the pages of the incoming documents. The resulting Output
Size is not displayed in the list.

Manual from media: The output size is calculated from the media size. This is only
relevant if a specific media is selected.
Select Automatically Select this check box to activate automatic selection. Apogee will then take the
orientation from the predefined Output Size - you cannot change this.
Fallback Here, you can select a fallback output size in case the input has no output size
specified.
Position This field is enabled only if you choose the Select Automatically check box. In the
Position drop-down list, you can select how Apogee positions the image on the
medium. You have two options:
 For Press: Select this option when you are printing imposed sheets that have
to be positioned on a plate. The image to be printed is positioned on the press,
taking into account punch calibration and press attributes.
 Manual: Select this option for manual positioning.

Position Image within Horizontal: Choose Center, or specify an offset in mm or inches.
Output Size
Vertical: Choose Center, or specify an offset in mm or inches.
Horizontal positioning and Center Press Sheet Anchor: select to center a press sheet to the center of the plate
mirroring: relative to an anchor (for web printing and partial webs, which are smaller than
the full width of the press). See “Web Production Schemes” on page 1060.
Mirror position for back of sheet: Select to place the back of an off-center press
sheet in a mirrored position on the back of the sheet.
Position Output on Device Horizontal: Select Center to center the output horizontally
Vertical: Select Center to center the output vertically.
NOTE: Some marks are Apply Ganging: Select Apply Ganging if you want Apogee to position as many
ignored when ganging is pages as possible on the medium. Apogee tiles successive pages across the width
used. The device is designed of the medium, starting in the lower left corner, on to the left side of the next row
in such a way that two rows when the current row is filled. Apogee images each page immediately next to the
are always separated by a other. The amount of space between the adjacent border depends on the
small space. selected border and the ‘Feed between row and pages’ value (Task Processor
Configuration settings).
This check box is enabled when <Manual from Input> or Manual Position is
selected.

Across Jobs: When switched off, Apogee starts a new row before and after a job,
even if it wastes media. This option is only activated when Apply Ganging is
selected.
NOTE: The Ganging options are only available for imagesetters.
Margins The Left and Right margins specify how much extra white space Apogee should
add to the device margins. Preferably, this should be 0. If you have selected the
For Press option from the Position drop-down list, this is 0 and cannot be
changed.
The margins before job and after job specifies an extra amount of media between
two adjacent jobs.
Scale content Use scaling to scale the page content. This does not scale the border, but marks
that are relative to the sheet are repositioned and not scaled.
From the drop-down list, you can turn scaling off, or you can do the scaling
manually by selecting Manual. This activates the following settings:
Width and Height You can specify the scaling percentages for width and height scaling.
 For pages, Width and Height have their starting point in the lower left corner.
Width goes along the bottom edge and Height along the left edge.
 For imposed flats, Width is along the gripper edge and Height along the side
edge.
Constrain proportions Select the Constrain Proportions option if you want to keep both values equal.
Selecting this option will copy the horizontal scale value into the vertical scale
field.
Clip This option specifies what will happen if the image is bigger than the output size.
Clip image: Any areas of the image that fall outside the output size are clipped.
Notify: The job will fail with a user interaction notification. The notification
specifies the image and output sizes, and provides a 'Clip and Continue' option.
Base imaging on This option specifies how the image is clipped but does not influence the output
result.
Trimbox: The image is clipped to the Trimbox size.
All content: The image is clipped to the Mediabox size.

Slug Lines
In this pane you can enter up to four comments that can be part of a border.
These comments are held in the variables $COMMENT1, $COMMENT2,
$COMMENT3 and $COMMENT4.
Each comment can contain one or more variables such as $DATE or $COMPANY.
The comment variables themselves, however, cannot be part of the comment.
For example: Comment 1: Printed by PrintRite on $DATE for $COMPANY.
Output Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters)
NOTE: The Output Settings Some output settings vary depending on the installed features on your engine,
icon is identical to the icon e.g. punching.
for the selected imagesetter
or platesetter. You can access these settings:

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Settings pane.

Media
In this pane, you can select a specific medium or a medium type from the drop-
down list.

Media Select Media, if you want to select a specific medium. In the second drop-down
list, you can further specify the medium type and its size.
The second drop-down list displays all of the compatible media for the output
device that you want to use, regardless of the size of the currently active tray.
Media Type Select Media Type, if you want to select specific media type. You can do this in
the second drop-down list. Apogee is then free to image on any loaded media of
the selected type, whatever size it has.
This option is especially useful when several devices are grouped. Apogee can
choose the most suitable device to minimize media waste.
Imaging
Resolution Select the required resolution from the drop-down list.
NOTE: Changing the resolution might invalidate the selected halftone screen.
Expose You can select the Left & Right Margins and/or the Head-Punch Area check box
if you want to expose the area all around the image. The preview icon on the
right shows you the selected options.
Punch You can activate or deactivate the device punch. Depending on the device, you
have the following options:
Head: The punching will be done at the top of the film. You can further specify
the distance to the image. The value should be at least 12,19 mm.
Tail: The punching will be done at the bottom of the film.
Side punch: The punching will be done on the right side of the film (e.g.
Phoenix).
NOTE: Other punch options may be available, depending on the output engine.
The preview icon reflects the selected punch options.
Compression type Select the compression type from the drop-down list:
(Platesetters)
 No Compression
 LZW Compression
 CCITT mod. Huffman REL

 CCITT Group 3 Fax Encoding
 Macintosh Packbits RLE

Emulating (Platesetters) Select the type of device that you want to emulate:
 Drum Device: In an internal drum recorder, the film is mounted to the inside
surface of a cylindrical drum. While the drum and film remain stationary, the
laser (or optics transmitting the laser beam) spin around the axis of the drum
to image the film. In an external drum recorder, film is mounted on the
outside surface of a cylindrical drum. A laser is mounted so that its beam aims
at the film wrapped around the drum. In this type of recorder, the laser
remains stationary while the drum spins around its axis, exposing the film to
the laser beam.
 Capstan Device: A capstan device feeds media from a roll installed in a supply
cassette, past the laser, and into a takeup cassette or online processor. To
feed the media, a set of rubber rollers pulls the media out of the supply
cassette and another set of rubber rollers pushes the media into the takeup
cassette.
File Parameters (Platesetters)

Create Choose one of the options from the list. The variables in the File name field are
dynamically updated in accordance with your selection:
 Custom
 Single file for all sheets
 Single file per sheet
 Single file per side
 Single file per separation
NOTE: The Create setting determines the grouping of the output (group by page,
job, etc.). This is also the case if Spooler is selected in the Configuration settings.
Save files in Choose either of the options. The variables in the File name field are dynamically
updated in accordance with your selection:
 Directory hierarchy: Files are stored in sub-directories, in a hierarchical

directory structure (see example below).

 Same directory: All files are stored in the same directory, using extended file
names for identification.
File name This field is enabled if you select ‘Custom’ from the Create list. You can then set
up a custom folder structure in which to store your output files. For example, you
could enter the following variable string:
$ORDER\$JOB\$PAGE\$SEPARATION
Export directory Specify the directory in which you want to store the output data. You can use the
Browse button to locate the directory.
File extension Specify a file extension for the separations.
Options Truncate file names exceeding 31 characters: If the filename is longer than the
specified amount, Apogee truncates it. Select this check box to prevent file
names from becoming too long.
Replace existing files: If a file with the same name already exists in the specified
export directory, then the file is automatically replaced by the newly exported
file.
Leave existing files, add sequence number to new file names: If a file with the
same name already exists in the specified export directory, then a revision
number is added to the name of the newly exported file.
Post-process files with Select this check box if you want to process the files with a certain script file. You
script can specify the script in the field next to the check box. You can use the Browse
button to locate the required script file.
Script options Here, you can specify command options.
Disable output This option disables any output possibility. The Generic Imagesetter will then
act as a Null device suitable for training or testing purposes.
Image Quality
You can select the linearization curve. You can either select it manually from the
drop-down list or have it selected automatically through the Auto-select from
map option. Apogee will select the linearization curve according to the look-up
rules of the Linearization Resource Category.
For more information on Linearization Curves, see “Linearization Curves” on

page 956 and on Auto-Select Maps, see “Using Resource Auto-Select Maps” on
page 1069.

Proofers
Apogee provides a Task Processor for each supported proofer. The settings for
each of those are grouped in two sets: Image Settings and Output Settings. They
can be accessed by double-clicking the Parameter Sets icon for the selected Task
Processor in the Resources pane of the System Overview window.
Apogee supports a variety of Agfa and third-party proofers.
The Agfa Sherpa Proofer Family
The Sherpa Family represents the different Sherpa proofers. The following Agfa
Sherpa proofer devices are available:
Proofer Type
GrandSherpa 50 4D, 4DA, 7DA, 7D
GrandSherpa 64 4D, 4DA, 7DA, 7D
GrandSherpaMatic 4D, 4DA
Sherpa 2 4D, 4DA, 7DA, 7D
Sherpa 24 6D
Sherpa 24M 6D, 7P
Sherpa 43 6D, 6DA
Sherpa 44M 6D, 7P
Sherpa 54 6D, 6DA
Sherpa 62 6D, 6DA
SherpaMatic 6D, 6DA
Although there is a Task Processor for each model, the settings are similar.
The Sherpa proofers are provided with Agfa’s QMS X Quality Management
Software. QMS X ensures an identical tonal behavior for the different Sherpas
and verifies the output accuracy. This way, you can have the same output quality
for every Sherpa model.
Supported Third-party Proofer Devices
The following third-party proofer devices are supported by Apogee:

796 PROOFERS
Proofer Type
HP 1050 4D
HP 2500 4D
HP 3500 4D
HP 5500_42 4D
HP 5500_60 4D
HP 750 4D
HP 130 6D
HP 30 6D
HPZ 3100 10P
HPZ 3200 10P
Epson 4900 10P
Epson 7900 10P
Epson 9900 10P
Epson P5000 10P
Epson P5000-V 10P
Epson P7000 10P
Epson P7000-V 10P
Epson P9000 10P
Epson P9000-V 10P
Epson 4400 4P
Epson 7400 4P
Epson 9400 4P
Epson 10000 6D
Epson 4000 7P
Epson T3000 4P
Epson T3000 4P
Epson T3200 4P
Epson T5000 4P
Epson T5200 4P
Epson T7000 4P
Epson T7200 4P
Epson 4800 8P
Epson 4880 8P
Epson 7800 8P
Epson 7880 8P
Epson 9800 8P
Epson 9890 8P
Epson 11880 8P

Proofer Type
Epson P6000 8P
Epson P8000 8P
Epson P10000 9P
Epson P20000 9P
When you select a proofer Task Processor in the System Overview, the following
associated resource categories are displayed in the Resources pane:
 Media, About Task Processor Resources, Marks, Profiles, Color Books
Proofer Image Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Settings pane.

and dropping.

798 PROOFERS
Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed. This option is not available for the
Generic TIFF/PS/PDF Proofers.
Collated This option is not available for the Generic TIFF/PS/PDF Proofers.
Image
The Image pane is similar to the one in the Image Settings of the imagesetter and
the platesetter.
Reading You need to set the Reading yourself because Apogee does not know what media
is used for the print job. The preview icon on the right dynamically reflects the
chosen state.
 Right Reading
 Wrong Reading
Border Select the required predefined border from the drop-down list as defined in the
Border Resource category.
Output Size Select the appropriate output size from the drop-down list. This can be a fixed
size (A4, Letter, etc.) or the size can be set to depend on the input, part or media
(Manual from input, Manual from part, Manual from media). For example,
Output from part is useful for WebApproval jobs.

Select Automatically: Select this check box to have Apogee automatically select
the output size. In this case, the Orientation is automatically set to “From Output
Size”, and you will need to specify horizontal and vertical positioning.
Fallback Here, you can select a fallback output size (Width and Height) in case the input
has no output size specified.
Position Image within Horizontal: Choose Center, or specify an offset in mms.

Output Size
Vertical: Choose Center, or specify an offset in mms.
Position Output on Device Center output size horizontal on device: Select this check box for horizontal
centering.
Apply Ganging: Select this check box if you want to apply ganging. This check box
is only enabled when Manual is selected for Position.
Across Jobs: When switched off, Apogee starts a new row before and after a job,
even if it wastes media. This option is only activated when Apply Ganging is
selected.
Margins The Left and Right margins specify how much extra white space Apogee should
add to the device margins. Preferably, this should be 0. If you have selected the
For Press option from the Position drop-down list, this is 0 and cannot be
changed.
The margins before job and after job specifies an extra amount of media between
two adjacent jobs.
Scale content From the drop-down list, you can activate scaling to scale the page content. This
does not scale the border, but marks that are relative to the sheet are reposi-
tioned and not scaled.
You can select different scaling modes from the drop-down list.
Off: If you do not want apply scaling, select Off from the drop-down list. The
settings will be greyed out.
Size to fit: This option proportionally scales the images up or down to fit the
media size.
Enlarge to fit: This option proportionally scales the image up to fit the media size.
When the image is larger than the media size, it will not scale up.
Shrink to fit: This option proportionally scales the image down to fit the media
size. When the image is smaller than the media size, it will not scale down.

800 PROOFERS
NOTE: The automatic scaling options are only available when an output size or
the <manual from media> option is selected. It is not available when the
<manual from input> option is selected.
Manual: This option enables the Width and Height scale fields.
You can specify the scaling percentages for width and height scaling.
edge.
Constrain proportions: Select the Constrain Proportions option if you want to

keep both values equal. Selecting this option will copy the horizontal scale value
into the vertical scale field.
Base imaging on This option specifies how the image is clipped but does not influence the output
result.
Rule-up
You can have a proofer print a rule-up. These are lines that correspond with the
expected page positions on the template and the actual crop box from the pages.
Pages You can print a rule-up for:
 Artbox
 Trimbox
 Bleedbox

 Mediabox
Imposition You can print a rule-up for:
 Press Sheet
 Page Placeholders
Output You can print a rule-up for:
 Output Size
Die/CAD  Design lines: Select the check mark to choose a Line Appearance Set from
the list or click the arrow to open the Line Appearance editor. See
“Finishing Hub” on page 920.
For each of the above, you can select the color from the drop-down list (Red,
Green, Blue, etc.), and a point size for the lines (0,25 pts, 0.50 pts, 0.75 pts
or1.00 pts). You can also specify whether you want a dashed or a solid line.
NOTE: You can only print a rule-up if you use an Impose Task Processor in your
Production Plan.
Slug Lines
Proofer Output Settings


802 PROOFERS
the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Settings pane.
Media
In this pane, you can select a specific medium, medium type or tray from the
drop-down list.
Tray You can choose either of the following:
 Manual sheet
 Roll
Image Quality
Quality Map Choose the quality map to be used for printing. The available quality maps
depend on the selected device.
Ink Table Choose the ink table to be used for printing. The available ink tables depend on
the selected device. Select the Auto-select from map check box, if you want
Apogee to select an ink table for you according to the job settings. In this case,
the Ink Table selection list is disabled.

Proofer Profile The Proofer Profile drop-down list shows all of the available profiles for the
selected device. Select the Auto-select from map check box, if you want Apogee
to select a proofer profile for you according to the job settings. In this case, the
Proofer Profile selection list is disabled.
Rendering Intent There are 4 different Rendering Intents available, although not all profiles
contain Look Up tables (LUTs) for each of the 4. Usually there are only 3 repre-
sented. In this case often a duplicate of one Look Up table is used for missing
Render Intent LUT. The Rendering Intent defines the way the source colors are
mapped to the destination space.
The following rendering intent options are available:
Relative Colorimetric: A colorimetric conversion, tries to maintain the exact

colors will be clipped. With Relative Colorimetric RI the white point from source
color space is mapped to the white point of destination, this means that white
stays white. No ink will be placed in white areas.
Absolute Colorimetric: Absolute Colorimetric rendering intent is similar to

Relative except that here the white point of the 2 profiles is preserved. White of
source color space is simulated with CMYK values from the destination color
space. The consequence is that every white object/area is covered with certain
ink amounts.
Perceptual: Perceptual aims to preserve the visual relationship between colors so

it is perceived as natural to the human eye. The relationship between out of
gamut colors is maintained. This can result in inaccuracies for in gamut colors as
well.
Saturation: Saturation tries to produce vivid colors in an image at the expense of

color accuracy
NOTE: The result of choosing a rendering intent depends on the graphical

content of documents and on the profiles used to specify color spaces. Some
profiles produce identical results for different rendering intents. Differences
between rendering intents are apparent only when you print a document or
convert it to a different working space.
Advanced CMM Recent developments in the Color Management engine offer ‘Smart CMM’,
which provides better blending of converted spot colors. However, this comes at
a small cost: it is a little slower.
Process Colors Don’t color manage: Select this option to disable color management.

804 PROOFERS
Color manage from Press to Proofer profile: Select this option to color manage
from Press to Proofer profiles.
Color manage using Device Link Profile: Select this option to color manage using a
Device Link Profile.
NOTE: Apogee dynamically creates a Device Link Profile when an optimized

proofer profile is used with Advanced CMM enabled.
 Device Link: Select a Device Link Profile.
 Exception: You can choose here whether or not you want Apogee to take into
account any color exceptions. For more information see “Profiles” on page
509.
 None: Apogee will not take into account any color exceptions.
 Default Exception Dictionary: Apogee will take into account color excep-
tions from the default color exception dictionary.
Auto-select Select an Auto-select check box if you want Apogee to automatically make selec-
tions for you according to the job settings.
Spot Colors Accurate spot color mixing: In this enhanced mode, spot color visualization is
following:
 Off
 Max. 2 colors
 Max. 3 colors
 Max. 4 colors

Simulate Paper Stock You can simulate two aspects of the Paper Stock used for the job:
 White Point: Select to simulate the color of the paper stock on the proof.
 Texture: Select this check box to apply the texture (fiber and grain of the
paper) specified in the Paper Stock resource. If no texture is selected for
the Paper Stock, it will not be simulated.
Dot for dot Defines how to proof the screening dots from the main result. You can also
enable Close Loop Control or let the system select a CLC profile automatically
(Auto-select).
NOTE: The Dot for dot option requires Digital Film Proof in the flow.
•

806 TIFF/PS IMAGESETTER
TIFF/PS Imagesetter
The TIFF and PS Imagesetters emulate third-party physical imagesetters, and

have two groups of settings:
 TIFF/PS Imagesetter Image Settings
 TIFF/PS Imagesetter Output Settings
NOTE: When you are Why is there a TIFF Imagesetter and a PS Imagesetter?
creating your Production
Plan, a Collect for Output  The TIFF Imagesetter provides an imagesetter engine emulation in TIFF
action is automatically format.
added to the Output Task
Processor. For more  The PS Imagesetter provides a raster file in Adobe’s PostScript format (a
information, see “Collect for rendered TIFF file with a PostScript wrapper). This file can be sent to any
Output” on page 319. device which supports PostScript input. The output can be done via a
Windows spooler, via TCP/IP or to file.
When you select the TIFF or PS Imagesetter Task Processor in the System
Resources pane:
 Media, Halftone Screens, Linearization Curves, Output Sizes, Borders,

Marks, PostScript Headers (for the PS Imagesetter only)
TIFF/PS Imagesetter Image Settings
The Image Settings of the TIFF/PS Imagesetter are the same as for most image-
setters. For more information, see “Image Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and
Platesetters)” on page 786.
TIFF/PS Imagesetter Output Settings

The Output Settings group all of the output settings for the TIFF/PS Imagesetter
Task Processor.

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Settings pane.
Media
down list.
Imaging
Resolution Specify the Resolution in dpi for Width and Height.
 No Compression

 LZW Compression
 CCITT mod. Huffman REL

Emulating Select the type of device that you want to emulate (TIFF Imagesetter only):
the laser beam.
cassette.
Encoding type Select your data encoding format (PS Imagesetter only):
 Binary
 ASCII Hex
 ASCII-85
PostScript header Optionally select a PostScript header, if this resource is available (PS Image-
setter only).
 Custom

job, etc.). This is also the case if Spooler is selected in the Configuration settings.

Browse button to locate the directory.
File extension Specify a file extension for the separations.
file.
Disable output This option disables any output possibility. The Generic Imagesetter will then
act as a Null device suitable for training or testing purposes.

Image Quality
Bits per pixel 1: Detailed 1-bit high resolution data (each raster point is represented by a single
display pixel).
8: 8-bit contone data.
Linearization Select the Linearization Curve to be applied from the drop-down list.
Select the Auto-select from map check box, if you want Apogee to select it for you
according to the job settings.

TIFF Platesetter
The TIFF Platesetter emulates a third-party physical platesetter, in TIFF format.
There are two groups of settings:
 TIFF Platesetter Image Settings
 TIFF Platesetter Output Settings
When you select the TIFF Platesetter Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Media
 Halftone Screens
 Output Sizes
 Borders
 Marks
TIFF Platesetter Image Settings
These are the same as the Agfa Platesetter Image settings (see “Image Settings
(for Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters)” on page 786).

812 TIFF PLATESETTER
TIFF Platesetter Output Settings
These are the same as the TIFF/PS Imagesetter Output settings (see “TIFF/PS
Imagesetter Output Settings” on page 806).

TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer
The TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer simulates a real proofer for testing or demo purposes.
Why are there three types of Proofer?
 TIFF Proofer: Provides a proofer device emulation in TIFF format.
NOTE: These generic output  PDF Proofer: Provides a proof file in Adobe’s PDF format. It outputs a
devices can be used to rendered TIFF file with a PDF wrapper. This file can be opened in Acrobat as
emulate the timing of a a soft proof.
physical device without
producing real output files.  PS Proofer: Provides a proof file in Adobe’s PostScript format. It outputs a
rendered TIFF file with a PostScript wrapper. This file can be sent to any
device which supports PostScript input. The output can be done via a
Windows spooler, via TCP/IP or to file.
The TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer Task Processor consists of two groups of settings:
 TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer Image Settings
 TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer Output Settings
When you select the TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer Task Processor in the System
Resources pane:
 Media
 Output Sizes
 Borders
 Marks

814 TIFF/PS/PDF PROOFER
 Profiles
 Color Books
TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer Image Settings
These are the same as the Agfa Proofer Image settings (see “Proofer Image
TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer Output Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Settings pane.
Media
down list.

Imaging
 No Compression
 LZW Compression
 JPEG Compression (various qualities)
 Runlength Encoding (Packbits)

Emulating Select the type of device that you want to emulate (TIFF Proofers only):
the laser beam.
cassette.
Encoding type Select your data encoding format (PS and PDF Proofers only):
 Binary

 ASCII Hex
 ASCII-85
PostScript header Optionally select a PostScript header, if this resource is available (PS Proofers
only).
 Custom
job, etc). This is also the case if Spooler is selected in the Configuration settings.


Browse button to locate the directory. By default, these are:
 PDF Proofer: \\$COMPUTER\ProoferPDFRoot\$DEVICE\
 TIFF Proofer: \\$COMPUTER\ProoferTIFFRoot\$DEVICE\
 PS Proofer: \\$COMPUTER\ProoferPSRoot\$DEVICE\
File extension Specify the format of the result that you want to export (pdf, tif, ps).
file.

Disable output This option disables any output possibility. The Proofer will then act as a Null
device suitable for training or testing purposes.
Image Quality
Bits per pixel (TIFF Proofer only)
1: Detailed 1-bit high resolution data (each raster point is represented by a single
display pixel).



ink amounts.

well.

color accuracy


509.
 Dot for dot: Auto select option for CLC.

NOTE: The Dot for dot option is only available for SherpaDot supported
proofers.
following:
 Off
 Max. 2 colors
 Max. 3 colors
 Max. 4 colors

Display
Together with the Render Task Processor, the Display Task Processor allows you
to create results for high-fidelity color-managed display proofing in Raster
Preview. By taking into account the specifics of a given display device, the
Renderer can create optimized, 8-bit results for viewing on this device.
A color-managed display proof allows you to preview rendered results using

color management to convert the press color space to the monitor color space
based on ICC profiles. With a calibrated monitor environment and correctly
configured monitor profile, contract-proofing quality should be achieved. This is
a licensed feature.
The Display Task Processor represents a computers’ display device (also referred
to as ‘monitor’). In order to display high frequency elements —such as fine text
or line art— properly on a monitor, the image must be rendered at a sufficiently
high resolution. To guarantee that the image is displayed with the correct size,
the rendered resolution must be an integer multiple of 2 of the display’s
hardware resolution (dpi).
To accomplish this when preparing a result for color-managed display proofing,

the Renderer creates a set of images, starting at half the display’s hardware
resolution (dpi) and each one having twice the resolution (dpi) of the previous
one. For example, if the display’s hardware resolution (dpi) is 96 dpi, the
Renderer creates images at 48, 96, 192, 384, and 768 dpi. The actual number of
images created depends on the job’s settings.
When viewing the results, Raster Preview selects the proper image, according to
the zoom factor you choose. However, you cannot zoom in to ‘raster’ (1-bit)
zoom level, simply because there is no 1-bit raster data. You need to preview the
high resolution main flow to do that.
When you select the Display Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Borders
 Marks

822 DISPLAY
Display Image Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name
Settings pane.
Border
Apogee can create a border around the image. Such a border could contain a
patch allowing you to measure onscreen the quality of the display. You can select
a border from the drop-down list (the default selection is None). For more infor-
mation, refer to “Borders” on page 891.
Rule-up
The Display Task Processor can print a rule-up. These are lines that correspond
to the expected page positions on the template and the actual crop box from the
pages.
Pages You can print a rule-up for:
 Art box
 Trim box

 Bleed box
 Media box
Imposition You can print a rule-up for:
 Press Sheet
 Expected Page Size

Output You can print a rule-up for:
 Output Size
For each of the above, you can select the color from the drop-down list (Red,
Green, Blue, etc.), and a point size for the lines (0,25 pts, 0.50 pts, 0.75 pts or
1.00 pts). You can also specify whether you want a dashed or a solid line.
NOTE: You can only print a rule-up if you use an Impose Task Processor in your
Production Plan.
Display Output Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Name

824 DISPLAY
Settings pane.
Render for viewing at
Enter the display’s resolution (dpi) at which the image will be viewed (the range
is 72-150 dpi, inclusive). Viewing the image at this display resolution guarantees
geometrical correctness (i.e. the dimensions on the display match the dimen-
sions of the printed result). Common resolutions are 72 dpi and 96 dpi. The
default is 96 dpi.
NOTE: Do not confuse the display resolution with the render resolution. For
optimal viewing results, the entered resolution (dpi) should match the device’s
hardware resolution (dpi), and the display resolution (pixels x pixels) should
match the optimum display resolution (pixels x pixels). This guarantees
geometrically correct images without resampling. ColorTune Display and Raster
Preview will warn you if these conditions are not met.
Maximum Viewing Zoom Level
This is the maximum zoom level that is normally used when viewing the image
in Raster Preview. Together with the target resolution, this determines the
maximum render resolution. Possible values are 2x, 4x, 8x, 16x and 32x. The
default is 8x.
NOTE: This directly affects the number of images Apogee has to render, and
therefore the required processing time. Apogee creates the different images at
resolutions between 1:2 through to the target resolution, in steps of 2x.
The zoom level in Raster Preview is relative to the target resolution. As a result,
zoom level 1x guarantees a geometrical correct image when viewed on the
target display Select the maximum viewing level that you will allow. This may
be 2X, 4X, 8X, 16X, or 32X.

Export
The Export Task Processor exports the latest processed results from the Produc-
tion Plan to a specific directory, in either PDF or PostScript format. This allows
you to process the PDF/PS documents on a remote system.
When you select the Export Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 PostScript Headers
 XSLT Conversions
Export Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
The Export settings are divided into two tabs, one dealing with export format
options, and the other dealing with the destination options.
Name

826 EXPORT
Settings pane.
Export
You can specify the format in which you want to export the results. There are two
options:
 PS - PostScript format
 PDF format
Save result as PS
Content Insert PostScript header: If you select this check box, the associated list box is
enabled, where you can select the PostScript header that you want to insert in
your exported file. For more information, refer to “PostScript Headers” on
page 1030.
 Collate
 DuplexFlipLongEdge
 DuplexFlipShortEdge
 Manual Feed
 Select Tray
Checksum:
 None
 Create
 Compare against
Images If you have enabled Alternate Images in your Normalizer configuration (Service
access level is required to do this), then a set of alternate low resolution images
will be created. You can configure the Export Task Processor to remove either
the high or low resolution images from your files by choosing one of the
following:
High resolution only: Select this option if you are going to print the output. You
should also always select this option when certification is used (see below).

Low resolution only (for display): Select this option if you are not going to print the
output.
NOTE: PostScript files cannot contain both resolutions.
Content Trimbox:
 Preserve original trimbox
 Expand to include image’s border
Save result as PDF

Content Trimbox: Allows you to control the trimbox:
 Preserve original trimbox: The exported PDF file has the same trimbox as the
original PDF. In other words, the existing trimbox remains unchanged.
 Expand to include borders: The trim box of the exported PDF file is changed
to include a border added by Apogee. If there is no border, the trim box
remains unchanged.
Images If you have enabled Alternate Images in your Normalizer configuration (Service
access level is required to do this), then a set of alternate low resolution images
will be created in your PDF files. You can specify which versions of the images
you want to include in the exported PDF by choosing one of the following:
NOTE: This only applies to PDFs which contain images.
Include as is: The exported PDF will contain whatever images are present in the
document that was input of the Export Task Processor. Although this requires no
processing, the disadvantage is that you cannot be sure about the image content
of the exported PDF. You should therefore not select this unless you are sure
about the input to the Export Task Processor.
Include high and low resolution: The exported PDF will contain a high resolution
and a low resolution version of each image.
NOTE: The exported PDF will contain exactly one alternate image, regardless of
the number of alternate images in the incoming PDF.
 Optimize for display: Select this check box to control which version to use as
the main image. When you view a file in Acrobat, you will see the main
images. When the PDF is created with viewing in mind, the low resolution

828 EXPORT
image is the main image, and the high resolution image is the alternate
image. The images can be tagged so that when printing the file, the high
resolution image is used. However, some application may not honor this tag;
they simply assume the main image is the one you need. In that case, you
must make the high resolution version the main one.
Optimize for display Main image Alternate image
Selected low resolution high resolution
Deselected high resolution low resolution
 Create low resolution images: Allows you to choose how to include the low
resolution images:
 Always: Apogee will generate a low resolution version at the specified

target resolution by down-sampling the high resolution image. This
ensures that the low resolution version is synchronized with the high
resolution version. The drawback is that creating low resolution images
takes some time.
 Only if not present: Apogee will simply use the low resolution image if it
is present. If it is not present, Apogee creates one at the specified target
resolution.
 Only if different resolution: Apogee will only use low resolution images if
they match the specified target resolution.
 Target: Specify the desired target resolution, in pixels per mm.
Include high resolution only: Apogee keeps the high-resolution images in the
exported files and discards the low-resolution images. Use this when sending
files to be printed, especially when you require certification.
NOTE: ‘High resolution’ simply refers to the image version with the highest
resolution, even if this highest resolution is only 12 dpi. To ensure the PDF is
press-ready, you should therefore use a Preflight action to check the resolution.
Include low resolution only (display): Apogee keeps the lowest resolution images
in the exported files and discards the high-resolution images. Use this when you
want to export small files (e.g. for mailing them to the client for inspection). To
ensure you really send low resolution images, select “Always” create low resolu-
tion images.
 Create low resolution images: Allows you to choose how to include the low
resolution images:

 Always: Apogee will generate a low resolution version at the specified

target resolution by down-sampling the high resolution image. This
ensures that the low resolution version is synchronized with the high
resolution version. The drawback is that creating low resolution images
takes some time.
 Only if not present: Apogee will simply use the low resolution image if it
is present. If it is not present, Apogee creates one at the specified target
resolution.
 Only if different resolution: Apogee will only use low resolution images if
they match the specified target resolution.
 Target: Specify the desired target resolution, in pixels per mm.

Thumbnails Specify whether or not to include thumbnails:
Include thumbnails: When you choose to include them, you have the same
“Create” options as with images. Note that the default thumbnail resolution is 12
dpi.
Exclude thumbnails: Makes a PDF without thumbnails, removing existing

thumbnails.
Thumbnails as is: Keeps the existing thumbnails, if any.
Preflight/Certify Choose one of the following options:
OFF: No options are visible in this pane if you select this option.
Certify with Enfocus Preflight/Run Enfocus Preflight: You can choose to combine
the export with a preflight check. Click the associated profile list and choose one
of the available preflight profiles from the Preflight Profiles resource category.
When certification fails: You need to specify how Export should proceed if certifi-
cation fails:
 Notify: The export is halted, and a notification message is generated.
 Continue and put in sub-directory: The export continues, and the results are
written to the folder of your choice.
Save Preflight report next to PDF file: .Select this option to save the preflight
report when a PDF file is written. This happens when the certification succeeds,
or when the certification fails with the 'Continue' option selected. The report file
is saved in the same directory as the PDF file.

830 EXPORT
Only for warnings and errors: Saves the preflight report only when there were
warnings or errors. When there are no warnings or errors, no report is written.
Save Apogee Preflight report: Choose one of the following options:
 Only for fixes, warnings and errors
 Ignore out-of-date reports
Destination
Output via You can select the required output channel from the drop-down list.
 File
 FTP
 LPR (PostScript output only)
 AppleTalk (PostScript output only)
 TCP/IP (PostScript output only)
 Windows Spooler (PostScript output only)
File
Create Select how you want Export to create files:
 Custom
 Single file per job
 Single file per signature
 Single file per web
 Single file per page
 Single file per Run List page

Save files in Select a folder structure in which you can store your output files.
Directory hierarchy: The files will be saved in the specified subdirectory hierarchy
(e.g. $ORDER\$JOB\$DOCPAGE).

Same directory: The files will be all be saved at the same directory hierarchy (e.g.
$ORDER_$JOB_$DOCPAGE).
The variables will be separated by a slash if you select Directory hierarchy. This
means that a directory will be made according to the file name. The variables
will be separated by an underscore if you select Same directory.
The folder structure corresponds to the following variable string:
$ORDER\$JOB\...
...followed by variables corresponding to your selected “Create” criteria.
For example, if you chose to create a “Single file per signature” and save files in
a Directory hierarchy, a directory would be automatically created based on the
following variables: $ORDER\$JOB\$SIGNATURE.
Export directory You can specify to which directory you want to export your results. Again, you
can use variables to create it automatically, or you can also use the Browse
button to locate the directory.
File extension Specify the format of the result that you want to export.
file.
FTP
FTP output is similar to file output. However, here you also need to specify the
FTP server (Host and Port), and the Username and Password with which Apogee
can log into that server. Leave Username and Password empty to use anonymous

832 EXPORT
FTP. In this case, the system administrator’s e-mail address will be used as
password.
You can also select whether to use Passive FTP mode or not. If you are behind a
firewall, you may need to use a proxy. You can use the core server’s proxy config-
uration (which may require no proxy server), or you can specify one yourself.
Leave the User name and Password empty if you do not need to authenticate.
NOTE: The Base directory is relative to the login home directory.
LPR (PostScript output only)

The LPR options are applicable when you choose to print results using the LPR
protocol. The LPR output requires the Host and Queue name you want to
connect to.
AppleTalk (PostScript output only)

The AppleTalk options are applicable when you choose to print results using the
AppleTalk protocol. AppleTalk output requires the Zone and Printer name you
want to connect to.
TCP/IP (PostScript output only)

The TCP/IP options are applicable when you choose to print results using the
TCP/IP protocol. TCP/IP output requires the Host and Port name you want to
connect to.
Windows Spooler (PostScript output only)

The Windows Spooler options are applicable when you choose to print results
using the Windows Spooler. Windows Spooler output requires the name of the
printer you want to connect to.

GDI Proofer
The GDI Proofer is an indirect generic device driver, which can be used when no
dedicated Apogee proofer device is supported. This device driver uses the
standard Windows printer driver architecture.
When you select the GDI Proofer in the System Overview, the following associ-
ated resource categories are displayed in the Resources pane:
 Media, Profiles, Color Books, Output Sizes, Borders, Marks, Contrast Adjust-
ments, Simulation Curves.
GDI Proofer Image Settings
These are the same as the Agfa Proofer Image settings (see “Proofer Image
GDI Proofer Output Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 326.
Settings pane.

834 GDI PROOFER
Media
In this pane, you can select a specific medium, medium type or tray from the
drop-down list.
Image Quality
Bits per pixel 1: Detailed 1-bit high resolution data (each raster point is represented by a single
display pixel).
Simulation Select the Simulation Curve from the drop-down list. The list contains all of the
curves currently available in the Simulation Curves Resource category.
Select None if you do not use simulation.



ink amounts.

well.

color accuracy



836 GDI PROOFER
509.
 Dot for dot: Auto select option for CLC.
NOTE: The Dot for dot option is only available for SherpaDot supported
proofers.
Auto-select Select an Auto-select check box if you want Apogee to automatically make selec-
tions for you according to the job settings.
following:
 Off
 Max. 2 colors
 Max. 3 colors
 Max. 4 colors

JMF Link
The JMF Link Task Processor is used to transport PDF data from the local Apogee
system to a remote site using JMF (the remote site could be another Apogee
system). This Task Processor links both sites bidirectionally, producing interme-
diate files and sending them to the remote site. JMF Link can also capture and
show the status of the remote site. This task processor is also used to connect to
digital presses with the DigitalPrintLink option.
JMF Link is closely related to the Export Task Processor: Basically, JMF Link is a
PDF Exporter that specializes in JMF.
No resources are associated with the JMF Link.

838 PLATEMAKER LINK
Platemaker Link
The PlateMaker Link Task Processor is used to set up an integration between two
Apogee Systems. The first Apogee System is used as normal: The second Apogee
System is called the Apogee PlateMaker System.
No resources or settings are associated with the PlateMaker Link.
PlateMaker Link Configuration
This dialog box allows you to specify the configuration settings of the Plate-
Maker Link.
JDF/JMF Communication
PlateMaker server name The name of the PlateMaker server.
Acknowledge time-out The maximum time in seconds that Apogee waits for an acknowledgement
message after submitting a JMF job to the digital press system. If no acknowl-
edgement is received within the specified time, the job produces an error.
JDF Device ID In a JDF-controlled environment, each device/system/subsystem has its own ID.
This ID is the JDF Device ID of the digital press system. Apogee needs to know
the JDF Device ID of each system it communicates with: When Apogee receives
a JMF message with a device status, it looks at the JDF Device ID in the message.
Apogee then looks for a Link or Digital Press Task Processor with the corre-
sponding JDF Device ID. Once Apogee knows for which Task Processor the
message was intended, it can act accordingly (e.g. set the Task Processor status,
or log a message for that Task Processor).

PDF Link
This task processor sends PDF data to digital printers. No settings need to be
specified.

840 PUBLIC PAGE STORE
Public Page Store
A Public Page Store is a repository of pages available for all jobs. To create a
Public Page Store, you need to create a job based on the Public Page Store job
template. Any documents or pages that are input via the Public Page Store input
channel will then appear in the Pages tab, and will be available for all jobs. From
here, users are free to select pages or documents, and include them in their job
Run Lists. A Public Page Store can be viewed and accessed by all users. You can
consider it as a central repository of documents ready to be processed.
You assign a unique name to the Public Page Store, and can create as many
Public Page Stores as you require.
Automatic page placement will not work if your Production Plan contains a
Public Page Store Task Processor (see “Run List Settings” on page 756). You
must manually add documents or pages from the Page Store to the Run List.
No settings or resources are associated with a Public Page Store.

Raster Link
This task processor sends raster data to digital printers. No settings need to be
specified.

842 COLLECT
Collect
A Collecting Hot Ticket is used to create a wide-format job that is filled with
multiple images collected from multiple files or multi-page files.
No resources are associated with this task processor.
Related topics: •
Submit Ticket Template using

Shows the Wide-Format Ticket Template that will be used for processing. Click
in the drop-down list to see your available Wide-Format Ticket Templates and
choose a template. The Collecting Hot Ticket cannot be submitted if a template
is not selected.
Layout
These are the options you have for arranging the images on the sheet or sheets.
Rotation Choose whether you want to rotate images by 90° or 270° so they fit better on the
sheet.
Group images by property Choose one or more variables from the drop-down list to group images on the
sheet. You can Keep groups on separate sheets if you want.
Maximum length Specify the length if roll media will be used.
Coverage zones
In this panel you can set conditions for submitting the layouts automatically
based on the coverage of the sheets, i.e. the percentage of the media surface that
is covered by images.
Zone A Set a threshold percentage (Coverage is less than) or minimum length if roll
media is used for never submitting.
Zone C Set a minimum threshold percentage (Coverage is at least) for submitting

automatically.

Zone B If sheets remain between the set thresholds (Zone A and Zone C) in a queue, you
can specify when you want to be notified and when you want them to be
submitted anyway.

844 COLLECT

CHAPTER
15 Print Task Processors

Print Task Processors represent the printing devices on which you will print the
output generated by Apogee. Each printing device that you define at installation
will be represented by a unique Print Task Processor.
The settings and resources for installed Print Task Processors can be derived
from the following task processors:
 “Generic Press” on page 846 for commercial presses
 “Generic SD (Sign and Display Printer)” on page 857 for Sign and Display
(SD) digital printing devices: Anapurna, Jeti, etc.
 “Generic Digital Press” on page 861 for digital commercial printing presses:
Canon, HP Indigo, Konica Minolta, Océ PrismaSync, etc.
845
846 GENERIC PRESS
Generic Press
The Generic Press Task Processor has no attributes except its name. It has no
type (sheet/web), no setback (Distance plate to sheet edge), no plate size, no
clamp margins and no InkDrive settings.
There is therefore no need to install multiple instances, and no need for load
balancing since the processing of a Generic Press is limited to writing the
InkDrive file.
When you select the Generic Press Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Borders, Marks, Profiles, Color Books, Paper Stock, Calibration Curves,

Simulation Curves, WebGrowth Profiles, Ink Sets, InkTune Sets.
Generic Press Print Settings

the Settings pane.
on page 288.
Settings pane.

15 PRINT TASK PROCESSORS 847
Parameter Set Lookup

Enter keywords, separated with a comma, so the appropriate Image and Output
parameter sets, and the Render-Screen parameter set can be selected automati-
cally from the press. Use the same keywords in the name of the appropriate
parameter sets for these resources. Select the check box to also use the name of
the press as a keyword. The lookup is activated by selecting the Select
automatically from press check box for these resources in the panel under the
plan.
Printing Tab
Paper Type Select the appropriate paper type from the drop-down list. The list contains all
of the paper stocks in the Paper Resource category that are compatible with the
selected press.
Ink Set Select the ink set from the drop-down list. The list contains all of the ink sets
currently available in the Ink Sets Resource category.
Border Select the border from the drop-down list. The list contains all the borders
currently available in the Borders Resource category.
Color Profile Select the appropriate ICC Profile from the drop-down list. The list contains all
of the ICC Profiles currently available in the ICC Profiles Resource category.
When receiving PDF files, you can have Apogee honor the application’s supplied
color profile by selecting ‘Use PDF Output Intent’. In this case, you should
provide a fallback in case the input has no output intent.
Auto-select from map: Select this check box to have Apogee automatically select
the Color Profile.
Fallback This option is only enabled when ‘Use PDF Output Intent’ has been selected in
the Color Profile list. Here, you can select a fallback color profile in case the input
has no output intent.
Calibration Select the Calibration Curve from the drop-down list. The list contains all of the
curves currently available in the Calibration Curves Resource category.
Select None if you do not use calibration.
a Calibration Curve.
Simulate Select the Simulation Curve from the drop-down list. The list contains all of the
curves currently available in the Simulation Curves Resource category.

848 GENERIC PRESS
Select None if you do not use simulation.
Web Growth You can select a WebGrowth profile, or select None to have no WebGrowth
compensation applied. WebGrowth compensation is performed on the fly while
outputting the raster data, so the raster files themselves are not affected (and
WebGrowth compensation is therefore not visible in Raster Preview). For more
information, see “WebGrowth Profiles” on page 890.
a WebGrowth profile.
Create InkDrive File Select the check box if you want to create an InkDrive file. The InkDrive file is
especially useful for the Press operator. It contains low-resolution images to
inform the operator how much ink he can use for the print job.
After Rendering: Creates and saves the InkDrive files immediately after
rendering, i.e. before the raster files are imaged.
After Rendering is not available for DQS-jobs.
After Imaging: Saves the InkDrive files immediately after imaging. This is the
default option.
NOTE: The InkDrive files are always created by the Render Task Processor,
regardless of the selected option.
Apply Ink Saving Two options are available:
InkTune Integrated: Select the check box and choose an InkTune set from the
drop-down list or click the arrow to go to the resource. The list contains all the
InkTune sets currently available in the InkTune Sets Resource category. These
parameters allow you to apply ink saving techniques based on Grey Component
Removal (GCR)to replace process color inks by black.
TextTune: This option applies ink saving to screened data. Choose a TextTune set
from the drop-down list or click the arrow to go to the resource.
Type Tab
A press can either be web-fed or sheet-fed. Each type has its own characteristics.
Press Name The actual name of the press; the lay and gripper settings for sheet-fed and the
cut-off length for web printing (see below) must be the same for sets with the
same Press Name.
Type Specify the type of press from the drop-down list:

Sheet Offset: A sheet-fed press aligns the press sheet against the leading edge of
the plate, taking into account the non-printable area. Apogee uses the total
setback distance together with punch calibration in order to position the press
sheet image on film or plate. The other distances are not used for processing, but
can be used for validation.
Web Offset: A web press has several ways to position the press sheet on the plate:
 Center between clamps: The press sheet is vertically centered in the exposed
plate area (i.e., the part of the plate that is not tucked away in the clamps).
 Center on plate: The press sheet is vertically centered on the plate, ignoring
the clamp areas.
 Align to leading edge: Same as with a sheet-fed press. Since there is no sheet
edge, Apogee can use the lead edge clamp size as “total setback”.
Default Press Sheet Layout The layout that will be used by default for imposition. Select an available
resource from the drop-down list. See “Press Sheet Layout Rules Overview” on
page 1036.
Distance plate to sheet This can be specified as a value, or it can be read from the signature definition in
edge an imposition template:
From signature info: Reads the Setback value from the signature definition in an
imposition template. This option is only available when the Production Plan
contains an Impose Task Processor, and if it uses templates.
Custom: Allows you to specify a custom Setback value, in mm.
Default workstyle The workstyle that will be used by default for imposition in the Apogee Impose
module. See “Working with Apogee Impose” on page 365.
Sheet Lay (sheet-fed) The press sheet lay can be:
 Left (Drive side)
 Right (Operator side)

Gripper Width (sheet-fed) Set the required width for the gripper.
Sheet height (web) The height of the press sheet as defined by web cut-off.
Slow Down Wheels Select one of the resources from the drop-down list. See “Slow Down Wheels” on
page 1053.

850 GENERIC PRESS
Plate/Press Media
Plate Default plate size: The dimensions of the plate that you can mount on this press
(width and height). The plate’s dimensions directly determine the media size
selection in a CTP production plan. However, you could leave it blank to allow
the user to select a plate manually (in the platesetter’s output parameters).
Clamp margins: Defines how much of the plate is “lost” in the clamps (Leading
edge and Trailing edge). The clamp margins are used to calculate the press sheet
position for a web press.
Press Media Default press media size: The dimensions of the press media (width and height).
Horizontal Position: Position of the press media (left, center, right or distance
from left edge).
InkDrive Tab
You can ask Apogee to create CIP3/4 information when printing to a specific
press. The format and contents of the CIP3/4 file depends on the given press
(vendor/type). This section allows you to tell Apogee how to create the file and
where to put it.
NOTE: This tab only appears when you have the InkDrive option installed.
InkDrive Format There are three modes for creating InkDrive data. The chosen mode determines
the availability of the different InkDrive options:
InkDrive mode File Image Contents

CIP3/PPF X X X
CIP4/PPF - X X
CIP4/PNG - X -
You can select the mode from the InkDrive Format drop-down list. Only one
mode is available for presses that do not support JMF messaging. Presses that
support JMF can have the two other modes.
NOTE: A press that has no JDF/JMF integration can only generate file-based PPF
InkDrive data. In this case, the CIP4 Image Format is disabled. Also note that a
press that is integrated via JDF/JMF cannot use the ‘old’ CIP3/PPF InkDrive
method.
Use v3.0 standard: You can optionally select the v3.0 PPF standard (v2.1 PPF is
used by default).

The InkDrive tab comprises three sub-tabs: File, Image and Contents.
File This tab describes the file format and contents of the exported CIP3/4 file, and
where to save it. The first section defines what a PPF file should contain. The
second section controls where the files are written to, and what the file names
are.
Create: Specify the file creation. Select the required option from the drop-down
list.
 Custom. When you select Custom, this field becomes editable you can enter
you own construction.
 Single file for all sheets: All separations of a job are saved in one PPF file.
 Single file per sheet: Each PPF file contains all separations of both the front
and back of a press sheet.
 Single file per side: Each PPF file contains all separations of a single side of a
press sheet.
 Single file per side per version: Each PPF file contains all separations of a
single side and version of a press sheet.
 Single file per separation: Each PPF file contains a single separation.
Save files in directory hierarchy: Select this check box if you want the InkDrive
files to be saved according to the file name hierarchy.
Save files in same directory: Select this check box if you want all of the InkDrive
files to be saved in the same directory, regardless of the file name.
File Name: This field displays the file name under which the InkDrive files will be
saved. The file name may use the following variables: $ORDER, $JOB, $SIGNA-
TURE, $WEB, $SIDE, $SEPARATION.
The variables will be separated by a slash if you select Save files in directory
hierarchy. This means that a directory will be made according to the file name.
The variables will be separated by an underscore if you select Save files in same
directory.
Export Directory: Specify the directory where the InkDrive file will be located.
Use the Browse button to locate the directory.
For example:

852 GENERIC PRESS
\\$COMPUTER\PressRoot\$PRESS\
Extension: Specify the file extension to be used for the InkDrive files. By default,
this is ‘ppf’.
Truncate file names exceeding 31 characters: If the filename is longer than the
Replace existing file: If a file with the same name already exists in the specified
directory, then the file is automatically replaced by the new file.
Leave existing file, add sequence number to new file name: If a file with the same
name already exists in the specified directory, then a revision number is added
to the name of the new file.
Post-process file with script: Select this check box if you want to run an external
script after the InkDrive file was written.
Script options: You can specify script options, which will be passed to the script
as space separated arguments.
Image This tab describes how the preview image should be generated. The first section
describes the generation of the preview image. The second one describes how
the consuming application expects its orientation in the CIP3/4 file. You can
select from eight possible combinations: 4 rotations (0, 90, 180, 270) and the
two readings: right or wrong.
Resolution (dpi): Select the required resolution from the drop-down list.
Encoding: Select the appropriate encoding option from the drop-down list.
 None (Binary)
 ASCII Hex
Compression: Select the appropriate compression option from the drop-down

list.
 None
 Run Length
Orientation: Select the required orientation options.
 Rotation: 0, 90, 180 and 270

 Reading: right or wrong

Contents Include Plate size: Select this check box if you want Apogee to retrieve the Press
plate size from the Job Ticket.
Default plate size: The dimensions of the plate that you can mount on this press
(width and height). The plate’s dimensions directly determine the media size
selection in a CTP production plan.
From Job Ticket if available: This option is automatically selected when you select
“Include Plate size”.
Transverse: Flips the retrieved Press plate size.
Default press media size: The dimensions of the press media (width and height).
Press media position: Position of the press media (left, center, right or distance
from left edge).
Override CIP3AdmJobCode: Overrides the value of $ORDER.
Override CIP3AdmJobName: Overrides the value of $JOB.
Override CIP3AdmSheetName: Overrides the value of $SHEET_$SIDE. Empty if

there is no imposition.
Override CIP3AdmSeparationNames: Overrides the value of $SEPARATION.
Set CIP3 sheet sides: Allows you to control the Front/Back tagging.
 according to imposition used: Follow the job’s imposition settings.
 to all fronts: Force all sides to be marked as Front.
 to all backs: Force all sides to be marked as Back.
JDF/JMF Integration
Apogee can act as a JDF controller with respect to a press. You will only see this
tab if you have installed the JDF controller license.
To obtain the list of presses, controlled by the press controller, you need to query
the press controller. The press controller will then return a list of devices it
controls. You can then select the proper press from the ‘JDF DeviceID’ drop
down.

854 GENERIC PRESS
JDF ‘DeviceID’ Depending on the press vendor, the press controller (and its URL) either controls
a single press, or it controls multiple presses. In the latter case, Apogee needs a
‘Device ID’ to identify a unique press.
Press supports JMF Select this option if you want to control the Press via JDF/JMF.
Press URL Enter the URL of the press controller. If you do not specify the protocol, Apogee
defaults to http://. You can also use the file:// protocol, specifying a directory,
if the press controller requires it. In this case, Apogee will write the JDF
commands as files to the specified location.
Finishing
The Generic Press Task Processor can optionally create a JDF file which contains
instructions for finishing (post-press) equipment. The Finishing tab defines how
Apogee creates the JDF file, and where it needs to put it.
Create JDF for finishing Select this check box to create a JDF which contains information for finishing
equipment equipment.
Cut Blocks Select to create cut-blocks Per Page.
Create: Specify the file creation. Select the required option from the drop-down
list.
 Custom. When you select Custom, this field becomes editable you can enter
you own construction.
 Single File for All Sheets: All separations of a job are saved in one PPF file.
 Single File per Sheet: Each PPF file contains all separations of both the front
and back of a press sheet.
Save files in directory hierarchy: Select this check box if you want the InkDrive
files to be saved according to the file name hierarchy.
Save files in same directory: Select this check box if you want all of the InkDrive
files to be saved in the same directory, regardless of the file name.
File Name: This field displays the file name under which the InkDrive files will be
saved. The file name may use the following variables: $ORDER, $JOB, $SIGNA-
TURE, $WEB, $SIDE, $SEPARATION.
The variables will be separated by a slash if you select Save files in directory
hierarchy. This means that a directory will be made according to the file name.

The variables will be separated by an underscore if you select Save files in same
directory.
Export Directory: Specify the directory where the InkDrive file will be located.
Use the Browse button to locate the directory.
For example:
Extension: Specify the file extension to be used for the InkDrive files. By default,
this is ‘ppf’.
Truncate file names exceeding 31 characters: If the filename is longer than the
Replace existing file: If a file with the same name already exists in the specified
directory, then the file is automatically replaced by the new file.
Leave existing file, add sequence number to new file name: If a file with the same
name already exists in the specified directory, then a revision number is added
to the name of the new file.
script after the InkDrive file was written.
PressTune Tab
Select the check box to create PressTune files which are used for the PressTune
print optimization solution. You can use variables to specify the file names and
location.
PressTune Project The folder where the PressTune project files will be saved.
File Name The file name of the PressTune project file. The file name may use the following
variables: $ORDER, $JOB, $SIGNATURE, $WEB, $SIDE, $SEPARATION. An
extension must not be used.
Export Directory Specify the directory where the PressTune files will be located. Use the Browse
button to locate the directory.
For example:

856 GENERIC PRESS
Replace existing file If a file with the same name already exists in the specified directory, then the file
is automatically replaced by the new file.
Leave existing file, add If a file with the same name already exists in the specified directory, then a
sequence number to new revision number is added to the name of the new file.
file name
script after the PressTune file was written.

Generic SD (Sign and Display Printer)
The Generic SD Task Processor represents a generic Sign and Display digital
printing device, for which you can define settings for specific job requirements.
When you select the Generic SD Task Processor in the System Overview, the
 Alignment Pin Sets, Contrast Adjustments, Curves Adjustments, Color Books,

Finishing Hub, Marks, Media Hub, Profiles, Device Link Profiles, Print Modes
Generic SD Printer The Image settings mainly control the rendering of the pages. You can access
these settings:
– Image Settings
the Settings pane.
on page 288.
Name
Settings pane.


858 GENERIC SD (SIGN AND DISPLAY PRINTER)
and dropping.
Image
chosen state.
 Right Reading
 Wrong Reading
Border Resource category. Select None if you do not want to have a border at all.
CAUTION: You cannot select a border containing border marks as the plate size is
not known.

specified.

Output Size
edge.
field.
Base imaging on This option specifies how images will be clipped:

860 GENERIC SD (SIGN AND DISPLAY PRINTER)
Slug Lines
Generic SD Printer The Print settings define the media you will print on, the quality of printing, and
various other options. These settings are specified when preparing the job in the
– Print Settings Layout Editor. See “Layout Editor” on page 477.

Generic Digital Press
The Generic Digital Press Task Processor represents a generic digital printing
device for commercial jobs, for which you can define settings for specific job
requirements.
When you select the Generic Digital Press Task Processor in the System
Resources pane:
 Borders, Color Books, Device Screens, Device Print Modes, Marks, Media,
Output Sizes, Profiles, Profile Link Exceptions, Device Link Profiles, Quality
Generic Digital Press – Image Settings
The Image settings mainly control the rendering of the pages. You can access
these settings:

the Settings pane.
on page 288.
Name
Settings pane.

862 GENERIC DIGITAL PRESS
and dropping.
Image
chosen state.
 Right Reading
 Wrong Reading
Border Resource category. Select None if you do not want to have a border at all.
CAUTION: You cannot select a border containing border marks as the plate size is
not known.

specified.

Output Size
edge.
field.

Base imaging on This option specifies how images will be clipped:
Slug Lines
Generic Digital Press – Print Settings
The Print settings define the media you will print on, the quality of printing, and
various other options. You can access these settings:

the Settings pane.
on page 288.
Name
Settings pane.
Media and Quality

In this tab, you can select a specific medium or a medium type from the drop-
down list.

Substrate Select the substrate you want to print on. The list contains all Substrate
resources.
Quality Choose the quality map to be used for printing. The available quality maps
Inks Select the ink set from the drop-down list. The list contains all of the ink sets
currently available in the Ink Sets Resource category. Changing the ink set has
an impact on the Separation and Image operations. However, you will not be
alerted or notified of any change in those operations.
Color Management
Color Management affects the rendering of the imaging and the final quality of
the print.
Color Profile Use PDF Output Intent: Select this option if you want Apogee to honor the appli-
cation’s supplied color profile. Note that this is only possible when receiving PDF
files.
list of recommended color profiles: Select a color profile from the list to override
any automatic selection. Recommended color profiles are those that match the
media family of the selected substrate.
Auto-select If you select Auto-select, Apogee chooses an output color profile that matches
the job parameters. Key parameters that affect this choice are the substrate and
the quality. When Auto-select from Map is selected, the Color Profile list is
disabled.
Fallback This option determines what should happen if the automatic lookup fails, or if
the input does not provide a color profile (output intent). You can choose an
option from the list of recommended color profiles.



ink amounts.

well.

color accuracy
Process Relative/Spots Absolute: Combines Relative Colorimetric for process

colors and Absolute Colorimetric for Absolute Colorimetric.

Press Repurposing - Disabled: Disables press retargeting. This is the default setting.
Process Colors and
Converted Spots Retarget using source press ICC profile: Select this option if there is a chance that
some of your jobs have CMYK colors which are not defined as process colors but
as deviceN colors, and you want to choose an ICC profile to be used as interme-
diate color space.
Retarget using device link profile: Select this option if there is a chance that some
of your jobs have CMYK colors which are not defined as process colors but as
deviceN colors, and you want to choose a device link to be used as intermediate
color space.
Source ICC profile: Choose a standard profile that will be used as intermediate
color space.
Retarget device link: Choose a link from standard profile to ink-jet device profile
that will be used as intermediate color space.

Exception: Select one of the following Exception options: <None>, Keep 100%
K, Normal, Preserve K, Preserve Pure Colors.
Auto-select: Select this check box if you want Apogee to automatically select an
Exception (the Exception field is then disabled).
Apply black point compensation: Apogee uses a built-in algorithm to adjust for
differences in the black points of the selected source and destination profiles.
following:
 Off
 Max. 2 colors
 Max. 3 colors
 Max. 4 colors
Use Press Paper White: Pantone/spot color inks are transparent and appear
Print
Copies Select the number of copies to print.
Layout preparation Specify the layout:
Two sided flip Y: Flip on the Y-axis.
Two sided flip X: Flip on the X-axis.

Device Print Mode Allows you to select a Device Print Mode (if any are available). For more infor-
mation, see “Device Print Modes” on page 782.

CHAPTER
16 Task Processor Resources

This section provides information on the Apogee Resources that are available for
each Task Processor. Resources are collections of objects such as fonts, preflight
profiles, or calibration curves that are required by the Task Processors.
 About Task Processor Resources ................................................................... 871

 Alignment Pin Sets ............................................................................................ 872
 Apogee Preflight Action Lists ......................................................................... 873
 Apogee Preflight Profiles ................................................................................. 876
 Auto Fit Rules ....................................................................................................... 878
 Auto Impose Rules ............................................................................................. 881
 Binding Options ................................................................................................... 885
 Boot Resources .................................................................................................... 890
 Borders .................................................................................................................... 891
 Borders and Output Sizes ......................................................................... 896
 Working with Borders and Border Marks ........................................... 897
 Bottling Rules ....................................................................................................... 899
 Calibration Curves .............................................................................................. 901
 Color Books ........................................................................................................... 904
 Color Spaces ......................................................................................................... 911
 Content Profiles ................................................................................................... 912
 Contrast Adjustments ........................................................................................ 913
 Curves Adjustments ........................................................................................... 915
 Device Link Profiles ........................................................................................... 917
 Device Print Modes ............................................................................................ 918
 Device Screens .................................................................................................... 919
 Finishing Hub ........................................................................................................ 920
 Folding Schemes ................................................................................................. 925
 Fonts ........................................................................................................................ 935
 Glue Zones ............................................................................................................ 937
 Halftone Screens ................................................................................................. 940
 InkTune Sets ......................................................................................................... 947
 Ink Sets ................................................................................................................... 950
 Ink Tables ............................................................................................................... 952
 Input Color Conversions ................................................................................... 953
 Linearization Curves .......................................................................................... 956
 Workflow Selection .................................................................................... 957
 Linearization Auto-Select Maps ............................................................. 958
 Margins ................................................................................................................... 959
 Mark Engraver ...................................................................................................... 961
 Mark Sets Overview .................................................................................... 962
 Mark Types ..................................................................................................... 967
869
870 TASK PROCESSOR RESOURCES
 Mark Attributes ............................................................................................. 969

 Mark Position ................................................................................................ 989
 Mark Conflicts ............................................................................................... 992
 Mark Repeat .................................................................................................. 993
 Mark Special .................................................................................................. 994
 Mark Pens ....................................................................................................... 994
 Mark Layers .................................................................................................... 996
 About Colors and Depth for Printing Marks ....................................... 997
 Marks ....................................................................................................................... 999
 Media Hub ........................................................................................................... 1001
 Media .................................................................................................................... 1006
 Number-up Schemes ....................................................................................... 1010
 Output Color Conversions ............................................................................. 1015
 Output Sizes ....................................................................................................... 1018
 Pagination Schemes ........................................................................................ 1023
 Paper Stock ......................................................................................................... 1026
 PostScript Headers ........................................................................................... 1030
 Preflight Action Lists ....................................................................................... 1031
 Preflight Profiles ............................................................................................... 1034
 Press Sheet Layout Rules .............................................................................. 1035
 Print Modes ........................................................................................................ 1040
 Profile Link Exceptions ................................................................................... 1041
 Profiles .................................................................................................................. 1042
 Quality .................................................................................................................. 1045
 Sheet Layout Templates ................................................................................ 1046
 Shingling Rules ................................................................................................. 1047
 Simulation Curves ............................................................................................ 1050
 Simulation Settings ................................................................................. 1050
 SISR Profiles ....................................................................................................... 1052
 Slow Down Wheels .......................................................................................... 1053
 TextTune ............................................................................................................... 1055
 WebGrowth Profiles ......................................................................................... 1056
 Web Production Schemes ............................................................................. 1060
 XSLT Conversions ............................................................................................. 1068
 Using Resource Auto-Select Maps ............................................................. 1069
 Fallback ........................................................................................................ 1071

16 TASK PROCESSOR RESOURCES 871
About Task Processor Resources

Most Resources can be configured and customized in the System Overview, and
you can create, edit, and delete Resources in the available Resource categories.
The Resource pane displays the resource categories that are available for the
currently selected item in the System Overview. The displayed resources will
therefore vary in accordance with the selected item. The first icon in the list is the
Parameter Sets icon, which allows you to create and manage Parameter Sets for
the Task Processor (see “Managing Parameter Sets” on page 664).
Apogee Impose Many of the Apogee Impose resources can be accessed from within the Apogee
Impose windows for viewing the details of the resource, managing and even
Resources creating new ones. This is mainly possible when creating your Product in the
Product editor or when viewing the imposition with the Inspector.
For example, the Shingling rules can be opened by choosing Manage Shingling
Rules in the Shingling drop-down list in the Product editor.

872 ALIGNMENT PIN SETS
Alignment Pin Sets
Alignment pins represent a fixed set of alignment positions to which the media
can be aligned on a print layout.
Associated Task Processors

The Alignment Pin Sets Resource category is available for:
 Generic SD (Sign and Display Printer) and other SD printers
Overview
Name and Pin Width The name of the pin set and the width of the physical pins. Leave at 0 if the align-
ment positions take up no physical space on the bed.
Pin Configuration Several pin configurations can be specified in a set, e.g. Small, Medium and
Large, with different alignment positions.
Name The name of the pin configuration.
Machine ID Enter a string that you want to send to the Automatic Board Feeder (ABF) to
activate the chosen pin configuration. Leave empty if not applicable.
Alignment Position All the individual alignment positions for the selected pin configuration are
shown in this list; for each position you can set the distance between the align-
ment pin and the printer’s default side lay, and whether to align left, right or
against both sides of the pin.

Apogee Preflight Action Lists
Action lists are useful for performing repetitious tasks either within a single PDF
document or in multiple PDF documents.
An action list usually consists of several actions or checks and once you have
created an action list, you can re-use it to perform these tasks in the predefined
sequence.
The Apogee Preflight Action Lists Resource category is available for the
following Task Processors:
 Apogee Preflight
Apogee Preflight Action Lists Overview
The Apogee Preflight Action Lists overview lists all available Apogee Preflight
action lists.
A set of action lists is provided by default with your system. Additional actions
list can be obtained and imported. Some action lists, e.g. Hairline in the
Standard category, can be duplicated and customized.
In the Production Plan, the available action lists are filtered depending on their
position in the plan.
Category In this list you can select the action lists by category. For example:
 Color Management
 Standard
Apogee Preflight Action The Action Lists pane displays the action lists as selected in the Category list.
Lists Select an action list to see its settings in the pane below.

874 APOGEE PREFLIGHT ACTION LISTS
Name The name of the action list as it appears in this resource and the Apogee Preflight
task processor.
Description A short description of what the action list does.
Tabs Depending on the type of action list, you will see Settings and/or Info tabs that
define the behavior of the action list:
 Settings: in this tab you set the criteria and options for the preflight checks
 Info: an explanation of what the action list does
NOTE: You can filter the list of action lists by typing keywords in the Search box
at the top of the list.
 To create a new Action List

Editable action lists can be customized or duplicated to create a new action list.
NOTE: An action list can be customized if it has a Settings tab and in this case the
Duplicate option is available when clicking the cogwheel.
1 Unlock the Apogee Preflight Action Lists resource.
2 In the Apogee Preflight Action List, choose the action list that you want to
duplicate, e.g Hairline in the Standard category.
Enter ‘hairline’ in the search box to locate this action list.
3 Click the cogwheel and choose Duplicate.
A duplicate appears in the list with the same name and the - copy extension.
4 In the settings pane below, rename the action list and enter a Description.
5 Modify the Settings as required.
For example change the width.
NOTE: You cannot edit the Info tab.
6 Lock the resource.
The action list name is updated in the list. This new action list is now also
visible in the Apogee Preflight task processor parameter settings.

 To edit an Action List
NOTE: An action list is editable if the Duplicate option is available when clicking
the cogwheel.
1 Unlock the Apogee Preflight Action Lists resource.
2 In the Apogee Preflight Action List, choose the action list that you want to
edit, e.g Hairline in the Standard category.
Enter ‘hairline’ in the search box to locate this action list.
3 In the settings pane below, modify the Settings as required.
For example change the width.
NOTE: You can’t edit the Info tab.
4 Lock the resource.
The action list is locked with the new settings.
 To import an Action List

1 In the Apogee Preflight Action Lists resource, click the cogwheel and choose
Import.
2 Browse to the location where you saved your Action List files with
extension .MIME, and click Open.
The imported action list is added to the list and the category is also added in
Category list if this list does not yet exist.

876 APOGEE PREFLIGHT PROFILES
Apogee Preflight Profiles
To preflight PDF documents, you can use Profiles. A Profile is a collection of

criteria which a PDF document should meet to be a valid PDF.
Through these Profiles, you can thoroughly check your documents and make
corrections before processing.
A set of profiles is provided by default with your system. Some profiles can be
duplicated and customized. Use the cogwheel commands to import, export,
remove or duplicate job profiles.
NOTE: You can also select Preflight profiles for a preflight check when exporting
results through the Export Task Processor. For more information, see Profiling
in the “Export Settings” on page 825.
The Preflight Profiles Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 Conditional
 Export
Apogee Preflight Profiles Overview
The Apogee Preflight Profiles overview lists all available Apogee Preflight
Profiles.
Apogee Preflight Profile This is the list of all the available profiles. Select a profile in the list to see more
information in the pane below.

Name The name of the profile as it appears in this resource and as job profile in the
Apogee Preflight task processor.
Description A short description of what the profile does.
Info A detailed explanation of what the profile does and where you can use it in the
production plan.
NOTE: You can filter the list of profiles by typing keywords in the Search box at
the top of the list.

878 AUTO FIT RULES
Auto Fit Rules
This resource provides job-wide preferences for automatic imposition of

unbound products with Apogee Impose.
 Double-click the Auto Fit Rules icon for an overview of the available rules.
The Auto Fit Rules resource is available for the following Task Processors:
 Impose
 Step and Repeat
 Raster Impose
 Digital Step and Repeat
Auto Fit Rules Overview
The Auto Fit Rules dialog box lists all available resources in the left column.
 Click a rule in the left column to display its settings.
Strategy
The auto fit strategy helps you find a balance between keeping the number of
plate sets to a minimum and printing extra copies. You can choose between two
strategies that affect the copy counts of the parts by allowing extra copies of a
part to be printed if this enables more elements to be combined on a sheet.
NOTE: Elements are the instances of parts placed on a Press Sheet.
 Fewer sheet layouts: checks the dirty waste, i.e. the area of the Press Sheet
that contains extra copies. When you select this strategy, you can set the
amount of dirty waste with the ‘Allow extra printed material’ slider.

 Less waste: this strategy checks the total waste which is the sum of extra
copies and the blank paper. This strategy will generally create more Press
Sheets. When you choose this strategy you can specify a percentage of
acceptable waste in the ‘Keep waste below’ box.
Sheet Layout
These settings control how the elements are organized on the sheet.
Arrange Parts Keeping the elements that relate to a particular part together or in a certain
arrangement may be a requirement for cutting, reducing color variations across
a sheet, or for other reasons. You have the following options:
 Stack elements one by one: Stacks all elements on top of each other or
next to each other until it reaches the end of the sheet, then starts a new
column/row and repeats stacking elements.
 Pack elements in blocks: All the elements of a part are grouped together
in the smallest possible rectangular block.
 Pack elements in blocks, vertically only: Elements of a part are grouped to

produce a layout with no color variation in the direction of the Press Sheet
movement.
 Stack elements in separate columns: A new column is created for the

elements of each part.
Rotate Elements Here you can choose when and how elements are rotated in order to maximize
the available space on the Press Sheet. You have the following options:
When:
 Never: the orientation is left as defined in the parts
 Always: you may have a preference for rotation that you always want to
apply; in this case you can also select the rotation direction
 When it produces a better fit: elements will be rotated if more elements

can be placed on a single Press Sheet; in this case you can also select how
to rotate and the rotation direction.
How:
 Rotate all elements of the same part in the same way: (default) all the
elements of the part are rotated in the same direction if possible; other-
wise none of the elements of the part are rotated; part A elements may be
rotated while part B elements are not rotated

880 AUTO FIT RULES
 Rotate all elements in the same way: all the elements of all parts are
rotated in the same direction if possible; otherwise no elements are
rotated
 Rotate elements individually: elements may be rotated differently to

produce the tightest fit but possibly a layout which is difficult to cut

Auto Impose Rules
The Auto Impose Rules resource provides job-wide settings to control the
automatic imposition process referred to as Auto Impose. These settings conse-
quently have no effect on jobs which are imposed manually. The settings for
bound jobs concern the following:
 the placing of Fold Sheets on a Press Sheet
 the Workstyle
 the Assembly of several book signatures
 Double-click the Auto Impose Rules icon for an overview of the available
rules in the Auto Impose Rules dialog box.

882 AUTO IMPOSE RULES
The Auto Impose Rules resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose
About Auto Impose Apogee Impose selects the Folding Scheme to use to arrange the Pages of a
Product by consulting a list of available Folding Schemes in the set you choose
Rules when setting up Auto Impose. Apogee Impose looks for the largest possible
scheme that fits on the given Press Sheet size, taking the following aspects into
account:
 trim size
 overfold
 trim margins
The selected Fold Sheet is then checked against the Placement rules and Apogee
Impose places the Fold Sheet on the Press Sheet or moves onto the next Folding
Scheme if it is not suitable. Apogee Impose also tries to put additional Fold
Sheets on the same Press Sheet if there is sufficient space.
In addition, Apogee Impose can change the workstyle and order the book signa-
tures in an assembly to optimize the imposition arrangement.
Auto Impose Rules Overview
The Auto Impose Rules dialog box lists all available Auto Impose Rules resources
in the left column with their settings in the right column.
Name A meaningful name of the rule, e.g. Lowest folio on Back, Magazine jobs
Selecting Fold Sheets The priority and strictness of the placement rules can be set here. Priority can be
set for rules with the same strictness, by moving the rules up and down in the
Rule table. The following rules are possible:

 Largest fold sheet: instruction to use the largest possible Fold Sheet, i.e.
the one with the most pages. The strictness setting is always Prefer but you
can control this priority by moving the rule in the list.
 Align lays: instruction to place a Fold Sheet so that its lay is in the same
corner as the Press Sheet lay. Default strictness setting is Must be met. This
rule ensures that the distance between the Fold Sheet and the edge of the
Press Sheet is constant.
NOTE: This rule is ignored when the alternative workstyles Work & Turn
and Work & Tumble are applied.
 Lowest folio: instruction to put the lowest folio on the Front or Back of a
Press Sheet. The default strictness setting is Do not consider that puts the
front of the Fold Sheet on the front of the Press Sheet. This rule only
applies for the Sheetwise or Perfecting workstyle. Apply to cover sheets
only can also be selected for this rule.
 Maximize page count: instruction to search for alternative arrangements

using multiple, smaller Fold Sheets to reduce paper waste. Default strict-
ness setting is Do not consider while Must be met cannot be selected. This
rule also includes a check box to set the Maximum number of extra cuts to
avoid complex layouts with too many extra cuts.
 Stitchable Fold Sheets: a built-in rule for nested assemblies that ensures
that the resulting Fold Sheet can be stitched, e.g. an F8-2 is stitchable
while an F8-5 is not.
 Single leaf (F2-1): a built-in rule to avoid the F2-1 Folding Scheme
whenever possible; this scheme is only used when 2 pages are left or when
required for the given Press Sheet Size.
NOTE: The latter 2 rules are not visible and cannot be switched off.
Placing Fold Sheets Select the Single-row schemes: Arrange according to Page Arrangement
check box to have covers and irregular single-row schemes arranged according
to the head and foot Page Arrangement settings of the Binding Options.
Alternative workstyle This setting instructs Apogee Impose to use a different workstyle than the
default Sheetwise workstyle when printing several Folding Sheets on a single
Press Sheet, e.g. to print a cover or to print partial book signatures on a larger
Press Sheet.

884 AUTO IMPOSE RULES
If possible, print N-up or Select this option to print multiple Fold Sheets using an alternative workstyle. By
partial signature using default this is not selected and Press Sheets are printed using the Sheetwise
workstyle. The two alternative workstyles are:
 Work & Turn
 Work & Tumble
N-up means that the alternative workstyle is applied in the following cases:
 if the same book signature can be used an even number of times
 if different book signatures can all be used an even number of times
NOTE: Alternative workstyles are never applied for printing on a perfector press.
Assembly These settings deal with the order of the book signatures in the Product assembly
and whether partial signatures must be handled differently.
Book signature order: book signatures can be ordered in the assembly in two
ways:
 Largest first: If a Product consists of book signatures of different sizes,

Apogee Impose sorts them in descending order with the largest in front
and the smallest at the end.
 Smallest first: Apogee Impose sorts book signatures in ascending order

with the smallest in front and the largest at the end.
NOTE: The Parts of a Product also determine the order of book signatures and
have precedence over the Assembly settings here. In other words, a Cover book
signature is always placed before Body book signatures in the assembly.
Partial book signatures: Partial signatures are book signatures that have fewer
pages than the largest book signature in the assembly. Ideally, an assembly must
have full book signatures at both edges and partial signatures in between. Select
the Keep away from edge by check box and enter the number of full book signa-
tures that must be between the front or end and the partial signature.

Binding Options
The Binding Options resource defines the bindings that are available for a
Product and its Parts. Binding is a key aspect of imposition and these resources
provide the settings for a wide variety of stacked and nested assemblies of book
signatures.
 Double-click the Binding Options icon for an overview of the available rules
in the Binding Options dialog box.
The Binding Options resource category is available for:
 Impose

886 BINDING OPTIONS
 Raster Impose
Binding Options Overview
The Binding Options dialog box lists all available Binding Options resources in
the left column and the settings for each resource in the right column.
Assembly
The assembly type is the top-level setting for binding and they apply for the
entire product.
NOTE: In the Job Ticket Editor, the Assembly settings can only be viewed in the
Product Editor and not in the Part Editor or the Inspector.
Stacked or Mixed This assembly type is chosen for perfect-bound jobs; the book signatures are
stacked side-by-side and then glued together. Also choose this assembly type for
mixed binding situations that combine stacked and nested assemblies.
Nested This assembly type is chosen for saddle-stitched jobs; the book signatures are
bound by stitching using a wire through the spine, or by stapling.
Number Up Binding Number-up binding (also referred to as N-up or multi-up binding) combines two
or more book signatures on a single bindery signature which is subsequently cut
to produce two or more book signatures.
Click the drop-down list to see the different multi-up binding options:

 1-up is the default value and applies for regular jobs
 2-up, 3-up, 4-up: for regular multi-up jobs; two, three or four identical book
signatures are produced with the same orientation
 2-up, 3-up and 4-up Come and Go: two different book signatures are
produced and the orientation of the book signatures is flipped
 2-up, 3-up and 4-up Come and Go (reversed): the page order and orientation
of the book signatures are reversed
NOTE: A so-called True Come and Go job is possible with a stacked assembly
and a 2-up Come and Go binding or a 2-up Come and Go (reversed) binding.
Cut Margin This option is only enabled for multi-up bindings.
Apply page trim margins at cut: You can choose to apply or not to apply the page
trim margins set below. This option can be disabled if the middle cut is good
enough as a trim cut.
Extra gutter: Enter a value here if you want an extra gap between the Fold Sheets,
for example to compensate for the width of the cutting blade.
For a so-called dead-cut, clear the check box and set the Extra gap to 0.

888 BINDING OPTIONS
Fold Sheet
These options control how pages are arranged on the Fold Sheet and also affect
the multi-up arrangement.
Page arrangement  Head to head: arranges pages in such a way that the head of the pages is on
the closed head of the book signature, suitable for jogging to the head
 Foot to foot: arranges pages in such a way that the foot of the pages is on the
closed head of the book signature, suitable for jogging to the foot
 From folding scheme: the page arrangement set in the folding scheme is used
Overfold The overfold is a small area of the folded sheet that sticks out so it can be grabbed
by a gripper.
None: no lip is provided
On lowest folio: creates a lip on the side of the folded book signature that
contains the low folios; typically used for foot to foot folding schemes
On highest folio: creates a lip on the side of the folded book signature that
contains the high folios; typically used for head to head folding schemes
Lip Size the default size of the overfold lip and a maximum for sheet fitting
Page Trim Margins

These margins add extra paper to the four edges of a page to accommodate for
bleed and the marks, and provide space for trimmers. The settings for these
margins depend mainly on the binding style used. A maximum value can be
entered to extend the margins for sheet fitting.
Spine: margin width at the spine edge of a page
Face: margin width at the face edge of a page
Head: margin width at the top of a page
Foot: margin width at the bottom of a page
Sheet Fitting Strategy

These rules define how the overfold and page trim margins can be adjusted to
make a Fold Sheet fit the size of the Press Sheet, and enable direct folding of the
Press Sheet without trimming first. Sheet fitting can also be applied for Press
Sheets with more than one Fold Sheet.

Sheet fitting also depends on the Positioning of Fold Sheets options in the Press
Sheet Layout Rules to determine how a Fold Sheet is aligned.
NOTE: You cannot use sheet fitting if fixed offsets are specified in the Press
Sheet Layout Rule.
Overfold, face, spine Here you choose how to enlarge the margins and overfold.
 Overfold first, then face and spine: first adjusts the overfold and then the
remaining space between face and the spine evenly
 Face and spine first, then overfold
 Overfold, face and spine evenly
Head, foot Here you choose the order for adjusting the head and foot margins.
 Head first, then foot
 Foot first, then head
 Head and foot evenly

890 BOOT RESOURCES
Boot Resources
From time to time, Agfa will release updates and enhancements for individual
Task Processors. These resources are distributed in the form of PostScript
“patch” files which you can import as with any other type of resource.
The Boot Resources Resource category is currently available only for the Render
and Normalize Task Processors.
NOTE: Service access level is required to access the Boot Resources for the
Normalizer.

Borders
The Borders Resource category allows you to predefine border marks for specific
job requirements. A Border is extra information that you can add to film or plate.
This extra information can contain the order number, the print date or time, slug
lines, separation names, registration marks, crop marks, etc.
A border can contain either of the two following mark types:
 Text mark: Text marks are defined with variables in Apogee. You can also
choose a font type and point size for the variable.
 File mark: A file mark can be a special registration mark in the form of an EPS
file or a PDF document.
You define the borders in the Resources of your output device. If you have
several platesetters, filmsetters or proofing devices, the borders Resource is
shared amongst the same type of output device.
When should you use Borders?
You should use borders when you have to work with a PDF document that lacks
some essential information that should have been added in the source applica-
tion (e.g. QuarkXpress, Imposition Template Manager). This can be registration
marks or separation names, for example. Registration marks are needed to
assemble the different colors correctly on top of each other. Separation names
give information on the colors used.
NOTE: If you are using Apogee Impose, text marks and file marks can also be
applied with the Mark Engraver. See “Mark Engraver” on page 961 for more
information.
The Border Resource category is available for:
 All Output Task Processors, except for Export and RPC.
 All Print Task Processors, except for Generic Press.

892 BORDERS
For information on creating, editing, importing, exporting and deleting borders,

refer to “Managing Resources” on page 667.
Borders Overview
The Borders overview lists the available borders. You can create, duplicate, edit,
import and export borders.
Border Mark Editor
You can exactly define the Border Mark settings: the mark type and the exact
location of the mark on the page or sheet.
Mark Type
Select the Mark type (for output devices only):
 A Text Mark
 A File Mark (EPS/PDF Mark)

Text Mark Text: In the Text field, you can specify which text is to be used as a mark. You
have three options:
 Type some text in the Text field.
 Select a variable from the drop-down list. This list appears when you click the
button next to the field.
 Use a combination of text and one or more variables.
Font: Select a font and a point size for the text mark.
Color: Click the variable button, and select one or more options to determine on
which plate(s) the mark will be printed:
Click the associated variable button, and select one or more options to determine
on which plate(s) the text mark will be printed:

 Registration (all plates). When this option is selected, you will see an asterisk
(*).
 Process Colors (CMYK)
 Cyan
 Magenta
 Yellow
 Black
Rotate: Specify the rotation angle for the mark (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees).
Stripping Text Mark A stripping text mark serves as a placeholder for a StripMark. The main differ-
ence with the normal text mark is that the content of the stripping text mark is
set by JDF. The JDF also specifies the stripping element to which the mark refers:
The object whose edges are to be used as positioning references are set by JDF,
but the offsets themselves are specified in the stripping text mark.
Crop Mark Crop marks indicate where to crop the page or image. A crop mark sets crop
marks around pages or around the image. They are dynamically imaged
according to the specified properties.
Distance from image/page corner: Specifies the distance between the marks
center and the images or pages corner.
Length of mark: Specifies the length of the mark.
Line width : Specify the width of the marks lines.
Print crop marks inside of imposition: Print crop marks that appear inside the
imposed area (i.e. in between the pages). You should disable this option if you
want the crop marks to appear only on the outside of the imposition (Imposition
Borders only).
NOTE: Crop marks do not require the Position options.
Fold Mark Fold marks indicate where to fold the sheet. A fold mark sets several marks to
indicate where the sheet is to be folded. They are dynamically imaged according
to the specified settings.

894 BORDERS
Distance from pages: Specifies the distance between the marks center and the
page edges.
Length of mark: Specifies the length of the mark.
Line width : Specifies the width of the marks lines.
NOTE: Fold marks do not require the Position options.
Collation Mark Signature/Section Collation marks offer a way to quickly inspect the correct
collation order of folded sheets.
Mark: The mark is the actual marking on the spine or fold. It is printed in black,
and may optionally contain an index number.
 Thickness: The thickness (or width) of the mark. Also sets the width of the
step area. The default is 3mm.
 Length: The length of the mark. Also sets the step size with which the mark is
offset. Note that there is no gap between two adjacent marks. The default is
11mm.
Step Area : The step area is the area in which the mark travels. The mark starts at
the top (or bottom) of the step area, and advances one step with each section/
signature.
 Offset from Edges: Insets the height of the step area in the available space.
The default is 0.
 Step Area Length: Sets the length of the step area. When you enter a value,
Apogee calculates and displays the Number of steps.
 Number of Steps: Sets the number of steps in the step area. When you enter
a value, Apogee calculates and displays the Step Area Length.
Pattern : The pattern defines the position of the first mark, the direction in which
the mark is stepped (normal or reverse), and what to do when arriving at the end
of the step area (sawtooth or zigzag). Apogee graphically represents the four
possibilities. The default is to use normal direction with the sawtooth
movement.
Index : Select whether to print the collation mark number (should correspond
with the signature/section) inside the mark, and with which orientation (0, 90,
180 or 270). Apogee graphically represents the five possibilities. The default is
to print no index.

File Mark Use this option, if you want to use a specific EPS or PDF file as a mark.
File: Click the File list and select one of the available EPS or PDF files. The file is
selected as the mark to be used.
Rotate: Specify the rotation angle for the mark (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees).
You can manage the Marks in the Marks Resource category. See “Marks” on
page 999.
NOTE: The selected file is copied into a reserved directory on the server.
Position
Mark origin You can specify the exact position of the mark. This position is defined by a
horizontal and a vertical distance from different parts of the sheet or plate.
Horizontal For the horizontal position, select:
 distance...
 to right or left of...
 Sheet Left Edge, Sheet Right Edge, or Sheet Center.

Vertical For the vertical position, select:
 distance...
 below or above...
 Sheet Leading Edge, Sheet Trailing Edge, or Sheet Center.

Print on  Front side
 Back side
 Both sides. If you select this option, the following check boxes are enabled:
 Mirror position on back

896 BORDERS
 Mirror content on back
Conflicts
Notify when Mark runs: You can have Apogee warn you if the Mark runs:
 Into the sheet
 Out of the sheet
 Out of the Output Size
 Into the Page Content (trim box)
For each option, there is a check box. Apogee will send a message to the Message
Board according to the selected options.
Do not print mark when it Select this option if you want Apogee to remove a mark when it would otherwise
runs into the Page Content run into a pages content area. The default setting is not to print marks that run
into a Page Content.
Borders and Output On a medium, you can distinguish different areas, including the borders and the
output sizes. The following graphic clearly shows the different areas:
Sizes
1
2
4
5
1 Press sheet
2 Border
3 Image size
4 Output size
5 Medium

Working with You first need to create a border. However, a newly created Border does not
contain any border marks sets: You need to select the new border and add
Borders and Border border marks to it.
Marks
 To create and manage border mark sets
1 In the System Overview Window, select the Output Task Processor for which
you want to make changes in the Border Marks.
2 Double-click the Borders icon in the Resources pane.
The Borders window appears, containing a list of all the available Borders.
3 Select the Border for which you want to create, edit, duplicate or delete a
Border Mark and click the Edit button.
The Border window appears, containing the available Border Marks for the
selected Border.
 Click the New button to create a new set of Border Marks. Enter any
required information as described in “Border Mark Editor” on page 892
and click OK.
 Select the Border Marks set that you want to edit and click the Edit button.
Enter any required information as described in “Border Mark Editor” on
page 892 and click OK.
 Select the set of Border Marks that you want to duplicate and click the
Duplicate button. A copy of the Border Mark Set will appear in the list.
 Select the set of Border Marks that you want to delete and press Delete or
click the Delete button.

898 BORDERS
5 Click OK to close the Border window.
6 Close the Borders dialog box.
 To quickly copy borders from one Task Processor to another

1 In the System Overview Window, select the Output Task Processor from
which you want to copy the Border.
The Borders overview window appears, containing a list of all the available
Borders.
3 Go back to the System Overview Window, and select the Output Task
Processor to which you want to copy the Border.
The Borders overview window appears.
5 Return to the first Borders overview window, select the border you want to
copy, and drag and drop it in the second Border overview window.
The selected border is duplicated.

Bottling Rules
The Bottling Rules resource provides settings to compensate for page skewing,
i.e. the rotation of the inner pages of a Fold Sheet. Page skewing is caused by
cross-folding a sheet and increases when multiple cross-folds are required or
multiple cross-folded sheets are combined. The selected rule will rotate the
pages to compensate the fanning of the signature.
A bottling rule can be selected for a the whole web-fed product or a specific part
in the Products tab.
NOTE: Bottling is only supported for web printing, not for sheet-fed printing.
 Double-click the Bottling Rules icon for an overview of the available rules in
the Bottling Rules dialog box or to create your own rules.
The Bottling Rules resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose
 Raster Compose
Bottling Rules The Bottling Rules dialog box lists all available Bottling Rules sets in the left
column and the settings for each set in the right column.
Overview
Name
The name of the installed rules set or the name of your own rules set.

900 BOTTLING RULES
Compensate Page Skew

Several methods ranging from automatic to manual are available for compen-
sating page skew cause by folding. Manual compensation refers to the use of a
bottling table with pre-established rotation values, which may or may not be
present in the Web Production Scheme (WPS). Automatic compensation is
based on page creep.
Only when WPS has own Select the check box to apply bottling only if the WPS has a bottling table. Leave
bottling table this check box unchecked to apply bottling to all Web Production Schemes. In
the latter case, bottling is applied according to the bottling table if present and
bottling based on creep (automatic) is applied to the other schemes.
See “Bottling Table button”.
WPS Bottling Table - Adjust Adjustment for thickness is applied if the table has a reference value for Stock
for stock thickness and thickness. The page size will be adjusted if the table has a reference value for
page size Height. This setting only applies if the WPS has a bottling table.
Automatic Creep-based Automatic bottling applies simplified adjustments based on page creep. Takes
Bottling effect if the Only when WPS has own bottling table is not selected.
Bottling Multiplier Enter a value greater than the default 1 to apply a multiplier to pre-established
bottling values (e.g. for a newer version of a product)

Calibration Curves
Every output device may have a certain discrepancy between the desired result
and the actual result. This discrepancy is caused by dot gain. To compensate for
this discrepancy, you need to calibrate your output device using the Curve
Editor. Here, Apogee calculates a dot gain compensation curve so that your
output device produces the desired results. The resulting curve may be irregular
to produce the desired dot gain.
In Apogee, Calibration is only used for the press. For imagesetters and plateset-
ters, Apogee uses Linearization.
The Calibration Curves Resource category is available for the Press and Generic
Press Task Processors.
Calibration Settings
You create calibration curves using the Calibration Curve Editor. For more infor-
mation, see “Calibration and Linearization Settings” on page 1076.
Screen (Workflow Polarity)
In the upper right corner, the Screen setting allows you to select the polarity of
the workflow. You can choose between:
 Positive
 Negative
This option is repeated in the Calibration Map Settings, so that you have a
complete overview of all the relevant settings when creating Auto-Select Maps
for Calibration. For more information on Calibration Auto-Select Maps, see
“Auto-Select Maps” on page 902.

902 CALIBRATION CURVES
Calibration Curves List
Here you can manage your Calibration Curves. You can sort the list by clicking
in any of the four column headers.
Calibration Curve The name of the Calibration Curves.
Paper Type The selected printing stock.
Ink Set The ink set that was selected from the Ink Sets Resource category.
Screen The screen type, resolution, frequency and dot shape. For more information on
screen types, see “PDF Render - Screen Settings” on page 743).
Auto-Select Maps
You can create Calibration Auto-Select Maps in the Calibration Curves Resource
category. For more information on Auto-Select Maps see “Using Resource Auto-
Select Maps” on page 1069.
In order to do so, select the Calibration Curve and click Add Map. This will open
the settings dialog box for Calibration maps. These settings are identical to the
General Settings of a Calibration Curve. For more in-depth information on these
settings, see “Calibration Print Settings” on page 1076.
NOTE: You can also drag and drop a Calibration Curve to the Calibration Auto-
Select Maps table.
Fallback Click the Fallback button to specify what Apogee should do if the automatic
selection of calibration curves does not find a match. You have the following
options:
Use no calibration: The job will be processed without calibration.
Notify: Apogee will put the job on hold and send a message to the Message Board.
 To manually create a new calibration curve

1 In the System Overview window, select the Print Task Processor for which
you want to create a new Calibration Curve.
2 Double-click the Calibration Curves icon in the Resources pane.

The Calibration Curves dialog box appears, containing all of the available
Calibration Curves for the selected Print Task Processor.
A dialog box appears in which you can specify printing stock and halftone
screen settings.
4 Specify the job details regarding printing stock, screen type and associated
resolution, frequency, and dot shape. Screen polarity (Positive or Negative)
cannot be selected: It is displayed for information purposes only.
For more information, see “Calibration Print Settings” on page 1076.
NOTE: For CristalRaster screens, you have to specify the Dot Size instead of
Frequency and Dot Shape.
5 Click OK to save your selection and close the dialog box.
6 Specify how you want to initialize the table (manually) as described in

“Create Table” on page 1078 and click Next.
7 Select the values for the Stimuli column as described in “Stimuli Selection”
on page 1078 and click Next.
8 Select the values for the Wanted column as described in “Wanted Selection”
on page 1079 and click Finish.
The Calibration Curve editor appears.
9 Make any required changes as described in “Curve Editor” on page 1080,

type the name of your Calibration Curve and click Save.
Your new Calibration Curve appears in the Calibration Curves List in the
upper pane.
10 Close the dialog box.

904 COLOR BOOKS
Color Books
Apogee contains a database of colors that are organized in books. As each ink
produces a slightly different color depending on the stock it is printed on, each
book represents the colors as they appear on a specific paper type.
The Color Books Resource category is available for all Press Task Processors and
Proofers.
Color Books Overview
The Color Books overview consists of the books table and the colors table. You
can create and partially edit color books, or individual colors within a specific
book. You can also import color books, which can be useful if you want to have
access to older Pantone colors.
You can click the International button to view translations of the color names in
several languages.
NOTE: System Color Books are displayed in italics, and cannot be edited.
Color Books Editor
The Color Books Editor allows you to modify the attributes of the selected Color
Book.
NOTE: You can only modify the dot gain values of the System Color Books. The
names of the System Color Books are displayed in italics.

Name
Enter a name for the selected Color Book
Suitable for printing on:

Paper type Select one of the paper types that are available for the selected color book.
Dot gain
Specifies the dot gain values for the selected Color Book.
Value Default is 15.
Highest at Default is 50.
Starting at Default is 0.
Ending at Default is 100.
Special Colors button

Special colors are color names for unusual inks such as varnishes and die-cutting
marks, glue zones, etc. These colors are organized in categories that determine
their behavior.
Click the Special Colors button to open the Special Colors editor.
Category Two categories are provided:
 Die line: never printed in main flows
 Varnish: never printed in proofing flows
NOTE: Special Color categories are also used by Apogee Preflight action lists.
Colors Enter additional color names (for example in your language) or click the Colors
button to choose colors that you want to add to this category.
International button
Click the International button to open the International Color Names editor
where you can add translations for the four process color names and ensure the
correct mapping of these color names when they appear in the different
languages.

906 COLOR BOOKS
Color Accuracy
Select the Show color accuracy (deltaE) check box to expand the Color Accuracy
panel.
Color Editor
The Color Editor allows you to modify the attributes of the selected color.
NOTE: You cannot modify colors that belong to one of the System Color Books.
The names of the System Color Books are displayed in italics.
General
Color name This name should be unique within the Color Book.
Colorant type Select the ink type:
 Normal
 Opaque
 Opaque Ignore
 Transparent
Color definition Define the color by its Lab color values.
Db (Neutral Density) The initial value is calculated from the color definition. These values are used by
trapping.
The Calculate button allows you to calculate the Neutral Density.
SID (Solid Ink Density) Specify the Solid Ink Density (SID).
Color Exceptions
You can specify the color values to be used in case the conversion from Lab color
does not produce the expected results. In that case, Apogee will use your values
instead of calculating them from the Lab values.
This table lists all of the exceptions that are defined for the print or proofing
device that you selected.

 To create or rename a color book

1 In the System Overview window, select the Press Task Processor for which
you want to create a new Color Book.
2 Double-click the Color Book icon.
The Color Book overview appears, containing the available Color Books in
the left column and its respective colors in the right column.
3 To create or rename a Color Book, do one of the following:
 Click on the New button underneath the left column to create a new Color
Book.
 Click the Edit button to rename the Color Book.
The Color Book editor appears.
4 Type an unique name for the book in the Name field and select a paper type
from the drop-down list.
5 Specify the dot gain values for the color book.
 Value: By default, this is set to 0.
 Highest at: By default, this is set to 50.
 Starting at: By default, this is set to 0.
 Ending at: By default, this is set to 100.
For more information on dot gain values, refer to “What is Calibration?” on

page 1074.
6 Click OK.

908 COLOR BOOKS
CAUTION: The newly created Color Book does not contain any colors yet. You
need to create these in the right column. For more information, see To
manage your colors in a selected color book on page 908.
7 Close the Color Books overview.
 To import a color book

you want to import a Color Book.
2 Double-click the Color Book icon.
The Color Book overview appears, containing the available Color Books in
3 Click the Import button:
An Open file dialog box is displayed.
4 Browse to the location of the color book you want to import, select the color
book file (*.MIME), and click Open.
The color book is imported, and is displayed in the list of color books.
 To manage your colors in a selected color book

you want to create, edit or delete a color.
2 Double-click the Color Books icon.
The Color Books overview appears, containing the available Color Books in
3 Select the Color Book in which you want to create, edit or delete a color in the
left column or create a new book by clicking the New button. In the newly
created book, you can then create new colors as described below.
You need to specify the Paper Type for the new book.
All of the book’s colors appear in the right column.

 Click the New button underneath the right column to create a new color,
define the color properties and click OK to save your settings.
 Click the Edit button to edit a color, define the color properties and click
OK to save your changes.
 Select the color that you want to delete in the right column and press
Delete or click the Delete button. Confirm the deletion.
5 Close the Color Books overview.
 To create or edit a color exception

1 In the System Overview window, select a Press Task Processor for which you
want to create or edit a color exception.
2 Double-click the Color Books icon.
The Color Books overview appears, containing the available Color Books in
3 Select the Color Book in which you want to create or edit a color exception in
the left column.
All of the book’s colors appear in the right column.
4 Click the Edit button under the right column to edit a color.
5 Expand the Color Exceptions section.
6 Do one of the following to either create or edit the exception.
 Click the New button to create an exception.

910 COLOR BOOKS
 Click the Edit button to edit an exception.
The Color Exception editor appears.
7 Select the ICC Profile that you want to use for this exception.
8 Specify the CMYK values for Lab to Process Color conversion.
9 Click OK to save your changes.
10 Click OK to close the Color Editor window and save the color exception.
NOTE: When you create an exception, standard CMYK values are calculated for
the selected profile.
 To delete a color exception

1 Edit a color.
2 Expand the Color Exceptions section.
3 Select the exception that you want to delete and click the Delete button.
5 Click OK to close the Color Editor window and delete the color exception.
NOTE: If you click Cancel, all color exception changes are lost.

Color Spaces
This category allows you to manage your Color Space resources.
NOTE: Service access level only!
Color Spaces Resources are available for the following Task Processors:
 M-Press Color Separations
 All Presses, including Digital Presses

912 CONTENT PROFILES
Content Profiles
The Content Profiles Resource category contains the Color Profiles (*.icm and
*.icc files) that are available to the Normalize and Render Task Processors.
These Profiles have no effect on the Profiles selected for the Press.
The Content Profiles Resources are available for the following Task Processors:
 All Render Task Processors
 Normalize
Content Profiles Overview
The Content Profiles overview lists the profile names and their color spaces.
Content Profile
The name of the Profile
Color Space
The name of the color space to which the Profile belongs. This may be:
 CMYK
 Grayscale
 RGB
You can import, export or delete a Content Profile.

Contrast Adjustments
This resource allows you to create adjustments for the contrast of rendered
results. For more general information on Contrast Adjustments, see “Saturation,
Contrast and Channel Adjustments” on page 126.

The Contrast Adjustments Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 Generic Digital Press
 To create a new contrast adjustment curve

1 In the System Overview window, select the M-Press Task Processor for which
you want to create a new Contrast Adjustment Curve.
2 Double-click the Contrast Adjustments icon in the Resources pane.
The Contrast Adjustments overview appears, containing all of the available

Contrast Adjustments for the M-Press Task Processor.
The curve editor is displayed.
4 Enter a name for your new curve, e.g. High Contrast, Low Contrast.
This is the name that appears in the presets list in Raster Preview.
5 Drag the curve to set the adjustments as desired.

914 CONTRAST ADJUSTMENTS
For more general information on working with the curve editor, see “Satura-
tion, Contrast and Channel Adjustments” on page 126.
6 Click Save.
Your new adjustment appears in the Contrast Adjustments List.
7 Close the overview.

Curves Adjustments
This resource allows you to create adjustments for the CMYK channels of
rendered results. For more general information on Curves Adjustments, see
“Saturation, Contrast and Channel Adjustments” on page 126.

The Curves Adjustments Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 To create a new curves adjustment

1 In the System Overview window, select the M-Press Task Processor for which
you want to create a new Curves Adjustment Curve.
2 Double-click the Curves Adjustments icon in the Resources pane.
The Curves Adjustments overview appears, containing all of the available

Contrast Adjustments for the M-Press Task Processor.
The curve editor is displayed.
4 Enter a name for your new curve.
This is the name that appears in the presets list in Raster Preview.
5 Select a Cyan, Magenta, Yellow or Black channel in the drop-down list to

activate the respective channel.
6 Drag the curve to set the adjustments as desired.

916 CURVES ADJUSTMENTS
For more general information on working with the curve editor, see “Satura-
tion, Contrast and Channel Adjustments” on page 126.
7 Click Save.
Your new adjustment appears in the Curves Adjustments List.

Device Link Profiles
The Device Link Profiles Resource category contains the profiles (*.icm and *.icc
files) that are available to the Normalize and Render Task Processors. These
Profiles have no effect on the Profiles selected for the Press.
The Device Link Profiles Resources are available for the following Task
Processors:
 PDF Render
 All Proofer Task Processors
Device Link Profiles Overview
By default, the Device Link Profiles overview list is empty. You can import,
export or delete profiles.

918 DEVICE PRINT MODES
Device Print Modes
Allows you to select, rename or delete a device print mode for a digital printer.
The Device Print Modes Resource is available for all commercial digital printers:

Device Screens
Allows you to select, rename or delete a device screen for your digital printer.
The Device Screens Resource is available for all commercial digital printers:

920 FINISHING HUB
Finishing Hub
The Finishing Hub is where you manage cutters, finishing operations and
finishing margins. You can create new resources or edit existing ones using the
File and Edit menus, or by context-clicking in the various lists.

The Finishing Hub is available for the following Task Processors:
 Open the Finishing Hub
 In the Layout Editor, choose Window > Resources and select Finishing Hub,
or go to System Overview.
Finishing Hub
Overview

1 Cutters
2 Finishing operations
3 Finishing margins
4 Details of cutters, operations or margins
5 Open other resources button
Cutters
This panel lists the cutting devices. The Type and Result Delivery tabs contain
the details for each cutter.
Name The name given to the cutting device.
Type tab The type of cutting device:
 X-Y cutter
 Roll cutter
 Guillotine
Result Delivery tab Here you can choose to create a cut file automatically for each sheet or not.
Create cut file: If the check box is selected, a cut file is generated and sent
automatically to a directory as specified. If the check box is not selected, you can
still send the file manually.
Export directory: The directory where the cut file is saved
File name: The name of the cut file. The directory and file name can be generated
using variables. See “System Variables” on page 1095 for more information on
using variables.
Format: The file format of the cut file:
 PDF: the default and most common format for a cut file
 EPS: for large sheets
Acrobat compatibility for large sheets: Select for sheets larger than 200 inches or
5.08 m to process the file using User Units.
Conflict handling: Choose what you want to do if a cut file has the same name as
an existing file: replace the existing file or keep the existing file and append a
sequence number to the new file.

922 FINISHING HUB
Rotate contents: The content of the cut file can be rotated 0°, 90°, 180° or 270°
without having to rotate the sheet. The default is 0° so the cut file has the same
orientation as the sheet.
Post-process files: After a cut file has been created, the system can run a script on
this file, for example to change the file format:
 Script: the full path to the script you want to run. It must be accessible by
the computer running Apogee. Click browse to open a file explorer and
select the location of the script.
 Options: Optional arguments that can be passed to the script. They are
passed as entered; the options are not enclosed in quotes or double
quotes, so the script can see them as individual arguments. The file name
of the cut path is always the last argument.
Preview panel Here you can choose to create a preview of the cut file. This file is saved in the
same directory and with the same file name (except the extension) as the actual
cut file. The following file formats are available:
 PNG
 BMP
Operation Mapping tab This tab provides a mapping table to define whether the available finishing
operations are selected for the cutter in question and how the generic names
(left column) are mapped to cutter-specific names (right column).
Clear the check box next to an operation if it is not supported by the cutter.
The default operations and any operations you add in the Finishing Operation
panel appear in this table with the generic name in the left column. To map an
operation to a cutter-specific name, select the operation in the list and enter the
cutter-specific name in the panel on the right. You can also set a Path Color for
the cutting path in the cut file.
Finishing Operations
The following finishing operations are provided by default:
 Camera Registration
 Crease
 Kiss
 Through Cut

In the details panel, you can specify one or more conditions for applying an
existing or new operation to an image automatically. The conditions can be set
to check the following items in your images and map these items to a finishing
operation:
 Spot color name: If you select the spot color name as condition, you can
choose one of the following options for matching the value or values you
enter in the comma-separated list of possible names:
 equals
 contains
 begins with
 ends with
Finishing Margins
Finishing margins can be defined in two ways as reflected by the settings of the
Finishing Margins dialog:
 Tool width (t)
 Minimum Material Next to Cut (e)
OR
 Minimum Distance between Images (g)
 Minimum Distance between Images and Sheet Edges (m)

924 FINISHING HUB
Click the link icon if you want to set specific values for Left, Right, Top or Bottom.
Margins are relative to the frame which initially corresponds with the trim box
of your image.
Open Button
Click this button to open related resources:
Mark Engraver See “Mark Engraver” on page 961.
Line Appearance Sets The Line Appearance Sets resource is where you can control the color of the
various lines that represent operations and whether or not these lines are visible
on the sheet. Click a color patch if you want to change the color or thickness of
the line. In this dialog you can also change the solid line to a dashed line in
various styles. Click the eye icon to make the line visible or to hide it. Click the
Show only visible check-box to filter the list of lines in this dialog. You can work
with the default set or create your own sets that you can apply in different situa-
tions (regular proofing, imposition proof, etc.)
CAD Line Input Maps This resource maps the lines detected in CAD files to operations (cut, crease,
perforate, etc.). Default maps are provided for selected CAD files formats. Select
a file format (CFF2, DXF, etc.) in the Format drop-down list to see the maps for
that format and then select a name in the list to see all the lines included in the
map. Each line has a type number and a mapped operation that you can change
in the line inspector on the right.

Folding Schemes
The Folding Schemes resource provides sets of Folding Schemes that Apogee
Impose can choose from to perform automatic imposition, or that you can select
to perform a manual imposition.
A Folding Scheme is a description of how the pages of a Product are arranged on

the sheet in a grid of cells. The scheme also contains a sequence of folding
instructions: where to fold, the folding direction and orientation, and the final
result of the folding. The number of pages in a signature determines which
Folding Schemes are eligible for the Fold Sheet.
 Double-click the Folding Schemes icon for an overview of the available sets
and schemes in the Folding Schemes dialog box.
The Folding Schemes resource category is available for:
 Impose

926 FOLDING SCHEMES
 Raster Impose

• Folding Schemes Overview on page 926
• Folding Scheme Editor on page 928
Folding Schemes Overview
The Folding Schemes dialog box lists all available Folding Schemes sets in the
left column, the Folding Schemes for the selected set in the centre column, and
the Folding Schemes for each number of pages in the right column.
Folding Scheme Sets (left column)

This column lists the default Folding Scheme set and any new or modified sets
you have created.
New sets can be created for jobs with specific Fold Page requirements or if you
want to limit the number of schemes that Apogee Impose can choose from.
Name A meaningful name, such as ‘booklet’, ‘brochure’, etc.
Folding Scheme list (center column)
This list displays the Folding Schemes grouped by the number of pages to be
folded (2, 4, 6, ... pages). Each entry in this list (e.g. F6-1) represents several
different Folding Schemes for that particular number of pages (F6-1, F6-2, ...).
Use Only schemes with the check box selected are considered by Apogee Impose for
the Auto Impose feature. A grey arrow indicates that not all folding schemes for
that particular number of pages are selected.
All Folding Schemes are available for manual imposition.
Pages Folding Schemes are organized by the number of pages to be folded for the Fold
Sheet.
Top Pick Indicates the Folding Scheme which has the highest priority for the selected
number of pages.
Folding Scheme Overview (right column)

The different Folding Schemes are displayed for a particular number of pages.

Folding schemes can be added, edited or deleted and also moved up and down
the list to set their priority. The selected scheme which is the highest in the list,
is the Top Pick and the one that appears in the center column for that particular
number of pages.
Use Only schemes with the check box selected are considered by Apogee Impose for
the Auto Impose feature. All Folding Schemes are available for manual
imposition.
Name The standardized CIP4 name or another name for a user-defined Folding
Scheme.
CxR Abbreviation for Columns x Rows; e.g. 4 x 2 means 2 rows of 4 pages.
Folding Sequence The notation for how the Fold Sheet is folded.

928 FOLDING SCHEMES
Folding Scheme Editor
 In the Folding Scheme Overview (right column), click the New button or the
Edit button to open the Folding Scheme editor.
General
Name and Description Enter a meaningful name and description
Columns and Rows Columns indicate the number of horizontal cells and Rows the vertical cells of
the page arrangement.
Glue Zones Select the check box if you want to apply ink-free areas for gluing; when
selected, the glue zones are displayed as blue strips in the folding scheme
diagram, and the glue tool is enabled.

Page Arrangement
If you have an existing Fold Sheet that you want to emulate, the Page Arrange-
ment method is used to create a scheme. You simply assign page numbers in the
cells using the two buttons and select a binding edge to preview the page orien-
tation of the Fold Sheet.
NOTE: The page numbers of a Folding Scheme are not necessarily the page
numbers of a Product. The first page is always 1 and the last page is always the
number of pages on the Fold Sheet. You only see the page numbers of the
Product when you apply the Folding Scheme to the Fold Sheets.
Folding Scheme diagram
1 Red corner icon: Lay on Front

2 Red corner icon (faded): Lay on Back
3 Yellow page: The lowest page number of the signature
4 Blue corner icon: Top page of the signature
5 Page numbers: rotated according to the rotation of the page on the Fold Sheet;
ambiguous numbers are underlined
6 Fold lines which are colored (green, blue, red)
- solid line: if the pages are still on top
- dashed line: if the pages are underneath
7 Fold line labels in the same color as the lines and as an extension of the line;
f1, f2, f3, etc. indicate the sequence of the folds
8 Jog edges in solid black and non-jog edges in gray

930 FOLDING SCHEMES
Arrangement buttons
cursor button for typing the page numbers on the Front or Back of the Folding Scheme; the
number for the other side (Front or Back) is added automatically
pointer button that inserts page numbers on the Front and Back of the Folding Scheme
Reset resets the scheme and empties the cells

glue tool
Preview for Left, Right, Top or Bottom binding for the Press Sheet preview.
NOTE: This binding style is not part of the actual Folding Scheme setting.
Folding Scheme
If you don’t have an existing Fold Sheet to work from, you can enter the sequence
here using the Folding Sequence Notation.
Folding Sequence Indicates the sequence for the scheme
Edit Sequence This button opens the Folding Sequence editor where you can edit an existing
folding sequence or create a new one
Default page arrangement  Head to head: arranges pages in such a way that the head of the pages is on
the closed head of the signature, suitable for jogging to the head
 Foot to foot: arranges pages in such a way that the foot of the pages is on the
closed head of the signature, suitable for jogging to the foot
 To edit, add or duplicate a Folding Scheme

You can add a new Folding Scheme to an existing Set or create a new Set first
and add your new Folding Scheme to this new Set. Every scheme you add
becomes a part of every Set but is only enabled in the Set where it was originally
added.
1 In the Folding Schemes dialog box, click the New button or the Edit button to
open the Folding Scheme editor directly, or click the Duplicate button and
then edit the newly created scheme in the list.
2 Enter a name and description.
3 Enter the number of columns and rows.
NOTE: If you made a copy of an existing scheme, the page arrangement is

reset and the cells are emptied if you change the number of columns or rows.

You now have two options to make the actual scheme.
4 Use the Page Arrangement buttons to create the scheme. Clicking the Reset
button displays a blank scheme.
Enter the binding for previewing the Folding Sheet. This may also change the
layout of the pages to meet Head to Foot and Foot to Foot restrictions.
OR
5 Click Edit Sequence to open the Folding Sequence Editor and create the
sequence using the Folding Sequence buttons.
6 Click OK.
7 Choose the Default page arrangement.
8 Click Save.
If a Folding Scheme with the same folding sequence and the same page
arrangement already exists or a Folding Scheme with the same name exists,
Apogee Impose displays a warning dialog box.
9 Click Save Anyway or Cancel.

932 FOLDING SCHEMES
 To work with the Page Arrangement tools

1 Enter the Name, Description, and Columns and Rows for the Folding
Scheme.
The Page Arrangement grid displays empty cells.
2 Click the cursor button and click the cell where you want the first page to be
located.
3 Type “1”.
Apogee puts the corresponding back page in the correct cell of the Back of the
Folding Scheme.
NOTE: The Back Page number is displayed when you click in a following cell.
OR
4 Click the pointer button and hover over the cells of the grid.
Apogee displays the first or next page number on the Front and Back of the
Folding Scheme.
5 Continue until all pages have been arranged.
Apogee Impose now displays the completed Folding Scheme:
 the folding lines and Folding Sequence
 the page with the lowest page number
NOTE: If the arrangement of the pages cannot be folded, a message is

displayed and you need to change the sequence.

 To use the Folding Sequence editor

1 In the Folding Scheme editor, click the Edit Sequence button to open the
Folding Sequence editor.
The Folding Sequence editor is empty if you are creating a new Folding
Scheme and you did not create a scheme with the Page Arrangement tools. If
you copied an existing scheme, the sequence for that scheme is displayed but
is cleared once you start editing.
2 Click in the Folding Sequence box and use the following shorthand notation
to define the sequence.
Fold up; use button or type “ ^ ”
Fold Down; use button or type “ v ”
1/4 Parallel Fold: parallel to the first fold and 1/4 of total length; use button or type the fraction
1/2 Cross Fold: perpendicular to the first fold; use button or type the fraction
+ Change direction; use button or type “ + ”
NOTE: The folding direction depends on the position of the lay.
3 Enter the folds until the Folding Sequence is complete and the message
‘Folding sequence is not complete yet’ is no longer displayed at the bottom of
the dialog box.
4 Click OK.
NOTE: The OK button is only enabled when the sequence is complete.

934 FOLDING SCHEMES
 To export a Folding Scheme/Folding Scheme Set

You can export a Folding Scheme/Set to another Apogee system.
1 In the Folding Scheme Overview (right column) or the Folding Scheme Set
overview (left column), click the export button.
2 Browse to the folder where you want to save the Folding Scheme/Set and
click Save.
 To import a Folding Scheme/Folding Scheme Set

You can import a Folding Scheme/Set from another Apogee system.
1 In the Folding Scheme Overview (right column) or the Folding Scheme Set
overview (left column), click the import button.
2 Locate the folder from which you want to import the Folding Scheme/Set,
and click Open.
NOTE: You may need to confirm that existing Folding Schemes can be
overwritten.

Fonts
The Fonts resource category contains the default fonts that were installed with
the Apogee software, together with any other fonts that have been imported.
Apogee is delivered with a font database comprising the most common

PostScript fonts. There is one common font database for the following Task
Processors:
 PDF Render
 Normalize
Font Overview
Displays a list of the currently installed fonts, and allows you to filter the list.
Display resources containing

Any text entered here will dynamically filter the list of fonts to display only the
font names which contain this text.
Font
Displays the font name
Type
Displays the font type, which may be any of the following:
 PostScript
 True Type (*.ttf)
 Type 1 (*.pfb)
 PostScript (*.pfa)
 Open Type fonts (*.otf)

936 FONTS
File Name
Displays the name of the font file. This is normally the same as the font name.
Except for the filtering feature, the general procedures for managing resources
apply also to fonts. You can also import ttf, pfb, pfa, and otf fonts into the Apogee
font database
 To filter the fonts list

1 Select a Task Processor that uses the Fonts Resource, by clicking it.
The resources associated with the Task Processor appear in the Resources
pane.
2 Double-click the Fonts icon in the Resources pane
The Fonts dialog box appears containing the available fonts for your system.
3 If necessary, filter the Fonts List by font name or part of the font name. For
example, type the word “Arial” in the text field at the top of the dialog box
and press Enter.
The dialog box lists only the Fonts containing the word Arial.
4 Close the Fonts dialog box.

Glue Zones
The Glue Zones resource provides settings to create ink-free areas where glue is
to be applied for binding a product. Depending on the type of product, glue is
applied on different areas of the product: inside or outside the spine, in or next
to the fold, on the body and/or cover, etc. You also need to specify how you want
the ink-free areas to be created.
 Double-click the Zones icon for an overview of the settings in the Glue Zones
dialog box.
The Glue Zones resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose
 Raster Compose
Glue Zones The Glue Zones dialog box lists all available Glue Zones sets in the left column
and the settings for each set in the right column.
Overview
Where
Here you specify whether and where the ink-free zone will be created.
Provide Glue Zones The condition for creating a glue zone:
 As specified by Category: Provide glue zones on the pages and with the
width as specified below, ignoring settings in the Folding Schemes or Web
Production Schemes.
 As specified by FS/WPS: Provide glue zones as specified in the Folding

Schemes or Web Production Schemes and with the width as specified
below.

938 GLUE ZONES
 As specified by Category and FS/WPS: Provide glue zones on pages and

with the width as specified below, and where set in the Folding Schemes
or Web Production Schemes.
Assembly Select one or more of the following categories (not active if As specified by FS/
WPS is selected) to be applied to the assembly.
 Between cover and body: creates glue zones between facing pages of the
cover and body parts
 On outermost pages: on the two outermost pages of the entire assembly,

excluding the cover and first signature
 On innermost pages: on the two innermost pages of the entire assembly
 Between book signatures: no glue is applied on pages between the cover

and the facing pages; different widths for stacked or nested book
signatures
1 2 2
1 Between cover and body

2 Between book signatures
Book Signature  On inner pages of book signature: creates glue zones on the inner pages
of a single book signature, but not on the outermost or innermost pages of
the specified signature

3 3 3
1 outermost pages
2 innermost pages
3 inner pages of a book signature
How
Here you specify how the areas are to be made ink-free:
Knock out Knocks out the entire page area, including the top and bottom trim margins, that
lies in the glue zone.
Shift Shifts the entire page horizontally away from the spine, so that spine edge of its
trim box aligns with the outside of the glue zone. In addition, the glue zone is
knocked out to prevent bleed being pulled into the glue zone.
Scale Scales the page horizontally by moving the spine edge of its trim box out of the
glue zone while keeping the face edge in place. In addition, the glue zone is
knocked out to prevent bleed being pulled into the glue zone.

940 HALFTONE SCREENS
Halftone Screens
When an image is output to an imagesetter for printing processes or laser printed

artwork, etc., the image is converted into a pattern of dots according to well
defined Halftone Screen settings. Each Halftone Screen contains a pattern of
dots of different sizes or shapes, simulating the effect of different tones and
colors.
Ruling Maps
You can predefine screen settings and add them to a Ruling Map. A Ruling Map
contains various rules that specify how the screen settings are to be applied. You
can re-use a Ruling Map whenever necessary. When creating a job, you can
select a specific Ruling Map for processing to avoid any problems due to
mistakes.
In the Halftone Screens dialog box, you will see all the available Halftone screens
in the upper panel, and all available Ruling Maps in the lower panel. You can use
this dialog box to create your own Ruling Maps containing specific halftone
screen settings.
NOTE: Any Halftone Screens displayed in italics are not yet licensed, and cannot
be used. If you want to license these screens, you must follow the licensing
procedure described in the Apogee Licensing Guide.
The Halftone Screens Resources are available for the following Task Processors:
 All imagesetters and platesetters
Halftone Screens Editor
The Halftone Screens editor allows you to import, delete, and customize
halftone screens, and create and use ruling maps.

Halftone Screens
Screen Select either Positive or Negative screens.
Screen Type Select the screen type that you want to edit
 ABS (Agfa Balanced Screening)
 Adobe Accurate
 CristalRaster Uncompensated
 Rational Tangent
Import: You can click the Import button to import another screen type to the list
from file (in MIME format).
Delete: You can click the Delete button to remove the selected screen type from
the list. This will also remove any resources related to the selected halftone
screens.
Resolution The available resolutions are dependent on the selected Screen Type.
Duplicate: You can click the Duplicate button to create a custom resolution for
the Adobe Accurate and Rational Tangent screen types.
Delete: You can click the Delete button to remove the selected resolution from
the list. This will also remove any resources related to the selected resolution.
Frequency The available frequencies are dependent on the selected resolution.
Add: You can click the Add button to add a custom frequency for the Adobe
Accurate and Rational Tangent screen types.

Delete: You can click the Delete button to remove the selected frequency from
the list. This will also remove any resources related to the selected frequency.
Dot Shape  Elliptical
 Round
Dot Size CristalRaster only.
Separation/Angle  Cyan - 15
 Magenta - 75
 Yellow - 0
 Black - 45
NOTE: You can define custom angles (positive or negative) for Adobe Accurate
and Rational Tangent screens.
Ruling Maps
Ruling Map Folder Name of the Ruling Map folder.
Resolution The available resolutions are dependent on the selected Screen Type.
Frequency/Used Screen Dependent on the selected resolution.
 To create a new ruling map folder
TIP: You can also create new 1 Open the Ruling Maps pane, and click the New button.
folders automatically when
adding halftone screens.
The Ruling Map Folder dialog box appears.
2 Type a name for your Ruling Map folder and click OK.
The new folder appears in the Ruling Map Folder list.

CAUTION: The folder you have just created is empty. This means that it does
not contain any halftone screens yet. To add halftone screens to your Ruling
Map folder, follow the procedure “To add halftone screens to a ruling map
folder” on page 943.
 To add halftone screens to a ruling map folder
To add a halftone screen to a Ruling Map folder, you must first specify the screen
type, resolution, frequency and dot shape, in that order.
NOTE: For CristalRaster screen types, you must specify the resolution and dot
size.
1 Select the halftone screen you want to add by selecting a screen type, resolu-
tion, frequency and dot shape.
2 Once you have specified the dot shape or dot size (CristalRaster), open the
Ruling Map list.
The Ruling Map dialog box appears.
TIP: You can also enter the 3 Specify the Ruling Map folder by selecting it in the drop-down list and the
name of a new Ruling Map frequency number (lpi value), if necessary.
folder: This will create the
folder automatically. 4 Click Add Map to add the halftone screen to your Ruling Map.
5 Click OK.
The halftone screen is added to your Ruling Map folder.
6 Select the folder in the Ruling Map Folder list and then select the specified
resolution.
You can now see the halftone screen in the Used Screen list.
NOTE: When adding CristalRaster screens to a Ruling Map folder, you have to
type the frequency number that you want to associate with a certain dot size.
You can, for instance, type 112 and link it to a dot size of 21 microns. When
using the 112 value in your pre-press application, the CristalRaster dot size
21 is automatically selected.
 To change the halftone screen angle

 Select the screen type or

 Add a new screen type by clicking the Add button.
2 Select the resolution.
3 Select the frequency.
NOTE: This is not applicable to CristalRaster screens.
4 Select the dot shape (or dot size for CristalRaster screens).
5 To change a color separation angle, do one of the following:
 Double-click a color separation.
 Select a color separation and click the Edit button.
You can define custom angles (positive or negative) for Adobe Accurate and
Rational Tangent screens.
6 For ABS screens, select one of the available color separation angles from the
list. For Adobe Accurate or Rational Tangent screens, enter a custom color
separation angle of you choice.
7 Click OK.
 To specify the angle for spot colors

 Select the screen type or
 Add a new screen type by clicking the Add button.
2 Select the resolution.
3 Select the frequency.
NOTE: This is not applicable to CristalRaster screens.
4 To specify the angle for spot colors, do one of the following:
 For new spot colors click the New button.

 For existing spot colors select the spot color and click the Edit button.
The spot colors will be given sequence numbers according to the separation
order. The spot color itself can be specified in the Separation Settings for the
Render Task Processor (see “Separation Settings” on page 287).
NOTE: You can specify angles not only for spot colors, but also for process
colors.
 To delete spot color angles that you have added

1 Select the spot color angle, and click the Delete button.
The spot color angle is deleted.
NOTE: You can only delete the spot color angles that you have added.
 To import custom dot shapes for your halftone screens

1 From the Halftone Screens dialog box, select the Adobe Accurate or Rational
Tangent screen type.
2 Select a resolution, frequency and dot shape.
3 Click the Import button.
4 Locate the folder which contains your Dotshape packages.
These dot shape packages are in MIME or PostScript file format (*.mime,
*.ps)
5 Click Open.
The custom dot shapes are displayed in the Dotshape list.

 To delete custom dot shapes

1 From the Halftone Screens dialog box, select a screen type, resolution,
frequency and dot shape.
1 Select a custom dot shape, and click the Delete button.
The dot shape is deleted.
NOTE: You can only delete custom dot shapes.

InkTune Sets
This resources allows you to control ink saving. Ink saving is achieved by
applying Grey Component Removal (GCR) to replace the usage of process color
inks by black.
 Generic Press
•
What is GCR?
Within the CMY color space, any hue angle can be achieved by combining two of
the three primaries. The intention of the third color is to move that hue towards
grey (decrease saturation), and is known as the greying agent. However, as that
greying agent has an inherent hue of its own, it also shifts the hue as it changes
the saturation of the resulting color. The most efficient way to change the satura-
tion of a given color while maintaining the same hue angle is to use the Key
(Black) component. The act of substituting a quantity of the greying agent for a
quantity of black is known as Grey component replacement. In grey component
replacement (GCR), the CMY values that add to grey all along the tone scale can
be replaced with black ink. Gray component replacement only adds black to the
CMY equivalent of what would have printed as a grey.
GCR has benefits because black ink is generally less expensive than colored inks,
and the resulting output is less susceptible to changes in the printing variables
since you are not continually trying to balance as much C, M, and Y.
InkTune Sets Overview

This is the list of all the available ink-saving presets.
Select a preset in the list to see more information in the pane on the right. Use
the sliders to change the values of the presets.

948 INKTUNE SETS
Start K
The value at which GCR in neutral tones kicks in. Typically, this should be 0%.
GCR Mid tones

This slider is used to control the GCR curve between the Start K point and the
blackpoint.
In Neutrals
These settings control GCR in the neutral tones.
GCR Blackpoint Sets the percentage of GCR applied to the neutral tones. Blackpoint is the darkest
point as defined by the press profile.
In Colors
These settings control GCR in the colored tones.
Chroma Zone Defines the Chroma value from which point onwards the GCR Chroma % is
applied. For colors with a Chroma value below the set point, the amount of GCR
is gradually set between the GCR % of the Neutral set up, and the GCR
Chroma %. Any color with a Chroma value higher than the Chroma Zone value,
will be treated with GCR Chroma % value.
GCR Chroma Sets a different amount of GCR for (saturated) color than for neutrals. The GCR
Chroma % value will be applied to any color with a Chroma value higher than
the Chroma Zone value.
Ink Limits
These values set the limits for controlling GCR. Select the Override Input Ink
Values check box to force ink save for colors with higher ink loads than the press
profile.
Override Input Ink Values This check box can be selected to force colors with higher ink loads than the
press profile to apply ink saving up to a new maximum ink load — for both the
total ink load and for max K separately.
NOTE: When this option is selected, the label of the Max K parameters changes
from GCR Max K to Force Max K and the Ink Limits drop-down list is enabled.
When this check box is cleared, the Max K slider defines the maximum value for
K to be used during the GCR calculation. However, input colors that already
contain more K than the result after GCR calculation, will not be changed in
order not to waste ink.

Force Max K The maximum amount of black ink that may be used for ink saving.
Ink Limits Two options are available in the drop-down list:
Total Ink Limit (TIL/TAC): Set a total ink limit so that all colors will have ink saving
applied with that value as maximum total ink value.
Dynamic Low-ink Coverage (DLC): Selecting this option displays advanced

settings to save ink by adjusting the color gamut of a profile and omitting zones
where color differences are difficult for the human eye to distinguish. Sliders
with a maximum value of 400% are displayed for the following ink zones:
 Primary CMYK
 Secondary RGB
 Secondary CK, MK, YK
 Tertiary CMY
 Tertiary CMK, CYK, MYK
 Equal CMYK.

950 INK SETS
Ink Sets
Ink Sets contain the color specifications for the process colors. Apogee ships with
a number of installed ink sets such as Euro, Swop, Toyo, Dic and Iso. They all use
the standard CMYK color space.
In the Ink Sets Resources you can select an existing Ink Set for your Press Task
Processor or create a new one where you can manually specify which colors have
to be used as separation colors.
The Ink Sets Resources are available for all Print (Press) Task Processors.
Printing Ink Sets Overview
Provides an overview of the available ink sets.
Ink Set
Lists the names of the ink sets that are available on the Press.
Process
Indicates which colors are available in the available ink sets.
Ink Set Editor
Allows you to edit an ink set.
Name
The name of the Ink Set should be unique. This field cannot be left empty.

Color Space
The name of the used color space. In the drop-down list you see all of the avail-
able color spaces.
Colors
In these fields you see the name of the inks used for that specific color model.
 To edit an ink set

you want to edit an ink set.
2 Double-click the Ink Sets icon in the Resources pane.
The Ink Sets overview appears, listing all of the available Ink Sets.
3 Select the Ink Set that you want to edit and click the Edit button.
The Ink Set editor appears.
4 Select the Color Book in the left column and the color in the right column.
5 Click OK.
The selected color will be used as a separation color.
6 Repeat the selection procedure for each separation color.
7 Click OK to save your settings and to close the Ink Set editor.
8 Close the Ink Set overview.

952 INK TABLES
Ink Tables
This category allows you to manage your Ink Table resources.
The Ink Tables Resources are available for the following Print Task Processors:
 M-Press
 M-Press Color Separations
Ink Tables Overview
The Ink Tables overview lists the available ink tables.
You can import, export or delete ink tables.

Input Color Conversions
Input Color Conversions are presets that convert the color values of the
document elements to the document output intent. The actual input conversion
is performed by the PDF Render task processor where you select the Input
Conversion preset in the Render operation.
To select your input color conversion in the Render operation of PDF Render,
you must choose Document Based mode in the color management settings.
 PDF Render
Input Color Conversions Overview
The Input Color Conversions overview lists all available input conversions.
Input Color Conversion list

Select a conversion in the list to see more information in the pane on the right.
Convert Objects to Document Intent

These setting define how color values in CMYK, RGB and Gray objects are
converted to the Document Output Intent.

954 INPUT COLOR CONVERSIONS
Apply Black Point Apogee uses a built-in algorithm to adjust for differences in the black points.
Compensation Select the color space or spaces you want to apply this conversion to: RGB,
CMYK, Gray.
Gray Conversion: Convert Select this option to render a gray image in K only.
as pure K
CMYK Profile Link Choose an exception from the drop-down list:

Exception
 None
 Keep 100% K
 Normal
 Preserve K
 Preserve Pure Colors
 other exceptions as listed in the Profile Link Exceptions resource
Defaults
If the input tagging sets the rendering intent to From Input but no color values
are specified, a default rendering intent is applied.
Rendering Intent Choose a default rendering intent from the drop-down list:


well.

color accuracy



956 LINEARIZATION CURVES
Linearization Curves
Linearization is a special type of calibration, intended specifically for imageset-

ters and platesetter. For more general information on Linearization, see “What
is Linearization?” on page 1074.
The Linearization Curves Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 All of the Imagesetter and Platesetter Task Processors.
Linearization Settings
The creation process of Linearization curves consists of a series of dialog boxes

and the Linearization Curve Editor. For detailed information on the settings of
these dialog boxes, see “Calibration and Linearization Settings” on page 1076.
 To create a new linearization curve

1 In the System Overview window, select the Output Task Processor for which
you want to create a new Linearization Curve.
2 Double-click the Linearization Curve icon in the Resources pane.
The Linearization Curves overview appears. In the upper pane, you see all of
the available Linearization Curves for the Output Task Processor.
A dialog box appears in which you can specify different settings.

4 Select the type of Screen and the associated Resolution, Frequency, Dot
Shape, Media and Polarity.
Workflow cannot be selected. It is displayed only for information.
NOTE: For CristalRaster screens, you have to specify the Dot Size instead of
Frequency and Dot Shape.
5 Click OK to save your selection.
A Curve Wizard dialog box appears.
6 Specify how you want to initialize the table and click Next.
A Curve Wizard dialog box appears where you can specify the initial curve
data.
7 Select the values for the Stimuli column and click Next.
data.
8 Select the values for the Wanted column and the Measured column and click
Finish.
The Linearization Curve dialog box appears.
9 Enter any required information, type the name of your Linearization Curve
and click OK.
Your Linearization Curve appears in the Linearization Curve List in the upper
pane.
10 Close the dialog box.
Workflow Selection In the upper right corner, you can select the polarity of the workflow. You can
choose between:
NOTE: These polarity options  Positive CTF

are not displayed for
platesetters.  Negative CTF
This option is repeated in the Linearization Map Settings, so that you have a
complete overview of all the relevant settings when creating Auto-Select Maps
for Linearization. For more information on Linearization Auto-Select Maps, see
“Linearization Auto-Select Maps” on page 958.

958 LINEARIZATION CURVES
Linearization Auto- You can create Linearization Auto-Select Maps in the Linearization Curves
Resource category. For more information on Resources maps see “Using
Select Maps Resource Auto-Select Maps” on page 1069.
In order to do so, select the Linearization Curve and click Add Map. This will
open the settings dialog box for Linearization maps. These settings are identical
to the General Settings of a Linearization curve. For more information on these
settings, see “Curve Editor” on page 1080.
NOTE: You can also drag and drop a Linearization Curve to the Linearization
Auto-Select Maps table.
Fallback
Click the Fallback button to specify what Apogee should do if the automatic
selection of linearization curves does not find a match. You have the following
options:
Use no linearization
The job will be processed without linearization.
Notify
Apogee will put the job on hold and send a message to the Message Board.

Margins
This resource is important for unbound work and provides extra cut-off margins
around the different elements of the unbound work. These margins are similar
to the Page Trim Margins for bound work.
 Double-click the Margins icon for an overview of the available Margins.
The Margins resource is available for the following Task Processors:
 Impose
 Raster Impose
Margins Overview
The Margins dialog box lists all available Margin resources in the left column.
 Click a Margin in the left column to display its settings.
Name A meaningful name of the resource

960 MARGINS
Offcut Enter the Offcut distances in mm. These are the Top, Bottom, Left, Right margins
for extra paper around each element.

Mark Engraver
The Mark Engraver is an important resource of Apogee Impose which is used to

organize marks in Mark Sets and add these Mark Sets to the Pages, Fold Sheets
and Press Sheets of an imposition.
The marks are placed automatically using conditions, however, it is also possible
to place the marks manually using the Marks palette in the Press Sheet View of
Apogee Impose. Although the Mark Engraver is for administrators only, the
settings of the different marks can be accessed by all users in the Press Sheet
View.
The Mark Engraver resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose

962 MARK ENGRAVER
 Open the Mark Engraver
 In the Layout Editor, choose Window > Resources and select Mark Engraver,
or go to System Overview.
At the top of the Mark Engraver you have an overview of marks in the
different categories.
The section under the overview shows the conditions for the selected Mark
Set or the details of the individual Marks within each Mark Set. This section
can be opened by clicking the grey triangle.
By default, the conditions and details are locked. You can unlock the condi-
tions and details for editing by clicking the Lock icon in the bottom left
corner.
Mark Sets The left column of the overview section displays the three Mark Sets categories
and the number of Mark Sets in each category. The Mark Sets consist of marks
Overview which are brought together and placed according to the specified positioning
and conditions.
The Mark Sets are organized in the following categories:
 Page Marks: Crop, File, Text, Line, Rectangle

 Fold Sheet Marks (bound products): File, Text, Line, Rectangle, Registration,
Cut Mark, Collation Mark, Fold Line
 Element Marks (unbound folded and flat products): File, Text, Line,
Rectangle, Cut, Fold Line
 Press Sheet Marks: Cut-off, File, Text, Line, Rectangle, Registration, Slit
 Image Marks: Text, File, Crop, Grommet, Line, Rectangle, Circle
 Sheet Marks: Text, File, Cut, Registration, Fotoba, Cutter Registration,

Grommet, Line, Rectangle, Circle
The middle column lists all the Mark Sets for a particular category and the
number of Marks in the selected Mark Set. The Name of the Mark Set is preceded
by an icon that indicates the condition applied to the Mark Set.
The right column lists all the Marks of the selected Mark Set.
 To add/edit a Mark Set

1 Unlock the Mark Engraver and click a Category
2 Click the new button above the Name column.
OR
Right-click in the middle column and choose New from the list.
A new Mark Set name appears in the list with a default name and 0 Marks.
OR
Right-click an existing Mark Set and choose New or Edit from the list.
3 Set the conditions for this new Mark Set.
4 Lock the Mark Engraver.

964 MARK ENGRAVER
 To add a Mark
1 Unlock the Mark Engraver and click a Mark Set name.
2 Click the new button above the Marks column.
A drop-down is displayed with a list of the different Mark types.
OR
Right-click in the Marks column.
3 Select the Mark type you require.
The Mark is added to your Mark Set with a default name.
4 In the Details section, edit the settings for your new Mark.
5 Lock the Mark Engraver.
 To duplicate a Mark/Mark Set

1 Unlock the Mark Engraver and right-click a Mark/Mark Set name.
A menu is displayed.
2 Select Duplicate to copy the Mark or Mark Set.

The new Mark Set contains the same Marks as the original and has the same
conditions. The Marks have the same details.
3 Edit the settings for the new Mark Set/Mark as required.
 To move/copy Marks between Sets
 Drag a Mark from one Mark Set to another or press the Ctrl key while
dragging to duplicate the Mark.
NOTE: You cannot move between categories.
 To name/re-name a Mark/Mark Set

1 Unlock the Mark Engraver and context-click a Mark/Mark Set name.
A menu is displayed.
2 Select Edit to rename the Mark or Mark Set.
Mark Set Conditions
The Conditions section of the Mark Engraver is the same for the four categories
of Mark Sets. By default you see one line where you can enter criteria. Criteria
lines can be added, edited or deleted. The printing of the marks can also be
limited to proofs.
Examples of conditions:
Apply When all criteria are met with criterion $product.name equals
MyProduct.
Apply When some criteria are met with criterion

$press_sheet.side.press.name equals Large Press.

966 MARK ENGRAVER
 Click a Mark Set category and then the Name of a Mark Set to display the
Conditions section.
Apply to “Split for Proof” results only

Select this check box if you only want the mark set to appear on the proofs of a
press sheet and not on the actual press sheet when it is printed. If you select this
option, the proof-only marks do not appear in the Mark Sets inspector nor in
Sheet View and no checks are performed for conflicts. Proofs always include the
actual press sheet marks.
Apply
 Always: the Mark Set is always applied and does not take the criteria into
account.
 Manually only: The Mark Set can only be placed manually.
 When all criteria are met: The Mark Set is only applied when all the criteria
lines are true.
 When some criteria are met: The Mark Set is applied when at least one of the
criteria lines is true.
The selected condition is indicated with an icon in the Mark Sets list.
Mark Set is always applied
Mark Set is only applied manually
Mark set is applied when all/some criteria are met
Mark set is applied partially (mark deleted manually for example)
Variable
This drop-down lists the variables you can use for your criteria.
Expressions
Depending on the variable you use for your criterion, you will see expressions
that test against a string (e.g. the name of a Press or Product) or a number:
 equals (string or number)
 does not equal (string or number)

 less than (number)
 greater than (number)
 less than or equal to (number)
 greater than or equal to (number)
 is even (number)
 is odd (number)
 contains (string)
 does not contain (string)
Value
In this field you enter the value you want to apply for the variable:
 a string: e.g. your Product, your Press
 a number with/without unit: e.g. 1000 mm
 To create/edit a Mark Set condition

1 Click a Mark Set Category and then a Name to display the Conditions section.
2 Choose one of the options from the Apply drop-down list, e.g. When all
criteria are met.
3 Click the New button next to the conditions line to create a new criteria line.
4 Choose a variable from the first drop-down list, e.g. $job.order, an expression
from the middle list, and enter a value in the right field to complete the
criterion.
Mark Types The different Mark types are indicated with a specific icon:
Circle Mark: draws a circle with or without fill color
Collation Mark: stepped blocks with the signature number which are used to inspect the cor-
rect collation order of folded sheets
Cut Mark: a horizontal and a vertical line in the corners of a Fold Sheet to indicate the bound-
aries of the Fold Sheet and where it is to be cut

968 MARK ENGRAVER
Cut-off Mark: lines at the cut-off between Web Production Schemes, on the left and right
sides of the web
File Mark: places a specific EPS or PDF file as a mark
Fold Line: draws a set of vertical or horizontal lines that indicate where to fold the sheet
Fotoba Mark: draws horizontal and vertical lines to enable cutting with a Fotoba cutting
device.
Grommet Mark: draws sequential marks along the sides of an image or layout. These marks
are printed on the layout and indicate where reinforced eyelets can be produced.
Cutter Registration Mark: draws reference dots to enable cutting with X/Y cutting devices.
Line Mark: draws a line
Crop Mark: a horizontal and a vertical line to indicate where the page has to be cropped
Rectangular Mark: draws a rectangle with or without fill color
Registration Mark: draws a series of marks which are used to check that the registration of the
different printing colors is correct
Station Number Mark: indicates the station of an instance of a product, i.e. its position on the
sheet
Text Mark: prints the job name, order number, color name, etc. on the Press Sheet
Slit Mark: draws a line to indicate where a press sheet is to be cut in ribbons for web printing
These icons are also used in the Mark Sets Inspector in the Press Sheet View.
Each Mark type has its own settings which are displayed in the Details section of
the Mark Engraver. The Details section has a number of tabs depending on the
Mark type:
 “Mark Attributes” on page 969
 “Mark Position” on page 989
 “Mark Conflicts” on page 992
 “Mark Repeat” on page 993
 “Mark Special” on page 994

Mark Attributes The Attributes are explained for each Mark type.
 “Circle Mark Details” on page 969
 “Collation Mark Details” on page 970
 “Crop Mark Details” on page 973
 “Cut Mark Details” on page 974
 “Cut-off Mark Details” on page 975
 “Density Bar Details” on page 975
 “File Mark Details” on page 978
 “Fold Line Mark Details” on page 979
 “Fotoba Mark Details” on page 979
 “Grommet Mark Details” on page 981
 “Cutter Registration Mark Details” on page 982
 “Line Mark Details” on page 983
 “Rectangle Mark Details” on page 984
 “Registration Mark Details” on page 985
 “Slit Mark Details” on page 986
 “Station Number Mark Details” on page 987
 “Text Mark Details” on page 987
Circle Mark Details
Mark Sets Categories: Pages, Fold Sheet, Press Sheet, Image, Sheet
The Circle Mark draws a rectangle with a border and fill color. This mark is
always printed using knock-out.

970 MARK ENGRAVER
Width Specifies the horizontal size of the mark. You can create oval shapes by
unlocking the link and entering different values for Width and Height.
Height Specifies the vertical size of the mark.
Border pen Choose a pen to draw the lines; lines have different thicknesses.
NOTE: The border is created on the inside of the bounding box.
Fill with color This option is selected by default.
Click the variable button, and select one or more options to determine on which
plate(s) the mark will be printed:
See “About Colors and Depth for Printing Marks” on page 997 for more informa-
tion on using colors to print marks.
Collation Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Fold Sheet
A Collation Mark combines a signature mark and a version mark to check that
folded sheets are collated in the correct order for each version.

Attributes tab
Signature Mark The signature mark is the marking on the spine or fold of the folded sheets that
indicates the signature. It is printed in black and may optionally contain an index
number.
 Thickness: The thickness (or width) of the mark. Also sets the width of the
step area. The default is 3mm.
 Length: The length of the mark. Also sets the step size with which the mark is
offset. Note that there is no gap between two adjacent marks. The default is
11mm.
 Color: The color of the stepped blocks of the mark; the text in the mark is
always white and knocked out of the blocks.
 Knock-out: Select to knock out the area under the mark. The knock-area is
the bounding box of the mark.
 Extend: Extends the knock-out area of the mark; can be used for conflict
checking.
Step Area The step area is the area in which the mark travels. The mark starts at the top (or
bottom) of the step area, and advances one step with each section/signature.
 Position: You can choose to position the collation marks automatically, semi-
automatically or manually.
 Automatically by Assembly Style
 Spine: The marks are placed on the outer spine.
 Closed Head: The marks are placed on the last but one fold.
 Overfold: The marks are placed on the innermost overfold.
 Faces: The marks are drawn on the face margin of every page of the fold
sheet.

972 MARK ENGRAVER
 Manually: You can define the position of the marks in the Position tab. See
“Mark Position” on page 989.
 Offset from edges: the distance of the step area from the page trim edges. The
default is 0 mm.
 Step Area Length: Sets the length of the step area. When you enter a value,
Apogee calculates and displays the Number of steps.
 Number of Steps: Sets the number of steps in the step area:
 Fit within available space: Apogee calculates the number of steps possible
in the available space
 Fit within fixed length: enter a length and Apogee calculates the number
of steps
 Fixed: set the number of steps you require
Rotate If you select manual positioning of the step area you can also choose to rotate the
marks.
Stepping Pattern The pattern defines the position of the first mark, the direction in which the mark
is stepped (normal or reverse), and what to do when arriving at the end of the
step area (sawtooth or zigzag). Apogee graphically represents the four possibil-
ities. The default is to use normal direction with the sawtooth movement.
Index Indicates the orientation of the index number: not printed, at 0 degrees, 90
degrees, 180 degrees, 270 degrees.
Script and Font Two drop-down lists for the script and font to be used for the index number. The
default script is Roman which uses the Helvetica font by default.
For Chinese or Japanese, choose these from the Script drop-down list and then
select an appropriate font for these languages from the Font drop-down list.
Choosing Chinese or Japanese changes the writing direction of the index
number to vertical. This writing direction can be combined with the index
number orientation option.
NOTE: This dialog box always shows an Arabic number 1 as an example. The
actual rendering can only be seen in the Press Sheet view or Raster Preview.

Versioning tab
Version Mark A colored mark placed next to the signature mark to indicate the version for a
versioning job.
Length The length of the space to be reserved for the version mark; the width is the same
as the signature mark.
Index How the version number is printed:
 Number only: the version number without the ‘v’
 Short version name: the version number with the ‘v’
 None: no version number is printed
Color  Version color: a rectangle is printed in the version color code
 Same as signature mark
 None: a rectangle is not printed
Space between version and Enter the distance that you want between the two marks.
signature marks
Crop Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Pages, Image
A Crop Mark is a horizontal and a vertical line to indicate where the page has to
be cropped.
Type A drop-down list with 2 options for what the crop mark indicates:
 Page Trim: the final size of the pages

974 MARK ENGRAVER
 Page Bleed: perpendicular lines at the corner of the bleed zone of a page,
indicating the bleed area
Distance from corner Specifies the distance between the center of the mark and the page corner; the
page corner can be for the Page Trim or the Page Bleed.
Line length Specifies the length of the mark.
Pen Choose a pen to draw the lines; lines have different thicknesses.
Hiding Selected by default and hides the marks between adjacent pages.
Shingling Specify whether shingling is to be applied or not.
NOTE: Crop marks only have the Layer settings to be defined in the Position tab.
Cut Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Fold Sheet, Sheet
A Cut Mark is a horizontal and a vertical line in the corners of a Fold Sheet to
indicate the boundaries of the Fold Sheet and where it is to be cut.
Distance from corner Specifies the distance between the corner end of the mark and the Fold Sheet
corner.
NOTE: There is no option to hide marks between adjacent Fold Sheets.

Cut-off Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Press Sheet
A Cut-off Mark is a line that indicates where to cut between sheets in web
printing. The line is drawn at the cut-off inside a single Web Production Scheme,
but no marks are drawn when there is only one cut-off between schemes or when
placed on a sheet-fed sheet. Cut-off marks are situated on the left- and right sides
of the web and not at the edges of the ribbons.
Distance from sheet edges Specifies the distance from the left and right edges of the sheet.
Density Bar Details
Mark Sets Category: Press Sheet
The Density Bar mark draws bars of equal density across the full width of the
press sheet or along the edges. A bar is drawn for each separation color. In the
Conflicts tab, you can specify the action to be taken (fail the job, print mark, do
not print the mark, notify) if the step area interferes with the content.

976 MARK ENGRAVER
Type
Top bars Draws density bars at the top of the sheet and across the entire width of the press
sheet or content block.
Edge bars: left or right Draws smaller density bars, similar to patches, on the right or left side of the
press sheet. These bars are centered on the specified edge, i.e. half the width falls
outside the press sheet and is not clipped.
Custom Lets you specify the location of the step area where the bars are drawn. Choosing
this type enables extensive settings in the Position tab.
Step Area
This is the zone where the density bars are drawn on the press sheet – outside the
content block (pages plus bleed) – so they do not interfere with the actual
printed content. The available settings depend on the chosen type.
References Select the Use press sheet margins as edge check box if you want to bring the
bars within the margins of the sheet. Otherwise the bars extend to the edges of
the sheet.
Position Specifies where the bars will appear:
 At top of sheet: The top of the step area is at the top of the press sheet or
against the margins, with the topmost bar against the top of the step area.

 Above content block: The bottom of the step area is against the top edge
of the content block, with the bottommost bar against the bottom of the
step area.
 At Gripper: The bottom of the step area is against the gripper.
 Center of press sheet: The vertical center of the step area is in the vertical
center of the press sheet, with the bars centered vertically in the step area.
Height Specifies the total height of the step area:
 Available space: Uses the space between the edge of the press sheet and
the topmost margin of the content block, minus the offsets specified in the
Offset From settings.
 Fixed: You can enter a value for the height of the step area.
Width Specifies the total width of the step area:
 Across the press sheet: Prints the bars across the entire press sheet (with
the margins), minus the offsets specified in the Offset From settings.
 Across content block: Keeps the bars within the width of the content
block.
Offsets from Enter a distance that the step area must keep away from the content block or
sheet edges
Bars
Here you specify the height of the bars and the spacing between them.
Height  Fill step area: The height of the step area is divided by the number of
colors, minus the space between the bars, to obtain the height of the
individual bars.
 Fixed: You specify the height of the individual bars.
Between bars Specify the distance between the individual bars; the space can also be zero.
Colors
By default, each color in the job has its own bar. They appear in the same order
as in the separation list of the Render task processor. You can control which
colors are printed as follow:
Include Choose which colors you want to print bars for:

978 MARK ENGRAVER
 All colors: all kept and converted colors
 Process colors: all kept process colors
 Spot colors: all kept non-process colors
Except Enter the names of the colors (not case-sensitive) that you do not want to print
as color bars; separate the names with a comma.
File Mark Details
Use a File Mark, if you want to place a specific EPS or PDF file as a mark.
File Click the File list and select one of the available EPS or PDF files. The file is
selected as the mark to be used and you see the size and number of colors used
for the mark.
NOTE: You can open the Marks Resource by clicking the Open File Marks button,
for example, to import a new mark.
checking.
When clipping Only enabled if the selected file has an internal cell structure. Select if you only
want the mark to be clipped at the cell boundaries of the mark (e.g. color bars);
clear if it is alright to clip the mark anywhere.
Rotate Specify the rotation angle for the mark (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees).

NOTE: The selected file is copied into a reserved directory on the server.
Fold Line Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Pages Fold Sheet
A Fold Mark draws a set of vertical or horizontal lines that indicate where to fold
the sheet, mainly for bound products. Fold marks are not drawn on spread-based
covers or unbound flat elements. For unbound folded work, the outside fold
lines are drawn but not the lines between pages.
Distance from page trim Specifies the distance from the nearest end of the mark to the page trim.
NOTE: Fold marks only have the Layer settings to be defined in the Position tab.
Fotoba Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Sheet
Fotoba marks consist of horizontal and vertical lines which are drawn on a
layout to enable cutting with a Fotoba cutting device.

980 MARK ENGRAVER
Horizontal/Vertical Cut Marks

Fotoba cut marks are drawn along the horizontal and vertical sides of the
individual images on a layout. Horizontal lines are drawn by default and you can
optionally specify vertical lines.
Type: Single mark, Double Draws single or a double lines to indicate cutting.
mark
Line thickness The thickness of each line.
Inner white The distance between the lines of a double mark.
Side Mark
The side mark is a vertical line which is drawn in addition to the vertical cut
mark.
Distance from image The distance from the image to the side mark.
Line thickness The thickness of the side mark line.
Color
The color of all the cutting lines. Click the variable button, and select one or
more colors to change the color of the cutting lines:

Grommet Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Image, Sheet
Grommet marks are sequential marks which are placed along the sides of an
image or layout. These marks are printed on the layout and indicate where
reinforced eyelets (grommets) can be produced. The marks are not part of the
cut file.
Mark
First you specify the appearance of the marks.
Grommet type Three types of grommet marks are available:
 Circle
 Circle with cross
 Cross
Diameter The diameter of the circle.
Line thickness The thickness of all the lines.
Line length The length of the 2 lines of the cross.
Color The color of all the cutting lines. Click the variable button, and select one or
more colors to change the color of the cutting lines:

982 MARK ENGRAVER
Placement
In the placement panel, you specify where you want the grommet marks to
appear.
Placement You can choose to place the grommet marks along all sides of the image or
layout, left and right, or top and bottom.
Distance from edge The distance of the grommet from the edge of the image or sheet.
Max. distance between The maximum distance between adjacent marks.

marks
Cutter Registration Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Sheet
Cutter registration marks are reference dots which are drawn on a layout to
enable cutting with X/Y cutting devices.
Type The following types of Cutter Registration marks are available:
 Filled circle
 Reversed circle
 Filled rectangle
 Reversed rectangle

Diameter/Width, Height The diameter/width and height of the circle/rectangle.
Outer size The diameter of the reversed circle.
Distance from images The distance of the dots from the edge of the image or image block.
Color/Reverse Color The colors of the filled circle and reversed circle can be specified separately.
Click the variable button, and select one or more colors to change the color:
Location
In the location panel, you specify where you want the dots to appear, and
depending on the chosen location, the number of marks. The following options
are available from the drop-down list:
Corners Dots are placed at the corners of the image block. 3, 4 or 5 dots can be placed to
indicate the lay of the cut block.
Individual Images Dots are placed along a cut path that takes into account the nested arrangement
of all the images. Here you can choose between Few and Many.
Top/Bottom Dots are placed along the top and bottom of the image block, and you can set the
number of dots by specifying the distance between them.
Left/Right Dots are placed along the left and right side of the image block, and you can set
the number of marks by specifying the distance between them.
All Sides Dots are placed along all sides of the image block, and you can set the number of
marks by specifying the distance between them.
Max. distance between Set the distance between adjacent dots if you require more than the default
marks number of dots.
Shift top/left marks The offset applied to the dots on the top or left side.
Line Mark Details

984 MARK ENGRAVER
The Line Mark draws a line that can be used for various purposes in production.
Type You can choose to draw a line at a specific location and with a specified size
(custom), or let the line resize automatically to match a chosen target (auto-
sizing).
Auto-sizing line settings:

Target Choose the edge where you want to place the line (left, right, top, bottom) and
the target box (page, fold sheet, spine, etc.). The available targets depend on the
mark category. In the Offset field you can specify a distance from inside or
outside the target box. The distance is from the center of the line to the target.
Length An auto-sizing line is delimited by the target box you chose to position the line,
(from target), or from other available boxes depending on the mark category.
Extend Enter a negative or positive value to respectively shorten or extend the line in
both directions.
Custom line settings:

Length Specifies the length of the mark.
Angle Specify the rotation angle for the mark (0, 90, 180, or 270 degrees).
Rectangle Mark Details
The Rectangle Mark draws a rectangle with a border and fill color. This mark is
always printed using knock-out.
Around Choose the reference for drawing the mark. Choose Custom to use all the options
on the Position tab, or choose a target object (Image block, sheet, etc.) if you
want to draw the mark around an object. The available objects depend on the
mark category.

Expand If you choose a target object for the Around option, you can also set a distance
from the object where the mark will be drawn. Enter a positive value to draw a
mark which is larger than the object (e.g. a rectangle around an image block), or
a negative value for a mark which is smaller than the object.
Width Specifies the horizontal size of the mark.
Height Specifies the vertical size of the mark.
Border pen Choose a pen to draw the lines; lines have different thicknesses.
NOTE: The border is created inside the mark.
Fill with color This option is selected by default.
Registration Mark Details
Mark Sets Category: Press Sheet, Fold Sheet, Sheet
A Registration Mark draws a series of marks which are used to check that the
registration of the different printing colors is correct.

986 MARK ENGRAVER
Where Click in the diagram to specify where the mark is printed on the Press Sheet: in
the four corners, the four center-side positions, or any other combination.
Offset from edges Distance between the center of the mark and the edges of the Press Sheet
(including the lay).
File Click the File list and select one of the available EPS or PDF files. The file is
selected as the mark to be used and you see the size and number of colors used
for the mark.
The preview pane shows the selected mark.
NOTE: You can open the Marks Resource by clicking the Open File Marks button,
for example, to import a new mark.
Slit Mark Details
Mark Sets Categories: Pages, Fold Sheet and Press Sheet

A Slit Mark is a line indicating where a sheet is to be cut in ribbons, as used in

web printing. A line is drawn between two adjacent ribbons and not on the outer
edges of the web. No marks are drawn when only one ribbon is present or if
sheet-fed sheets are used. The position of the Slit Mark is defined in the Attri-
butes tab and not in the Position tab.
Distance from page trim Specifies the distance between the mark and the web page trim.
Pen Choose a pen to draw the line; lines have different thicknesses.
Station Number Mark Details
See Text Mark Details, except for the Text field which is a number that is gener-
ated automatically to indicate the position of the product on a sheet.
Text Mark Details
Text Marks are used to print text on a Press Sheet and identify Press Sheets by
printing the job name, order number, color name, etc.
Text In the Text field, you can specify which text is to be used as a mark. You have
three options:
 Type some text in the Text field.
 Select a variable from the drop-down list. This list appears when you click in
the Text field the button next to the field.
 A combination of the two previous methods, e.g. some text followed by a

variable
Font Select a font and a point size for the text mark.
Length If you want you can change the calculated length of the text mark which is based
on the amount of text, the point size and the variable. You can revert to the
default, calculated length by clicking the revert arrow.

988 MARK ENGRAVER
Script Select a Roman, Chinese, Hebrew or Japanese script for the text mark. Choosing
Chinese or Japanese activates the Writing Direction option.
NOTE: If you choose Chinese or Japanese, don’t forget to select a relevant font
for these languages in the Font drop-down list.
Writing Direction Horizontal is selected by default for Roman script (e.g. European languages)
and can’t be changed; choosing Chinese or Japanese script activates the
following options:
Horizontal: Select this option to place the text characters horizontally; the text is
left-aligned in the text box.
NOTE: The anchor point in the Mark Position tab is also used for aligning a
Text mark. For example, placing a Text mark in the top right position means
the text will grow from right to left and it is right-aligned in the text box.
Vertical: Select this option to place the characters underneath each other
(certain Asian languages).
Use Arabic Numerals: Select this option to use Arabic numerals in vertical text.

Color Click the variable button, and select one or more options to determine which
plate(s) will print the mark:
Knock-out text box Knocks out the area under the text when selected.
checking.
Mark Position The Position tab in the Details pane contains settings that apply for all of the
Mark types. These settings are explained in this section for all Mark types.
Mark
Anchor Point You can specify the exact position of the mark. This position is defined by a
horizontal and a vertical distance from different parts of the sheet or plate.
Target
Reference Choose a reference for the anchor point from the drop-down list. This reference
depends on the Mark type:
 Page Marks
 Page Trim
 Fold Sheet Marks
 Fold Sheet
 Outer Overfold

990 MARK ENGRAVER
 Inner Overfold
 Outer Spine
 Inner Spine
 Lowest Page
 Highest Page
 Top Page
 Bottom Page
 Press Sheet Marks
 Press sheet
 Fold sheet blocks
 Page trim block
 Press Sheet Marks (web-based sheets only)
For these web-based targets, you have further options to place the mark on
the press sheet. A switch is provided that lets you specify all the items or just
a specific one with an index number.
 Ribbon: the vertical sections of a web-based sheet; only applicable for

web production schemes with multiple ribbons
 Slit: the line where the sheet is cut into ribbons; only applicable for web
production schemes with multiple ribbons
 Cut-off: where the web is cut horizontally
 Horizontal fold: a fold across the web
 Vertical fold: a fold along the web
 Row: cells across the web
puts the mark in a specific

row: row 2

puts the mark in all rows

puts the
 Column: cells along the web
 Cell: a single page cell; here you have two input fields, C for Column and
R for row, to specify a cell; enter an asterisk for all the cells in a row or
column.
puts the mark in a specific

cell: column 3 of row 1
puts the mark in all cells
puts the
 Image Marks
 Image Frame
 Image Trim box
 Bleed
 Sheet Marks
 Sheet
 Image Block
Horizontal For the horizontal position, select:
 distance...
 to right or left of...
 Left Edge, Right Edge, or Center.

Vertical For the vertical position, select:
 distance...
 below or above...

992 MARK ENGRAVER
 Top Edge, Bottom Edge, or Center.

Print on  Front side
 Back side
 Both sides. If you select this option, the following check boxes are enabled:
 Mirror position on back
 Mirror content on back
Layer See “Mark Layers” on page 996 for information on how layers are used to
arrange content:
 Top Marks
 Page Content
 Bottom Marks
Mark Conflicts Conflicts may arise if a mark overlaps another mark, a mark runs into the page
content or bleed zone, or a mark falls outside the area of interest or box. The areas
of interest are the Pages, Gutters, Gripper, Press Sheet, etc. for each respective
Mark type. For example, press sheet marks must fall inside the Press Sheet.
Clipped
These are the possible actions if a mark falls outside the box or area where it is
expected to be drawn.
These are the possible actions if a mark falls outside the box or area where it is
expected to be drawn clipped: The mark is clipped to fit in the box and printed.
 Do not Print: The mark is ignored.
 Fail: The job will be aborted. The notify action is selected and an error is
displayed for the job.
NOTE: You can choose to be notified by selecting the Notify check box.
Overlaps
These are the possible actions if a mark overlaps with Page Content (Trim), Page
Bleed or another mark.

 Print: The mark is printed even if it falls outside the box.
 Do not Print: The mark is ignored.
 Fail: The job will be aborted. The notify action is selected and an error is
displayed for the job.
NOTE: You can choose to be notified by selecting the Notify check box.
Include knock-out for conflict checking

When selected, the knock-out area is included for conflict checking.
Mark Repeat In the Repeat tab of the Details section, you can choose to repeat a mark by
selecting the Repeat mark check box. The fields are disabled if this check box is
not selected.
NOTE: The Repeat tab is only available for File Marks and these settings are used
to repeat color bars.
Step Area
The Step Area is the area where a Mark is repeated.
Orientation Choose Horizontal or Vertical to define the orientation for repeating the Mark.
Number of Steps You have the following options to define how many times the mark is repeated:
 Fit within available space: the mark is repeated within the available space
 Fit within fixed length: choosing this option enables an extra field where you
can enter the length of the step area
 Fixed: in the extra field that is displayed, enter the number of times (steps)
you want to repeat the mark
Stepping
Direction  If Horizontal orientation is chosen, then the direction is Left to right and
Right to left; if Vertical orientation is chosen, then the direction is Bottom to
top or Top to bottom;
 Inside/Out: positions the mark on each side of the center of the Step Area and
repeats the mark in both directions

994 MARK ENGRAVER
 Centered: positions the mark in the middle of the Step Area and repeats in
both directions
Mirror mark around center Option to mirror the mark when repeating Inside/Out.
Center Gap The gap between the two center marks when repeating Inside/Out and the
number of steps is even.
Spacing The gap between repeating marks; this option has no effect on Center Gap.
Partial last step This option defines what happens when the last step extends beyond the avail-
able area:
 Draw clipped: the mark is clipped at the end of the available area
 Omit: the mark is not drawn and consequently not clipped
Mark Special In the Special tab of the Details section, you can choose to apply special settings
to the mark.
Apply curves  Linearization
 Calibration
 Simulation
NOTE: The Apply Curves option is only available for File Marks.
Finishing Include in cut file: Draws the mark in the cut file if applicable.
Do not print: The mark is not drawn on the printed sheet.
Print mark in overprint Select the Overprint check box to print a text mark in overprint. The default
printing method for marks is knockout.
NOTE: The Apply Curves option is only available for Text Marks.
Mark Pens Pens are used to define a thickness and style for lines and borders used to draw
certain Marks.
Width The width of the line in points.

Color/Depth The drop-down list lets you choose a color or, for certain applications, you can
choose to define the Depth of the pen.
 Color: Click the associated variable button, and select one or more
options to determine on which plate(s) the mark will be printed:
See “About Colors and Depth for Printing Marks” on page 997 for more infor-
mation on using colors to print marks.
 Depth: Enter a value to set the depth of the engraving in micron (mu). See
“Depth Tool” on page 124 for more information.
Knock-out around pen Select to knock out the area under the pen line.
Dashed line Select this check box for a pen with a dashed line. Enter the size in points of the
dash and the distance between the dashes. The default values are 12pt for the
dash and 6pt for the gap.
 To create/edit Mark pens

1 In the Mark Engraver, click the cogwheel in the top left corner and choose
Manage Pens.
2 Click the New button and a new Pen appears in the list.

996 MARK ENGRAVER
3 Enter a name in the Name field.
4 Complete the fields as required.
Mark Layers Layers are used to arrange marks in a certain order, with the highest layer having
the highest priority.
Layers are controlled at the bottom of the Position tab. There are three default
layers which cannot be deleted:
Top marks Marks to be printed on top of the Page content, e.g. crop marks
Middle (Page Content) The reference layer.
Bottom marks Contains marks to be printed below the page content, e.g. all marks except crop
marks.
Additional layers can be created and deleted.
 To create Mark Layers in the Engraver

1 In the Mark Engraver, click the cog wheel in the top left corner and choose
Manage Layers.

2 Click the New button and a new Layer appears in the list.
3 Click this new Layer to edit its Name.
4 Use the arrow buttons to move the new Layer in the list and change the
order.
About Colors and Certain marks have a Color (default) or in certain applications a Depth. One of
these options can be chosen from the drop-down list.
Depth for Printing
Marks
Color
For certain marks you can choose in which color they will be printed. You do this
by choosing the plates and optionally also specifying the density.
In the Color field you choose one of the plates or create a comma-delimited list
with several plates.
 Click the associated variable button, and select one or more options to deter-
mine on which plate(s) the mark will be printed:

998 MARK ENGRAVER
The default is an asterisk (*) which means that the mark will be printed on all
plates; in the drop-down list this corresponds to Registration (All Plates). You
can also choose from the following:
 Process Colors: C, M, Y, K plates only, not spot colors
 Darkest Color
 Cyan
 Magenta
 Yellow
 Black
 White, Varnish, Primer
 Spot colors
You can also specify the density for printing the mark and combine colors, for
example:
 *:50 means print on all plates at 50%
 Cyan:40 means print on Cyan plate at 40%
 Cyan:40, Magenta:50 means print on Cyan at 40% and Magenta at 50%
Depth
Enter a value to set the depth of the engraving in micron (mu). See “Depth Tool”
on page 124 for more information.

Marks
In the Marks Resource category, you can manage the file marks used in the Mark
Engraver and Borders Resource categories. In Apogee Impose, these file marks
are included in the Mark Sets.
The Marks can be EPS or PDF files. You import them or delete them.
The Marks resource category is available for:
 All Output Task Processors except for Export and RPC
 All Print Task Processors except for the Generic Press.
Marks Overview
The Marks overview lists all available marks.
You can import, export or delete marks.
Related topics: • To create, duplicate, edit, delete, import or export Resources on page 667
 To import marks
1 In the System Overview Window, select the Output Task Processor for which
you want to import the Mark.
2 Double-click the Marks icon in the Resources pane.
The Marks dialog box appears, containing an overview of all the available
Marks.

1000 MARKS
3 Click the import button.
4 Locate the folder from which you want to import the marks, and click Open.
5 Close the Marks dialog box.
After adding a mark, Apogee will try to calculate it’s bounding box. This will
be displayed in the Dimensions column.

Media Hub
The Media Hub is where you manage Calibrated Printing Modes (CPMs). CPMs
are presets that you can select in the Layout Editor to obtain the best possible
printing results for the selected printing quality, press and media on the speci-
fied printing device.

 Open the Media Hub
 In the Layout Editor, choose Window > Resources and select Media Hub.
Administrator access level only!Select a printing device in the System Overview

and you will see that the Media Hub is a resource.
You can select a CPM in the list of Calibrated Printing Modes. You can use the
filter box to filter the CPMs by printing device for example.
 Create a CPM
New Calibrated Printing Modes are generally based on a default CPM, but you
can also create them from scratch.
 In the Media Hub, choose File > New Calibrated Print Mode.
The CPM Creation Wizard opens.
The wizard consists of 3 steps. Visit the Tutorial page on the AsantiNetwork
for a detailed procedure.

1002 MEDIA HUB
Media Hub
Overview
1 Quality
2 Printer
3 Media Category and Media
4 List of Calibrated Printing Modes (CPMs) for the selected quality, printer and media
5 Details of the selected quality, media or CPM, or adjust Printer Parameters for category
A series of base or default CPMs are included with your system and new CPMs
can be created based on these CPMs. You can see the default CPMs if you select
All Qualities + All Printers + Generic Media (in the All Media or Generic Media).
When you start a job in the Layout Editor, you need to choose a Calibrated
Printing Mode (CPM) that corresponds with the requirements of the job. A
number of CPMs are available for each printing device (Anapurna, Jeti, etc.) to
ensure optimum printing results on each device. The CPM settings take into
account the following parameters:
 Quality: The Quality parameter allows you to choose a desired quality level
for the printed product. The quality level you choose depends on the charac-
teristics of the images to be printed, the desired color gamut, the viewing
distance and the printing speed. The following quality levels are available:
 Express
 Production
 Standard
 High Quality
 High Definition

 Printer: A particular printing device cannot necessarily handle all quality

levels. Only the quality levels that apply for the available printing devices are
shown when you set up a job.
 Media: The expected quality varies according to the chosen media.
 Clear Selection: This button resets the selection to All Qualities, All Printers
and All Media.
Calibrated Printing General

Modes Details The name and properties of the Calibrated Printing Mode.
Color On Media
The printing mode and color mode for printing the process color inks directly on
the substrate, and the associated calibration and characterization resource. This
applies when printing without white, or when printing with post-white, regard-
less of the kind of white application.
Color On White
The same set of properties for printing the process color inks on white ink.
White
The print and screen properties for printing white.
CPM cogwheel menus
 Click the cogwheel to open the CPM menu which has the following
commands:
 Calibrate: Opens the CPM Calibration Wizard.
 Update G7 Calibration: Only active if the CPM includes a G7 calibration

step. Use this option to update this step.
 Tune Profile: Opens the CPM Profile Tuning Wizard.
 Edit Profile Settings: Opens the Edit Profile Settings dialog
 Redo CPM Setup Wizard: Launches the wizard to redo the calibration
wizard.
 Revert Calibration: Opens the Revert Calibration dialog where you can
choose a calibration date to revert to.

1004 MEDIA HUB
 Revert G7 Calibration Update: (Only active if the CPM includes a G7

calibration.)
 Revert Profile: Opens the Revert Profile dialog where you can choose a
profile date to revert to.
 Revert Edit Profile Settings
 Revert Redo CPM Setup Wizard
 Report: Opens the CPM Quality Report. You can save the report as a PDF
or print it.
 Export Profile: Exports the profile.
 Print Mode Parameter: Opens the Edit Print Mode dialog.
NOTE: Visit the Tutorial page on the AsantiNetwork for detailed procedures.
Media Details General

Name How you want to call the media.
Sheet only The media can be used on flat-bed or hybrid printers.
Roll only The media can be used on roll-to-roll or hybrid printers.
Both The media can be used on any type of printer.
Categories One or more categories that the media belongs to. Select the categories from the
drop-down list.
Media Calibration
Here you can choose whether the new media needs a dedicated CPM, or can use
that of an existing media by choosing one from the drop-down list.
 Create New Media
 In the Media Hub, choose File > New Media.
A new media called Media is added to the list. You can edit the name and
specify the settings in the Media details panel.

Other Media Hub

Commands
 Configure Printer
 In the Media Hub, choose File > Configure Printer to open the configuration
window for the selected printer.
NOTE: Depends on access level.
 Manage Sheet Sizes
 In the Media Hub, choose File > Manage Sheet Sizes.
The Sheet Size resource is displayed. See “Sheet Sizes” on page 641.
 Import/Export CPMs
 In the Media Hub, choose File > Import or Export.
The file browser is displayed.
NOTE: Many of the these commands are available by context-clicking the

appropriate item.
 Adjust Printer Parameters

1 Select a category and click the Adjust button in the Printer Parameters panel
on the right. Unlock the parameters first.
2 The Printer Parameters dialog box is displayed where you can specify device-
specific settings. Click the cogwheel icon if you want to restore the settings.

1006 MEDIA
Media
In the Media resource category, you can manage the media for imagesetters,
platesetters, and proofers.
The Media Resource category for proofers is similar to the one for imagesetters
or platesetters. The main difference is that proofers do not report which medium
is loaded. You have to manually enter this information.
The loading of media is executed automatically by Apogee.
The Media Resource category is available for the following Task Processors:
 All of the Imagesetter, Platesetter, and Proofer Task Processors
 Commercial digital Print Task Processors
Media Overview
In the Media overview, you can check which media is currently loaded, as well
as the details of any other available media. You can unload, load, and delete
media, and edit media settings.
For both imagesetters and platesetters, you can create, edit or delete media
types and media sizes. For platesetters, you can also import the media database
file generated by the output device.
Available Media
The Available Media pane displays the available media for the selected engine.
The displayed media is compatible and fits on the widest tray. The pane consists
of two tables: media type and the available media of that type.
The first tables shows the known types. If you select a type, the second table
shows the available media of that type, displaying the size and the batch
number. For imagesetters and platesetters, you will also see the thickness.

With the buttons below the table, you can add, edit or delete media for the
selected media type.
Loaded Media (imagesetters and platesetters only)
The Loaded Media pane displays the trays and the medium that is loaded in each
of them. The tray table shows the tray status icon, the tray name, the name of the
currently loaded medium, and the amount of media available (if the device can
report it).
You may see the following status icons in the Display Cassette Name column:
• If the icon is followed by a name: There is a cassette in the tray but it is not loaded (not
active). However, it can be activated by Apogee.
• If the icon is followed by a name in bold: There is a cassette in the tray and the cassette is
loaded (active). Note that some devices (e.g. Galileo) may have more than one tray active at
the same time.
The icon is followed by a name: There is a cassette in the tray but it is not loaded (not active).
Furthermore, it cannot be activated by Apogee (manual intervention on the engine is
required).
There is no cassette in the tray.
There is an unknown problem with the tray.
The loading of media is executed automatically by Apogee according to the

media attributes film or paper, thickness and width as reported by most image-
setters and platesetters.
Apogee may not always find a match, for instance if there is no media record. In
this case, Apogee sends a notification.
Conflict table (imagesetters and platesetters only)
If Apogee has several records that match the reported media attributes, there is
a media conflict. In this case, the Loaded Media panel displays <multiple> as
Media name. If you click on this, the Conflict table displays all the matching
records that were found. You then need to select the media that is actually
loaded and click the Load button.
NOTE: Devices that can report loaded media will send a message to the Message
Board in case of an unknown medium.

1008 MEDIA
Media Editor
If you click the Add button, the media editor opens, where you can specify
various media settings.
NOTE: The media editor fields differ according to the selected device. For
example, some devices have a predefined set of media properties that cannot be
changed (e.g. substrate, roll, polarity, etc.).
Type
This field contains the name of the media type. Media with the same type are
grouped in the type table and should have the same type attributes (substrate,
thickness and device compatibility).
Polarity (imagesetters and platesetters only)
The polarity of a medium is an internal and invisible setting. For film and paper,
the polarity is always positive. For plate, it is always negative.
Dimensions (proofers only)
Specify whether the dimensions apply to sheet media or roll media.
Select the Roll Media check box, if the media comes in rolls.
NOTE: For roll media you can only specify the width.
Substrate
Select the substrate from the drop-down list. The substrate is associated with the
type. You have three options:
 Film
 Plate
 Paper
Width
Specify the media width. This value must be smaller than the widest tray.

Height
Specify the height of the plate. This setting only applies when you are using a
platesetter.
NOTE: This does not apply to roll media.
Thickness (imagesetters and platesetters only)
Specify the thickness. This value is associated with the type.

1010 NUMBER-UP SCHEMES
Number-up Schemes
The Number-up Schemes resource allows you to create multiple slots on a Fold
Sheet for jobs that require more flexibility for cutting and assembling number-
up jobs .For example, you can use these schemes to place multiple Book Signa-
tures in the slots of the same Fold Sheet to create multiple deliveries from a
single Press Sheet.
A number-up scheme can be selected for a job in the Products tab.
 Double-click the Number-up Schemes icon for an overview of the available

rules in the Number-up Schemes dialog box or to create your own rules.
The Number-up Schemes resource lists the available schemes in the left column
and a schematic representation of the cutting events for that scheme and the
resulting deliveries in the right column.
The Number-up Schemes resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose

Number-up Schemes Editor

Editing an existing scheme or creating a new scheme in the Number-up Schemes
resource opens the Number-up Editor with all the settings.
Name and Description

The schemes provided with your installation use a shorthand convention for the
Name which is explained in the Description. For example, 3-up C&A means that
3 Book Signatures will be produced for cutting and assembling.
Actions
A Number-up Scheme uses a sequence, or chain of actions, to create deliveries
Perform actions on In this panel you can choose the item on which the chain of actions as specified
below will be performed: the folded sheets or the Assembly block.
Actions In this panel you can define the actual processing as a chain of actions. You start
with choosing the direction of the cutting: horizontally or vertically. Then in
subsequent actions (as many as you want) you can cut, rotate, stack, nest,
assemble, turn over or tumble the items:

 Cut Horizontally: cuts all the items you have so far in 2 or more parts with
cuts at a right angle to the last fold.
 Cut Vertically: cuts all the items in 2 or more parts with cuts parallel with the
last fold.
Select the number of parts from the In drop-down list.
 Rotate: rotates an item by 180°; the default is to rotate item 2, not 1 because
item 1 is usually the one in the reference corner, i.e., the one at the intersec-
tion of the last fold and closed head; if there is only one item, the default is
item 1.
Specify the items to rotate in the Item(s) box with a comma-separated list of
item numbers; the second item is entered by default.
 Stack Items, 1 on Top: stacks all items on top of each other with the first item
on top of the stack – only meaningful if the assembly method is also stacked.
 Stack Items, 1 on Bottom: stacks all items starting with the first item on the
bottom of the stack.
 Nest Items, 1 as Outer: nests all items with the first item as the outermost –
only meaningful if the assembly method is also nested.
 Nest Items, 1 as Inner: nests all items with the first item as the innermost.
 Assemble Items, 1 as First: collects all items specified by the Assembly style
in the Binding Options (nested or stacked), with the first item as the
topmost/outermost
 Assemble Items, 1 as Last: collects all items with the first item as bottommost
or innermost
 Turn over Items: turns the specified items (like work & turn); the default is
the same as for Rotate
 Tumble over Items: tumbles the specified items (like work & tumble); the
default is the same as for Rotate
 Done: an action that doesn’t do anything; choose this option as the last action
in your processing chain.
Apply page trim margins Select this option to keep the page trim margins on either side of the cut or to set
them to 0.

Extra gutter Add an additional margin as specified between the pages on either side of the
cut.
Chain of actions diagram The chain of actions is presented schematically at the bottom of the Actions
panel so you can check that the results are what you want. The red lines with
numbers indicate cuts which can be horizontal or vertical.
The red dot indicates the location where the last fold and the closed head
intersect.
A red edge indicates the result of a cut
Delivery
The Delivery panel on the right lists the deliveries that will be created by the
chain of actions. These deliveries can then be used when you define the imposi-
tion to produce different products or multiple copies of the same product. The
deliveries are shown as rows and labeled A, B, C, etc. using different colors and
you can specify how the pages are arranged for each delivery:
Page Arrangement  From Binding Options: the default page arrangement as set in the Binding
Options with an upright delivery letter (A, B, C, etc.) to indicate the
orientation.
 Reverse of Binding Options: the page arrangement is opposite to that set in

the Binding Options and indicated with the delivery letter upside down.
 Same as A: uses the page arrangement you chose for the first delivery in the
list

Deliveries This section shows the color-coded deliveries with delivery letters in the
arrangement which is based on how the Fold Sheet or Assembly is cut up and re-
assembled.

Output Color Conversions
The Output Color Conversions resource converts the color values of the
document output intent to the printing profile of the output device. The actual
output conversion is performed by the PDF Render task processor where you
select the Output Conversion preset in the Render operation.
To select your output color conversion in the Render operation of PDF Render,
you must choose Document Based mode in the color management settings.
 PDF Render
Output Color Conversions Overview
The Output Color Conversions overview lists all available conversions.
Output Color Conversion list

This is the list of all the available output conversions. Select a conversion in the
list to see more information in the pane on the right.
Convert Process Colors

Here you choose when and how to convert process colors.

1016 OUTPUT COLOR CONVERSIONS
Color Conversion method Choose a conversion from the drop-down list:
 Don’t Convert: Choosing this option hides all the options for process color
conversions.
 Repurpose: Choose this method to repurpose for different output devices.

Repurposing triggers a specific output conversion that preserves the GCR of
the input colors while applying a color conversion. If you choose this method,
you can only set the Rendering Intent.
 ICC-based conversion: Choosing this option shows all the process color
conversion options. This output color conversions triggers the standard ICC
conversion that applies the GCR of the output press profile.
 Use device link: Choose a device in the drop-down list. This list is empty by
default and device links can be added in the Device Link Profiles resource.
Rendering Intent If you selected ICC-based color conversion, choose a rendering intent from the
drop-down list:


well.

color accuracy

Black Point Compensation Apogee uses a built-in algorithm to adjust for differences in the black points.
Choose On or Off.
Profile Link Exceptions If you selected ICC-based color conversion or Repurpose, choose an exception
from the drop-down list:

 None
 Keep 100% K
 Normal
 Preserve K
 other exceptions as listed in the Profile Link Exceptions resource

Prevent Overprint issues Select this option to preserve zero CMYK. For ICC based conversions, this option
prevents overprint changes during color conversion. This option is always
enabled for repurposing conversions.
Convert Spot Colors using Color Books

Accurate spot color mixing This improves spot color overlaps significantly. Choose Off or maximum 2, 3 or
4 colors.
Paper white If ‘Use white point from Press Profile’ is selected, the paper white of the
document profile is used in the color calculation. If this option is not selected, the
paper white of the color book is used in the calculation of the spot colors.

1018 OUTPUT SIZES
Output Sizes
The Output Sizes Resource category defines the different available output sizes
that can be used for printing the image on a particular imagesetter or platesetter.
This also allows you to define a punch calibration, and link it to the used output
device.
Punch Calibration defines how the sheet is being “punched” to ensure a correct
sheet position. There are two punching methods supported by Apogee: head
punching and tail punching.
The Output Sizes Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 All of the Imagesetter, Platesetter, and Proofer Task Processors
 Commercial digital Print Task Processors
Output Sizes Overview
The Output Sizes overview lists the available Output Sizes. You can create,
duplicate, edit, delete, import or export Output Sizes.
Output Sizes Editor
The Output Sizes Editor allows you to create or modify an Output Sizes. You can
specify a height, width, orientation and punch calibration.
Punch Calibration Editor
In this window, you can specify the punch settings for the imagesetters or plate-
setters and print a test page in order to measure the offsets.

Name
The name of the punch calibration. This field cannot be left empty.
Punch Location
The location of the Punch (virtual or real) on the test image. This can be the
device punch or the transfer punch.
X Axis The distance between the center of the test image and the punch reference
(punch center for film and leading edge for plate).
Y Axis The offset between the center of the test image and the punch center for films.
This option is disabled for platesetters.
Plate Exposure Unit Pin Bar (imagesetters only)
Specify the distance between the film punch and the edge of the plate when both
the film and the plate are mounted on the pin bar. This option is disabled for
platesetters. The initial value is the last entered value.
Test Page
You can print a test page in order to measure the offsets. Proceed as follows:
1 In the Punch Calibration dialog box, click the Test button.
The Punch Calibration Test Page dialog box is displayed.
2 Select the Output Size that you want to associate with the Punch Calibration.
3 Click the On list and select the media you want to print the test page on.
4 Select any Parameter Sets you may have created for the Image and Output
operations.
5 Click Print.
A test job is composed and automatically submitted to the device, and a

progress indicator appears. You are notified when the job has been success-
fully submitted.
NOTE: The OK button is disabled if you have not selected a valid tray.

1020 OUTPUT SIZES
 To create and edit an output size

1 In the System Overview, select the Output Task Processor for which you want
to create or edit an Output Size.
2 Double-click the Output Sizes icon in the Resources pane.
The Output Sizes overview appears.
3 Do one of the following to create or edit an Output Size.
 Click the New button to create a new Output Size.
 Select the Output Size that you want to edit in the Output Size list in the
upper pane and click the Edit button.
The Output Size editor appears.
4 Type the name for the Output Size and specify the width, height and
orientation.
5 Select a punch calibration from the Punch Calibration list.
NOTE: You can select None if you do not want to use a Punch Calibration. In
that case, no offsets are applied.
6 Click OK.
Your settings are saved. The newly created Output Size appears in the list.
7 Close the Output Sizes dialog box.
 To create and edit a new punch calibration

to create or edit a punch calibration.

The Output Sizes overview appears.
3 In the lower pane, do one of the following to create or edit a Punch

Calibration.
 Click the New button to create a new Punch Calibration.
 Click the Edit button to edit a Punch Calibration.
The Punch Calibration editor appears.
4 Specify the Punch Calibration settings. See “Punch Calibration Editor” on

page 1019.
The settings are saved. The newly created Punch Calibration appears in the
lower pane. You can select the required Punch Calibration in the Output size
dialog box when creating or editing an Output Size. See “To create and edit
an output size” on page 1020.
 To delete a punch calibration

to delete a punch calibration.
The Output Sizes dialog box appears.
3 In the lower pane, select the Punch Calibration that you want to delete and
do one of the following:
 Press Delete.

1022 OUTPUT SIZES
 Click the Delete button.
5 Click either Yes or No depending on whether you want to delete the linked
Output Size.
The Punch Calibration is deleted and no longer appears in the lower pane.

Pagination Schemes
The Pagination Schemes resource provides page arrangement schemes for

unbound folded work in Apogee Impose. These are similar to folding schemes,
however, the pages of the part can be arranged arbitrarily and individual pages,
or panels, can be smaller, equal or larger than the part size.
Pagination schemes do not include information for the folding sequence.
 Double-click the Pagination Schemes icon for an overview of the available

schemes and then add or edit a scheme to open the Pagination Scheme dialog
box.
The Pagination Schemes resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose

1024 PAGINATION SCHEMES
Pagination Schemes Overview
Pagination Schemes list

In this list you see default Pagination Schemes and any new or modified schemes
you have created.
CxR Abbreviation for Columns x Rows; e.g. 4 x 2 means 2 rows of 4 pages.
Pagination Scheme Settings

Name and Description Enter a meaningful name, such as ‘leaflet’, ‘flyer’, ‘letter, etc., and a description.
Sides The default is single-sided; select the check box if you want to create a double-
sided scheme; the schemes are filtered on this setting when choosing a scheme
in the part editor.
Columns and Rows Columns indicate the number of horizontal cells and Rows the vertical cells of
the page arrangement grid as shown in the Page Assignment pane below.
Copy from Click this button to copy a page arrangement from a folding scheme. The
columns and rows are filled in accordingly. This can be useful as a starting point
for a new scheme.
Page Assignment
In this pane you see the part as an arrangement of panels in a grid with the
number of rows and columns specified above. Use the arrangement buttons to
enter the page numbers.
NOTE: Pages can be assigned arbitrarily so no page numbers are added

automatically to the Top or Bottom of the pagination scheme.
Pagination Scheme grid

1 Blue page: Panel selected with pointer button

2 Measurement arrows: panel size has been changed
3 Light blue cells: these are affected by the modified panel size
4 Grey triangle icon: page orientation
5 Page nos. with underscore: ambiguous page nos.: 6, 9, 8
6 Red corner icon: Lay on Front
7 Red corner icon (faded): Lay on Back
Arrangement buttons
pointer button for selecting a panel in the grid
cursor button for typing the page numbers on the pagination scheme; you must start with 1 and
increment by 1, otherwise the scheme is invalid
pointer button that inserts incremental page numbers on the pagination scheme
Reset resets the scheme and empties the cells
Change panel size This option is active when you select a page using the pointer button and you can
use it to change the size of individual pages or panels. This option can be used to
reduce the size (enter negative values) of the panel or increase the size (enter
positive values). A modified panel size is indicated in the page arrangement grid
with measurement arrows.
NOTE: Changing the size of one panel may affect the entire row or column,
also on the other side of the sheet. The affected panels are indicated in light
blue.
The values are applied to modify the actual page size as defined for the part in
the job ticket editor.
Page orientation Select a panel with the pointer button and rotate the page by 180 degrees. This
does not affect the orientation of the panel on the other side of the sheet.

1026 PAPER STOCK
Paper Stock
This resource category groups the paper that you can use for all presses, and is
used to describe the surface type and weight of the paper. The choice of paper
has a serious impact on the processing of a job. The paper type defines the profile
and calibration to be used, and also selects the ink books. If a specific paper
behaves other than expected, you should create a new paper type for it.
A Paper Stock is mapped to one of the standard Paper Types and a series of
weights.
 Click the Paper Stock icon in the Generic Press Resources pane to open the
Paper Stock dialog box.
The Paper Stock resource is available for the following Task Processors:
 Press
 Generic Press

Paper Stock Overview
The Paper Stock dialog box lists all available Paper Stocks in the top list and the
available Paper Types in the bottom list.
 Click a Stock to display the Paper Type and Weight in the panel on the right.
Paper Stock
Name A unique and meaningful name such as the brand of the paper, what it will be
used for (e.g. cover), or a generic description (e.g. Matt-coated)
Paper Type The type that describes the surface of the paper. The paper types you see and can
select in the drop-down are managed in the Paper Type list in the bottom left
corner. These types are mapped to the JDF grades as explained below.
Color Management
You can set the white point and the texture of the stock, and this information is
used by proofing color management to mimic the final print on this specific
stock:
Whitepoint Here you can choose the source of the white point to be used:
 From Press Profile: This is the default value used for the paper type associ-
ated with the press selected for the job.
 LAB: Specify a different value for the white point; use the revert button to
go back to the default.
Texture 4 textures are provided (Carton, Coated paper, Newspaper, Uncoated paper)
which are images of unprinted paper stock.
Intensity Enter a percentage to control the intensity of the selected texture.
Weight and Thickness This table displays the available Weights with corresponding Thickness in mm or
mil.
Paper Type
Paper types are mapped to JDF grades for automatic selection by Apogee
Impose or to Not mapped for manual selection.

1028 PAPER STOCK
Name A unique and meaningful name that refers to the grade
JDF grade A number from 1 to 5 for the following JDF paper grades:
 1 for gloss-coated paper
 2 for matt-coated paper
 3 for gloss-coated, web paper
 4 for uncoated, white paper
 5 for uncoated, yellowish
 0 for Not mapped: manual selection, no JDF mapping selected
 To work with Paper Stocks
You can create, edit or delete a Paper Stock, map it to a Paper Type and then
choose the Weights you want to make available for your production. This is done
with the usual procedures for working with resources.
Your can also import a .txt file with the weights and thicknesses for a particular
Paper Stock.
NOTE: The Paper Type determines the profile, calibration and the ink books.
When a specific paper behaves differently, you should create a new Paper Type.
 To add a Paper Weight

1 Click the new button below the Thickness box.
OR
Click the cogwheel and choose Copy from and then select the Paper Stock
you want to copy the Paper weight from.
A new Weight and Thickness appear at the top of the list.
2 Edit these two settings as required.
3 Lock the Paper Stock settings.
 To import a Paper Stock from a tab-delimited text file

You can import a paper stock database from a plain text file. The text file must
be formatted with paper records on each line, and each paper record containing

tab-delimited values for stock name, weight, thickness, thickness units and
paper type.
 Click the import button under the Paper Stock table and choose the .txt file
you want to import.
The file is checked for validity and if applicable a report is generated

indicating how to remedy import issues.
The above example creates two new Paper Stocks, each with its own thick-
ness table and the values from the records you imported.

1030 POSTSCRIPT HEADERS
PostScript Headers
You can use the Export Task Processor to export the latest processed results from
the Production Plan to a specific directory, in either PDF or PostScript format.
This allows you to process the PDF/PS documents on a remote system. When
you export results in PostScript format, you can also select a PostScript header
file that you want to have inserted in your exported file.
This resource category allows you to import or delete PostScript Header files for
use with the Export Task Processor.
The PostScript Headers Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 Export
 JMF Link
PostScript Headers Overview
The PostScript Headers overview lists all available PostScript Headers.
You can import or delete PostScript Headers.

Preflight Action Lists
Action lists are especially useful when there are sequences of tasks, which you
have to do a number of times, either within a single PDF document or in multiple
PDF documents.
To simplify repetitious tasks, you can group a series of tasks into an Action List.
Once you have created an Action List, you can re-use it to perform these tasks in
the predefined sequence.
The Preflight Action Lists Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 Preflight
Preflight Action Lists Overview
The Preflight Action Lists overview lists all available Preflight Action Lists.
You can import, export or delete Preflight Action Lists.
By default, the following action lists are provided.
Black2RichBlack
Finds all black fills (except for text < 24pts) and sets these objects to 100% black
and 40% cyan.
ChangeTrimboxToCropboxSize
Changes the trimmed page size (the size of the paper in the desktop printer; the
size of the pages after folding/binding and cutting in a production house) to the
page size in Acrobat.

1032 PREFLIGHT ACTION LISTS
CMYK100toRegistration Color
Finds all colors with 100% Cyan, 100% Magenta, 100% Yellow and 100% Black,
and sets them to registration colors.
FailIfCourier
Displays an error message if the Courier font is found in the file. This often
means that font substitution has been used. This action will result in the Preflight
process failing.
FailIfTransparent
Displays an error message if transparent images are found in the file. This action
will result in the Preflight process failing.
Hairline=25pts
Finds all rules less than ¼ of a point, and changes them to ¼ of a point.
NonBlack2Knockout
Finds all non-black fills set to overprint, and changes them to knockout.
NonBlackText2Knockout
Finds all “non-black type” set to overprint, and changes them to knockout.
RemoveAllICCProfiles
Removes any ICC profiles found in the PDF file.
RemoveHalftoneInformation
Removes any Halftone information found in the PDF file.
RemoveOPIComments
Removes any OPI comments found in the PDF file.
RemoveTransferFunction
Removes any transfer functions found in the PDF file.
White2Knockout
Find all “white objects” set to overprint, and change them to knockout.

Related topics: • Preflight Profiles on page 1034

• To create, duplicate, edit, delete, import or export Resources on page 667

1034 PREFLIGHT PROFILES
Preflight Profiles
To preflight PDF documents, you can use Profiles. A Profile is a collection of

criteria which a PDF document should meet to be a valid PDF.
Through these Profiles, you can thoroughly check your documents and make
corrections before processing.
The Preflight Profiles Resource category provides you with a set of default
Profiles, and allows you to import, export or delete Profiles.
NOTE: You can also select Preflight profiles for a preflight check when exporting
results through the Export Task Processor. For more information, see Profiling
in the “Output Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters)” on page 791.
The Preflight Profiles Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 Preflight
 Conditional
 Export
Preflight Profiles Overview
The Preflight Profiles overview lists all available Preflight Profiles.
You can import, export or delete Preflight Profiles.

Press Sheet Layout Rules
A Press Sheet Layout Rule is a series of settings for positioning one or more Fold
Sheets (i.e. a Fold Sheet Block) on a Press Sheet.
These rules are available in a drop-down list in the Imposition pane in the
Products tab of the Job Ticket Editor. A Press Sheet Layout Rule must be selected
from this list before an imposition for the Product can be created.
Apogee Impose provides ample flexibility for positioning and you can choose:
 what is to be aligned
 the horizontal and vertical reference for aligning
 and/or you can add a fixed offset
NOTE: Press Sheet Layout Rules are not applied for JDF jobs with absolute
positioning.
The Press Sheet Layout Rules resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose

1036 PRESS SHEET LAYOUT RULES
 Click the Press Sheet Layout Rules icon in the Impose Resources pane to open
the Press Sheet Layout Rules dialog box.
Press Sheet Layout Rules list

Rules Overview
The left column of the Press Sheet Layout Rules dialog box displays a list of the
default rules provided with Apogee Impose and any new rules that you may have
created.
Rules are organized alphabetically and you can choose an ascending or

descending order by clicking in the Name column header.
Rules settings
Name A meaningful name, such as ‘Center Bottom’, ‘Center Center’, etc.
Positioning of Fold Sheets

Here you can choose a number of references for aligning the Fold Sheet.

Target area The target area for positioning a Fold Sheet can be the full press sheet or the area
within the press sheet margins.
Vertical/Horizontal Fold Sheet: the entire Fold Sheet or Fold Sheet Block is aligned, including the
alignment page trim margins and overfold gap.
Page Trim: the default setting; the Fold Sheet is aligned taking into account the
smallest rectangle around the final trim edges of all the pages.
Fit to Sheet: the Fold Sheet is extended by enlarging the page trim margins and
overfold lip, with priorities as set in the Fitting Strategy of the Binding Options.
This option overrides all fixed positioning settings and is meant to avoid extra
cuts before folding, especially for Multi-Up jobs.
Vertical alignment to Leading Edge: the Fold Sheet is aligned to the leading edge of the Press Sheet.
Gripper: alignment to the Gripper as set in the Press Task Processor.
Center of Sheet: the Fold Sheet is aligned to the center of the Press Sheet.
Trailing Edge: the Fold Sheet is aligned to the trailing edge of the Press Sheet.
Horizontal alignment to Side Lay: the Fold Sheet is aligned to the side lay edge of the Press Sheet.
Left Edge: alignment to the left edge of the Press Sheet.
Center of Sheet: the Fold Sheet is aligned to the center of the Press Sheet.
Right Edge: alignment to the right edge of the Press Sheet.
Offset Available for horizontal and vertical positioning. The value can be:
 positive Offset: moves the Fold Sheet away from the alignment reference;
when centering on the sheet: upwards and to the right.
 negative Offset: moves the Fold Sheet into the alignment reference, for
example you could move the Fold Sheet into the Gripper; when centering
on the sheet: downwards and to the left
NOTE: Apogee Impose always checks that the Fold Sheet fits completely on
the Press Sheet and will display an error in the Snag List if this is not the case.

1038 PRESS SHEET LAYOUT RULES
Work & Turn or Work & Tumble

For Work & Turn and Work & Tumble jobs, Apogee Impose puts the front and
back of a Fold Sheet on one side of a Press Sheet and mirrors this arrangement
on the other side of the Press Sheet.
Work & Turn or Work & Align fold sheets to flip axis: overrules the standard alignment (including the
Tumble offset and reference edge) and centers the Fold Sheet around the flip axis.
Gap between Fold Sheets

Horizontal/Vertical Sets the horizontal and vertical gaps between the sides of Fold Sheets or Page
trims in mm. These gaps are also applied to the distance between multiple Fold
Sheets when using the Work & Turn workstyle and between elements placed on
a Press Sheet for unbound jobs.
Press Sheet Margins

Margins are zones where you prefer not to have any page content, also referred
to as no-content zones. If content is detected in such a zone, Apogee Impose
displays a warning in the Snag List.
NOTE: Apogee Impose does not take these zone into account when calculating
the imposition.
You can set the following margins along the four sides of the Press Sheet, from
the sheet edge and Gripper:
Trailing margin from page trim box to trailing edge of the Press Sheet
Leading extra margin from page trim box to the Gripper
Left/Right margin to left and right Press Sheet edge
Slow Down Wheels

For sheets printed on a perfecting press, you choose on of the following options
to provide content-free zones for slow-down wheels:
 Automatic: The default Slow Down Wheels resource as specified for the
press will be used.
 Custom: Specify the width and the number of content-free zones for this
particular layout.
 None: No content-free zones will be provided for slow-down wheels.

 To add/edit a Press Sheet Rule

1 Click the new button.
2 Choose the settings for this new Press Sheet Layout Rule.
3 Lock the settings.
 To name/re-name a Press Sheet Rule

1 Unlock the settings and click a Press Sheet Rule.
2 Edit the name in the Name box and lock the settings again.
•

1040 PRINT MODES
Print Modes
The Print Modes resource category is where set the following parameters:
 Resolution width
 Resolution height
 Droplets per dot
 Bits per pixel


Profile Link Exceptions
The Profile Link Exceptions Resource category contains rules for not applying
profile links. For example, you may want to preserve K as pure K and not apply
color conversions or adaptations.
The Profile Link Exceptions Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
 PDF Render
 Generic SD (Sign and Display Printer)
Profile Link Exceptions Overview
The Profile Link Exceptions overview lists the following default profile excep-
tions. Others can be created with the QMS application.
 Keep 100% K
 Normal
 Preserve K
You can import or delete profile link exceptions.

1042 PROFILES
Profiles
ICC Profiles are standards for describing color characterizations of different

output devices. Apogee provides you with a set of standard ICC color profiles.
You can import additional color profiles (*.icm or *.icc files), and delete profiles.
You can also import (and delete) color exceptions, in tab-delimited format
(*.dat files) and in MIME format (*.mime files). The colors will then appear in
the Color Exceptions table, together with their process value percentages.
You can create auto-select maps to make a profile available for automatic selec-
tion. For more information, see “Using Resource Auto-Select Maps” on
page 1069.
The ICC Profiles Resources are available for:
 All Print (Press) Task Processors
Profile Selection Maps Editor (Press)
You can specify which job settings the automatic selection of the profile will
depend on. For Press, these are as follows. For proofers, see “Profile Selection
Maps Editor (Proofers)” on page 1043.
Printing Stock
Paper Type Select the appropriate paper type from the drop-down list:
 Gloss coated wood free
 Matt coated wood free

 Uncoated white
Ink Set Select the ink set from the drop-down list. You can choose from the available Ink
Sets in the Ink Sets Resource category that have the same color space as the
profile.
Workflow
Displays the polarity (for information only):
 CTP or Positive CTF
 Negative CTF
NOTE: Computer to Plate printing is always positive.
Halftone Screen
Specify the halftone screen settings:
Screen Select the screen type from the drop-down list.
 ABS
 Adobe Accurate
 Rational Tangent
For more information on these screen types, see “PDF Render - Screen Settings”
on page 743.
Resolution Specify the screen resolution from the drop-down list.
Frequency Select the line frequency (lpi) from the drop-down list.
Dot Shape Select the dot shape from the drop-down list.
Profile Selection Maps Editor (Proofers)
You can specify which job settings the automatic selection of the profile will
depend on.

1044 PROFILES
Media
Media Type Select the Media type from the drop-down list.
Output
Inkset The ink set corresponds to the Color Space of the Profile.
Quality
Quality Select the required output quality from the drop-down list.

Quality
The Quality Resource category is available for the following Task Processors:

Sheet Layout Templates
This resource lists the sheet layout templates you create in the Layout Editor.
 Double-click the Sheet Layout Templates icon for an overview of the avail-
able templates.
You can only delete the templates you create in the Layout Editor. This
resource cannot be used to create templates.
The Sheet Layout Templates resource is available for the following Task
Processors:
 Impose

Shingling Rules
This resource category allows you to compensate for creep automatically by

choosing a Shingling Rule when you set up the Product. Creep is the result of the
nesting of pages inside each other for a single signature and for multiple signa-
tures. Horizontal creep affects the face of pages and vertical creep influences the
head/foot.
Figure 16.57: Horizontal (face) and vertical (head/foot) shingling
Face creep can be compensated in two ways: either by shifting the content on the
page or by scaling the content. The shingling rule does not allow a combination
of shifting and scaling. Head/foot creep can only be compensated by shifting the
content in both ways. The default setting for a new shingling rule is to shift both
ways towards the trim edge to compensate for face creep only.
Shingling rules do not use absolute values. They ensure that the optimum
compensation is applied, based on the number of layers in a job and the thick-
ness of the stock. Apogee Impose requires that the stock thickness is set in the
Paper Stock resource, in order to make the shingling calculation.
Apogee Impose calculates the shingling for simple nested and stacked Products
that use the same paper stock but also for more complex Products containing
Parts with different paper stock per Part.

1048 SHINGLING RULES
 Click the Shingling Rules icon in the Impose Resources pane to open the
Shingling Rules dialog box.
The Shingling Rules resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose
Shingling Rules Overview
The Shingling Rules dialog box lists all available Shingling Rules in the list on the
left the settings for each rule on the right.
Face creep can be compensated in two ways: by shifting the content on a page or
by scaling it so that all pages ultimately have a common page trim edge. Head/
foot creep can only be compensated by shifting the content.
The following rules are supplied with Apogee Impose:
 Scale inwards

 Shift both ways
 Shift outwards
 Shift both ways (advanced)
 Click a Shingling Rule to display its settings.
Compensate Face Creep

Method Shift pages: The content of the pages is shifted inwards or outwards to align the
trim boxes of the different pages.
Scale pages: The content is scaled slightly in the same direction as the creep.
Direction Both ways (align with face trim): Shifts/scales the inner pages towards the spine
and the outer pages towards the face edge. The target of this shingling is the final
trim width of the Product, indicated by the red line.
Inwards (towards spine): Shifts/scales all the pages, except the outer ones,
towards the spine. The target of this shingling is the face edge of the outer pages.
Outwards (towards face): Shifts/scales all the pages, except the inner ones,
towards the face. The target of this shingling is the face edge of the inner pages
Compensate Head/Foot Creep

Select the check box to compensate for head/foot creep by shifting the content
in both ways. You cannot choose the compensation method or direction.
Selecting this option also affects the compensation for face creep because a more
advanced algorithm is used to calculate the shingling.

1050 SIMULATION CURVES
Simulation Curves
For more general information on Simulation curves, see “What is Simulation?”

on page 1075.
The Simulation Curves Resources are available for the following Task
Processors:
 Generic Press
 All Digital Presses
 All Proofers
Simulation Settings The Simulation settings are almost identical to the settings of Calibration and
Linearization. For detailed information on these settings, see “Calibration and
Linearization Settings” on page 1076.
 To create a new simulation curve

you want to create a new Simulation Curve.
2 Double-click the Simulation Curve icon in the Resources pane.
The Simulation Curves overview appears, containing all of the available

Simulation Curves for the Press Task Processor.
The Create Table dialog box appears.

4 Specify how you want to initialize the table and click Next. For more informa-
tion, see “Create Table” on page 1078.
data.
5 Select the values for the Stimuli column and click Next. For more informa-
tion, see “Stimuli Selection” on page 1078.
data.
6 Select the values for the Wanted column and click Finish. For more informa-
tion, see “Wanted Selection” on page 1079.
The Simulation Curve Editor appears.
7 Enter any required information, type the name of your Simulation Curve and
click OK. For more information, see “Curve Editor” on page 1080.
Your Simulation Curve appears in the Simulation Curve List.
 To edit a simulation curve

you want to edit the Simulation Curve.
2 Double-click the Simulation Curve icon in the Resources pane.
The Simulation Curves overview appears.
3 Select the Simulation Curve that you want to edit in the Simulation Curves
list and click the Edit button.
The Simulation Curve Editor appears.
4 Enter any required information and click OK. For more information, see
“Curve Editor” on page 1080
Your Simulation Curve has been modified and is listed as such in the Simula-
tion Curves List.

1052 SISR PROFILES
SISR Profiles
Smart Input Space Recognition (SISR) is a technology used to automatically

recognize the standard ICC color profile that has been used to generate the
CMYK values of images in incoming documents. The retrieved profiles can be
used for multiple purposes: warn for incorrect tagged profiles, tagging untagged
images, overruling incorrect profiles of images or even, through statistical
analysis, determine which profile fits best as output profile for a complete PDF
document.
The SISR profiles in this resource are used by the SISR category of Apogee
Preflight action lists.
The SISR Profiles Resource category is available for the following Task
Processors:
SISR Profiles Overview
By default, the SISR Profiles overview list is empty. You can import, export or
delete ICC profiles in this list. All the ICC profiles in the list will be used by the
SISR preflight action lists.

Slow Down Wheels
A press has slow-down wheels to slow down a sheet as it leaves the press. This
resource specifies zones without content for slow-down wheels so the smearing
of ink that is still wet can be avoided.
 Double-click the Slow Down Wheels icon for an overview of the available
rules.
The Slow Down Wheels resource is available for the following Task Processor:
 Impose
Related topics: • Auto Fit Rules Overview on page 878
Slow Down Wheels Overview
The Slow Down Wheels dialog box lists all available rules in the left column.
 Click a rule in the left column to display its settings.

1054 SLOW DOWN WHEELS
Widths A press may have wheels at 5 positions on the sheet:
 Drive side of the sheet
 1/3 of the width of the sheet
 Center of the sheet
 2/3 of the width of the sheet
 Operator side of the sheet
Enter the width of the zone you want to create for each wheel or leave the box
blank if there is no wheel at this position. The zone is between the bleed boxes of
each page.
Keep Symmetrical Select this check box if the width of the two side wheels (Drive and Operator)
must be the same as the width of the 1/3 and 2/3 wheels. If you clear this box,
you can edit the 2/3 and Operator widths.
Keep within Enter values to let the center wheel and the 1/3 and 2/3 wheels deviate from
their exact position.
Allow special combinations Two special combinations of wheels can be selected:
 Center and single side: the center wheel and a single side
 Thirds and single side: the 1/3 and 2/3 wheels and a single side

TextTune
This resource applies ink-saving to screened data by creating holes in solid areas
while optionally avoiding the edges in order to preserve crispness.
 Generic Press
TextTune Sets Overview
Two methods are available for this type of ink-saving:
Random pattern method

This method removes a specified amount of pixels from the solid area using a
random pattern.
Tile Select the tile to use from a list of installed tile resources.
Amount Set the target amount of ink-saving in percent.
Size Set the size of the holes (width and height).
Mask method
A pre-defined mask can be selected.
Mask Select a mask from a list of installed mask resources.
Preserve edges For both methods: Specify the size (in pixels) of the area where no holes will be
created along the edges of the solid area.

1056 WEBGROWTH PROFILES
WebGrowth Profiles
What is Web Growth?

Web Growth is the deformation (stretch) of the paper as it is printed on the
various color units on a web press. The physical deformation occurs as the paper
absorbs ink and water, and is accelerated with pressure and tension.
Factors contributing to web growth include: type of press, press configuration,

paper stock, humidity, ink coverage and conditions of the blanket. Heaters may
cause paper to shrink on press.
Using marks and profiles to compensate for Web Growth

Web Growth Compensation profiles allow printers to compensate for press mis-
registration due to distortion of the printed media. This most frequently occurs
on web presses where the paper may expand or shrink slightly after running
through a specific press-station, causing subsequent colors to misalign. This also
occurs less frequently with higher-grade paper.
The WebGrowth Profiles resource allows you to import, export or delete ANSI
WebGrowth Profiles (*.wgc files). You can link a web growth profile with a
paper type in your Press settings.
You can also create your own WebGrowth profiles for any combination of press,
ink, stock, etc. and special marks can be placed on the Press Sheet to measure
and monitor web growth. The WebGrowth mark is a special file mark (.pdf) that
needs to be placed on the Press Sheets.
NOTE: Deferring this image compensation to the film/plate phase of the

workflow allows the user to use a regular pre-press workflow without
compromising proofing and preview job approval features.

The WebGrowth Profiles Resources are available only for Press and Generic
Press Task Processors.

WebGrowth Profiles Overview

When you open this resource you will see a list of the available WebGrowth
Profiles. The table shows the Press, Ink Set, Paper Stock and Weight for which
the profile has been created.
WebGrowth Profiles Editor

You can edit any of the listed profiles or create new ones from scratch in the
editor.
Name The initial name filled in here is taken from the initial Print settings but you can
change it to suit your needs
Print Settings button

Click this button to open the initial Print settings dialog if you want to modify
these settings (Press Name, number of webs, etc.).
Options button
Here you choose whether you want to set up compensation for the different inks
and how to measure the shift.
Inks:  Measurements: One compensation per color or One compensation for all
colors. For the latter, you can also specify if spot colors will be used and
then you can enter values for these colors too.

1058 WEBGROWTH PROFILES
Measurements:  Back side compensation: choose whether you want to enter dedicated
values for the back of the press sheet (Custom back) or Same as Front or
Mirrored to Front.
 Measurement type: If you chose One compensation per color you can
specify here to which color (yellow or black) the measurement relate;
Relative to theoretical position should be chosen if you can measure the
distance to all colors exactly in relation to the reference zero point with a
digital meter.
Settings Table per Web

The second panel in this dialog box is a table that gives the mark position and the
measured growth values per web and per web side.
Web Select a web and side in the left column
Mark Position Specify the position of the WebGrowth mark in the center column. The four
corners of the sheet are indicated with North-West, South-West, North-East,
South-East and the Horizontal and Vertical values specify the exact distance
from the center. The values are red until all values have been entered per mark.
You can see the selected mark in the overview panel at the bottom of the editor.
Shift The column on the right is where you enter the web growth values that you
measured on a printed test using a WebGrowth mark. The horizontal and
vertical shift must be entered for all inks or for each ink separately – process inks
and spot colors (S1, S2, etc.). These values can be positive (shrinking) or
negative (expanding). The values are red until all values have been entered per
mark. Context-click a Mark Position to take shifts from other positions.
Overview/Zoom panel
In this panel you can see where the WebGrowth marks are positioned on the
sheet as you select them in the Mark Position panel. The sheet is indicated with
a dashed blue line. The mark and deformation are shown in the ink color or in
black if the same compensation applies for all inks. The drop-down list provides
quick access to all the marks per web and per color. Use the arrows on the left
(up) and right (down) to move up and down the marks in the Mark Position
table and per color. Select the Zoom button and use the slider if you need to
zoom into an area to see the mark.

 Create and Test a WebGrowth Profile

1 Click the New button in the WebGrowth Profiles overview:
A new untitled Resource dialog box is displayed.
2 Enter the initial Print settings for the profile:
 Press Name: choose a web-fed press from the list of your presses
 Number of webs: specify the number of webs for this press
 Ink set, stock, weight
 Grain: always set to Long for web presses (option disabled)
3 Click OK to confirm these initial settings and then you can continue in the
WebGrowth Profiles Overview.
4 Click Save when all the measurement values have been entered.
5 The profile is displayed in the WebGrowth Profiles resource.
6 Select this new profile in the list and click Test in the bottom right corner to
generate a test page and verify that the web growth is OK.

1060 WEB PRODUCTION SCHEMES
Web Production Schemes
 Double-click the Web Production Schemes icon for an overview of the avail-
able schemes in the Web Production Schemes dialog box.
The Web Production Schemes resource category is available for:
 Impose
 Raster Impose
Web Production Schemes Overview
The Web Production Schemes dialog box lists all available Web Production
Schemes. These schemes are organized per press. The Press panel lists the
default schemes and any new or modified schemes you have created. When you
create a new scheme you can choose an existing category or create a new
category. The panel on the right lists the schemes per press and category. A
scheme can be used for several presses, deliveries and categories as indicated in
the respective columns. Select a scheme in the list to see an outline of the scheme
in the bottom panel. Enter search criteria in the filter box in the top right corner
to organize the schemes.

Web Production Scheme Editor
 In the Web Production Schemes Overview, click the New button or the Edit
button to open the editor.
General
Name and Description Enter a meaningful name and description.
Categories Select an existing category from the drop-down list or type a new category. You
can also select existing categories from the list and type new ones by comma-
delimiting them. Categories appear in the Workstyle drop-down list of the press
sheet in the Product view.
Suitable for Presses

Web Production Schemes are often created to meet the requirements of a
dedicated web press although it is possible to re-use the same scheme on
different presses.
Presses Select the press or presses from the drop-down list. Leave empty if you want to
use the scheme for all web presses.
Formers Enter the number of formers that the press has for folding.

Cut-offs Enter the number of cut-offs per cylinder circumference. Cut-offs are indicated
with a scissors icon in the page assignment panel.
Basics
Deliveries A single web can produce one or more deliveries. Enter minimum 1 and
maximum 8. Each delivery is indicated with a letter in the page assignment
panel.
Webs Some web presses have more than one web. Enter minimum 1 and maximum 8.
Each web is displayed in the page assignment pane: Web 1, Web 2, etc.
Number Up Binding Select the Number Up production method that you intend to use. This will
provide a clearer preview of how the pages are laid out. See “Binding Options”
on page 885.
Width (columns) Enter the number of columns for the width of each web. Multiple webs are
indicated with W1, W2, W3, etc. above the field box.
Height (rows) Enter the number of rows (maximum 100) for the height of the scheme. The
number of rows must be an integer multiple of the number of cut-offs.
Slit points scissors A web can be slit into ribbons between each column. Click the scissors in the
page assignment panel to indicate the slitting points.
Glue Zones Select the Requires dedicated glue zones check box if you want to apply ink-
free areas for gluing; when selected, the glue zones are displayed as blue strips
in the page assignment panel, and the glue tool is enabled.
Bottling Select the Requires dedicated bottling check box if you want to use a dedicated
Bottling Table to compensate page skew in folded signatures. When selected you
can click the Bottling Table button to open the Bottling Table editor.
Bottling Table button Opens the Bottling Table editor to create a new table or edit an existing one. A
red note is displayed if you select the check box and the WPS does not have a
Bottling Table defined.
The panel on the left shows the number of layers and their respective pages and
the negative or positive rotation values for the pages on this layer. Double-click
a value in the Rotation column to edit the rotation value for all the pages on this
layer. Press Enter or go to another layer with the arrows or Tab key to confirm

the value. The Shift column is empty if the table has not been initialized with the
Initialize button.
The panel on the right shows the page grids with negative rotation values in red
and the positive rotation values in blue, and the rotation centers as black squares
per page. Use the Cross tool to change the position of the rotation anchors or the
Angle tool to change the rotation values of specific pages on a layer.
Initialize button The Initialize button applies the values set in the Bottling table. The button is
Initialize All if the scheme has more than one delivery. Layers with modified
rotation values are indicated with an asterisk and those with modified rotation
anchors with a cross. In this case you need to re-initialize the table with the
Initialize button.

The Initialize Bottling Table dialog has the following settings:
Calculate initial values Here you choose how the initial values for each page are calculated:
from
 Creep (auto-bottling): Initial values are based on the thickness of the
paper and calculated in the same way as for automatic bottling.
 Outer Fold Shift: Uses the measured displacement of the spine or face
edge to determine the skew angle.
 Applied Correction: Uses previously established correction angles.
Thickness Thickness taken from a Paper Stock resource that you can select here.
Height The size of the folded signature, measured along the last fold (i.e. not the page
size).
Outer Fold Shift Enabled if you chose this option in the Calculate initial values from panel.
Applied Correction The correction angles for the first and last layers as established previously.
Maximum Bottling Specify a maximum angle for the rotation.
Anchor point The center of rotation which can be selected by clicking a circle.
Reference Layer The layer that will not be bottled or will be bottled the least.

Default Page Arrangement

You can choose a page arrangement for each delivery. Each letter (A, B, C, etc.)
refers to a delivery.
H/H (Head to head) Arranges pages in such a way that the head of the pages is on the closed head of
the signature, suitable for jogging to the head.
F/F (Foot to foot) Arranges pages in such a way that the foot of the pages is on the closed head of
the signature, suitable for jogging to the foot.
Page Assignment
The page arrangement is presented in a table with cells. In this panel you assign
page numbers in the cells using one of the two buttons and select a binding edge
to preview the page orientation on the web sheet.
The arrow to the left of the table indicates the running direction of the web so
you know where the trailing and leading edges of the web production scheme
are located. Context-click in the table to copy deliveries. The scissors indicate
where the ribbons are slit into deliveries and the symbols under the scissors are
centering anchors to indicate which gutter will be centered on the plate and to

align partial webs (see “Image Settings (for Agfa Imagesetters and Platesetters)”
on page 786).
NOTE: The Web Production Scheme must be valid before it can be saved. Refer
to the documentation of your press to create a valid page arrangement.
Page Assignment buttons

cursor button for typing the page numbers on the Top or Bottom of the Web Production Scheme;
the number for the other side (Top or Bottom) is added automatically
pointer button that inserts page numbers on the Front and Back of the Web Production Scheme
RESET resets the scheme and empties the cells
glue tool (when Glue Zones check box is enabled)
Preview for Left, Right, Top or Bottom binding.
NOTE: This binding style is not part of the actual setting.
 Assign pages with the Page Assignment tools

There are two methods for assigning pages to a web sheet grid.
1 Click the cursor button and click the cell where you want the first page to be
located.
2 Type “1”.
Apogee puts the corresponding back page in the correct cell on the Bottom of
the scheme.
NOTE: The Back Page number is displayed when you click in a following cell.
OR
3 Click the pointer button and hover over the cells of the grid.
Apogee displays the first or next page number on the Top and Bottom of the
scheme.
4 Continue until all pages have been arranged and the grid is full.

5 Click the greyed-out scissors icon along the width of the sheet to indicate
where the sheet is to be slit in ribbons.
6 Click Save.
NOTE: If the scheme is not valid, the Save button remains greyed out.
 Merge cells to create pages with different sizes

It’s possible to merge cells and create pages with different sizes.
 Assign the same page number to two cells in an imposition scheme by

pressing the CTRL key, to create a double-sized page. The same method can
be used to create triple or quadruple-sized pages.

1068 XSLT CONVERSIONS
XSLT Conversions
A resource for importing XSLT transformation files.

Using Resource Auto-Select Maps

When creating a Ticket, you can specify how the Task Processor will select the
required Resources. There are two options:
 Manually select the Resources to be used in the settings of the Task Processor.
 Have the Task Processor itself automatically search for the required Resource
based on predefined look-up rules. Briefly, you create an ‘automatic look-up’
mechanism by mapping those rules in an ‘Auto-Select Map’. For more infor-
mation on creating an Auto-Select Map, see “To create an auto-select map”
on page 1069.
For example, if you select a specific medium in the output settings of a Press Task
Processor and activate the automatic selection for calibration, Apogee will
automatically look for the required Calibration Curve.
If Apogee does not find a match, you can tell it what to do by clicking the Fallback
button. For more information see Fallback on page 1071.
You can create Auto-Select Maps for the following Resource categories:
 Calibration Curves
 Profiles
 To create an auto-select map

1 In the System Overview, select an Output or Print Task Processor.
2 Check that the Task Processor has one or more of the following Resource
categories associated with it in the Resources pane:
 Calibration Curves
 Linearization Curves
 Profiles
3 Double-click one of these associated Resource categories.
The Resources overview dialog box appears.

1070 USING RESOURCE AUTO-SELECT MAPS
4 Select a Resource that you want to use as a basis to create a look-up rule and
click the Add Map button. You can also drag and drop a resource into one of
the map overview lists
The Resource dialog box appears where you can change the settings.
5 Click OK.
The Resource appears in the Auto-Select Map or Profile Selection Map pane.
It will function as a look-up rule.
6 Close the Resources dialog box.
NOTE: You can also drag and drop a profile onto the Profile Selection Maps table.
 To edit and delete an auto-select map

1 In the System Overview, select an Output or Print Task Processor.
2 Check that the Task Processor has one or more of the following Resource
categories associated with it in the Resources pane:
 Calibration Curves
 Linearization Curves
 Profiles
3 Double-click one of these associated Resource categories.
The Resources overview dialog box appears.
4 Do one of the following to edit or delete an Auto-Select Map:
 Select the Auto-Select Map that you want to edit in the Auto-Select Maps
pane and click the Edit button. Click OK to save your changes.
 Select the Auto-Select Map that you want to delete and press Delete or
click the Delete button to delete it. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
5 Close the Resources overview.

Fallback Click the Fallback button to specify what Apogee should do if the automatic
selection does not find a match.
NOTE: This function is available for Calibration, Linearization and Ink Tables.
Check those Resource categories for the information on the Fallback settings.

1072 USING RESOURCE AUTO-SELECT MAPS

CHAPTER
17 Calibrating Your Output

Devices
This section explains the theory behind calibration and provides more in-depth
information on the various settings in the Curve Editors for Calibration, Linear-
ization and Simulation.
 What is Calibration? ......................................................................................... 1074

 Calibration and Linearization Settings ...................................................... 1076
 Curve Editor ......................................................................................................... 1080
1073
1074 WHAT IS CALIBRATION?
What is Calibration?
Every output device may have a certain discrepancy between the desired result
and the actual result. This discrepancy is caused by dot gain. To compensate for
this discrepancy, you need to calibrate your output device.
In practice, this happens in the Curve Editor, where Apogee calculates a dot gain
compensation curve so that your output device produces the desired results. The
resulting curve may be irregular to produce the desired dot gain.
Depending on the type of output device, you may have to calibrate it regularly.
The print results may differ for instance because of climatic changes.
In Apogee, Calibration is only used for the press. For imagesetters and plateset-
ters, Apogee uses Linearization.
Calibration for Press Task Processors
Linearization for Imagesetters and Platesetters.
What is Linearization?
Linearization is a special case of calibration. It is especially used for imagesetters

and platesetters. Through linearization, you can adjust the Stimuli values so that
they equal the Wanted values during output. In other words, you linearize the
Stimuli values with the Wanted values, unlike Calibration, where the curve is
not necessarily linear.
Before Apogee can linearize your output device, you need to print a test page.
The test page is based on the Stimuli values. These are the measuring points that
will be used to calculate the linearization curve. They will appear on the test
page as printing blocks. If you measure the printing blocks with a densitometer,
you obtain the Measured values. The Wanted values are the desired results. The
difference between the Measured values and the Wanted values is the dot gain
of your output device. In the Curve Editor, you need to fill in those values in the
Values table or import them from an existing file.

17 CALIBRATING YOUR OUTPUT DEVICES 1075
What is Simulation?
Simulation can be considered as Calibration for special needs. This means that
you are free to use Simulation curves anyway you want. You can for instance
purposely use a non linear curve to obtain a certain dot gain or other special
effects.
This is why there are no Measured values for Simulation. The curve is solely
based on Wanted values, that is the desired curve.
This simulation technique is very common in packaging, where flexography is

used.
NOTE: The Simulation curves are only used for the Press.

1076 CALIBRATION AND LINEARIZATION SETTINGS
Calibration and Linearization Settings

This part elaborates on the different settings for creating and editing Calibration
and Linearization curves. The creation and editing process for Calibration
consists of a series of dialog boxes eventually followed by the Curve Editor.
 You start with the General Settings, where you need to specify various
settings concerning the print job. See“Calibration Print Settings” on
page 1076 and “Linearization Print Settings)” on page 1077.
 In the second dialog box, you need to specify how you are going to enter the
necessary values to calculate the calibration curve. See “Create Table” on
page 1078.
 If you have chosen to create your table manually, you need to select the
number of Stimuli values or measuring points to specify the accuracy of the
calibration curve. See “Stimuli Selection” on page 1078.
 In the Wanted settings dialog box, you have different options for the
Measured and the Wanted values. See “Wanted Selection” on page 1079.
 Finally, you enter the Curve Editor from where you can print a test page or
where you can enter the Measured and Wanted values. See “Curve Editor” on
page 1080.
NOTE: The settings for Simulation are almost identical to those for Calibration
and Linearization. Simulation has no Measured values and therefore no options
for them.
Calibration Print Opens the print job details regarding stock and screen type.
Settings
Printing Stock
Paper type Select a paper type from the drop-down list.
Ink set Select an ink set from the drop-down list. The drop-down list shows all of the
available Ink Sets in the Ink Sets Resource category.
Screen
The screen polarity is taken from the selected Press.
Positive/Negative Specify the polarity.

Halftone Screen
Select the screening details from the various drop-down lists:
Screen Agfa Balanced Screening, Adobe Accurate, and Rational Tangent (for more
information on the screen types, see “PDF Render - Screen Settings” on
page 743)
Resolution Choose a resolution.
Frequency Choose a line frequency.
Dot shape Elliptical or round
Linearization Print This dialog box contains the print job details regarding surface and screen type.
Settings)
Media Type
Select the appropriate medium from the drop-down list.
Workflow
Specify the polarity of the print job by selecting the appropriate check box:
 Positive CTF
 Negative CTF
Halftone Screen
Select the screening details from the various drop-down lists:
 Screen: Agfa Balanced Screening, Adobe Accurate, and Rational Tangent

(for more information on the screen types, see “PDF Render - Screen
Settings” on page 743)
 Resolution
 Frequency
 Dot shape

1078 CALIBRATION AND LINEARIZATION SETTINGS
Create Table In this dialog box, you specify how you want to initialize the values table. The
values table contains the Stimuli, Measured and Wanted values.
Depending on the type of densitometer, you will either have to enter the
Measured values manually or import them from a file that is generated by the
densitometer. You can also import an existing curve, created in an external
application.
Manually
Select this option if you want to type the values manually in the table. This
means that you will have to enter the values based on the measured results of the
test page.
Import from File

Select this option if you want to import the values from a specific file.
You can import:
 an existing curve that was created in an external application and saved as an

ascii file
 a curve from an older version of Calibrator (not for Linearization).
NOTE: Apogee warns you when it does not recognize the file format.
Stimuli Selection In this dialog box, you specify how many Stimuli values (in dot percentages) you
want for the table and the curve. The number of Stimuli values determines the
accuracy of the curve. An accurate compensation curve will result in an accurate
calibration of your output device.
You have the following options:
Standard 3
Select this option if you want the three standard values from 0 to 100: 0, 50 and
100.
Standard 13
Select this option for the 13 standard values: 0, 5, 10, 20,... 90, 95, 100.

Standard 21
Select this option for the 21 standard values: 0, 5, 10, 15,... 90, 95, 100.
Standard 31
Select this option for the 31 standard values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 15, 20,... 85,
90, 94, 95, 96, 97, 98, 99, 100.
0 to 100 Steps
Select this option if you want to enter the number of Stimuli values yourself.
Wanted Selection In this dialog box, you define the Wanted values.
Wanted Values
Linear Select this option if you want the Wanted values to be the same as the Stimuli
values. This option will result in a linear curve.
Simulate dot gain Select this option if you want the Wanted values to correspond to a certain dot
gain. You can use this option if you want to calibrate your output device to
produce a certain dot gain and not to compensate the dot gain.
Compensate for dot gain The Wanted values will compensate for the specified dot gain.
Dot gain Type the dot gain percentage for which you want the Wanted values to
compensate.
Highest dot gain at Specify the stimuli for the highest dot gain.
NOTE: For Linear curves, only the Linear option is available.

1080 CURVE EDITOR
Curve Editor
The Curve Editor is where you enter the Stimuli, Measured and Wanted values
to view the associated curves. You also have options to adjust the curves, select
the ink and further specify the Measured values. Under the curve name you can
see when the curved was modified the last time and enter comments.
Ink
Select the curve in the curve set that you are going to edit or view. Each curve
corresponds to an ink in the ink set and an ink table.
You can create calibration curves for each of the separation inks and also for spot
colors. For more information on Ink options see, “Table Options” on page 1080.
NOTE: This option is only available for Calibration, and when measurements is
one per ink.
Ink Values Table

The ink values table contains the Stimuli, Measured and Wanted values in three
columns. The values determine how the calibration curve will look like in the
diagram next to the table. At the top of this table you can choose the ink curve
you want to see from the drop-down list or using the arrows, if you have more
than one ink curve.
You manually edit the values (in dot percentages) to make further adjustments
to the curve. The values may be displayed in dot percentages or in densities,
depending on the curve options.
Stimuli values These are the number of measuring points of dot percentages for the test page.
Measured values These are the values that are measured on the test page, either entered manually
or imported from a file.
Wanted values These are the desired dot gain values in dot percentages for the final print result.
Adding or Deleting Values Use the Add or Delete buttons to either add or delete a value.
Table Options This dialog box allows you to specify the required table options for the curve, the
inks and the measured values.

Copy/Paste
Use these commands to copy all the data of a table and paste it in another table.
You can only copy data from a single table but you can paste this data into
multiple tables by selecting multiple tables in the ink table list.
Curve Options
Smooth curve This option will smoothen the curve around the measuring points. If this option
is not selected, the measuring points will be connected with straight lines.
Curve through This option forces the curve to go exactly through the measured points.
measurements
Smooth curve + Curve If you select both these options, Apogee generates a smooth curve that goes
through measurements through the measured points.
Minimum Select this option if you want to have a minimum value at which the compensa-
tion curve starts. All values below that one will be clipped to the minimum value
(Wanted values).
Clip to 0 below Every value in the compensation curve below the specified percentage in the
field, will become 0 (Wanted values).
Maximum Select this option if you want a maximum value for the compensation curve. All
values that are higher, will be clipped to the maximum value (Wanted values).
Always keep 100 All the 100% values will be kept as 100 in the transfer curve.
Apply limits to Select the curve that you want to apply the minimum and maximum limits to.
 Wanted curve: Limit the compensated curve so that the resulting printed
output reaches the specified limit. As a result, the values for the limit you
will see on the compensated curve will be different than the ones
specified.
 Compensated curve: Limit the compensated curve to the specified values.
Reset
Choose this option if you want to fill the table with new values. You will have to
go through the Initialize dialog boxes again to specify whether you will manually
enter the values or import them. See “Create Table” on page 1078.
CAUTION: Clicking this button will delete the previous table values.

1082 CURVE EDITOR
Import/Export Data Sets

You can exchange the table data with other applications such as PressTune. The
main difference with the other exchange methods is that this method exports
and imports a multi-set data XML file, only containing the data points of the
different inks and possible front/back sides.
Print Settings Opens the print job details regarding stock and screen type. See “Calibration
Print Settings” on page 1076 and “Linearization Print Settings)” on page 1077.
Button)
Options Button Click this button to access the Global Options dialog box. You can make further
adjustments to the curve sets and access the different options for the Measured
values.
Sets
First you can select whether you want curves One for all sides or One per side of a
sheet, and you can also specify the number of webs. Then you specify settings for
the curves you want per ink.
NOTE: This tab appears only for calibration curves, not for linearization curves.
Measurements You can either select an ink set per Ink or an Ink Set for all Inks. Select the
required option from the drop-down list:
 One set per ink: Allows you to edit the CMYK curves separately.
 One set for all inks: The values for the three columns only need to be entered
once - the curve will be applied to all separations.
Compensation Select the appropriate compensation curve option from the drop-down list:
 One for all inks: Apogee will calculate the average of the four compensation
curves (C+M+Y+K /4)to create one compensation curve for all separations.
This option can only be selected if ‘one set per ink’ is chosen from the
Measurements list.
 One per ink: Creates a separate compensation curve for each ink.
 One for black, one for the rest: Calculates the CMY average to create a
compensation curve for these inks, and creates a separate compensation
curve for black.

Weighted average This check box is displayed if Measurements is set to ‘one set per ink, and
Compensation is set to ‘one for all inks’. You only need to enable the weighted
average option when working with Sublima screens (for better results).
Compensate unknown Select a process ink or spot color whose compensation curve will be used for spot
colors as colors. Choosing Spot Colors in this list adds this option to the Ink drop-down list
in the Curve Editor so a dedicated curve can be created for spot colors.
Measurements
The values in the Measured Specify how the Measured values will be expressed. You have two options.
column are in
Dot %: Express the Measured values in dot percentages.
Density (more accurate): Express the Measured values in densities.
Dmin and Dmax: Specify the minimum and maximum densities.
Maximum density settings that are too low, will clear up the printed images.
Dark areas will not appear dark enough.
Maximum density settings that are too high will blur the printed images in the
darker areas.
Refer to the user manual of your output device to see what the appropriate
maximum density level is.
NOTE: These options do not apply to Simulation curves.
Print Button
Click this button to either print a test page or a verification page.
Test Page with non- Select this option if you want to print a test page. You can use this test page to
compensated stimuli measure the dot gain with a densitometer. This way you will obtain the
Measured values that you can enter in the Values table.
Verification Page with Select this option to print a verification page. This page already contains
compensated stimuli compensated values. You can use this page to check whether the output devices
has been calibrated correctly.
NOTE: This button is only available for Linearization.

1084 CURVE EDITOR
Chart Panel
This part of the editor displays the curve as selected in the Display drop-down list
below. See Display Curve Options for more information on the display options.
The different curves reflect the entered values in the Values table and are
displayed on a X-Y axis system.
Every curve in the chart has a specific color. The curve that you selected in the
drop-down list below, will be highlighted.
 Wanted curve: Black
 Measured curve: Blue
 Compensation curve: Green
 Error curve: Red
Display Curve Options
In this drop-down list, you can select which curve you want to see. For every of
the four options, the selected curve will be highlighted.
Wanted This option highlights the curve for the Wanted values as specified in the Wanted
column.
Measured This option highlights the curve for the Measured values as specified in the
Measured column.
If there is a difference between the Measured values and the Wanted values, the
curve will not be linear. This deviation is then compensated by the Compensa-
tion curve.
Compensated This option highlights the Compensation curve (green) for the discrepancy
between the Measured (blue) and the Wanted values (black). Both curves
neutralize each other resulting in a linear curve producing the desired results.
The screenshot below shows a compensation curve for a 20% difference

between the Wanted and the Measured values.

Error This option displays the deviation curve between the Measured values and the
Wanted values. The screenshot below shows a deviation curve for a 20% differ-
ence between the Wanted and the Measured values.

1086 CURVE EDITOR

CHAPTER
18 Troubleshooting
This section contains information to help you understand and troubleshoot
issues that may arise when using the software.
 Unexpected Output with Asymmetrical Imposition ............................ 1088
1087
1088 UNEXPECTED OUTPUT WITH ASYMMETRICAL IMPOSITION
Unexpected Output with Asymmetrical Imposition

Message:
Pagination does not match folding sequence in fold sheet [X].
Pagination may change!
Pagination does not match Web Production Scheme in fold sheet [X].
Pagination may change!
Why are you seeing this The message states that the pagination calculated by Apogee Impose does not
message? match the pagination that should normally result from the folding or production
sequence. In older versions of Apogee Impose, all book signatures were treated
as symmetrical signatures, meaning that the insertion point for nesting was
always in the middle of the fold sheet, even if the Folding Scheme or Web
Production Scheme was asymmetrical. For example, this was the case for fold
sheets created with 6, 10, 14, 18, etc. pages which are always asymmetrical
folding schemes but previously resulted in symmetrical signatures which were
incorrect. Pagination of these signatures followed accordingly.
From Apogee version 10.5 and higher, pagination is determined more accurately
according to the folding sequence for Folding Schemes and the production
sequence for Web Production Schemes. This means that Folding Schemes/Web
Production Schemes using an asymmetrical sequence will result in a pagination
that differs from what you saw previously. Unfortunately, this may result in
unexpected output when working with jobs you created in older versions of
Apogee (archives, job dumps, ticket templates, etc.) and for which the imposi-
tion has been updated. You may have chosen to update the imposition
intentionally using the Auto Impose feature, manually removing a fold sheet
from a press sheet, reapplying mark sets, etc. However, an imposition can also be
updated unintentionally, for example when you change the page size of the
product.
What is an asymmetrical An asymmetrical book signature is a signature whose insertion point for nesting
book signature? is not in the middle of the fold sheet. For example, book signatures with 6 pages
(F6-1, F6-2, etc.) are always asymmetrical:

TROUBLESHOOTING 1089
F6-1 folding scheme: after insertion of BS2, 2 pages left and 4 pages right (spine not in the
center) so BS2 starts with page 3 left.

Book signatures that use 12-page folding schemes can also be asymmetrical (e.g.
F12-3, F12-4, etc.):
Affected Default Installed The following default installed folding schemes are asymmetrical:
Folding Schemes
 F2-1, F6-1, F6-2, F6-3, F6-4, F6-5, F6-6, F6-7, F6-8, F8-3, F8-5, F8-6, F10-1,
F10-2, F10-3, F12-3, F12-4, F12-5, F12-6, F12-11, F12-12, F12-13, F12-14,
F14-1, F16-5, F18-1, F18-2, F18-3, F18-4, F18-5, F18-6, F18-7, F18-8, F18-9
New Default Resources Agfa has created symmetrical folding schemes for the following default installed
Made Symmetrical asymmetric folding schemes:
 F8-3, F12-6, F16-5
 Default FoldingSchemeSet with page 1 on front
These resources were delivered in previous versions and may contain incorrect
sequences. Please contact your Agfa Service Technician to update them.
Do you need to review your It is recommended to review all your Folding Scheme and Web Production
Folding Scheme/Web Scheme resources marked as “not symmetrical” in the resource editors.
Production Scheme If such a Folding Scheme is not supposed to be asymmetrical, you should edit it
resources? and select a symmetrical folding sequence.

The Folding Scheme editor where you can select a symmetrical folding sequence for a Folding
Scheme marked as “not symmetrical”
If such a Web Production Scheme is not supposed to be asymmetrical, review the

scheme and add scissors to cut the web in ribbons. A fold is then changed to a cut
which could make the Web Production Scheme symmetric but you can also
recreate the Web Production Scheme.

Any new Folding Schemes/Web Production Schemes that you create in Apogee
version 10.5 and higher will first select a symmetrical sequence if available.
NOTE: If you cannot find a symmetrical folding sequence/production

sequence and you were able to process the Folding Scheme/Web Production
Scheme with a previous version of Apogee, contact your Agfa Service
Technician.
When should you review an An old job or ticket template that uses an asymmetrical Folding Scheme/Web
imposition? Production Scheme was always imposed symmetrically with symmetrical
pagination. In this case you will see the message attached to the book signature
icon (BS) in the assembly pane and you will be prompted to check the Folding
Scheme/Web Production Scheme in the resources. If you do not review the
imposition, your output may be different than the last time.
Warning indicating unexpected output
Related topics: • Product View on page 381

• Folding Scheme Editor on page 928
• Web Production Schemes on page 1060



APPENDIX
A System Variables
This section provides a list of all System variables. It also defines their syntax,
and rules on how to use them.
 Generic Variables .............................................................................................. 1096

 Mark Engraver Variables ................................................................................. 1106
1095
1096 GENERIC VARIABLES
Generic Variables
You can use variables in a number of different areas to replace parameter and
resource settings. These variables are automatically replaced by a text string, or
are assigned a text string.
Variable Description
$BOOKSIGNATURE The prefix-based name of the book signature when used in a split-for-proof flow using Apogee
Impose. Otherwise resolves to $SIGNATURE.
$CALCURVE The name of the calibration curve used to print a separation. If a separation contains several
objects with different curves, only the name of the first one is used.
$CIP3PAPERTYPE The CIP3 paper type derived from the paper type that corresponds with the press sheet paper
stock. (same as HDMPaperTypeFront or CIP3AdmPaperGrade)
$COMMENTS The “Remarks” field in the Administration tab.
$COMMENTS_1-10 The “n”-th paragraph of text in the Remarks field of the Administration tab. A paragraph is a
single line of text, delimited by paragraph marks or by the start or end of the text.
$COMPANY The “Company” field in the Customer Contact information.
$COMPANYADDRESS The “Address” field of the customer’s company.
$COMPANYCITY The “City” field of the customer’s company.
$COMPANYCOUNTRY The “Country” field of the customer’s company.
$COMPANYPHONE The “Phone” field of the customer’s company.
$COMPANYSTATE The “State” field of the customer’s company.
$COMPANYZIP The “Zip” field of the customer’s company.
$COMPUTER The name of the Hardware System on which the current Task Processor (or service) is running.
$CONTACTEMAIL The “E-mail” field of the customer’s contact person.
$CONTACTFIRST The “First” field of the customer’s contact person.
$CONTACTLAST The “Last” field of the customer’s contact person.
$CONTACTMOBILE The “Mobile” field of the customer’s contact person.
$CONTACTPHONE The “Phone” field of the customer’s contact person.
$CONTACTTITLE The Title field of the customer's contact person.
$COPYCOUNT The Requested Copy Count of an Image (S&D jobs only, sets number of copies of the part that
is associated with that image).
$CPM The Calibrated Printing Mode used for the job.
$CUTTER The name of the cutting device set for the job.
$DATE The current date (i.e. the date when the variable is resolved). Insert a space when combining
this variable with other variables, e.g. \\$SYSTEMCOMPUTER\ArchiveRoot\$DATE:%Y%m
\$JOB\
$DESCRIPTION The Description field in the Administration tab.
$DEVICE The name of the output device.
$DEVICEGROUP The name of the device group to which the used output device belongs. For system device
groups, $DEVICE and $DEVICEGROUP are identical.

SYSTEM VARIABLES 1097
$DOCPAGE The page number (index) of a page in its document, starting at 1.
$DOCPAGELABEL The (text) label of a page in its document. Defaults to $DOCPAGE if there is no label.
$DOCPAGETRIMBOX The trim box of a page, expressed as "<W> x <H>", whereby <W> and <H> are "<value>
<units>". The units are determined by the international settings of the server, and can be in
mm or inches.
$DOCUMENT Document title (set by %%Title).
$DOCUMENTBASENAME The filename of a document, excluding path and extension. Defaults to $DOCUMENT for docu-
ments arriving via streamed input channels.
$DOCUMENTEXTENSION The extension of a document, excluding the separation point. Defaults to $FORMAT for docu-
ments arriving via streamed input channels.
$DOCUMENTFILENAME The filename of a document, including extension but excluding path. Defaults to $DOCU-
MENT.$FORMAT for documents arriving via streamed input channels.
$DOCUMENTLIST A set of document names in a multi-page result, such as a flat.
$DOCUMENTPATH The pathname of a document (excluding the file name) relative to the Hot Folder path. Does
not contain the leading or trailing backslash (\). Empty for documents input via streamed input
channels. Contains the common path of pre-separated input documents where the separations
arrive in different subfolders.
$DOCUMENTREV Document revision. Empty for the original. “1” for the first revision, etc.
$FLOWNAME New SplitJDF; resolves to the Flow Name if there is more than one flow.
$FLOWTYPE New SplitJDF; resolves to the Flow Type if there is more than one flow.
$FORMAT The 3-letter extension associated with the type of data being processed.
$HOTFOLDERROOT Root for all PS/PDF Hot Folders (default in Hot Folder Task Processor).
$HSCALE The horizontal scale used by the Render Task Processor, expressed as a percentage. See also
$SCALE and $VSCALE.
$IMPSIGNATURENAME The name of the selected signature.
$IMPTEMPLATENAME The name of the imposition template (name only, no path).
$JDF_ASSEMBLYIDS The JDF assembly IDs.
$JDF_CUSTOMERID The JDF customer ID.
$JDF_CUSTOMERJOB The JDF name of the customer job.
$JDF_CUSTOMERORDER The JDF name of the customer order.
$JDFIMPORTROOT The root for all JDF Hot Folders. (default in JDF Input Task Processor)
$JDF_JOBDESCRIPTION The JDF job description.
$JDF_JOBNAME The JDF job name.
$JDF_JOBPARTID The JDF part ID.
$JDF_OPERATOR The operator name in the JDF file.
$JDF_ORDERDESCRIPTION The JDF order description.
$JDF_ORDERNUMBER The JDF order number.
$JDF_PARTNAME The JDF part name.
$JDF_PARTVERSION The JDF part version.
$JDF_PRODUCTID The JDF product ID.

$JDF_PROJECTID The JDF project ID.
$JDF_SEPARATION The JDF separation name.
$JDF_SHEET The name of the sheet in the JDF layout.
$JDF_SIGNATURE The JDF signature.
$JOB The “Job name” field in the Administration tab.
$JOBDATE The date when the job was submitted.
$JOBID A unique job identifier (intended mainly for internal use).
$JOBNR A unique job sequence number.
$JOBTIME The time when the job was submitted.
$LINCURVE The name of the linearization curve used to print a separation. If a separation contains several
$MEDIANAME The name of the media.
$MEDIATYPE The type of media.
$MEDIATHICKNESS The thickness of the media used.
NONE Overrides the default behavior of generating no text if the specified variable is not used. To be
used without the $ sign and between pipe characters. Example: $COMPANY|NONE| generates
the text string NONE if the specified company variable is not used.
$OPERATOR The “Operator” field in the Administration tab.
$ORDER The “Order number” field in the Administration tab. This is the “Name” field in the Hot Ticket
Editor.
$OUTPUTSIZE The size of the rendered image for a sheet/plate. For DQS, the size of the bounding box of all
rendered elements on that sheet.
$PAPERGRADE The paper grade that corresponds with the paper type of the press sheet paper stock.
$PAPERSTOCK The name of the press sheet paper stock.
$PAPERTYPE The paper type that corresponds with the press sheet paper stock.
$PART The name of the part. If it contains pages of different parts, the part name of the page with the
lowest Run List index is used.
$PRESS The name of the press.
$PRESSPROFILE The profile of the press.
$PRINTDATE The date the job was printed.
$PRINTTIME The time the job was printed.
$PRINTMODE The print mode used for the job.
$PRODSET The name of the production set.
$PRODSETPREFIX The sheet prefix associated with the production set to which the current sheet belongs.
$PRODUCTDISPLAYNAME E.g. 'Apogee'
$PRODUCTNAME E.g. 'APOGEE Prepress' (guaranteed to contain NO special characters)
$PRODUCTVENDOR E.g. ‘Agfa’
$PRODUCTVERSION E.g. 3.0
$PRODUCTVERSIONMAJOR E.g. 3

$PRODUCT_NAME The name of a product. Resolves to a comma-separated list for multiple products.
$PRODUCT_ORDER The order number of a product. Resolves to a comma-separated list for multiple products.
$PRODUCT_COPYCOUNT The requested copy-count of a product. Resolves to a comma-separated list for multiple prod-
ucts.
$PRODUCT_TOTALPAGES The number of pages in a product. Resolves to a comma-separated list for multiple products.
$QUALITY The output quality as specified in the Layout Editor
$RLCOMMENT Run List comment
$RLINDEX The index of the position of a page in the Run List, starting at 1. Do not confuse this with
RLPAGE.
$RLPAGE The number associated with the position of a page in the Run List. The number of the first posi-
tion in the Run List is specified by the value of First page at: in the Run List Task Processor. Not
to be confused with $RLINDEX.
$RESOLUTION The resolution of the image.
$RLPAGE@m
$RLPAGE:n
$RLPAGE:n@m
$RULINGMAP Name of the RulingMap in case of Application screening, otherwise empty.
$RUNLENGTH The run length of the job.
$SCALE The scale used by the Render Task Processor, expressed as a percentage. This is replaced by
$HSCALE ‘ x ’ $VSCALE when the image is scaled disproportionally.
$SCREEN The name of the screen that was used to screen the separation. If a separation contains several
objects with different screens, only the name of the first one is used.
$SEPARATION The color name of the separation.
$SHEET Evaluates to $SIGNATURE for single or none web impositions. Evaluates to $SIGNATURE $WEB
for multi-web impositions.
$SHEETVERSION The `SV<n>' version number of a sheet version, with <n> being the $SHEETVERSIONINDEX.
When used on a result that has the default single-version set-up, <n> is the same as the $VER-
SIONINDEX.
$SHEETVERSIONINDEX The index <n> of the sheet version in the sheet version table, starting at 1, per sheet. When
used on a result that has the default single-version set-up, <n> is the same as the $VER-
SIONINDEX.
$SIDE The Press Sheet side (“F” for Front, “B” for Back). Note that the SIDE variable maps either to the
SIDE or the SIDEA Apogee variables, depending on the setting of the Imposition Service.
$SIDEA The name of the web (starting from A). $SIDEA produces a letter that uniquely defines a side
(front or back) on a web. The front of web 1 is referred to as A, the back as B; the front of web 2
is C, the back is D, and so on. This does not depend on the imposition template - If the imposi-
tion only uses the fronts of two webs, they will be referred to as A (web 1 Front) and C (web 2
front).
This variable produces an empty string if the result is not an imposed flat or if the imposition
template is not multi-web.
$SIGNATURE The number of the signature including the prefix. Produces an empty string if the result is not
an imposed flat.

$SIGNATURENUMBER The number of the signature without the prefix. Produces an empty string if the result is not an
imposed flat.
$SIGNATUREINDEX The index of the signature without the prefix. Produces an empty string if the result is not an
imposed flat.
$SIGNATURE_MAIN Same as $SIGNATURE of the main imposition. Can be used in a 1-up S4P flow to refer to the
results of the main imposition.
$SIGNATURENUMBER_MAIN Same as $SIGNATURENUMBER of the main imposition Can be used in a 1-up S4P flow to refer
to the results of the main imposition..
$SIGNATUREINDEX_MAIN Same as $SIGNATUREINDEX of the main imposition Can be used in a 1-up S4P flow to refer to
the results of the main imposition..
$SIMCURVE The name of the simulation curve used to print a separation. If a separation contains several
$SLUG1 First slug-line specified in the output parameters of an output device.
$SLUG2 Second slug-line specified in the output parameters of an output device.
$SLUG3 Third slug-line specified in the output parameters of an output device.
$SLUG4 Fourth slug-line specified in the output parameters of an output device.
$SYSTEM The name of the Apogee System.
$SYSTEMCOMPUTER The name of the Hardware System.
$TICKETNAME See $ORDER.
$TIME The current time (i.e. the time when the variable is resolved).
$TOTALPAGES The total number of pages of a job. I.e. the size of the Run Lists when Run Lists are present.
Value is -1 when no page count established or no Run List is present.
$TOTALSHEETS The total number of press sheets in a job.
$TOTALPRODUCTS The total number of products in a job.
$TRAY The display name of the engine's current tray that is used. Note that this may change during
the course of a job.
$VERSION The name of the product version of a result. This is the contents of the second column in the
product version table (even if that column is renamed). Can be used for input and output. Note
that $VERSION always refers to the second column in the table (i.e. the one after the '#' col-
umn), even if you have renamed it. Resolves to a comma separated list of product versions
when used on a press sheet that contains multiple product versions. Can be used in read-syn-
tax in Page Assembly of Versioning TP.
$VERSIONELEMENT Used in Versioning jobs: the content of the ith version element in the version table.
$VERSIONELEMENTNAME Used in Versioning jobs: the name (value of the column header) of the ith version element in
the version table.
$VERSIONINDEX Used in Versioning jobs: the index of the version in the version table, i.e., its row number, start-
ing at 1.
$VERSIONSHORT The `V<n>' short version number of a product version, with <n> being $VERSIONINDEX. I.e.,
the content of the first column in the product version table. Evaluates to a comma separated
list of product versions short names when used on a result that contains multiple product ver-
sions. Can be used in read-syntax in Page Assembly of Versioning TP.

$VSCALE The vertical scale used by the Render Task Processor, expressed as a percentage. See also
$SCALE and $HSCALE.
$WEB The number of the web (starting from “1”). Evaluates to an empty string if the result is not an
imposed flat or if the imposition template is not multi-web.
$WEB_MAIN Same as $WEB of the main imposition. Can be used in a 1-up S4P flow to refer to the results of
the main imposition.
$WEBGROWTHPROFILE The name of the web-growth profile used for a job (i.e. press parameter).
$WHITEMODE The white application mode (pre-white, post-white or sandwich-white) used to print the white
on the sheet/layout. Empty if no white.
$WORKSTYLE The workstyle used by imposition. Resolves to any of the strings Sheetwise, Work and Turn,
Work and Tumble, Single Sided, Perfector.
NOTE: You can use a drop-down menu in the various contexts to see which
variables are supported in which context.
You can also use system variables to automatically print information about a job,
a template, or the part of a job that is being printed, since the information that
prints varies from one sheet of media to the next.
Variable Syntax This section explains the variable syntax, and describes how variables are inter-
preted and replaced by Apogee. Any variable that cannot be appropriately
interpreted in a given context will be replaced by an empty string.
NOTE: Variables are case sensitive! For example, $system will not be recognized
as the $SYSTEM variable: Instead, it will be interpreted as literal text.
Start and End

Variables always start with a dollar sign ($), immediately followed by the
variable name. Any non-alphanumerical character (including space or tab)
marks the end of the name.
NOTE: The RLPAGE variables that are used in the Run List settings for automatic
page placement do not use the dollar sign. They are delimited using the less
than/greater than symbols. For example, <RLPAGE:n>. This is also the case
when they are used in an input filename template (Open Connect, Hot Folder).
Braces
The variable name should be enclosed between braces { } when other alphabet-
ical text immediately follows the variable name.

Square Brackets
Square brackets should be used to prevent unwanted gaps when variables
cannot be resolved because the value is nil, out of context, or only one value is
possible.
For example:
$JOB[-$PART][-$BOOKSIGNATURE][-$RLPAGE][-v$VERSION][-$FLOWNAME]
Width Modifier
Variables can have a width modifier (a colon followed by a number, such as :3).
This causes the variable to be substituted with exactly the specified number of
characters. If the content is longer than the specified width, Apogee truncates it:
If the content is shorter than the specified width, Apogee pads the remainder
with blanks. You can customize the padding by inserting a plus (+) or minus (-)
sign before the width modifier:
 Inserting a “+” before the width modifier specifies that the padding or
truncation will be at the end of the variable. Any character you enter after the
+ will be used as the padding character for the specified number of spaces.
For example, +Y12 will result in a 12-character name, padded out at the end
with Ys where necessary (e.g. AgfaYYYYYYYY).
 Inserting a “-” before the width modifier specifies that the padding or trunca-
tion will be at the beginning of the variable. Any character you enter after the
+ will be used as the padding character for the specified number of spaces.
For example, -X12 will result in a 12-character name, padded out at the
beginning with Xs where necessary (e.g XXXXXXXXAgfa).
When omitted, Apogee assumes "+ " (plus, followed by a space), in which case
the padding is done with the “?” wildcard character.
When the string following a $ is not recognized as a variable, it is printed as a

literal (e.g. $SITE becomes "$SITE"). To overrule the meaning of the $ character
when followed by a legal variable name, you need to prefix the $ with another $:
For example, $$SIDE then becomes "$SIDE".
In the following examples, we assume that the job has the following attributes:
 Order number ($ORDER) = 0106G0001
 Customer contact ($CUSTOMER) = AGFA

Variable Example Substitution Result

$CUSTOMER$ORDER AGFA0106G001
$CUSTOMER AGFA
$CUSTOMER:3 AGF
$CUSTOMER:6 AGFA.
$CUSTOMER:+ 6 AGFA??.
$CUSTOMER:+_6 AGFA__
$CUSTOMER:-_6 __AGFA
$RLPAGE:-03 001, 002, 003,... 010, ... (3 character nos, padded up front with 0s)
$CUSTOMERX $CUSTOMERX
${CUSTOMER }P AGFAP
$CUSTOMER|NO NAME| AGFA
$CUSTOMER|NO NAME| NO NAME (when Customer contact is empty)
$ORDER-P 0106G0001-P
$ORDER:>4 0001
$ORDER[:4] 0106 (takes first 4 characters)
$ORDER[5:] G0001 (takes characters starting from the 5th character)
$ORDER[-2:] 01 (takes last 2 characters)
$ORDER[:-2] 0106G000 (takes all characters that precede the last 2 and
includes the last but two character)
Use NONE without the $ sign and between pipe characters to override the
default behavior of generating no text if the specified variable is not used.
Example: $COMPANY|NONE| generates NONE if the specified company
variable is not used.
Date and Time The date and time variables by default print the date and time according to the
regional settings of the computer that evaluates the variable. However, in some
Variable Formats cases you may want to have it printed differently.
NOTE: When you use format strings, the date and time variables (DATE/TIME
and PRINTDATE/PRINTTIME) produce the same result: Apogee only uses the
format to see what has to be printed.
You can modify the behavior of some format codes by prefixing them with #.

Format Code Description

%#a, %#A, %#b, %#B, # flag is ignored.
%#p,%#X, %#z, %#Z, %#%
%#c Long date and time representation, appropriate for current
locale. For example: Tuesday, August 05, 2008, 12:41:29.
%#x Long date representation, appropriate to current locale. For
example: Tuesday, August 05, 2008.
%#d, %#H, %#I, %#j, %#m, Remove leading zeros (if any).
%#M, %#S, %#U, %#w, %#W,
%#y, %#Y
When you specify no format string, $DATE and $TIME default to $DATE:%x and
$TIME:%X.
You need to enclose the variable name and format string in braces if you want to
print spaces (see examples below).
When you specify an unknown format string, Apogee prints it as a literal

(without the %). A width modifier is therefore also printed literally.
Date and Time formatting options

%a Abbreviated weekday name (first 3 chars).
%A Full weekday name.
%b Abbreviated month name (first 3 chars).
%B Full month name.
%c Date and time representation appropriate for locale.
%d Day of month as decimal number (01 - 31).
%j Day of year as decimal number (001 - 366).
%m Month as decimal number (01 - 12).
%U Week of year as decimal number, with Sunday as first day of week (00 - 53).
%w Weekday as decimal number (0 - 6; Sunday is 0).
%W Week of year as decimal number, with Monday as first day of week (00 - 53).
%x Date representation for current locale.
%y Year without century, as decimal number (00 - 99).
%Y Year with century, as decimal number.
%z, %Z Time-zone name or abbreviation; no characters if time zone is unknown.
%c Date and time representation appropriate for locale.
%H Hour in 24-hour format (00 - 23).
%I Hour in 12-hour format (01 - 12).
%M Minute as decimal number (00 - 59).
%p Current locales A.M./P.M. indicator for 12-hour clock.

Date and Time formatting options

%S Second as decimal number (00 - 59).
%X Time representation for current locale.
%z, %Z Time-zone name or abbreviation; no characters if time zone is unknown.
%% Percent sign.
Other characters not prefixed with % are printed as literals.
NOTE: You can control the width of the replacement string by using the
appropriate format codes. Most of them have a fixed width. Use %a and %b to
retrieve the abbreviated day and month names, fixed to 3 characters wide.
Combinations with $DATE

Insert a space when combining this variable with other variables, e.g.
\\$SYSTEMCOMPUTER\ArchiveRoot\$DATE:%Y%m \$JOB\
Examples
Format String Result Remarks
$DATE 07/09/03 Depends on locale. Equivalent to %x.
$TIME 11:14:45 Depends on locale. Equivalent to %X.
$DATE:% A Wednesday
$DATE:%c Wed Jul 9 11:16:49 2003 Depends on locale.
${DATE:Week %j} Week 190
$DATE:%A%f Wednesdayf %f printed as literal.
${DATE:Hello World} Hello World Printed as literal.
$DATE:+ 5 +5 Width modifier printed as literal.
$DATE:%y%m%d 030709
$DATE:%Y%m%d 20030709 Case matters!

1106 MARK ENGRAVER VARIABLES
Mark Engraver Variables

These variables can only be used in the Mark Engraver.
Table legend:
 C = The variable can be used as a condition.
 T= The variable can be used to insert data in Text Marks.
 V = The variable can be resolved in the specified view.
 X = The variable cannot be resolved in the specified view, however, the

output will be OK even it is not resolved in the view.
 Generic Variables: This column lists the corresponding variables that can be
used in Border, File Name Template, etc.
 Preps Variables: This column lists the corresponding variables that can be
used in Preps templates
Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Mark Engraver Variables Generic Variables Preps Variables

Image
Sheet
Page
$product
$product.binding_edge CT CT CT V
$product.binding_options.assembly_type CT CT CT V
$product.binding_options.name CT CT CT V
$product.code T T T T T V PRODUCT_CODE
$product.copy_count T T T T T V PRODUCT_COPYCOUNT
$product.design T T T T T V
$product.finished_trim_size.height CT CT CT T T V
$product.finished_trim_size.name T T CT T T V
$product.finished_trim_size.width CT CT CT T T V
$product.grain T T T T T V
$product.name CT CT CT T T V PRODUCT_NAME
$product.order T T T T T V PRODUCT_ORDER
$product.sub_type CT CT CT V
$product.total_pages T T T V PRODUCT_TOTALPAGES
$product.type CT CT CT V
$product.type_name CT CT CT V PRODUCT_NAME

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$page
$page.book_signature.index CT V
$page.book_signature.number_pages C V
$page.document_base_name T X DOCUMENTBASENAME
$page.document_filename T X DOCUMENTFILENAME
$page.document_name T X DOCUMENT
$page.document_page T X DOCPAGE
$page.document_page_label T X DOCPAGELABEL
$page.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$page.finished_trim_size.name T V
$page.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$page.part.copy_count_actual T V
$page.part.comments T PARTCOMMENTS
$page.part.copy_count_requested T V
$page.part.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$page.part.finished_trim_size.name T V
$page.part.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$page.part.name CT V PART
$page.part.number_colors CT V
$page.part.process_colors CT V
$page.part.range CT V
$page.part.spot_colors CT V
$page.part.type CT V
$page.rlindex CT V RLINDEX
$page.rlpage CT V RLPAGE
$image
$image.copy_count_actual T V
$image.copy_count_requested T V
$image.document_base_name T X DOCUMENTBASENAME
$image.document_filename T X DOCUMENTFILENAME
$image.document_name T X DOCUMENT
$image.document_page T X DOCPAGE
$image.document_page_label T X DOCPAGELABEL
$image.finished_trim_size.height CT V

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$image.finished_trim_size.name T V
$image.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$image.product_size.height T V
$image.product_size.name T V
$image.product_size.width T V
$image.tile_number T X
$image.tile_rc T X
$image.total_tiles T X
$assembly
$assembly.number_fold_sheets T T X
$fold_sheet
$fold_sheet.binding_options.assembly_type CT V
$fold_sheet.binding_options.name CT V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.finished_trim_size.name T V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.copy_count_actual T V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.copy_count_requested T V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.finished_trim_size.name T V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.name CT V PART
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.number_colors T V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.process_colors T V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.range CT V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.spot_colors T V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.part.type CT V
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.rlindex CT V RLINDEX
$fold_sheet.bottom_page.rlpage CT V RLPAGE
$fold_sheet.folding_scheme CT V IMPSIGNATURE-
NAME
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.finished_trim_size.name T V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.finished_trim_size.width CT V

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.copy_count_actual T V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.copy_count_requested T V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.finished_trim_- CT V
size.height
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.finished_trim_- T V
size.name
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.finished_trim_- CT V
size.width
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.name CT V PART
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.number_colors T V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.process_colors T V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.range CT V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.spot_colors T V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.part.type CT V
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.rlindex CT V RLINDEX
$fold_sheet.highest_folio_page.rlpage CT V RLPAGE
$fold_sheet.imposition_type CT V
$fold_sheet.index CT V SIG (Multi Section)
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.finished_trim_size.name T V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.copy_count_actual T V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.copy_count_requested T V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.finished_trim_- CT V
size.height
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.finished_trim_size.name T V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.name CT V PART
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.number_colors T V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.process_colors T V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.range CT V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.spot_colors T V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.part.type CT V
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.rlindex CT V RLINDEX
$fold_sheet.lowest_folio_page.rlpage CT V RLPAGE
$fold_sheet.number T X
$fold_sheet.number_pages CT V

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$fold_sheet.top_page.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$fold_sheet.top_page.finished_trim_size.name T V
$fold_sheet.top_page.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.copy_count_actual T V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.copy_count_requested T V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.finished_trim_size.height CT V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.finished_trim_size.name CT V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.finished_trim_size.width CT V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.name CT V PART
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.number_colors T V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.process_colors T V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.range CT V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.spot_colors T V
$fold_sheet.top_page.part.type CT V
$fold_sheet.top_page.rlindex CT V RLINDEX
$fold_sheet.top_page.rlpage CT V RLPAGE
$press_sheet
$press_sheet.cad_layout_name CT V
$press_sheet.cutter.name CT V CUTTER
$press_sheet.imposition_type CT V
$press_sheet.index T T CT V SIGNATUREINDEX
$press_sheet.grain CT V
$press_sheet.name T T T V SHEET SIG (No Multi Sec-
tion)
$press_sheet.number T T T V SIGNATURENUMBER
$press_sheet.number_fold_sheets T T CT V
$press_sheet.run_length T T T V RUNLENGTH
$press_sheet.side.number_colors T T CT V
$press_sheet.side.press.name T T CT V PRESS PRESS
$press_sheet.side.press.sidelay C V
$press_sheet.side.process_colors T T CT V
$press_sheet.side.production_set.name T T T X PRODSET
$press_sheet.side.production_set.prefix T T T X PRODSETPREFIX
$press_sheet.side.side T T CT V SIDE SIDE
$press_sheet.side.side_a T T CT V SIDEA

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$press_sheet.side.spot_colors T T CT V
$press_sheet.size.height T T CT V
$press_sheet.size.name T T CT V
$press_sheet.size.width T T CT V
$press_sheet.stock.name T T CT V
$press_sheet.stock.weight T T CT V
$press_sheet.web_index T T CT V
$press_sheet.web_number T T T V WEB
$press_sheet.work_style T T CT V WORKSTYLE WORKSTYLE
$sheet
$sheet.cad_layout_name CT V
$sheet.cutter.name CT V CUTTER
$sheet.cutter.type C V
$sheet.finishing_margins CT V
$sheet.grain CT V
$sheet.media.name CT V MEDIANAME
$sheet.media.type CT V MEDIATYPE
$sheet.name T T V SIGNATURE - SHEET SIG
$sheet.number_images T CT V
$sheet.press.name T CT V PRESS PRESS
$sheet.press.sidelay C V
$sheet.run_length T CT V RUNLENGTH
$sheet.size.height T CT V
$sheet.size.name T T V
$sheet.size.width T CT V
$sheet_side
$sheet_side.side T CT V SIDE SIDE
$output
$output.calibration_curve T T T X CALCURVE
$output.cpm CT X CPM
$output.device T T T X DEVICE
$output.horizontal_scale T T T X HSCALE
$output.linearization_curve T T T X LINCURVE

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$output.printdate T T T T T X PRINTDATE DATE
$output.printmode CT X PRINTMODE
$output.printtime T T T T T X PRINTTIME TIME
$output.quality T X QUALITY
$output.resolution T T T T X RESOLUTION
$output.scale T T T X SCALE
$output.separation T T T X SEPARATION COLOR - SEPARA-
TION
$output.sheetversion.index T X
$output.sheetversion.name T X
$output.simulation_curve T T T X SIMCURVE
$output.size.height T T V
$output.size.name T T V
$output.size.width T T V
$output.slug T T T X SLUG
$output.tray T T T X TRAY
$output.version.element T T T X VERSIONELEMENT
$output.version.element_name T T T X VERSIONELEMENT-
NAME
$output.version.index T T T X VERSIONINDEX VERSIONINDEX
$output.version.name T T T X VERSION VERSION
$output.version.short_name T T T X VERSIONSHORT VERSIONSHORT
$output.vertical_scale T T T X VSCALE
$administration
$administration.comments CT CT CT CT CT X COMMENTS COMMENT
$administration.comments_ CT CT CT CT CT X COMMENTS_ REMARK_LINE_
$administration.contact.email T T T T T X CONTACTEMAIL CONTACTEMAIL -
CONTACTMAIL
$administration.contact.first T T T T T X CONTACTFIRST CUSTOMER
$administration.contact.last T T T T T X CONTACTLAST CUSTOMER
$administration.contact.mobile T T T T T X CONTACTMOBILE CONTACTMOBILE
$administration.contact.phone T T T T T X CONTACTPHONE
$administration.contact.title T T T T T X CONTACTTITLE CONTACTTITLE
$administration.customer.address T T T T T X COMPANYADDRESS ADDRESS
$administration.customer.city T T T T T X COMPANYCITY CITY
$administration.customer.country T T T T T X COMPANYCOUNTRY COUNTRY

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$administration.customer.name CT CT CT CT CT X COMPANY COMPANY
$administration.customer.phone T T T T T X COMPANYPHONE PHONE
$administration.customer.state T T T T T X COMPANYSTATE STATE
$administration.customer.zip T T T T T X COMPANYZIP POSTCODE - POST-
ALCODE
$administration.description CT CT CT CT CT X DESCRIPTION DESCRIPTION
$system
$system.date T T T T T X DATE
$system.time T T T T T X TIME
$jdf
$jdf.customer_id T T T X JDF_CUSTOMERID
$jdf.job_description T T T X JDF_JOBDESCRIPTION
$jdf.job_name T T T X JDF_JOBNAME
$jdf.order_description T T T X JDF_ORDERDESCRIP-
TION
$jdf.order_number T T T X JDF_ORDERNUMBER
$jdf.part_version T T T X JDF_PARTVERSION
$jdf.product_id T T T X JDF_PRODUCTID
$jdf.project_id T T T X JDF_PROJECTID
$jdf.separation T T T X JDF_SEPARATION
$jdf.sheet T T T X JDF_SHEET
$jdf.signature T T T X JDF_SIGNATURE
$job
$job.date T T T T T X JOBDATE JOBDATE
$job.id T T T T T X JOBID
$job.name CT CT CT CT CT V JOB JOBNAME - JOB_TI-
TLE
$job.nr T T T T T X JOBNR
$job.operator CT CT CT CT CT V OPERATOR OPERATOR
$job.order CT CT CT CT CT V ORDER JOBID
$job.ticket_name T T T X TICKETNAME
$job.time T T T T T X JOBTIME JOBTIME
$job.total_pages T T T V TOTALPAGES
$job.total_products T T T V TOTALPRODUCTS

Press Sheet
Sheet View
Fold Sheet
Image
Sheet
Page
$job.total_sheets T T T V TOTALSHEETS
$apogee
$apogee.computer T T T T T X COMPUTER
$apogee.displayname T T T T T X PRODUCTDISPLAY-
NAME
$apogee.name T T T T T X PRODUCTNAME PRODUCTNAME
$apogee.system T T T T T X SYSTEM SYSTEM
$apogee.systemcomputer T T T T T X SYSTEMCOMPUTER SYSTEMCOMPUTER
$apogee.vendor T T T T T X PRODUCTVENDOR
$apogee.version T T T T T X PRODUCTVERSION PRODUCTVERSION
$apogee.version_major T T T T T X PRODUCTVERSIONMA-
JOR
$apogee.version_minor T T T T T X PRODUCTVERSIONMI-
NOR

APPENDIX
B Keyboard Shortcuts
This section lists the shortcut keys that can be used on Windows workstations.


Job Ticket Editor ........................................................................................
Jobs Window ...............................................................................................
1116
1118
 Layout Editor and Product Editor ......................................................... 1123
 Apogee Impose .......................................................................................... 1127
1115
1116 KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS
Job Ticket Editor

 Switch Tabs
The following shortcut keys can be used to switch between tabs in the Jobs and
Job Ticket Editor windows.
To switch between tabs... Press (Windows)

Select the next tab. CTRL + Tab
Select the previous tab. SHIFT + CTRL + Tab
 Job List Shortcuts

The following shortcut keys can be used in the Job List.

Expand all jobs. CTRL + click the ‘+’ icon
of a collapsed job
Collapse all open jobs. CTRL + click the ‘+’ icon
of a collapsed job
or simply CTRL + F5
Purge a job (complete 1-step delete) - SHIFT + Delete
Administrator access level required!
Edit a job. CTRL + Enter (Numeric
keypad)
Move cursor to Quick Filter text field (Find CTRL + F
job).
 Page Store/Run List Shortcuts

The following shortcut keys can be used in the Pages tab, when editing the Run
List.

Fill a placeholder with a blank page. CTRL + B
Jump to a specific Run List position. # + page number

KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS 1117
When dragging pages from the Page

Press (Windows)
Store to the Run List...
To replace pages in the Run List. SHIFT + drag
To insert pages in the Run List. ALT + drag
To reverse the order of the pages when Drag and briefly press R
dragging in the Run List.
To reverse the order of the selected CTRL +SHIFT + R
placed pages in the Run List.
To select even placeholders E
To select odd placeholders O
When dragging pages within the Run

Press (Windows)
List...
To replace pages in the Run List. SHIFT + drag
To insert pages in the Run List. ALT + drag
To copy pages in the Run List. CTRL + drag
 Plate Set-up (versioning jobs)

These shortcuts are available in the plate set-up tab of the Versioning task
processor in the Plan tab.

Switch to a next version, or the first one if CTRL + ]
on àll versions'. Does not
sions' if on the last version.
Switch to a previous version, or the last CTRL + [
one if on àll versions'. Does not
sions' if on the first version.
Show all versions. CTRL + \
To select/clear a range of version-depen- ALT + click a plate
dent plates.
To set every version in the selected rows ALT + select a specific
to a specific version. version in the Version
list
To set every version in the selected rows ALT + select Own Ver-
to its own version. sion at the top of the
Version list


Expand a selection. SHIFT
Exclude from a selection. CTRL
Clear a selection. CTRL + SHIFT + A
 Imposition and From Template Shortcuts

The following shortcut keys can be used in the Signature Selection section of the
Imposition settings.

Refresh all templates. ALT + Refresh
In the Available Signatures list:
• Select a single signature. Enter
In the Selected Signatures list:
• Find in Available Signatures list. Enter
In the Selected Signatures list:
• Move selected Signatures. CTRL + Up/Down arrow
 Resource Editors

To lock and unlock the settings of a resource (padlock button) CTRL + l
Jobs Window NOTE: Refer to the separate section for the Apogee Impose menu shortcuts.
 Apogee Menu Shortcuts

The following Apogee menu shortcut keys can be used.

Quit the Apogee Client. ALT + F4
Hide the Apogee Client. N/A
Hide Others. N/A
Display Preferences. CTRL + ,
 File Menu Shortcuts

The following File menu shortcut keys can be used.


Open a new print layout. CTRL + N
Open the Ticket Template dialog box. CTRL + N
Open the JTE with the default ticket tem- CTRL + ALT + N
plate selected.
Select and open a previously saved ticket CTRL + O
(*.ajt).
Close the current window. ALT + F4
Close all windows.
Save the current ticket (Ticket Editor CTRL + S
only).
Save the ticket with a different name CTRL + SHIFT + S
(Ticket Editor only).
Save the ticket as a Ticket Template CTRL + ALT + S
(Ticket Editor only).
Submit a new Ticket to the Apogee Sys- CTRL + SHIFT + G
tem, or submit the changes you’ve made
to an existing job (Ticket Editor only).
Log on to an Apogee System, or to log off CTRL + K
from one.
Quit the Apogee Client. ALT + F4
Upload a document. CTRL + U
Open in WebApproval CTRL + SHIFT + M
 Edit Menu Shortcuts

The following Edit menu shortcut keys can be used.

Undo the last Cut, Copy, or Paste opera- CTRL + Z
tion.
Delete the selected text, and copy it onto CTRL + X
the clipboard.
Copy the selected text onto the clipboard. CTRL + C
Paste the contents of the clipboard at the CTRL + V
selected location.
Clear the current text selection. N/A
Delete the current selection. Delete
Edit the selected item. CTRL + ENTER
Display the selected item using the ENTER
default viewer.
Rename the selected item. F2


Select all items in the current view. CTRL + A
Deselect all items in the current view. CTRL + SHIFT + A
Put a blank page in the selected place- CTRL + B
holder(s).
Find in Page Store. CTRL + ALT + F
Duplicate a job. CTRL + D
Merge Jobs. CTRL + Y
Reverse Page Order CTRL + SHIFT + R
Preferences CTRL + ,
 Control Menu Shortcuts

The following Control menu shortcut keys can be used.

Continue CTRL + G
 View Menu Shortcuts

The following View menu shortcut keys can be used.

Display thumbnail images of all pages in CTRL + SHIFT+ T
the Job Layout pane.
View Flats Only. CTRL + SHIFT + F
View Extra information. CTRL + T
Scale Small. CTRL + -
Scale Normal. CTRL + O
Scale Large. CTRL + +
Scale Fit to Window. CTRL + ALT + O
View Page Labels. CTRL + SHIFT + L
View Extended Page Adjustments. CTRL + SHIFT + E
Columns Front or Back N/A
Columns Fill Width N/A
Show/hide Devices pane CTRL + ALT + 1
Show/hide Job List pane CTRL + ALT + 2
Show/hide Flow Activity pane CTRL + ALT + 3
Show/hide Production Sets pane CTRL + ALT + 4
Show/hide Separations pane CTRL + ALT + 5


View All Versions CTRL + \
View Previous Version CTRL + [
View Next Version CTRL + ]
 Raster Preview View Menu Shortcuts

The following Raster Preview menu shortcut keys can be used.

Zoom In. CTRL + +
Zoom Out. CTRL + -
Size to Fit. CTRL + O
Show Actual Pixels. CTRL + ALT + O
Show / Hide Rulers. N/A
Show Info. CTRL + I
Show / Hide Grid. CTRL + ALT + ‘
Invert Image. ALT + SHIFT + I
Next Side. Right arrow
Previous Side. Left arrow
First Side. Home
Last Side. End
Turn Sheet. CTRL + T
Color-Managed. ALT + C
Light Table. ALT + L
Press Sheet. ALT + P
Device Output. ALT + D
Transform -> Rotate 90 CW. ALT + T
Transform -> Rotate 90 CCW. ALT + SHIFT + T
Transform -> Flip Horizontal. ALT + F
Transform -> Flip Horizontal. ALT + SHIFT + F
Invert ALT + SHIFT + I
 Raster Preview Tool Toggle Shortcuts

The following Raster Preview tool toggle shortcut keys can be used.


Toggle on/off the Marquee tool. M
Toggle on/off the Hand tool. H
Toggle on/off the Zoom tool. Z
Toggle on/off the Measurement tool. I
 Window Menu Shortcuts

The following Window menu shortcut keys can be used.

Minimize the current window. N/A
Display the System Overview. CTRL + 1
Display the Hot Tickets window. CTRL + 2
Display the Jobs window. CTRL + 3
Display the Message Board. CTRL + 4
Display Info for <selected item>. CTRL + I
Display Activity for <selected item>. CTRL + J
Display Remarks CTRL + R
Palettes: Show Navigator CTRL+ ALT+ A
Palettes: Show Inks CTRL+ ALT+ I
Palettes: Show Rule-ups CTRL+ ALT+ U
Palettes: Show Versions CTRL+ ALT+ V
Palettes: Hide Tools CTRL+ ALT+ T
Display the Log for <selected item>. CTRL + L
Cycle forward through Windows or Raster ALT + TAB
Preview palettes.
Cycle backward through Windows or Ras- N/A
ter Preview palettes.
Display Problem Report for selected job. CTRL + SHIFT + I
Display Preflight Report for selected job. CTRL + E
 Help Menu Shortcuts

The following Help menu shortcut keys can be used.

Display the Apogee Help. F1
Display the What’s This? Help. SHIFT + F1

Layout Editor and

Product Editor
 Menu Shortcuts
To Press
Add Product CTRL + SHIFT + O
Get Info CTRL + I
Open in Production Dashboard CTRL + SHIFT + D
Submit CTRL + SHIFT + G
Copy CTRL + C
Duplicate CTRL + D
Step and Repeat CTRL + ALT + S
Select All CTRL + A
Select None CTRL + SHIFT + A
Group CTRL + G
Ungroup CTRL + U
Auto-Layout images CTRL + N
New Empty Sheet Layout/Printer Layout CTRL + SHIFT + N
Rearrange frames on a sheet layout/sheet layouts on a printer layout CTRL + SHIFT + F
Rearrange all frames in job CTRL + ALT SHIFT + F
Reapply marks CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +
M
Reapply all mark sets in Job CTRL + SHIFT + M
Fix bleed overlaps CTRL + ALT + M
Zoom into layout CTRL + +
OR
CTRL + mouse wheel
Zoom out of layout CTRL + -
OR
CTRL + mouse wheel
Zoom to fit layout in window CTRL + 0 (zero)
Display the System Overview. CTRL + 1
Display the Jobs window. CTRL + 3
Open the Media Hub CTRL + ALT + 1
Open the Finishing Hub CTRL + ALT + 2
Open the Mark Engraver CTRL + ALT + 3
Open the Sheet Sizes CTRL + ALT + 4
Open the Page Sizes CTRL + ALT + 5
Open the Color Books CTRL + ALT + 6
Show preflight report CTRL + E

To Press
Edit original image externally CTRL + Enter
Edit Normalized PDF in Preview CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
Update image after editing CTRL + SHIFT + U
Show/hide Product Panel CTRL + ALT + I
Show/hide Inspector Panel CTRL + SHIFT + I
Show/hide the Snag List CTRL + R
Show/Hide View Options CTRL + SHIFT + E
 Placing and arranging images on a sheet
layouts.
To Drag the image and

Place one or more images at the cursor position without ganging them. Hold SHIFT and
release
ping to edges (blue snap guides).
Restrain movement horizontally and vertically. Hold SHIFT
Cancel the image placement. Press ESC
Rotate one or more images 90° counterclockwise, while moving them Press space bar once
Copy a selected image. Press CTRL + C
Paste a copied image. Press CTRL + V
Center an image on the current sheet or on a new sheet if the current Press C
one is not empty. Multiple selected images are centered on individual
sheets.
Center an image on the current sheet even if it is not empty. Multiple Press SHIFT + C
selected images are centered on individual sheets.
Duplicate one or more selected images according to the copy count Press N
and gang the images on the current and new sheets.
Duplicate one or more selected images according to the copy count Press SHIFT + N
and gang the images on the current and new sheets but starting at the
cursor position.
Duplicate one or more selected images according to the copy count Press N + C
and center the images on the current sheet if empty and on new
sheets.
Duplicate the selected image and fill the current sheet if empty. Fill Press F
one sheet for each image if multiple images are selected.
Duplicate a selected image and gang the images with existing images Press SHIFT + F
on the current sheet to fill the sheet. Selecting multiple images fills
multiple sheets.

To Drag the image and

Duplicate the selected image and fill and center on the current sheet if Press F + C
empty. Fill one sheet for each image if multiple images are selected.
Rotate the selected image or images clockwise. Press R
Rotate the selected image or images counterclockwise. Press SHIFT + R
Mirror the selected image or images clockwise. Press M
Mirror the selected image or images counterclockwise. Press SHIFT + M
 Toolbar tools
Selection tool: To select a component or area and display its properties. A

This is the default tool.
Single Instance Selection tool: To select a single instance of marks D
which are placed at various locations, or part of a compound mark. In
the Paths inspector: selects a path and its anchor points.
Pan tool: To pan layouts in the Layout Editor. H
Zoom tool: To zoom into a specific area of a layout. Z
Frame tool: To draw empty frames on a sheet. F
View Options palette button: Shows/hides the View Options palette. CTRL SHIFT+E
Marks palette button: Shows/hides the Marks palette. CTRL+M
Presets (Licensed feature): To open the Presets dialog box. CTRL SHIFT+P
Crop image: Activates the crop mode to crop an image (Image inspec- K
tor in the Product Editor).
Split tool: Activates the Split tool to split an image into tiles (Tiling K
inspector in the Product Editor).
Pen tool: Activates the Pen for drawing free-form paths on an image P
and adding/deleting points of existing paths (Paths inspector in the
Product Editor).
Ellipse Path tool: Activates the Ellipse Path tool to draw ellipse and cir- L
cle paths on an image (Paths inspector in the Product Editor).
Rectangle Path tool: Activates the Rectangle Path tool to draw rectan- R
gle paths on an image (Paths inspector in the Product Editor).
Zoom slider with Zoom to fit and Zoom to maximum buttons, and drop- CTRL +/-
down list with zoom presets

 Split Tool Shortcuts

Activate the Split tool by pressing K with the Tiling inspector selected. To control
the splitting of tiles selected with the Split tool, use the following shortcuts.
To Press
Change the splitting orientation (the magenta splitting line) Space bar or TAB key
once
Extend the splitting action across all tiles Hold SHIFT
Repeat the split. CTRL
Cancel the image splitting ESC
 Path Editing Shortcuts

In the Paths inspector, activate the Pen tool by pressing P, the Rectangle tool
with R and the Ellipse tool with L. To draw paths with these tools, use the
following shortcuts.
To Press
Draw a square with the Rectangle tool CTRL
Draw a circle with the Ellipse tool CTRL
 Positioning Toolbar Shortcuts

To control the Positioning toolbar when a tile is selected with Selection tool:
To
Open the Split Tile dialog box CTRL + U
Mirror the tile vertically when placed on a sheet SHIFT + M
Mirror the tile horizontally when placed on a sheet M
Rotate the tile clockwise in steps of 90° SHIFT + R
Rotate the tile anticlockwise in steps of 90° R
Merge the selected tiles CTRL+ G
Place the cursor in the first Overlap box of the Positioning toolbar O
Place the cursor in the first Gap box of the Positioning toolbar G
Jump to next box in the Positioning toolbar TAB

Apogee Impose These shortcuts apply for the Apogee Impose module.
 Quick Access to the Product and Press Sheet Views

The following shortcuts provide quick access to the Product View or Press Sheet
View.

Select a job in the Jobs List and jump to the Product View CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
Jump to the Product View while in the Job Ticket Editor CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
View a flat you selected in the Results tab in the Product View CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
View a flat you selected in the Results Preview in the Product View CTRL + SHIFT + Enter
Return to the Job Ticket Editor from the Product View ALT + F4
Close the Product View and submit the Job Ticket CTRL + SHIFT + G
Jump to the Press Sheet View from the Product View, with a Press CTRL + Enter
Sheet selected in the Press Sheet or Press nodes
 Tools in Product View

Switch to Split Assembly Tool ALT + S
Temporarily switch to the Split Assembly Tool Hold ALT
Split into multiple blocks (with Split Assembly Tool selected) Hold CTRL
Switch to the Split Assembly Tool and split an assembly in multiple Hold ALT + CTRL
blocks
Splits a stacked signature horizontally, splitting off inserted child Hold + SHIFT
nodes.
Repeat the selected Fold Sheet (Repeat tool) CTRL + ALT + S
Flip a Fold Sheet (must be selected on a Press Sheet) CTRL + ALT + F
Rotate a Fold Sheet clockwise (must be selected on a Press Sheet) CTRL + ALT + T
Rotate a Fold Sheet counterclockwise (must be selected on a Press CTRL + ALT + SHIFT +
Sheet) T
Repeat the layout of an imposed Press Sheet to other Sheets CTRL + ALT + R
Hide Assembly pane CTRL + ALT + 1
Hide Fold Sheets CTRL + ALT + 2
Hide Part/Fold Sheet details CTRL + ALT + 3
Show/Hide Positioning Palette CTRL + |

 Tools in Press Sheet View

Switch to the Zoom Tool ALT + Z
Switch to Measurement Tool ALT + M
Switch to the Pan Tool ALT + H
Clear any measurements from a Press Sheet CTRL + ALT + M
Switch Light Table mode on and off CTRL + L
Temporarily switch to the Measurement Tool Hold ALT
Temporarily switch to the Pan Tool Hold space bar
To turn the Press Sheet: flip front to back (Turn Press Sheet tool) CTRL + T
Zoom into Press Sheet CTRL +
OR
CTRL + mouse wheel
Zoom out of Press Sheet CTRL -
OR
CTRL + mouse wheel
Zoom to fit Press Sheet in window CTRL + 0 (zero)
Show/Hide View Options in Press Sheet View CTRL + E
Go to next sheet (Sheet View) CTRL + right arrow
Go to previous sheet (Sheet View) CTRL + left arrow
Close the selected gaps (Sheet View) CTRL+.
Copy a mark CTRL+ drag
 Navigating Multiple Products in the Products Tab

The following shortcuts apply if you have more than one product in the products
list (multi-product jobs).

Go to the next item in the list CTRL + Down arrow
Go to the previous item in the list CTRL + Up arrow
Go to the next item of the same level in the list CTRL + SHIFT + Down
arrow
Go to the previous item of the same level in the list CTRL + SHIFT + Up
arrow
Go to the next cover part c or C
Go to the next plain or insert part b or B

 Other Menu Shortcuts

Undo an action (unlimited) CTRL + Z
Redo the last change CTRL + Y
Close the Product View or Press Sheet View window CTRL + W
Open the Auto Impose window in the Product View CTRL + N
Select all CTRL + A
Select none SHIFT + CTRL + A
Re-apply Mark Sets (manual marks are removed and marks sets are CTRL + SHIFT + M
placed according to conditions
Show/Hide Run List Indexes: switches between absolute run list index CTRL + SHIFT + N
and page numbering per part
Show/Hide Page Previews CTRL + SHIFT + T
Show/Hide Measurements CTRL + SHIFT + R
Submit a job CTRL + SHIFT + G
Show the Inspector CTRL + I
Show the Snag List CTRL + R
Show/Hide all the marks and inspector pallets F4
Show the current selection (orange highlight draws attention to the CTRL + *
selected items and scrolls or zooms if they are off-screen)
Compact View CTRL + SHIFT + K


APPENDIX
C Icons Overview
This section contains a list of icons that appear in the user interface.
 Main Windows ............................................................................................ 1132

 Apogee Impose .......................................................................................... 1151
 Layout Editor and Product Editor ......................................................... 1155
1131
1132 ICONS OVERVIEW
Main Windows
Job Notification Icons
The Apogee system issued a critical system message.
WebApproval remark: A remark on this job (or results) has been received from WebApproval.
Job Status Icons (including

Page Store jobs)
The job is being archived or dumped.
The job is being imported from archive.
The job is being deleted.
Apogee is queuing all commands for this job.
The document is being edited (it is ‘checked out’).
The Run List is being edited by another user.
You are editing the Run List.
The job is finished.
The job was broken during editing. You can remove this icon by opening the job for editing.

ICONS OVERVIEW 1133
The job has been manually put on hold.
The job output is waiting for the correct media to be loaded on the output device.
The job is waiting for a Task Processor (none currently available).
A group of results is complete, and is waiting to be printed (blue icon).
The result is waiting for a hard proof.
The result is waiting for a web proof.
The job is waiting for a soft proof.
A task has been aborted.
The task has been manually put on hold.
New (unplaced) documents are available in the (Private) Page Store.
The job is waiting for results.
Not all the results of a group are yet available (green icon).
The job is waiting for After Hours processing.
Some results have been rejected by the user.
The layout/imposition is not yet defined.
The job has reached a Milestone: The Run List is not complete. This Milestone was set up in
the Options tab.
The job has reached a Milestone: The job deadline has been reached. This Milestone was set
up in the Options tab.
The job has reached a Milestone: The result is not available in time. This Milestone was set up
using a Milestone Action in the Production Plan.
The job is managed by PlateMaker (ready to plate). The PlateMaker client will take care of fur-
ther plate production.

1134 ICONS OVERVIEW
A StoreFront job: The job was generated by StoreFront.
Job Status Icons in Tab

Area (JTE only)
The job is being viewed by you or by another user (JTE only).
The selected job was being edited by you or by another user, but the edit session was broken
(Jobs window only). You can remove this icon by opening the job for editing.
The job has remarks.
Job List Icons

Job group.
Commercial job with complete Run List.
Rush job (Commercial jobs only).
Commercial job with disabled input channel.
Commercial job is scheduled to be archived when it is finished (Options tab).
Commercial job has been archived.
Commercial job is scheduled to be deleted when it is finished (Options tab).

ICONS OVERVIEW 1135
Commercial job has been deleted.
Commercial job is scheduled to be archived and deleted when it is finished (Options tab).
Commercial job has been archived and deleted.
Hot List Icons

Commercial Hot Ticket.
Commercial Hot Ticket with a disabled input channel.
Job that requires set-up by Printer (WebApproval jobs only)
Collecting Hot Tickets (tickets grouped in separate panel)
Flow Icons
Main Output to a high resolution output device.
Main Output to a Sign and Display output device.
Display: An optional or alternate flow to the Main Output flow, used to create job results for
high-resolution soft proofing.
Digital Quick Strip (DQS): An alternate mode of operation which supports the PrintDrive DQS
mode of Apogee Series3. In this mode, Apogee creates and renders the flat backgrounds and
pages separately. These are then sent as separate items to PrintDrive. PrintDrive assembles
the pages onto the backgrounds, and then outputs the results as an integral job.
Collecting Hot Ticket: Uses the Collect TP to collect images and create special Hot Tickets.

1136 ICONS OVERVIEW
Flow Icon Color Coding
A white background color indicates that this flow is idle.
A green background color indicates that this flow is currently active.
A blue background color indicates that this flow is on hold.
A yellow background color indicates that this flow contains tasks which are queued and wait-
ing to be processed.
A white background color with a green checkmark indicates that this flow has finished.
A red background color indicates that this flow has generated an error.
A purple background color indicates that further handling of this flow has been taken over by
PlateRunner (Main flow only). For more details, refer to the PlateRunner documentation.
Filter Buttons
Job Filter not applied.
Job Filter applied.
Flow Control Actions

Discard
Wait for Results
Web Proof
Soft Proof
Hard Copy Proof
Collect for Output
After Hours

ICONS OVERVIEW 1137
Result Actions
Keep Result
Archive Result
Notify
Milestone
Page Store / Run List Icons

PDF / PostScript composite document.
PDF / PostScript composite page.
PDF / PostScript pre-separated document.
PDF / PostScript pre-separated page.
Raster composite document.
Raster composite page.
Raster pre-separated document.
Raster pre-separated page.
A red-colored icon indicates that the document or page has been processed with errors.
An icon with a red stripe indicates that the document or page has been rejected.
A blue-colored icon indicates that the document or page is on hold.
A Public Page Store (Page Store only).
Empty placeholder (Run List only).
Blank page (Run List only).

1138 ICONS OVERVIEW
Job processing is not yet complete in the Production Plan before the Run List.
Unknown document.
Page imposition has been adjusted (Run List only).
(in Run List status column of normal job). The page has a preflight report. Clicking on the icon
will open the report in your PDF viewer.
(in Run List status column of versioning job). One or more pages in this row have a preflight
report. Clicking on the icon will bring up a menu which contains the titles of the objects to
which the preflight reports are attached. Selecting one of the menu items opens the report in
your PDF viewer.
(in Run List status column of job). The page has generated a preflight error. Clicking on the
icon will open the Problem Report.
(in Run List status column of job). The page has generated a preflight warning. Clicking on the
icon will open the Problem Report.
PDF is certified.
PDF is not certified.
Document is being edited interactively within Apogee using the Check-Out plug-in for Acro-
bat.
Document has been edited interactively within Apogee using the Check-Out plug-in for Acro-
bat.
Document page size does not match the page trim size set for the product or part.
PDF Layer icons (Versioning

jobs)
A single PDF layer from a page, without errors.
A single PDF layer from a page, with errors.
A single PDF layer from a page, on hold before reaching the Run List.
A single PDF layer from a page, which has been rejected.

ICONS OVERVIEW 1139
Plate Set Indicators

(Versioning jobs)
A full bar indicates that one or more of the side versions to which this page contributes will
have a full set of plates made.
A half full bar indicates that one or more of the side versions to which this page contributes
will have a partial set of plates made.
An empty bar indicates that none of the side versions to which this page contributes will have
any plates made.
Extended Page Adjustment

Icons Center Offset Scale Rotate
Horizontal
Vertical
Both
Auto-center
90
180
270

1140 ICONS OVERVIEW
Results - Job Layout

Thumbnails
A thumbnail view of this page is either not available, or is currently being

retrieved from the Apogee System (green background color).
Page has been processed successfully (no background color).
Page has been processed successfully, and is on hold pending approval

(blue background color).
Page has been processed with errors (red background color).
Page is managed by the PlateMaker Client, and is ready to plate (purple

background color).
Page has been processed successfully, but has been rejected.

ICONS OVERVIEW 1141
Page has been discarded.
An empty page in the Run List (white background with a cross).
A blank page in the Run List (white background).
Results - Data Indicators

a separation). The page/flat has been rendered, and is ready for output.
a separation). The check mark indicates that it has been successfully printed.
A square gray-colored indicator in the lower right corner of the page indicates that all separa-
tions have been fully rendered and are ready for previewing or output. Visible for DQS and
Raster Impose results when you choose View > Show > Page Rendered.
A small fold in a corner of a page indicates the orientation. The position of the fold tells you
where the top of the page is.The orientation of a page may vary in an imposition layout.
The job or flow is finished.

1142 ICONS OVERVIEW
Results - Job Layout Action

Icons
The job’s Production Plan contains an After Hours Action. When this point is reached, the job
results are held (written to disk) pending the specified time.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Soft Proof Action. When this point is reached, the job
user.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Hard Copy Proof Action. When this point is reached, the
job results are held (written to disk) pending approval/ rejection of a hard copy proof by the
user.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Ready for Plating Action. When this point is reached, the
job results are taken over and managed by PlateRunner (ready to plate).
The job’s Production Plan contains a Collect for Output Action. When this point is reached,
the job results are held (written to disk) pending user intervention.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Waiting for Results Action. When this point is reached,
the job results are held until the target flow or required pages are finished.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Discard Action. When this point is reached, the job
results are held until the specified pages have been automatically discarded.
The job’s Production Plan contains a Web Proof Action. When this point is reached, the job
remote user.
Result will be frozen once it has been approved by the remote user.
Result has been frozen because it has been approved by the remote user.
Results - Job Layout Action

Icon Status
The page or flat has not yet reached this Action.
The page or flat has reached this Action (blue background).
The page or flat has passed this Action (dimmed icon).

ICONS OVERVIEW 1143
Results - Separation/
Composite Indicators in a
Normal job
Square outlined separation indicator:
• A process color separation is expected (it has not yet been rendered). In this example, it is
the magenta separation.
• The background is available for an Apogee DQS job.
Square solid separation indicator: A process color separation has been rendered, and is ready
for output. In this example, it is the magenta separation.
Checked separation indicator: The separation has been rendered, and has been successfully
output. In this example, it is the magenta separation.
Dimmed separation indicator: The separation has been discarded, and will not be output.
Round outlined separation indicator: A spot color separation is expected (it has not yet been
rendered). The outline color is the color of the expected spot color.
Round solid separation indicator: A spot color separation has been rendered, and is ready for
output. The solid color is the spot color.
Checked separation indicator: The spot color separation has been rendered, and has been suc-
cessfully output.
Results - Separation/
Composite Indicators in a
Versioning job
Process colors known but not rendered (round separation indicators for spot colors).
Process color plates from this version to be output (round separation indicators for spot col-
ors).
Process color plates from other version to be remade for this version (round separation indica-
tors for spot colors).

1144 ICONS OVERVIEW
Process color plates from other version reused, but not remade (round separation indicators
for spot colors).
Process color plates from this version made (round separation indicators for spot colors).
Process color plates from reused (but not remade) version output (round separation indicators
for spot colors).
Versioning Icons in the

Results Tab
Full bar at the side of the box: A full set of plates will be made for this side.
Half bar at the side of the box: A partial set of plates will be made for this version.
One or more version pages used by the side is not yet available (empty placeholder).
The background and all version pages used by the side are available, but the render data for
the whole side is not yet complete.
All render data for the side is available, but not all plates have yet been produced.
Finished state: All plates for the side have been produced.
Error state: Processing of this side has been stopped by an error.
On Hold state: Processing of this side is waiting at a hold point.
This side or one of its separations or pages has been rejected.
This side has been discarded and will not be processed further.
Render - Separate - Color

Separation Icons
The color definition was found in the Apogee Color Books.
The Emulate Overprint option is always on.
The Emulate Overprint option is always off.
The Emulate Overprint option is selected automatically.

ICONS OVERVIEW 1145
The color contains version-specific content.
The color does not contain version-specific content.
The color was found in the job.
The color was manually entered.
The color was manually entered and was found in the job.
The color is directly linked to the selected color
The color is indirectly linked to the selected color.
The color was found in the border or the imposition template.
The color was manually entered, with marks.
Mapped color name as defined by the Pantone mapping settings.
Special color: varnish.
Special color: die line.
Special color: other.
Imposition Linked Icon
Indicates that this section is part of a multiple-section signature.
Monitor Status
(Medium).

1146 ICONS OVERVIEW
Remark Origin
Customer remark (WebApproval jobs only).
Printer remark (WebApproval jobs only).
Remark Type
An annotation remark created in WebApproval. Click the associated (blue -encircled) annota-
tion number to jump directly to the referenced location in Raster Preview.
The job has been approved by the corresponding reviewer (printer, customer).
The job has been rejected by the corresponding reviewer (printer, customer).
A job remark.
A page remark.
Preflight remark
Preflight remark - warning
Preflight remark - error
Internal remark which cannot be seen by the customer
Remark has attachment (customer remarks only)
View file produced after preflight
View report produced by preflight
Task Processor Color

Coding
The Task Processor is ready, and is currently idle.
The Task Processor turns green when it is processing a task. For example, the Avantra Task
Processor is busy processing a separation.
The Task Processor turns red if a processing error occurs. In this case an error notification is
sent to the Message Board, explaining the nature of the error.

ICONS OVERVIEW 1147
The Task Processor turns blue if it is offline.
When the Task Processor has been stopped (inactive), the icon will have horizontal stripes
running through it. You can re-activate it by context-clicking on the icon and selecting Start
from the context menu.
The Task Processor is starting up (moving horizontal stripes).
The Task Processor is locked, because you do not have a license to use it.
A purple arrow is attached to the Task Processor icon if:

• You have a remote license. This means that this Task Processor is not licensed to execute
tasks: These tasks are processed remotely on another Apogee System. However, you can use
this Task Processor to specify the settings in the Production Plan.
• A remote proofer is installed (as specified in the installer). The remote proofer is combined
with the Remote Proofer Controller Task Processor.
Output Task Processor

Hardware Status
Paused: The output engine is able to communicate, but cannot process any tasks. A user
interaction has taken place on the device itself to trigger this status.
Disconnected: The output engine's cable has been unplugged.
Warning: The hardware engine requires attention (e.g. ink low), but can still receive tasks.
This platesetter is managed by PlateRunner. The yellow ‘sun’ patch indicates that the device
is in attended state (i.e. A user is logged in to the PlateRunner application).
This platesetter is managed by PlateRunner. The gray ‘moon’ patch indicates that the device
is in unattended state (i.e. no one is logged in to the PlateRunner application).
Error: The hardware engine requires attention - it cannot continue to receive and process
tasks until the problem has been resolved (e.g. no ink).

1148 ICONS OVERVIEW
Resource Status Icons

Media: The icon is followed by a name: There is a cassette in the tray but it is not loaded (not
active). However, it can be activated by Apogee. If the name is in bold, the cassette is loaded
(active).
Media: The icon is followed by a name: There is a cassette in the tray but it is not loaded (not
active). However, it cannot be activated by Apogee (manual intervention on the engine is
required).
Media: There is no cassette in the tray.
Media: There is an unknown problem with the tray.
Dedicated Resource linked uniquely to a specific device: This Resource is not shared between
other devices of the same type.
Apogee Archive Icons in

Windows Explorer
Archived Commercial job (.arch)
Archived Public Page Store job (.arch)
Apogee Ticket Icons in

Windows Explorer
Saved Commercial Job Ticket(.ajt)
Saved Commercial Hot Ticket(.aht)
Apogee Toolbar
Submit job or submit changes to a job.
Delete the selected item.
Edit job.
View <selected item> (Job Ticket Editor only).
Make Blank (page in Run List - Job Ticket Editor only).
Give priority to processing the selected job (Rush job).

ICONS OVERVIEW 1149
Hold job, or put device offline (System Overview).
Resume a job on hold, or put device online (System Overview).
Continue processing <selected item>.
Reject <selected item>.
Reprocess job from first.
Re-image <selected item>.
Enables the selected Hot Ticket (Hot Tickets window only).
Disables the selected Hot Ticket (Hot Tickets window only).
Display information about <selected item>.
Preview Palette Tools

Marquee tool. Allows you to draw a rectangle in the Preview window by clicking and drag-
ging. The ink values for the selected region are measured and displayed in the Inks palette.
Hand tool. Pans the image, allowing you to view a page that exceeds the size of the Preview
window. With this tool selected, click inside the Preview window and drag the image around.
Zoom tool. Zooms in to the next zoom level in the Preview window. You can zoom out by
holding down the Alt key. Alternatively, you can click and drag to zoom into a specified area.
Measure tool. Measures raster angles, and distances between the raster points. You can also
use it to calculate the line ruling of a separation.
Next tool: Displays the next side result (e.g. Cover Sig 1 Front > Cover Sig 1 Back > Cover Sig
2 Front > Cover Sig 2 Back etc.). If you hold down the ‘C’ key while clicking the tool, Apogee
displays the next sheet result (e.g. Cover Sig 1 Back > Cover Sig 2 Back > Cover Sig 3 Back).
Previous tool: Displays the previous side result. If you hold down the ‘C’ key while clicking
the tool, Apogee displays the previous sheet result.
Turn Sheet tool. If your results have 2 sides (front and back), Raster Preview can switch
between the two sides. Click this tool (Ctrl-T) to toggle the view (front or back). This tool is
disabled if the result only contains one side.
Info tool. Display information about the selected item.
Light Table tool. Displays or hides blended front and back views of your raster data. This fea-
ture only works on the front and backs of the same signature/page.

1150 ICONS OVERVIEW
Rule-Ups tool. Displays or hides additional layers of information on top of the Raster Preview
image. The Rule/ups palette contains a table which lists the layers you can display.
Rotate clockwise tool. Rotates the current view 90 degrees clockwise.
Rotate counterclockwise tool. Rotates the current view 90 degrees counterclockwise.
Flip vertical tool. Flips the current view vertically.
Flip horizontal tool. Flips the current view horizontally.
Invert tool. Inverts the current view (negative).
Color Managed tool. Activates color-managed raster preview. This allows you to preview the
rendered result using color management to convert the press color space to the monitor color
space (based on ICC profiles).
Show/Hide rulers tool. Shows/Hides ruler coordinates in the units set in your Preferences.
Show/Hide grid lines tool. Shows/Hides grid lines for every major and minor division of the
ruler. The default setting is specified in your Preferences.
Approve tool. Approves a previewed result. This tool is disabled if no soft preview has been
requested.
Reject tool. Rejects a previewed result. This tool is disabled if no soft preview has been
requested.
Other Buttons
Task Processor Settings lock.
Edit
Create New
Delete
Set as default
Duplicate
Export

ICONS OVERVIEW 1151
Import
Auto-fill (Versioning): Automatically fills the version table either with the names of the PDF
layers or the names of the documents in the Page Store.
Insert variable
Customer Contact
Approver
Uploader
Apogee Impose
Product View Tools
Press Sheet View button. Select a Press Sheet or Press Sheet side in the Press Sheet or Press
nodes and click this button to open the Press Sheet View and view the selected Press Sheet
side.
the default tool.
Split Assembly tool. Use this tool to split blocks in the Assembly.
Repeat tool. Use this tool to repeat selected components.
Auto Impose button. Click this button to perform the Auto Impose task, for example after rear-
ranging nodes or changing the properties of a Fold Sheet, Press Sheet or Press.
Rotate counterclockwise tool (only if Fold Sheet is selected). Rotates selected Fold Sheets 90
degrees counterclockwise on the Press Sheet.

1152 ICONS OVERVIEW
Rotate clockwise tool (only if Fold Sheet is selected). Rotates selected Fold Sheets 90 degrees
clockwise on the Press Sheet.
Flip Over tool (only if Fold Sheet is selected). Flips the front and back of the selected Fold
Sheet on the Press Sheet.
Shows/Hides the Inspector window
Shows/Hides the Mark Sets Inspector window.
Shows/Hide the Positioning palette
Submit button. Submits the job with the edited imposition.
Close button. In the imposition windows, saves your changes and closes the imposition win-
dow. Behavior is set in the Preferences.
Sheet View Tools

Product View button. Return to Product View from Press Sheet View.
the default tool.
Single Instance Selection tool. Use this pointer tool to select a single instance of marks
which are placed at various locations on the Press Sheet, or part of a compound mark.
View Options Palette button: shows/hides the View Options Palette
Marks Palette button: shows/hides the Marks Palette
Go to previous Press Sheet or web
Go to next Press Sheet or web
Turn Sheet button. In the Press Sheet View, click to view the other side of a Press Sheet.
Measurements. Use this tool to make measurements on the Press Sheet.
Clear Measurements (only activated if the sheet has measurements). Click to remove all mea-
surements displayed on the Press Sheet.
Submit button. In the Press Sheet View, closes the window and submits the job without
returning to the Product View.

ICONS OVERVIEW 1153
Page Icons
Pages not assigned to signature (grey outline)
Pages assigned to signature (black outline)
Shingling applied (black arrows)
No shingling applied
Bleed (thick grey border on bleed side)
Glue zones (blue strips indicate non-image areas)
No spine (unbound product)
Double-sided part (unbound product - Fold Sheet node)
Node Icons
The initial node definition has been overruled (yellow background if only gutters and/or mar-
gins have changed).
The node contains an error that needs to be resolved.
Apogee Impose - Mark

Types
Circle Mark: draws a circle with or without fill color
Collation Mark: stepped blocks with the signature number which are used to inspect the cor-
rect collation order of folded sheets
Cut Mark: a horizontal and a vertical line in the corners of a Fold Sheet to indicate the bound-
aries of the Fold Sheet and where it is to be cut
Cut-off Mark: lines at the cut-off between Web Production Schemes, on the left and right
sides of the web

1154 ICONS OVERVIEW
File Mark: places a specific EPS or PDF file as a mark
Fold Line: draws a set of vertical or horizontal lines that indicate where to fold the sheet
Fotoba Mark: draws horizontal and vertical lines to enable cutting with a Fotoba cutting
device.
Grommet Mark: draws sequential marks along the sides of an image or layout. These marks
are printed on the layout and indicate where reinforced eyelets can be produced.
Cutter Registration Mark: draws reference dots to enable cutting with X/Y cutting devices.
Line Mark: draws a line
Crop Mark: a horizontal and a vertical line to indicate where the page has to be cropped
Rectangular Mark: draws a rectangle with or without fill color
Registration Mark: draws a series of marks which are used to check that the registration of the
different printing colors is correct
Station Number Mark: indicates the station of an instance of a product, i.e. its position on the
sheet
Text Mark: prints the job name, order number, color name, etc. on the Press Sheet
Slit Mark: draws a line to indicate where a press sheet is to be cut in ribbons for web printing
Mark Set Conditions

Mark Set is always applied
Mark Set is only applied manually
Mark set is applied when all/some criteria are met
Mark set is applied partially (mark deleted manually for example)

ICONS OVERVIEW 1155
Part Types (Products tab)

Bound product
Cover part
Plain part
Insert part
Unbound, flat, single-sided product
Unbound, flat, double-sided product
Unbound, folded, single-sided product
Unbound, folded, double-sided product
Unbound product with different part types
Calendar product
Sign and Display product
Layout Editor and

Product Editor
Image Status
A cut path is present in the image or a path has been assigned as cut path.
The image is being edited.
Indicates that full-gamut color management is applied.
Indicates a preflight report has been generated for the image.
Image preview has been generated (gray) or is being processed (green).
Color adjustments (saturation, contrast, curves) have been made in Preview.

1156 ICONS OVERVIEW
Colors Inspector
The color will be printed/output (‘Print as’ check box selected).
The color will not be printed/output (‘Print as’ check box not selected).
The color is a process color or will be printed as a process color.
The color is a spot color, varnish or white.
The color is mapped to a color from a color book.
The color is taken from the application.
The color is mapped to a finishing operation.
The color is mapped to a custom color.
The color is mapped automatically as defined for the colors of the device.
The color is mapped to and depends on another color in the list.
Tools
Selection tool: To select a component or area and display its properties. This is
the default tool.
Single Instance Selection tool: To select a single instance of marks which are
placed at various locations, or part of a compound mark. In the Paths inspector:
selects a path and its anchor points.
Pan tool: To pan layouts in the Layout Editor.
Zoom tool: To zoom into a specific area of a layout.
Frame tool: To draw empty frames on a sheet.
View Options palette button: Shows/hides the View Options palette.
Marks palette button: Shows/hides the Marks palette.
(Licensed feature) Presets: To open the Presets dialog box.

ICONS OVERVIEW 1157
Crop image: Activates the crop mode to crop an image (Image inspector in the
Product Editor).
Split tool: Activates the Split tool to split an image into tiles (Tiling inspector in
the Product Editor).
Pen tool: Activates the Pen for drawing free-form paths on an image and add-
ing/deleting points of existing paths (Paths inspector in the Product Editor).
Ellipse Path tool: Activates the Ellipse Path tool to draw ellipse and circle paths
Rectangle Path tool: Activates the Rectangle Path tool to draw rectangle paths
Zoom slider with Zoom to fit and Zoom to maximum buttons, and drop-down
list with zoom presets
Sheet Layout
Unlocked sheet layout/frame
Locked sheet layout/frame.

1158 ICONS OVERVIEW

APPENDIX
D Context Menu Commands

This section lists the context menu commands.
NOTE: If a menu item is not available in a particular context, it is displayed as

grayed-out.
 Job List Context Menu Commands ............................................................ 1160

 Job List Filter Context Menu Commands ................................................. 1161
 Layout Editor ....................................................................................................... 1162
 Product Editor - Presets .................................................................................. 1163
 Hot Ticket List Context Menu Commands ............................................... 1164
 Page Store Context Menu Commands ...................................................... 1165
 Run List Context Menu Commands ........................................................... 1169
 Job Layout Context Menu Commands ...................................................... 1171
 Separations Context Menu Commands .................................................... 1174
 System Overview Context Menu Commands ......................................... 1176
 Activity Window Context Menu Commands ........................................... 1177
1159
1160 JOB LIST CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS
Job List Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking on items in the Job List.
The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Job Folder or Job.

New From Selected Opens the Job Ticket Editor with an empty Administration tab but
with the same plan, imposition, etc.
Save As... Allows you to save the job with a different name
Save As Template... Allows you the save the job as a Ticket Template.
Upload Document Allows you to add a file or a folder containing files to a job or Public
Page Store. When you upload a folder, Apogee uploads all files and
folders in that folder recursively. The uploaded folder appears as a
subfolder in the Page Store.
Invite PrintSphere Invites a collaborator to upload files for the job to the PrintSphere
Uploader cloud server. Only for a PrintSphere job.
Submit Changes Submits the changes you have made to a job.
Archive Job Saves the selected job items to file (.arch).
Export... • Job Dump - Similar to Archive Job, but only accessible by adminis-
trators for troubleshooting purposes (only for jobs, not for Hot
Tickets).
• Export Job Log - Exports the log file for the selected job.
• InkDrive - Exports the InkDrive files for the selected job (only
available when the job has InkDrive files).
• Imposition Layout - Exports the Imposition Layout and Marks files
for the selected job (only available when the job has received lay-
out information 'from Input').
Open in ProductionCen- Opens the selected job in the ProductionCenter web application.
ter
Open in Production Dash- Opens the selected job in the Production Dashboard web applica-
board tion
Delete Job Deletes the current job(s).
Edit Job Displays the selected job using the default editor (Job Ticket Editor
or Layout Editor), where you can modify it.
Edit Imposition Opens the Apogee Impose module to edit the imposition of the job.
Export Imposition Report Opens the Imposition Mock-up and Report dialog: see “Marks Pal-
ette” on page 421.
Duplicate Job Duplicates the selected job.
Select • All - Selects all jobs in the current view.
• None
Rush Job Upgrades the selected job to a Rush job.

CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS 1161

High priority, Normal pri- Changes the priority of the job as set in the Options tab to one of
ority, Low priority the three priorities.
Hold Job Suspends all processing of the selected job(s) after the current
activity for the items has been allowed to finish. This option is dis-
abled if all items are already on hold.
Resume Job Resumes processing of the selected job(s). This option is disabled if
all items are already running.
Restart Job Processing At Remakes all the existing job results which follow the selected point
in the Production Plan. You may want to re-render a job if you have
available
Enable Inputs Re-activates all input channels for the selected job(s). By default,
input channels are enabled. This option is disabled if all job(s) have
their inputs enabled.
Disable Inputs De-activates all input channels for the selected job(s). This option is
disabled if all job(s) have their inputs disabled.
Mark as Finished Marks the selected job as finished, aborting all current processing
and removing all outstanding tasks.
Send Cut File Sends the cut file of a layout job to the cutter.
Log for Job Opens a Log window for the selected job(s). You can open multiple
Log windows.
Problem Report for Job Opens a Problem Report window for the job. You can open multiple
Problem Report windows (PDF documents only).
Help Opens context-sensitive help for the currently selected item. If no
specific help is available for the selected item, then more general
context help is displayed.
Job List Filter Context Menu Commands

Save As... Allows you to create a new custom job filter from the initial Custom
Filter.
Edit Opens the Job Filter settings.
Rename Allows you to rename the selected custom job filter.
Duplicate Allows you to duplicate the selected custom job filter.
Delete Deletes the selected custom job filter.
Insert Divider Inserts a group divider under the last custom job filter.
Move Up/Down Moves the selected filter up or down in the list.

1162 JOB LIST FILTER CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS
Layout Editor
The context menu commands are explained in the relevant section about the
Layout Editor: see “Context Menus” on page 558.

Product Editor - Presets

The following commands are available in the Presets dialog by context-clicking
a preset in the list:

Apply Applies the selected image preset to the open image
Edit Preset Unlocks the presets so you can edit them; in this edit mode you can
clear or select the settings check boxes and update the preset to
match the settings of the current image; any changes you make to a
preset in edit mode are saved automatically
Rename Preset Lets you edit the name of the selected preset
Edit Description Places the cursor in the Description box of the selected preset
New Folder Creates a new folder where you can put new presets
New Job Preset Creates a new job preset
Duplicate Preset Duplicates the selected preset
Delete Preset Deletes the selected preset
Import Preset Opens a file browser where you can select a preset for importing
Edit Description Places the cursor in the Description box of the selected preset

1164 HOT TICKET LIST CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS
Hot Ticket List Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking on Hot Tickets in the Hot
Ticket List. The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you
context-click a Hot Ticket.

Save As... Allows you to save the ticket with a different name.
Save As Template... Allows you the save the ticket as a Ticket Template.
Export Hot Ticket PPD Create PPD for Hot Ticket - Allows you to create a PPD file for the
selected Hot Ticket.
Upload Document Allows you to add a file to a Hot Ticket.
Delete Hot Ticket Deletes the selected Hot Ticket.
Edit Hot Ticket Displays the selected Hot Ticket using the default editor, where you
can modify it.
Select • All - Selects all Hot Tickets in the current view.
• None
Enable Inputs Re-activates all input channels for the selected Hot Ticket(s). By
default, input channels are enabled. This option is disabled if all Hot
Ticket(s) have their inputs enabled.
Disable Inputs De-activates all input channels for the selected Hot Ticket(s). This
option is disabled if all Hot Ticket(s) have their inputs disabled. A
Hot Ticket cannot produce any jobs while disabled.
Log for Hot Ticket Opens a Log window for the selected Hot Ticket.

Page Store Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking on items in the Page Store.
The commands that you will see in the context menu depend on the item you
select (page, document, or folder).
Page Store Folder The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Page Store folder.

Export Folder From • Latest (Page Store) - Exports the latest version of the selected PDF
folder outside Apogee.
• <Task Processor name> - Exports a previous version of the
selected folder from a preceding Task Processor in the Production
Plan.
Delete Folder/Docu- Deletes the selected folder(s) / document(s) from the Page Store.
ments
Select • All - Selects all folders in the current view.
• None
Page Store The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Page Store document.
Document

1166 PAGE STORE CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS

Export Document From • Latest (Page Store) - Exports the latest version of the selected PDF
document outside Apogee, where the document can be edited,
and then imported back into Apogee.
selected PDF from a preceding Task Processor in the Production
Plan.
View Document From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Displays the latest version of the
selected document using the default viewer.
• <Task Processor name> - Displays a previous version of the
selected document from a preceding Task Processor in the Pro-
duction Plan.
You cannot edit the item.
Info for Document From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Opens an Info window for the
selected document(s) at the latest point in the Production Plan.
• <Task Processor name> - Opens an Info window for the selected
document(s) from a preceding Task Processor in the Production
Plan.
You can open multiple Info windows.
Delete Document Deletes the selected document(s).
Select • All - Selects all pages in the current view.
• None
Continue Document Continues all or part of a document that has stopped. The document
may have stopped because it has reached a hold Action in its Pro-
duction Plan, or because it has been aborted, rejected, or in error.
Reject Document Rejects the selected document(s). All processing will be stopped for
the rejected document(s).
Clear Rejected Status Removes the rejected status from a previously rejected document,
and restarts processing.
Restart Document Pro- First <Task Processor name> - Remakes all the existing job results
cessing At which follow the selected point in the Production Plan. You may
want to re-render a document if you have changed your resources
(new fonts, color books, etc.) or if you want to remake aborted
results, or remake output when no raster data is available
Preflight Report Generates a Preflight Report.

Page Store Page The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Page Store page.

Export Page From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Exports the latest version of the
selected page.
selected page from a preceding Task Processor in the Production
Plan.
View Page From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Displays the latest version of the
selected page using the default viewer.
• <Task Processor name> - Displays a previous version of the
Plan.
You cannot edit the pages.
Info for Page From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Opens an Info window for the
selected document(s) at the latest point in the Production Plan.
document(s) from a preceding Task Processor in the Production
Plan.
• None
Continue Page Continues a page that has stopped. The page may have stopped
because it has reached a hold Action in its Production Plan, or
because it has been aborted, rejected, or in error.
Reject Page Rejects the selected page(s). All processing will be stopped for the
rejected page(s).
Clear Rejected Status Removes the rejected status from a previously rejected page, and

1168 PAGE STORE CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS


Run List Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking on items in the Run List.
The commands that you will see in the context menu depend on the item you
select (page, placeholder, or imposition adjustment).
The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Run List page or placeholder.

selected page.
Plan.
View Page From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the
selected page from the last Task Processor which processed it.
• <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the selected page
from a preceding Task Processor in the Plan.
The results are displayed using the default viewer. You cannot edit
the page.
selected page(s) at the latest point in the Production Plan.
page(s) from a preceding Task Processor in the Production Plan.
Delete Pages Deletes the selected page (Ticket Editor only)
Delete Page Adjustment When you click a page adjustment icon, this deletes the associated
page adjustments only (Ticket Editor only)
• None
• Even Positions - Selects all even placeholders/pages
• Odd Positions - Selects all odd placeholders/pages
• Empty Positions - Selects all empty placeholders
• Size
Find • Page in Page Store- Highlights the corresponding page in the
Page Store.

1170 RUN LIST CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS

Page Adjustments • Offset By... - Allows you to adjust the offset of the selected page(s)
/ placeholder(s).
• Scale By... - Allows you to adjust the scale of the selected page(s)
/ placeholder(s).
page(s) / placeholder(s).
• View - Opens the Page Adjustments dialog box for the selected
page(s)/placeholder(s). If you are not editing the job, the Adjust-
ments dialog box is read-only.
• Clear - Clears all adjustments.
Placeholder • Insert... - Allows you to insert or append placeholders.
• Make Blank - Puts a blank page in the selected placeholder(s).
(Ticket Editor only)
Continue Page Continues all or part of a page that has stopped. The page may have
stopped because it has reached a hold Action in its Production Plan,
rejected page(s).
Extended Page Adjust- Extends the Adj column in the Run List to display extra icons (up to
ments 4 icons) which indicate specific page adjustments in the job.

Job Layout Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking on items in the Job Layout
pane. The commands that you will see in the context menu depend on the item
you select (flat or page in flat).
Flats The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Flat.

Export Flat From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Exports the latest version of the
selected flat.
selected flat from a preceding Task Processor in the Production
Plan.
View Flat From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the
selected flat from the last Task Processor which processed it.
• <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the selected flat
the flat.
Info for Flat From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Opens an Info window for the
selected flat(s) at the latest point in the Production Plan.
flat(s) from a preceding Task Processor in the Production Plan.
Select • Select All Flats - Selects all flats in the current view
• None
• Fronts - Selects all front sides when the view is set to “Fronts and
Backs”.
• Backs - Selects all back sides when the view is set to “Fronts and
Backs”.
to “Fronts and Backs”.
Continue Flat Continues all or part of a flat that has stopped. The flat may have
Reject Flat... Rejects the selected flat(s). All processing will be stopped for the
rejected flat(s).
Clear Rejected Status Removes the rejected status from a previously rejected flat, and
Discard Flat Prevents the selected flat(s) from being printed, without stopping
the rest of the job from being printed. Available only when the
items are waiting on a Hold action or when finished.

1172 JOB LAYOUT CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS

Include Flat Includes a discarded flat.
Re-render Flat Remakes all the existing job results which follow the selected point
in the Production Plan. You may want to re-render a flat if you have
available
Re-image Flat Remakes previously imaged raster data (Digital Film) on your output
devices. This feature is available only for flows that have an imaging
Re-export Flat Re-exports previously exported results (when resources have
changed or exported files have to be recreated).
Remake InkDrive for Flat Remakes InkDrive files for the selected flats.
Re-print Flat Remakes previously imaged raster data (Digital Film) on a digital
Pages The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Page.

selected page.
Plan.
View Page From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the
selected page from the last Task Processor which processed it.
• <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the selected page
the page.
selected page(s) at the latest point in the Production Plan.
page(s) from a preceding Task Processor in the Production Plan.
Delete Page (imposed Deletes the selected page.
pages only)


Select • Select All Pages- Selects all pages in the current view
• None
• Even Positions - Selects all even placeholders/pages
• Odd Positions - Selects all odd placeholders/pages
to “Fronts and Backs”.
Page Adjustments • Offset By... - Allows you to adjust the offset of the selected page(s).
(imposed pages only) • Scale By... - Allows you to adjust the scale of the selected page(s)
page(s)
• Edit/View - Opens the Adjustments dialog box for the selected
page(s). If you are not editing the job, the Adjustments dialog box
is read-only.
• Clear - Clears all adjustments.
Find • Page in Page Store- Switches to the Page Store and highlights the
corresponding page.
Placeholder • Make Blank - Puts a blank page in the selected placeholder(s).
Continue Page Continues all or part of a page that has stopped. The page may have
rejected page(s).
Discard Page Prevents the selected page(s) from being printed, without stopping
the rest of the job from being printed. Available only when the
items are waiting on a Hold action or when finished.
Include Page Includes a discarded page.
Re-render Page Remakes all the existing job results which follow the selected point
in the Production Plan. You may want to re-render a page if you
have changed your resources (new fonts, color books, etc.) or if you
want to remake aborted results, or remake output when no raster
data is available.
Re-image Page Remakes previously imaged raster data (Digital Film) on your output
Re-export Page Re-exports previously exported results (when resources have
Remake InkDrive for Remakes InkDrive files for the selected pages.
Page

1174 SEPARATIONS CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS
Separations Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking on separations in the
Separations pane. The following table lists the items that may be displayed when
you context-click a Separation.

Export Separation From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Exports the latest version of the
selected separation.
selected separation from a preceding Task Processor in the Pro-
duction Plan.
View Separation From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the
selected separation from the last Task Processor which processed
it.
• <Task Processor name> - Displays the results of the selected sep-
aration from a preceding Task Processor in the Plan.
the page.
Info for Separation From • Latest <Task Processor name> - Opens an Info window for the
selected separation(s) at the latest point in the Production Plan.
separation(s) from a preceding Task Processor in the Production
Plan.
Select • All - Selects all separations in the current view.
• None
Continue Separation Continues all or part of a separation that has stopped. The separa-
tion may have stopped because it has reached a hold Action in its
Production Plan, or because it has been aborted, rejected, or in
error.
Clear Rejected Status Removes the rejected status from a previously rejected separation,
and restarts processing.
Discard Separation Prevents the selected separation(s) from being printed, without
stopping the rest of the job from being printed. Available only when
the separations are waiting on a Hold action or when finished.
Include Separation Includes a discarded separation.
Re-render Separation Remakes all the existing separations which follow the selected
point in the Production Plan. You may want to re-render a separa-
tion if you have changed your resources (new fonts, color books,
etc.) or if you want to remake aborted results, or remake output
when no raster data is available
Re-image Separation Remakes previously imaged raster data (Digital Film) on your output


Re-export Separation Re-exports previously exported results (when resources have
Remake InkDrive for Sep- Remakes InkDrive files for the selected separations.
aration
Re-print Separation Remakes previously imaged raster data (Digital Film) on a digital

1176 SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS
System Overview Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking one of the Task Processors
or the Apogee System icon in the Hardware pane.
Task Processors The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
a Task Processor in the System Overview.

Export Output Device Device PPD...- Creates a PPD file for the selected output device.
PPD (Output Task Proces-
sors only)
Start Start a Task Processor
Stop Stops a Task Processor
Restart Stops the Task Processor and starts it again.
Put Online (Output Task Enables the scheduling of tasks for the selected Output Task Pro-
Processors only) cessor. This option is disabled if all Output Task Processors are
online.
Put Offline (Output Task Disables the scheduling of tasks for the selected Output Task Pro-
Processors only) cessor. This option is disabled if all Output Task Processors are
offline.
Configure Allows you to access the Configuration settings of the selected out-
put device. Administrator access level required,
Resources Allows you to quickly access the resources of the selected Task Pro-
cessor.
Activity for <selected Opens the Activity window for the selected Task Processor. For more
Task Processor> information, see “Monitoring your Task Processors” on page 616.
Log for <selected Task Opens a Log window for the selected Task Processor(s). You can
Processor> open multiple Log windows.
Apogee System The following table lists the items that may be displayed when you context-click
the Apogee System icon in the Hardware pane of the System Overview.


Log for Apogee System Opens a Log window for the Apogee System.
Export System Log Exports the System Log.
Activity Window Context Menu Commands

You can directly issue commands by context-clicking one of the tasks listed in the
Activity window.

Continue Tasks Continues all or part of a task that has stopped. The task may
have stopped because it has reached a hold Action in its Pro-
duction Plan, or because it has been aborted, rejected, or in
error.
Hold Tasks Puts the selected task(s) on hold.
Help Opens context-sensitive help for the currently selected item. If
no specific help is available for the selected item, then more
general context help is displayed.

1178 SYSTEM OVERVIEW CONTEXT MENU COMMANDS

APPENDIX
E Glossary
This glossary defines many of the terms used in this document with which the
user may not be familiar.
Action There are 2 types of Actions: Each book signature consists of the
Flow Control Actions control the pages for both the front and the back
flow of job data through a Produc- of the press sheet. Jobs with more
tion Plan; Result Actions keep track pages than can print on a single
of job results in the processing chain. press sheet are comprised of many
book signatures.
Apogee System The Apogee System
manages all data and processing Bottling The adjustment required to
functionality, and runs on one or compensate for the undesired
more dedicated Windows servers. rotation of pages as a result of
folding a press sheet to obtain a
Archive A job which has been saved signature.
as a .arch file. In the Job Ticket
Options you can define which parts Calibration The process of calculating
of the job are archived (input files, and compensating for irregularities
marked results, all results, imposi- in the output of a press or imaging
tion resources, Preflight profiles, system due to dot gain. Dot gain
etc.). occurs when the ink dots that make
up a printed image are larger (for
Assembly The arrangement of signa- example, due to spreading on paper)
tures which are bound to create a than in the halftone screen.
finished printed product.
CID Font The CID-keyed font file
Bleed Margin The distance that a format is designed for fonts with
printed image extends beyond the large character sets, and can be used
trim size of a page, in order to avoid with PostScript printing software. It
white space at the edges of pages in is the ideal format for Chinese,
the trimmed product. Japanese, or Korean fonts, and may
also be used for Roman fonts with
Binding Style The method used to very large character sets. “CID”
bind the signatures of a printed refers to the Character ID numbers
product. See Saddle Stitch, Perfect that are used to index and access the
Bound, Come and Go, Cut and Stack, characters in the font.
Flat Work, Mechanical.
CIELab CIELab is the color space that
Book Signature A section of a book ICC Profiles and CMMs often use as
formed by folding and trimming a an intermediary space when
Press Sheet with 4 or more pages. converting colors. So a monitor to
1179
GLOSSARY 1180
printer match translates colors from calibrated monitor environment and

the monitor’s space (RGB) into Lab correctly configured monitor
and then into the printer's color profile, contract-proofing quality
space (CMYK for example). The L should be achieved.
component is the lightness of the
color. The a component is the red/ Color Separation In traditional
green scale (+a is red, -a is green) prepress, the separation of a color
The b component is the blue/yellow image into four layers corre-
scale (+b is yellow, -b is blue). sponding to the four process colors
(CMYK) used in process printing.
Client The Apogee Client application
allows you to access and control the Come and Go A term used to refer to
Apogee System remotely from any a binding style whereby the bound
PC on the network. signature contains two complete
products; the bound signature is
CMYK Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and subsequently cut in two.
Black - the standard ink colors used
in four-color printing. CMYK is a Composite A term used to refer to
color model based on the subtractive multi-color files (i.e. composite
color theory, and is used by profes- printing).
sional printers to reproduce color
using offset lithography. Copy Dot High resolution scanning
software which produces files
Coated Stock Any paper that has a suitable for input to the Apogee
mineral coating applied after the System.
paper is made, giving the paper a
smoother finish. CPSI Configurable PostScript
Interpreter.
Color Bar A color test strip that is
printed on the waste portion of a Creep The undesired result of the
press sheet. It allows a pressman to nesting of pages inside each other
determine the quality of the printed whereby the inside pages extend
material relative to ink density, slightly beyond the outside pages.
registration and dot gain. It also
includes the Star Target, which is a Crop Marks Short vertical and
similar system designed to detect horizontal lines, printed on an
ink problems. output medium which is larger than
the page size of a document, to
Color-managed Display Proofing indicate the finished page area.
Displays the job data on-screen in
Raster Preview. However, in this CSA A Color Space Array is the
case you have a preview of the PostScript profile for a color. The
rendered result using color manage- CSA has the information to translate
ment to convert the press color the color data from the origin space
space to the monitor color space to the XYZ space. It is either inserted
based on ICC profiles. With a into the PostScript print stream

GLOSSARY 1181
when the image is printed or is Density The degree of tone, weight

resident in an EPS image. CSA colors of darkness or color within a photo
are referred to as device-indepen- or reproduction; measurable by the
dent, or CIEBased colors. densitometer.
CSR Customer Service Representa- Digital Film The results of documents

tive: The person who works for a that have been rendered by the
print service provider and who is the Apogee System. This high resolution
main point of contact for one or Digital Film can be previewed as 1-
more customers of the print service bit data (where each raster point is
provider. represented by a single display
pixel), and can be output directly to
CtF Computer-to-Film: An analog a platesetter.
graphical workflow solution in
which the rendered data is sent first Display Resolution The actual
to an imagesetter to produce films. dimensions of the area (expressed in
These films are then used to pixels x pixels), that the operating
generate the plates for printing. system’s display driver is set to.
Several display resolutions may be
CtP Computer-to-Plate: A fully available (e.g. 1920 x 1080, 1680 x
digital graphical workflow solution 1050, 1344 x 800).
in which no film is produced.
Instead “Digital Film” is sent directly Dot The smallest individual element
from the Render Task Processor to of a halftone.
the platesetter.
Dot for Dot Proofing Allows you to
Cut and Stack A term used to refer to print “screened” proofs. These are
a binding style whereby print sheets different from the normal error-
are cut and the halves are stacked to diffused proofs (which place ink
create a product. droplets anywhere in the image).
Screened proofs can only place ink
DCS Desktop Color Separation. This droplets where the dots are, which
is essentially an enhancement to the means more ink is applied to a small
EPS definition for pictures that can area. These small areas (the dots)
hold the four-color separations of an need to be color managed to
image in one file or in 5 separate produce the correct color. Dot for
PostScript files. dot processing should only be done
on 7+ color pigment proofers.
Dead cut A single cut that separates
adjacent elements on the sheet of an Dot Gain Terms to describe the
unbound job. occurrence whereby dots are
printing larger than they should.
Densitometer An optical device used
by printers and photographers to Dot Pitch The distance between two
measure and control the density of adjacent hardware pixels. The dot
color. pitch is the inverse of the Display

GLOSSARY 1182
Hardware Resolution (e.g., 0.258 Flatten The Flatten operation

mm corresponds to approximately ‘flattens’ multi-layered images, and
98 dpi). converts layers that contain trans-
parent objects into layers without
Downsampling The Normalize Task transparent objects.
Processor can downsample high-
resolution bitmap images to reduce Flat Work A term used to refer to a
file size. Downsampling reduces the binding style whereby print sheets
number of pixels in a file by do not have to be folded to create a
averaging the color of pixels in a product.
sample area and replacing that area
with one pixel of the averaged color. Flow A sequence of components
(Task Processors and Actions) in a
DQS Digital Quick Strip. In this Production Plan. A Production Plan
mode, Apogee creates and renders has at least one Main processing
the components of a layout flow, but can include as many
separately so these components can additional flows as you require.
be replaced without re-rendering Each flow leads to a unique output
everything. This approach keeps device.
your page workflow independent of
imposition templates. Font A set of letters, numbers,
punctuation marks, and symbols
Dynamic Resubmit After you edit and that share a unified design. The
submit a job, Apogee will automati- design is called a typeface.
cally determine which results need
to be reproduced, and will process Font Outlining Missing or incorrect
them accordingly. fonts often cause problems for
prepress operators. The font
Elliptical Dot Halftone screens in outlining feature allows even
which the dots are actually encrypted and protected fonts to be
elongated to produce improved included in the normalized PDF.
middle tones.
Foot to Foot Imposition layout with
EPS Encapsulated PostScript: A the bottom of the pages arranged
standard format for a drawing, against the bottom of other pages.
image, or complete page layout,
allowing it to be placed into other FTP File Transfer Protocol. One of
documents. EPS files normally the standard protocols defined for
include a low resolution screen use on a TCP/IP network.
preview
Ganging The bundling of two or
Flat A sheet of film used to expose more different printing projects on
one printing plate. A flat may be the same media.
either a front signature or a back
signature. Generic Devices These devices
process files for imaging on non-

GLOSSARY 1183
Agfa physical output devices, Hi-Fi Color Any process that

without being directly connected to increases the color gamut of an
them. Generic devices can be used output imaging device (printer).
for testing or demo purposes. For Usually refers to adding extra inks
example, they can emulate the and plates to the traditional CMYK
timing of a physical output device set to improve the color gamut of
without producing real output files. offset lithography.
Grayscale Shades of gray that range Hot Folder An input channel used for
from black to white. file-based input. This type of input is
based on dragging files to specific
Grayscale Image A single-channel folders. Apogee polls all configured
image consisting of levels of gray Hot Folders, and automatically picks
(up to 256 levels of gray with 8 bits up and processes the documents
of data per pixel). that are dropped in them.
Gripper Edge The grippers of the Hot Ticket Hot Tickets automate the
printing press move the paper job creation process, creating
through the press by holding onto multiple jobs on demand. When you
the leading edge of the sheet; this send a document to a Hot Ticket
edge is the gripper edge. input channel, the Hot Ticket
creates a new job (by combining a
Halftone The reproduction of a copy of its ticket with the input
continuous-tone image, which is document), and automatically
made by using a screen that breaks submits it to the Apogee System. No
the image into various size dots. further user intervention is
required.
Halftone Screen Traditionally,
continuous-tone art (such as a ICC Profile The International Color
photograph) is reproduced by Consortium was founded to create
photographing the original artwork an open, vendor-independent,
through a crossline or contact cross-platform standard for color
screen. The resulting halftone image management. ICC Profiles are
is composed of a matrix of dots, standards for describing the color
ellipses, squares, or lines of various characterizations of different
sizes that can be reproduced via devices.
offset lithography.
Imagesetter A high-resolution
Head Margin from the top of a page printer used to prepare high-quality
to the type area. page art on paper or film (usually at
resolutions between 1,200 and
Head to head Imposition layout with 5,000 dots per inch).
the top of the pages arranged
against the top of other pages. Imposition The arrangement of
pages on the press sheet so that
when folded the pages read consec-

GLOSSARY 1184
utively. How you arrange the pages with one or more unique input
on the sheet depends on the sizes of channels (Hot Folders, AppleTalk
the press sheet and the pages, and Channels, etc.).
how the job will be folded and
bound. Jog A term used in binding to refer to
the evening up of stacked pages to
InkDrive File This file contains low- prepare them for binding.
resolution images to inform the
Press operator how much ink he can Keep Results By default, when a
use for the print job. Task Processor passes on its results,
it does not retain a copy of them.
Ink Set Contains the color specifica- However, the Keep Result Action
tions for the process colors of the instructs Apogee to keep this Task
used color space. Euro, Swop, Toyo Processor’s results. This ensures that
and Dic are some examples of Ink these intermediate results are saved
Sets. They all use the standard and kept on the system.
CMYK color space.
Lay An indication of how a press
Input Channel A channel through sheet is to be fed into a press.
which you can input your
documents for processing by Apogee Lay edge The edge of the press sheet
(e.g. Hot Folder). that is fed into a press. See also
Gripper Edge.
JDF JDF (Job Definition Format)
technology is an extensible, XML- Layout job A job that’s created using
based format based on Adobe's the Layout Editor.
Portable Job Ticket Format (PJTF),
providing compatibility with a Linearization This is a type of calibra-
greater variety of job creation utili- tion, especially used for
ties. Apogee can import JDF files imagesetters and platesetters.
generated by Apogee Series3, or Through linearization, you can
3rd-party applications, and convert adjust (linearize) the Stimuli values
them to Apogee Job Tickets. Apogee so that they equal the Wanted values
interprets JDF instructions for end- during output. Unlike Calibration,
to-end job ticket specification, where the curve is not necessarily
streamlining print production from linear.
creation to delivery.
LPR LPR/LPD is the printing method
Job Ticket Job Tickets define how the most commonly used in TCP/IP
pages of a single job are to be assem- networks. The LPR/LPD protocol is
bled, the processing features to be broken into two parts, LPR and LPD.
used (imposition, separation, LPR (Line Printer Request) is the
trapping, overprinting, rasteriza- client part of the protocol that
tion, etc.), and the output device to submits the print request. LPD (Line
which the rendered job will be sent. Printer Daemon) is the server part
A Job Ticket is always associated

GLOSSARY 1185
that receives and processes the sheets may be printed on different

request. presses, and so on.
Mechanical A term used to refer to a Nesting A type of imposition which

binding style whereby spiral, coils, optimizes the use of media.
rings, etc. are used to bind the signa-
tures of a product together. Normalize Convert PostScript, EPS or
PDF-files to standardized or
Milestone A Milestone Action passes “normalized” PDF files. This process
on the intermediate job results from generates a PDF file that is suitable
the associated Task Processor to the for reliable high-end prepress
next Task Processor in the flow production.
without interruption. However, a
notification is generated if the Opaque Ink Ink that completely
associated Task Processor does not covers any ink under itself.
deliver all intermediate job results
by a predefined date and time. OPI Open Prepress Interface. A speci-
fication that describes how a
MIME Multipurpose Internet Mail document refers to external images
Extensions. An Internet standard (low or medium resolution) without
which allows transfer of binary files actually including them in a
(word-processing documents, document. At print time, an OPI
spread sheets, images, sounds, etc.) server replaces these low or medium
between any compliant mailers. resolution images by their high-
resolution counterparts.
Milling A term used in the binding
process that refers to preparing the Output Device A hardware device
spine edge of folded signatures so that writes raster data onto media
the glue has a firmer grip on the such as film, plate or paper. There
pages. are two types of output devices:
Generic (non-physical) output
Moiré An undesirable halftone devices and physical output devices.
pattern produced by the incorrect A typical output device may be a
angles of overprinting halftone printer, sign and display device,
screens. proofer, platesetter, or imagesetter.
Multi-part job This type of job Overprinting A printing technique

typically comprises a number of where a darker color prints on top of
sections (cover, editorial, sports a lighter color (i.e. black text on a
section, etc.) each with different light colored background), thus
properties (paper type, color or eliminating the need for trapping.
B&W, binding style, etc.). Different
signatures may be combined onto a Overfold A small flap on one of the
single sheet, separations may be sides of a folded signature which is
combined on a single plate, different used by the stitching machine to
grasp the signature.

GLOSSARY 1186
Packaging Job A job that uses a CAD Perfecting Press A printing press
layout and which is prepared in the than can print both sides of a press
Layout Editor. sheet at once.
Parameter Set Each Task Processor is Pica A typesetting unit of measure-

installed with initial settings that are ment equaling 1/6th of an inch.
automatically assigned by Apogee,
and cannot be changed or deleted. PJTF Imposition is the arrangement
However, you can define additional of pages on the press sheet so that
groups of settings based on the the pages can be correctly folded
initial settings, and save them under and read consecutively. How you
different names. These are referred arrange the pages on the sheet
to as Parameter Sets. depends on the sizes of the press
sheet and the pages, and how the job
PDF Portable Document Format. A will be folded and bound. All
file format used to describe cross- imposition information can be
platform documents which are gathered in one PJTF file (Portable
created using Adobe Acrobat Job Ticket Format). The PJTF file
Exchange or Distiller, and which can defines the complete imposition for
be viewed on-screen and printed, your job.
using Adobe Acrobat Reader.
Placeholder A reserved space within
PDF Job Both job ticket information a job ticket in which you can place
and the referenced pages can be one page of a document, or a blank
saved in a single composite PDF file, page.
referred to as a PDF Job. When a
PDF job is opened, the embedded Plane A single separation in a color
job ticket references point no longer image.
to local PDF files, but to the PDF job
itself. You can then specify the Platesetter A high-output computer-
necessary processing and output to-plate imaging system, such as the
parameters, and submit the job for Agfa Galileo, which produces full-
processing. page images from computer directly
onto plate, ready for offset printing.
Perfect Bound A term used to
describe the binding process where Point A basic unit of typographic
the signatures of a book are held measurement. A point is approxi-
together by a flexible adhesive. mately equal to 1/72 of an inch.
Perfecting A workstyle whereby both PostScript The language developed

sides of a press sheet are printed in a originally by Adobe to communicate
single pass through the press. See high-level graphic information to
also Perfecting Press digital laser printers. PostScript
expresses complex digital graphics
in a device-independent manner.
Powerful typesetting features are

GLOSSARY 1187
built into the language for sophisti- purchasing the services of a print
cated handling of letter forms and service provider and as such is the
graphics. customer of the print service
provider.
PPD PostScript Printer Description:
A readable, machine-parsable text Print Center Printing companies or
file that provides a uniform other service providers belonging to
approach to using the special the same organization and that can
features of devices that contain use Apogee independently from
PostScript interpreters. These each other.
features include different page sizes,
different methods of paper and film Print Service Provider An organiza-
handling, memory size, font avail- tion that provides printing and
ability, duplex printing and stapling. related services, also referred to as a
All devices do not have the same set printer or printing company.
of features, and even devices with
the same features do not necessarily PrintSphere A cloud service hosted
invoke those features in the same by Agfa Graphics that allows easy
way. The PPD file contains the file transfer between the different
PostScript language code to invoke collaborators of a job
each feature.
Private Page Store The Page Store is
Preflight The process of checking a a repository of pages available for a
PDF document against various single job. When you input
criteria to ensure that the document documents to Apogee, the
meets all the requirements for document pages are stored in the
output or publication. Typically, the Private Page Store associated with
criteria vary depending on the the job input channel you selected.
output or publishing process.
Process Color Any color (except
Preflight Profile A set of criteria cyan, magenta, yellow, black, white,
matching the requirements of a and certain Pantone colors) can be
particular output or publishing specified as spot colors or process
process. colors When separations are
printed, all process colors on a page
Pre-separated A pre-separated PDF are broken down into their cyan,
or PostScript file contains a separate magenta, yellow, and black compo-
plate for each color in the document. nents, each of which is printed on its
A standard process color job would own separation plate. When
have four plates (pages) containing combined during offset printing, the
just the color information for each process colors can reproduce full-
color of CMYK. For spot colors, there color page art.
is a page for each spot color.
Product A book, magazine, brochure,
Print Buyer The person in an organi- flyer, etc. that a print-buyer wants a
zation who is responsible for printer to produce.

GLOSSARY 1188
Production Plan A series of compo- tions, which help align the

nents (Task Processors and Actions) overlaying printing plates.
linked together to form one or more
processing flows. These components Remote Proofer Controller The RPC
can be configured to define exactly Task Processor provides a low-cost
how jobs are to be input, processed, proofing solution for customers
and output. working off-site. These customers
require only an Agfa proofing device
Proof A set of job results produced and the RPC software package to
before the final results are output to print proofs. The prepress shop,
a plate- or imagesetter. This allows equipped with a full Apogee System,
you to verify and correct different creates and exports the RPC files.
aspects of a job before submitting it These files are then sent to the
to press. In Apogee, you can remote site, where they are
generate a page proof, an imposition imported into the customer's RPC
proof, or a production proof. application
Proofer A high-resolution printer Render A Render Task Processor

(such as the Sherpa Proofer) for converts a PostScript or PDF
printing hard-copy color proofs. document into a matrix of dots,
ready for output to a specific output
Public Page Store A repository of device such as an imagesetter, plate-
pages available for all jobs. To input setter, proofer, or color printer.
documents to a Public Page Store,
you must use an input channel that Render Resolution The ratio of pixels
was configured using a blank Page per inch that the Render Task
Store job template. Processor uses when generating an
image (expressed in dpi).
Punch Calibration This allows
Apogee to calculate the exact Resolution A measure of the fineness
position of the imagesetter punches of spatial detail that a device can
in order to ensure the correct record or produce. The higher the
positioning of the printed image on resolution, the finer the detail.
the output media. Resolution is expressed in elements
per unit length; for example, pixels
QMS X Agfa’s Quality Management per inch (ppi) for scanners and
Software ensures an identical tonal monitors (refer also to dpi).
behavior for the different Sherpas,
and verifies the output accuracy. Resource A collection of objects
This guarantees the same output (such as fonts, preflight profiles, or
quality for every Sherpa model. calibration curves) that are required
by selected devices or Task Proces-
Registration Marks Reference marks sors. By default, Apogee provides
that appear on camera-ready art, you with some basic resources for
generally for CMYK color separa- each of the available Resource

GLOSSARY 1189
categories. You can also add your A rush job is processed as soon as
own resources to those supplied. Apogee has finished processing the
current job.
Result A result is the tangible output
that is produced by a Task Processor Saddle Stitch The binding of
component. It can be a document booklets or other printed materials
(PDF, TIFF or other file) or an image by stapling the pages on the folded
on a piece of film, plate or paper. A spine; also called saddle wire.
result can be intermediate or final. A
final result is the result produced by Screening The conversion of contin-
the last component in the Produc- uous-tone images to halftone dots.
tion Plan flow. All other results are The resulting images are Bitmap
intermediate; they are passed from files ready to be sent to an output
one component to another; and can device.
be deleted when no longer required.
Screen Angles The angles at which
RGB Red, Green, Blue Refers to the halftone screens are placed in
primary colors, namely Red, Green, relation to one another.
Blue, in the additive color model.
The RGB model is used in color Screen Font A bitmap representation
televisions, monitors, scanners, and of a font that is used to display the
color film recorders. characters on-screen.
Rule-up A press sheet with rules to Screen Frequency The density of dots
indicate the various components on the halftone screen, commonly
such as the imposed pages, the fold measured in lines per inch (also
sheet, bleed area, etc. known as screen ruling).
Run List A Run List determines which Screen Ruling A measurement

pages of a job will be processed. If equaling the number of lines or dots
you insert a Run List in your Produc- per inch on a halftone screen.
tion Plan, a list of placeholders
appears in the Pages tab. You can Seamless Printing used in packaging
then select PDF pages from the Page jobs for printing a repetitive design,
Store and drag them across to the as in wallpaper or gift wrapping
Run List. Not all placeholders need paper. These are usually printed in
to be filled. A placeholder can be flexo.
empty, or can contain a blank page.
Every Job Ticket needs a Run List Separation Before an image can be
whereas a Hot Ticket can contain output via an output device, it is split
one, but it is not necessary. up into separation colors. The most
common used separation colors are
Rush Job You can upgrade any job in Cyan, Magenta, Yellow and Black
the Job List to a “rush” job. This puts (CMYK). When combining these
the job to the top of the queue of jobs separations, the Press produces the
waiting to be processed by Apogee. final image.

GLOSSARY 1190
Server In the context of Apogee, this Spot Color Any color (except cyan,
is the Windows 2003/2008 Server magenta, yellow, black, white, and
on which the Apogee System is certain Pantone colors) can be speci-
running (represented by the 2nd fied as spot colors or process colors.
icon in the System Overview When separations are printed, each
window). In future releases, you spot color on a page is printed onto
will be able to deploy the Apogee its own separation plate. In contrast,
System over several Servers. process colors are broken down into
their cyan, magenta, yellow, and
Sheetwise A workstyle whereby a black components, each of which is
print sheet has different content on printed on its own separation plate.
the front and back sides. The sheets
are turned in such a way that the Task Processor Task Processors are
gripper edge is kept at the same side. software components that perform
one or more tasks (specified by the
Shingling An adjustment applied to Ticket), such as input via Hot Folder,
template pages and jobs to compen- Normalization, Preflight, Trapping,
sate for the creep that occurs when rendering, etc. A sequence of Task
signatures are folded and nested Processors can be linked together to
inside each other. form a Production Plan.
Signature See Book Signature. TCP/IP Transmission Control

Protocol / Internet Protocol: This is
Simulation This is a type of calibra- a communications “language”
tion which you can use to simulate which is used to enable two different
or test different types of output computers to exchange data over a
results. You can for instance network, particularly over the
purposely use a non-linear curve to Internet.
obtain a certain dot gain, or attempt
other special effects. There are no TIFF Tagged Image File Format: This
Measured values for Simulation. is a standard file format used for
The curve is solely based on Wanted exchanging bitmapped images
values (i.e. the desired curve). between applications or platforms.
SISR Smart Input Space Recognition. Trapping A printing technique where

adjoining colors are made to overlap
Soft Proofing This method does not slightly to compensate for misregis-
physically output the proof to a tration on the printing press. Usually
printer. Instead, the job data is the darker color is used to define the
displayed on-screen. Raster or PDF edges of an element while the
soft proofs show trapping and lighter color spreads into it.
overprint information. These can be
sent to customers and verified using Type area Area within the margins of
Acrobat or Photoshop. a page.

GLOSSARY 1191
Versioning Allows you to create jobs press. The physical deformation

which contain several different occurs as the paper absorbs ink and
versions, typically for some or all of water, and is accelerated with
the text (for example, using pressure and tension.
different languages or prices), and
to choose the optimal set of plates to Wide-Format Job A job prepared for a
be made. If, for example, you want a wide-format printing device such
to publish a brochure in six different as used for sign and display printing.
languages, you can include the
Versioning Task Processor in your Work And Tumble A workstyle
Production Plan, and then print whereby a press sheet has the same
several different language versions content on the front and back sides.
of the brochure using a single job. The sheets are turned in such a way
The basic Production Plan is that the gripper edge is at the
straightforward, using Versioning opposite side.
instead of a Run List Task Processor.
Work And Turn A workstyle whereby
VLF Very Large Format platesetter, a press sheet has the same content
such as the Agfa Xcalibur, which can on the front and back sides. The
produce plate sizes up to 80 x 58” sheets are turned in such a way that
(2030 x 1475mm). the gripper edge is kept at the same
side.
Web browser Software for
navigating and viewing web Workstyle A term that refers to how
documents. print sheets are printed on a press;
see also Sheetwise, Work And Turn,
Web Growth The deformation Work And Tumble, Perfecting.
(stretch) of the paper as it is printed
on the various color units on a web

1192 GLOSSARY

Index
Symbols adjusting schedule 209
Run List page assembly
$ 1101 imposition 223 definition 1179
adjustment icons 180 auto center 181
A Administration tab 280 auto-fit, fitting options 502
aborting tasks 621 settings 280 automatic
Accuset 784 viewing 170 archiving schedule 209
Actions 48 After Hours 321 job deletion 204
->After Hours 321 settings 322 log on at start up 91
->Archive Results 322 Agfa page placement 759,
->Collect for imagesetters 784 772
Output 319 platesetters 784 auto-select maps
->Discard 310 sign and display 857 calibration 902
->Hard Copy Proof 317 Apogee Impose 365 creating 1069
->Keep Results 322 Apogee Prepress deleting 1070
->Milestone 324 definition 34 editing 1070
->Notify 323 Apogee Prepress Client linearization 958
->Soft Proof 316 definition 1180 using 1069
->Wait for Results 318 description 34 Avantra 784
->Web Proof 314 menus 66
adding 343, 344 navigation bar 79 B
definition 1179 toolbar 78
workflow 38 binding style
flow control 310 come and go 1180
result 309 Apogee Prepress menu
keyboard cut and stack 1181
tab 309 definition 1179
thumbnail shortcuts 1118
Apogee Prepress System flat work 1182
indicators 187 mechanical 1185
using 349 configuration 625
definition 1179 perfect bound 1186
Activity saddle-stitched 1189
context menus 1177 icon 611
settings 625 blank pages
Indicator 79 adding to
pane 183 Apogee StoreFront 642
approving placeholders 222
toolbar 620 inserting in Run
window layout 618 jobs 131
rejected items 132 List 221, 222
adding bleed margin
flow control actions 343 archive
definition 1179 definition 1179
pages to Run List 218 book signature
result actions 344 icons in Explorer 207
importing 208 definition 1179
screens to ruling books
maps 943 Archive Result 322
archiving color 534, 736
spot colors 738 Boot Resources 890
systems 61 job manually 207
jobs 207, 629 border mark sets
Task Processors to creating 897
plan 340 marking 287
managing 897
1193
INDEX 1194
Borders 891, 896 Collect for Output 319 consistency

mark editor 892 settings 320 Hot Ticket/
overview 892 Color Template 270
bottling books 534, 736 Content Profiles 912
definition 1179 converting 733 overview 912
braces 1101 managing in color context menus 1159
browsing books 908 Activity window 1177
results 110 mapping 737 Hot Ticket List 1164
policy 732 Job Layout 1171
C color bar Job List 1160
definition 1180 Job List filter 1161
Calibration Color Books 904 Page Store 1165
auto-select maps 902 color editor 906 Run List 1169
creating a table 1078 creating 907 Separations 1174
creating curves 902 editor 904 System Overview 1176
Curve Editor 1080 importing 908 continuing
curves 901 managing colors 908 aborted, rejected, error
definition 1074, 1179 overview 904 results 199
editor 1076, 1082 renaming 907 jobs 197
fallback 902 color exceptions multiple results 200
settings 901 creating 909 results waiting on an
stimuli selection 1078 deleting 910 Action 198
Table options 1080 editing 909 Contrast Adjustment
wanted and measured color separation creating 913
values 1079 definition 1180 Control menu 70
changing Color Spaces 911 converting
screen angles 943 color-managed colors 733
channel display proof 52 copy dot
disabling 205 display proof definition 1180
enabling 206 definition 1180 copying documents 217
enabling preview 92, 123 corner fold indicators
automatically 206 come and go thumbnails 191
checking definition 1180 CPSI
Hot Ticket/Template comments 281 definition 1180
consistency 270 components create date column 143,
ink coverage 118, 119 deleting 345 261
screen angles 120 composite create versions
CID fonts definition 1180 assistant 226
definition 1179 document 179 creating
CIELab page 179 a new ticket 337
definition 1179 Conditional 698 auto-select maps 1069
clearing Decision settings 698 border mark sets 897
rejected results 242 configuration calibration curves 902
Client Apogee Prepress color books 907
starting 60 System 625 color exceptions 909
closing Task Processor 47, 663 contrast adjustment
pages for preview 109 connectors curves 913
CMYK data-in 341 curves adjustment 915
definition 1180 data-out 341 ink sets 951
coated stock Task Processor 341 jobs 44
definition 1180

INDEX 1195
linearization curves 956 default settings 658

main flow 343 parameter sets 664 Display 821
multiple flows 345 defining image settings 822
Named Pipe printer 356 page placement output settings 823
output sizes 1020 rules 761 display resolution
parameter sets 664 deleting definition 1181
PPD files 615 auto-select maps 1070 displaying
PPD for Hot Ticket 269 color exceptions 910 pages 214
Public Page Store 352 components from documents
punch calibration 1020 plan 345 deleting 216
Resources 667 Hot Tickets 269 inputting 354
ruling maps 942 jobs 202, 630 dot
Run List rules 760 jobs (automated) 204 definition 1181
simulation curves 1050 jobs permanently 203 dot gain
storage sets 661 marking for 288 definition 1181
TCP/IP printer 359 Page Store dot pitch
creep documents 216 definition 1181
definition 1180 parameter sets 664 dot-for-dot proofing 702
face 1049 Public Page Store 205 definition 1181
head/foot 1049 Public Page Store downsampling
critical messages 86 documents 216 definition 1182
crop marks punch calibration 1021 DQS 191
definition 1180 Resources 667 definition 1182
CSA 714 Run List rules 760 dumping
CSR spot color angles 945 jobs 209
definition 1181 spot colors 739 duplicating
CtF/CtP storage sets 661 jobs 201
definitions 1181 systems 61 pages in Run List 220,
Curve Editor densitometer 221
calibration 1080 definition 1181 parameter sets 664
Curves Adjustment density dynamic resubmit
creating 915 definition 1181 definition 1182
custom job filter Device Link Profiles 913
create 149 overview 917, 1041, E
delete 150 1052
duplicate 150 Device Screens 919 Edit menu 68
edit 150 Digital Film keyboard
rename 150 definition 1181 shortcuts 1119, 1120
customer 281, 529 proof 51, 821 editing
customer contact 281, 529 Digital Film Proof 701 auto-select maps 1070
Cut & Stack 380 settings 701 calibration 1076, 1082
cut and stack Digital Step&Repeat color exceptions 909
definition 1181 settings 704 colors 906
impose 380 disabling ink sets 950, 951
input channel 205 linearization 1077
D Discard 310 media (imagesetters/
settings 311 platesetters) 1008
DCS discarding output sizes 1020
definition 1181 results 242 parameter sets 664
dead cut disk storage 657 Preferences (Raster
definition 1181 Preview) 136

INDEX 1196
punch calibration 1020 viewing 110 definition 1183

Resources 667 flat work grayscale image
Run List rules 761 definition 1182 definition 1183
simulation curves 1051 flats grid
spot colors 738 definition 1182 showing/hiding in
storage sets 661 previewing 108 preview 117
tickets 338 thumbnail labels 192 gripper edge
elliptical dot thumbnails 185 definition 1183
definition 1182 Flatten grouping jobs 90
enabling definition 1182
input channel 206 flipping H
input channel previewed images 115
(automatically) 206 flow control Actions 310, halftone
EPS 343 definition 1183
definition 1182 flows Halftone Screens 940
exceptions creating 343 definition 1183
creating 909 definition 1182 editor 941
deleting 910 icons 155 Hard Copy Proof 51, 317
editing 909 identifier 325 settings 318
Export 825 imposition proof 346 hardware pane 611
settings 825 main 346 hardware status 616
exporting multiple 345 Hardware System
job results 350 page proof 347 icon 611
pages/documents 216 selection icons 183 scaleability 611
exposure test 615 flushing head
extra information job results 622 definition 1183
showing/hiding 235 Fonts 935 head to head
definition 1182 definition 1183
F filtering 936 Help menu 77
outlining 1182 keyboard
fallback overview 935 shortcuts 1122
calibration 902 foot to foot hiding
File menu 67 definition 1182 thumbnails 234
keyboard frequency 121 Hi-Fi color
shortcuts 1118 FTP definition 1183
file types 672 definition 1182 hold state
filter full-screen mode 98 showing/hiding 235
custom job filter 149 holding tasks 621
Job Log 162 G Hot Folder 672
pane (message definition 1183
board) 81 Galileo 784 job input 355
quick 147 ganging settings 672
System Log 165 definition 1182 Hot Ticket List
filtering GDI Proofer 833 context menus 1164
fonts 936 Generic Press 846, 857, layout 261
Job List using a job 861 Hot Tickets
filter 148 print settings 846 consistency 270
Job List using output getting info creating PPDs 269
device 150 on an item 244 definition 1183
the Message board 84 on PDF data 243 deleting 269
first results grayscale description 43

INDEX 1197
icons 262 Impose 703 editing 361

list 261 settings 704 inverting
selecting 268 imposition previewed images 115
selecting multiple 268 adjustment 224
sorting 262 definition 1183 J
using 43 proof 51
window 63, 260 proof flow 346 JDF
with Run Lists 755 system resource 642 definition 1184
housekeeping 628 including job input 355
settings 629 results 243 JDF Import 677
HP Indigo Info Window settings 677
print settings 864 PDF files 246 JDF Server 650
TIFF/raster files 248 settings 650
I ink coverage JMF Link 837
measuring 118, 119 job filter 148, 157
ICC profiles 1042 Ink Sets 950 job input 358
definition 1183 creating 951 Hot Folder/JDF 355
icon overview 27 definition 1184 Named Pipe 356
icons editing 951 Public Page Store 355
color coding 156 editor 950 TCP/IP 359
combinations 154 overview 950 Job Layout
Flow 155 Ink Tables 952 context menus 1171
flow selection 183 overview 952 pane 184, 333
Hot Ticket list 262 inkdrive file Job List 143
Job 153 definition 1184 context menus 1160
job notifications 150 InkDrive files filtering 146
notification 150 remaking 239 grouping jobs 145
Page Store/Run Inks layout 143
List 178 palette (preview) 100 rearranging 144
Status 151 Trap settings 725 show/hide
Image settings input columns 145
->Agfa image/ file-based 354 sorting 144
platesetters 786 stream-based 354 Job List filter
->Display 822 tab 308 context menus 1161
->M-Press 861 Task Processors 671 Job Log
->TIFF Platesetter 811, input channel 288 dialog box 161
833 definition 1184 filter 162
->TIFF/PS disabling 205 opening from Jobs
Imagesetter 806 enabling 206 window 206
->TIFF/PS/PDF enabling job tickets
Proofer 814 automatically 206 definition 1184
imagesetters inputting description 42
Agfa 784 documents 354 using 42
definition 1183 inserting jobs
settings 786 blank pages in Run approving 131
TIFF/PS 806 List 221, 222 archiving 207, 629
importing duplicate pages in Run archiving manually 207
archived job 208 List 220 automated deleting 204
color books 908 pages in Run List 219 continuing 197
marks 999 interactive document content creating 44
Resources 667 deleting 202, 630

INDEX 1198
deleting menu 1118 importing 999

permanently 203 Edit menu 1119, 1120 overview 999
dumping 209 File menu 1118 Measured values
duplicating 201 Help menu 1122 calibrating 1079
flushing results 622 Preview menu 1121 measuring 121
grouping 90 View menu 1120 ink at cursor point 119
housekeeping 628 Window menu 1122 ink coverage 118, 119
icons 153 screen angles 120
importing archives 208 L mechanical
log 632 definition 1185
maintenance 629 last results Media
merging 211 viewing 110 editor (imagesetters/
monitoring 195 Lay platesetters) 1008
multi-part 55 definition 1184 imagesetters/
multi-part in Plan lay 1184 platesetters 1006
tab 327 lay edge overview 1006
multi-part in Results definition 1184 menus 66
tab 253 layout job Control 70
multi-part in Run definition 1184 Edit 68
List 232 Light table File 67
multi-product 55 slider (preview) 103 Help 77
name 280 Linearization preview 107
notification icons 150 auto-select maps 958 Processor 71
purging 204 creating curves 956 View 72
re-exporting 238 curves 956 View (raster
re-imaging 238 definition 1074, 1184 preview) 73, 75
rejecting 131 editor 1077 Window 76
re-printing 239 Linearization Curves merging
resuming 197 settings 956 jobs 211
rush 200 log Message board 81
selecting 194 job 632 filter dialog box 85
selecting multiple 195 system 631 filtering 84
status icons in Tab logging 161, 630 opening 81
area 80 on 60 using 84
versioning in Results settings 630 Message indicator 79
tab 249 LPR Milestone 285, 324
versioning in Run definition 1184 definition 1185
List 228 settings 324
viewing 195 M milling
viewing results 215, main flow 346 definition 1185
240 creating 343 MIME
Jobs window 63, 140 maintenance definition 1185
jog jobs 629 modified date column 143,
definition 1184 managing 261
border mark sets 897 moiré
K Task Processors 613 definition 1185
template folder 634 monitoring
Keep Results 322 jobs 195
definition 1184 ticket templates 635
mapping colors 737 Task Processors 616,
keyboard shortcuts 1115 620
Apogee Prepress Marks 999

INDEX 1199
move/replacing Job Log (from Jobs page imposition

pages in Run List 220 window) 206 adjusting in Run
moving pages for preview 108 List 223
pages in Run List 219 Preferences 94 page number
M-Press Preferences (Raster showing/hiding 235
image settings 861 Preview) 136 page proof flow 347
multi-part System Log 207 Page Sizes 640, 641, 642,
jobs in Plan tab 327 the Message board 81 645
jobs in Results tab 253 tickets 351 Page Store 49, 176, 177,
jobs in Run List 232 operator 281 331
multi-part job 55 OPI context menus 1165
definition 1185 definition 1185 copying documents 217
multiple flows Options tab 284 exporting
creating 345 viewing 171 documents 216
multi-product jobs 55 order number 280 icons 178
Output versioning jobs 226
N tab 309 pages 219
output device adding to Run List 218
Named Pipe 680 definition 1185 automatic
creating printer 356 job filtering 150 placement 759, 772
job input 356, 358 list 142 displaying 214
settings 680 Output settings duplicating in Run
navigation bar 79 ->Agfa image/ List 220, 221
Navigator palette platesetters 791 inserting duplicates in
(preview) 99 ->Display 823 Run List 220
negative images ->TIFF Platesetter 812, inserting in Run List 219
previewing 115 833 moving in Run List 219
nesting ->TIFF/PS moving/replacing in Run
definition 1185 Imagesetter 806 List 220
Next results ->TIFF/PS/PDF numbers 235
viewing 110 Proofer 814 outlines 235
Normalize 710 Output Sizes 896, 1018 placement rules 761
definition 1185 creating 1020 previewing 108
settings 710, 718 editing 1020 previewing multiple
notifications 287, 289 editor 1018 views 109
icons 150 overview 1018 proofs 51
job icons 150 Output Task Processors 781 replacing in Run
Notify 323 hardware status 616 List 219
settings 323 software status 617 thumbnail numbers 192
overfold thumbnails 185
O definition 1185 Pages tab 330
offline overprinting viewing 176
Task Processors 614 definition 1185 Palladio 784
online overriding panes
Task Processors 614 rejected items 132 resizing 94
opaque ink panning
definition 1185 P previewed images 114
Open Connect 682 parameter sets 46
packaging job creating 664
settings 682 definition 1186
opening definition 1186
page adjustment icons 180

INDEX 1200
deleting 664 plane Press

duplicating 664 definition 1186 paper white 93
editing 664 PlateMaker Client 185 press sheet
setting default 664 PlateMaker Link 838 raster data preview 116
parts 172 platesetters Preview
PDF Agfa 784 color-managed 92, 123
preview 96 definition 1186 full-screen mode 98
proof 51 settings 786 window 99
PDF files TIFF 811 Preview menu
definition 1186 point keyboard
getting info 243 definition 1186 shortcuts 1121
PDF job PostScript previewing
definition 1186 color management 714 closing windows 109
PDF Render 720 definition 1186 flipping images 115
Render settings 739 headers 1030 full-size images 116
Screen settings 743 PostScript Headers Inks palette 100
Separation settings 731 overview 1030 inverting images 115
Trap settings 721 PPD Light table slider 103
PDF viewer definition 1187 main windows 98
specifying 91 options 622 measuring ink at cursor
PDF/PostScript PPD files point 119
composite creating 615 measuring ink
document 179 for Hot Tickets 269 coverage 118, 119
composite page 179 Preferences menus 107
pre-separated dialog box 90 multiple page
document 179 opening 94 views 109
pre-separated page 179 opening (Raster Navigator palette 99
PDFLink 839 Preview) 136 options 97
perfect preferences pages/flats 108
definition 1186 imposition editor 93 panning 114
perfect bound validation 93 pdf 96
definition 1186 Preflight 692, 695, 748, Preview window 99
perfecting 750 raster data 97
definition 1186 Action Lists 872, 873, raster data as imaged
perfecting press 1031 output 117
definition 1186 definition 1187 raster data as press
Phoenix 784 Profile 876, 1034 sheet 116
pica settings 692, 695, 748 rotating 114
definition 1186 Preflight Action Lists Rule-ups palette 101
PJTF overview 873, 1031 scale to fit 114
definition 1186 Preflight Profiles separations 116
placeholders definition 1187 showing/hiding
adding blank pages 222 overview 876, 953, grid 117
definition 1186 1015, 1034 showing/hiding
selecting 219 Prepare settings ruler 117
Plan 174 TIFF Render 767 soft 96
Plan tab 308 pre-separated tools palette 105
multi-part jobs 327 definition 1187 Versions palette 103
using 308 document 179 zooming 112
viewing 174 page 179 Previous results

INDEX 1201
viewing 110 proofs 51 Raster Impose 703

Print buyer color-managed settings 704
definition 1187 display 52 Raster Link 841
Print Center definition 1188 Raster Normalize 754
definition 1187 Digital Film 51, 821 raster preview 97
Print service provider dot-for-dot 702 preferences 136
definition 1187 hard 51 raster viewer
Print settings imposition 51 default settings 92
->Generic Press 846 page 51 re-exporting jobs 238
->HP Indigo 864 PDF 51 registration marks
Print Task Processors 845 production 51 definition 1188
Printing Stock 1026 soft 51 re-imaging jobs 238
PrintSphere 57 Public Page Store 50, 177, rejected results
priority jobs 200 216, 354, 840 approving 132
Private Page Store 144 creating 352 clearing 242
definition 1187 definition 1188 rejecting
Problem Report dialog deleting 205 jobs 131
box 166 deleting results 241
Process documents 216 remaking InkDrive files 239
tab 308 job input 355 remarks 87
process color punch calibration Remote Proofer Controller
definition 1187 creating 1020 definition 1188
Processing Task definition 1188 removing
Processors 691 deleting 1021 systems 61
Processor menu 71 editing 1020 renaming
product editor 1019 color books 907
definition 1187 purging Render
Product tab jobs 204 definition 1188
viewing 172 Screen settings 743
Production Plan Q render resolution
components page 308 definition 1188
definition 1188 QMS Render settings
description 45 definition 1188 PDF Render 739
pane 174, 325 quick filtering 147 re-printing jobs 239
preparing 335 quickproof 256 re-rendering
production proof 51 results 201, 236
production sets 172 R resizing
Products tab 291 raster panes 94
Profiles 1042 composite resolution
editor (Press) 1042 document 179 definition 1188
editor (Proofers) 1043 composite page 179 Resources 49, 869
proofers 795 pre-separated -> Media (imagesetters/
definition 1188 document 180 platesetters) 1006
image settings 797 pre-separated page 180 ->Boot Resources 890
output settings 801 raster data ->Borders 891
TIFF/PS/PDF 813 indicator 191 ->Calibration
proofing data indicators previewing as imaged Curves 901
thumbnails 190 output 117 ->Color Books 904
proofing flows previewing as press ->Color Spaces 911
creating 345 sheet 116 ->Content Profiles 912

INDEX 1202
->Device Link rejecting 241 page adjustment

Profiles 913 re-rendering 201, 236 icons 180
->Device Screen 919 scaling view 236 settings 756
->Fonts 935 viewing 215, 240 versioning jobs 228
->Halftone Screens 940 Results tab 333 with Hot Tickets 755
->Ink Sets 950 multi-part jobs 253 Run List Layers (RLLs) 228
->Ink Tables 952 versioning jobs 249 rush jobs 200
->Linearization viewing 183 definition 1189
Curves 956 resuming
->Marks 999 jobs 197 S
->Output Sizes 1018 tasks 621
->Page Sizes 640, 641, revisions 758, 773 saddle stitch
642, 645 RGB definition 1189
->PostScript definition 1189 saving
headers 1030 rotating tickets 351
->Preflight Action previewed images 114 scaleability
Lists 872, 873, 1031 ruler hardware system 611
->Preflight Profiles 876, showing/hiding in scaling
1034 preview 117 preview size to screen
->Printing Stock 1026 rules size 114
->Profiles 1042 page placement 761 results view 236
->Simulation Run List 760 scheduled archiving 209
Curves 1050 Rule-up screen angles 120
->Webgrowth definition 1189 changing 943
Profiles 913, 915, Rule-ups definition 1189
918, 920, 947, 953, palette (preview) 101 screen font
1015, 1040, 1041, ruling maps 940 definition 1189
1045, 1052, 1055, 1056 adding screens 943 screen frequency
creating 667 creating 942 definition 1189
definition 1188 Run List 177, 332, 755 screen ruling
deleting 667 adding pages 218 definition 1189
editing 667 adjusting page Screen settings 743
importing 667 imposition 223 PDF Render 743
pane 625 context menus 1169 Render 743
restarting creating rules 760 TIFF Render 768
Task Processors 614 definition 1189 screening
result Actions 309, 344 deleting rules 760 definition 1189
results duplicating pages 220, screens
browsing 110 221 adding to ruling
clearing rejected 242 editing rules 761 maps 943
continuing 198, 199 icons 178 SD 857
continuing inserting blank seamless printing
multiple 200 pages 221, 222 definition 1189
definition 1189 inserting duplicate settings 744
discarding 242 pages 220 selecting
exporting 350 inserting pages 219 a job 194
first/last 110 move/replacing front and back sides 235
flushing 622 pages 220 Hot Tickets 268
including 243 moving pages 219 multiple Hot
next/previous 110 multi-part jobs 232 Tickets 268
multiple jobs/

INDEX 1203
items 195 ->Separation 737 slug lines 791, 860, 864

placeholders 219 ->Soft Proof 317 soft preview 96
tickets 338 ->TCP/IP 689 Soft Proof 51, 316
Separation ->Trap 728 definition 1190
definition 1189 ->Versioning 770 settings 317
indicators 189 ->Wait for Results 319 software status 617
Separation settings 737 Apogee Prepress sorting
->PDF Render 731 configuration 625 Hot Tickets list 262
->TIFF Render 768 pane 175, 326 Job List 144
separations platesetter 786 spot colors
context menus 1174 profiles (press) 1042 adding/editing 738
pane 193, 334 profiles (proofer) 1043 definition 1190
previewing 116 proofers (image) 797 deleting 739
showing/hiding 236 proofers (output) 801 deleting angles 945
Server simulation 1050 specifying angles 944
definition 1190 Task Processor 46 square brackets 1102
Settings sheet starting
->After Hours 322 turning 110 Client 60
->Border Marks 892 sheetwise Task Processors 613
->Calibration 901 definition 1190 Status icons 151
->Collect for Sherpa 795 Step & Repeat 380
Output 320 shingling step and repeat 380
->Conditional creep 1180 stimuli
Decision 698 definition 1190 selecting 1078
->Digital Film Proof 701 horizontal 1049 stopping
->Digital vertical 1049 Task Processors 614
Step&Repeat 704 shortcuts Storage Sets 657
->Discard 311 keyboard 1115 creating 661
->Disk Storage 658 overview 27 deleting 661
->Export 825 showing/hiding editing 661
->Hard Copy Proof 318 hold state 235 editor 661
->Hot Folder 672 page data type 235 StoreFront
->Image 786 page number 235 system resource 642
->JDF Import 677 page numbers 235 submitting
->JDF Server 650 page outlines 235 tickets 350
->linearization separations 236 supported file types 672
curves 956 thumbnails 234 System
->Milestone 324 Sign and Display icon 611
->Named Pipe 680 printer 857 log 164, 631
->Normalize 710 signature variables 1096
->Notify 323 definition 1179 system
->Open Connect 682 signatures adding/removing 61
->Output 791 thumbnails 192 System Log
->Preflight 692, 695, viewing 235 filter 165
748 Simulation opening 207
->punch definition 1075, 1190 System Overview 610
calibration 1019 Simulation Curves 1050 context menus 1176
->Raster Impose 704 creating 1050 window 64
->Run List 756 editing 1051
->Screen 743 settings 1050

INDEX 1204
T definition 1190 managing 635

description 46 tickets
Tab area 80 input 671 creating 337
Table options managing 613 editing 37
calibration 1080 monitoring 616, 620 icons 351
tagging 693 output 781 opening 351
Task Processors pane 613 saving 351
->Accuset 784 parameter sets 46 selecting/editing 338
->Avantra 784 PPD files 615 submitting 350
->Conditional 698 Print 845 TIFF
->Digital Film Proof 701 processing 691 definition 1190
->Display 821 put offline 614 TIFF Platesetter 811
->Export 825 put online 614 Image settings 811,
->Galileo 784 restarting 614 833
->GDI Proofer 833 Settings 46 Output settings 812,
->Generic Press 846, starting 613 833
857, 861 stopping 614 TIFF Render 766
->Hot Folder 672 tasks Prepare settings 767
->Impose 703 aborting 621 Screen settings 768
->JDF Import 677 holding 621 Separation settings 768
->JMF Link 837 resuming 621 TIFF/PS Imagesetter 806
->Named Pipe 680 TCP/IP 688, 689 Image settings 806
->Normalize 710 definition 1190 Output settings 806
->Open Connect 682 job input 358, 359 TIFF/PS/PDF Proofer 813
->Palladio 784 printer creating 359 Image settings 814
->PDF Render 720 settings 689 Output settings 814
->PDFLink 839 template folders toolbars
->Phoenix 784 managing 634 Activity 620
->PlateMaker Link 838 templates standard 78
->Preflight 692, 695, ticket 633 tools
748, 750 thumbnails preview 105
->Public Page Store 840 action indicators 187 Trap
->Raster Impose 703 corner fold definition 1190
->Raster Normalize 754 indicators 191 inks 725
->RasterLink 841 extra information 187 settings 728
->Run List 755 flat labels 192 Trap settings
->Sherpa 795 page numbers 192 ->PDF Render 721
->TCP/IP 688, 689 page/flat 185 Turn Sheet tool 110
->TIFF Platesetter 811 proofing data Type area
->TIFF Render 766 indicators 190 definition 1190
->TIFF/PS separation
Imagesetter 806 indicators 189 U
->TIFF/PS/PDF showing/hiding 234
Proofer 813 signatures 192 units of measurement
->Versioning 770 Ticket Editor 278 specifying 90
->Xcalibur 784 window 65 upload
adding to Production ticket template folders supported file types 672
Plan 340 managing 634 using
Configurations 47 ticket templates 633 Actions 349
configuring 663 consistency 270 auto-select maps 1069
connecting 341 hot tickets 43

INDEX 1205
job tickets 42 next/previous keyboard

the Message board 84 results 110 shortcuts 1122
Options tab 171 Windows Explorer
V Pages tab 176 ticket icons 351
Plan tab 174 work and tumble
variables 1096 Product tab 172 definition 1191
$ 1101 remarks 87 work and turn
braces 1101 Results tab 183 definition 1191
dollar sign 1101 signatures 235 workstyle
square brackets 1102 VLF definition 1191
syntax 1101 definition 1191 perfecting 1186
Variables overview 27 VPN connections 35 sheetwise 1190
versioning 53, 770 work and tumble 1191
comparing plates 134 W work and turn 1191
Create Versions
assistant 226 Wait for Results 318 X
definition 1191 settings 319
jobs in Results tab 249 Wanted values Xcalibur 784
jobs in Run List 228 calibrating 1079
settings 770 watermarks editor 660 Z
Versions web browser
palette (preview) 103 definition 1191 zooming
View menu 72 web growth previewed images 112
keyboard definition 1191 using the Navigator 112
shortcuts 1120 Web Proof 314 zooming in on a point
raster preview 73, 75 WebApproval 649 using the zoom tool 112
viewers 92 Webgrowth Profiles 913, zooming in on an area
PDF 91 915, 918, 920, 947, 953, using the zoom 113
viewing 1015, 1040, 1041, 1045, zooming out on a point
Administration tab 170 1052, 1055, 1056 using the zoom tool 113
columns 235 overview 1057 zooming out on an area
first/last results 110 wide-format job using the zoom tool 113
job results 215, 240 definition 1191
jobs 195 Window menu 76

1206 INDEX

1207

Published by Agfa Offset BV, Belgium.
doc. version 12.2.2

Prepress OLH

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Prepress OLH

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Prepress OLH

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Apogee

Date of Issue: February 2022

Apogee Reference Guide

End User License Agreement

Apogee Reference Guide

3. LICENSE AND COPIES

Apogee Reference Guide

(f) use the Software to provide software related services; or

6. INSTALLATION - UPDATES - UPGRADES - MAINTENANCE AND SUPPORT

7. LIMITED WARRANTY AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY

Apogee Reference Guide

HEREUNDER, WHETHER ALLEGED AS A BREACH OF CONTRACT OR TORTIOUS CONDUCT,

10. TERM AND TERMINATION

Apogee Reference Guide

Apogee Reference Guide

Apogee Reference Guide

Chapter 1 Welcome to Apogee ............................................................................................... 33

 What is Apogee? ............................................................................................................. 34

Chapter 2 Basic Concepts .............................................................................................................. 41

 What Are Job Tickets? ................................................................................................... 42

Chapter 3 Getting Started .............................................................................................................. 59

 Starting the Client ......................................................................................................... 60

 Viewing Messages ......................................................................................................... 81

Chapter 4 Previewing Job Results ....................................................................................... 95

 Apogee Soft Previews .................................................................................................. 96

Chapter 5 Managing Jobs ............................................................................................................... 139

 The Jobs Window ........................................................................................................... 140

Apogee Reference Guide

 Job and System Logging ............................................................................................. 161

Apogee Reference Guide

 Including Results .................................................................................................... 243

Chapter 6 Managing Hot Tickets ........................................................................................... 259

 The Hot Ticket Manager .............................................................................................. 260

Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Tickets ........................................................................ 277

 The Ticket Editor ............................................................................................................ 278

Apogee Reference Guide

 Creating or Editing a Production Plan ............................................................ 339

Chapter 8 Working with Apogee Impose ................................................................... 365

 About Apogee Impose ................................................................................................. 366

Apogee Reference Guide

 Imposing Digital Products .......................................................................................... 457

Chapter 9 Layout Editor .................................................................................................................... 477

 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 478

Apogee Reference Guide

Chapter 10 Product Editor ................................................................................................................. 559

 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 560

Chapter 11 Monitoring and Configuring Your System ................................... 609

 System Overview Window ........................................................................................ 610

Chapter 12 Input Task Processors .......................................................................................... 671

 Hot Folder ......................................................................................................................... 672

Apogee Reference Guide

 JDF Import ........................................................................................................................ 677

Chapter 13 Processing Task Processors .......................................................................... 691

 Apogee Preflight ............................................................................................................ 692

Chapter 14 Output Task Processors ...................................................................................... 781

 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 782

Apogee Reference Guide

Chapter 15 Print Task Processors ............................................................................................ 845

 Generic Press .................................................................................................................. 846